HikCentral Professional Web Client

User Manual
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Legal Information
©2022 Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

About this Manual

The Manual includes instructions for using and managing the Product. Pictures, charts, images and
all other information hereinafter are for description and explanation only. The information
contained in the Manual is subject to change, without notice, due to firmware updates or other
reasons. Please find the latest version of this Manual at the Hikvision website ( https://
www.hikvision.com/ ).
Please use this Manual with the guidance and assistance of professionals trained in supporting the
Product.
Trademarks
and other Hikvision's trademarks and logos are the properties of
Hikvision in various jurisdictions.
Other trademarks and logos mentioned are the properties of their respective owners.
Disclaimer
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THIS MANUAL AND THE PRODUCT
DESCRIBED, WITH ITS HARDWARE, SOFTWARE AND FIRMWARE, ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND "WITH
ALL FAULTS AND ERRORS". HIKVISION MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE USE OF THE PRODUCT BY YOU IS AT YOUR OWN RISK. IN NO EVENT WILL HIKVISION
BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES,
INCLUDING, AMONG OTHERS, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF DATA, CORRUPTION OF SYSTEMS, OR LOSS OF DOCUMENTATION,
WHETHER BASED ON BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY,
OR OTHERWISE, IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, EVEN IF HIKVISION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR LOSS.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE NATURE OF THE INTERNET PROVIDES FOR INHERENT SECURITY
RISKS, AND HIKVISION SHALL NOT TAKE ANY RESPONSIBILITIES FOR ABNORMAL OPERATION,
PRIVACY LEAKAGE OR OTHER DAMAGES RESULTING FROM CYBER-ATTACK, HACKER ATTACK, VIRUS
INFECTION, OR OTHER INTERNET SECURITY RISKS; HOWEVER, HIKVISION WILL PROVIDE TIMELY
TECHNICAL SUPPORT IF REQUIRED.
YOU AGREE TO USE THIS PRODUCT IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE LAWS, AND YOU ARE
SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING THAT YOUR USE CONFORMS TO THE APPLICABLE LAW.
ESPECIALLY, YOU ARE RESPONSIBLE, FOR USING THIS PRODUCT IN A MANNER THAT DOES NOT
INFRINGE ON THE RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, RIGHTS OF
PUBLICITY, INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS, OR DATA PROTECTION AND OTHER PRIVACY RIGHTS.
YOU SHALL NOT USE THIS PRODUCT FOR ANY PROHIBITED END-USES, INCLUDING THE

i
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

DEVELOPMENT OR PRODUCTION OF WEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION, THE DEVELOPMENT OR

PRODUCTION OF CHEMICAL OR BIOLOGICAL WEAPONS, ANY ACTIVITIES IN THE CONTEXT RELATED
TO ANY NUCLEAR EXPLOSIVE OR UNSAFE NUCLEAR FUEL-CYCLE, OR IN SUPPORT OF HUMAN
RIGHTS ABUSES.
IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICTS BETWEEN THIS MANUAL AND THE APPLICABLE LAW, THE LATTER
PREVAILS.

ii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will or could
Danger result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

Caution result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or
unexpected results.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
Note
important points of the main text.

iii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Contents
Chapter 1 About Web Client ....................................................................................................... 1
1.1 About This Document ............................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Recommended Running Environment ................................................................................... 2
Chapter 2 Login .......................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 First Time Login ...................................................................................................................... 3
2.1.1 Login for First Time for Admin User .............................................................................. 3
2.1.2 First Time Login for Normal User .................................................................................. 4
2.2 Login via Web Client .............................................................................................................. 5
2.3 Change Password for Reset User ........................................................................................... 6
2.4 Forgot Password ..................................................................................................................... 7
Chapter 3 Download Mobile Client ........................................................................................... 10
Chapter 4 Web Control ............................................................................................................. 11
Chapter 5 Home Page Overview ............................................................................................... 12
5.1 Customize and Switch Home Page Mode ............................................................................. 17
5.2 Customize Navigation Bar .................................................................................................... 18
Chapter 6 Getting Started ......................................................................................................... 20
Chapter 7 License Management ................................................................................................ 21
7.1 Activate License - Online ...................................................................................................... 21
7.2 Activate License - Offline ...................................................................................................... 23
7.3 Update License - Online ....................................................................................................... 26
7.4 Update License - Offline ....................................................................................................... 27
7.5 Deactivate License - Online .................................................................................................. 29
7.6 Deactivate License - Offline .................................................................................................. 30
7.7 View License Details ............................................................................................................. 32
7.8 Set SSP Expiration Prompt ................................................................................................... 35

iv
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 8 Resource Management ............................................................................................. 36

8.1 Create Password for Inactive Device(s) ................................................................................ 36
8.2 Edit Online Device's Network Information ........................................................................... 37
8.3 Manage Encoding Device ..................................................................................................... 38
8.3.1 Add Detected Online Encoding Devices ...................................................................... 38
8.3.2 Add Encoding Device by IP Address/Domain .............................................................. 47
8.3.3 Add Encoding Devices by IP Segment ......................................................................... 51
8.3.4 Add Encoding Devices by Port Segment ..................................................................... 54
8.3.5 Add Encoding Device by Hik-Connect DDNS ............................................................... 58
8.3.6 Add Encoding Device by Device ID .............................................................................. 62
8.3.7 Add Encoding Devices by Device ID Segment ............................................................. 65
8.3.8 Add Encoding Devices in a Batch ................................................................................ 68
8.3.9 Add Encoding Device from the Site on Hik-ProConnect .............................................. 71
8.3.10 Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .................................................................. 73
8.3.11 Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR ....................................................................................... 74
8.3.12 Manage Device Applications ..................................................................................... 75
8.4 Manage Access Control Device ............................................................................................ 76
8.4.1 Add Detected Online Access Control Devices ............................................................. 76
8.4.2 Add an Access Control Device by IP Address/Domain ................................................ 82
8.4.3 Add Access Control Devices by IP Segment ................................................................ 84
8.4.4 Add an Access Control Device by Device ID ................................................................ 86
8.4.5 Add Access Control Devices by Device ID Segment .................................................... 88
8.4.6 Add Access Control Devices in a Batch ....................................................................... 91
8.4.7 Configure Device Parameters ...................................................................................... 93
8.4.8 Privacy Settings ......................................................................................................... 109
8.5 Manage Elevator Control Device ........................................................................................ 111
8.5.1 Add Detected Online Elevator Control Devices ......................................................... 111
8.5.2 Add an Elevator Control Device by IP Address .......................................................... 115

v
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.5.3 Add Elevator Control Devices by IP Segment ............................................................ 117

8.5.4 Add Elevator Control Devices in a Batch ................................................................... 119
8.6 Manage Video Intercom Device ......................................................................................... 120
8.6.1 Add Detected Online Video Intercom Devices .......................................................... 121
8.6.2 Add a Video Intercom Device by IP Address ............................................................. 126
8.6.3 Add Video Intercom Devices in a Batch .................................................................... 129
8.7 Manage Visitor Terminals .................................................................................................. 130
8.7.1 Add Detected Online Visitor Terminals ..................................................................... 130
8.7.2 Add Visitor Terminal by IP Address ........................................................................... 135
8.7.3 Add Visitor Terminals by IP Segment ........................................................................ 137
8.7.4 Add Visitor Terminals in a Batch ............................................................................... 139
8.8 Manage Mobile Devices ..................................................................................................... 141
8.8.1 Add Detected Online Mobile Devices ....................................................................... 141
8.8.2 Add a Mobile Device by Device ID ............................................................................ 147
8.8.3 Add Mobile Devices by Device ID Segment .............................................................. 149
8.8.4 Add Mobile Devices in a Batch .................................................................................. 151
8.9 Add a Query Terminal ........................................................................................................ 153
8.10 Add an Entrance/Exit Control Device ............................................................................... 154
8.11 Manage Guidance Terminals ............................................................................................ 156
8.11.1 Add Detected Online Guidance Terminals .............................................................. 156
8.11.2 Add a Guidance Terminal by IP/Domain ................................................................. 162
8.11.3 Batch Add Guidance Terminals by IP Segment ........................................................ 165
8.11.4 Batch Add Guidance Terminals by Port Segment .................................................... 167
8.11.5 Batch Add Guidance Terminals by Template ........................................................... 169
8.12 Add Display Screen .......................................................................................................... 170
8.13 Add Under Vehicle Surveillance System ........................................................................... 171
8.14 Manage Security Control Device ...................................................................................... 172
8.14.1 Add Detected Online Security Control Devices ....................................................... 173

vi
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.14.2 Add Security Control Device by IP Address ............................................................. 177

8.14.3 Add Security Control Device by Hik-Connect DDNS ................................................ 180
8.14.4 Add Security Control Devices by IP Segment .......................................................... 182
8.14.5 Add Security Control Devices by Port Segment ...................................................... 184
8.14.6 Add Security Control Device by Device ID ............................................................... 185
8.14.7 Add Security Control Device by Device ID Segment ................................................ 187
8.14.8 Batch Add Security Control Devices ........................................................................ 189
8.14.9 Add Security Control Device from the Site on Hik-ProConnect ............................... 191
8.15 Manage Fire Protection Device ........................................................................................ 192
8.15.1 Add Fire Protection Device by IP Address ............................................................... 193
8.15.2 Add Fire Protection Device by IP Segment .............................................................. 194
8.15.3 Add Fire Protection Device by Device ID ................................................................. 195
8.15.4 Add Fire Protection Devices by ID Segment ............................................................ 197
8.15.5 Add Fire Protection Devices in a Batch ................................................................... 198
8.16 Manage Dock Station ....................................................................................................... 199
8.16.1 Add Dock Station by IP Address .............................................................................. 200
8.16.2 Add Dock Stations by IP Segment ........................................................................... 201
8.16.3 Add Dock Stations by Port Segment ....................................................................... 202
8.16.4 Batch Add Dock Stations ......................................................................................... 204
8.16.5 Add Dock Station Group .......................................................................................... 205
8.17 Manage Digital Signage Terminals ................................................................................... 208
8.17.1 Add Digital Signage Terminal ................................................................................... 208
8.17.2 Enable General Authentication Code ...................................................................... 217
8.17.3 Configure Device Display Settings ........................................................................... 219
8.17.4 Configure Device Privacy Settings ........................................................................... 221
8.17.5 Configure Device Parameters Remotely .................................................................. 222
8.17.6 Upgrade Old Device Firmware ................................................................................ 226
8.18 Manage Interactive Flat Panel ......................................................................................... 227

vii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.18.1 Add Online Interactive Flat Panel ............................................................................ 227

8.18.2 Add Interactive Flat Panel by Device Serial No. ...................................................... 228
8.18.3 Enable General Authentication Code ...................................................................... 230
8.19 Manage Smart Wall .......................................................................................................... 232
8.19.1 Add Decoding Device .............................................................................................. 232
8.19.2 Configure Cascade .................................................................................................. 240
8.19.3 Add Smart Wall ....................................................................................................... 241
8.19.4 Link Decoding Output with Window ....................................................................... 243
8.19.5 Set Default Stream Type for Cameras on Smart Wall .............................................. 244
8.20 Manage IP Speakers ......................................................................................................... 245
8.20.1 Add Detected Online IP Speakers ............................................................................ 245
8.20.2 Add IP Speaker by IP Address .................................................................................. 249
8.20.3 Add IP Speakers in a Batch ...................................................................................... 251
8.21 Manage Security Inspection Devices ............................................................................... 253
8.21.1 Add a Detected Online Security Inspection Device ................................................. 253
8.21.2 Add Security Inspection Device by Device ID .......................................................... 256
8.21.3 Add Security Inspection Device by IP/Domain ........................................................ 258
8.22 Network Transmission Device Management ................................................................... 261
8.22.1 Add Detected Online Network Transmission Devices ............................................. 261
8.22.2 Add Network Transmission Device by IP Address ................................................... 265
8.22.3 Import Network Transmission Devices in a Batch ................................................... 267
8.23 Upgrade Device Firmware ................................................................................................ 268
8.23.1 Upgrade Device Firmware via Current Web Client ................................................. 269
8.23.2 Upgrade Device Firmware via Hik-Connect ............................................................. 270
8.23.3 Upgrade Device Firmware via FTP .......................................................................... 271
8.24 Restore/Reset Device Password ....................................................................................... 272
8.24.1 Reset Device Password ........................................................................................... 272
8.24.2 Restore Device's Default Password ......................................................................... 274

viii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.25 Manage Recording Server ................................................................................................ 275

8.25.1 Add pStor ................................................................................................................ 275
8.25.2 Add Hybrid Storage Area Network .......................................................................... 277
8.25.3 Add Network Video Recorder ................................................................................. 279
8.25.4 Manage Cloud Storage Server ................................................................................. 280
8.25.5 Add pStor Cluster Service ........................................................................................ 283
8.25.6 Set N+1 Hot Spare for Hybrid SAN .......................................................................... 285
8.26 Manage Streaming Server ................................................................................................ 287
8.26.1 Input Certificate Information to Streaming Server ................................................. 287
8.26.2 Add Streaming Server ............................................................................................. 288
8.27 Add DeepinMind Server ................................................................................................... 289
8.28 Manage Remote Site ........................................................................................................ 290
8.28.1 Add Remote Site by IP Address or Domain Name ................................................... 291
8.28.2 Add Remote Site Registered to Central System ...................................................... 295
8.28.3 Add Remote Sites in a Batch ................................................................................... 297
8.28.4 Back Up Remote Site's Database to Central System ............................................... 299
8.28.5 Edit Remote Site ...................................................................................................... 300
8.28.6 View Remote Site's Changes ................................................................................... 301
Chapter 9 Area Management .................................................................................................. 304
9.1 Add Area ............................................................................................................................ 304
9.1.1 Add Area for Current Site .......................................................................................... 304
9.1.2 Add Area for Remote Site ......................................................................................... 306
9.1.3 Customize Additional Information ............................................................................ 308
9.2 Add Element to Area .......................................................................................................... 308
9.2.1 Add Camera to Area for Current Site ........................................................................ 308
9.2.2 Add Camera to Area for Remote Site ........................................................................ 310
9.2.3 Add Door to Area for Current Site ............................................................................. 312
9.2.4 Add Elevator to Area for Current Site ....................................................................... 313

ix
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

9.2.5 Add Vehicle to Area for Current Site ......................................................................... 314

9.2.6 Add Security Radar to Area for Current Site ............................................................. 316
9.2.7 Add Alarm Input to Area ........................................................................................... 317
9.2.8 Add Alarm Output to Area ........................................................................................ 318
9.2.9 Add UVSS to Area for Current Site ............................................................................ 319
9.2.10 Add Digital Signage Screen to Area for Current Site ............................................... 320
9.2.11 Add Speaker Unit to Area for Current Site .............................................................. 321
9.2.12 Add Fire Detector to Area for Current Site .............................................................. 323
9.3 Edit Element in Area .......................................................................................................... 324
9.3.1 Edit Camera for Current Site ..................................................................................... 324
9.3.2 Edit Door for Current Site .......................................................................................... 325
9.3.3 Edit Elevator for Current Site .................................................................................... 328
9.3.4 Edit Vehicle for Current Site ...................................................................................... 330
9.3.5 Edit Security Radar for Current Site .......................................................................... 331
9.3.6 Edit Alarm Input for Current Site .............................................................................. 331
9.3.7 Edit Alarm Output for Current Site ........................................................................... 332
9.3.8 Edit Under Vehicle Surveillance System for Current Site .......................................... 333
9.3.9 Edit Digital Signage Screen for Current Site .............................................................. 333
9.3.10 Edit Speaker Unit for Current Site ........................................................................... 334
9.3.11 Edit Third-Party Integrated Resource for Current Site ............................................ 334
9.3.12 Edit Fire Detector for Current Site ........................................................................... 335
9.3.13 Edit Element for Remote Site .................................................................................. 335
9.4 Remove Element from Area ............................................................................................... 336
9.4.1 Remove Element from Area for Current Site ............................................................ 336
9.4.2 Remove Element from Area for Remote Site ............................................................ 337
Chapter 10 Person Management ............................................................................................. 338
10.1 Add Person Groups .......................................................................................................... 338
10.2 Set Person ID Rule ............................................................................................................ 339

x
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

10.3 Add Person ....................................................................................................................... 340

10.3.1 Add a Person Manually ........................................................................................... 341
10.3.2 Batch Add Persons by Template .............................................................................. 349
10.3.3 Import Profile Pictures ............................................................................................ 353
10.3.4 Import Domain Persons .......................................................................................... 354
10.3.5 Import Persons from Access Control Devices or Video Intercom Devices .............. 356
10.3.6 Import Persons from Enrollment Station ................................................................ 360
10.4 Person Self-Registration ................................................................................................... 362
10.4.1 Set Self-Registration Parameters ............................................................................. 363
10.4.2 Scan QR Code for Self-Registration ......................................................................... 365
10.4.3 Review Self-Registered Person Information ............................................................ 366
10.5 Batch Issue Cards to Persons ........................................................................................... 367
10.5.1 Set Card Issuing Parameters .................................................................................... 368
10.6 Report Card Loss .............................................................................................................. 371
10.6.1 Report Card Loss ..................................................................................................... 371
10.6.2 Issue a Temporary Card to a Person ........................................................................ 372
10.6.3 Batch Cancel Card Loss ........................................................................................... 373
10.7 Customize Additional Information ................................................................................... 373
10.8 Print Cards ....................................................................................................................... 377
Chapter 11 Event and Alarm ................................................................................................... 378
11.1 Manage Event and Alarm ................................................................................................. 379
11.1.1 Supported Events and Alarms ................................................................................. 379
11.1.2 Add Normal Event and Alarm ................................................................................. 381
11.1.3 Add Combined Alarm .............................................................................................. 390
11.1.4 Add Generic Event .................................................................................................. 395
11.1.5 Add User-Defined Event .......................................................................................... 398
11.2 Set Basic Event and Alarm Parameters ............................................................................ 399
11.2.1 Configure Receiving Schedule Template ................................................................. 399

xi
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

11.2.2 Define Alarm Priority, Alarm Category, and Alarm Icon .......................................... 401
11.2.3 Add Alarm Recipients .............................................................................................. 403
11.2.4 Send Event and Alarm Report Regularly ................................................................. 404
11.3 Event and Alarm Search ................................................................................................... 406
11.3.1 Event and Alarm Overview ...................................................................................... 406
11.3.2 Search for Event and Alarm Logs ............................................................................ 407
Chapter 12 Role and User Management .................................................................................. 409
12.1 Add Role ........................................................................................................................... 409
12.2 Add Normal User ............................................................................................................. 412
12.3 Import Domain Users ....................................................................................................... 414
12.4 Change Password of Current User ................................................................................... 416
12.5 Configure Permission Schedule ........................................................................................ 418
Chapter 13 System Security Settings ....................................................................................... 420
Chapter 14 System Configuration ............................................................................................ 422
14.1 Set User Preference ......................................................................................................... 422
14.2 Set Printer ........................................................................................................................ 424
14.3 Set NTP ............................................................................................................................. 424
14.4 Set Active Directory ......................................................................................................... 425
14.5 Device Access Protocol .................................................................................................... 428
14.6 Set Hik-ProConnect Site Access ........................................................................................ 428
14.7 Set WAN Access ............................................................................................................... 428
14.8 Set IP Address for Receiving Device Information ............................................................. 430
14.9 Set Data Retention Period ................................................................................................ 431
14.10 Set Holiday ..................................................................................................................... 432
14.11 Set Card Template .......................................................................................................... 434
14.12 Set Email Template ......................................................................................................... 435
14.12.1 Configure Email Account ....................................................................................... 435
14.12.2 Add Email Template for Sending Report Regularly ............................................... 437

xii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

14.12.3 Add Email Template for Event and Alarm Linkage ................................................ 438
14.13 Set Transfer Protocol ...................................................................................................... 439
14.14 Export Service Component Certificate ........................................................................... 440
14.15 Set Database Password .................................................................................................. 441
14.16 Configure System Hot Spare .......................................................................................... 441
14.17 Set Third-Party Integration ............................................................................................. 441
14.18 Data Interchange ............................................................................................................ 442
14.18.1 Synchronize Card Swiping Records to Third-Party Database ................................. 442
14.18.2 Dump Access Records to Third-Party Database .................................................... 443
14.19 Diagnose Remote Fault .................................................................................................. 445
14.20 Reset Device Network Information ................................................................................ 446
14.21 Set Company Information .............................................................................................. 446
Chapter 15 Map Management ................................................................................................ 448
15.1 Set GIS Map and Icons ..................................................................................................... 448
15.2 Add E-Map for Area ......................................................................................................... 449
15.3 Add Hot Spot on Map ...................................................................................................... 451
15.4 Add Hot Region on Map ................................................................................................... 451
15.5 Add Label on Map ............................................................................................................ 453
15.6 Add Resource Group on Map ........................................................................................... 453
15.7 Add Parking Lot on Map ................................................................................................... 455
15.8 Add Combined Alarm on Map ......................................................................................... 456
15.9 Operate Hot Spot ............................................................................................................. 456
15.9.1 Preview Hot Spot .................................................................................................... 457
15.9.2 Draw Zone or Trigger Line for Radar ....................................................................... 458
15.9.3 Relate Calibrated Camera to Radar ......................................................................... 462
15.9.4 Arm or Disarm Hot Spot .......................................................................................... 464
15.9.5 View History Alarm ................................................................................................. 464
15.10 Preview Hot Region ........................................................................................................ 464

xiii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

15.11 Preview Resource Group ................................................................................................ 465

15.12 Operate Map .................................................................................................................. 465
Chapter 16 Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 467
16.1 Health Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 467
16.1.1 Real-Time Health Status Overview .......................................................................... 467
16.1.2 Real-Time Health Status Overview (Topology) ........................................................ 470
16.1.3 Historical Health Data Overview ............................................................................. 478
16.2 Set Basic Maintenance Parameters .................................................................................. 480
16.2.1 Send Log Report Regularly ...................................................................................... 481
16.2.2 Set Warning Threshold for Streaming Media Usage ............................................... 484
16.2.3 Set Network Timeout .............................................................................................. 486
16.2.4 Set Health Check Frequency ................................................................................... 486
16.2.5 Set Topology Show Parameters ............................................................................... 487
16.3 Resource Status ................................................................................................................ 488
16.4 Log Search ........................................................................................................................ 496
16.4.1 Search for Server Logs ............................................................................................. 496
16.4.2 Search for Online/Offline Logs of Device ................................................................ 498
16.4.3 Search for Logs Stored on Device ............................................................................ 499
16.4.4 Search for Online/Offline Logs of Resource ............................................................ 501
16.4.5 Search for Recording Status of Resource ................................................................ 502
16.4.6 Search for Call-Back Status of Resource .................................................................. 507
16.5 Service Manager .............................................................................................................. 508
16.6 Set System Data Backup ................................................................................................... 509
16.7 Restore System Data ........................................................................................................ 510
16.8 Export Configuration File ................................................................................................. 511
Chapter 17 Evidence Management Center .............................................................................. 512
17.1 Basic Settings ................................................................................................................... 512
17.2 Add Evidence ................................................................................................................... 512

xiv
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

17.3 Manage Unlinked Files ..................................................................................................... 516

17.3.1 Add and View Unlinked Files ................................................................................... 516
17.3.2 Link Files with Evidence .......................................................................................... 517
17.4 Manage Operation Records ............................................................................................. 519
Chapter 18 Video Management .............................................................................................. 520
18.1 Flow Chart of Video Management ................................................................................... 525
18.2 Configure Storage and Recording .................................................................................... 528
18.2.1 Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site .................................................. 529
18.2.2 Configure Storage for Imported Pictures and Files ................................................. 532
18.2.3 Configure Storage for Uploaded Pictures ................................................................ 533
18.2.4 Configure Recording Schedule Template ................................................................ 533
18.3 Configure Visual Tracking ................................................................................................. 535
18.4 Set Network Parameters .................................................................................................. 537
18.5 Configure Panorama Tracking .......................................................................................... 538
18.6 Intelligent Recognition ..................................................................................................... 541
18.6.1 Manage Face Comparison Group ............................................................................ 541
18.6.2 Manage Intelligent Recognition Task ...................................................................... 547
18.6.3 Applying Center ...................................................................................................... 553
18.6.4 Add Task Schedule Template ................................................................................... 555
18.7 Video Application ............................................................................................................. 555
18.7.1 Manage View .......................................................................................................... 556
18.7.2 Live View ................................................................................................................. 557
18.7.3 Playback .................................................................................................................. 570
18.7.4 Manage Favorites .................................................................................................... 576
18.7.5 Set Video Parameters .............................................................................................. 577
18.8 Scheduled Capture ........................................................................................................... 579
18.8.1 Configure Capture Schedule ................................................................................... 579
18.8.2 Configure Scheduled Report ................................................................................... 580

xv
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

18.8.3 Search for Scheduled Captures ............................................................................... 580

Chapter 19 Intelligent Analysis Report .................................................................................... 582
19.1 Manage Store ................................................................................................................... 582
19.1.1 Add Store ................................................................................................................ 582
19.1.2 Configure Promotion Day ........................................................................................ 584
19.2 Customize Report Dashboard .......................................................................................... 584
19.3 People Counting Report ................................................................................................... 586
19.3.1 Add People Counting Group ................................................................................... 587
19.3.2 Generate People Counting Report .......................................................................... 588
19.3.3 Send People Counting Report Regularly ................................................................. 590
19.4 Heat Analysis Report ........................................................................................................ 593
19.4.1 Add Heat Analysis Group ........................................................................................ 593
19.4.2 Generate Heat Analysis Report ............................................................................... 594
19.4.3 Send Heat Analysis Report Regularly ...................................................................... 596
19.5 Person Feature Analysis Report ....................................................................................... 599
19.5.1 Add Person Feature Analysis Group ........................................................................ 599
19.5.2 Generate Person Feature Analysis Report .............................................................. 600
19.5.3 Send Person Feature Analysis Report Regularly ...................................................... 602
19.6 Queue Analysis Report ..................................................................................................... 604
19.6.1 Generate Queue Analysis Report ............................................................................ 604
19.6.2 Send Queue Analysis Report Regularly ................................................................... 607
19.7 Pathway Analysis Report .................................................................................................. 609
19.7.1 Add Pathway Analysis Group .................................................................................. 609
19.7.2 Generate Pathway Analysis Report ......................................................................... 611
19.7.3 Send Pathway Report Regularly .............................................................................. 614
19.8 People Density Analysis Report ....................................................................................... 616
19.8.1 Generate People Density Analysis Report ............................................................... 617
19.8.2 Send People Density Analysis Report Regularly ...................................................... 620

xvi
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

19.9 Skin-Surface Temperature Screening Report ................................................................... 622

19.9.1 Generate Skin-Surface Temperature Analysis Report ............................................. 622
19.9.2 Send Skin-Surface Temperature Screening Report Regularly .................................. 625
19.10 Temperature Analysis Report ......................................................................................... 627
19.10.1 Generate Temperature Analysis Report ................................................................ 627
19.10.2 Send Temperature Analysis Report Regularly ....................................................... 630
19.11 Vehicle Analysis Report .................................................................................................. 632
19.11.1 Generate Vehicle Analysis Report ......................................................................... 632
19.11.2 Send Vehicle Analysis Report Regularly ................................................................ 634
Chapter 20 Mobile Monitoring ............................................................................................... 636
20.1 Flow Chart ........................................................................................................................ 636
20.2 Mobile Monitoring Overview ........................................................................................... 637
20.3 Basic Settings ................................................................................................................... 638
20.3.1 Configure Basic Parameters .................................................................................... 638
20.3.2 Configure Route Parameters ................................................................................... 638
20.3.3 Configure Fuel Level Monitoring Parameters .......................................................... 639
20.3.4 Configure Scheduled Reports .................................................................................. 640
20.4 Driver Management ......................................................................................................... 642
20.4.1 Add Drivers ............................................................................................................. 642
20.4.2 Export Drivers ......................................................................................................... 646
20.4.3 Add a Driver Group ................................................................................................. 647
20.4.4 Add Drivers to a Driver Group ................................................................................. 648
20.5 Driving Rule ...................................................................................................................... 648
20.5.1 Configure a Fence Rule ........................................................................................... 649
20.5.2 Configure a Deviation Rule ..................................................................................... 650
20.5.3 Configure a Rule Schedule Template ....................................................................... 652
20.6 Route Management ......................................................................................................... 653
20.6.1 Manage Stops ......................................................................................................... 653

xvii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

20.6.2 Configure Driving Routes and Shift Schedules ........................................................ 655

20.6.3 Add a Stop Event Rule ............................................................................................. 657
20.7 Driving Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 658
20.8 Route Monitoring ............................................................................................................. 662
20.9 Mobile Monitoring Record ............................................................................................... 665
20.9.1 Search for Vehicle Tracks ......................................................................................... 665
20.9.2 Search for Driving Events ........................................................................................ 666
20.9.3 Search for Routes .................................................................................................... 667
20.9.4 Search for Fuel Level Monitoring Records .............................................................. 669
20.10 Statistics and Reports ..................................................................................................... 670
20.10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 670
20.10.2 Generate a Driver Analytics Report ....................................................................... 673
20.10.3 Generate a GPS Information Report ..................................................................... 673
20.10.4 Generate a Driving Distance Report ...................................................................... 676
20.10.5 Generate a Driving Duration Report ..................................................................... 678
20.10.6 Generate an Overspeed Report ............................................................................ 680
20.10.7 Generate a Stop Analytics Report ......................................................................... 682
20.10.8 Generate a Driving Event Report .......................................................................... 683
20.10.9 Generate a Fuel Consumption Analytics Report ................................................... 686
20.10.10 Generate a Passenger Counting Report .............................................................. 689
20.10.11 Generate a Device Online Rate Report ............................................................... 690
Chapter 21 Vehicle and Parking Management ......................................................................... 693
21.1 Flow Chart of Vehicle and Parking Management ............................................................. 693
21.2 Parking Lot Overview ....................................................................................................... 694
21.3 Basic Settings of Parking Management ............................................................................ 695
21.3.1 Set Basic Parameters ............................................................................................... 695
21.3.2 Set User to Receive Entry & Exit Calls ..................................................................... 696
21.4 Manage Parking Lot ......................................................................................................... 696

xviii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.4.1 Add Parking Lot ....................................................................................................... 698

21.4.2 Add Entrance and Exit ............................................................................................. 701
21.4.3 Add Lane ................................................................................................................. 702
21.4.4 Set Contents Displayed on Display Screen .............................................................. 706
21.4.5 Set Parking Fee Mode for Parking Lots ................................................................... 710
21.5 Manage Entry & Exit Rules for Parking Lots ..................................................................... 711
21.5.1 Set Entry & Exit and Deduction Mode .................................................................... 711
21.5.2 Set Entry & Exit Rule for Temporary Vehicles .......................................................... 713
21.5.3 Set Entry & Exit Rule for Registered Vehicles .......................................................... 715
21.5.4 Set Entry & Exit Rule for Visitor Vehicles ................................................................ 717
21.5.5 Add Entry & Exit Rule for Vehicles in List ................................................................ 719
21.5.6 Add Entry & Exit Rule for Holidays .......................................................................... 721
21.6 Manage Parking Fee Rules for Parking Lots ..................................................................... 724
21.6.1 Add Parking Fee Rule for Temporary Vehicles ......................................................... 724
21.6.2 Add Parking Fee Rule for Registered Vehicles ......................................................... 727
21.6.3 Add Parking Fee Rule for Vehicles in List ................................................................. 729
21.6.4 Add Discount Rule ................................................................................................... 731
21.6.5 Add Parking Fee Rule for Abnormal Pass ................................................................ 732
21.6.6 Additional Configuration ......................................................................................... 734
21.7 Manage Vehicle ................................................................................................................ 736
21.7.1 Add Registered Vehicles .......................................................................................... 736
21.7.2 Add Vehicle List ....................................................................................................... 742
21.7.3 Add Vehicle to Blocklist ........................................................................................... 744
21.7.4 Issue Temporary Cards ............................................................................................ 746
21.7.5 Customize Vehicle Information ............................................................................... 748
21.8 Top Up for Vehicles .......................................................................................................... 751
21.9 Pay in Toll Center .............................................................................................................. 753
21.10 Parking Guidance Configuration .................................................................................... 755

xix
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.10.1 Add a Floor to the Parking Lot .............................................................................. 755

21.10.2 (Optional) Link Devices to the Floor ...................................................................... 757
21.10.3 (Optional) Configure a Map for the Floor ............................................................. 759
21.10.4 Set Types for Parking Spaces on the Map ............................................................. 762
21.10.5 Mark Devices on the Map ..................................................................................... 765
21.10.6 Calibrate Parking Spaces Regularly ....................................................................... 766
21.11 Parking Space Monitoring .............................................................................................. 768
21.12 Vehicle and Record Search ............................................................................................. 770
21.12.1 Add Fuzzy Matching Rules for License Plate Search .............................................. 770
21.12.2 Search for Visitor Vehicles ..................................................................................... 771
21.12.3 Search for Vehicle Passing Records ....................................................................... 772
21.12.4 Search for Parking Records ................................................................................... 774
21.12.5 Search for Parked Vehicles .................................................................................... 776
21.12.6 Search for Payment Records ................................................................................. 778
21.12.7 Search for Vehicle Top-Up and Refund Records .................................................... 780
21.12.8 Search for Transaction Records of Vehicle Owner Account .................................. 781
21.12.9 Search for Work Records of Operators .................................................................. 782
21.12.10 Search for Coupon Records ................................................................................. 783
21.13 Statistic and Report ........................................................................................................ 783
21.13.1 Export Operation Analysis Reports of Parking Lots ............................................... 784
21.13.2 Export Transaction Reports of Parking Lots .......................................................... 785
21.13.3 Send Overtime Parking Report Regularly .............................................................. 786
21.14 Self-Service Vehicle Finding Client ................................................................................. 787
Chapter 22 Access Control Management ................................................................................. 789
22.1 Flow Chart of Door Access Control .................................................................................. 789
22.2 Manage Access Level ....................................................................................................... 791
22.2.1 Add Access Level ..................................................................................................... 791
22.2.2 Assign Access Level ................................................................................................. 792

xx
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

22.2.3 Apply Persons' Access Levels to Device .................................................................. 798

22.2.4 Clear Persons' Access Levels ................................................................................... 800
22.2.5 Set Access Schedule Template ................................................................................ 800
22.2.6 Enable Authentication via Password ....................................................................... 801
22.3 Access Control Test .......................................................................................................... 802
22.4 Advanced Functions ......................................................................................................... 805
22.4.1 Configure Free Access and Access Forbidden Rules ............................................... 805
22.4.2 Configure First Person In Rule ................................................................................. 807
22.4.3 Add Emergency Operation Group ........................................................................... 809
22.4.4 Configure Anti-Passback Rules ................................................................................ 810
22.4.5 Configure Multi-Door Interlocking .......................................................................... 812
22.4.6 Manage Multi-Factor Authentication ..................................................................... 813
22.4.7 Configure Authentication Mode ............................................................................. 815
22.4.8 Add Entry and Exit Counting Group ........................................................................ 818
22.5 Door and Elevator Control ............................................................................................... 818
22.5.1 View Real-Time Access Event .................................................................................. 819
22.5.2 Door Control ........................................................................................................... 820
22.5.3 Elevator Control ...................................................................................................... 821
22.6 Subscribe for Device and Access Events .......................................................................... 822
22.7 Set User to Receive Access Control Calls ......................................................................... 823
22.8 Synchronize Access Records to System Regularly ............................................................ 824
22.9 Search Access Records ..................................................................................................... 824
22.10 Search Data Recorded on Device ................................................................................... 826
22.11 Perform Entry & Exit Counting ....................................................................................... 828
Chapter 23 Visitor Management ............................................................................................. 830
23.1 Flow Chart of Visitor Management .................................................................................. 831
23.2 Configurations Before Visitor Management .................................................................... 833
23.2.1 Add a Visitor Group ................................................................................................. 833

xxi
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

23.2.2 Set Self-Service Check-Out Point ............................................................................. 834

23.2.3 Add Access Level for Visitors ................................................................................... 835
23.2.4 Manually Apply Visitors' Access Level Settings to Visitor Terminals ....................... 836
23.2.5 Set Self-Service Reservation Parameters ................................................................ 837
23.2.6 Add Visitor Email Template ..................................................................................... 839
23.2.7 Add a Visitor Pass Template .................................................................................... 840
23.2.8 Set Basic Parameters ............................................................................................... 842
23.3 Watch List Management .................................................................................................. 846
23.3.1 Configure Category and Match Method ................................................................. 847
23.3.2 Add an Entity to the Watch List ............................................................................... 848
23.3.3 Import Existing Visitors to the Watch List ............................................................... 849
23.4 Visitor Reservation ........................................................................................................... 851
23.4.1 Reserve a Visitor ..................................................................................................... 851
23.4.2 Batch Import the Visitor Reservation Information .................................................. 854
23.4.3 Review Visitor Reservations .................................................................................... 855
23.5 Visitor Check-In ................................................................................................................ 858
23.5.1 Check In a Visitor Without Reservation .................................................................. 858
23.5.2 Check In a Reserved Visitor ..................................................................................... 863
23.5.3 View Visitor Information ......................................................................................... 865
23.6 Manage Entry & Exit Rule for Visitors' Vehicles ............................................................... 866
23.7 Visitor Check-Out ............................................................................................................. 867
23.8 Check Visitor Access Records ........................................................................................... 869
Chapter 24 Time & Attendance ............................................................................................... 870
24.1 Flow Chart ........................................................................................................................ 871
24.2 Configure Attendance Parameters ................................................................................... 872
24.2.1 Add Attendance Check Point .................................................................................. 872
24.2.2 Define Weekends .................................................................................................... 874
24.2.3 Define Absence ....................................................................................................... 874

xxii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

24.2.4 Configure Authentication Mode ............................................................................. 876

24.2.5 Set Auto-Calculation Time of Attendance Results .................................................. 876
24.2.6 Configure Attendance Result Accuracy ................................................................... 877
24.2.7 Configure Overtime Parameters ............................................................................. 877
24.2.8 Manage Leave Type ................................................................................................ 880
24.2.9 Customize Attendance Status on Device ................................................................. 881
24.3 Add Timetable .................................................................................................................. 883
24.3.1 Add Break Timetables ............................................................................................. 883
24.3.2 Add Timetable for Normal Shift .............................................................................. 885
24.3.3 Add Timetable for Man-Hour Shift .......................................................................... 887
24.4 Add Shift .......................................................................................................................... 889
24.5 Manage Shift Schedule .................................................................................................... 891
24.5.1 Shift Schedule Overview ......................................................................................... 891
24.5.2 Assign Shift Schedule to Person Group ................................................................... 892
24.5.3 Assign Shift Schedule to Person .............................................................................. 893
24.5.4 Add Temporary Schedule ........................................................................................ 894
24.6 Manage Attendance Record ............................................................................................ 895
24.6.1 Search Raw Records ................................................................................................ 895
24.6.2 Import Raw Attendance Records ............................................................................ 896
24.6.3 Search Attendance Result ....................................................................................... 897
24.6.4 Correct Check-In/Out for a Single Person ............................................................... 899
24.6.5 Correct Check-In/Out for Multiple Persons ............................................................. 899
24.6.6 Apply for Leave for a Single Person ......................................................................... 900
24.6.7 Apply for Leave for Multiple Persons ...................................................................... 901
24.6.8 Manually Calculate Attendance Results .................................................................. 901
24.6.9 View Attendance Handling Records ........................................................................ 902
24.6.10 Export Attendance Records .................................................................................. 902
24.7 Manage Attendance Reports ........................................................................................... 903

xxiii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

24.7.1 Set Display Rules for Attendance Report ................................................................ 903

24.7.2 Send Attendance Report Regularly ......................................................................... 903
24.7.3 Export Attendance Report ...................................................................................... 905
24.7.4 Custom Report ........................................................................................................ 906
Chapter 25 Video Intercom Management ............................................................................... 909
25.1 Flow Chart of Video Intercom .......................................................................................... 909
25.2 Video Intercom Overview ................................................................................................ 911
25.3 Basic Settings of the Platform .......................................................................................... 912
25.3.1 Add Call Recipients .................................................................................................. 912
25.3.2 Add Call Schedule Template .................................................................................... 913
25.3.3 Configure General Parameters ................................................................................ 914
25.4 Configure Device Parameters ........................................................................................... 914
25.5 Manage Video Intercom Device ....................................................................................... 916
25.5.1 Set Locations for Video Intercom Devices ............................................................... 916
25.5.2 Apply Location to Video Intercom Devices ............................................................. 917
25.6 Video Intercom Application ............................................................................................. 917
25.6.1 Add Call Schedule for Door Stations ....................................................................... 918
25.6.2 Apply Call Schedule to Door Stations ...................................................................... 918
25.6.3 Link Resources with Indoor Stations ....................................................................... 919
25.7 Apply Data to Indoor Station ........................................................................................... 924
25.7.1 Manage Notices ...................................................................................................... 924
25.7.2 Apply Software Package to Indoor Station .............................................................. 925
25.8 Apply Advertisements to Door Stations ........................................................................... 927
25.9 Call & Talk ......................................................................................................................... 928
25.9.1 Call an Indoor Stations ............................................................................................ 928
25.9.2 View Recents ........................................................................................................... 928
Chapter 26 Alarm Detection ................................................................................................... 929
26.1 Flow Chart of Alarm Detection ........................................................................................ 929

xxiv
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

26.2 Alarm Detection Overview ............................................................................................... 931

26.3 Add Security Control Partitions (Area) from Device ......................................................... 932
26.4 Configure Arming Schedule Template .............................................................................. 933
Chapter 27 Digital Signage Management ................................................................................ 935
27.1 Flow Chart ........................................................................................................................ 935
27.2 Digital Signage Overview ................................................................................................. 936
27.3 Switch Application Mode ................................................................................................. 937
27.4 Basic Settings ................................................................................................................... 938
27.4.1 Set Material Storage Location ................................................................................. 938
27.4.2 Configure Video Wall .............................................................................................. 939
27.5 Material Management ..................................................................................................... 940
27.5.1 Upload Local Material ............................................................................................. 940
27.5.2 Create Dynamic Material ........................................................................................ 942
27.6 Program Management ..................................................................................................... 944
27.6.1 Create Digital Signage Program ............................................................................... 944
27.6.2 Create Video Wall Program ..................................................................................... 951
27.6.3 Create Attendance Program .................................................................................... 957
27.6.4 Create People Counting Program ............................................................................ 960
27.6.5 Create Emergency Mustering Program ................................................................... 965
27.6.6 Add Emergency Mustering Text Notification .......................................................... 971
27.7 Schedule Management .................................................................................................... 974
27.7.1 Create a Schedule ................................................................................................... 974
27.7.2 Create a Loop Schedule .......................................................................................... 976
27.7.3 Create a Default Schedule ....................................................................................... 979
27.8 Approve ............................................................................................................................ 980
27.9 Release Management ...................................................................................................... 981
27.9.1 View Release Records ............................................................................................. 981
27.9.2 Release a Program Schedule ................................................................................... 982

xxv
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

27.9.3 Cut in Text Message ................................................................................................ 983

27.9.4 Cut in Program ........................................................................................................ 984
27.10 Device Control ................................................................................................................ 985
27.10.1 Control Digital Signage Terminal ........................................................................... 985
27.10.2 Control Video Wall ................................................................................................ 987
Chapter 28 Interactive Flat Panel Management ....................................................................... 990
28.1 Control Interactive Flat Panel ........................................................................................... 990
28.2 Manage Applications ....................................................................................................... 992
28.3 Add Emergency Mustering Text Notification ................................................................... 993
28.4 View Release Records ...................................................................................................... 996
Chapter 29 Skin-Surface Temperature Screening ..................................................................... 997
29.1 Temperature Screening Configuration ............................................................................. 997
29.1.1 Group Temperature Screening Points ..................................................................... 997
29.1.2 Configure Temperature Screening Parameters ....................................................... 998
29.2 Real-Time Skin-Surface Temperature Monitoring ............................................................ 999
29.3 Search History Temperature Screening Data ................................................................. 1000
29.4 Registration .................................................................................................................... 1001
29.4.1 Register Person Information ................................................................................. 1001
29.4.2 Customize Registration Template .......................................................................... 1003
29.4.3 View Registered Person Information .................................................................... 1003
29.5 Generate Report ............................................................................................................ 1004
Chapter 30 Broadcast Management ...................................................................................... 1006
30.1 Set Basic Settings for Broadcast ..................................................................................... 1006
30.2 Group Speaker Units ...................................................................................................... 1007
30.3 Manage Media Files ....................................................................................................... 1007
30.4 Configure Live Broadcast ............................................................................................... 1008
30.5 Search for Live Broadcast Records ................................................................................. 1009
30.6 Add a Scheduled Broadcast Task .................................................................................... 1009

xxvi
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 31 Security Inspection Management ........................................................................ 1012

31.1 Configure Security Inspection ........................................................................................ 1012
31.2 Add Security Inspection Channels to Area ..................................................................... 1012
31.3 View Videos of Security Inspection ................................................................................ 1013
31.4 Historical Data Search .................................................................................................... 1016
31.4.1 Search for Package Detection Records .................................................................. 1016
31.4.2 Search for Metal Detection Records ..................................................................... 1017
31.4.3 Search for Absence Records .................................................................................. 1018
31.5 Generate Package Detection Report .............................................................................. 1019
31.6 Generate People Inspection Report ............................................................................... 1019
Chapter 32 Emergency Mustering ......................................................................................... 1021
32.1 Emergency Solution Settings .......................................................................................... 1022
32.2 Start a Roll Call ............................................................................................................... 1028
Chapter 33 Patrol Management ............................................................................................ 1030
33.1 Flow Chart of Patrol Management ................................................................................. 1031
33.2 Basic Configurations for Patrol Management ................................................................ 1033
33.2.1 Add Exception Types for Patrol Management ....................................................... 1034
33.2.2 Set Parameters for Patrol Management ................................................................ 1034
33.3 Add Patrol Points ........................................................................................................... 1035
33.4 Add Patrol Person Group ............................................................................................... 1037
33.5 Add Patrol Schedule Template ....................................................................................... 1038
33.6 Add Patrol Route ............................................................................................................ 1040
33.7 Real-Time Patrol Monitoring .......................................................................................... 1043
33.8 Search for Patrol-Related Event Records ........................................................................ 1045
33.9 Check Patrol Statistics .................................................................................................... 1046

xxvii
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 1 About Web Client

1.1 About This Document

This user manual is intended for the administrator of the system.
The manual guides you to establish and configure the security system. Follow this manual to
perform system activation, access of the system, and configuration of the monitoring task via the
provided Web Client, etc. To ensure the properness of usage and stability of the system, refer to
the contents below and read the manual carefully before installation and operation.

1.2 Introduction
The platform is developed for the management of security system and features flexibility,
scalability high reliability, and powerful functions.
The platform provides features including central management, information sharing, convenient
connection, and multi-service cooperation. It is capable of adding devices for management, live
view, video storage and playback, alarm linkage, access control, time and attendance, face
comparison, and so on.

Note
The modules on the platform vary with the License you purchased. For detailed information,
contact our technical support.

The complete platform contains the following components. You can install the components
according to actual needs.

Component Introduction
System Management ● Provides the unified authentication service for connecting with the
Service (SYS) clients and servers.
● Provides the management for the users, roles, permissions, devices,
and services.
● Provides the configuration APIs for monitoring and management
modules.
Streaming Service Provides forwarding and distributing the audio and video data of live
(Optional) view.

The following table shows the provided clients for accessing or managing the platform.

1
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Client Introduction
Control Control Client is a C/S software which provides multiple operating functionalities,
Client including live view, PTZ control, video playback and download, alarm receiving, log
search, and so on.
Web Client Web Client is a B/S client for managing system. It provides multiple functionalities,
including device management, area management, recording schedule settings,
event configuration, user management, and so on.
Mobile Mobile Client is the software designed for getting access to the platform via Wi-Fi,
Client 4G, and 5 G networks with mobile device. It fulfills the functions of the devices
connected to the platform, such as live view, remote playback, PTZ control, and so
on.

1.3 Recommended Running Environment

The following is recommended system requirement for running the Web Client.
CPU
®
Intel Core™ I3 and above
Memory
4 GB and above
Web Browser
® ® ® ®
Internet Explorer 11 and above, Firefox 90 and above, Google Chrome 90 and above, Safari 11
®
and above， Microsoft Edge 89 and above.

Note
Upgrading from V1.x to V2.x requires double available disk spaces than usual.

2
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 2 Login
You can access and configure the platform via web browser directly, without installing any client
software on the your computer.

Note
The login session of the Web Client will expire and a prompt with countdown will appear after the
configured time period in which there is no action. For setting the time period, refer to System
Security Settings .

2.1 First Time Login

If this is the first time for you to login, you can choose to login as admin or normal user according
to your user role.

2.1.1 Login for First Time for Admin User

By default, the system predefined the administrator user named admin. When you login via the
Web Client for the first time, you are required to create a password for the admin user before you
can properly configure and operate the system.
Steps
1. In the address bar of the web browser, enter the address of the PC running SYS service and press
Enter key.
Example
If the IP address of PC running SYS is 172.6.21.96, and you should enter http://172.6.21.96 or
https://172.6.21.96 in the address bar.

Note
● You should set the transfer protocol before accessing the SYS. For details, refer to Set Transfer

Protocol .
● You should set the SYS's IP address before accessing the SYS via WAN. For details, refer to Set

WAN Access .
2. Enter the password and confirm password for the admin user in the pop-up Create Password
window.

3
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The password strength can be checked by the system and should meet the system requirements.
The default minimum password strength should be Medium. For setting minimum password
strength, refer to System Security Settings .

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
3. Click OK.
Web Client home page displays after you successfully creating the admin password.
Result
After you logging in, the Site Name window opens and you can set the site name for the current
system as you want.

Note
You can also set it in System → Normal → User Preference . See Set User Preference for details.

2.1.2 First Time Login for Normal User

When you log in to the system as normal user via Web Client for the first time, you should change
the initial password and set a new password for login.
Steps
1. In the address bar of the web browser, input the address of the PC running SYS service and press
the Enter key.
Example
If the IP address of PC running SYS is 172.6.21.96, and you should enter http://172.6.21.96 or
https://172.6.21.96 in the address bar.

Note
You should configure the SYS's IP address in WAN Access of System Configuration before
accessing the SYS via WAN. For details, refer to Set WAN Access .
2. Enter the user name and password.

4
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Contact the administrator for the user name and initial password.
3. Click Log In and the Change Password window opens.
4. Set a new password and confirm the password.

Note
The password strength can be checked by the system and should meet the system requirements.
If password strength is lower than the required minimum strength, you will be asked to change
your password. For setting minimum password strength, refer to System Security Settings .

Caution
The password strength of the device can be checked by the system. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your
password regularly, especially in the high security system, resetting the password monthly or
weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
5. Click OK to change the password.
Result
Web Client home page displays after you successfully logging in.

2.2 Login via Web Client

You can access the system via web browser and configure the system.
Steps
1. In the address bar of the web browser, input the address of the PC running SYS service and press
Enter key.
Example
If the IP address of PC running SYS is 172.6.21.96, and you should enter http://172.6.21.96 or
https://172.6.21.96 in the address bar.

Note
You should configure the SYS's IP address in WAN Access of System Configuration before
accessing the SYS via WAN. For details, refer to Set WAN Access .
2. Enter the user name and password.
3. Click Log In to log in to the system.

5
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● If failed password attempt of current user is detected, you are required to input the
verification code. The failed password attempts from current client, other client, and other
address will all require the verification code.
● The failed password attempt and verification code attempt from current client, other client
(e.g., Control Client), and other address will all be accumulated. Your IP address will be locked
for a specified period of time after specific number of failed password or verification code
attempts detected. For setting failed login attempts and locking duration, refer to System
Security Settings .
● The account will be frozen for 30 minutes after 5 failed password attempts. The failed
password attempts from current client, other clients (e.g., Control Client), and other addresses
will all be accumulated.
● The password strength can be checked by the system and should meet the system
requirements. If password strength is lower than the required minimum strength, you will be
asked to change your password. For setting minimum password strength, refer to System
Security Settings .
● If your password is expired, you will be asked to change your password when login. For setting
maximum password age, refer to System Security Settings .

Result
Web Client home page displays after you successfully logging in to the system.

2.3 Change Password for Reset User

When the normal user's password is reset by admin user, he/she should change the initial
password and set a new password when logging into HikCentral Professional via the Web Client.
Steps
1. In the address bar of the web browser, enter the address of the PC running SYS service and press
Enter key.
Example
If the IP address of PC running SYS is 172.6.21.96, and you should enter http://172.6.21.96 or
https://172.6.21.96 in the address bar.

Note
You should configure the SYS's IP address in WAN Access of System Configuration before
accessing the SYS via WAN. For details, refer to Set WAN Access .
2. Enter the user name and initial password set by the administrator.
3. Click Log In and a Change Password window opens.
4. Set a new password and confirm the password.

6
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The password strength can be checked by the system and should meet the system requirements.
If password strength is lower than the required minimum strength, you will be asked to change
your password. For setting minimum password strength, refer to System Security Settings .

Caution
The password strength of the device can be checked by the system. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your
password regularly, especially in the high security system, resetting the password monthly or
weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
5. Click OK.
Result
Web Client home page displays after you successfully changing the password.

2.4 Forgot Password

If you forgot the your account's password, you can reset the password and set a new password.
Before You Start
● Make sure the normal user has been configured with an available email address.

● Make sure the email server is tested successfully.

Steps
1. On the login page, enter a user name in the User Name field.
2. Click Forgot Password.

7
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 2-1 Reset Password for Normal User

Figure 2-2 Reset Password for admin User

3. Enter the required information on the Reset Password pane.
- For the admin user, enter the License activation code, new password, and confirm password.

8
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If you forget the License activation code, you can click Get Code to send the activation code to
the email address configured when activating the License in online mode. For setting an email
for the admin user, refer to Activate License - Online .
- For normal users, click Get Code to send the verification code to the email address configured
when adding the user. And then enter the received verification code, new password, and
confirm password within 10 minutes.

Note
If the email address is not set for the normal user, contact the admin user to reset the
password and change the password when login.
- For domain user, contact the admin user to reset the password.

Note
The password strength can be checked by the system and should meet the system requirements.
If password strength is lower than the required minimum strength, you will be asked to change
your password. For setting minimum password strength, refer to System Security Settings .

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
4. Click OK.

9
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 3 Download Mobile Client

On the login page of Web Client, you can scan the QR code to download the Mobile Client that is
used for accessing the system via mobile terminal (e.g., mobile phone).
Perform this task when you need to download the Mobile Client.

Note
You can also search and download the Mobile Client in the App Store.
Steps
1. In the address bar of the web browser, enter the address of the PC running SYS service and press
Enter key.
Example
If the IP address of PC running SYS is 172.6.21.96, and you should enter http://172.6.21.96 in the
address bar.

Note
You should configure the SYS's IP address in WAN Access of System Configuration before
accessing the SYS via WAN. For details, refer to Set WAN Access .
2. Scan the corresponding QR code with your mobile terminal to download the Mobile Client.

10
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 4 Web Control

For accessing the Web Client via web browser, you must install a web control on the PC on which
you access the Web Client when performing some functions, e.g., live view, playback, and
searching online devices. Web Client automatically asks you to install the web control when you
want to access the corresponding functions, and you can follow the prompts to install it on the PC.

11
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 5 Home Page Overview

The default Home page of the Web Client provides a visual overview of function modules on the
platform. You can access specific modules quickly and conveniently via the Home page.

Note
After you entered the modules, tabs will appear in the top of the Web Client, you can click tabs to
quickly switch modules. You can also click or in the tab area to refresh or exit from the
module.

Figure 5-1 Default Home Page

Table 5-1 Default Home Page Description

Section Module Description
Top Navigation Navigation Icon The navigation bar shows the available functions
Bar determined by the Licenses you purchased.
You can add some frequently used or important modules
to the navigation bar for convenient access. See details in
Customize Navigation Bar .
Wizard Video
A wizard which guides you through the management
and applications of video. You can also view the flow

12
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Section Module Description

chart which introduces the video resource management,
recording configurations, and video application in Flow
Chart of Video Management .
Access Control
A wizard which guides you through the basic
configurations of access control. You can also view the
flow chart which introduces the configurations and
operations of access control and elevator control in Flow
Chart of Door Access Control .
Visitor
A wizard which guides you through the basic
configurations and applications of visitor management.
You can also view the flow chart which introduces the
process of visitor management from reserving visitors to
checking out visitors and viewing visitor information/
records (see Flow Chart of Visitor Management ).
Mobile Monitoring
A wizard which guides you through the configuration
and applications of mobile monitoring. You can also
view the flow chart which introduces the management
of mobile devices and vehicles, the configuration of GIS
map and driving rules, driving monitoring, vehicle route
and driving event search, and the report management in
Mobile Monitoring .
Vehicle and Parking
A wizard which guides you through the management
and applications of vehicle and parking. You can also
view the flow chart which introduces the management
of parking lots, vehicles, and entry & exit rules, parking
fee rules, parking guidance, and vehicle & record search
in Flow Chart of Vehicle and Parking Management .
Alarm Detection
A wizard which guides you through the management
and configurations of alarm detection. You can also view
the flow chart which introduces the management of
security control panels and alarm inputs, arming

13
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Section Module Description

schedule configuration, and event & alarm management
in Flow Chart of Alarm Detection .
Digital Signage
A wizard which guides you through the management
and configurations of digital signage. You can also view
the flow chart which introduces the management of
digital signage terminals, materials, programs, and
schedules, program approval, and program release in
Flow Chart .
Attendance
A wizard which guides you through the management
and configurations of attendance. You can also view the
flow chart which introduces the management of
devices, person groups, and persons, basic attendance
configuration, attendance rule configuration, and record
search and handling in Flow Chart .
Patrol
A wizard which guides you through the management
and configurations of patrol. You can also view the flow
chart which introduces the process of patrol
management from adding patrol points to real-time
patrol monitoring and records/statistics search (see
Flow Chart of Patrol Management ).

Maintenance and License

Management You can view the License details, activate, upgrade, and
deactivate the License if needed.
For more details, refer to License Management .
Back Up and Restore System Data
You can manually back up the data in the system, or
configure a schedule to run the backup task regularly.
When an exception occurs, you can restore the database
if you have backed up the database.
For more details, refer to Set System Data Backup and
Restore System Data .
Export Configuration Data

14
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Section Module Description

You can export and save configuration data to your local
PC.
For more details, refer to Export Configuration File .
Download Installation Package
Download the installation package of other clients, such
as Control Client.
About
Check the version information of the Web Client.
View the License Agreement and Open-Source License
Agreement.

Account Change Password

Change the password of the current user.
For more details, refer to Change Password of Current
User .
Logout
Log out of the system and back to the login page.

Default Home Switch to Map Configure a map for displaying resources on the map. For
Page Configuration more information, refer to Map Management .
Switch Home Four predefined modes are provided, including Default
Page Mode Mode, System Installation and Management Mode,
Security Control and Management Mode, and Attendance
Management Mode, for different scenarios.
You can also customize the Home page mode as needed.
See more details in Customize and Switch Home Page
Mode .
Left Overview Maintenance
Pane The Maintenance module provides the overview of
device network status, service running status, and
health checking results.
You can refresh to view the real-time status or results.
See more details in Maintenance .
Intelligent Analysis

15
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Section Module Description

The Intelligent Analysis module provides the report
overview of people feature analysis, people counting,
and heat analysis.
You can refresh to view the real-time analysis results, or
export them in different formats.
See more details in Intelligent Analysis Report .
Access Control
The Access Control module provides today's access
record statistics, today's access trend, today's top 5
abnormal record types, and regional counting statistics
of people stayed.
You can refresh to view the real-time trend, top 5 types,
and statistics, or export them in different formats.
See more details in Access Control Management .
Vehicle
The Vehicle module provides the real-time status of
parking spaces, today's occupancy rate of parking
spaces, today's parking duration distributions, and
today's vehicle passing trend.
You can refresh to view the real-time information and
export it in different formats.
See more details in Vehicle and Parking Management .
Alarm
The Alarm module provides today's alarm statistics, the
last 7 days' alarm trend, today's top 5 alarm categories,
and today's top 5 alarm areas.
You can refresh to view the trend, top 5 categories, and
top 5 alarm areas, or export them in different formats.
See more details in Event and Alarm .

Quickly Access to On the scene graph of the default Home page, you can
Modules click the module names to quickly go to the
corresponding configuration and management page.

16
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5.1 Customize and Switch Home Page Mode

You can switch to the default Home page mode to three predefined modes (that are, System
Installation and Management, Security Control Management, and Attendance Management) for
different scenarios or customize a mode as needed.
Steps
1. In the top right corner of Home page, click Switch Mode to enter the mode switch page.

Figure 5-2 Customize and Switch Home Page Mode

2. Optional: In the All Modules field, click Recently Visited or All to show and quickly access to the
recently visited modules or all available modules.

Note
The displayed modules in the Recently Visited tab will keep refreshing according to the modules
visited by the current user.
3. Optional: Customize a mode.
1) In the top right corner, click Custom Mode to display mode configuration panel.
2) In the module name field, click to add module(s) to the mode.

17
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 5-3 Customize Home Page Mode

The added module(s) are displayed under the All Modules field.
3) Optional: Click or to remove the module(s) or section(s) from the mode.
4. At the top of the page, click a predefined or custom mode to switch the Home page mode.
The modules contained in the mode are displayed under the All Modules field. You can click the
tabs to switch the detailed and visual views of different modules.
5. Optional: In the top right corner of mode switching page, click Cancel to cancel setting mode.
6. Optional: In the top right corner of mode switching page, click Restore Default to switch to the
default mode.
7. In the top right corner of mode switching page, click Save to save the mode settings.

5.2 Customize Navigation Bar

To conveniently access some frequently used or important modules, you can customize the
navigation bar.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules to display the navigation bar and the
All Modules pane.

18
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 5-4 Navigation Bar and All Modules Panel

2. On the All Modules panel, move the cursor to a module item.
An icon appears beside the module name.
3. Click to add the selected module to the navigation bar.
The icon of the corresponding module turns to .
4. Optional: Click to remove the module from the navigation bar.

19
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 6 Getting Started

The following content describes the tasks typically involved in setting a working system.
Verify Initial Configuration of Devices and Other Servers
Before doing anything on the platform, make sure the devices (encoding devices, access control
devices, recording server, and so on) you are going to use are correctly mounted and connected
to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configurations are required in order
to connect the devices to the platform via network.
Log In to Web Client
Refer to Login for First Time for Admin User .
Activate License
Refer to Activate License - Online or Activate License - Offline .
Add Devices to Platform and Configure Area
The platform can quickly scan your network for relevant devices, and add them. Or you can add
the devices by inputting the required information manually. The devices added should be
organized into areas for convenient management. Refer to Resource Management and Area
Management .
Configure Recording Settings
You can record the video files of the cameras on the storage device according to the configured
recording schedule. The schedule can be set as continuous, alarm triggered, or command
triggered as desired. Refer to Configure Storage and Recording .
Configure Event and Alarm
The camera exception, device exception, server exception, alarm input, and so on, can trigger
linkage actions in the platform. Refer to Event and Alarm .
Configure Users
Specify who should be able to access the platform, and how. You can set different permissions for
the users to limit their operations. Refer to Role and User Management .
View How-to Videos
On the lower left of the log-in page, click Scan QR Code for Help, and then scan the QR Code by
your smart phone to view the how-to videos of the platform.

20
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 7 License Management

After installing HikCentral Professional, you have a temporary License for a specified number of
devices and limited functions. To ensure the proper use of HikCentral Professional, you can activate
the SYS to access more functions and manage more devices. If you do not want to activate the SYS
now, you can skip this chapter and activate the system later.
Two types of License are available for HikCentral Professional:
● Base: You need to purchase at least one basic License to activate the HikCentral Professional.

● Expansion: If you want to increase the capability of your system, you can purchase an expanded

License to get additional features.

Note
● Only the admin user can perform the activation, update, and deactivation operation.
● If you encounter any problems during activation, update, and deactivation, please send the
server logs to our technical support engineers.

7.1 Activate License - Online

If the SYS server to be activated can properly connect to the Internet, you can activate the SYS
server in online mode.
Steps
1. Log in to HikCentral Professional via the Web Client. Refer to Login via Web Client .
2. On the Home page, click Activate to open the Activate License panel.
3. Click Online Activation to activate the License in online mode.

21
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 7-1 Activate License in Online Mode

4. Enter the activation code received when you purchased your License.

Note
● If you have purchased more than one Licenses, you can click and enter other activation
codes.
● The activation code should contain 16 characters or 32 characters (except dashes).

5. Check I accept the terms of the agreement to open the License Agreement panel and click OK.
6. Optional: Select the machine environment type.
Physical Machine (Default)

22
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

A physical computer that contains hardware specifications and is used for running the SYS. If
the hardware changed, the License will be invalid, and the SYS may not run normally.
®
AWS (Amazon Web Services)
A virtual machine that provides the cloud computing services for running the SYS.
®
Azure (Microsoft Azure)
A virtual machine that provides the cloud computing services for running the SYS.

Note
If you select the AWS or Azure as the machine environment type, the pStor server, Streaming
Server, and other external servers cannot access the platform. And the Rose hot spare system is
also not supported.
7. Optional: Check the Hot Spare, select type, and enter the IP address if you want to build a hot
spare system.

Note
● You must select Hot Spare mode when you install the system.

● For how to build the hot spare system, please contact our technical support engineers.

8. Click Activate.
The email settings pane will appear after you activated the License.
9. Enter an email address for the admin user.

Note
This email is used to receive the License activation code when the admin user forgets the
password for logging in to the platform and the activation code at the same time.
10. Set the email server parameters. See details in Configure Email Account .
11. Click OK to save the email settings.

7.2 Activate License - Offline

If the SYS to be activated cannot connect to the Internet, you can activate the License in offline
mode.
Steps
1. Log in to HikCentral Professional via the Web Client.
2. On the Home page, click Activate to open the Activate License panel.
3. Click Offline Activation to activate the License in offline mode.

23
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 7-2 Activate License in Offline Mode

4. Enter the activation code received when you purchased your License.

Note
● If you have purchased more than one Licenses, you can click and enter other activation
codes.
● The activation code should contain 16 characters or 32 characters (except dashes).

5. Check I accept the terms of the agreement to open the License Agreement panel and click OK.
6. Optional: Select the machine environment type.
Physical Machine (Default)

24
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

A physical computer that contains hardware specifications and is used for running the SYS. If
the hardware changed, the License will be invalid, and the SYS may not run normally.
®
AWS (Amazon Web Services)
A virtual machine that provides the cloud computing services for running the SYS.
®
Azure (Microsoft Azure)
A virtual machine that provides the cloud computing services for running the SYS.

Note
If you select the AWS or Azure as the machine environment type, the pStor server, Streaming
Server, and other external servers cannot access the platform. And the Rose hot spare system is
also not supported.
7. Optional: Check the Hot Spare, select type, and enter the IP address if you want to build a hot
spare system.

Note
● You must select Hot Spare mode when you install the system.

● For how to build the hot spare system, please contact our technical support engineers.

8. Click Generate Request File.

A request file named "ActivationRequestFile.bin" will be downloaded. Save the request file to
the proper directory or the removable storage medium (e.g., USB flash disk).
9. Copy the request file to the computer that can connect to the Internet.
10. On the computer which can connect to the Internet, enter the following website: https://
kms.hikvision.com/#/active .
11. Click and then select the downloaded request file.

25
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 7-3 Select Request File

12. Click Submit.
A respond file named "ActivationResponseFile.bin" will be downloaded. Save the respond file
to the proper directory or the removable storage medium (e.g., USB flash disk).
13. Copy the respond file to the proper directory of the computer that accesses HikCentral
Professional via the Web Client.
14. In the Offline Activation panel, click and select the downloaded respond file.
15. Click Activate.
The email settings pane will appear after you activated the License.
16. Enter an email address for the admin user.

Note
This email is used to receive the License activation code when the admin user forgets the
password for logging in to the platform and the activation code at the same time.
17. Set the email server parameters. See details in Configure Email Account .
18. Click OK to save the email settings.

7.3 Update License - Online

As your project grows, you may need to increase the connectable number of resources (e.g.,
cameras) for your HikCentral Professional. If the SYS to be updated can properly connect to the
Internet, you can update the License in online mode.

26
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

Contact your dealer or our sales team to purchase a License for additional features.
Steps
1. Log in to HikCentral Professional via the Web Client. Refer to Login via Web Client for details.
2. In the top right corner of Home page, move the cursor to the Maintenance and Management to
show the drop-down menu.
3. Click Update License in the drop-down menu to open the Update License panel.
4. Click Online Update to update the License in online mode.
5. Enter the activation code received when you purchase your License.

Note
● If you have purchased more than one Licenses, you can click and enter other activation
codes.
● The activation code should contain 16 characters or 32 characters (except dashes).

6. Check I accept the terms of the agreement to open the License Agreement panel and click OK.
7. Click Update.

7.4 Update License - Offline

As your project grows, you may need to increase the connectable number of cameras for your
HikCentral Professional. If the SYS to be updated cannot connect to the Internet, you can update
the system in offline mode.
Before You Start
Contact your dealer or our sales team to purchase a License for additional features.
Steps
1. Log in to HikCentral Professional via the Web Client.
2. In the top right corner of Home page, move the cursor to Maintenance and Management to
show the drop-down menu.
3. Click Update License in the drop-down menu to open the Update License pane.
4. Click Offline Update to update the License in the offline mode.

27
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 7-4 Update License in Offline Mode

5. Enter the activation code of your additional License.

Note
● If you have purchased more than one License, you can click and enter other activation
codes.
● The activation code should contain 16 characters or 32 characters (except dashes).

6. Check I accept the terms of the agreement to open the License Agreement panel and click OK.
7. Click Generate Request File.
A request file named "ActivationRequestFile.bin" will be downloaded. Save the request file to
the proper directory or the removable storage medium (e.g., USB flash disk).
8. Copy the request file to the computer that can connect to the Internet.

28
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

9. On the computer which can connect to the Internet, enter the following website: https://
kms.hikvision.com/#/active .
10. Click and then select the downloaded request file.

Figure 7-5 Select Request File

11. Click Submit.
A respond file named "ActivationResponseFile.bin" will be downloaded. Save the respond file
to the proper directory or the removable storage medium (e.g., USB flash disk).
12. Copy the respond file to the proper directory of the computer that accesses HikCentral
Professional via the Web Client.
13. In the offline update panel, click and select the downloaded respond file.
14. Click Update.

7.5 Deactivate License - Online

If you want to run the SYS on another PC or server, you should deactivate the SYS first and then
activate it again. If the computer or server on which the SYSrunning can properly connect to the
Internet, you can deactivate the License in online mode.
Steps
1. Log in to HikCentral Professional via the Web Client. Refer to Login via Web Client .
2. In the top right corner of Home page, move the cursor to the Maintenance and Management to
show the drop-down menu.
3. Click Deactivate License in the drop-down menu to open the Deactivate License panel.
4. Click Online Deactivation to deactivate the License in online mode.
5. Check the activation code(s) to be deactivated.

29
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

6. Click Deactivate.

7.6 Deactivate License - Offline

If you want to run the SYS on another computer or server, you should deactivate the SYS first and
then activate the SYS again. If the SYS to be deactivated cannot connect to the Internet, you can
deactivate the License in offline mode.
Steps
1. Log in to the HikCentral Professional via Web Client.
2. In the top right corner of the Client, move the cursor to the Maintenance and Management to
show the drop-down menu.
3. Click Deactivate License in the drop-down menu to open the Deactivate License pane.
4. Click Offline Deactivation to deactivate the License in offline mode.

30
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 7-6 Deactivate License in Offline Mode

5. Check the activation code(s) to be deactivated.
6. Click Generate Request File.

Note
After the request file is generated, the selected activation code(s) will be unavailable.
A request file named "ActivationRequestFile.bin" will be downloaded. Save the request file to
the proper directory or the removable storage medium (e.g., USB flash disk).
7. Copy the request file to the computer that can connect to the Internet.
8. On the computer which can connect to the Internet, enter the following website: https://
kms.hikvision.com/#/deactive .

31
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

9. Click and then select the downloaded request file.

Figure 7-7 Select Request File

10. Click Submit.
A respond file named "DectivationResponseFile.bin" will be downloaded. Save the respond file
to the proper directory or the removable storage medium (e.g., USB flash disk).
11. Copy the respond file to the proper directory of the computer that accesses HikCentral
Professional via the Web Client.
12. In the Offline Deactivation pane, click and select the downloaded respond file.
13. Click Deactivate.

7.7 View License Details

You can check the authorization details of the License you purchased and view the number of
manageable devices and function of your platform. If the License is not activated, you can also
view the trial period.
Steps
1. Log in to the HikCentral Professional via Web Client. See Login via Web Client for details.
2. In the top right corner of Home page, click Maintenance and Management to show the drop-
down menu.
3. Click License Details in the drop-down menu to open the License Details panel.

32
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 7-8 License Details Page

Note
For cameras with multiple sensors, no matter used as an individual camera or a channel of an
NVR/DVR, each one of them occupies a License of Cameras.
You can view the authorization details and check the expiry date of the trial License or the
License you purchased.
4. Optional: Click besides the Cameras(Exclude Cameras Imported from Site) to show the
number of facial and human body recognition cameras/ANPR cameras/thermal cameras (report
supported)/Open Network Video Interface cameras and click Configuration to select the added
cameras as these types of cameras, respectively.

33
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● Configuration of Open Network Video Interface cameras is not supported.

● If you do not configure the facial and human body recognition camera/ANPR camera/thermal

camera, these cameras' functions (facial and human body recognition, plate recognition, and
temperature report) cannot be performed normally in the platform.
5. Optional: Click License List to check all the activated License(s) of your platform and click an
activation code to view the related authorization details.

Figure 7-9 License List Page

34
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

7.8 Set SSP Expiration Prompt

SSP (Software Service Program ) refers to the platform's maintenance service, which contains the
primary service and the elite service, and has an expire date and needs to be upgraded before
expiration. You can set SSP expiration prompt on the platform. After that, when the SSP is going to
expire, you can receive an email reminding the expiration every day during the configured period.
Steps
1. In the top right corner of the client, select Maintenance and Management → License Details to
open the License Details panel.
2. Go to the bottom of details list and click to enter the SSP Expiration Prompt Settings panel.
3. Set the Overdue Reminder switch to ON.
4. Set the days when you will receive the prompt email before expiration.

Note
● You should enter an integer between 1 to 365.

● By default, the platform will send a prompt email 30 days before expiration.

5. Click Add User to add user(s) who can receive upgrade prompt.

Note
● You should configure the users' email addresses before adding them as recipients. The added

users can receive upgrade prompt via the bound email addresses.
● Up to 64 recipients can be added.

● You can click to delete the added user(s).

6. Click Add Email to add email address(es).

Note
You can add email of both the platform user(s) and other user(s). The platform will send
expiration prompt to the added email address(es).
7. Click Save.

35
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 8 Resource Management

HikCentral Professional supports multiple resource types, such as encoding device, Remote Site,
decoding device and Smart Wall. After adding them to the system, you can manage them,
configure required settings and perform further operations. For example, you can add encoding
devices for live view, playback, recording settings, event configuration, etc., add Remote Site for
central management of multiple systems, add Recording Server for storing the videos, add
Streaming Server for getting the video data stream from the server, and add Smart Wall for
displaying decoded video on smart wall.

8.1 Create Password for Inactive Device(s)

The devices with simple default password may be accessed by the unauthorized user easily. For the
security purpose, the default password is not provided for some devices. You are required to create
the password to activate them before adding them to the platform. Besides activating the device
one by one, you can also batch activate multiple devices which have the same password
simultaneously.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● This function should be supported by the device. Make sure the devices you want to activate

support this function.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server .
2. Select the device to be activated.
3. In the Online Device area, view the device status and select one or multiple inactive devices.
4. Click to open the device activation window.
5. Create a password in the password field, and confirm the password.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.

36
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Click Save to create the password for the device.

Note
If you have not set security questions, the window of setting security questions will pop up, and
you should select the method of resetting password and set the security questions as needed.
An Operation completed. message is displayed when the password is set successfully.
7. Click in the Operation column to change the device's IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and
so on if needed.

Note
For details, refer to Edit Online Device's Network Information .

8.2 Edit Online Device's Network Information

The online devices, which have IP addresses in the same local subnet with SYS server or Web
Client, can be detected by HikCentral Professional. For the detected online devices, you can edit
their network information as desired via HikCentral Professional remotely and conveniently. For
example, you can change the device IP address due to the changes of the network.
Before You Start
For some devices, you should activate it before editing its network information. Refer to Create
Password for Inactive Device(s) for details.
Perform this task when you need to edit the network information for the detected online devices.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server .
2. Select the device.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS server will be listed.
Local Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the Web Client will be listed.
4. View the device status, and click in the Operation column of an active device.
5. Edit the device parameters, such as IP address, device port, HTTP port, subnet mask, and
gateway.

37
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● If you have switched on Used DHCP, you can only edit the device port No.

● The parameters may vary for different device types.

6. Click .
7. Enter the device's password.
8. Click Save.

8.3 Manage Encoding Device

The encoding devices (e.g., camera, NVR, DVR) can be added to the system for management,
including editing and deleting the devices, remote configuration, changing online devices'
password, etc. You can also perform further operations based on the added devices, such as live
view, video recording, and event settings,

8.3.1 Add Detected Online Encoding Devices

The system can perform an automated detection for available encoding devices in the network
where the Web Client or server is located, which makes the devices' information about themselves
(e.g., IP address) recognized by the system. Based on the information, you can add the devices
quickly.
You can add one online devices at a time, or add multiple online devices in a batch.

Note
You should install the web control according to the instructions and then the online device
detection function is available.

Add a Detected Online Encoding Device

For the detected online encoding devices, you can add the device one by one to HikCentral
Professional by specifying its user name, password and some other parameters.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices (cameras, DVRs, etc.) you are going to use are correctly installed and

connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is

required in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .

38
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left panel.

3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
As the default selection, the detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS
server will be listed in the Online Device area.
Local Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the Web Client will be listed in the
Online Device area.
4. In the Online Device area, select Hikvision Private Protocol/ Hikvision ISUP Protocol/Open
Network Video Interface Protocol to filter the detected online devices.

Note
● Select Hikvision Private Protocol/Hikvision ISUP Protocol to add a Hikvision device and select

Open Network Video Interface Protocol to add a third-party device.

● To display the devices which are added to the platform via Open Network Video Interface/

ISUP protocol, you can go to → All Modules → General → System Configuration →

Network → Device Access Protocol and check Access via Open Network Video Interface
Protocol/Allow ISUP Registration.
5. In the Online Device area, select the active device to be added.
6. Click Add to Device List to open the Add Online Device window.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
7. Set the required information.
Device Address
The IP address of the device, which is shown automatically.
Device Port
The port number of the device, which is shown automatically. The default port number is
8000.
Mapped Port
This function is only available when you select Hikvision Private Protocol to filter the
detected online devices. If you want to download pictures from the device, switch on
Mapped Port and enter the picture downloading port. By default, the port number is 80.
Verify Stream Encryption Key
Switch on Verify Stream Encryption Key, and enter stream encryption key in Stream
Encryption Key on Device field. Then when starting live view or remote playback of the
device, the client will verify the key stored in SYS server for security purpose.

39
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
This function should be supported by the devices. Refer to the user manual of the device for
getting the key.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the channels of the added devices to an
area.

Note
● You can import all the resources including cameras, alarm inputs and alarm outputs, or the

specified camera(s) to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import channels to area, you cannot perform operations such as live view,

playback, event settings, etc., for the cameras.

10. Optional: Select a Streaming Server to get the video stream of the channels via the server.

40
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● The camera(s) related to the selected server will be displayed, you can view their information

and can click the name of a camera to edit it.

● You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming

server when starting live view on the smart wall.

11. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, switch on Video Storage and select a storage
location for recording.
Encoding Device
The video files will be stored in the encoding device according to the configured recording
schedule.
Hybrid Storage Area Network
The video files will be stored in the Hybrid Storage Area Network according to the
configured recording schedule.
Cloud Storage Server
The video files will be stored in the Cloud Storage Server according to the configured
recording schedule.
pStor
According to the configured recording schedule, the video files will be stored in the pStor,
which is the storage access service for managing local HDDs and logical disks.
pStor Cluster Service
pStor Cluster Service is a service that can manage multiple pStors. When there are multiple
pStors storing a large number of video files, use pStor Cluster Service to manage these
pStors.

Note
● For adding the encoding device by domain name, the video files can only be stored in the

local storage of the device.

● Configure the Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server or pStor in advance, or its

storage location cannot display in the drop-down list. You can click Add New to add a new
Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server or pStor.
12. Optional: Set the quick recording schedule for added channels.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device and the
channels of the device will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, such as recording
schedule template, stream type, etc. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on Current
Site for details.
13. Click Add.
14. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the online device.

41
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of

Configurations the corresponding device.

Note
For detailed operation steps about remote configuration, see the
user manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online Hikvision devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Replace Device If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new
device. After you replace it, move the cursor on on the right of
the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Edit Bandwidth for Select one or more NVRs (V4.1.5 or later versions), and click Edit
Video Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the bandwidth upper-
Downloading limit for video downloading of the selected NVR(s).

Note
For details, refer to Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .

Set Time Zone Select one or more device(s), click Time Zone to set/edit the time
zone of the selected device(s).
Set N+1 Hot Spare Click N+1 Hot Spare to set N+1 hot spare for NVRs.
for NVR
Note
For details, refer to Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .

Wake Up the Solar After you add a solar camera, the network status will be displayed
Camera as offline, online (Asleep), or online (Waked up). You can click in
the Operation column to wake up an asleep camera. You can also
click the device name to enter the editing device page, and click
Wake Up to wake the device up.

42
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If a device is in sleep mode, the communication between the solar
camera and the platform is not supported.

Search Device Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
What to do next
For facial recognition cameras/ANPR cameras/thermal cameras (report supported), click
Maintenance and Management → License Details → → Configuration , and then select the
added cameras as these three types of cameras respectively. Otherwise, these cameras' functions
(facial recognition, plate recognition, and temperature report) cannot be performed normally on
the platform.

Add Detected Online Encoding Devices in a Batch

For the detected online encoding devices, if they have the same user name and password, you can
batch add multiple devices to HikCentral Professional.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices (cameras, DVRs, etc.) you are going to use are correctly installed and

connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is

required in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

details about activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left panel.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
As the default selection, the detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS
server will list in the Online Device area.
Local Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the Web Client will list in the
Online Device area.
4. In the Online Device area, select Hikvision Private Protocol/ Hikvision ISUP Protocol/Open
Network Video Interface Protocol to filter the detected online devices.

43
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● Select Hikvision Private Protocol/Hikvision ISUP Protocol to add a Hikvision device and select

Open Network Video Interface Protocol to add a third-party device.

● To display the devices which are added to the platform via Open Network Video Interface/

ISUP protocol, you can go to → All Modules → General → System Configuration →

Network → Device Access Protocol and check Access via Open Network Video Interface
Protocol/Allow ISUP Registration.
5. In the Online Device area, select the active devices to be added.
6. Click Add to Device List to open the Add Online Device dialog.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
7. Optional: Switch on Mapped Port and enter the picture downloading port if you want to
download pictures from the device.

Note
This function is only available when you select Hikvision Private Protocol to filter the detected
online devices. By default, the port No. is 80.
8. Optional: Switch on Verify Stream Encryption Key, and enter stream encryption key in Stream
Encryption Key on Device field.

Note
This function should be supported by the devices. Refer to the user manual of the device for
getting the key.
When you start the live view or remote playback of the camera, the client will verify the key
stored in SYS server for security purpose.
9. Enter the same user name and password.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change

44
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
10. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
11. Optional: Switch Add Resource to Area to on to import the channels of the added devices to
an area.

Note
● You can import all the resources including cameras, alarm inputs and alarm outputs, or the

specified camera(s) to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import channels to area, you cannot perform operations such as live view,

playback, and event settings, for the cameras.

12. Optional: Select a Streaming Server to get the video stream of the channels via the server.

Note
● The camera(s) related to the selected server will be displayed, you can view their information

and can click the name of a camera to edit it.

● You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming

server when starting live view on the smart wall.

13. Click Add.
14. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the online devices in a batch.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of
Configurations the corresponding device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
password for the device(s).

45
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Replace Device If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new
device. After you replace it, move the cursor on on the right of
the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Edit Bandwidth for Select one or more NVRs (V4.1.5 or later versions), and click Edit
Video Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the bandwidth upper-
Downloading limit for video downloading of the selected NVR(s).

Note
For details, refer to Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .

Set Time Zone Select one or more device(s), click Time Zone to set/edit the time
zone of the selected device(s).
Set N+1 Hot Spare Click N+1 Hot Spare to set N+1 hot spare for NVRs.
for NVR
Note
For details, refer to Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .

Wake Up the Solar After you add a solar camera, the network status will be displayed
Camera as offline, online (Asleep), or online (Waked up). You can click in
the Operation column to wake up an asleep camera. You can also
click the device name to enter the editing device page, and click
Wake Up to wake the device up.

Note
If a device is in sleep mode, the communication between the solar
camera and the platform is not supported.

Search Device Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
What to do next
For facial recognition camera/ANPR camera/thermal camera (report supported), click Maintenance
and Management → License Details → → Configuration , and then select the added cameras as
these three types of cameras respectively. Otherwise, these cameras' functions (facial recognition,
plate recognition, and temperature report) cannot be performed normally in the system.

46
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.3.2 Add Encoding Device by IP Address/Domain

When you know the IP address or domain name of a device, you can add it to the platform by
specifying the IP address (or domain name), user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices (cameras, DVRs, etc.) you are going to use are correctly installed and
connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required
in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Encoding Device page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol/Open Network Video Interface Protocol/Dahua Private
Protocol as the Access Protocol.

Note
● Select Hikvision Private Protocol to add a Hikvision device and select Open Network Video

Interface Protocol/Dahua Private Protocol to add a third-party device.

● To display the devices which are added to the platform via Open Network Video Interface

protocol, you can go to → All Modules → General → System Configuration → Network →

Device Access Protocol and check Access via Open Network Video Interface Protocol.
5. Select IP Address/Domain as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required information.
Device Address
The IP address or domain name of the device.
Encrypted Add
This function is for Hikvision Private Protocol only. If you check Encrypted Add, the SDK
service port will be encrypted.

Note
After the device is added to the platform, will appear beside the device name.
Device Port
The default device port No. is 8000. If you check Encrypted Add, the default port No. is 8443.
Mapped Port

47
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

This function is used for downloading pictures from devices added by Hikvision Private
Protocol. Set the Mapped Port switch to on and enter the picture downloading port No. that
you have configured in the remote configuration page of the device. The default port No. is
80.
Verify Stream Encryption Key
This function is for Hikvision Private Protocol only. Switch Verify Stream Encryption Key to
on, and enter the stream encryption key in the following Stream Encryption Key on Device
field. Then when starting live view or remote playback of the device, the client will verify the
key stored in SYS server for security purpose.

Note
This function should be supported by the devices. For details about getting the key, refer to
the user manual of the device.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
User Name
The user name for administrator created when activating the device or the added non-admin
users. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional using the non-admin user, your
permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
8. Optional: Switch Add Resource to Area to on to import the channels of the added devices to an
area.

48
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can import all the resources including cameras, alarm inputs and alarm outputs, or the

specified camera(s) to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import channels to area, you cannot perform operations such as live view,

playback, event settings, for the cameras.

9. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a Streaming Server to get the video
stream of the channels via the server.

Note
● The camera(s) related to the selected server will be displayed, you can view their information

and can click the name of a camera to edit it.

● You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming

server when starting live view on the smart wall.

10. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, switch on Video Storage and select a storage
location for recording.
Encoding Device
The video files will be stored in the encoding device according to the configured recording
schedule.
Hybrid Storage Area Network
The video files will be stored in the Hybrid Storage Area Network according to the
configured recording schedule.
Cloud Storage Server
The video files will be stored in the Cloud Storage Server according to the configured
recording schedule.
pStor
According to the configured recording schedule, the video files will be stored in the pStor,
which is the storage access service for managing local HDDs and logical disks.
pStor Cluster Service
pStor Cluster Service is a service that can manage multiple pStors. When there are multiple
pStors storing a large number of video files, use pStor Cluster Service to manage these
pStors.

Note
● For adding the encoding device by domain name, the video files can only be stored in the
local storage of the device.
● You should configure the Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server or pStor in
advance, or its storage location cannot be displayed in the drop-down list. You can click Add
New to add a new Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server or pStor.

49
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

11. Optional: Set the quick recording schedule for added channels.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device and the
channels of the device will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, such as recording
schedule template, stream type. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site for
details.
12. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the encoding device and back to the encoding device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other encoding devices.
13. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the devices.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of
Configurations the corresponding device.

Note
For detailed operation steps for the remote configuration, see the
user manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change
the password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Edit Bandwidth for Select one or more NVRs (V4.1.5 or later versions), and click Edit
Video Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the bandwidth upper-
Downloading limit for video downloading of the selected NVR(s).

Note
For details, refer to Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .

Set Time Zone Select one or more device(s), click Time Zone to set/edit the time
zone of the selected device(s).
Set N+1 Hot Spare Click N+1 Hot Spare to set N+1 hot spare for NVRs.
for NVR
Note
For details, refer to Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .

Replace Device If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new
device. After you replace it, move the cursor on on the right of

50
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the

replacement.
Search Device Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
What to do next
For facial recognition camera/ANPR camera/thermal camera (report supported), click Maintenance
and Management → License Details → → Configuration → View , and then select the added
cameras as these three types of cameras respectively. Otherwise, these cameras' functions (facial
recognition, plate recognition, and temperature report) cannot be performed normally in the
system.

8.3.3 Add Encoding Devices by IP Segment

When multiple encoding devices to be added have the same port number, user name, password,
and have different IP addresses within a range, you can add devices by specifying the IP segment
and some other related parameters.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices (cameras, DVRs, etc.) you are going to use are correctly installed and
connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required
in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Encoding Device page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol/Open Network Video Interface Protocol/Dahua Private
Protocol as the Access Protocol.

Note
● Select Hikvision Private Protocol to add a Hikvision device, while select Open Network Video

Interface Protocol/Dahua Private Protocol to add a third-party device.

● To display devices which can be added to the platform via Open Network Video Interface

Protocol, you need to go to → All Modules → General → System Configuration →

Network → Device Access Protocol and check Access via Open Network Video Interface
Protocol.
5. Select IP Segment as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required information.

51
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Device Address
Enter the start IP address and the end IP address where the devices are located.
Encrypted Add
This function is for Hikvision Private Protocol only. If you check Encrypted Add, the SDK
service port will be encrypted.

Note
After the device is added to the platform, will appear beside the device name.
Device Port
The default device port No. is 8000. If you check Encrypted Add, the default port No. is 8443.
Mapped Port
This function is used for downloading pictures from devices added by Hikvision Private
Protocol. Set the Mapped Port switch to on and enter the picture downloading port No. that
you have configured in the remote configuration page of the device. The default port No. is
80.
Verify Stream Encryption Key
This button is for Hikvision Private Protocol only. You can switch Verify Stream Encryption
Key to on, and enter the stream encryption key in the following Stream Encryption Key on
Device field. Then when starting live view or remote playback of the device, the client will
verify the key stored inSYS server for security purpose.

Note
This function should be supported by the devices. Refer to the User Manual of the device for
getting key.
User Name
The user name for administrator created when activating the device or the added non-admin
users. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional using the non-admin user, your
permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the device.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.

52
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added devices to an
area.

Note
● You can import all the resources including cameras, alarm inputs and alarm outputs, or the

specified camera(s) to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform the live view, playback, event

settings, for the resources.

9. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a Streaming Server to get the video
stream of the resources via the server.

Note
● The camera(s) related to the selected server will be displayed, you can view their information

and can click the name of a camera to edit it.

● You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming

server when starting live view on the smart wall.

10. Set the quick recording schedule for added resources.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device and the
resources of the device will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, such as recording
schedule template, stream type. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site for
details.
11. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the devices of which the IP addresses are between the start IP address and
end IP address and back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other encoding devices.
12. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of
Configurations the corresponding device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

53
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change
the password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Edit Bandwidth for Select one or more NVRs (V4.1.5 or later versions), and click Edit
Video Downloading Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the bandwidth upper-
limit for video downloading of the selected NVR(s).

Note
For details, refer to Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .

Set Time Zone Select one or more device(s), click Time Zone to set/edit the time
zone of the selected device(s).
Set N+1 Hot Spare Click N+1 Hot Spare to set N+1 hot spare for NVRs.
for NVR
Note
For details, refer to Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .

Replace Device If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new
device. After you replace it, move the cursor on on the right of
the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Search Device Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
What to do next
For facial recognition camera/ANPR camera/thermal camera (report supported), click Maintenance
and Management → License Details → → Configuration → View , and then select the added
cameras as these three types of cameras respectively. Otherwise, these cameras' functions (facial
recognition, plate recognition, and temperature report) cannot be performed normally in the
system.

8.3.4 Add Encoding Devices by Port Segment

When multiple encoding devices to be added have the same IP address, user name, password, and
have different port numbers within a range, you can add devices by specifying the port segment
and some other related parameters.

54
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

Make sure the devices (cameras, DVRs, etc.) you are going to use are correctly installed and
connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required
in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Encoding Device page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol/Open Network Video Interface Protocol/Dahua Private
Protocol as the access protocol.

Note
● Select Hikvision Private Protocol to add Hikvision devices and select Open Network Video

Interface Protocol/Dahua Private Protocol to add third-party devices.

● To display devices which can be added to the platform via Open Network Video Interface

Protocol, you need to go to → All Modules → General → System Configuration →

Network → Device Access Protocol and check Access via Open Network Video Interface
Protocol.
5. Select Port Segment as the adding mode.
6. Set the required information.
Device Address
Enter the IP address to add the devices which have the same IP address.
Encrypted Add
This function is for Hikvision Private Protocol only. If you check Encrypted Add, the SDK
service port will be encrypted.

Note
After the device is added to the platform, will appear beside the device name.
Device Port
The default device port No. is 8000. If you check Encrypted Add, the default port No. is 8443.
Mapped Port
This function is used for downloading pictures from devices added by Hikvision Private
Protocol. Set the Mapped Port switch to on and enter the picture downloading port number
that you have configured on the remote configuration page of the device. The default port
number is 80.

55
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Verify Stream Encryption Key

This button is for Hikvision Private Protocol only. You can switch Verify Stream Encryption
Key to on, and enter the stream encryption key in the following Stream Encryption Key on
Device field. Then when you start live view or remote playback of the device, the client will
verify the key stored in SYS server for security purpose.

Note
This function should be supported by the devices. Refer to the user manual of the device for
getting the key.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the channels of the added devices to an
area.

Note
● You can import all the channels including cameras, alarm inputs and alarm outputs, or the
specified camera(s) to the corresponding area.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.
● If you do not import channels to area, you cannot perform live view, playback, event settings,
etc., for the channels.

56
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

9. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a Streaming Server to get the video
stream of the channels via the server.

Note
● The camera(s) related to the selected server will be displayed, you can view their information

and can click the name of a camera to edit it.

● You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming

server when starting live view on the smart wall.

10. Optional: Set the quick recording schedule for added channels.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device and the
channels of the device will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, such as recording
schedule template, stream type. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site for
details.
11. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the devices of which the port number is between the start port number and
end port number and back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other devices.
12. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of
Configurations the corresponding device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change
the password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Edit Bandwidth for Select one or more NVRs (V4.1.5 or later versions), and click Edit
Video Downloading Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the bandwidth upper-
limit for video downloading of the selected NVR(s).

Note
For details, refer to Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .

57
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Set Time Zone Select one or more device(s), click Time Zone to set/edit the time
zone of the selected device(s).
Set N+1 Hot Spare Click N+1 Hot Spare to set N+1 hot spare for NVRs.
for NVR
Note
For details, refer to Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .

Replace Device If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new
device. After you replace it, move the cursor on on the right of
the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Search Device Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
What to do next
For facial recognition camera/ANPR camera/thermal camera (report supported), click Maintenance
and Management → License Details → → Configuration , and then select the added cameras as
these three types of cameras respectively. Otherwise, these cameras' functions (facial recognition,
plate recognition, and temperature report) cannot be performed normally in the system.

8.3.5 Add Encoding Device by Hik-Connect DDNS

You can add encoding devices with dynamic IP addresses to the system by domain name solutions
of Hik-Connect. Currently, the system only supports domain name solutions function of Hik-
Connect.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices (cameras, DVRs, etc.) you are going to use are correctly installed and

connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is

required in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have enabled Hik-Connect service for devices to be added on the remote

configuration page of the device. For details, refer to the user manual of Hik-Connect.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Encoding Device page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol as the Access Protocol.

58
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Select Hik-Connect DDNS as the adding mode.

6. Optional: Switch on Mapped Port and enter the picture downloading port No. that you have
configured on the remote configuration page of the device. The default port No. is 80.
7. Select a device source.
New Device
Add a new device to HikCentral Professional by Hik-Connect service.
Hik-Connect DDNS Device List
For users with a Hik-Connect account, you can add devices managed in your Hik-Connect
account to HikCentral Professional in a batch.

Note
You can hover your cursor onto to view details.
8. Enter the required information.
Hik-Connect DDNS Server Address
Enter the address of the Hik-Connect service. By default, it's https://open.ezvizlife.com.
Serial No.
Enter the serial No. of the device.
Verification Code
Enter the verification code of the device.
Stream Encryption Key on Device
After switching on Verify Stream Encryption Key, you should enter stream encryption key in
Stream Encryption Key on Device field. Then when starting live view or remote playback of
the camera, the client will verify the key stored in the SYS server for security purpose.

Note
This function should be supported by the devices. Refer to user manual of the device.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

59
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
9. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
10. Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the channels of the added devices to an area.

Note
● You can import all the channels including cameras, alarm inputs and alarm outputs, or the

specified camera(s) to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import channels to area, you cannot perform the live view, playback, event

settings, etc., for the channels.

11. Optional: If you choose to add resources to an area, select a Streaming Server to get the video
stream of the channels via the server.

Note
● The camera(s) related to the selected server will be displayed, you can view their information

and can click the name of a camera to edit it.

● You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming

server when starting live view on the smart wall.

12. Set the quick recording schedule for added resources.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device and the
resources of the device will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, such as recording
schedule template, stream type. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site for
details.
13. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the encoding device and back to the encoding device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other encoding devices.
14. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the devices.

60
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of

Configurations the corresponding device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Edit Bandwidth for Select one or more NVRs (V4.1.5 or later versions), and click Edit
Video Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the bandwidth upper-
Downloading limit for video downloading of the selected NVR(s).

Note
For details, refer to Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .

Set Time Zone Select one or more device(s), click Time Zone to set/edit the time
zone of the selected device(s).
Set N+1 Hot Spare Click N+1 Hot Spare to set N+1 hot spare for NVRs.
for NVR
Note
For details, refer to Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .

Replace Device If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new
device. After you replace it, move the cursor on on the right of
the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Wake Up the Solar After you add a solar camera, the network status will be displayed
Camera as offline, online (Asleep), or online (Waked up). You can click in
the Operation column to wake up an asleep camera. You can also
click the device name to enter the editing device page, and click
Wake Up to wake the device up.

61
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If a device is in sleep mode, the communication between the solar
camera and the platform is not supported.

Search Device Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
What to do next
For facial recognition camera/ANPR camera/thermal camera (report supported), click Maintenance
and Management → License Details → → Configuration , and then select the added cameras as
these three types of cameras respectively. Otherwise, these cameras' functions (facial recognition,
plate recognition, and temperature report) cannot be performed normally in the system.

8.3.6 Add Encoding Device by Device ID

For the encoding devices supporting ISUP, you can add them by specifying a predefined device ID,
key, etc. This is a cost-effective choice when you need to manage an encoding device without fixed
IP address by HikCentral Professional.
Before You Start
● Make sure the encoding devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to

the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to
be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Before adding devices supporting Hikvision ISUP 2.6/4.0 to the system, you need to set related

configuration to allow these devices to access the system. For details, refer to Device Access
Protocol .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Encoding Device page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the Access Protocol.

Note
To display devices which can be added to the platform via ISUP, you need to go to → All
Modules → General → System Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and enable
Allow ISUP Registration.
5. Select Device ID as the adding mode.

62
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

6. Enter the required parameters, including the device ID and device name.

Note
For devices supporting accessing the platform via ISUP 5.0, you should enter the ISUP login
password.
7. Optional: Switch on Verify Stream Encryption Key if the device supports and enables stream
encryption, and enter the stream encryption key on device.
8. Optional: Switch on Picture Storage and set the location for picture storage.

Note
● You can select Local Storage, Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, pStor, or

Network Video Recorder as the storage location.

● If you select Local Storage as Storage Location, you can click Configuration to configure

Storage on SYS Server for the captured pictures. For detailed information, see Configure
Storage for Imported Pictures and Files .
9. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
10. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added devices to an
area.

Note
● You can import all the resources including cameras, alarm inputs and alarm outputs, or the

specified camera(s) to the corresponding area.

● For video access control terminal of a device, the camera on the terminal will also be

imported to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform operations such as live view,

playback, event settings, for the cameras.

11. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a Streaming Server to get the video
stream of the resources via the server.

Note
● The camera(s) related to the selected server will be displayed, you can view their information

and can click the name of a camera to edit it.

● You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming

server when starting live view on the smart wall.

12. Optional: Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device
and the resources of the device will start recording according to the schedule.

63
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

13. Finish adding the device.

- Click Add to add the encoding device and back to the encoding device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other encoding devices.
14. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the devices.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of
Configurations the corresponding device.

Note
For detailed operation steps for the remote configuration, see the
user manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Edit Bandwidth for Select one or more NVRs (V4.1.5 or later versions), and click Edit
Video Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the bandwidth upper-
Downloading limit for video downloading of the selected NVR(s).

Note
For details, refer to Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .

Set Time Zone Select one or more device(s), click Time Zone to set/edit the time
zone of the selected device(s).
Set N+1 Hot Spare Click N+1 Hot Spare to set N+1 hot spare for NVRs.
for NVR
Note
For details, refer to Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .

Replace Device If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new
device. After you replace it, move the cursor on on the right of
the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Wake Up the Solar After you add a solar camera, the network status will be displayed
Camera as offline, online (Asleep), or online (Waked up). You can click in
the Operation column to wake up an asleep camera. You can also

64
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

click the device name to enter the editing device page, and click
Wake Up to wake the device up.

Note
If a device is in sleep mode, the communication between the solar
camera and the platform is not supported.

Search Device Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
What to do next
For facial recognition cameras/ANPR cameras/thermal cameras (report supported), click
Maintenance and Management → License Details → → Configuration , and then select the
added cameras as these three types of cameras respectively. Otherwise, these cameras' functions
(facial recognition, plate recognition, and temperature report) cannot be performed normally on
the platform.

8.3.7 Add Encoding Devices by Device ID Segment

If you need to add multiple encoding devices which have no fixed IP addresses and support ISUP
Protocol toHikCentral Professional, you can add them to HikCentral Professional at a time after
configuring device ID segment for the devices.
Before You Start
● Make sure the encoding devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to

the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to
be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Before adding devices supporting ISUP 2.6/4.0 protocol to the system, you need to set related

configuration to allow these devices to access the system. For details, refer to Device Access
Protocol .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Encoding Device page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the Access Protocol.

65
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
To display devices which can be added to the platform via ISUP, you need to go to → All
Modules → General → System Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and enable
Allow ISUP Registration.
5. Select Device ID Segment as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required parameters, including the start device ID and end device ID.

Note
For devices supporting accessing the platform via ISUP 5.0, you should enter the ISUP login
password.
7. Optional: Switch on Verify Stream Encryption Key if the device supports, and enter the stream
encryption key on device.
8. Optional: Switch on Picture Storage and set the location for picture storage.

Note
● You can select Local Storage, Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, pStor, or

Network Video Recorder as the storage location.

● If you select Local Storage as Storage Location, you can click Configuration to configure

Storage on SYS Server for the captured pictures. For detailed information, see Configure
Storage for Imported Pictures and Files .
9. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
10. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added devices to an
area.

Note
● You can import all the resources including cameras, alarm inputs and alarm outputs, or the

specified camera(s) to the corresponding area.

● For video access control terminal of a device, the camera on the terminal will also be

imported to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform operations such as live view,

playback, event settings, for the cameras.

11. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a Streaming Server to get the video
stream of the resources via the server.

66
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● The camera(s) related to the selected server will be displayed, you can view their information

and can click the name of a camera to edit it.

● You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming

server when starting live view on the smart wall.

12. Optional: Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device
and the resources of the device will start recording according to the schedule.
13. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the encoding device and back to the encoding device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other encoding devices.
14. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding devices.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of
Configurations the corresponding device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change the Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change
Password the password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Edit Bandwidth for Select one or more NVRs (V4.1.5 or later versions), and click Edit
Video Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the bandwidth upper-
Downloading limit for video downloading of the selected NVR(s).

Note
For details, refer to Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .

Set Time Zone Select one or more device(s), click Time Zone to set/edit the time
zone of the selected device(s).
Set N+1 Hot Spare Click N+1 Hot Spare to set N+1 hot spare for NVRs.
for NVR
Note
For details, refer to Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .

67
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Replace the Device If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new
device. After you replace it, move the cursor on on the right of
the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Wake Up the Solar After you add a solar camera, the network status will be displayed
Camera as offline, online (Asleep), or online (Waked up). You can click in
the Operation column to wake up an asleep camera. You can also
click the device name to enter the editing device page, and click
Wake Up to wake the device up.

Note
If a device is in sleep mode, the communication between the solar
camera and the platform is not supported.

Search Device Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
What to do next
For facial recognition cameras/ANPR cameras/thermal cameras (report supported), click
Maintenance and Management → License Details → → Configuration , and then select the
added cameras as these three types of cameras respectively. Otherwise, these cameras' functions
(facial recognition, plate recognition, and temperature report) cannot be performed normally on
the platform.

8.3.8 Add Encoding Devices in a Batch

When there are multiple devices to be added, you can edit the predefined template containing the
required device information, and import the template to HikCentral Professional to add devices in
a batch.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices (cameras, DVR, etc.) you are going to use are correctly installed and
connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required
in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Perform this task when you need to add devices by importing the template which contains
information of multiple devices.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Encoding Device page.

68
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol/Hikvision ISUP Protocol//Dahua Private Protocol as the access
protocol.

Note
● Select Hikvision Private Protocol/Hikvision ISUP Protocol to add a Hikvision device and select

Open Network Video Interface Protocol/Dahua Private Protocol to add a third-party device.
● To display devices which can be added to the platform via ISUP, you need to go to → All
Modules → General → System Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and
enable Allow ISUP Registration.
5. Select Batch Import as the adding mode.
6. Click Download Template and save the predefined template (excel file) on your PC.
7. Open the exported template file and enter the required information of the devices to be added
in the corresponding column.
8. Click and select the edited file.
9. Optional: Switch on Picture Storage and set the location for picture storage.

Note
● You can select Local Storage, Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, pStor, or

Network Video Recorder as the storage location.

● If you select Local Storage as Storage Location, you can click Configure to configure Storage

on SYS Server for the captured pictures. For detailed information, see Configure Storage for
Imported Pictures and Files .
10. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
11. Finish adding devices.
- Click Add to add the devices and go back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add next batch of devices.
12. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding devices in a batch.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of
Configurations the corresponding device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

69
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Edit Bandwidth for Select one or more NVRs (V4.1.5 or later versions), and click Edit
Video Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the bandwidth upper-
Downloading limit for video downloading of the selected NVR(s).

Note
For details, refer to Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .

Set Time Zone Select one or more device(s), click Time Zone to set/edit the time
zone of the selected device(s).
Set N+1 Hot Spare Click N+1 Hot Spare to set N+1 hot spare for NVRs.
for NVR
Note
For details, refer to Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .

Replace Device If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new
device. After you replace it, move the cursor on on the right of
the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Wake Up the Solar After you add a solar camera, the network status will be displayed
Camera as offline, online (Asleep), or online (Waked up). You can click in
the Operation column to wake up an asleep camera. You can also
click the device name to enter the editing device page, and click
Wake Up to wake the device up.

Note
If a device is in sleep mode, the communication between the solar
camera and the platform is not supported.

Search Device Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
What to do next
For facial recognition camera/ANPR camera/thermal camera (report supported), click Maintenance
and Management → License Details → → Configuration , and then select the added cameras as

70
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

these three types of cameras respectively. Otherwise, these cameras' functions (facial recognition,
plate recognition, and temperature report) cannot be performed normally in the system.

8.3.9 Add Encoding Device from the Site on Hik-ProConnect

If you have configured parameters for the site on Hik-ProConnect accessing the platform, you can
add encoding devices from the site on Hik-ProConnect to the platform. Deleting devices on the
platform will not delete devices from the site on Hik-ProConnect.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices (cameras, DVRs, etc.) you are going to use are correctly installed and

connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is

required in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have enabled Access Site on Hik-ProConnect in System Configuration and

configured the required parameters. For details, refer to .

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Encoding Device page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Hik-ProConnect Protocol as the access protocol.
5. Select the device source.
- Select New Device, and enter the device serial No., and verification code.

Note
Make sure the new device to be added has registered to Hik-Connect. After the device is
added, the corresponding site where the device is on Hik-ProConnect will also be added.
- Select Hik-ProConnect Device List, and select a device from the list.

Note
If the selected device is deleted from the platform, it will not be deleted from the site on Hik-
ProConnect.
6. Set device parameters.
Verify Stream Encryption Key
Switch on Verify Stream Encryption Key, and enter the stream encryption key on device.
Then when you start live view or remote playback of the device, the client will verify the key
stored in SYS server for security purpose.

71
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
This function should be supported by the device. Refer to the user manual of the device to
get the key.
Device Name
The name of the device to be added.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the channels of the added devices to an
area.

Note
● You can import all the channels including cameras, alarm inputs and alarm outputs, or the

specified camera(s) to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import channels to area, you cannot perform live view, playback, event settings,

etc., for the channels.

9. Optional: If you need to add resources to area, select a Streaming Server to get the video stream
of the channels via the server.

Note
● The camera(s) related to the selected server will be displayed, you can view their information

and click the name of a camera to edit it.

● You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming

server when starting live view on the smart wall.

10. Optional: Set the quick recording schedule for added channels.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device and the
channels of the device will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, such as recording
schedule template, stream type. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site for
details.
11. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the current device and go back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the current device and continue to add other devices.
12. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the device.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of
Configurations the corresponding device.

72
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change
the password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Edit Bandwidth for Select one or more NVRs (V4.1.5 or later versions), and click Edit
Video Downloading Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the bandwidth upper-
limit for video downloading of the selected NVR(s).

Note
For details, refer to Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading .

Set Time Zone Select one or more device(s), click Time Zone to set/edit the time
zone of the selected device(s).
Set N+1 Hot Spare Click N+1 Hot Spare to set N+1 hot spare for NVRs.
for NVR
Note
For details, refer to Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .

Replace Device If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new
device. After you replace it, move the cursor on on the right of
the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Search Device Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).

8.3.10 Limit Bandwidth for Video Downloading

You can limit bandwidth for video downloading of specific NVRs to save video on the total
bandwidth, and thus ensuring the fluency of main features such as live view.

73
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The NVR should be of V4.1.50 or later versions.

In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server → Encoding Device to enter the encoding device management
page, select encoding device(s) and click Edit Bandwidth for Video Downloading to set the
bandwidth upper-limit for video downloading of the selected device(s).

8.3.11 Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR

You can form an N+1 hot spare system with several NVRs (Network Video Recorder). The system
consists of several host servers and a spare server. When the host server fails, the spare server
switches into operation (such as video recording, searching video for playback, etc.), and thus
increasing the video storage reliability of HikCentral Professional.
Before You Start
● At least two online NVRs should be added to form an N+1 hot spare system. For details about

adding NVR, see Manage Encoding Device .

● Make sure the NVRs you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as

specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
If the N+1 hot spare settings have already been configured on the NVR, select → All Modules →
General → Resource Management → Device and Server → Encoding Device → N+1 Hot Spare →
Get Hot Spare Settings from Device to upload the hot spare settings from the device to HikCentral
Professional. If the N+1 hot spare settings haven't been configured on the device, perform the
following task to set N+1 hot spare for the NVR.
Steps

Note
● The N+1 hot spare function is only supported by NVRs and Hybrid Storage Area Networks. For
details about configuring N+1 hot spare system with Hybrid Storage Area Networks, see Set N+1
Hot Spare for Hybrid SAN .
● The spare server cannot be selected for storing videos until it switches to host server.
● The host server cannot be set as a spare server and the spare server cannot be set as a host
server.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device → N+1 Hot Spare to enter the N+1 Configuration
page.
3. Click Add to set N+1 hot spare.
4. Select a NVR in the Spare drop-down list to set it as the spare server.

74
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Select the NVR(s) in the Host field to set them as the host server.
6. Click Add.

Note
The recording schedules configured on the NVR will be deleted after setting it as the spare
Recording Server.
7. Click Apply Hot Spare Settings to Device to apply the Hot Spare settings to the devices to take
effect.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations after setting the hot spare.
Edit Hot Click on the Operation column, and you can edit the spare and host
Spare settings.
Delete Hot Click on the Operation column to cancel the N+1 hot spare settings.
Spare
Note
Canceling the N+1 hot spare will cancel all the host-spare associations and
clear the recording schedule on the spare server.

8.3.12 Manage Device Applications

You can add device applications to some encoding devices to update those devices.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to use are added to the platform. For details about adding

encoding device, see Manage Encoding Device .

● Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps

Note
Currently not all encoding devices can be updated via device applications.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device Application on the left.
3. Click Add Device Application.
4. On the right pop-up window, click to upload a device application package.
5. Select available device(s) to add the application.
6. Click Save to add the application to the device.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding applications to device(s).

75
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

View Device Select an encoding device on the list, view device application details
Application Details on the right, including device application name, device application
version, system memory usage, smart RAM usage, and flash usage.
Enable/Disable Select an encoding device on the list, click / to enable/disable
Device Application the corresponding device application.
Add Device Select an encoding device on the list, click Add to add device
Application to application package for this device.
Specific Device
Refresh Device Select an encoding device on the list, click Refresh to refresh the
Application List device application list.
Delete Device Select an encoding device on the list, and select the device
Application application. Click Delete to delete the device applications.
View Adding Click Adding Records to open the adding records page, you can view
Records the records about adding device applications in specific time period.

Note
The icon indicates that adding device application(s) failed.

Search for Devices On the top of the page, enter the keywords of device name or device
address, and click to search devices for adding device applications.

8.4 Manage Access Control Device

You can add the access control devices to the system for access permission configuration, time and
attendance management, etc.

8.4.1 Add Detected Online Access Control Devices

The active online access control devices in the same local subnet with the current Web Client or
SYS server will be displayed on a list. You can add one online device one by one, or add multiple
online devices in a batch.

Note
You should install the web control according to the instructions and then the online device
detection function is available.

76
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Add a Detected Online Access Control Device

The platform automatically detects online access control devices on the same local subnet with the
client or SYS server. You can add the detected access control devices to the platform one by one if
they have different user account.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Follow the steps to add a detected online access control device to the platform.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the SYS server.
Local Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the current Web Client.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol and Hikvision ISUP Protocol to filter the detected devices by
protocol types.

Note
Make sure you have enabled the ISUP protocol registration to allow the devices to access the
system, otherwise the online devices will not be displayed. You can go to → All Modules →
General → System Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and switch on Allow
ISUP Registration. Before adding devices by ISUP 2.6/4.0 protocol to the system, you need to
check Allow ISUP of Earlier Version.
5. Select an active device that you want to add to the platform.
6. Click Add to Device List.

Note
For devices whose device port No. is 8000 and HTTP port No. is 80, the Hikvision Private
Protocol is selected as the access protocol by default. For devices whose device port No. is 0 but
the HTTP port No. is 80, the ISAPI Protocol is selected as the access protocol.
7. Configure the basic information for the device, including access protocol, device address, device
port, device name, user name, and password.

77
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.

Note
The access protocol will not show in the following situations:
● You check more than one device in the Online Device area.

● You check only one device in the Online Device area.

○ You can select Hikvision ISUP Protocol in the Online Device area.

○ You can select Hikvision Private Protocol in the Online Device area, and device port is 0.

8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.

Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including alarm inputs,
alarm outputs, and access points) to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by device name or select an existing area.

● You can import all the access points or specific access point(s) to the area.

● For the video access control terminal of a device, the camera on the terminal will also be

imported to the corresponding area.

10. Optional: Check Restore Default to restore configured device parameters to default settings.

Note
● Not all the device parameters will be restored. Network parameters such as IP address, port

No., and password will be kept.

● It is recommended that you should restore to default when adding an online device that has

been added to other platforms for the first time.

11. Click Add.
12. Optional: Perform further operations on the added device(s).

78
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device

Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device,
restore the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device
Parameters for detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Privacy To protect the person's private information including the person's name
Settings and profile picture, you can configure privacy settings for online access
control devices. For details, refer to Privacy Settings .
Set Device's On the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter key words in the search box and click to search for a specific
Devices device.

Add Detected Online Access Control Devices in a Batch

If the detected online access control devices share the same user name and password, you can add
multiple devices at a time.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

79
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the SYS server.
Local Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the current Web Client.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol and Hikvision ISUP Protocol to filter the detected devices by
protocol types.

Note
Make sure you have enabled the ISUP protocol registration to allow the devices to access the
system, otherwise the online devices will not be displayed. You can go to → All Modules →
General → System Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and switch on Allow
ISUP Registration. Before adding devices by ISUP 2.6/4.0 protocol to the system, you need to
check Allow ISUP of Earlier Version.
5. Select the active devices that you want to add to the platform.
6. Click Add to Device List.

Note
For devices whose device port No. is 8000 and HTTP port No. is 80, the Hikvision Private
Protocol is selected as the access protocol by default. For devices whose device port No. is 0 but
the HTTP port No. is 80, the ISAPI Protocol is selected as the access protocol.
7. Set parameters for the devices.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
- Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)

80
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including alarm inputs,
alarm outputs, and access points) to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by device name or select an existing area.

● You can import all the access points or specific access point(s) to the area.

● For the video access control terminal of a device, the camera on the terminal will also be

imported to the corresponding area.

10. Optional: Check Restore Default to restore configured device parameters to default settings.

Note
● Not all the device parameters will be restored. Network parameters such as IP address, port

No., and password will be kept.

● It is recommended that you should restore to default when adding an online device that has

been added to other platforms for the first time.

11. Click Add.
12. Optional: Perform further operations on the added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device,
restore the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device
Parameters for detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password together.

Privacy You can configure privacy settings for online access control devices. For
Settings details, refer to Privacy Settings .
Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

81
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Set Device's On the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter key words in the search box and click to search for a specific
Devices device.

8.4.2 Add an Access Control Device by IP Address/Domain

If you know the IP address/domain of the access control device you want to add to the platform,
you can add the device by specifying its IP address, user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Access Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol, Hikvision ISUP Protocol, or Hikvision ISAPI Protocol as the
access protocol.
5. Select IP Address/Domain as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required parameters.

Note
By default, the device port number is 8000 when the access protocol is Hikvision Private
Protocol, while the device port number is 80 when the access protocol is Hikvision ISAPI
Protocol.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least

82
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including alarm inputs,
alarm outputs, and access points) to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by device name or select an existing area.

● You can import all the access points or specific access point(s) to the area.

● For the video access control terminal of a device, the camera on the terminal will also be

imported to the corresponding area.

9. Finish adding the device(s).
- Click Add to add the device(s) and return to the device management page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the device(s) and continue to add other devices.
10. Perform further operations on the added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device, restore
the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device Parameters for
detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

83
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Privacy To protect the person's private information including the person's name
Settings and profile picture, you can configure privacy settings for online access
control devices. For details, refer to Privacy Settings .
Replace If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new device
Device using the same IP address. After you replace it, move the cursor on on
the right of the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Set Device's In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to search
Devices for a specific device.

8.4.3 Add Access Control Devices by IP Segment

If the access control devices you want to add to the platform share the same user account, and
they are in the same IP segment, you can add them to the platform by specifying the start/end IP
address, user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Access Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol or Hikvision ISAPI Protocol as the access protocol.
5. Select IP Segment as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required information.

84
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
By default, the device port number is 8000 when the access protocol is Hikvision Private
Protocol, while the device port number is 80 when the access protocol is Hikvision ISAPI
Protocol.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including alarm inputs,
alarm outputs, and access points) to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by device name or select an existing area.

● You can import all the access points or specific access point(s) to the area.

● For the video access control terminal of a device, the camera on the terminal will also be

imported to the corresponding area.

● If you do not import access points to area, you cannot perform further configurations for the

access point.
9. Finish adding the device(s).
- Click Add to add the device(s) and return to the device management page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the device(s) and continue to add other devices.
10. Optional: Perform further operations on the added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device, restore
the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device Parameters for
detailed instructions.

85
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Privacy To protect the person's private information including the person's name
Settings and profile picture, you can configure privacy settings for online access
control devices. For details, refer to Privacy Settings .
Replace If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new device
Device using the same IP address. After you replace it, move the cursor on on
the right of the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Set Device's In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to search
Devices for a specific device.

8.4.4 Add an Access Control Device by Device ID

For access control devices supporting ISUP 4.0 or later protocol, you can add them by specifying a
predefined device ID and key. This is a cost-effective choice when you need to manage access
control devices that do not have fixed IP addresses.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

86
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Access Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the access protocol.

Note
Make sure you have enabled the ISUP protocol registration, otherwise the protocol will not be
displayed. You can go to → All Modules → General → System Configuration → Network →
Device Access Protocol and switch on Allow ISUP Registration. Before adding devices by ISUP
2.6/4.0 protocol to the system, you need to check Allow ISUP of Earlier Version.
5. Select Device ID as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required the information.
7. Optional: Switch on Picture Storage to set the storage location for pictures.
- Select pStor and select storage locations for the face picture library and captured pictures.

Note
This configuration only affects the facial recognition device which supports face comparison.
The storage location of captured pictures and face picture libraries cannot be the same.
- Select Local Storage as the storage location, click Configure to enable Local Storage and set
the storage locations for pictures and files as needed.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including alarm inputs,
alarm outputs, and access points) to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by device name or select an existing area.

● You can import all the access points or specific access point(s) to the area.

● For the video access control terminal of a device, the camera on the terminal will also be

imported to the corresponding area.

● If you do not import access points to area, you cannot perform further configurations for the

access point.
10. Finish adding the device(s).
- Click Add to add the device(s) and return to the device management page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the device(s) and continue to add other devices.

87
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

11. Optional: Perform further operations on the added device(s).

Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device, restore
the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device Parameters for
detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Privacy To protect the person's private information including the person's name
Settings and profile picture, you can configure privacy settings for online access
control devices. For details, refer to Privacy Settings .
Replace If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new device
Device using the same IP address. After you replace it, move the cursor on on
the right of the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Set Device's On the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to search
Devices for a specific device.

8.4.5 Add Access Control Devices by Device ID Segment

If you need to add multiple access control devices which support ISUP 5.0 protocol and have no
fixed IP addresses to the platform, you can add them all at once after configuring a device ID
segment for the devices.

88
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Access Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the access protocol.

Note
Make sure you have enabled the ISUP protocol registration, otherwise the protocol will not be
displayed. You can go to → All Modules → General → System Configuration → Network →
Device Access Protocol and switch on Allow ISUP Registration. Before adding devices by ISUP
2.6/4.0 protocol to the system, you need to check Allow ISUP of Earlier Version.
5. Select Device ID Segment as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required parameters.
7. Optional: Switch on Picture Storage to set the storage location for pictures.
- Select pStor and select storage locations for the face picture library and captured pictures.

Note
This configuration only affects the facial recognition device which supports face comparison.
The storage location of captured pictures and face picture libraries cannot be the same.
- Select Local Storage as the storage location, click Configure to enable Local Storage and set
the storage locations for pictures and files as needed.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including alarm inputs,
alarm outputs, and access points) to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by device name or select an existing area.
● You can import all the access points or specific access point(s) to the area.

89
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● For the video access control terminal of a device, the camera on the terminal will also be
imported to the corresponding area.
● If you do not import access points to area, you cannot perform further configurations for the

access point.
10. Finish adding the device(s).
- Click Add to add the device(s) and return to the device management page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the device(s) and continue to add other devices.
11. Optional: Perform further operations on the added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device,
restore the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device
Parameters for detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Privacy To protect the person's private information including the person's name
Settings and profile picture, you can configure privacy settings for online access
control devices. For details, refer to Privacy Settings .
Set Device's On the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to search
Devices for a specific device.

90
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.4.6 Add Access Control Devices in a Batch

You can download and enter access control device information in the predefined spreadsheet to
add multiple devices at a time.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Access Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol, Hikvision ISUP Protocol, or Hikvision ISAPI Protocol as the
access protocol.

Note
Make sure you have enabled the ISUP protocol registration, otherwise the protocol will not be
displayed. You can go to → All Modules → General → System Configuration → Network →
Device Access Protocol and switch on Allow ISUP Registration. Before adding devices by ISUP
2.6/4.0 protocol to the system, you need to check Allow ISUP of Earlier Version.
5. Select Batch Import as the adding mode.
6. Click Download Template and save the predefined spreadsheet (XLSX format) to local disk.
7. Open the spreadsheet and edit the required device information.
8. Click and select the edited spreadsheet.
9. Optional: Switch on Picture Storage to set the storage location for pictures.
- Select pStor and select storage locations for the face picture library and captured pictures.

Note
This configuration only affects the facial recognition device which supports face comparison.
The storage location of captured pictures and face picture libraries cannot be the same.
- Select Local Storage as the storage location, click Configure to enable Local Storage and set
the storage locations for pictures and files as needed.
Setting picture storage location is not required for devices added via Hikvision ISAPI Protocol.
10. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.

91
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
11. Finish adding the device(s).
- Click Add to add the device(s) and return to the device management page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the device(s) and continue to add other devices.
12. Optional: Perform further operations on the added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device, restore
the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device Parameters for
detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Privacy To protect the person's private information including the person's name
Settings and profile picture, you can configure privacy settings for online access
control devices. For details, refer to Privacy Settings .
Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Replace If the original device malfunctions, you can replace it with a new device
Device using the same IP address. After you replace it, move the cursor on on
the right of the device name, and click Replace Device to confirm the
replacement.
Set Device's On the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to search
Devices for a specific device.

92
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.4.7 Configure Device Parameters

You can configure parameters for the access control device, including device time, linkage settings
(linked device actions), maintenance settings, etc.

Custom Wiegand Parameters

Based on the knowledge of uploading rule for the third-party Wiegand, you can configure Wiegand
parameters to communicate between the device and the third-party card readers.
Before You Start
Make sure you have wired the third-party card readers to the access control device or elevator
control device.
Steps

Note
● By default, the device disables the custom Wiegand function. If you enable the custom Wiegand
function, all Wiegand ports in the device will use the customized Wiegand protocol.
● You can configure up to 5 custom Wiegand devices.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device or Device and Server → Elevator Control
Device on the left.
3.
Click in the Operation column to enter the configuration page of a device.
4. Switch on Custom Wiegand.
5. Configure the Wiegand parameters.
Total Length
Wiegand data length.
Parity Type
Set the valid parity for Wiegand data according to property of the third party card reader. You
can select Nothing, Odd Even Check, or XOR Parity.
If you select Odd Even Check, you can configure the following:
Odd Start, Length
If the odd parity start bit is 1 and the length is 12, then the platform will start odd parity
calculation from bit 1. It will calculate 12 bits. The result will be in bit 0 (Bit 0 is the first
bit).
Even Start, Length

93
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

If the even parity start bit is 12, and the length is 12, then the platform will start even
parity calculation from bit 12. It will calculate 12 bits. The result will be in the last bit.
If you select XOR Parity, you can configure the following:
XOR Parity Start Bit, Length per Group, Length for Parity
Depending on the table displayed below, the start bit is 0, the length per group is 4, and
the length for parity is 40. It means that the platform will calculate from bit 0, calculate
every 4 bit, and calculate 40 bits in total (10 groups in total). The result will be in the last 4
bits (The result length is the same as the length per group).
Output Rule
Set the output rule.
Card ID Start Bit, Length, and Decimal Digit
If you use the transformation rule, these items are available. Depending on the table
displayed below, the card ID start bit is 0, the length is 32, and the decimal digit is 10. It
represents that from bit 0, there are 32 bits represent the card ID. (The length here is
calculated by bit.) And the decimal digit length is 10 bits.
Site Code Start Bit, Length, and Decimal Digit
If you use the transformation rule, these items are available. For detailed information, see
the explanation of the card ID.
OEM Start Bit, Length, and Decimal Digit
If you use the transformation rule, these items are available. For detailed information, see
the explanation of the card ID.
Manufacturer Code Start Bit, Length, and Decimal Digit
If you use the transformation rule, these items are available. Depending on the table
displayed below, the manufacturer code start bit is 32, length is 8, and decimal digit is 3. It
represents that from bit 32, there are 8 bits are manufacturer code. (The length here is
calculated by bit.) And the decimal length is 3.

Note
Take Wiegand 44 for example, the setting values in the Custom Wiegand are as follows:

Custom Wiegand Wiegand 44

Name
Total Length 44
Transformation Rule byFormatRule[4]=[1][4][0][0]
(Decimal Digit)
Parity Type XOR Parity
Odd Parity Start Bit Length

94
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Even Parity Start Bit Length

XOR Parity Start Bit 0 Length per Group 4 Total Length 40
Card ID Start Bit 0 Length 32 Decimal Digit 10
Site Code Start Bit Length Decimal Digit
OEM Start Bit Length Decimal Digit
Manufacturer Code 32 Length 8 Decimal Digit 3
Start Bit

Set Wiegand Parameters

You can set Wiegand parameters for access control devices to facilitate communications between
card readers and access control devices.
Before You Start
The function should be supported by the device.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Access Control Device on the left panel.
3. Click in the Operation column to enter the configuration page of a device.
4. Set Wiegand parameters.
1) Select a Wiegand protocol in the list, and click in the Operation column to pop up a
window of Wiegand information.
2) On the pop-up window, set Wiegand parameters.
Direction
Whether the device is used for inputting (receiving) or outputting (sending) data.
Check Input or Output.
Wiegand Mode
The signal transmitting mode. Whether the device transmits 26-bit or 34-bit data.

Note
Wiegand mode can only be selected when the direction is Output.
Output Format
Whether to output the signal as employee No. or card No.

95
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Output format can only be selected when the direction is output.
Signal Sending Interval
The interval of sending data.
Linked Card Reader
The card reader No. to be linked.

Note
Linked card reader can only be selected when the device supports linking to a card reader.
5. Click OK to save the parameters.

Configure Device Actions for Access Event

You can set the linkage actions of an access control device or elevator control device for the
device's events, so that when a specific event occurs, the device can execute actions such as
capturing a picture, recording video footage, triggering alarm output, triggering buzzer, arming/
disarming zones, locking/unlocking access points, etc.
Steps

Note
This feature requires device support. Parameters vary with different device types and models.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device or Device and Server → Elevator Control
Device on the left.
3.
Click in the Operation column to enter the configuration page of a device.
4. Click Add in the Linkage section.
5. Configure event source.
1) Select Event Linkage as the linkage type.
2) Select an event type from the Event Type drop-down list and then select a specific event.

Note
● If you select Alarm Input Event, you need to select an alarm input.

● If you select Door Event, you need to select an access point.

● If you select Card Reader Event, you need to select a card reader.

6. Configure linkage target.

Buzzing

96
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Buzzer on Controller
ON
Turn on the buzzer on the access controller when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Turn off the buzzer on the access controller when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Buzzer on Reader
ON
Turn on the buzzer on the card reader when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Turn off the buzzer on the card reader when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Capture/Recording
Capture
Enable the device's linked camera to capture a picture when the specified event is
triggered.
Recording
Enable the device's linked camera to record video footage when the specified event is
triggered.
Alarm Output
ON
Trigger the alarm output when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Stop the alarm output when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Zone
ON
Arm the zone when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Disarm the zone when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.

97
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Access Point
Unlock
Unlock the access point (door or barrier) when the specified event is triggered.
Lock
Lock the access point when the specified event is triggered.
Remain Unlocked
The access point will remain unlocked when the specified event is triggered.
Remain Locked
The access point will remain locked when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Floor
Temporary Access
Grant access to the floor for a limited time when the specified event is triggered.
Access with Credential
Grant access to the floor if the user presents valid credentials when the specified event is
triggered.
Free Access
Grant access to the floor indefinitely when the specified event is triggered.
Access Forbidden
Deny access to the floor indefinitely when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
7. Click Save to add the linkage.
8. Optional: Perform further operations on linkages.
Delete a Linkage Click to delete the linkage.
Delete All Linkages Click Delete All to delete all linkages.
Edit Linkage Click to edit the linkage.

Configure Device Actions for Card Swiping

You can set the linkage actions of an access control device or elevator control device for card
swiping, so that when the device detects a specific card, the device can execute actions such as
capturing a picture, triggering alarm output, triggering buzzer, locking/unlocking access point, etc.
In this way, you can monitor the behaviors and whereabouts of the card holder.

98
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
This feature requires device support. Parameters vary with different device types and models.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device or Device and Server → Elevator Control
Device on the left.
3.
Click in the Operation column to enter the configuration page of a device.
4. Click Add in the Linkage section.
5. Configure event source.
1) Select Card Linkage as the linkage type.
2) Select a card from the Card Number drop-down list.
3) Select a card reader from the Card Reader drop-down list.
6. Configure linkage target.
Buzzing
Buzzer on Controller
ON
Turn on the buzzer on the access controller when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Turn off the buzzer on the access controller when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Buzzer on Reader
ON
Turn on the buzzer on the card reader when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Turn off the buzzer on the card reader when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Capture/Recording
Capture
Enable the device's linked camera to capture a picture when the specified event is
triggered.
Recording
Enable the device's linked camera to record video footage when the specified event is
triggered.

99
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Alarm Output
ON
Trigger the alarm output when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Stop the alarm output when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Zone
ON
Arm the zone when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Disarm the zone when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Access Point
Unlock
Unlock the access point (door or barrier) when the specified event is triggered.
Lock
Lock the access point when the specified event is triggered.
Remain Unlocked
The access point will remain unlocked when the specified event is triggered.
Remain Locked
The access point will remain locked when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Floor
Temporary Access
Grant access to the floor for a limited time when the specified event is triggered.
Access with Credential
Grant access to the floor if the user presents valid credentials when the specified event is
triggered.
Free Access
Grant access to the floor indefinitely when the specified event is triggered.
Access Forbidden

100
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Deny access to the floor indefinitely when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
7. Click Save to add the linkage.
8. Optional: Perform further operations on linkages.
Delete a Linkage Click to delete the linkage.
Delete All Linkages Click Delete All to delete all linkages.
Edit Linkage Click to edit the linkage.

Configure Device Actions for Person ID

You can set the linkage actions of an access control device or elevator control device for person ID,
so that when the device detects the credentials of the person, it can execute actions such as
capturing a picture, triggering alarm output, triggering buzzer, locking/unlocking access point, etc.
In this way, you can monitor the behaviors and whereabouts of the person.
Steps

Note
This feature requires device support. Parameters vary with different device types and models.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device or Device and Server → Elevator Control
Device on the left.
3.
Click in the Operation column to enter the configuration page of a device.
4. Click Add in the Linkage section.
5. Configure event source.
1) Select Person Linkage as the linkage type.
2) Select a person ID from the Person drop-down list.
3) Select a card reader from the Card Reader drop-down list.
6. Configure linkage target.
Buzzing
Buzzer on Controller
ON
Turn on the buzzer on the access controller when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Turn off the buzzer on the access controller when the specified event is triggered.

101
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Buzzer on Reader
ON
Turn on the buzzer on the card reader when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Turn off the buzzer on the card reader when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Capture/Recording
Capture
Enable the device's linked camera to capture a picture when the specified event is
triggered.
Recording
Enable the device's linked camera to record video footage when the specified event is
triggered.
Alarm Output
ON
Trigger the alarm output when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Stop the alarm output when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Zone
ON
Arm the zone when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Disarm the zone when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Access Point
Unlock
Unlock the access point (door or barrier) when the specified event is triggered.
Lock

102
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Lock the access point when the specified event is triggered.

Remain Unlocked
The access point will remain unlocked when the specified event is triggered.
Remain Locked
The access point will remain locked when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Floor
Temporary Access
Grant access to the floor for a limited time when the specified event is triggered.
Access with Credential
Grant access to the floor if the user presents valid credentials when the specified event is
triggered.
Free Access
Grant access to the floor indefinitely when the specified event is triggered.
Access Forbidden
Deny access to the floor indefinitely when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
7. Click Save to add the linkage.
8. Optional: Perform further operations on linkages.
Delete a Linkage Click to delete the linkage.
Delete All Linkages Click Delete All to delete all linkages.
Edit Linkage Click to edit the linkage.

Configure Device Actions for MAC Address

You can set access control device's linkage actions for MAC address of mobile devices, so that
when the device detects a specific MAC address, the device can execute actions such as capturing
a picture, triggering alarm output, triggering buzzer, locking/unlocking access point, etc.
Steps

Note
This feature requires device support. Parameters vary with different device types and models.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .

103
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device on the left.

3.
Click in the Operation column to enter the configuration page of a device.
4. Click Add in the Linkage section.
5. Select MAC Linkage as the linkage type, and then edit the MAC address.
6. Configure linkage target.
Buzzing
Buzzer on Controller
ON
Turn on the buzzer on the access controller when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Turn off the buzzer on the access controller when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Buzzer on Reader
ON
Turn on the buzzer on the card reader when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Turn off the buzzer on the card reader when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Capture/Recording
Capture
Enable the device's linked camera to capture a picture when the specified event is
triggered.
Recording
Enable the device's linked camera to record video footage when the specified event is
triggered.
Alarm Output
ON
Trigger the alarm output when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Stop the alarm output when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Zone

104
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

ON
Arm the zone when the specified event is triggered.
OFF
Disarm the zone when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Access Point
Unlock
Unlock the access point (door or barrier) when the specified event is triggered.
Lock
Lock the access point when the specified event is triggered.
Remain Unlocked
The access point will remain unlocked when the specified event is triggered.
Remain Locked
The access point will remain locked when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
Floor
Temporary Access
Grant access to the floor for a limited time when the specified event is triggered.
Access with Credential
Grant access to the floor if the user presents valid credentials when the specified event is
triggered.
Free Access
Grant access to the floor indefinitely when the specified event is triggered.
Access Forbidden
Deny access to the floor indefinitely when the specified event is triggered.
No Linkage
Disable the linkage action.
7. Click Save to add the linkage.
8. Optional: Perform further operations on linkages.
Delete a Linkage Click to delete the linkage.
Delete All Linkages Click Delete All to delete all linkages.
Edit Linkage Click to edit the linkage.

105
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Configure Card Swiping Parameters

You can configure card swiping parameters to allow authentication by entering card number on
keypad, enable NFC clone card, enable Mifare encryption, etc.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Access Control Device or Device and Server → Elevator Control
Device on the left.
3.
Click on the Operation column to enter the configuration page of a device.
4. In Card Swiping section, configure card swiping parameters.

Note
Parameters vary with different device types and models.
Reader Communication Protocol
Select the reader communication protocol.
Input Card Number On Keypad
If it is checked, visitors can enter card number on keypad for authentication.
Enable NFC Card
If it is enabled, visitors can use cloned cards for authentication.
Mifare Encryption
If it is enabled, only the card with the same encrypted sector can be granted access.
Voice Prompt
If it is enabled, an audio prompt will be played when swiping cards.
Upload Picture after Linked Capture
Upload the pictures captured by the linked camera(s) to the platform automatically.

Note
For details about linking a camera to an access point, see Edit Door for Current Site or Edit
Elevator for Current Site .
Picture Storage
If it is checked, the captured pictures will be automatically saved to the storage location
you configured in picture storage settings for the access points.

106
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For details about configuring picture storage settings, see Edit Door for Current Site or Edit
Elevator for Current Site .
Picture Size
Select a picture size from the drop-down list for the captured pictures saved to the storage
location.
Picture Quality
Select a picture quality from the drop-down list for the captured pictures saved to the
storage location.
Capture Times
Select the capture times from the drop-down list for the devices to capture face pictures
for the times selected.

Configure Other Parameters

You can configure other parameters for an access control device, such as device time and facial
recognition mode.

Note
● Device support required. Parameters vary with different device types and models.
● For more remote configurations, click Configure at the end of the device configuration page. For
detailed instructions, refer to the user manual of the device.

Time
You can view the time zone where the device locates and set the following parameters.
Device Time
Click the Device Time field to custom time for the device.
Sync with Server Time
Synchronize the device time with the server of the platform.

Biometrics
You can enable facial recognition and fingerprint recognition of access control devices if the
devices support biometrics recognition.
Facial Recognition
Set facial recognition function for the device, and select a facial recognition mode.
Single-Person Recognition
The device can recognize one person at a time.

107
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Multiple-Person Recognition
The device can recognize multiple persons at a time.
Fingerprint Recognition
Set persons' fingerprint recognition for the device. Once enable, the device can recognize
persons by their fingerprint.

Skin-surface Temperature
Set Temperature Screening to on to enable temperature screening function.
Threshold(℃)
Set the range of normal skin-surface temperature. The detected temperature that is not in this
range is abnormal temperature. The maximum temperature must be higher than the minimum
temperature.
Open Door When Temperature is Abnormal
If enabled, the door will open when person's skin-surface temperature is abnormal. By default,
the door will not open for abnormal temperature.
Linked Thermal Camera
Enter the device IP address of the linked thermal camera for temperature screening.

Note
It is used for the access control devices that do not support temperature screening.

Mask Settings
Set Mask Detection to on to enable mask detection function. Once enabled, the device can detect
persons without a face mask.
Do Not Open Barrier when No Mask
If checked, the barrier will still open for persons without a mask.

RS-485
RS-485 Communication Redundancy
You can check RS-485 Communication Redundancy to enable the function if you wire the
RS-485 card to the device redundantly.
Working Mode
Select the working mode, including the card reader, door control unit, and access control host.

Turnstile Parameters
You can configure passing mode for the turnstile linked to the device.
Based on Lane Controller's DIP Mode

108
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The device will follow the lane controller's DIP settings to control the turnstile. The settings on
the main controller will be invalid.
Based on Main Controller's Settings
The device will follow the settings of main controller to control the turnstile. The DIP settings of
the lane controller will be invalid.

Maintenance
You can reboot a device remotely and restore it to its default settings.
Reboot
Reboot the device.
Restore Default
Restore the device to its default settings. The device needs to be activated after restoring.

Facial Recognition Mode

You can check Deep Mode to enable the function. Once enabled, all the face credentials applied to
the device will be cleared. Go to Access Control → Access Level and click to apply the data in
the platform to the device.
More
You can click Configure to open the remote configuration page of the device and configure more
parameters.

8.4.8 Privacy Settings

You can configure the settings for event storage, authentication, and picture uploading and
storage, and clear the pictures on the access control devices to protect the person's private
information, including name, profile picture, etc.
In the top of top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server → Access Control Device .
Select one or more devices and click Privacy Settings.

Note
Make sure the selected device is online.

Set the following parameters as needed and click Save.

Event Storage
Select the mode of event storage.
Overwrite

109
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The events stored on the device will be overwritten automatically. For example, if a device
can store up to 200 events. When this limit is reached, the first event will be overwritten by
the newest one, and then the second will be overwritten.
Delete Old Events Regularly
Set a time period. The events stored on the device during the period will be automatically
deleted at intervals of the period.
Delete Old Events by Specified Time
Set a specific time. The events stored on the device before the specific time will be
automatically deleted.
Authentication
Check the items to be displayed in authentication results.
Picture Uploading and Storage
Check the items as needed.
Upload Recognized or Captured Pictures
If it is checked, the recognized or captured pictures will be uploaded to the system.
Save Recognized or Captured Pictures
If it is checked, the recognized or captured pictures will be saved to the devices.
Save Profile Pictures
If it is checked, the profile pictures will be saved to the devices.
Upload Event and Alarm Pictures
If it is checked, the event and alarm pictures will be uploaded to the system.
Save Event and Alarm Pictures
If it is checked, the event and alarm pictures will be saved to the devices.
Upload Thermal Pictures
If it is checked, the thermal pictures will be uploaded to the system.
Save Thermal Pictures
If it is checked, the thermal pictures will be saved to the devices.
Clear Pictures Stored on Device
Clear Face Pictures
Click Clear to clear all face pictures.
Clear Recognized or Captured Pictures
Click Clear to clear all recognized pictures or captured pictures.

110
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.5 Manage Elevator Control Device

You can add the elevator control device to the system to control the elevator(s), such as assign the
access authority of specified floors to person, control the elevator status on the Control Client.

8.5.1 Add Detected Online Elevator Control Devices

The active online elevator control devices on the same local subnet with the current Web Client or
SYS server will be displayed on a list. You can add an online device at a time, or add multiple online
devices in a batch.

Note
You should install the web control according to the instructions and then the online device
detection function will be available.

Add a Detected Online Elevator Control Device

The Web Client automatically searches for online elevator control devices on the same local subnet
with the client or SYS server. You can add the detected elevator control devices to the platform one
by one if the devices do not share the same user account.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Elevator Control Device on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the SYS server.
Local Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the current Web Client.
4. Select an active device that you want to add to the platform.
5. Click Add to open the Add Elevator Control Device window.
6. Configure the basic information for the device, including device address, device port, device
name, user name, and password.

111
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import resources (including alarm inputs, alarm
outputs, and floors) of elevator control device to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to an area, you cannot perform further operations for the

resources.
● Enter the range of floor number according to your application scenario.

9. Optional: Check Restore Default to restore configured device parameters to default settings.

Note
● Not all the device parameters will be restored. Network parameters such as IP address, port

No., and password will be kept.

● It is recommended that you should restore to default when adding an online device that has

been added to other platforms for the first time.

10. Click Add.
11. Optional: Perform further operations on added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device,
restore the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device
Parameters for detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

112
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Set Device's On the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter one or more key words in the search box and click to search for a
Devices specific device.

Add Detected Online Elevator Control Devices in a Batch

If the detected online elevator control devices share the same user account, you can add multiple
devices at a time.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Elevator Control Device on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the SYS server.
Local Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the current Web Client.

113
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Select the active devices that you want to add to the platform.
5. Click Add to Device List to open the Add Elevator Control Device window.
6. Set parameters for the devices.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import resources (including alarm inputs, alarm
outputs, and floors) of elevator control device to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to an area, you cannot perform further operations for the

resources.
● Enter the range of floor number according to your application scenario.

9. Optional: Check Restore Default to restore configured device parameters to default settings.

Note
● Not all the device parameters will be restored. Network parameters such as IP address, port

No., and password will be kept.

● It is recommended that you should restore to default when adding an online device that has

been added to other platforms for the first time.

10. Finish adding the device(s).
- Click Add to add the device(s) and return to the device management page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the device(s) and continue to add other devices.
11. Optional: Perform further operations on the added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device,

114
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

restore the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device

Parameters for detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Set Device's On the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter one or more key words in the search box and click to search for a
Devices specific device.

8.5.2 Add an Elevator Control Device by IP Address

If you know the IP address of the elevator control device you want to add to the platform, you can
add the device by specifying its IP address, user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Elevator Control Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Elevator Control Device page.
4. Select IP Address as the adding mode.

115
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Enter the required parameters.

Note
By default, the device port number is 8000.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import resources (including alarm inputs, alarm
outputs, and floors) of elevator control device to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to an area, you cannot perform further operations for the

resources.
● Enter the range of floor number according to your application scenario.

8. Optional: Set Restore Default to on to restore all the parameters of the device to default
settings.
9. Finish adding the device(s).
- Click Add to add the device(s) and return to the device management page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the device(s) and continue to add other devices.
10. Optional: Perform further operations on the added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device,
restore the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device
Parameters for detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

116
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Set Device's In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to search
Devices for a specific device.

8.5.3 Add Elevator Control Devices by IP Segment

If the elevator control devices you want to add to the platform share the same user account, and
they are in the same IP segment, you can add them to the platform by specifying the start/end IP
address, user name, and password.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Elevator Control Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Elevator Control Device page.
4. Select IP Segment as the adding mode.
5. Enter the required parameters.

117
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
By default, the device port number is 8000.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import resources (including alarm inputs, alarm
outputs, and floors) of elevator control device to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to an area, you cannot perform further operations for the

resources.
● Enter the range of floor number according to your application scenario.

8. Finish adding the device(s).

- Click Add to add the device(s) and return to the device management page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the device(s) and continue to add other devices.
9. Optional: Perform further operations on the added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device, restore
the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device Parameters for
detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

118
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices to
change the password together.

Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured device
Default parameters excluding network parameters and account information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check Restore
device parameters excluding network parameters and account information,
such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Set Device's In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to edit
Time Zone their time zones.
Search for Enter one or more key words in the search box and click to search for a
Devices specific device.

8.5.4 Add Elevator Control Devices in a Batch

You can download and enter elevator control device information in the predefined spreadsheet to
add multiple devices at a time.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Elevator Control Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Elevator Control Device page.
4. Select Batch Import as the adding mode.
5. Click Download Template and save the predefined spreadsheet (XSLX file) to the local disk.
6. Open the spreadsheet and edit the required device information.
7. Click and select the edited spreadsheet.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone

119
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
9. Finish adding the device(s).
- Click Add to add the device(s) and return to the device management page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the device(s) and continue to add other devices.
10. Optional: Perform further operations on the added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device,
restore the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device
Parameters for detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

Set Device's In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Time Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Enter one or more key words in the search box and click to search for a
Devices specific device.

8.6 Manage Video Intercom Device

You can add video intercom devices (indoor station, door station, outer door station, and main
station) to the system for management, including editing and deleting the devices, remote

120
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

configuration, changing online devices' password, etc. You can also perform further operations
such as video intercom, unlocking door remotely, etc. based on the added devices.
● Indoor Station: The indoor station is an intelligent terminal which can provide two-way audio,
network transmission, data storage, remote unlocking, etc. It is mainly applied in the
community.
● Door Station: The door station can send call to indoor station (residents) and main station. It is
mainly applied in the community and office buildings.
● Outer Door Station: The outer door station can send call to indoor station (residents) and main
station. It is mainly applied in the community and office buildings.
● Main Station: The main station is an intelligent terminal, which can be used to unlock door
remotely, send call to residents and respond to residents' call. It is mainly applied in large
community.

8.6.1 Add Detected Online Video Intercom Devices

The active online video intercom devices on the same local subnet with the current HikCentral
Professional Web Client or SYS server will be displayed in the list. You can add an online device at a
time, or add multiple online devices in a batch.

Note
You should install the web control according to the instructions and then the online device
detection function will be available.

Add a Detected Online Video Intercom Device

The online video intercom devices on the same local subnet with the current Web Client or SYS
server can be displayed in the list, and you can add the detected indoor station to the system one
by one.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed operation about activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Video Intercom Device on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network

121
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

As the default selection, the detected online devices on the same local subnet with the SYS
server will be listed in the Online Device area.
Local Network
The detected online devices on the same local subnet with the current Web Client will be
listed in the Online Device area.
4. In the Online Device area, select the active device to be added.
5. Click in the Online Device area to enter the Add Video Intercom Device page.

Figure 8-1 Add Video Intercom Device Page

6. Enter the required information.

122
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Device Address
The IP address of the device, which is shown automatically.
Device Port
The port No. of the device, which is shown automatically. The default port No. is 8000.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
8. Optional: Switch Add Resource to Area to on to import the resources of the added devices to an
area.

Note
● You can import all the alarm inputs or the specified alarm input to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform further operations for the alarm

inputs.
9. Optional: Check Restore Default to restore configured device parameters to default settings.

Note
● Not all the device parameters will be restored. Network parameters such as IP address, port

No., and password will be kept.

● It is recommended that you should restore to default when adding an online device that has

been added to other platforms for the first time.

10. Click Add.

123
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

11. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the online device.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device. For details, refer to Configure Device Parameters .
Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Restore Default Select the added device(s), and click to restore the configured
device parameters.

Note
If you want to restore the device parameters configured on the
system, you can check Restore device network parameters and
account information, such as user name and password. in the pop-
up window.

Set Device's Time In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone
Zone to edit their time zones.
Search for Devices Enter one or more key words in the search box and click to search
for a specific device.

Add Detected Online Video Intercom Devices in a Batch

If the detected online video intercom devices share the same user name and password, you can
add multiple devices at a time.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Video Intercom Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter Add Video Intercom Device page.
4. Click Batch Import as the adding mode.

124
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Click Download Template to save the predefined template (Excel file) on your PC.
6. Open the exported template file and enter the required information of the devices to be added.
7. Click and select the template file.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
9. Finish adding the devices.
- Click Add to add the video intercom devices in a batch, and back to the video intercom device
list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other video intercom
devices.
10. Optional: Perform further operations for the added device(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the corresponding device
Device configuration page to edit the time parameters, reboot the device,
restore the device, or set other parameters. See Configure Device
Parameters for detailed instructions.
Change Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices share the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password together.

Privacy You can configure privacy settings for online video intercom devices. For
Settings details, refer to Privacy Settings .
Restore Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
Default device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up window.

125
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Set Time Select the added device(s) and click Time Zone to set the time zone for
Zone the device(s).
Search for Enter the keywords of device name, device address, or serial No., and
Devices click to search for devices.

8.6.2 Add a Video Intercom Device by IP Address

When you know the IP address of a video intercom device, you can add it to the system by
specifying the IP address, user name, password, etc. for management and further video intercom
applications.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Video Intercom Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter Add Video Intercom Device page.
4. Select IP Address as the adding mode.

126
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-2 Add Video Intercom Device Page

5. Enter the required information.
Device Address
The IP address of the device.
Device Port
By default, the device port No. is 8000.
Device Name

127
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
7. Optional: Switch Add Resource to Area to on to import the resources of the added devices to an
area.

Note
● You can import all the alarm inputs or the specified alarm input to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform further operations for the alarm

inputs.
8. Optional: Check Restore Default so that all the parameters of the device configured on the
system will be restored to default settings.
9. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the device and back to the video intercom device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add the next device.
10. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the devices.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device. For details, refer to Configure Device Parameters .
Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

128
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Device's Time In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time
Zone Zone to edit their time zones.
Search for Devices Enter one or more key words in the search box and click to
search for a specific device.

8.6.3 Add Video Intercom Devices in a Batch

You can add video intercom devices in a batch to the system by entering the device information to
the predefined template and importing the template to the system.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Video Intercom Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter Add Video Intercom Device page.
4. Click Batch Import as the adding mode.
5. Click Download Template to save the predefined template (Excel file) on your PC.
6. Open the exported template file and enter the required information of the devices to be added.
7. Click and select the template file.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
9. Finish adding the devices.
- Click Add to add the video intercom devices in a batch, and back to the video intercom device
list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other video intercom
devices.
10. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the devices.

129
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding

Configurations device.

Note
For detailed operation steps for the remote configuration, see the
user manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Device's Time In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone
Zone to edit their time zones.
Search for Devices Enter one or more key words in the search box and click to
search for a specific device.

8.7 Manage Visitor Terminals

The visitor terminals can be added to the system for management, including editing and deleting
the devices, remote configuration, etc. The platform supports multiple ways for adding visitor
terminals. You can select one of them according to your need.

8.7.1 Add Detected Online Visitor Terminals

The system can perform an automated detection for available visitor terminals in the network
where the Web Client or server is located, which makes the devices' information about themselves
(e.g., IP address) recognized by the system. Based on the information, you can add the devices
quickly.
You can add one online devices at a time, or add multiple online devices in a batch.

Add a Detected Online Visitor Terminal

For the detected online visitor terminals, you can add the device one by one to HikCentral
Professional by specifying its user name, password and some other parameters.

130
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

● Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

details about activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Visitor Terminal on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
As the default selection, the detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS
server will be listed in the Online Device area.
Local Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the Web Client will be listed in the
Online Device area.
4. In the Online Device area, select the active device to be added.
5. Click Add to Device List to open the Add Online Device window.
6. Set the required information.
Device Address
The IP address of the device, which is shown automatically.
Device Port
The port number of the device, which is shown automatically. The default port number is 80.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including

131
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can manually select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
8. Optional: Check Restore Default to restore configured device parameters to default settings.

Note
● Not all the device parameters will be restored. Network parameters such as IP address, port

No., and password will be kept.

● It is recommended that you should restore to default when adding an online device that has

been added to other platforms for the first time.

9. Click Add to finish adding the device.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the online device.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device.

Note
For detailed operation steps about remote configuration, see the
user manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Device's Time In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone
Zone to edit their time zones.

132
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Search for Devices Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to
search for a specific device.
Restore Default Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the
configured device parameters excluding network parameters and
account information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and
account information, such as user name and password. in the pop-
up window.

Refresh Device Select the added device and click to refresh information of the
Information device.

Add Detected Online Visitor Terminals in a Batch

For the detected online encoding devices, if they have the same user name and password, you can
batch add multiple devices to HikCentral Professional.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

details about activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Visitor Terminal on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
As the default selection, the detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS
server will list in the Online Device area.
Local Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the Web Client will list in the
Online Device area.
4. In the Online Device area, check the active devices to be added.
5. Click Add to Device List to open the Add Online Device dialog.
6. Enter the same user name and password.

133
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can manually select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
8. Optional: Check Restore Default to restore configured device parameters to default settings.

Note
● Not all the device parameters will be restored. Network parameters such as IP address, port

No., and password will be kept.

● It is recommended that you should restore to default when adding an online device that has

been added to other platforms for the first time.

9. Click Add.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the online devices in a batch.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device.

Note
For detailed operation steps about remote configuration, see the
user manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

134
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Device's Time In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone
Zone to edit their time zones.
Search for Devices Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to
search for a specific device.
Restore Default Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the
configured device parameters excluding network parameters and
account information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and
account information, such as user name and password. in the pop-
up window.

Refresh Device Select the added device and click to refresh information of the
Information device.

8.7.2 Add Visitor Terminal by IP Address

When you know the IP address or domain name of a device, you can add it to the platform by
specifying the IP address (or domain name), user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Visitor Terminal on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Visitor Terminal page.
4. Select IP Address as the adding mode.
5. Enter the required information.
Device Address

135
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The IP address of the device.

Device Port
By default, the device port No. is 80.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can manually select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
7. Optional: Check Restore Default to restore configured device parameters to default settings.

Note
● Not all the device parameters will be restored. Network parameters such as IP address, port

No., and password will be kept.

● It is recommended that you should restore to default when adding an online device that has

been added to other platforms for the first time.

8. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the encoding device and back to the encoding device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other encoding devices.
9. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the devices.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding device.
Configurations

136
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For detailed operation steps about remote configuration, see the user
manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for the
device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Device's Time In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Devices Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to search
for a specific device.
Restore Default Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and
account information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up
window.

Refresh Device Select the added device and click to refresh information of the
Information device.

8.7.3 Add Visitor Terminals by IP Segment

When multiple visitor terminals to be added have the same port number, user name, password,
and have different IP addresses within a range, you can add devices by specifying the IP segment
and some other related parameters.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.

137
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Visitor Terminal on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Visitor Terminal page.
4. Select IP Segment as the adding mode.
5. Enter the required information.
Device Address
Enter the start IP address and the end IP address where the devices are located.
Device Port
By default, the device port No. is 80.
User Name
The user name for administrator created when activating the device or the added non-admin
users. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional using the non-admin user, your
permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the device.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can manually select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
7. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the devices of which the IP addresses are between the start IP address and
end IP address and back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other encoding devices.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.

138
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding device.

Configurations
Note
For detailed operation steps about remote configuration, see the user
manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for the
device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Device's Time In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to
Zone edit their time zones.
Search for Devices Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to search
for a specific device.
Restore Default Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the configured
device parameters excluding network parameters and account
information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and
account information, such as user name and password. in the pop-up
window.

Refresh Device Select the added device and click to refresh information of the
Information device.

8.7.4 Add Visitor Terminals in a Batch

When there are multiple devices to be added, you can edit the predefined template containing the
required device information, and import the template to HikCentral Professional to add devices in
a batch.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.

139
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Perform this task when you need to add devices by importing the template which contains
information of multiple devices.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Visitor Terminal on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Visitor Terminal page.
4. Select Batch Import as the adding mode.
5. Click Download Template and save the predefined template (excel file) on your PC.
6. Open the exported template file and enter the required information of the devices to be added
on the corresponding column.
7. Click and select the edited file.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can manually select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
9. Finish adding devices.
- Click Add to add the devices and go back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add next batch of devices.
10. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding devices in a batch.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device.

Note
For detailed operation steps about remote configuration, see the
user manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Device's Time In the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone
Zone to edit their time zones.

140
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Search for Devices Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to
search for a specific device.
Restore Default Select the added device(s) and click Restore to restore the
configured device parameters excluding network parameters and
account information.

Note
If you want to restore all the device parameters, you should check
Restore device parameters excluding network parameters and
account information, such as user name and password. in the pop-
up window.

Refresh Device Select the added device and click to refresh information of the
Information device.

8.8 Manage Mobile Devices

Mobile devices are used for driving monitoring. They support live view, playback, remote
configuration, alarm notification, GPS data collection, GPS positioning, etc. With mobile devices,
you can not only get the GPS information of driving vehicles, but also set fence rules and deviation
rules to regulate vehicles' movements (the platform will generate an event if any rule is violated).
On the Web Client, you can manage mobile devices, including adding, editing, deleting, and
remotely configuring them.

8.8.1 Add Detected Online Mobile Devices

The active online mobile devices on the same local subnet with the Web Client or SYS server will be
displayed on the list. You can add online devices one by one or add multiple online devices in a
batch.

Note
You should follow the instructions to install the web control properly and then the online device
detection function will be available.

Add a Detected Online Mobile Device

The Web Client automatically searches for online mobile devices on the same local subnet with it
or the SYS server. You can add detected online mobile devices to the platform one by one if they do
not share the same user account.

141
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Mobile Device on the left.
3. Select a detected online mobile device from the Online Device list.
4. Click Add to Device List to enter the Add Mobile Device page.

Figure 8-3 Add a Detected Online Mobile Device

5. Set basic information.
1) Enter the ISUP login password and name of the mobile device.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at
least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and
special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you

142
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password
monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
2) Optional: Switch on Device Wi-Fi Info and enter the address and port of the mobile device as
well as the user name and password of the Wi-Fi.
Once a vehicle reaches its destination and the mobile device successfully connects to the Wi-
Fi there, the video recorded during the journey will be copied back to the platform.
3) Optional: Switch on Verify Stream Encryption Key and enter the stream encryption key set on
the mobile device.

Note
The precondition is that the mobile device supports stream encryption and this feature has
been enabled for it.
When starting live view or remote playback of the cameras related to the mobile device, the
Client will verify the key stored in the SYS server for security purpose.
6. Set vehicle information.
1) Enter the license plate number of the vehicle the mobile device is related to.
2) Add the vehicle to an existing area or click Add New to add it to a newly-created area.
7. Optional: Set picture storage.
1) Switch on Picture Storage.
2) Select a storage location.

Note
● If you select Local Storage, you need to click Configure to configure picture storage on the

SYS server.
● If you select Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cluster Storage, pStor, or Network Video

Recorder, you need to select a storage medium from the drop-down list.
8. Set device's time zone.
- Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
- Manually Set Time Zone
You can select a time zone and the settings will be applied to the device automatically.
9. Set resource information.
1) Select a Streaming Server.
2) Optional: Check Wall Display via Streaming Server.

143
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If the encoding device is not on the same network with cameras, it will get the stream for live
view and playback via the Streaming Server, if they are on the same network, the encoding
device can get stream directly from cameras.
3) Optional: Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get cameras' recording settings configured
on the mobile device.
10. Click Add.
11. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the mobile device.
Edit Mobile Device On the device list, click the name of a mobile device to edit it.
Configure Mobile On the device list, click in the Operation column to configure a
Device Remotely mobile device remotely.
Reset Device's Time In the device list, select one or multiple mobile devices and click
Zone Time Zone to edit their time zones.
Delete Mobile Device Select one or multiple devices and click Delete to delete them.
Search for Mobile Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to
Device search for specified mobile device.

Add Detected Online Mobile Devices in a Batch

The Web Client automatically searches for online mobile devices on the same local subnet with it
or the SYS server. You can batch add multiple detected online mobile devices to the platform if
they share the same user account.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Mobile Device on the left.
3. Select some detected online mobile devices from the Online Device list.
4. Click Add to Device List to enter the Add Mobile Device page.

144
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-4 Batch Add Detected Online Mobile Devices

5. Set basic information.
1) Enter the ISUP login password of the mobile devices.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at
least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and
special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you
change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password
monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
2) Optional: Switch on Device Wi-Fi Info and enter the address and port of the mobile devices as
well as the user name and password of the Wi-Fi.

Note
Once a vehicle reaches its destination and the mobile device successfully connects to the Wi-
Fi there, the video recorded during the journey will be copied back to the platform.
3) Optional: Switch on Verify Stream Encryption Key and enter the stream encryption key set on
the mobile devices.

145
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The precondition is that the mobile devices supports stream encryption and this feature has
been enabled for them.
When starting live view or remote playback of the cameras related to the mobile devices, the
Client will verify the key stored in the SYS server for security purpose.
6. Optional: Set picture storage.
1) Switch on Picture Storage.
2) Select a storage location.

Note
● If you select Local Storage, you need to click Configure to configure picture storage on the

SYS server.
● If you select Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cluster Storage, pStor, or Network Video

Recorder, you need to select a storage medium from the drop-down list.
7. Set devices' time zone.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone
You can select a time zone and the settings will be applied to the device automatically.
8. Set resource information.
1) Select a Streaming Server.
2) Optional: Check Wall Display via Streaming Server.

Note
If the encoding device is not on the same network with cameras, it will get the stream for live
view and playback via the Streaming Server. If they are on the same network, the encoding
device can get stream directly from cameras.
3) Optional: Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get cameras' recording settings configured
on the mobile device.
9. Click Add.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding these mobile devices.
Edit Mobile Device On the device list, click the name of a mobile device to edit it.
Configure Mobile On the device list, click in the Operation column to configure a
Device Remotely mobile device remotely.
Reset Device's Time On the device list, select one or multiple mobile devices and click
Zone Time Zone to edit their time zones.
Delete Mobile Device Select one or multiple devices and click Delete to delete them.

146
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Search for Mobile Enter key words in the search box and click to search for
Device specified mobile device.

8.8.2 Add a Mobile Device by Device ID

If a mobile device supports the ISUP protocol, you can add it to the platform by its device ID. This
way is cost-effective when you need to manage a mobile device in the public network without a
fixed IP address.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Mobile Device on the left.
3. ClickAdd to enter the Add Mobile Device page.

Figure 8-5 Add Mobile Device

147
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Set basic information.

1) Select Device ID as the adding mode.
2) Enter the ID, ISUP login password, and name of the mobile device.
3) Optional: Switch on Device Wi-Fi Info and enter the address and port of the mobile device as
well as the user name and password of the Wi-Fi.

Note
Once a vehicle reaches its destination and the mobile device successfully connects to the Wi-
Fi there, the video recorded during the journey will be copied back to the platform.
4) Optional: Switch on Verify Stream Encryption Key and enter the stream encryption key set on
the mobile device.

Note
The precondition is that the mobile device supports stream encryption and this feature has
been enabled for it.
When starting live view or remote playback of the cameras related to the mobile device, the
Client will verify the key stored in the SYS server for security purpose.
5. Set vehicle information.
1) Enter the license plate number of the vehicle the mobile device is related to.
2) Add the vehicle to an existing area or click Add to add it to a newly-created area.
6. Optional: Set picture storage.
1) Switch on Picture Storage.
2) Select a storage location.

Note
● If you select Local Storage, you need to click Configure to configure picture storage on the

SYS server.
● If you select Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cluster Storage, pStor, or Network Video

Recorder, you need to select a storage medium from the drop-down list.
7. Set device's time zone.
Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
Manually Set Time Zone
You can select a time zone and the settings will be applied to the device automatically.
8. Set resource information.
1) Select a Streaming Server.
2) Optional: Check Wall Display via Streaming Server.

148
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If the encoding device is not on the same network with cameras, it will get the stream for live
view and playback via the Streaming Server, if they are on the same network, the encoding
device can get stream directly from cameras.
3) Optional: Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get cameras' recording settings configured
on the mobile device.
9. Click Add to finish or click Add and Continue to add another mobile device.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the mobile device.
Edit Mobile Device On the device list, click the name of a mobile device to edit it.
Configure Mobile On the device list, click in the Operation column to configure a
Device Remotely mobile device remotely.
Reset Device's Time On the device list, select one or multiple mobile devices and click
Zone Time Zone to edit their time zones.
Delete Mobile Device Select one or multiple devices and click Delete to delete them.
Search for Mobile Enter key words in the search box and click to search for
Device specified mobile device(s).

8.8.3 Add Mobile Devices by Device ID Segment

You can add mobile device(s) to the platform by device ID segment, and perform further
operations, such as editing device settings, configuring devices remotely, deleting devices.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Mobile Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Mobile Device page.
4. Select Device ID Segment as the adding mode.

149
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-6 Add Mobile Device by Device ID Segment

5. Configure the basic information of the device(s).
1) Enter the start device ID and end device ID.

Note
● If the start ID and end ID are the same, only one device will be added.

● If the start ID is smaller than the end ID, multiple devices will be added with their IDs

arranged in ascending order. For example, if you set the start ID and end ID to 1 and 3
respectively, then devices named 1, 2, and 3 will be added.
2) Optional: Enter the ISUP login password.
3) Optional: Enabled stream encryption, and switch on Verify Stream Encryption Key and enter
the stream encryption key on the device.

Note
This function should be supported by the device.
6. Configure picture storage for the device(s).
1) Switch on Picture Storage.
2) Select a storage server type and a storage server from the drop-down list as the storage
location.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.

150
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Manually Set Time Zone (The settings will be applied to the device automatically)
You can select a time zone of the device. The settings will be applied to the device
automatically.
8. Configure the resource information.
1) Select a streaming server from the drop-down list.
2) Optional: Check Wall Display via Streaming Server to use the Streaming Server to play videos
on the smart wall.

Note
This parameter is configurable only when you select a Streaming Server in the former substep.
3) Optional: Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get camera's recording settings configured
on the device.
9. Click Add to finish, or click Add and Continue to add other device(s).
10. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) if needed.
Edit Device Click the name of a device in the Device Name column to edit its
Settings settings.
Delete Device In the device list, check one or multiple devices, and click Delete to
delete the device(s).
Configure ● Option 1: Click in the Operation column to configure the device
Device remotely.
Remotely ● Option 2: Click the name of a device to enter its settings page, and
then click Configuration on Device in the upper-right corner to
configure the device remotely.

Note
To support remote configuration, the device should be configured with
an IP address.

Edit Device's On the device list, check a device, and click Time Zone to edit its time
Time Zone zone settings. You can also check multiple devices and configure the
same time zone for them.
Search for Enter one or multiple key words in the search box and click to search
Mobile Device for specified mobile device.

8.8.4 Add Mobile Devices in a Batch

You can fill in required information of to-be-added mobile devices in an Excel file and upload it
onto the platform to batch add them for management.

151
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Mobile Device on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Mobile Device page.

Figure 8-7 Batch Add Mobile Devices

4. Set basic information.
1) Select Batch Import as the adding mode.
2) Click Download Template to save the template file to your PC and fill in required information.
3) Click to select the file and upload it to the platform.
5. Optional: Set picture storage.
1) Switch on Picture Storage.
2) Select a storage location.

152
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● If you select Local Storage, you need to click Configuration to configure picture storage on

the SYS server.

● If you select Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cluster Storage, pStor, or Network Video

Recorder, you need to select a storage medium from the drop-down list.
6. Set devices' time zone.
- Get Device's Time Zone
The time zone of the device will be automatically chosen according to the region of the
device.
- Manually Set Time Zone
You can select a time zone and the settings will be applied to the device automatically.
7. Click Add to finish or click Add and Continue to add another batch of mobile devices.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding these mobile devices.
Edit Mobile Device On the device list, click the name of a mobile device to edit it.
Configure Mobile On the device list, click in the Operation column to configure a
Device Remotely mobile device remotely.
Reset Device's Time On the device list, select one or multiple mobile devices and click
Zone Time Zone to edit their time zones.
Delete Mobile Device Select one or multiple devices and click Delete to delete them.
Search for Mobile Enter key words in the search box and click to search for specified
Device mobile device(s).

8.9 Add a Query Terminal

A query terminal is installed with the Self-Service Vehicle Finding Client and is mounted in a
parking lot for vehicle owners to locate and find their vehicles. On the Web Client, you can add a
query terminal by its device ID and further manage it such as editing its information and removing
it from the platform.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network
as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to
connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Query Terminal on the left.

153
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

3. Click Add to enter the Add Query Terminal page.

Figure 8-8 Add Query Terminal

4. Create a name for the query terminal.
5. Enter the device ID of the query terminal.
6. Click Add to finish or click Add and Continue to add another query terminal.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit Query Terminal On the device list, click the name of a query terminal to edit it.
Delete Query Select one or multiple query terminals and click Delete to delete
Terminal them.
Search for Query Enter key words in the search box and click to search for specified
Terminal query terminal.

8.10 Add an Entrance/Exit Control Device

An entrance/exit control device is used for managing the entrance or exit of a parking lot,
especially that of an unattended parking lot. After a vehicle gets a ticket or card from an entrance/
exit control device, the device will control the barrier gate to open and let the vehicle enter. After
the vehicle returns the ticket or card, the device will allow the vehicle to exit. Besides, if an
entrance/exit control device assigns cards instead of tickets, its guidance screen is configurable,
which means you can configure the information displayed on it.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Sever → Entrance/Exit Control Device on the left.

154
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

3. Click Add to enter the Add Entrance/Exit Control Device page.

Figure 8-9 Add Entrance/Exit Control Device Page

4. In the Basic Information area, enter the IP address, port No., name, user name, and password of
the entrance/exit control device.
5. Optional: Add the entrance/exit control device's related resource(s) to an area.
1) In the Resource Information area, switch on Add Resource to Area.
2) Select All Resources or Specified Camera.

Note
If you select All Resources, all the resources related to the entrance/exit control device will be
added to an area; if you select Specified Camera, you need to select camera(s) to add.
3) Select Create Area by Device Name or Existing Area.

Note
If you select Create Area by Device Name, an area named after the entrance/exit control
device will be created, and the resource(s) will be added to the area. If you select Existing
Area, you need to select an area to add the resource(s) to.
4) Select None or a Streaming Server to get the stream for live view and playback.

155
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
After selecting a Streaming Server, its related camera(s) will be displayed, you can view their
information and can click the name of a camera to edit it.
5) Optional: Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get camera's recording settings configured
on the entrance/exit control device.
6. Click Add to finish or click Add and Continue to add another entrance/exit control device.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit Entrance/Exit In the Device Name column, click the name of an entrance/exit
Control Device control device to edit it.
Delete Entrance/Exit Select an entrance/exit control device, and click Delete to delete it.
Control Device You can also select multiple entrance/exit control devices, and click
Delete to delete them.
Configure Entrance/ In the Operation column, click to configure the entrance/exit
Exit Control Device control device remotely.
Remotely
Set Device's Time Zone On the device list, select one or multiple devices and click Time
Zone to edit their time zones.
Search for Device Enter key words in the search box and click to search for a
specific device.

8.11 Manage Guidance Terminals

In Resource Management, you can add guidance terminals to the platform, check device details,
change device password, and configure device parameters. While you add a guidance terminal, you
can add its resources (such as connected parking cameras and alarm inputs/outputs) to areas for
further configurations.

Note
After you add and manage guidance terminals int Resource Management, you can set up a parking
guidance system for your parking lot. See details in Parking Guidance Configuration .

8.11.1 Add Detected Online Guidance Terminals

The platform can automatically detect the available guidance terminals on the same network
where the Web Client or the SYS server is running. You can add one online terminal at a time, or
batch add multiple online terminals if they have the same user name and password.

156
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Add a Detected Online Guidance Terminal

You can add detected online guidance terminals one by one if the terminals do not have the same
user name or password.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Guidance Terminal on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the SYS server.
Local Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the current Web Client.
4. Select an activated device that you want to add.
5. Click Add to Device List.
6. In the Basic Information area, edit device login information.
Device Address
IP address of the device, which is acquired automatically.
Device Port
Port number of the device. The default port number is 8000.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can indicate
the location or feature of the device.
User Name
User name of administrator account created when activating the device, or the added non-
admin account such as operator account.

Note
Your access to certain features might be restricted when using a non-admin account to add
the device to the platform.
Password

157
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Password of the account that you are logging in.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the device to an area.

Note
● You can import all the resources including cameras, alarm inputs, and alarm outputs, or

specific cameras to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area named after the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to an area, you cannot perform further operations for the

cameras.
8. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a server in Streaming Server to get the
video stream of the cameras via the server.

Note
You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming server
when displaying live view on the smart wall.
9. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, switch on Video Storage and select a storage
location for recording.
Encoding Device
The video files will be stored in the encoding device according to the configured recording
schedule.
Hybrid Storage Area Network
The video files will be stored in the Hybrid Storage Area Network according to the configured
recording schedule.
Cluster Storage
The video files will be stored in the Cluster Storage according to the configured recording
schedule.
pStor
According to the configured recording schedule, the video files will be stored in the pStor,
which is the storage access service for managing local HDDs and logical disks.
pStor Cluster Service

158
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

pStor Cluster Service is a service that can manage multiple pStors. When there are multiple
pStors storing a large number of video files, use pStor Cluster Service to manage these pStors.

Note
● Configure the Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server or pStor in advance, or its

storage location cannot display in the drop-down list. You can click Add New to add a new
Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, or pStor.
10. Set the recording schedule for the cameras.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device and the
cameras of the device will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, such as recording
schedule template, stream type, etc. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on Current
Site for details.
11. Click Add.
12. Optional: Perform further operations after adding the online device.
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the remote configuration page of
Device the device.

Note
For detailed instructions on remote configuration, see the user manual of
the device.

Change Select a device and click Change Password to change the password of
Password the device.

Note
● You can change the password for online HIKVISION devices only.
● If multiple devices have the same password, you can select these
devices to change the password for them together.

Batch Add Detected Online Guidance Terminals

You can batch add detected online guidance terminals if the terminals have the same user name
and password.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

159
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Guidance Terminal on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the SYS server.
Local Network
All detected online devices on the same local subnet with the current Web Client.
4. Select the activated devices that you want to add.
5. Click Add to Device List.
6. In the Basic Information area, edit devices' login information.
User Name
User name of administrator account created when activating the device, or the added non-
admin account such as operator account.

Note
Your access to certain features might be restricted when using a non-admin account to add
the device to the platform.
Password
Password of the account that you are logging in.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the devices to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area named after the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to an area, you cannot perform further operations for the

cameras.
8. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a server in Streaming Server to get the
video stream of the cameras via the server.

160
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming server
when displaying live view on the smart wall.
9. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, switch on Video Storage and select a storage
location for recording.
Encoding Device
The video files will be stored in the encoding device according to the configured recording
schedule.
Hybrid Storage Area Network
The video files will be stored in the Hybrid Storage Area Network according to the configured
recording schedule.
Cluster Storage
The video files will be stored in the Cluster Storage according to the configured recording
schedule.
pStor
According to the configured recording schedule, the video files will be stored in the pStor,
which is the storage access service for managing local HDDs and logical disks.
pStor Cluster Service
pStor Cluster Service is a service that can manage multiple pStors. When there are multiple
pStors storing a large number of video files, use pStor Cluster Service to manage these pStors.

Note
Configure the Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, or pStor in advance, or its
storage location cannot display in the drop-down list. You can click Add New to add a new
Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, or pStor.
10. Set the recording schedule for the cameras.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device and the
cameras of the device will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, such as recording
schedule template, stream type. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site for
details.
11. Click Add.
12. Optional: Perform further operations after adding the online devices.
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the remote configuration page of
Device the device.

Note
For detailed instructions on remote configuration, see the user manual of
the device.

161
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Change Select a device and click Change Password to change the password of
Password the device.

Note
● You can change the password for online HIKVISION devices only.
● If multiple devices have the same password, you can select these
devices to change the password for them together.

8.11.2 Add a Guidance Terminal by IP/Domain

If you know the IP address of the guidance terminal you want to add to the platform, you can add
the device by specifying its IP address, user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Guidance Terminal on the left.
3. Click Add.
4. Set Adding Mode to IP/Domain.
5. Edit device connection and login information.
Device Address
IP address of the device.
Device Port
Port number of the device. The default port number is 8000.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can indicate
the location or feature of the device.
User Name
User name of the administrator account created when activating the device, or the added
non-admin account such as operator account.

162
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Your access to certain features might be restricted when using a non-admin account to add
the device to the platform.
Password
Password of the account that you are logging in.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the device to an area.

Note
● You can import all the resources including cameras, alarm inputs, and alarm outputs, or

specific cameras to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area named after the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to an area, you cannot perform further operations for the

cameras.
7. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a server in Streaming Server to get the
video stream of the cameras via the server.

Note
You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming server
when displaying live view on the smart wall.
8. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, switch on Video Storage and select a storage
location for recording.
Encoding Device
The video files will be stored in the encoding device according to the configured recording
schedule.
Hybrid Storage Area Network
The video files will be stored in the Hybrid Storage Area Network according to the configured
recording schedule.
Cluster Storage

163
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The video files will be stored in the Cluster Storage according to the configured recording
schedule.
pStor
According to the configured recording schedule, the video files will be stored in the pStor,
which is the storage access service for managing local HDDs and logical disks.
pStor Cluster Service
pStor Cluster Service is a service that can manage multiple pStors. When there are multiple
pStors storing a large number of video files, use pStor Cluster Service to manage these pStors.

Note
Configure the Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, or pStor in advance, or its
storage location cannot display in the drop-down list. You can click Add New to add a new
Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, or pStor.
9. Set the recording schedule for the cameras.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device and the
cameras of the device will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, such as recording
schedule template, stream type. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site for
details.
10. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the device and return to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the device and continue to add other devices.
11. Optional: Perform further operations after adding the device.
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the remote configuration page of
Device the device.

Note
For detailed instructions on remote configuration, see the user manual of
the device.

Change Select a device and click Change Password to change the password of
Password the device.

Note
● You can change the password for online HIKVISION devices only.
● If multiple devices have the same password, you can select these
devices to change the password for them together.

164
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.11.3 Batch Add Guidance Terminals by IP Segment

If the guidance terminals you want to add to the platform are on the same subnet and share the
same port, user name and password, you can add them by specifying the start/end IP address, user
name, password, etc.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Guidance Terminal on the left.
3. Click Add.
4. Set Adding Mode to IP Segment.
5. Edit device connection and login information.
Device Address
Start IP address and end IP address.
Device Port
Port number of the devices. The default port number is 8000.
User Name
User name of the administrator account created when activating the device, or the added
non-admin account such as operator account.

Note
Your access to certain features might be restricted when using a non-admin account to add
the device to the platform.
Password
Password of the account that you are logging in.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend

165
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the devices to an area.

Note
● You can import all the resources including cameras, alarm inputs, and alarm outputs, or

specific cameras to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area named after the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to an area, you cannot perform further operations for the

cameras.
7. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a server in Streaming Server to get the
video stream of the cameras via the server.

Note
You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming server
when displaying live view on the smart wall.
8. Set the recording schedule for the cameras.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the devices and the
cameras of the devices will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set up recording schedule later. Refer to
Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site for details.
9. Finish adding the devices.
- Click Add to add the devices and return to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the devices and continue to add other devices.
10. Optional: Perform further operations after adding the devices.
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the remote configuration page of
Device the device.

Note
For detailed instructions on remote configuration, see the user manual of
the device.

Change Select a device and click Change Password to change the password of
Password the device.

Note
● You can change the password for online HIKVISION devices only.
● If multiple devices have the same password, you can select these
devices to change the password for them together.

166
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.11.4 Batch Add Guidance Terminals by Port Segment

If the guidance terminals you want to add to the platform share the same IP address, user name,
and password, but are using different ports, you can add them by specifying the IP address, port
range, user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed instructions on activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Guidance Terminal on the left.
3. Click Add.
4. Set Adding Mode to Port Segment.
5. Edit device connection and login information.
Device Address
Devices' IP address.
Device Port
Start port number and end port number of the devices.
User Name
User name of the administrator account created when activating the device, or the added
non-admin account such as operator account.

Note
Your access to certain features might be restricted when using a non-admin account to add
the device to the platform.
Password
Password of the account that you are logging in.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend

167
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the devices to an area.

Note
● You can import all the resources including cameras, alarm inputs, and alarm outputs, or

specific cameras to the corresponding area.

● You can create a new area named after the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to an area, you cannot perform further operations for the

cameras.
7. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a server in Streaming Server to get the
video stream of the cameras via the server.

Note
You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected streaming server
when displaying live view on the smart wall.
8. Set the recording schedule for the cameras.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the devices and the
cameras of the devices will start recording according to the schedule.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set up recording schedule later. Refer to
Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site for details.
9. Finish adding the devices.
- Click Add to add the devices and return to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the devices and continue to add other devices.
10. Optional: Perform further operations after adding the devices.
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the remote configuration page of
Device the device.

Note
For detailed instructions on remote configuration, see the user manual of
the device.

Change Select a device and click Change Password to change the password of
Password the device.

Note
● You can change the password for online HIKVISION devices only.
● If multiple devices have the same password, you can select these
devices to change the password for them together.

168
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.11.5 Batch Add Guidance Terminals by Template

You can download a predefined template and edit the guidance terminals' information in the
template to add multiple devices at a time.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to add are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have activated the devices. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Guidance Terminal on the left.
3. Click Add.
4. Set Adding Mode to Batch Import.
5. Click Download Template to download the predefined template file (in XLSX format) to local
disk.
6. In your download folder on PC, open the spreadsheet and edit the required device information.
7. On the Web Client, click and open the edited spreadsheet.
8. Finish adding the devices.
- Click Add to add the devices and return to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the devices and continue to add other devices.
9. Optional: Perform further operations after adding the devices.
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the remote configuration page of
Device the device.

Note
For detailed instructions about remote configurations, see the user manual of
the device.

Change Select a device and click Change Password to change the password of the
Password device.

Note
● You can change the password for online HIKVISION devices only.
● If multiple devices have the same password, you can select these devices to
change the password for them together.

169
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.12 Add Display Screen

Display screens can be used in places such as the entrance of a parking lot to show the real-time
number of vacant parking spaces. You can add a display screen to the platform by specifying its
LAN IP address.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → Display Screen on the left.
3. Click Add.
4. Select the screen type in Device Type.
5. Specify the information about the display screen.

Note
Parameter items vary among different device types.
Number of Display Rows
The number of rows of the content can be displayed on the screen, which is determined by
the device model.
For example, if the value is 2, it means the screen supports showing 2 rows of different
information.

Figure 8-10 Entrance Guidance Screen - One Row

Number of Directions
The number of directions supported by the indoor guidance screen, which is determined by
the device model.

170
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

For example, if the value is 3, it means the screen supports showing the vacant parking
spaces in three directions.

Figure 8-11 Indoor Guidance Screen - Three Directions

6. Click Add to finish adding the display screen, or click Add and Continue to continue adding
another display screen.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the screens.
Delete Device(s) Check one or multiple devices in the list, and click Delete to delete the
selected devices.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the page
to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.
List
What to do next
● After adding an entrance and exit display screen or an entrance guidance screen, you can link a

lane with the screen and configure the related information for the screen in Parking Lot
Management. See details in Add Lane .
● After adding an indoor guidance screen, you can set up a parking guidance system for your

parking lot in Parking Guidance Configuration. See details in Parking Guidance Configuration .

8.13 Add Under Vehicle Surveillance System

You can add Under Vehicle Surveillance System (UVSS) to the system by specifying the device IP
address, port number and some other related parameters.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the system via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, click → All Modules → General → Device
Management → Devices and Servers → UVSS to enter the UVSS management page.

171
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If you have customized the menu (see Customize Navigation Bar for details), click Device
Management on navigation bar to enter the device management page.
2. Click Add to enter the Add Under Vehicle Surveillance System page.
3. Set the required basic information such as device address, device port number, and device
name.
4. Optional: Set the Add Resource to Area switch to on to import the resources of the added UVSS
to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform the further configurations for the

resources.
5. Finish adding the UVSS.
- Click Add to finish adding the UVSS.
- Click Add and Continue to add the current UVSS and continue to add more.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.
Delete Device(s) Check one or more added UVSS, and click Delete to delete the selected
device(s).
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the page
to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.
List

8.14 Manage Security Control Device

You can add the security control devices to the system for managing partition, zone, arming/
disarming, handling alarms,etc.
The security control device includes the security control panel, panic alarm station, Axiom wireless
security control panel, security radar etc., which are widely applied to many scenarios. You can also
add the channels (including cameras, alarm inputs, alarm outputs and radars) of the security
control device to the area.
A security control panel is used for monitoring arming zones, handling alarm signal from the
triggers, and uploading alarm reports to the central alarm monitoring station. The security control
panel is very important for preventing robbery, theft or other accidents.
A panic alarm station is mainly installed in the areas with the crowd or high incidence of cases,
such as school, square, tourist attraction, hospital, supermarket gate, market, station, parking lot,
etc. When the emergency happens or someone asks for help, the person can press panic button to
send alarm to the monitoring center, and the operator in the center will take the appropriate
actions. The panic alarm station helps to realize alarm aid in emergency.

172
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Security radar is an detecting device used to detect the target by electromagnetic wave. Security
radar event will be triggered when the security radar detects object(s) entering the radar zone, and
the calibration camera(s) will start to work to capture more details about this event.

8.14.1 Add Detected Online Security Control Devices

The active online security control devices in the same local subnet with the current Web Client or
SYS server will be displayed on a list. You can add one online device one by one, or add multiple
online devices in a batch.

Note
You should install the web control according to the instructions and then the online device
detection function is available.

Add a Detected Online Security Control Device

You can add the detected online security control devices, and here we introduce the process for
adding single one device.
Before You Start
● Make sure the security control devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected

to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order
to be able to connect the devices to HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed operation about activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Control Device .
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
As the default selection, the detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS
server will be listed in the Online Device area.
Local Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the current Web Client will be
listed in the Online Device area.
4. In the Online Device area, select Hikvision Private Protocol or Hikvision ISUP Protocol to filter
the detected online devices.

173
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
To display devices which can be added to the platform via ISUP, you need to go to → All
Modules → General → System Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and switch
on Allow ISUP Registration.
5. In the Online Device area, select an active device to be added.
6. Click to open the Add Security Control Device window.
7. Enter the required information.

Note
The device's IP address and port number can be automatically shown in Device Address field
and Device Port field.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including cameras, alarm
inputs, alarm outputs and radars) of the added security control device to an area.

Note
● You can select Specified Alarm Input and Radar and select the specified alarm inputs and

radars to import to the area.

● System will generate security control partitions in the area, based on the settings on the

device.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform the further configurations for the

resources.
10. Click Add.
11. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the online device.

174
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding

Configurations device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Time Zone Select a device and click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the
page to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device List Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.

Batch Add Detected Online Security Control Devices

For those detected online security control devices, if they have the same password for the same
user name, you can add multiple devices at a time.
Before You Start
● Make sure the security control devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected

to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order
to be able to connect the devices to HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed operation about activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Control Device .
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS server will list in the Online
Device area.

175
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Local Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the Web Client will list in the
Online Device area.
4. In the Online Device area, select Hikvision Private Protocol or Hikvision ISUP Protocol to filter
the detected online devices.

Note
To display devices which can be added to the platform via ISUP, you need to go to → All
Modules → General → System Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and switch
on Allow ISUP Registration.
5. In the Online Device area, select the active devices to be added.
6. Click to open the Add Security Control Device window.
7. Enter the required information.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including cameras, alarm
inputs, alarm outputs and radars) of the added security control device to an area.

Note
● You can select Specified Alarm Input and Radar and select the specified alarm inputs or

radars to import to the area.

● System will generate security control partitions in the area, based on the settings on the

device.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform the further configurations for the

resources.
10. Click Add.
11. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the online devices in batch.

176
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding

Configurations device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password.

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If multiple devices in the device list have the same password, you
can change the password for them in a batch.

Set Time Zone Select a device and click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the
page to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device List Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.

8.14.2 Add Security Control Device by IP Address

When you know the IP address of the security control device to add, you can add the devices to
the platform by specifying the IP address, user name, password, and other related parameters.
Before You Start
Make sure the security control devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected
to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to
be able to connect the devices to the system via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Control Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol or Modbus Protocol as the Access Protocol.

Note
The alarm boxes can be added to the platform via Modbus Protocol only.
5. Select IP Address as the adding mode.

177
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The adding mode is valid for Hikvision Private Protocol only.
6. Enter the required information.

Note
● Parameters vary according to different access protocols and device types.
● By default, the device port is 8000.
● For wireless security control panels, the default port is 80.
● For alarm boxes, the default port is 502.

Device Address
Enter the IP address of the device.
Device Port
Enter the port number of the device.
Device Name
The name of the device, which can be used to describe the device function, location, etc.
User Name
The admin account (which is created when activating the device) or the non-admin account,
such as the operator. If you use a non-admin account to add devices, the permissions might
be limited.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
Alarm Inputs
The number of alarm inputs of the device. The value range is from 1 to 65535.
Alarm Outputs
The number of alarm outputs of the device. The value range is from 1 to 65535.
Alarm Input
Set the default alarm input signal to low level or high level.

178
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.

Note
It is not supported when adding devices via Modbus Protocol.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including cameras, alarm
inputs, alarm outputs, and radars) of the added security control device to an area.

Note
● You can select Specified Alarm Input and Radar and select the specified alarm inputs or

radars to import to the area.

● Platform will generate security control partitions in the area, based on the settings on the

device.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● Up to 64 alarm inputs can be imported in one area. If you don't import resources to area, you

cannot perform further operations for the resources.

● Up to 10 radars can be imported in one area. If you don't import radars to area, you cannot

perform further operations for the radars.

9. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the security control device and back to the security control device list.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add next security control device.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.

Note
The supported functions vary according to different access protocols and device types.

Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding

Configurations device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

179
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Time Zone Select a device and click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the
page to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device List Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.

8.14.3 Add Security Control Device by Hik-Connect DDNS

You can add security control devices with dynamic IP addresses to the system by domain name
solutions of Hik-Connect. Currently, the system only supports domain name solutions function of
Hik-Connect.
Before You Start
Make sure the security control devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected
to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to
be able to connect the devices to the system via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Control Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol as the Access Protocol.
5. Select Hik-Connect DDNS as the adding mode.
6. Select a device source.
New Device
Add a new device to both Hik-Connect and the system.
Hik-Connect Device List
Add devices managed by Hik-Connect to the system in a batch by getting the device list.
7. Set required parameters.
Hik-Connect Server Address
Enter the address of the Hik-Connect service. By default, it's https://open.ezvizlife.com.

180
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If you select Hik-Connect Device List as source type, you can click Get Device List to get the
device list in the account.
Serial No.
For adding a new device, enter the serial No. of the device.
Verification Code
For adding a new device, enter the verification code of the device.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including cameras, alarm
inputs, alarm outputs and radars) of the added security control device to an area.

Note
● System will generate security control partitions in the area, based on the settings on the

device.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform the further configurations for the

resources.
10. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the security control device and back to the security control device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add next security control device.
11. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

181
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Time Zone Select a device and click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the
page to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device List Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.

8.14.4 Add Security Control Devices by IP Segment

If the security control devices having the same port No., user name and password, and their IP
addresses are between the IP segment, you can specify the start IP address and the end IP address,
port No., user name, password, and other related parameters to add them.
Before You Start
Make sure the security control devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected
to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to
be able to connect the devices to the system via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Control Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol as the Access Protocol.
5. Select IP Segment as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required the information.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.

182
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Click Get Device's Time Zone.

- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including cameras, alarm
inputs, alarm outputs and radars) of the added security control device to an area.

Note
● System will generate security control partitions in the area, based on the settings on the

device.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform the further configurations for the

resources.
9. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the security control device and back to the security control device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add next security control device.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Time Zone Select a device and click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the
page to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device List Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.

183
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.14.5 Add Security Control Devices by Port Segment

If the security control devices having the same user name and password, and their port No. are
between the port segment, you can specify the start port No. and the end port No., user name,
password, and other related parameters to add them.
Before You Start
Make sure the security control devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected
to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to
be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Control Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol as the Access Protocol.
5. Select Port Segment as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required the information.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including cameras, alarm
inputs, alarm outputs and radars) of the added security control device to an area.

184
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● System will generate security control partitions in the area, based on the settings on the

device.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform the further configurations for the

resources.
9. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the security control device and back to the security control device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add next security control device.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Time Zone Select a device and click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the
page to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device List Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.

8.14.6 Add Security Control Device by Device ID

For the security control devices supporting ISUP, you can add them by specifying a predefined
device ID, ISUP login password, etc. This is an economic choice when you need to manage a
security control device in the public network but without fixed IP address by HikCentral
Professional.

185
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

● Make sure the security control device you are going to use are correctly installed and connected

to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order
to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have enabled the ISUP registration function on the security control device. For

details, refer to the user manual of security control device.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Control Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the access protocol.

Note
To allow device registration via ISUP, you need to go to → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and switch on Allow ISUP Registration.
5. Select Device ID as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required information, including device ID, ISUP login password, and device name.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: In the Recording Settings field, switch on Video Storage and select the storage
location from the drop-down list.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including cameras, alarm
inputs, alarm outputs and radars) of the added security control device to an area.

186
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● System will generate security control partitions in the area, based on the settings on the

device.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform the further configurations for the

resources.
10. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the security control device and back to the security control device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add next security control device.
11. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Time Zone Select a device and click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the
page to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device List Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.

8.14.7 Add Security Control Device by Device ID Segment

If you need to add multiple security control devices which have no fixed IP address and support
ISUP to HikCentral, you can add them to HikCentral Professional at a time after configuring a device
ID segment for the devices.

187
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

● Make sure the security control device you are going to use are correctly installed and connected

to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order
to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have enabled the ISUP registration function on the security control device. For

details, refer to the user manual of security control device.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Control Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the Access Protocol.

Note
To allow device registration via ISUP, you need to go to → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and switch on Allow ISUP Registration.
5. Select Device ID Segment as the adding mode.
6. Enter the required information, including the start device ID, the end device ID, and the ISUP
login password.
7. Optional: In the Recording Settings field, set the Video Storage switch to on, and select the
storage location from the drop-down list to store videos.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including alarm inputs and
radars) of the added security control device to an area.

Note
● System will generate security control partitions in the area, based on the settings on the

device.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform the further configurations for the

resources.
10. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the security control device and back to the security control device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add next security control device.
11. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device.

188
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Time Zone Select a device and click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the
page to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device List Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.

8.14.8 Batch Add Security Control Devices

You can edit the predefined template with the security control device information to add multiple
devices at a time.
Before You Start
● Make sure the security control device you are going to use are correctly installed and connected

to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order
to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have enabled the ISUP registration function on the security control device when

adding devices via Hikvision ISUP. For details, refer to the user manual of security control device.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Control Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Control Device page.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol or Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the Access Protocol.

Note
To allow device registration via ISUP, you need to go to → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and switch on Allow ISUP Registration.
5. Select Batch Import as the adding mode.
6. Click Download Template and save the predefined template (excel file) in your PC.

189
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

7. Open the exported template file and edit the required information of the devices to be added on
the corresponding column.
8. Click and select the template file.
9. Optional: In the Video Storage field, set the Video Storage switch to on, and select the storage
location from the drop-down list to store video.

Note
This field displays when you select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the access protocol.
10. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
11. Finish adding devices.
- Click Add to add the devices and go back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other devices.
12. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding devices in a batch.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding
Configurations device.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Time Zone Select a device and click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box in the upper right corner of the
page to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device List Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.

190
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.14.9 Add Security Control Device from the Site on Hik-ProConnect

If you have configured parameters for the site on Hik-ProConnect accessing the platform, you can
add security control devices from the site on Hik-ProConnect to the platform. Deleting devices on
the platform will not delete devices from the site on Hik-ProConnect.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● Make sure you have enabled Access Site on Hik-ProConnect in System Configuration and

configured the required parameters. For details, refer to .

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Control Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Control Device page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Hik-ProConnect Protocol as the access protocol.
5. Select the device source.
- Select New Device, and enter the device serial No., and verification code.

Note
Make sure the new device to be added has registered to Hik-Connect. After the device is
added, the corresponding site where the device is on Hik-ProConnect will also be added.
- Select Hik-ProConnect Device List, and select a device from the list.

Note
If the selected device is deleted from the platform, it will not be deleted from the site on Hik-
ProConnect.
6. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (including cameras, alarm
inputs, and alarm outputs) of the added security control device to an area.

191
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can select Specified Alarm Input and Radar and select the specified alarm inputs or

radars to import to the area.

● Platform will generate security control partitions in the area, based on the settings on the

device.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● Up to 64 alarm inputs can be imported in one area. If you don't import resources to area, you

cannot perform further operations for the resources.

8. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the security control device and back to the security control device list.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add next security control device.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the corresponding device.
Configurations
Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password for the
device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Set Time Zone Select a device and click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Device(s) Enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner of the
page to quickly search the target device(s).
Refresh Device List Click Refresh All to refresh the device list.

8.15 Manage Fire Protection Device

You can add a fire protection device to the system by IP address and IP segment, and add fire
protection devices in a batch. You can also manage the added devices, including editing and
deleting the devices, configuring the devices remotely, changing online devices' password, etc.

192
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.15.1 Add Fire Protection Device by IP Address

When you know the IP address of a fire protection device, you can add it to the platform by
specifying the IP address, user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices to be added are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Fire Protection Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Fire Protection Device page.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol as the access protocol.
5. Select IP Address as the adding mode.
6. Enter the information as required (device address, device Port, device name, user name, and
password).

Note
The device port No. is 8000 by default.
7. Optional: Select the time zone for device.
- Get Device's Time Zone: the current time zone will be applied according to the device
location.
- Manually Set Time Zone (The time zone settings will be applied to the device automatically):
you can select a time zone from the drop-down list and click View to view the selected time
zone details.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added device to the
area.

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area from the area list. Also,
you can click Add to add a new area. For details about adding a new area, refer to Add Area .
9. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to save the current device and return to the device list.
- Click Add and Continue to save the current device and continue to add another device.
10. Optional: After adding the device, you can perform the following operations.
Remote Click to configure the device remotely.
Configurations

193
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password(s)
for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Edit Time Zone Select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to re-edit the
time zone of selected device(s).
Search for Device Enter a key word in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).

8.15.2 Add Fire Protection Device by IP Segment

When you know the IP segment of a fire protection device, you can add it to the platform by
specifying the start and end IP address, device port, user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices to be added are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Fire Protection Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Fire Protection Device page.
4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol as the access protocol.
5. Select IP Segment as the adding mode.
6. Enter the information as required (the start and end IP address, device Port, device name, user
name, and password).

Note
The device port No. is 8000 by default.
7. Optional: Select the time zone for device.

194
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Get Device's Time Zone: the current time zone will be applied according to the device
location.
- Manually Set Time Zone (The time zone settings will be applied to the device automatically):
you can select a time zone from the drop-down list and click View to view the selected time
zone details.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added device to the
area.

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area from the area list. Also,
you can click Add to add a new area. For details about adding a new area, refer to Add Area .
9. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to save the current device and return to the device list.
- Click Add and Continue to save the current device and continue to add another device.
10. Optional: After adding the device, you can perform the following operations.
Remote Click to configure the device remotely.
Configurations
Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password(s)
for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Edit Time Zone Select one or multiple devices and click Time Zone to re-edit the
time zone of selected device(s).
Search for Device Enter a key word in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).

8.15.3 Add Fire Protection Device by Device ID

When you know the device ID of a fire protection device, you can add it to the platform by
specifying the device ID, device name, etc.

195
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

Make sure the devices to be added are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Fire Protection Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Fire Protection Device page.
4. Select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the access protocol.
5. Select Device ID as the adding mode.
6. Enter the information as required.
Device ID
Required; 1 to 32 characters are allowed, excluding special characters such as /\:*?"<>|.
ISUP Login Password
Optional; 1 to 32 characters are allowed, excluding special characters such as /\:*?"<>|.
Device Name
Required; 1 to 64 characters are allowed, excluding special characters such as /\:*?"<>|.
7. Optional: Select the time zone for device.
- Get Device's Time Zone: the current time zone will be applied according to the device
location.
- Manually Set Time Zone (The time zone settings will be applied to the device automatically):
you can select a time zone from the drop-down list and click View to view the selected time
zone details..
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added device to the
area.

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area from the area list. Also,
you can click Add to add a new area. For details about adding a new area, refer to Add Area .
9. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to save the current device and return to the device list.
- Click Add and Continue to save the current device and continue to add another device.
10. Optional: After adding the device, you can perform the following operations.
Remote Click to configure the device remotely.
Configurations
Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

196
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password(s) for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

8.15.4 Add Fire Protection Devices by ID Segment

When you know the device ID segment of a fire protection device, you can add it to the platform
by specifying the start and end ID of device, ISUP login password, etc.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices to be added are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Fire Protection Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Fire Protection Device page.
4. Select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the access protocol.
5. Select Device ID Segment as the adding mode.
6. Enter the information as required.
Device ID
Required; ranges from 0 to 999999999; the start ID should be smaller or equal to the end ID.
ISUP Login Password
Optional; 1 to 32 characters are allowed, excluding special characters such as /\:*?"<>|.
7. Optional: Select the time zone for device.
- Get Device's Time Zone: the current time zone will be applied according to the device
location.
- Manually Set Time Zone (The time zone settings will be applied to the device automatically):
you can select a time zone from the drop-down list and click View to view the selected time
zone details.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added device to the
area.

197
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area from the area list. Also,
you can click Add to add a new area. For details about adding a new area, refer to Add Area .
9. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to save the current device and return to the device list.
- Click Add and Continue to save the current device and continue to add another device.
10. Optional: After adding the device, you can perform the following operations.
Remote Click to configure the device remotely.
Configurations
Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password(s) for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

8.15.5 Add Fire Protection Devices in a Batch

When there are multiple fire protection devices to be added, you can edit the predefined template
containing the required device information, and import the template to HikCentral Professional to
add devices in a batch.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices to be added are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Fire Protection Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Fire Protection Device page.
4. Select Batch Import as the adding mode.
5. Click Download Template and save the file in CSV format to the local PC.
6. Open the downloaded template and enter the required information of the devices in the
corresponding column.

198
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

7. Click and select the edited file.

8. Optional: Select the time zone for device.
- Get Device's Time Zone: the current time zone will be applied according to the device
location.
- Manually Set Time Zone (The time zone settings will be applied to the device automatically):
you can select a time zone from the drop-down list and click View to view the selected time
zone details..
9. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to save the current device and return to the device list.
- Click Add and Continue to save the current device and continue to add another device.
10. Optional: After adding the devices, you can perform the following operations.
Remote Click to configure the device remotely.
Configurations
Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password(s) for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

8.16 Manage Dock Station

The dock station is a data collector which can automatically detect and back up law-enforcement
data and evidence data from body camera(s) connected to it. The dock station can also be used to
charge the body cameras.
After adding dock stations to the system, you can search the data (video footage, pictures, and
audio files) backed up on the dock stations and download the data via the Control Client for
convenient management. You can also monitor the online status of the dock stations, and perform
other operations such as playing video footage backed up on the dock stations.

Note
● For more details about the dock station, see the user manual of the device.
● For details about searching video footage of the dock stations, see the HikCentral Professional
Control Client User Manual.

199
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.16.1 Add Dock Station by IP Address

When you know the IP address or domain name of the dock station to be added, you can add the
device to the platform by specifying the IP address, user name, password, and other related
parameters.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Dock Station on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Dock Station page.
4. Select IP Address as the adding mode.
5. Enter the required information.
Device Address
IP address or domain name of the dock station.
HTTP Port
Enter the HTTP port of the device. By default, it is 80.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device.

Note
Up to 64 characters are allowed for the device name.
User Name
User name of the dock station.
Password
Password of the account that you are logging in.
6. Optional: Set time zone for the dock station.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
7. Optional: Switch on File Storage to set the storage information of files uploaded by the dock
station.
Storage Location

200
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The recording server, in which the videos and pictures will be stored according to the
configured backup schedule. Two types of recording servers are supported: Hybrid Storage
Area Network and pStor.

Note
You should configure the Hybrid Storage Area Network and pStor in advance, or its storage
location cannot be displayed in the drop-down list.
Copyback Time
The backup schedule of files uploaded by the dock station.
8. Finish adding the dock station.
- Click Add to add the current dock station and go back to the dock station list page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the current dock station and add more other dock stations.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit Dock Station ● Click the dock station alias on the device list to edit the dock station.
● Click Copy to to select the item (settings of time zone or storage
information) to copy, and copy the selected settings of this dock station
to other dock station(s).
Delete Dock Select dock station(s) and then click Delete to delete them.
Station
Set Time Zone Select a dock station and then click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Dock Enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner of the page
Station(s) to quickly search the target device(s).

8.16.2 Add Dock Stations by IP Segment

When multiple dock stations to be added have the same port number, user name, password, and
have different IP addresses within a range, you can add devices by specifying the IP segment and
some other related parameters.
Before You Start
Make sure the dock stations you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the
network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able
to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Dock Station on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Dock Station page.
4. Select IP Segment as the adding mode.
5. Enter the required information.

201
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Device Address
Enter the start IP address and the end IP address. For example, if five dock stations need to
be added, and their IP address are "10.41.7.231", "10.41.7.232", "10.41.7.233",
"10.41.7.234", and "10.41.7.235" respectively, you should enter 10.41.7.231 and 10.41.7.235.
HTTP Port
Enter the HTTP port number of the device. By default, it is 5651.
User Name
User name of the dock station.
Password
Password of the account that you are logging in.
6. Optional: Set time zone for the dock station.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
7. Finish adding the dock stations.
- Click Add to add the dock stations and back to the dock station list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add more dock stations.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit Dock Station ● Click the dock station alias on the device list to edit the dock station.
● Click Copy to to select the item (settings of time zone or storage
information) to copy, and copy the selected settings of this dock station
to other dock station(s).
Delete Dock Select dock station(s) and then click Delete to delete them.
Station
Set Time Zone Select a dock station and then click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Dock Enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner of the page
Station(s) to quickly search the target device(s).

8.16.3 Add Dock Stations by Port Segment

When multiple dock stations to be added have the same IP address, user name, password, and
have different port numbers within a range, you can add devices by specifying the port segment
and some other related parameters.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.

202
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Dock Station on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Dock Station page.
4. Select Port Segment as the adding mode.
5. Enter the required information.
Device Address
The same IP address where the devices are located.
HTTP Port
Enter the start port number and the end port number. For example, if there are five dock
stations to be added, and their port number are 80, 81, 82, 83, and 84 respectively, you
should enter 80 and 84.
User Name
The same user name of the dock stations.
Password
Password of the account that you are logging in.
6. Optional: Set time zone for the dock station.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
7. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the dock stations and back to the dock station list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and add more dock stations by port segment.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit Dock Station ● Click the dock station alias on the device list to edit the dock station.
● Click Copy to to select the item (settings of time zone or storage
information) to be copied, and copy the selected settings of this dock
station to other dock station(s).
Delete Dock Select dock station(s) and then click Delete to delete them.
Station
Set Time Zone Select a dock station and then click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Dock Enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner of the page
Station(s) to quickly search the target device(s).

203
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.16.4 Batch Add Dock Stations

When there are multiple dock stations to be added to HikCentral Professional, you can download a
predefined template and fill in the required information of the dock stations, and then import the
template to the platform to add multiple dock stations at a time.
Before You Start
Make sure the dock stations you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the
network as specified by the manufacturer. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able
to connect the device to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Dock Station on the left panel.
3. Click Add to open the Add Dock Station page.
4. Select Batch Import as the adding mode.
5. Click Download Template and save the predefined template (CSV file) on your PC.
6. Open the template file and enter the required information of the devices to be added in the
corresponding column.
7. Click and select the template file.
8. Optional: Set time zone for the dock stations.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone, and click to select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the current time zone.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone to get the device's time zone.
9. Finish adding the dock stations.
- Click Add to add the dock stations and back to the dock station list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add more dock stations.
10. Optional: Perform the following operation(s).
Edit Dock ● Click the dock station alias on the device list to edit the dock station.
Station ● Click Copy to to select the item (settings of time zone or storage
information) to be copied, and copy the selected settings of this
dock station to other dock station(s).
Delete Dock Select dock station(s) and then click Delete to delete them.
Station
Set Time Zone Select a dock station and then click Time Zone to set its time zone.
Search Dock Enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner of the
Station(s) page to quickly search the target device(s).

204
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.16.5 Add Dock Station Group

Dock station group is a group of persons who are linked to the same dock station(s). After linking
persons to dock station(s), the videos and pictures on the persons' body cameras can be copied to
these dock station(s).
Steps

Note
Up to 64 dock station groups can be added.
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Dock Station .
2. Click to open Add Dock Station Group panel.

205
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-12 Add Dock Station Group

3. Enter the basic information.
Name
Create a name for the dock station group.
Description
Enter the descriptive information for the group. E.g., This dock station group is for security
guards in Team A.

206
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Dock Station
Select dock station(s).
4. Click Add.
The dock station group will be displayed in the dock station group list.
5. Add person(s) to the dock station group.

Note
Up to 200 persons can be added to one dock station group.
1) Click Add to open the Add Person/Person Group window.
2) Select a person group from the person group list in the window.
3) Select specific person(s) in the group.
4) Click Add.
The person(s) will be displayed in the person list.

Note
If applying person(s) failed, the Applying Failed tag will be displayed on the person profile
card. You can click the person profile card to view the failure details.
6. Optional: Perform following operations for added dock station groups.
Edit Dock Station Select a dock station group in the dock station group list and click to
Group edit it.
Delete Dock Station Select a dock station group in the dock station group list and click .
Group
Set Person as Super Select a person in a dock station group and click Set As Super User to
User set the person as the super user of the dock station.

Note
Only one super user is allowed for a dock station group.

Cancel Super User Select the super user and click Cancel Super User.
Check Person Hover the cursor onto the and click Details to view the person
Applying Failure applying failure details.
Details
Re-Apply Person(s) Hover the cursor onto the and click Retry to re-apply the person(s)
to the dock station(s).
Delete Person(s) Select person(s) from the person list, and then click Delete to delete
the selected person(s). Or hover the cursor onto next to Delete,
and then click Delete All to delete all persons in the group.

207
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Only Display Check Only Display Persons Failed to Be Applied to filter the persons
Person(s) Failed to whose information is failed to be applied.
Be Applied
Apply All Person(s) Click Apply All to apply the person(s) in the person list to the dock
station(s) linked to the group.

8.17 Manage Digital Signage Terminals

You can add digital signage terminals to the platform and perform further management and
operation. There are two physical forms for the digital signage terminal. One is a terminal with
screen, such as vertical digital signage and wall-mounted digital signage; the other (called digital
signage player) is a station which integrate the function of information release, and it can connect
with LED screen, LCD screen or jointed screen as the displaying screen.

Note
You can add and configure digital signage terminals only in the Digital Signage mode. For where
and how to switch the mode, refer to Switch Application Mode .

8.17.1 Add Digital Signage Terminal

You can add digital signage terminals to the platform by multiple methods: adding online
terminals, adding by IP address, adding by device serial No., and adding by authentication code.
After adding terminals to the platform, you can configure, manage and control the terminals.

Add Online Terminals

The platform can detect the online terminals (referred to as device in the following pages) in the
same LAN as the server, and detect the device IP addresses. Based on this function, you can add
the devices to the platform quickly. When the detected devices use the same user name and
password, you can add the devices to the platform simultaneously.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have downloaded and installed the Web Control on the login page.

● Make sure you are in the Digital Sigange mode. See details in Switch Application Mode .

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server → Digital Signage Terminal .
2. In the Online Device area, select Hikvision Private Protocol/ Hikvision ISUP Protocol to filter the
detected online devices.

208
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
To display the devices which are added to the platform via ISUP protocol, you can go to → All
Modules → General → System Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and check
Allow ISUP Registration.
3. In the online device list, select one or multiple devices to be added, and then click Add to Device
List to enter the Add Device page.
4. Set the basic information.

Note
Parameters vary according to the protocol, via which the device is added.
Device Serial No.
Enter the device serial No.
Authentication Code
Enter the authentication code of the device.

Note
The authentication code should contain 8 to 16 characters, including at least two of the
following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, and numbers.
Device Address
The IP address of the device, which can be obtained automatically.

Note
If you add multiple devices simultaneously, this parameter will not be displayed.
Device Port
The port number of the device, which can be obtained automatically.

Note
If you add multiple devices simultaneously, this parameter will not be displayed.
Device Name
The name of the device, which can be used to describe the device function, location, etc.

Note
If you add multiple devices simultaneously, this parameter will not be displayed.
User Name
The admin account (which is created when activating the device) or the non-admin account,
such as the operator. If you use a non-admin account to add devices, the permissions might
be limited.

209
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Password
The password of the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
5. Optional: Enable Picture Storage to configure the storage location.
Local Storage
The pictures are stored in the SYS server.

Note
You can click Configure to configure the storage location for pictures and files respectively.
For details, refer to Configure Storage for Imported Pictures and Files .
pStor
The pictures are stored in the pStor server.

Note
In the attendance application scene, you should enable Picture Storage.
6. Optional: Set the time zone of the device.
- Select Get Device's Time Zone to get the time zone of the device.
- Select Manually Set Time Zone to manually set the time zone of the device, and the time
zone settings will be applied to the device automatically.
7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added devices to an
area.

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area. Also, you can click Add
New to add new area(s). For details, refer to Add Area for Current Site .
8. Click Add.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding devices.
Change Select one or more devices, and click Change Password to change the
Password password of the selected devices.

210
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If multiple devices have the same password, you can change the password
for multiple devices simultaneously.

Delete Devices Select one or more devices, and click Delete to delete the selected devices.

Note
If the device which has been linked to the video wall is deleted, the
corresponding video wall program cannot be released.

Search Enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner of the page to
Device(s) quickly search the target device(s).
Configure Select one or multiple device(s) and click Display Settings to enter the
Device Display Display Settings page. See Configure Device Display Settings for details.
Settings
Configure Select one or multiple device(s), and then click Privacy Settings to enter the
Device Privacy Privacy Settings page. See Configure Device Privacy Settings .
Settings
Set Time Zone Select one or more devices, and click Time Zone to configure the time zone
of the selected devices.
You can select Get Device's Time Zone or Manually Set Time Zone
according to your requirements.

Add Terminal by IP Address

If you know the IP address of the terminal (referred to as device in the following pages) to be
added, you can add the device to the platform by specifying the IP address, user name, password,
etc.
Before You Start
Make sure you are in the Digital Sigange mode. See details in Switch Application Mode .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server → Digital Signage Terminal .
2. Click Add to enter the Add Device page.
3. Select the Access Protocol as Hikvision Private Protocol.

211
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-13 Add Terminal by IP Address

4. Set the basic information.
Device Address
Enter the IP address of the device.
Device Port
Enter the port number of the device.
Device Name
The name of the device, which can be used to describe the device function, location, etc.

Note
If you add multiple devices simultaneously, this parameter will not be displayed.
User Name
The admin account (which is created when activating the device) or the non-admin account,
such as the operator. If you use a non-admin account to add devices, the permissions might
be limited.
Password
The password of the account.

212
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
5. Optional: Enable Picture Storage to configure the storage location.
Local Storage
The pictures are stored in the SYS server.

Note
You can click Configure to configure the storage location for pictures and files respectively.
For details, refer to Configure Storage for Imported Pictures and Files .
pStor
The pictures are stored in the pStor server.

Note
In the attendance application scene, you should enable Picture Storage.
6. Optional: Set the time zone of the device.
- Select Get Device's Time Zone to get the time zone of the device.
- Select Manually Set Time Zone to manually set the time zone of the device and the time zone
settings will be applied to the device automatically.
7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added devices to an
area.

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area. Also, you can click Add
New to add new area(s). For details, refer to Add Area for Current Site .
8. Click Add.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding devices.
Change Select one or more devices, and click Change Password to change the
Password password of the selected devices.

Note
If multiple devices have the same password, you can change the password
for multiple devices simultaneously.

213
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Delete Devices Select one or more devices, and click Delete to delete the selected devices.

Note
If the device which has been linked to the video wall is deleted, the
corresponding video wall program cannot be released.

Search Enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner of the page to
Device(s) quickly search the target device(s).
Configure Select one or multiple device(s) and click Display Settings to enter the
Device Display Display Settings page. See Configure Device Display Settings for details.
Settings
Configure Select one or multiple device(s), and then click Privacy Settings to enter the
Device Privacy Privacy Settings page. See Configure Device Privacy Settings .
Settings
Set Time Zone Select one or more devices, and click Time Zone to configure the time zone
of the selected devices.
You can select Get Device's Time Zone or Manually Set Time Zone
according to your requirements.

Add Terminal by Device Serial No.

For the terminal (referred to as device in the following pages) supports ISUP protocol, you can add
it to the platform by entering the device serial No., the authentication code, etc.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have activated the device. For details, refer to Create Password for Inactive

Device(s) .
● Make sure you have configured the IP address for receiving device information on the platform,

and select the current NIC as the address for receiving device information. Refer to Set IP
Address for Receiving Device Information for details.
● Make sure you are in the Digital Sigange mode. See details in Switch Application Mode .

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server → Digital Signage Terminal .
2. Click Add to enter the Add Device page.

214
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-14 Add Terminal by Device Serial No.

3. Select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the access protocol.
4. Set the basic information.
Device Serial No.
Enter the device serial No.
Authentication Code
Enter the authentication code of the device.

Note
The authentication code should contain 8 to 16 characters, including at least two of the
following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, and numbers.
Device Name
Name for the device, which can be used to describe the device function and location.
5. Optional: Enable Picture Storage to configure the storage location.
Local Storage
The pictures are stored in the SYS server.

215
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can click Configure to configure the storage location for pictures and files respectively.
For details, refer to Configure Storage for Imported Pictures and Files .
pStor
The pictures are stored in the pStor server.

Note
In the attendance application scene, you should enable Picture Storage.
6. Optional: Set the time zone of the device.
- Select Get Device's Time Zone to get the time zone of the device.
- Select Manually Set Time Zone to manually set the time zone of the device and the settings
will be applied to the device automatically.
7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added devices to an
area.

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area. Also, you can click Add
New to add new area(s). For details, refer to Add Area for Current Site .
8. Click Add.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Change Select one or more devices, and click Change Password to change the
Password password of the selected devices.

Note
If multiple devices have the same password, you can change the password
for multiple devices simultaneously.

Delete Device Select one or more devices, and click Delete to delete the selected devices.

Note
If the device which has been linked to the video wall is deleted, the
corresponding video wall program cannot be released.

Search Enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner of the page to
Device(s) quickly search the target device(s).
Configure Select one or multiple device(s) and click Display Settings to enter the
Device Display Display Settings page. See Configure Device Display Settings for details.
Settings

216
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Configure Select one or multiple device(s), and then click Privacy Settings to enter the
Device Privacy Privacy Settings page. See Configure Device Privacy Settings .
Settings
Set Time Zone Select one or more devices, and click Time Zone to configure the time zone
of the selected devices.
You can select Get Device's Time Zone or Manually Set Time Zone
according to your requirements.
What to do next
Enter the IP address of the platform, registration port No. (7600 by default), and the authentication
code on the device's registration interface. Then the device will be added to the platform
automatically.

8.17.2 Enable General Authentication Code

For the terminal which supports ISUP, you can set general authentication code on the platform.
The authentication code is used for the terminal to register on the platform by ISUP. After enabling
general authentication code on the platform, you should enter the authentication code on the
terminal, which can then be added to the platform automatically.
Before You Start
Make sure you are in the Digital Sigange mode. See details in Switch Application Mode .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server → Digital Signage Terminal .
2. Click General Authentication Code Settings.
3. Switch on General Authentication Code Settings.

217
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-15 Set General Authentication Code

4. Enter the authentication code.

Note
The authentication code should contain 8 to 16 characters, including at least two of the
following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, and numbers.
5. Optional: Import the resources of the device to the area.
1) Switch on Add Resource to Area.
2) Select Create Area by Device Name or Existing Area.
Create Area by Device Name
Create a new area by the device name.
Existing Area
Select an existing area from the area list.

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area. Also, you can click
Add New to add new area(s). For details, refer to Add Area for Current Site .
6. Click Save.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Change Select one or more devices, and click Change Password to change the
Password password for the selected devices.

218
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If multiple devices have the same password, you can change the password
for them simultaneously.

Delete Device Select one or more devices, and click Delete to delete the selected devices.

Note
If the device which has been linked to the video wall is deleted, the
corresponding video wall program cannot be released.

Search Enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner of the page to
Device(s) quickly search the target device(s).
Configure Select one or multiple device(s) and click Display Settings to enter the
Device Display Display Settings page. See Configure Device Display Settings for details.
Settings
Configure Select one or multiple device(s), and then click Privacy Settings to enter the
Device Privacy Privacy Settings page. See Configure Device Privacy Settings .
Settings
Set Time Zone Select one or more devices, and click Time Zone to configure the time zone
of the selected devices.
You can select Get Device's Time Zone or Manually Set Time Zone
according to your requirements.
What to do next
After setting the general authentication code on the platform, you should enter the IP address of
the platform, registration port number (7600 by default), and the authentication code on the
terminal's registration interface. Then the terminal will be added to the platform automatically.

8.17.3 Configure Device Display Settings

After adding terminal (called device in the following pages) to the platform, you can configure the
display parameters of the device remotely, including the luminance, starting up Logo, etc.
Before You Start
Make sure at least one terminal is added to the platform, and make sure the terminal is online.
Refer to Add Digital Signage Terminal for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Resource Management → Device
and Server → Digital Signage Terminal
2. Select one or multiple device(s), and then click Display Settings to enter the Display Settings
page.

219
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

3. Set the device operation related parameters.

Brightness Settings
Drag the brightness bar to adjust the brightness of the screen, or manually enter the
brightness value. The brightness value is 0 to100. The bigger the value, the lighter the screen.
Starting Up Logo
After enabled, the logo will be displayed when the terminal starts up. The logo is set on the
terminal locally.
SADP
After enabled, the terminal(s) can be detected by the platform via SADP protocol, and be
displayed on the online device list.

Note
● You can enable SADP protocol for either single or multiple terminal(s).
● This function should be supported by the device.

Screen Direction
0
The screen direction is 0° by default.
90
The screen direction will rotate 90° clockwise.
180
The screen direction will rotate 180° clockwise.
270
The screen direction will rotate 270° clockwise.
Enter the Password to Unlock Screen
After the screen is locked, the password is required to be entered to unlock the screen. The
password is set on the terminal locally.
4. Set the timed related parameters.
Timed Startup / Shutdown
After enabled, you should select the schedule as Daily Schedule or Weekly Schedule, and
then the terminal will start up or shut down according to the schedule.
a. Drag the mouse on the time bar to draw the start up time duration (blue bar) of one day.
The terminal will be shut down on the other time period.

220
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
- Supports drawing up to 8 time periods of one day.
- You can click the time period (blue bar), enter the start time and end time of the time
period.
b. You can click Clear to clear the wrong time period you draw on the time bar.
Timed Volume
After enabled, you should select the schedule as Daily Schedule or Weekly Schedule, and
then the terminal's volume will turned on/off according to the schedule.
a. Drag the mouse on the time bar to draw the start up time duration (blue bar) of one day.
The terminal will be shut down on the other time period.

Note
- Supports drawing up to 8 time periods of one day.
- You can click the time period (blue bar), enter the start time and end time of the time
period.
b. You can click Clear to clear the wrong time period(s) you draw on the time bar.
5. Optional: Click Restore to restore the displaying parameters to the default parameters.
6. Click Save to save the configuration.

8.17.4 Configure Device Privacy Settings

You can configure the privacy parameters for the device remotely, including event storage mode,
authentication result display, picture uploading and storage, and clearing pictures on device, to
protect the person's private information.
1. In the top left corner of the Home Page, select → All Modules → Resource Management →
Device and Server → Digital Signage Terminal .
2. Select one or multiple device(s), and then click Privacy Settings to enter the Privacy Settings
page. You can set the following parameters.

Note
Make sure the selected device is online.
Event Storage
Select the mode of event storage.
Overwrite
The events stored on the device will be overwritten automatically. For example, if a device
can store up to 200 events. When this limit is reached, the first event will be overwritten
by the newest one, and then the second will be overwritten.
Delete Old Events Regularly

221
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Set a time period. The events stored on the device during the period will be automatically
deleted at intervals of the period.
Delete Old Events by Specified Time
Set a specific time. The events stored on the device before the specific time will be
automatically deleted.
Authentication
Check the items (such as profile photo, name, and employee ID) to be displayed in
authentication results.

Note
The checked items will be displayed in the released attendance program. Refer to Create
Attendance Program for details on creating and releasing attendance programs.
Picture Uploading and Storage
Check to enable the features as needed.
Upload Recognized or Captured Pictures
If it is checked, the recognized or captured pictures will be uploaded to the system.
Save Recognized or Captured Pictures
If it is checked, the recognized or captured pictures will be saved to the devices.
Clear Pictures Stored on Device
Clear Face Pictures
Click Clear to clear all face pictures.
Clear Recognized or Captured Pictures
Click Clear to clear all recognized pictures or captured pictures.
3. Click Save to save the configuration.

8.17.5 Configure Device Parameters Remotely

After adding terminal (called device in the following pages) to the system, you can configure the
parameters of the device remotely, including configuring built-in camera's parameters, linking
external camera, configuring displaying settings and other parameters.

Configure Built-In Camera Parameters

Built-in camera is the camera built-in the terminal. After adding terminal to the platform, you
should configure the built-in camera parameters, such as device name, function, face similarity,
etc.
Before You Start
Make sure at least one terminal is added to the platform, and make sure the terminal is online.

222
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Resource Management → Device
and Server → Digital Signage Terminal
2. Click on the Operation column to enter the device remote configuration page of terminal.
3. In the Linked Device area, select the channel No. of the built-in camera.
4. In the Linked Device area, the built-in camera is displayed by default, click Built-In Camera to
enter the camera parameters settings page.
5. Set the parameters.
Device Name
The device name of the built-in camera.
Function
In the drop-down list, select Attendance,Live View or Temperature Screening.
Attendance
The attendance function will be enabled, and the attendance data will be displayed in the
attendance programs.
Live View
The live view of the camera will be displayed in the live view window of the normal
programs.
Temperature Screening
Enable the temperature screening function of the camera. The real-time temperature
screening is displayed on the temperature screening program.
Similarity
Set the face similarity. When the captured face picture's similarity reaches the value, it will be
regarded as comparison succeeded.
Recognition Distance
It is used to control the recognition distance between the person and camera.
Wearing Mask
Select Yes or No from the drop-down list.
Yes: The camera will recognize persons wearing masks.
No: The camera will not recognize persons wearing masks.
Temperature Measurement
Check Temperature Measurement, then when the camera detects abnormal temperature,
the corresponding prompt will be displayed on the terminal.
Mask Detection
Check Mask Detection, then when the camera detects people without masks, the
corresponding prompt will be displayed on the terminal.
Face Detection Frame

223
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Check Face Detection Frame, then when the camera detects a face, a frame will be displayed
on the terminal.
Quick Capture
Check Quick Capture, then the camera can recognize and capture a face more frequently
even if the face is far away.
6. Click Save to save the above settings.

Link External Device to Terminal

After adding terminals to the platform, you can link external devices such as cameras to the
terminals for attendance, live view, or temperature screening.
Before You Start
● Make sure the external device has been installed properly.

● Make sure at least one online terminal is added to the platform.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Resource Management →
Device and Server → Digital Signage Terminal .
2. Click in the Operation column of the online device to enter the remote configuration page of
the terminal.
3. In the Linked Device area, click Add to enter the Add Device page.

224
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-16 Add Device

4. Select the adding mode as Manually Add or Get From Encoding Device.
5. Optional: Set the following parameters when setting the adding mode as Manually Add.
Device Address
The IP address of the device.
Device Port
The port number of the device. By default, it is 8000.
Device Name
The name of the device, which can be used to describe the function, location, etc., of the
device.
User Name
The user name of logging into the device.
Password
The password of the device.
6. Optional: Select an encoding device from the list when setting the adding mode as Get From
Encoding Device.
7. Select the channel number of the device to be added to the terminal from the drop-down list.
8. Optional: Click Connect to connect to the device.

225
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● If you set the adding mode as Get From Encoding Device, the device should be online if you

need to connect to the device.

● After connecting to the device, you can configure the function for the selected channel. For

details, refer to Configure Built-In Camera Parameters .

9. Click Add Device.

Configure Mode Parameters

On the remote configuration page of terminal, you can configure other parameters except for built-
in camera and external camera, such as basic information, time settings, device operations, timed
configuration and maintenance.

Basic Information
Device Address
Display the IP address of the terminal by default.
Subnet Mask
Display the subnet mask of the terminal by default.
Gateway
Display the gateway of the terminal by default.

Time Settings
Click to customize the time settings.
You can also select Sync with Server Time to synchronize time from the server.
Device Operation, Timed Settings and Maintenance
The display settings of the terminal, refer to Configure Device Display Settings for details.

8.17.6 Upgrade Old Device Firmware

For the terminal whose firmware version is old, the platform can automatically detect this terminal
need to be upgraded, and you can manually upgrade the terminal's firmware.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server → Digital Signage Terminal .
beside the terminal name indicates this terminal's firmware is old and firmware upgrade is
required. Click to enter the Upgrade Device page.
Select the terminal(s) you want to upgrade, and then click Local File to select the firmware package
and then click Upgrade to finish upgrading.

226
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.18 Manage Interactive Flat Panel

You can add interactive flat panels to the platform by multiple methods: adding online interactive
flat panels, adding by device serial No., and adding by general authentication code. After adding
interactive flat panels to the platform, you can configure, manage and control them as needed.

Note
You can add interactive flat panels only in the Interactive Flat Panel mode. For where and how to
switch the mode, refer to Switch Application Mode .

8.18.1 Add Online Interactive Flat Panel

If you have registered the interactive flat panel (referred to as device in the following pages) online
on the Integrated Control App, the device can be displayed in the online device list on the
platform. You can then add the device to the platform. If the online devices use the same
authentication code, you can add them to the platform simultaneously.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have downloaded and installed the Web Control on the login page.

● Make sure you have switched to the Interactive Flat Panel mode. See details in Switch

Application Mode .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server → Interactive Flat Panel .
2. In the online device list, select one or multiple devices to be added, and then click Add to Device
List to enter the Add Interactive Flat Panel page.
3. Set the basic information.

Note
● If you add one device, the device serial number will be displayed automatically. You should
configure the authentication code and the device name.
● If you add multiple devices, the device serial number and the device name will be displayed
automatically. You should configure the authentication code.

Authentication Code
Enter the authentication code of the device.

Note
The authentication code should contain 8 to 16 characters, including at least two of the
following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, and digits.
Device Name

227
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Name for the device, which can be used to describe the device function and location.
4. Set the time zone of the device.
- Select Get Device's Time Zone to get the time zone of the device.
- Select Manually Set Time Zone to manually set the time zone of the device and the settings
will be applied to the device automatically.
5. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added devices to an
area.

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area. Also, you can click Add
New to add new area(s). For details, refer to Add Area for Current Site .
6. Click Add.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Delete Device Select one or more devices, and click Delete to delete the selected devices.
Set Time Zone Select one or more devices, and click Time Zone to configure the time zone
of the selected devices.
You can select Get Device's Time Zone or Manually Set Time Zone as
needed.
Search Device Enter keywords in the upper right corner to search the target device(s).
Edit Device Click a device to edit its basic information and time zone settings if needed.

8.18.2 Add Interactive Flat Panel by Device Serial No.

You can add the interactive flat panel (referred to as device in the following pages) to the platform
by entering the device serial number, the authentication code, etc.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have activated the device. For details, refer to Create Password for Inactive

Device(s) .
● Make sure you have configured the IP address for receiving device information on the platform,

and select the current NIC as the address for receiving device information. Refer to Set IP
Address for Receiving Device Information for details.
● Make sure you have switched to the Interactive Flat Panel mode. See details in Switch

Application Mode .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server → Interactive Flat Panel .
2. Click Add to enter the Add Interactive Flat Panel page.

228
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-17 Add Interactive Flat Panel

3. Set the basic information.
Device Serial No.
Enter the device serial No.
Authentication Code
Enter the authentication code of the device.

Note
The authentication code should contain 8 to 16 characters, including at least two of the
following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, and numbers.
Device Name
Name for the device, which can be used to describe the device function and location.
4. Set the time zone of the device.

229
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Select Get Device's Time Zone to get the time zone of the device.
- Select Manually Set Time Zone to manually set the time zone of the device and the settings
will be applied to the device automatically.
5. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added devices to an
area.

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area. Also, you can click Add
New to add new area(s). For details, refer to Add Area for Current Site .
6. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the current device and back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the current device and continue to add other devices.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Delete Device Select one or more devices, and click Delete to delete the selected devices.
Set Time Zone Select one or more devices, and click Time Zone to configure the time zone
of the selected devices.
You can select Get Device's Time Zone or Manually Set Time Zone as
needed.
Search Device Enter keywords in the upper right corner to search the target device(s).
Edit Device Click a device to edit its basic information and time zone settings if needed.
What to do next
Register the interactive flat panel online: Enter the IP address of the platform, device name,
registration port No. (7660 by default), and the authentication code on the Integrated Control App
on the device. Then the device will be added to the platform automatically.

8.18.3 Enable General Authentication Code

You can enable and set the general authentication code on the platform, and then enter the
authentication code on the interactive flat panel (referred to as device in the following pages). By
this method, you can add the device to the platform.
Before You Start
Make sure you have switched to the Interactive Flat Panel mode. See details in Switch Application
Mode .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Device and Server → Interactive Flat Panel .
2. Click General Authentication Code Settings.
3. Switch on General Authentication Code Settings.

230
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-18 Set General Authentication Code

4. Enter the authentication code.

Note
The authentication code should contain 8 to 16 characters, including at least two of the
following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, and numbers.
5. Optional: Import the resources of the device to the area.
1) Switch on Add Resource to Area.
2) Select Create Area by Device Name or Existing Area.
Create Area by Device Name
Create a new area by the device name.
Existing Area
Select an existing area from the area list.

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area. Also, you can click
Add to add new area(s). For details, refer to Add Area for Current Site .
6. Click Save.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Delete Device Select one or more devices, and click Delete to delete the selected devices.
Set Time Zone Select one or more devices, and click Time Zone to configure the time zone
of the selected devices.

231
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

You can select Get Device's Time Zone or Manually Set Time Zone as
needed.
Search Device Enter keywords in the upper right corner to search the target device(s).
Edit Device Click a device to edit its basic information and time zone settings if needed.
What to do next
Register the interactive flat panel online: Enter the IP address of the platform, device name,
registration port No. (7660 by default), and the authentication code on the Integrated Control App
on the device. Then the device will be added to the platform automatically.

8.19 Manage Smart Wall

Smart wall can provide security personnel with a rich visual overview of the areas you want to keep
an eye on. Before displaying the video on smart wall, you need to set up smart wall firstly, and you
can also edit, delete smart wall or manage decoding devices here.
This mainly includes the following:
● Decoding devices that can be added to the system and used for decoding the video stream from

the encoding devices.

● Virtual smart wall that defines the layout and the name of the smart wall.

● Link between the decoding outputs of the decoding device and the windows of the smart wall.

8.19.1 Add Decoding Device

The decoding devices can be added to the system for linking with the smart wall. You can add
online decoding devices with the IP addresses within SYS server's or Web Client's subnet, and can
also add decoding devices by IP address, IP segment, or by port segment.

Add Online Decoding Device

The system can perform an automated detection for available decoding devices on the network
where the Web Client or SYS server is located, which makes the devices' information about
themselves (e.g., IP address) recognized by the system. Based on the information, you can add the
devices quickly.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.

232
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
● For Google Chrome, you should install the SADP service according to the instructions and then
the online device detection function is available.
● For Firefox, you should install the SADP service and import the certificate according to the
instructions and then the online device detection function is available.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Smart Wall on the left.
3. Click Add on Decoding Device panel to enter the Add Decoding Device page.
4. Select Online Devices as Adding Mode.
5. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS server will list in the Online
Device area.
Local Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the Web Client will list in the
Online Device area.
6. Select the device(s) to be added.

Note
● For the inactive device, you need to create the password for it before you can add it properly.

For detailed steps, see .

● If the detected devices have the same password and user name, you can add multiple devices

at a time. Otherwise, you can add them one by one.

7. Enter the required information.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change

233
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
8. Finish adding the decoding device.
- Click Add to add the decoding device and back to the decoding device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other decoding devices.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the decoding device.
View Decoding Click to show the decoding outputs. You can view the output
Output resolution and linking status after linking the output to smart wall. For
details about linking decoding output with smart wall, see Add Smart
Wall .
Edit Decoding Click to edit the decoding device. You can modify the network
Device location as LAN IP address or WAN IP address according to the type of
the network where the device is.
Remote Click → to set the remote configurations of the device.
Configuration
Note
For detailed operations, see the user manual of the device.

Delete Click → to delete the device.

Configure Cascade Click behind the added video wall controller to enter the Cascading
page. See Configure Cascade for details.

Add Decoding Device by IP Address

When you know the IP address of the decoding device to add, you can add the device to your
system by specifying IP address, user name, password and other related parameters. This adding
mode requires you to add the devices one by one, so it is a good choice if you only want to add a
few devices and know all the details mentioned above.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Smart Wall on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Decoding Device page.

234
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-19 Add Decoding Device Page

4. Select IP Address as Adding Mode.
5. Enter the required information.
Access Protocol
Select Hikvision Private Protocol to add the devices.

235
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Device Address
The IP address of the device.
Device Port
The port number on which to scan. The default is 8000.
If the device is located behind a NAT (Network Address Translation)-enabled router or a
firewall, you may need to specify a different port number. In such cases, remember to
configure the router/firewall so it maps the port and IP address used by the device.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the decoding device and back to the decoding device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other decoding devices.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the decoding device.
View Decoding Click to show the decoding outputs. You can view the output
Output resolution and linking status after linking the output to smart wall. For
details about linking decoding output with smart wall, see Add Smart
Wall .
Edit Decoding Click to edit the decoding device. You can modify the network
Device location as LAN IP address or WAN IP address according to the type of
the network where the device is.
Remote Click → to set the remote configurations of the device.
Configuration

236
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For detailed operations, see the user manual of the device.

Delete Click → to delete the device.

Configure Cascade Click behind the added video wall controller to enter the Cascading
page. See Configure Cascade for details.

Add Decoding Devices by IP Segment

If multiple decoding devices to add have the same port number, user name and password, but
have different IP addresses, which are within a range, you can select this adding mode, and specify
the IP range where your devices are located, and other related parameters. The system will scan
from the start IP address to the end IP address for the devices in order to add them quickly.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Smart Wall on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Decoding Device page.
4. Select IP Segment as Adding Mode.
5. Enter the required information.
Access Protocol
Select Hikvision Private Protocol to add the devices.
Device Address
Enter the start IP address and end IP address where the devices are located.
Device Port
The same port number of the devices. By default, the device port No. is 8000.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

237
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the decoding device and back to the decoding device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other decoding devices.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the decoding device.
View Decoding Click to show the decoding outputs. You can view the output
Output resolution and linking status after linking the output to smart wall. For
details about linking decoding output with smart wall, see Add Smart
Wall .
Edit Decoding Click to edit the decoding device. You can modify the network
Device location as LAN IP address or WAN IP address according to the type of
the network where the device is.
Remote Click → to set the remote configurations of the device.
Configuration
Note
For detailed operations, see the user manual of the device.

Delete Click → to delete the device.

Configure Cascade Click behind the added video wall controller to enter the Cascading
page. See Configure Cascade for details.

Add Decoding Devices by Port Segment

When multiple decoding devices to add have the same IP address, user name and password, but
have different port numbers, which are within a range, you can select this adding mode and specify
the port range, IP address, user name, password, and other related parameters to add them.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.

238
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Smart Wall on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Decoding Device page.
4. Select Port Segment as Adding Mode.
5. Enter the required information.
Access Protocol
Select Hikvision Private Protocol to add the devices.
Device Address
The same IP address where the devices are located.
Device Port
Enter the start port number and the end port number on which to scan.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
6. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the decoding device and back to the decoding device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other decoding devices.
After adding the decoding device, the device will display in the list on Decoding Device panel.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the decoding device.
View Decoding Click to show the decoding outputs. You can view the output
Output resolution and linking status after linking the output to smart wall. For
details about linking decoding output with smart wall, see Add Smart
Wall .

239
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Edit Decoding Click to edit the decoding device. You can modify the network
Device location as LAN IP address or WAN IP address according to the type of
the network where the device is.
Remote Click → to set the remote configurations of the device.
Configuration
Note
For detailed operations, see the user manual of the device.

Delete Click → to delete the device.

Configure Cascade Click behind the added video wall controller to enter the Cascading
page. See Configure Cascade for details.

8.19.2 Configure Cascade

In some actual scenarios for large screen display, the screen number of the smart wall will exceed
the decoding output number of one decoder, or the cross-decoder functions such as roaming and
spanning are required. You can cascade two decoders with video wall controller to meet various
display demands.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● The decoders' interfaces have be connected with the video wall controller's using the matched

wires.
● The decoders and video wall controller are added to the HikCentral Professional. Refer to Add

Decoding Device for details.

Perform this task when you need to configure cascade for the decoding devices as follows.

240
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-20 Cascade

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Smart Wall on the left.
3. Click behind the added video wall controller to enter the Cascading page.

Note
Only video wall controller DS-C10S and DS-C10S-T can support this function.
4. Select the signal channel of the video wall controller and click .
5. Select the decoding output of the decoders to set it as the signal input of the video wall
controller.

Note
If the decoders are cascaded with video wall controller, the spared decoding outputs of the
decoders cannot be used to display on smart wall any more.
6. Click Save to save the cascade.
Result
After configuring cascade, you need to add a smart wall and link the decoding outputs of the video
wall controller to display the signal outputs of the two decoders on the smart wall.

8.19.3 Add Smart Wall

You can add the smart wall to the system and configure its row and column.
Perform this task when you need to add a smart wall to the system.

241
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Smart Wall on the left.
3. Click Add on Smart Wall panel to open the Add Smart Wall dialog.

Figure 8-21 Add Smart Wall Dialog

4. Set the name for the smart wall.
5. If the smart wall type is LED, select the max. resolution of the single output in the drop-down
list.

Note
You can also select Customize to customize the resolution.
6. Set the row number and the column number.
7. Click Add.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the smart wall.
Link Decoding Output For details about the operations, see Link Decoding Output with
with Window Window .
Edit Smart Wall Click to edit the name of the smart wall.
Delete Smart Wall Click to delete the smart wall.
Set Default Stream Type For details about setting the default stream type for cameras,
refer to Set Default Stream Type for Cameras on Smart Wall .

242
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.19.4 Link Decoding Output with Window

After adding the decoding device and smart wall, you should link the decoding device's decoding
output to the window of the smart wall.
Perform this task when you need to link the decoding output to the smart wall.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Smart Wall on the left.
3. Click in front of the decoding device to show the decoding outputs.
4. Click in front of the smart wall to show the windows.
5. Drag the decoding output from the Decoding Device panel to the display window of the smart
wall, to configure a one-to-one correspondence.

Note
You can also press the Ctrl key and Alt key at the same time, and select two decoding outputs.
All decoding outputs between the two outputs will also be selected, then you can drag all
outputs to the display window.

Figure 8-22 Link Decoding Device with Window

6. Optional: Perform the following operations after linking the decoding output with the window.
Cancel Linkage Click on the top right corner of each window to release the linkage.

243
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Set Resolution Click Resolution Settings to select a decoding output resolution from
the drop-down list.
Set Audio Port Click Audio Port Settings to select an audio port.
Set Background a. Click Background Settings.
b. Enable Background.
c. Select background type.
- If the type is Color, set the background color below.
- If the type is Background Picture, click Upload Picture to upload
background pictures. Up to 64 pictures can be uploaded.
d. Click Save.
Set Decoding Click Decoding Output No. Displayed on Screen. After it is clicked, the
Output No. displaying duration of decoding output No. on the screen is from 30 to
Displayed on 60 seconds.
Screen

8.19.5 Set Default Stream Type for Cameras on Smart Wall

According to the actual screen size, display effect, network bandwidth, or other requirements, you
can set the default stream type for cameras displayed on smart wall, including main stream and
sub-stream. You can also set a threshold about window division mode to switch between main
stream and sub-stream automatically. The default stream type is effective for all cameras decoded
and displayed on smart wall firstly.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management . Click Device and Server → Smart Wall on the left to enter the smart wall
management page. On the Smart Wall area, click Stream Type Settings to select the default stream
type as follows.

Figure 8-23 Set Default Stream Type for Cameras on Smart Wall
Main Stream

244
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Main stream provides higher quality video, higher resolution, but brings about higher
bandwidth usage. If you select main stream as default type, the live video streams of all
cameras will be decoded and displayed on smart wall in main stream mode.
Sub-Stream
Sub-stream can save on bandwidth, but the video quality is lower than main stream. If you
select sub-stream as default type, the live video streams of all cameras will be decoded and
displayed on Smart Wall in sub-stream mode.
Auto-Switch Stream Type
If a window's proportion of the smart wall is larger than the configured threshold, the stream
type will be main stream. If the proportion is smaller than the threshold, it will be switched to
sub-stream. For example, if you set the threshold as ¼, when the window division turns to 5-
window from 2-window, the stream type will be switched from main-stream to sub-stream.

8.20 Manage IP Speakers

You can add the IP speakers to the platform via multiple methods such as adding by IP address and
IP segment. After that, you can manage the added IP speakers, including editing and deleting
devices, configuring devices remotely, changing devices' passwords, etc.

8.20.1 Add Detected Online IP Speakers

The platform can automatically detect the available IP speakers on the same network where the
Web Client or the SYS server is located, which makes the devices' information (e.g., IP address)
recognized by the platform. Based on the information, you can add the devices quickly.
You can add one online device at a time, or add multiple online devices in a batch.

Note
You should install the web control according to the instructions and then the online device
detection function is available.

Add a Detected Online IP Speaker

For the detected online IP speakers, you can add the device one by one to HikCentral Professional
by specifying its user name, password and some other parameters.
Before You Start
● Make sure the IP speakers to be added are correctly installed and connected to the network as

specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

details.

245
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → IP Speaker on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
The detected online devices on the same local subnet with the SYS server will be listed in the
Online Device area.
Local Network
The detected online devices on the same local subnet with the Web Client will be listed in the
Online Device area.
4. Select an active device to be added.
5. Click Add to Device List to open the Add Online Device window.
6. Set the required information.
Device Address
The IP address of the device, which displays automatically.
Device Port
The port number of the device, which displays automatically. The default port number is
8000.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to the platform using the non-
admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.

246
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added device to the
area.

Note
● You can import all resources (including alarm inputs, alarm outputs, and speaker units) to the

area, or click Specified Speaker Units and select one or more speaker units from the list to
add the selected resources to the area.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area from the area list.

Also, you can click Add New Area to add a new area. For details about adding a new area,
refer to Add Area .
8. Click Add to add the current device.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Remote Click to configure the device remotely.
Configurations
Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password(s) for the
device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Search Device Enter a key word in the search box in the upper-right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
View Error If there is an icon appearing beside the device name, hover the
Message mouse cursor to the icon and view the error message. You can click Edit/
Refresh to edit/refresh the device if needed.

Add Detected Online IP Speakers in a Batch

For the detected online IP speakers, if they have the same user name and password, you can batch
add multiple devices to HikCentral Professional.

247
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

● Make sure the IP speakers to be added are correctly installed and connected to the network as

specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Select Device and Server → IP Speaker on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
The detected online devices on the same local subnet with the SYS server will be listed in the
Online Device area.
Local Network
The detected online devices on the same local subnet with the Web Client will be listed in the
Online Device area.
4. Select the active devices to be added.
5. Click Add to Device List to open the Add Online Device window.
6. Set the required information.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to the platform using the non-
admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources (such as alarm inputs and
alarm outputs) of the added devices to the area.

248
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area from the area list. Also,
you can click Add New Area to add a new area. For details about adding a new area, refer to
Add Area .
8. Click Add to batch add these devices.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Remote Click to configure the device remotely.
Configurations
Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password(s) for the
device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Search Device Enter a key word in the search box in the upper-right corner, and click
or press the Enter key to search for the target device(s).
View Error If there is an icon appearing beside the device name, hover the
Message mouse cursor to the icon and view the error message. You can click Edit/
Refresh to edit/refresh the device if needed.

8.20.2 Add IP Speaker by IP Address

When you know the IP address of a IP speaker, you can add it to the platform by specifying the IP
address, user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
Make sure the IP speakers to be added are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → IP Speaker on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add IP Speaker page.

249
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Select Hikvision Private Protocol as the access protocol.

5. Select IP Address as the adding mode.
6. Enter the information as required.
Device Address
The IP address of the device.
Device Port
You can enter an integer between 1 and 65535.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device. 1 to 64 characters are allowed, excluding special characters
such as /\:*?"<>|.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to the platform using the non-
admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features. 1 to 32
characters are allowed, excluding special characters such as /\:*?"<>|.
Password
The password required to access the account. 1 to16 characters are allowed.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added device to the
area.

Note
● You can import all resources (including alarm inputs, alarm outputs, and speaker units) to the

area, or click Specified Speaker Units and select one or more speaker units from the list to
add the selected resources to the area.
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area from the area list.

Also, you can click Add to add a new area. For details about adding a new area, refer to Add
Area .
8. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to save the current device and return to the device list.

250
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Click Add and Continue to save the current device and continue to add another device.
9. Optional: After adding the device, you can perform the following operations.
Remote Click to configure the device remotely.
Configurations
Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password(s) for
the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Format SD Card Click to format the SD card of the IP speaker.

Search for Device Enter a key word in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
View Error Message If there is an icon appearing beside the device name, hover over the
icon and view the error message. You can click Edit/Refresh to edit/
refresh the device if needed.

8.20.3 Add IP Speakers in a Batch

When there are multiple IP speakers to be added, you can edit the predefined template containing
the required device information, and import the template to HikCentral Professional to add devices
in a batch.
Before You Start
Make sure the IP speakers to be added are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → IP Speaker on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add IP Speaker page.
4. Select Batch Import as the adding mode.

251
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-24 Batch Add IP Speakers

5. Click Download Template and save the predefined template to your PC.
6. Open the template file and enter the required information of the devices in the corresponding
column.
7. Click and select the edited file.
8. Add the devices.
- Click Add to add the current devices and return to the device list.
- Click Add and Continue to add the current devices and continue to add other devices.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Remote Click to configure the device remotely.
Configurations
Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password(s) for
the device(s).

252
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple
devices to change the password for them at the same time.

Format SD Card Click to format the SD card of the IP speaker.

Search for Device Enter a keyword in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).
View Error If there is an icon appearing beside the device name, hover the
Message mouse cursor to the icon and view the error message. You can click
Edit/Refresh to edit/refresh the device if needed.

8.21 Manage Security Inspection Devices

You can add security inspection devices to the platform for management, including editing and
deleting devices, remote control, etc. The platform supports multiple ways for adding security
inspection devices.

8.21.1 Add a Detected Online Security Inspection Device

You can add a single detected online security inspection device to the platform.
Before You Start
● Make sure the security inspection devices you are going to use are correctly installed and

connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is

required in order to be able to connect the devices to HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed operation about activating devices.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Inspection Device .
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
As the default selection, the detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS
server will be listed in the Online Device area.
Local Network

253
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the current Web Client will be
listed in the Online Device area.
4. In the Online Device area, select Hikvision Private Protocol or Hikvision ISUP Protocol to filter
the detected online devices.

Note
To display devices which can be added to the platform via ISUP, you need to go to → All
Modules → General → System Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and switch
on Allow ISUP Registration.
5. the Online Device area, select an active device and click Add to Device List to open the Add
In
Security Inspection Device window.
6. Select a device type from the drop-down list.
7. Enter the required information.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added security
inspection device to an area.

Note
● You can select all resources or the specified camera(s) to be added.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to area, you cannot perform further configurations for the

resources.
10. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, select a Streaming Server to get the video
stream.

254
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get stream via the selected Streaming
Server when displaying live view on the smart wall.
11. Optional: If you choose to add resources to area, switch on Video Storage and select a storage
location for recording.

Note
Configure the Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, or pStor in advance, or the
storage location cannot be displayed in the drop-down list.
Encoding Device
The video files will be stored in the encoding device according to the configured recording
schedule.
Hybrid Storage Area Network
The video files will be stored in the Hybrid Storage Area Network according to the
configured recording schedule.
Cloud Storage Server
The video files will be stored in the Cloud Storage Server according to the configured
recording schedule.
pStor
According to the configured recording schedule, the video files will be stored in the pStor,
which is the storage access service for managing local HDDs and logical disks.
pStor Cluster Service
pStor Cluster Service is a service that can manage multiple pStors. When there are multiple
pStors storing a large number of video files, use pStor Cluster Service to manage these
pStors.
12. Optional: Set the recording schedule for the added resources.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, including
recording schedule template, stream type, etc. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on
Current Site for details.
13. Click Add.
14. Optional: Perform the following operations for the added device(s).
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the device.
Configurations
Note
For details about the remote configurations, refer to the user manual
of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password.

255
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If multiple devices in the device list have the same password, you
can change the password for them in a batch.

Search for Device Enter a key word in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).

8.21.2 Add Security Inspection Device by Device ID

For the security inspection devices supporting ISUP, you can add them by specifying the predefined
device ID, ISUP login password, etc. This is an economic choice when you need to manage a
security inspection device in the public network without a fixed IP address.
Before You Start
● Make sure the security inspection devices you are going to use are correctly installed and

connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is

required in order to be able to connect the devices to HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed operation about activating devices.

Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Inspection Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Inspection Device page.
4. Select Walk-Through Metal Detector or Analyzer as the device type from the drop-down list.
5. Select Hikvision ISUP Protocol as the access protocol.

Note
To allow device registration via ISUP, you need to go to → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol and switch on Allow ISUP Registration.
6. Enter the required information, including device ID, ISUP login password, and device name.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.

256
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Switch on Picture Storage and select a storage location from the drop-down list.
Local Storage
The pictures will be stored in the local storage space of the platform server.
Hybrid Storage Area Network
The pictures will be stored in the Hybrid Storage Area Network.
Cloud Storage Server
The pictures will be stored in the Cloud Storage Server.
pStor
The pictures will be stored in the pStor, which is the storage access service for managing local
HDDs and logical disks.
Network Video Recorder
The pictures will be stored in the network video recorder.
8. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
9. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added security
inspection device to an area.

Note
● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to the area, you cannot perform further configurations for the

resources.
10. Optional: If you choose to add resources to an area, select a Streaming Server to get the video
stream.

Note
You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get the stream via the selected Streaming
Server when displaying live view on the smart wall.
11. Optional: Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the
device.
12. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to save the settings and go back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add another device.
13. Optional: Perform the following operations for the added devices.

257
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the device.

Configurations
Note
For details about the remote configurations, refer to the user manual
of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password.

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If multiple devices in the device list have the same password, you
can change the password for them in a batch.

Search for Device Enter a key word in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).

8.21.3 Add Security Inspection Device by IP/Domain

If you know the IP address or domain name of a security inspection device, you can add it to the
platform by specifying the IP address (or domain name), user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
● Make sure the security inspection devices you are going to use are correctly installed and

connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is

required in order to be able to connect the devices to HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices to be added should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for

detailed operation about activating devices.

Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Security Inspection Device .
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Inspection Device page.
4. Select Walk-Through Metal Detector or Analyzer as the device type from the drop-down list.
5. Select Hikvision Private Protocol as the access protocol.
6. Enter the required information, including the device address, device name, user name, and
password.

258
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
7. Optional: Set the time zone for the device.
- Click Get Device's Time Zone.
- Click Manually Set Time Zone and select a time zone from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click View to view the details of the selected time zone.
8. Optional: Switch on Add Resource to Area to import the resources of the added security
inspection device to an area.

Note
● You can select all resources or the specified camera(s) to be added.

● You can create a new area by the device name or select an existing area.

● If you do not import resources to the area, you cannot perform further configurations for the

resources.
9. Optional: If you choose to add resources to an area, select a Streaming Server to get the video
stream.

Note
You can check Wall Display via Streaming Server to get the stream via the selected Streaming
Server when displaying live view on the smart wall.
10. Optional: If you choose to add resources to an area, switch on Video Storage and select a
storage location for recording.

Note
Configure the Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, or pStor in advance, or its
storage location cannot be displayed in the drop-down list.
Security Inspection Device
The video files will be stored in the security inspection device according to the configured
recording schedule.
Hybrid Storage Area Network

259
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The video files will be stored in the Hybrid Storage Area Network according to the
configured recording schedule.
Cloud Storage Server
The video files will be stored in the Cloud Storage Server according to the configured
recording schedule.
pStor
According to the configured recording schedule, the video files will be stored in the pStor,
which is the storage access service for managing local HDDs and logical disks.
pStor Cluster Service
pStor Cluster Service is a service that can manage multiple pStors. When there are multiple
pStors storing a large number of video files, use pStor Cluster Service to manage these
pStors.
11. Optional: Set the recording schedule for the added resources.
- Check Get Device's Recording Settings to get the recording schedule from the device.
- Uncheck Get Device's Recording Settings and set the required information, such as recording
schedule template, stream type, etc. Refer to Configure Recording for Cameras on Current
Site for details.
12. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to save the settings and go back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add another device.
13. Optional: Perform the following operations for the added devices.
Remote Click to set the remote configurations of the device.
Configurations
Note
For details about the remote configurations, refer to the user manual
of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click to change the password.

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If multiple devices in the device list have the same password, you
can change the password for them in a batch.

Search for Device Enter a key word in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target device(s).

260
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.22 Network Transmission Device Management

Network transmission devices (switch, network bridge and fiber converter) can be added to the
system for management, to help the system monitor the network status of the managed devices.
After the network transmission devices are added to the system, the Control Client will
automatically draw a network topology according to the location of the added devices, and display
the information (IP address, port No., port status and stream rate) and network link status (fluent,
busy, congested, disconnected).

8.22.1 Add Detected Online Network Transmission Devices

The system can perform an automated detection for available network transmission device s in the
network where the Web Client or server is located, which makes the devices' information about
themselves (e.g., IP address) recognized by the system. Based on the information, you can add the
devices quickly.
You can add one online devices at a time, or add multiple online devices in a batch.

Note
You should install the web control according to the instructions and then the online device
detection function is available.

Add a Detected Online Network Transmission Device

When you want to add one of the detected online devices or add some of these devices with
different user names and passwords, you need to select only one device every time to add it to
HikCentral Professional. The IP address, port number and user name will be recognized
automatically, which can reduce some manual operations in a way.
Before You Start
Make sure the network device (switch, bridge or fiber converter) you are going to use is correctly
installed and connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial
configuration is required in order to be able to connect the device to the HikCentral Professional
via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Network Transmission Device on the left panel.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS server will be listed.

261
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Local Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the Web Client will be listed.
4. In the Online Device area, select the active device to be added.
5. Click Add to Device List to open the Add Network Transmission Device window.
6. Set the required information.
Device Address
The IP address of the device, which is filled in automatically.
Device Port
The port number of the device, which is filled in automatically.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
Country Code
The country code defines the country/region where device will be used.

Note
● You should read and agree the disclaimer to set the country code.

● The country code is required for wireless bridges.

● You cannot edit the country code of the added device on its details page.

7. Click Add.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the device.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of the
Configuration corresponding device.

262
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For detailed operation steps for the remote configuration, see the user
manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online Hikvision devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password for them at the same time.

Set the System Select the device, click System Connected Switch to set the switch as the
Connected Device system connected device.

Note
System connected switch is the switch that is directly connected with the
SYS server.

Add Detected Online Network Transmission Devices in a Batch

For the detected online transmission network devices, if they have the same user name and
password, you can add multiple devices to HikCentral Professional at a time.
Before You Start
Make sure the network devices (switches, bridges or fiber converters) you are going to use are
correctly installed and connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial
configuration is required in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional
via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Network Transmission Device on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, select a network type.
Server Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the SYS server will be listed.
Local Network
The detected online devices in the same local subnet with the Web Client will be listed.
4. In the Online Device area, select the devices to be added.

263
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Click Add to Device List to enter the Add Online Device window.
6. Enter the user name, password, and country code.
User Name
The user name for administrator account created when activating the device or the added
non-admin account such as operator. When adding the device to HikCentral Professional
using the non-admin account, your permissions may restrict your access to certain features.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
Country Code
The country code defines the country/region where device will be used.

Note
● You should read and agree the disclaimer to set the country code.

● The country code is required for wireless bridges.

● For the added device, its country code cannot be edited on the device details page.

7. Click Add.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding devices.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of the
Configuration corresponding device.

Note
For detailed operation steps for the remote configuration, see the user
manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
password for the device(s).

264
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password for them at the same time.

Set the System Select the device, click System Connected Switch to set the switch as the
Connected Device system connected device.

Note
System connected switch is the switch that is directly connected with the
SYS server.

8.22.2 Add Network Transmission Device by IP Address

When you know the IP address of a device, you can add it to the system by specifying the IP
address, user name, password, etc.
Before You Start
Make sure the network device (switch, bridge or fiber converter) you are going to use is correctly
installed and connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial
configuration is required in order to be able to connect the device to the HikCentral Professional
via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Network Transmission Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Network Transmission Device window.
4. Select IP Address as the adding mode.
5. Enter the required information.
Device Address
IP address of the device.
Device Port
The default device port number is 8000.
Device Name
Create a descriptive name for the device. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the device.
User Name

265
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The administrator account which is created when activating the device, or the non-
administrator account, such as operator. When adding device by non-administrator, the
permission might be limited.
Password
The password required to access the account.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
Country Code
The country code defines the country/region where device will be used.

Note
● You should read and agree the disclaimer to set the country code.

● The country code is required for wireless bridges.

● Once the device is added, its country code cannot be edited on the device details page.

6. Finish adding the device.

- Click Add to add the current device and back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to finish adding the current device and continue adding other devices.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding devices.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of the
Configuration corresponding device.

Note
For detailed operation steps for the remote configuration, see the user
manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
password for the device(s).

266
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password for them at the same time.

Set the System Select the device, click System Connected Switch to set the switch as the
Connected Device system connected device.

Note
System connected switch is the switch that is directly connected with the
SYS server.

8.22.3 Import Network Transmission Devices in a Batch

If there are a large number of devices to be added, you can enter the device information in the
pre-defined template and upload the template to add the network transmission devices in a batch.
Before You Start
Make sure the network devices (switches, bridges or fiber converters) you are going to use are
correctly installed and connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial
configuration is required in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional
via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Network Transmission Device on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Network Transmission Device window.
4. Select the adding mode as Batch Import.
5. Click Download Template to download the template to the local PC.
6. Open the downloaded template file, and enter the required device information.
7. Click to select the edited template file.
8. Finish adding the device.
- Click Add to add the current device and back to the device list page.
- Click Add and Continue to finish adding the current device and continue adding other devices.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding devices.
Remote Click in the Operation column to set the remote configurations of the
Configuration corresponding device.

267
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For detailed operation steps for the remote configuration, see the user
manual of the device.

Change Password Select the added device(s) and click Change Password to change the
password for the device(s).

Note
● You can only change the password for online HIKVISION devices
currently.
● If the devices have the same password, you can select multiple devices
to change the password for them at the same time.

Set the System Select the device, click System Connected Switch to set the switch as the
Connected Device system connected device.

Note
System connected switch is the switch that is directly connected with the
SYS server.

8.23 Upgrade Device Firmware

You can upgrade the firmwares of the devices added to the system via the current Web Client or
Hik-Connect.

Via Current Web Client

The following devices are supported to be upgraded the firmwares via the current Web Client:
● Camera

● NVR (Network Video Recorder)

● DVR (Digital Video Recorder )

● Decoding Device

● Access Control Device

● Card Reader

● Security Control Panel (including AX Security Control Panel)

● Security Radar

● Indoor Station

● Door Station

Note
Upgrading the card reader linked to the door station is not supported.

268
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● Main Station
● Guidance Terminal

Note
You can also upgrade the cameras access to the NVR in a batch.

Via Hik-Connect
The following devices are supported to be upgraded the firmwares via Hik-Connect:
● Camera

● NVR

● DVR

● Indoor Station

● Door Station

Note
Upgrading the card reader linked to the door station is not supported.
● Main Station
● Digital Signage Terminal

Note
You can also upgrade the cameras linked to the NVR in a batch.

8.23.1 Upgrade Device Firmware via Current Web Client

You can upgrade device firmware via the current Web Client.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Firmware Upgrade on the left.
3. Select the Via Current Web Client tab.
4. In Upgrade By field, select the upgrade method.
5. In Simultaneous Upgrade field, set the maximum number of devices for simultaneous upgrade.
Example
If you set the value to 5, up to 5 devices can be selected for batch upgrade.
6. Select a upgrade package from the local computer and then click Next.
The upgradable devices will be displayed.
7. Optional: Filter devices by device type, device firmware version, or device model.
8. Select device(s) and then click Next.
9. Select a upgrade schedule to upgrade the selected device(s).
- Select Upgrade Now from the Upgrade Schedule drop-down list to start upgrade.

269
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Select Custom from the Upgrade Schedule drop-down list and then customize a time period
to upgrade the selected device(s).
10. Click OK to save the firmware upgrade settings.
The upgrade task list will be open.
11. Optional: In the top right corner of firmware upgrade page, click Upgrade Tasks to view the
task details and control the task status.

8.23.2 Upgrade Device Firmware via Hik-Connect

You can upgrade device firmware via Hik-Connect, which is a cloud service.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Firmware Upgrade on the left.
3. Select the Via Hik-Connect tab.
4. In Device Access Protocol field, select the relevant protocol.
5. In Upgrade By field, select the upgrade method.

Note
This field is not required if Hik-ProConnect Protocol is selected as the device access protocol.
6. In Simultaneous Upgrade field, set the maximum number of devices for simultaneous upgrade.
Example
If you set the value to 5, up to 5 devices can be selected for batch upgrade.
7. Click Next.
8. Install the required web plug-in.

Note
If you select Local PC as the upgrade method, you should install the required web plug-in if the
prompt pops up.
The upgradable devices will be displayed.
9. Select device(s) and click Next to enter the upgrade schedule page.
10. Select a upgrade schedule to upgrade the selected device(s).
- Select Upgrade Now from the Upgrade Schedule drop-down list to start upgrade.
- Select Custom from the Upgrade Schedule drop-down list and then customize a time period
to upgrade the selected device(s).
11. Click OK to save the firmware upgrade settings.
The upgrade task list will be open.
12. Optional: In the top right corner of firmware upgrade page, click Upgrade Tasks to view the
task details and control the task status.

270
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.23.3 Upgrade Device Firmware via FTP

You can upgrade device firmware via FTP.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Firmware Upgrade on the left.
3. Select the Upgrade Firmware via FTP tab.
4. Set the basic information.
FTP Server Address
The address of FTP server, where you have uploaded the firmware upgrade package.
Port
The port number of FTP server.
User Name
The user name of FTP server.
Password
The password of the FTP server.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
Path
If you saved FTP firmware upgrade package in a non-root directory, enter the root directory
name. If you saved FTP firmware upgrade package in a root directory, keep the field empty.
5. Click Next.
6. Select an upgrade package from the local PC and then click Next.
The upgradable device list will be displayed.
7. Optional: Filter devices by device type, device firmware version, or device model.
8. Select the device(s) and then select Upgrade Schedule from the drop-down list as upgrade now
or custom.
9. Click OK to save the firmware upgrade settings.
The upgrade task list will be displayed.

271
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

10. Optional: In the upper-right corner of firmware upgrade page, click Upgrade Tasks to view the
task details and control the task status.
11. Optional: In the upgrade task list, click in the Operation column to delete the upgrade task.

8.24 Restore/Reset Device Password

If you forgot the password of the detected online devices, you can restore the device's default
password or reset the device's password through the system. Then you can access the device or
add it to the system using the password.
For detailed operations of restoring device's default password, refer to Restore Device's Default
Password .
For detailed operations of resetting device's password, refer to Reset Device Password .

8.24.1 Reset Device Password

If you forget the password you use to access the online device, you can request for a key file from
your technical support and reset the device's password through the platform.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network

as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to

connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for details

about activating devices.

Perform this task when you need to reset the device's password. Here we take creating password
for the encoding device as an example.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, view the device status (shown on Security column) and click icon in
the Operation column of an active device.
The Reset Password window pops up.

272
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-25 Reset Password

4. Select a password reset method:
Reset by File Click Export File to save the device file on your PC. Send the file to the
technical support.

Note
For the following operations about resetting the password, contact the
technical support.

Reset by Email Export the QR code and sent it to the email displayed. You will receive the
verification code in 5 minutes. Enter the code, new password, and confirm
password.
Reset by Enter the answer to the security question, new password, and confirm
Security password.
Question
Note
If you have not set security questions, the window of setting security
questions will pop up, and you should set the security questions as needed.

273
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
5. Click Save to save the change.

8.24.2 Restore Device's Default Password

For some encoding devices with old firmware version, if you forgot the password you use to access
the online device, you can restore the device's default password through the platform and then
you must change the default password to a stronger one for better security.
Before You Start
● Make sure the devices (cameras, DVR, etc.) you are going to use are correctly installed and

connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is

required in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● The devices should be activated. Refer to Create Password for Inactive Device(s) for detailed

operations about activating devices.

Perform this task when you need to restore the device's default password.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Encoding Device on the left.
3. In the Online Device area, view the device status (shown on Security column) and click in the
Operation column of an active device.
A dialog with security code pops up.
4. Enter the security code and restore the default password of the selected device.

Note
Contact our technical support to obtain a security code.
What to do next
You must change this default password to better protect against security risks, such as the
unauthorized access by others to the product that may prevent the product from functioning
properly and/or lead to other undesirable consequences.

274
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change your
password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly or
weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.

8.25 Manage Recording Server

You can add the Recording Server to the system for storing the videos and pictures. The supported
Recording Servers include Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, pStor, and NVR
(Network Video Recorder), etc. You can also form an N+1 hot spare system with several Hybrid
Storage Area Networks to increase the video storage reliability of system.

Note
NVR can only be used to store pictures.

8.25.1 Add pStor

You can add a pStor server as a recording server to the HikCentral Professional for storing the
videos and pictures.
Before You Start
● Make sure the pStor servers you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the

network as specified by the manufacturers.

● Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral

Professional via network.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Recording Server on the left panel.
3. Click to enter the Add Recording Server page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt message will appear on the top of the page. You
can click Configure to set the time synchronization.
4. Select pStor.

275
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Enter the network parameters.

Address
The pStor server's IP address in LAN that can communicate with SYS.
ANR Function
You can check this field to enable the ANR function.
Control Port
The control port No. of the pStor server. If it is not changed, use the default value.
Network Port
The network port No. of the pStor server. If it is not changed, use the default value.
Signaling Gateway Port
The signaling gateway port No. of the pStor server. If it is not changed, use the default value.
6. Optional: Check ANR Function or not.

Note
This function is enabled default. If the network is disconnected between the pStor and the
encoding device, data can be stored on the pStor automatically.
7. Enter the user's access key and secret key of the pStor server for downloading pictures via
Control Client.

Note
You can download these two keys on the pStor server's Web Client page.
8. Optional: Switch on Enable Picture Storage for storing pictures in this pStor.

Note
You should set picture downloading port No., which is used to download pictures via the Control
Client.
9. Optional: If you need to access the server via WAN, switch on Enable WAN Access and set the
corresponding parameters which are available when you access the server via WAN.
10. Enter the name, user name, and password of the pStor server.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.

276
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

11. Optional: In Storage Information field, switch on Custom Video Copy-Back and set the start
time for copy-back.
12. Finish adding the server.
- Click Add to add the server and back to the server list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other servers.
13. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the server.
Edit Server Click Name field of the server and you can edit the information of the
server and view its storage and camera information.
Delete Server Select the server(s) from the list, and click Delete to remove the
selected server(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the login page of the pStor
Server server. You can log in and configure the pStor server.
Search for Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner to search for
Server the target server(s).

8.25.2 Add Hybrid Storage Area Network

You can add the Hybrid Storage Area Network (hereafter simplified as Hybrid SAN) as a recording
server to the HikCentral Professional for storing the video files and pictures.
Before You Start
Make sure the Hybrid SANs you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the
network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able
to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Recording Server on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Recording Server page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization.
4. Select Hybrid Storage Area Network.
5. Enter the network parameters.
Address
The server's IP address in LAN that can communicate with SYS.
Control Port
The control port No. of the server. If it is not changed, use the default value.
Network Port

277
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The network port No. of the server. If it is not changed, use the default value.
File Transmission Port
The file transmission port number of the server. If it is not changed, use the default value.
6. Optional: Enable picture storage function for storing pictures in this Hybrid SAN.
1) Switch on Enable Picture Storage.
2) Set picture downloading port number for downloading pictures via the Control Client. If the
picture downloading port No. is not changed, use the default value.
3) Set signaling gateway port number. If the picture downloading port number is not changed,
use the default one.
4) Enter the access key and secret key.

Note
The access key and secret key are used to download pictures via the Control Client. If required,
you can contact the technical support to get them.
7. Optional: Switch on Enable WAN Access to access the server via WAN.

Note
When enabled, you should set the corresponding parameters including IP address of the server,
the control port No., the network port No., etc.
8. Enter the name, user name, and password of the server.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
9. Optional: In Storage Information field, switch on Custom Video Copy-Back and set the start time
and end time for copy-back.
10. Optional: In Storage Information field, switch on Video Expiration and set the video expiration
day(s).
The oldest videos will be deleted automatically after the specified retention period.
11. Finish adding the server.
- Click Add to add the server and go back to the server list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other servers.
12. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the server.
Edit Server Click Name field of the server and you can edit the information of
the server and view its storage and camera information.

278
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Delete Server Select the server(s) from the list, and click Delete to remove the
selected server(s).
Configure Server Click in the Operation column, and the login interface of the
Hybrid SAN displays. You can log in and configure the Hybrid SAN.
One-Touch If the Hybrid SAN has not been configured with storage settings,
Configuration click in the Operation column to perform one-touch configuration
before you can store the video files of the camera on the Hybrid
SAN.
Search for Server Enter a key word in the search box in the top right corner, and click
(or press the Enter key) to search for the target server(s).
N+1 Configuration Click in the top left corner to enter to N+1 configuration page.
See details in Set N+1 Hot Spare for Hybrid SAN .

8.25.3 Add Network Video Recorder

You can add an Network Video Recorder (NVR) as a recording server to HikCentral Professional for
storing pictures.
Before You Start
Make sure the NVRs you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as
specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect
the devices to the system via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Recording Server on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the adding server page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Network Video Recorder as the server type.
5. Set the required information.
Address
The server's IP address in LAN that can communicate with SYS.
Control Port
The control port No. of the NVR. If it is not changed, use the default value.
Network Port
The network port No. of the NVR. If it is not changed, use the default value.

279
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Picture Download Port

The picture downloading port of the NVR. If it not changed, use the default value.
Signaling Gateway Port
The signaling gateway port No. of the NVR. If it is not changed, use the default value.
6. Enter the user's access key and secret key of the NVR for downloading pictures via Control
Client.

Note
You can download these two keys on the NVR's remote configuration page.
7. Optional: If you need to access the server via WAN, set the Enable WAN Access switch to ON
and set the corresponding parameters which are available when you access the server via WAN.
8. Enter the name, user name, and password of the NVR.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
9. Finish adding the NVR.
- Click Add to add the NVR and back to the server list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other NVRs.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the NVR.
Edit NVR Click Name field of the NVR and you can edit the information of the NVR
and view its storage and camera information.
Delete NVR Select the NVR(s) from the list, and click Delete to remove the selected
server(s).
Configure NVR Click in the Operation column, and the login interface of the NVR will
be displayed. You can log in and configure the NVR.

8.25.4 Manage Cloud Storage Server

You can add a Cloud Storage Server as a Recording Server to the HikCentral Professional for storing
the video files.

280
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Import Service Component Certificate to Cluster Storage Server

For data security purpose, the Cluster Storage Server's certificate should be same with the SYS
server's. Before adding the Cluster Storage Server to the platform, you should import the
certificate stored in the SYS server to the Cluster Storage Server.
Before You Start
Make sure the Cluster Storage Server you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to
the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be
able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps

Note
If the service component certificate is updated, you should export the new certificate and import it
to the Cluster Storage Server again to update.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration .
2. Click Security → Service Component Certificate on the left side.
3. Click Export to export the certificate stored in the SYS server.
4. Log in the configuration page of the Cluster Storage Server via web browser.
5. Click System → Configuration → Cluster Configuration .
6. Input the root keys salt and keys component according to the parameters in the certificate you
export in Step 3.

7. Click Set.
What to do next
After importing the certificate to the Cluster Storage Server, you can add the server to the platform
for management. See Add Cluster Storage Server for details.

Add Cluster Storage Server

You can add Cluster Storage Server as recording server to the HikCentral Professional for storing
the video files and pictures.

281
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

● Make sure the Cluster Storage Servers you are going to use are correctly installed and connected

to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order
to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● You should import the service component certificate to the Cluster Storage Server first before

adding it to the system. See for details.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Recourse
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Recording Server on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the adding server page.

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select Cluster Storage.
5. Enter the network parameters.
Address
The server's IP address in LAN that can communicate with SYS server.
Control Port
The control port No. of the server. If it is not changed, use the default value.
Network Port
The network port No. of the server. If it is not changed, use the default value.
Signaling Gateway Port
The signaling gateway port No. of the server. If it is not changed, use the default value.
6. Enter the user's access key and secret key of the Cluster Storage Server for searching the video
files stored in this Server via the HikCentral Professional Mobile Client or downloading pictures
via Control Client.

Note
You can download these two keys on the Cluster Storage Server's configuration page (click
Virtualizing → User Management ).
7. Optional: Switch on Enable Picture Storage for storing pictures in this Cluster Storage Server.

Note
If this function is enabled, you need to set picture downloading port No., which is used to
download pictures via Control Client.
8. Optional: If you need to access the server via WAN, switch on Enable WAN Access and set the
corresponding parameters which are available when you access the server via WAN.
9. Enter the name, user name, and password of the Server.

282
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
10. Finish adding the Server.
- Click Add to add the server and back to the server list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other servers.
11. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the server.
Edit Server Click Name field of the server and you can edit the information of the
server and view its storage and camera information.
Delete Server Select the server(s) from the list, and click Delete to remove the
selected server(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column, and the login interface of the Cluster
Server Storage Server displays. You can log in and configure the Cluster Storage
Server.

8.25.5 Add pStor Cluster Service

pStor cluster service is a service that can manage multiple pStors and the connected disks of
pStors. When there are multiple pStors storing a large number of video files, you can add pStor
cluster service to the HikCentral Professional for managing pStors. It is also an efficient way to add
multiple pStors.
Before You Start
Make sure the pStor cluster services you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to
the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be
able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Recourse
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Recording Server on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Recording Server page.

283
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-26 Add Recording Server Page

Note
If the NTP server is not configured, a prompt will appear on the top of the page. You can click
Configure to set the time synchronization. See Set NTP for details.
4. Select pStor Cluster Service.
5. Enter the required network parameters.
Address
The server's IP address in LAN that can communicate with SYS.
Network Port
The network port No. of the pStor cluster service. If it is not changed, use the default value.
Signaling Gateway Port
The signaling gateway port No. of the pStor cluster service. If it is not changed, use the
default value.
6. Enter the user's access key and secret key of the pStor cluster service.

Note
You can download these two keys on the Web Client page (enter device's IP address: 9012 in the
browser) of pStor cluster service.
7. Optional: If you need to access the server via WAN, set the Enable WAN Access switch to on and
set the corresponding parameters which are available when you access the server via WAN.
8. Enter the name, user name, and password of the pStor cluster service.

284
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
9. Finish adding the server.
- Click Add to add the server and back to the server list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other servers.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the server.
Edit Server Click Name field of the server and you can edit the basic information of
the server, view its connected device(s) storage information.
Delete Server Select the server(s) from the list, and click Delete to remove the
selected server(s).
Configure Click in the Operation column to enter the login interface of the
Server pStor cluster service. You can log in and configure the pStor cluster
service.
Search for Enter keyword(s) in the search box in the top right corner to search for
Server the target server(s).

8.25.6 Set N+1 Hot Spare for Hybrid SAN

You can form an N+1 hot spare system with several Recording Servers. The system consists of
several host servers and a spare server. When the host server fails, the spare server switches into
operation, thus increasing the video storage reliability of HikCentral Professional.
Before You Start
● Make sure the Hybrid Storage Area Networks you are going to use are correctly installed and

connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is

required in order to be able to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
● At least two online Hybrid Storage Area Networks should be added to form an N+1 hot spare

system.

285
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
● The N+1 hot spare function is only supported by Hybrid Storage Area Networks and NVRs. For
details about configuring N+1 hot spare system with NVRs, see Set N+1 Hot Spare for NVR .
● The spare server cannot be selected for storing videos until it switches to host server.
● The host server cannot be set as a spare server and the spare server cannot be set as a host
server.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Recording Server → to enter the N+1 Configuration page.

Figure 8-27 N+1 Configuration Page

3. Click Add to set the N+1 hot spare.
4. Select a Hybrid Storage Area Network in the Spare drop-down list to set it as the spare server.
5. Select the Hybrid Storage Area Network(s) in the Host field as the host server(s).
6. Click Add.

Note
The recording schedules configured on the Hybrid Storage Area Network will be deleted after
setting it as the spare Recording Server.
7. Optional: After setting the hot spare, you can do one or more of the following.
Edit Click on the Operation column, and you can edit the spare and host
settings.
Delete Click on the Operation column to cancel the N+1 hot spare settings.

Note
Canceling the N+1 hot spare will cancel all the host-spare associations and
clear the recording schedule on the spare server.

Send Click on the Operation column to send the recording schedule on the host
Recording server to the spare one again if the host server sending the recording
Schedule schedule to spare server failed.

286
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.26 Manage Streaming Server

You can add the Streaming Server to the HikCentral Professional to get the video data stream from
the Streaming Server, thus to lower the load of the device.

Note
For system which supports Remote Site Management, the cameras imported from Remote Site
adopt the Streaming Server configured on the Remote Site by default. You are not required to add
the Streaming Server to Central System and configure again.

8.26.1 Input Certificate Information to Streaming Server

For data security purpose, the Streaming Server's certificate should be the same with the SYS
server's. Before adding the Streaming Server to the platform, you should enter the certificate
information stored in the SYS server to the Streaming Server.
Steps

Note
If the service component certificate is updated, you should enter the new certificate information to
the Streaming Server again to update.
1. Log into the Web Client on the SYS server locally.
You will enter the Home page of the Web Client.
2. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration .
3. Click Security → Service Component Certificate on the left.
4. Click Generate Again to generate the security certificate for Streaming Server verification.

Note
You need to enter the account password for verification to generate the security certificate.
5. On the computer which has installed with Streaming Service, open the Service Manager.
6. Click Security Certificate.

287
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-28 Enter Security Certificate

7. Enter the certificate information you generate in step 4.

8.26.2 Add Streaming Server

You can add a Streaming Server to the system to forward the video stream.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → Streaming Server on the left panel.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Streaming Server page.
4. Enter the required information.
Name
Create a descriptive name for the server. For example, you can use an alias that can show the
location or feature of the server.
Network Location
Select LAN IP Address if the Streaming Server and the SYS server are in the same LAN.
Otherwise, select WAN IP Address.
Address
The IP address of streaming server to be added.
Real Time Streaming Port
It is used for Streaming Service to get stream. If it is not changed, use the default value.
Network Port
It is used for getting the status of Streaming Service. If it is not changed, use the default value.

288
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Web Client Streaming Port

It is used for getting stream for Google Chrome or Firefox. If it is not changed, use the default
value.
Management Port
It is used for security certificate authentication. If it is not changed, use the default value.
Web Client Streaming Port
It is used for Web Client streaming. If it is not changed, use the default value.
RTMP Streaming Port
It is used for OpenAPI streaming. If it is not changed, use the default value.
HLS Streaming Port
It is used for OpenAPI streaming. If it is not changed, use the default value.
5. Optional: If you need to access the server via WAN, switch on Enable WAN Access and set the
corresponding parameters (address, real-time streaming port, web client streaming port, ISUP
streaming port (via plugin), ISUP Port for two-way audio, broadcasting port for ISUP device, web
client streaming port (SSL), RTMP streaming port, and HLS streaming port) which are available
when you access the server via WAN.

Note
The Enable WAN Access switch is available only when you set Network Location as LAN IP
Address.
6. Finish adding the Streaming Server.
- Click Add to add the server and back to the server list page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the server and continue to add other servers.
The servers will be displayed on the server list. You can check the related information of the
added servers on the list.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the streaming server.
Edit a Server Click Name field of the server and you can edit the basic information of the
server, view its related resources information.
Delete Server(s) Select the server(s) from the list, and click Delete to remove the selected
server(s).
Search Server(s) Enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner of the page to
quickly search the target server(s).

8.27 Add DeepinMind Server

When you know the related parameters such as IP address and port No. of the DeepinMind server,
you can add it to the platform for intelligent functions, such as facial recognition, behavior analysis,
and intrusion detection.

289
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

Make sure the DeepinMind server you are going to use is correctly installed and connected to the
network as specified by the manufacturers. Such initial configuration is required in order to be able
to connect the devices to the HikCentral Professional via network.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Device and Server → DeepinMind Server on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add DeepinMind Server page.
4. Set the required basic information such as device address, device port number, and WAN access.
Address
IP address of the DeepinMind server.
Enable WAN Access
Enable the DeepinMind server to access WAN (Wide Area Network).

Note
After enabling the WAN Access, you need to set the WAN IP address and port number of the
DeepinMind server for WAN access.
5. Finish adding the DeepinMind server.
- Click Add to finish adding the server.
- Click Add and Continue to add the current server and continue to add more.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the server.
Edit Server Click Name field of the server, and you can edit the information of the
server.
Delete Server Select the server(s) from the list, and click Delete to delete the selected
server(s).
Configure Server Click , and the login interface of the server displays. You can log in and
configure the server.

8.28 Manage Remote Site

You can add other HikCentral Professional without RSM (Remote Site Management) module to the
HikCentral Professional with RSM module as the Remote Site for central management.
After adding the Remote Site to the Central System, you can manage the Remote Site's cameras
(such as live view and playback), add the Remote Site's configured alarms so that you can manage
the alarms via the Central System, and set the recording schedule for the Remote Site's cameras
and store the recorded video files in the Recording Server added to the Central System.
Remote Site

290
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

If the HikCentral Professional doesn't have RSM module (based on the License you purchased),
you can add it to the Central System as Remote Site.
Central System
If the HikCentral Professional has RSM module (based on the License you purchased), you can
add other Remote Sites to this system. This system and the added Remote Sites are called
Central System.

Note
● The system with RSM module cannot be added to other Central System as Remote Site.
● If one Remote Site has been added to one Central System, it cannot be added to other Central
System.

8.28.1 Add Remote Site by IP Address or Domain Name

If you know the IP address or domain name of the Remote Site to be added, you can add the site to
the Central System by specifying the IP address (or domain name), user name, password, and other
related parameters.
Steps

Note
● When adding Remote Site, the site's cameras and area information are imported to the Central
System by default.
● When you perform the following steps, the progress of the whole task will be displayed on the
upper right side.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Remote Site
Management .
2. Enter the Add Remote Site page.
- If no Remote Site is added, click Add Site to enter the Add Remote Site page.
- If you have already added Remote Site, click on the left to enter the Add Remote Site page.

291
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-29 Add Remote Site

Note
If you did not set the NTP server which is used for synchronizing the time between the SYS and
the NTP server, a message will be displayed on the top of this page. If you need, click the button
to go to the System Configuration page.
3. Select IP Address/Domain as the adding mode.
4. Enter the required information.

292
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Site Address
The IP address or domain name of the Remote Site.
Site Port
Enter the port No. of the Remote Site.
Name
Edit a name for the Remote Site as desired. You can check Get Name to synchronize the
Remote Site's name automatically.
User Name
The user name for the Remote Site, such as admin user and normal user.
Password
The password required to access the Remote Site.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend
you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including
at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend
you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the
password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
Description
Optionally, you can enter the descriptive information for the Remote Site, such as location
and deployment.
5. Optional: Enable receiving the alarms configured on the Remote Site.
1) Set the Select Alarm switch to ON to display all the configured alarms on a Remote Site.

293
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-30 Receive Alarm from Site Page

2) Optional: Click to filter the configured alarms by the alarm source, area, triggering event,
etc.
3) Select the configured alarm(s).

Note
● After receiving the alarm from Remote Site, the alarm will be configured as alarm in Central

System automatically. You can click Default Configuration Rule to view the imported
alarms' default settings including alarm name, alarm priority, actions, etc.
● You can view and edit alarms in Event and Alarm module. For details about setting the

event and alarm, refer to Event and Alarm .

6. Back up the Remote Sites' database in the Central System and you can set the maximum number
of backups and view the database saving path in the Central System.
Max. Number of Backups
Define the maximum number of backup files available on the platform.
7. Optional: Enable backing up the Remote Site's database in schedule.
1) Switch on Scheduled Database Backup.
2) Select how often to back up the database.

Note
If you select Weekly or Monthly for running the backup task, select which day to run.
3) Select what time of a day to start backup.
8. Click Add to add the remote site.

294
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8.28.2 Add Remote Site Registered to Central System

If the Remote Sites have been registered to the Central System and the Central System also
enabled the receiving site registration function, the registered Remote Sites will display in the site
list. You can add them to the Central System by entering user names and passwords.
Before You Start
● The Remote Site must be registered to the Central System by entering the Central System's

network parameters (see Set Network Parameters for details).

● Make sure the receiving site registration function has been enabled on the Central System. (see

Set Network Parameters for details).

Perform this task when you need to add the site which has registered to the Central System.
Steps

Note
● When adding Remote Site, the site's cameras and logical area information are imported to the
Central System by default.
● When you perform the following steps, the progress of the whole task will be displayed on the
upper right side.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Remote Site
Management .
2. Enter the adding Remote Site page.
- If no Remote Site added, click Add Site to enter the Add Remote Site page.
- If you have already added Remote Site, click on the left to enter the Add Remote Site page.

295
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-31 Add Remote Site Page

Note
If you did not set the NTP server which is used for synchronizing the time between the SYS and
the NTP server, a message will be displayed on the top of this page. If you need, click the button
to go to the System Configuration page.
3. Select Site Registered to Central System as the adding mode.
The sites which have already registered to the Central System will display in the list.
4. Select the Remote Site(s) and enter the user name and password of the Remote Site(s).

Caution
The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change
your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly
or weekly can better protect your product.
Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
5. Back up the Remote Sites' database in the Central System and you can set the maximum number
of backups and view the database saving path in the Central System.

296
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Max. Number of Backups

Define the maximum number of backup files available on the system.

Note
The value of maximum number of backups ranges from 1 to 5.
6. Optional: Back up the Remote Site's database in schedule.
1) Set the Scheduled Database Backup switch to ON to enable the scheduled backup.
2) Select how often to back up the database.

Note
If you select Weekly or Monthly for running the backup task, select which day to run.
3) Select what time of the day to start backup.
7. Click Add to add the Remote Site and go back to the Remote Site list page.

8.28.3 Add Remote Sites in a Batch

When you want to add multiple Remotes Sites at a time for convenience, you can edit the
predefined template by entering the sites' parameters and import the template to the Central
System to add them.
Steps

Note
● When adding Remote Site, the site's cameras and logical area information are imported to the
Central System by default.
● When you perform the following steps, the progress of the whole task will be displayed on the
upper right side.

1. On the top navigation bar, select → Security Monitoring → Video .

2. On the left pane, click Remote Site Management.
3. Enter the Add Remote Site page.
- If no Remote Site added, click Add Site to enter the Add Remote Site page.
- If you have already added Remote Site, click on the left to enter the Add Remote Site page.

297
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-32 Add Remote Site

Note
If you did not set the NTP server which is used for synchronizing the time between the SYS and
the NTP server, a message will be displayed on the top of this page. If you need, click the button
to go to the System Configuration page.
4. Select Batch Import as the adding mode.
5. Click Download Template and save the predefined template on your PC.
6. Open the exported template file and input the required information of the Remote Sites to be
added on the corresponding column.
7. Click and select the template file.
8. Back up the Remote Sites' database in the Central System and you can set the maximum number
of backups and view the database saving path in the Central System.
Max. Number of Backups
Define the maximum number of backup files available on the system.
9. Optional: Back up the Remote Site's database in schedule.
1) Set the Scheduled Database Backup switch to ON to enable the scheduled backup.
2) Select how often to back up the database.

298
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If you select Weekly or Monthly for running the backup task, select which day to run.
3) Select what time of the day to start backup.
10. Click Add to add the Remote Site and go back to the Remote Site list page.

8.28.4 Back Up Remote Site's Database to Central System

After adding the Remote Site, you can back up the database of the Remote Site to the Central
System. The database backup can be performed according to the configured schedule or
immediately. In case of the data deletion or corruption following a natural or human-induced
disaster, you can recover the data to ensure the business continuity.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Remote Site
Management .

Note
If you have customized the menu (see Customize Navigation Bar for details), click Remote Site
Management on navigation bar to enter the Remote Site management page.
2. In the site list on the left, click the Remote Site name to view its details.

Figure 8-33 Back up Remote Site Database in Central System

3. Click Back Up Now to back up the Remote Site's database manually.
4. Optional: Set the backup parameters and enable scheduled database backup if needed to back
up the Remote Site's database regularly.
1) Click Set Database Backup to open the Set Database Backup dialog.

299
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-34 Set Database Backup

2) Switch on the Scheduled Database Backup to enable the scheduled backup.
3) Select how often to back up the database.

Note
If you select Weekly or Monthly for running the backup task, select which day to run.
4) Select what time of the day to start backup.
5) Set the Max. Number of Backups to define the maximum number of backup files available on
the system.

Note
The maximum number of the backups should be between 1 to 5.
6) Click Save.
Result
The backup file (including manual backup and scheduled backup) will display in the list, showing
the file name and backup time.

8.28.5 Edit Remote Site

After adding the Remote Site, you can view and edit the added Remote Site's information and set
its GPS location.

300
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Remote Site
Management .

Note
If you have customized the menu (see Customize Navigation Bar for details), click Remote Site
Management on navigation bar to enter the Remote Site management page.
2. In the site list on the left, click the Remote Site name to view its details.
3. View and edit the basic information of the Remote Site, including IP address, port, alias, etc.

Note
You cannot edit the address and port of the site registered to the Central System.
4. In the original information field, view the Remote Site's site name, system ID, system version,
and GPS location.

Note
If the GPS location is not configured, click Configuration to set its location in Map module. See
Map Management for details.
5. Optional: Click Configuration on Site to open the Web Client of the Remote Site and log in for
further configuration.

Note
The site must be online if you need to enter its Web Client.
6. Click Save.

8.28.6 View Remote Site's Changes

When there are changed resources on the Remote Site, such as newly added cameras, deleted
cameras, and name changed cameras, you can view the changed resources and synchronize the
resources in Central System with the Remote Site.
Steps

Note
The site should be online if you need to view the changed resources.
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Remote Site
Management .

Note
If you have customized the menu (see Customize Navigation Bar for details), click Remote Site
Management on navigation bar to enter the Remote Site management page.
2. Click in the site list on the left to get the latest status of the Remote Sites.

301
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

3. Click the site name whose resources are changed to enter its details page.
4. Click Changes of Remote Site to view the changes.

Figure 8-35 Remote Site Management

5. When there are newly added cameras on the site, you can view the added cameras and add
them to the area in Central System.
1) If there are some newly added cameras on Remote Site, click Newly Added Camera to expand
the newly added camera list.

Figure 8-36 Changes of Remote Site

You can view the camera name and area name on the Remote Site.
2) Select the camera(s) and click Add to Central Area to synchronize the newly added cameras to
the Central System.
3) Select the area in the Central System.
4) Click Save.
6. When there are some cameras deleted from the site, you can view the deleted cameras and
remove them from Central System.
1) If there are some cameras deleted from Remote Site, click Deleted Camera to expand the
deleted camera list.

302
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 8-37 Change of Remote Site

You can view the camera name and its area in Central System.
2) Click Delete All Cameras Below in Central to delete the deleted cameras in Central System.
7. When there are some cameras whose names are changed on the site, you can view the name
changed cameras and synchronize them to Central System.
1) If the name of camera of Remote Site is changed, click Name Changed Camera to expand the
name changed camera list.

Figure 8-38 Name Changed Camera

You can view the camera names in Remote Site and Central System.
2) Select the cameras and click Synchronize Camera Name to synchronize the camera name in
Central System.

303
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 9 Area Management

HikCentral Professional provides areas to manage the added resources in different groups. You can
group the resources into different areas according to the resources' locations. For example, on the
1st floor, there mounted 64 cameras, 16 access points, 64 alarm inputs, and 16 alarm outputs. You
can organize these resources into one area (named 1st Floor) for convenient management. You can
get the live view, play back the video files, and do some other operations of the devices after
managing the resources by areas.

Note
If the current system is a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can also
manage the areas on a Remote Site and add cameras on Remote Site into areas.

9.1 Add Area

You should add an area before managing the elements by areas.

9.1.1 Add Area for Current Site

You can add an area for the current site to manage the devices.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Optional: Select the parent area in the area list panel to add a sub area.

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is the current site.
4. Click on the area list panel to open the Add Area panel.

304
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 9-1 Add Area for Current Site

5. Select the parent area to add a sub area.
6. Create a name for the area.
7. Optional: Select a Streaming Server for the area to get the video stream of the cameras
belonging to this area via the server.
All cameras belonging to this area via the server are listed in the Related Cameras area. If the
camera is online, you can click its name to view its basic information, recording settings, and
picture storage settings.
8. Optional: If you select a Streaming Server for the area, check Wall Display via Streaming Server
to display the area's resources on the smart wall via this Streaming Server.
9. Optional: Click Expand to expand and set the additional area information as needed.

Note
For details about customizing fields of the additional area information, refer to Customize
Additional Information .
10. Click Add.
11. Optional: After adding the area, you can do one or more of the following:
Edit Area Click to edit the area.
Delete Click to delete the selected area, or press Ctrl on your keyboard, select
Area multiple areas, and then click to delete areas in a batch.

305
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
After deleting the area, the resources (cameras, doors, elevators, radars,
alarm inputs, alarm outputs, UVSSs, and digital signage terminals) in the
area will be removed from the area, as well as the corresponding recording
settings, event settings, and map settings.

Search Enter a keyword in the search field of the area list panel to search for the
Area area.
Move Area Drag the added area to another parent area as the child area.

9.1.2 Add Area for Remote Site

You can add an area for the remote site to manage the devices in the Central System.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select an added remote site from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is a remote site.
4. Click on the area list panel to open the Add Area panel.

306
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 9-2 Add Area for Remote Site

5. Select a parent area to add a sub-area.
6. Set the adding mode for adding the area.
Import Area with New Cameras
If there are some cameras newly added to the areas on a remote site, you can import the
areas as well as those newly added cameras. The areas with newly added cameras will be
displayed and you can select the areas to add.
Add
Add a new area to the parent area.
7. Optional: Select a Streaming Server for the area to get the video stream of the cameras
belonging to this area via the server.
8. Optional: If you select a Streaming Server for the area, check Wall Display via Streaming Server
if you want to display the area's resources on the smart wall via this Streaming Server.
9. Optional: Click Expand to expand and set the additional area information as needed.

Note
For details about customizing the additional area information, refer to Customize Additional
Information .
10. Click Add.
11. Optional: After adding the area, you can do one or more of the following:

307
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Edit Area Click to edit the area.

Delete Area Click to delete the selected area, or press Ctrl on your keyboard, select
multiple areas, and then click to delete areas in a batch.

Note
After deleting the area, the cameras will be removed from the area, as well
as the corresponding recording settings and event settings.

Search Area Enter a keyword in the search field of the area list panel to search for the
area.
Move Area Drag the added area to another parent area as the child area.

9.1.3 Customize Additional Information

You can customize the area information which is not included in the basic information according to
actual needs, e.g., description. After customizing, you can enter the additional area information to
make the area information complete when adding or editing an area.
In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Area .
In the area list panel on the left, click to enter the Customize Additional Information page. Click
Add, set the name and type, and click Add to customize the additional area information.
You can also click to edit the additional information or click to delete it.

9.2 Add Element to Area

You can add elements to areas for management, including cameras, doors, elevators, vehicles,
security radars, alarm inputs, alarm outputs, Under Vehicle Surveillance Systems (UVSSs), digital
signage terminals, and interactive flat panels.

9.2.1 Add Camera to Area for Current Site

You can add cameras to areas for the current site. After adding cameras to areas, you can get the
live view, play the video files, and so on.
Before You Start
The cameras need to be added to HikCentral Professional for area management. Refer to Manage
Encoding Device for details.

308
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
One camera can only belong to one area. You cannot add a camera to multiple areas.
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area for adding cameras to.

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is the current site.
4. Select the Camera tab.
5. Click on the element page to enter the Add Camera page.
6. Select the device type.
7. Select the camera(s) to be added.
8. Optional: Check Get Device's Recording Settings to obtain the recording schedule configured on
the local device and the device can start recording according to the schedule.

Note
If the recording schedule configured on the device is not continuous recording, it will be
changed to event recording on the local device.
9. Click Add.
The added camera(s) will be displayed in the list.
10. Optional: After adding the camera(s), you can do one or more of the followings:
Configure Camera Click in the Operation column to configure the camera.
Export Information of Click to export the information of all cameras added to the
All Cameras area to an Excel file.
Synchronize Camera Select the cameras and click to get the cameras' names from
Name the devices in a batch.

Note
You can only synchronize the camera name of the online
HIKVISION device.

Apply Camera Name Select the cameras and click to apply the cameras' names to
the devices in a batch.
Get Recording Select the cameras and click to get the recording schedules
Schedule from the devices in a batch.

309
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Set Camera ID Click to enter the Camera ID page, edit the default identifier
number in the ID column of each camera, and click Save.

Note
The camera ID is unique and is used to display a certain camera's
live view on the smart wall via the network keyboard.

Get PTZ Select the cameras and click to get the details of PTZ
Configuration configurations from the devices in a batch.
Move Camera(s) to Select the cameras, click , select a target area, and click Move
Another Area to move the selected cameras to the target area.
Set Geographic Click to enter the Map Settings page and drag the camera to
Location the map. For details, refer to Add Hot Spot on Map .
Display Cameras of Check Include Sub-Area to display the cameras of child areas.
Child Areas
Filter Cameras by Select the device type(s) to be displayed in the list from the drop-
Device Type down list to the left of the search box.

9.2.2 Add Camera to Area for Remote Site

If the current system is a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can also
add cameras from the Remote Site to areas in the Central System for management.
Before You Start
Encoding devices need to be added to HikCentral Professional for area management. Refer to
Manage Encoding Device for details about adding devices.
Steps

Note
Cameras can only belong to one area. You cannot add a camera to multiple areas.
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added Remote Site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is a Remote Site.
4. Select an area for adding cameras to in the area list panel.
5. Select the Camera tab.

310
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

6. Click on the element page to enter the Add Camera page.

Figure 9-3 Add Camera to Area for Remote Site

7. Select the camera(s) to be added.

Note
Up to 64 cameras can be added to one area.
8. Click Add.
The added camera(s) will be displayed in the list.
9. Optional: After adding the camera(s), you can do one or more of the followings:
Export Information of Click to export the information of all cameras added to the area
All Cameras to an Excel file.
Synchronize Camera Select the cameras and click to get the cameras' names from the
Name devices in a batch.
Set Camera ID Click to enter the Camera ID page, edit the default identifier
number in the ID column of each camera, and click Save.

Note
The camera ID is unique and used to display a certain camera's live
view on the smart wall via the network keyboard.

311
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Get PTZ Configuration Select the cameras and click to get the details of PTZ
configurations from the devices in a batch.
Move Camera(s) to Select the cameras, click , select a target area, and click Move to
Another Area move the selected cameras to the target area.
Display Cameras of Check Include Sub-Area to display the cameras of child areas.
Child Areas
Filter Cameras by Select the device type(s) to be displayed in the list from the drop-
Device Type down list to the left of the search box.

9.2.3 Add Door to Area for Current Site

You can add doors to areas for the current site for management.
Before You Start
The access control devices need to be added to the HikCentral Professional for area management.
Refer to Manage Access Control Device for details.
Steps

Note
One door can only belong to one area. You cannot add one door to multiple areas.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area for adding doors to in the area list panel.

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select the Door tab.
5. Click on the element page to enter the Add Door page.
6. Select the device type.
7. Select the door(s) to be added.
8. Click Add.
The added door(s) will be displayed in the list.
9. Optional: After adding the doors, you can do one or more of the following.
Synchronize Door Select the doors and click to synchronize the doors' names from
Name the device in a batch.

312
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can only synchronize the door name of online HIKVISION device.

Apply Door Name Select the doors and click to apply the doors' names to the device
in a batch.
Move to Other Area Select the doors and click . Then select the target area to move
the selected doors to and click Move.
Set Geographic Click to enter Map Settings page and drag the door to the map.
Location See Add Hot Spot on Map for details.
Display Doors of Check Include Sub-area to display the doors in child areas.
Child Areas

9.2.4 Add Elevator to Area for Current Site

You should add elevator to areas for further management.
Before You Start
The elevator control devices need to be added to the HikCentral Professional for area
management. Refer to Manage Elevator Control Device for details.
Steps

Note
One elevator can only belong to one area. You cannot add an elevator to multiple areas.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area for adding elevators to in the area list panel.
4. Select the Elevator tab.
5. Click to enter the Add Elevator page.
6. In the Elevator Control Device field, all the added elevator control devices are displayed. Select
the device to add the elevator to.
7. In the Range of Floor No. field, enter the start No. and end No. of the floors that you want to
import to the area.
The floors between the start No. and end No. will be imported to the area. After imported, you
can manage the floors in the system, such as adding to access levels, controlling status, etc.
8. Click Add.
9. Optional: After adding the elevator, you can do one or more of the followings.
Get Floor Name Select the elevator and click to get the floors' names of the
elevator from the device in a batch.

313
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Apply Floor Name Select the elevator and click to apply the elevator's floors names to
the device in a batch.
Move to Other Area Select the elevators and click . Then select the target area to move
the selected elevators to and click Move.
Add Elevator to Map Click to enter the Map Settings page and drag the elevator to the
map. See Add Hot Spot on Map for details.
Display Elevators of Check Include Sub-Area to display the elevators of child areas.
Child Areas

9.2.5 Add Vehicle to Area for Current Site

You can add vehicles to areas for the current site for management. Only vehicles linked with mobile
devices can be added to areas and one vehicle can only be added to one area.
Before You Start
The mobile devices need to be added to HikCentral Professional for area management. Refer to
Manage Mobile Devices for details.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area for adding vehicles to in the area list panel.

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is the current site.
4. Select the Vehicle tab.
5. Click Add on the element page to enter the Add Vehicle page.

314
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 9-4 Add Vehicle to Area

6. Set the vehicle information, including the license plate No., driver / driver group, vehicle type,
color, brand, fuel tank model, and vehicle picture.
7. Select the mobile device linked with the vehicle from the Linkage Device drop-down list.
8. Click Save.
The added vehicle will be displayed in the list.
9. Optional: After adding the vehicle(s), you can do one or more of the followings:
Delete Vehicle Select the vehicle(s) and click Delete.
Set Speed Select the vehicle(s), click Speed Threshold Settings, and drag the
Threshold slider or enter an integer in the text field.
Move to Other Area Select the vehicle(s) and click Move to Other Area. Then select the
target area to move the selected vehicle(s) to and click Move.

315
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Display Vehicles of Check Include Sub-Area to display the vehicles in child areas.
Child Areas
Remotely Configure Click in the Operation column of a vehicle to go to the remote
Linkage Device configuration page of the mobile device.

Note
This function is supported when the transfer protocol between the
Web Client and the SYS server is HTTPS.

9.2.6 Add Security Radar to Area for Current Site

You can add security radars to different areas of the current site according to their locations, so
that you will be informed when an alarm/event is triggered if you have configured an alarm/event.
Before You Start
The devices need to be added to the HikCentral Professional for area management. Refer to
Resource Management for details.
Steps

Note
You cannot add a security radar to multiple areas.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site in the drop-down site list to show its areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select an area for adding security radars to.
5. Select the Security Radar tab.
6. Click .
7. Select a security radar in the Security Radar field.
8. Click Add.
The added security radar will be displayed in the list.
9. Optional: After adding the security radars, you can do one or more of the followings:
Arm/Disarm Select the security radar(s) and click / to arm/disarm the
Security Radar selected security radar(s).

316
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
An event will be triggered if any person or object enters an armed
security radar's detection area.

Move to Other Area Select the security radars and click . Then select the target area to
move the selected security radars to and click Move.
Add Security Radar Click to enter the Map Settings page and drag the security radar to
to Map the map. See Add Hot Spot on Map for details.
Display Security Check Include Sub-Area to display the security radars of child areas.
Radars of Child
Areas

9.2.7 Add Alarm Input to Area

You can add alarm inputs to areas for the current site for management.
Before You Start
The devices need to be added to the HikCentral Professional for area management. Refer to
Resource Management for details.
Steps

Note
One alarm input can only belong to one area. You cannot add an alarm input to multiple areas.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area for adding alarm inputs to.

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select the Alarm Input tab.
5. Click to enter the Add Alarm Input page.
6. Select the device type.
7. Select the alarm inputs to add.

Note
For the security control device, you need to select its zones as alarm inputs to add to the area.
8. Click Add.

317
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

9. Optional: After adding the alarm inputs, you can do one or more of the followings.
Delete Alarm Select the alarm input(s) and click Delete.
Input
Move to Other Select the alarm input(s) and click . Then select the target area to move
Area the selected alarm inputs to and click Move.
Add Alarm Input Click to enter Map Settings page and drag the alarm input to the map.
to Map See Add Hot Spot on Map for details.
Display Alarm Check Include Sub-Area to display the alarm inputs of child areas.
Inputs of Child
Areas
Filter Alarm Select the device type(s) to be displayed in the list from the drop-down list
Inputs by Device to the left of the search box.
Type
View Alarm In the Status column, the alarm input's online status, arming status,
Input Status bypass status, alarm status, fault status, and detector connection status
are displayed.
● Online Status: indicates alarm input online; indicates alarm input
offline.
● Arming Status: indicates alarm input armed; indicates alarm input
disarmed.
● Bypass Status: indicates alarm input bypassed; indicates bypass
restored.
● Fault Status: indicates alarm input exception.
● Alarm Status: indicates that the alarm input is alarming.
● Detector Connection Status: indicates alarm input not enrolled or
offline; indicates detector online.
● Battery Status: indicates normal alarm input's battery status;
indicates abnormal alarm input's battery status.
Bypass/Restore When an exception of alarm input occurs, and other alarm inputs can
Bypass Alarm work normally, click to bypass the abnormal alarm input, otherwise,
Input you cannot arm the security control partition which the alarm input
belongs to. When a bypassed alarm input works normally, click to
restore bypass.

9.2.8 Add Alarm Output to Area

You can add alarm outputs to areas for the current site for management. When the alarm or event
linked with the alarm output is detected, alarm devices (e.g., the siren, alarm lamp, etc.)

318
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

connected with the alarm output will make actions. For example, when receiving the alarm out
signal from the system, the alarm lamp will flash.
Before You Start
The devices need to be added to the HikCentral Professional for area management. Refer to
Resource Management for details.
Steps

Note
One alarm output can only belong to one area. You cannot add an alarm output to multiple areas.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area for adding alarm outputs to.

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select the Alarm Output tab.
5. Click to enter the Add Alarm Output page.
6. Select the device type.
7. Select the alarm outputs to add.
8. Click Add.
9. Optional: After adding the alarm outputs, you can do one or more of the followings.
Delete Alarm Output Select the alarm output(s) and click Delete.
Move to Other Area Select the alarm outputs and click . Then select the target area
to move the selected alarm outputs to and click Move.
Add Alarm Output to Click to enter the Map Settings page and drag the alarm output
Map to the map. See Add Hot Spot on Map for details.
Display Alarm Outputs Check Include Sub-Area to display the alarm outputs of child areas.
of Child Areas

9.2.9 Add UVSS to Area for Current Site

You can add Under Vehicle Surveillance Systems (UVSSs) to areas for the current site for
management.
Before You Start
The UVSS devices need to be added to the HikCentral Professional for area management. Refer to
Add Under Vehicle Surveillance System for details.

319
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
One UVSS can only belong to one area. You cannot add a UVSS to multiple areas.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area for adding UVSSs to.

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select the UVSS tab.
5. Click to enter the Add UVSS page.
6. Select the UVSSs to add.
7. Click Add.
8. Optional: After adding the UVSSs, you can do one or more of the followings.
Delete UVSS Select the UVSSs and click Delete.
Move to Other Area Select the UVSSs and click . Then select the target area to move
the selected UVSSs to and click Move.
Add UVSS to Map Click to enter the Map Settings page and drag the UVSS to the
map. See Add Hot Spot on Map for details.
Display UVSSs of Check Include Sub-Area to display the UVSSs of child areas.
Child Areas

9.2.10 Add Digital Signage Screen to Area for Current Site

You can add digital signage screens to areas for the current site for management.
Before You Start
● The digital signage screens need to be added to HikCentral Professional for area management.

Refer to Manage Digital Signage Terminals for details.

● Make sure you have switched to the Digital Signage mode. See details in Switch Application

Mode .

320
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
One digital signage screen can only belong to one area. You cannot add one digital signage screen
to multiple areas.
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area for adding digital signage screens to.

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is the current site.
4. Click Digital Signage Screen tab.
5. Click Add to enter the Add Digital Signage Screen page.
6. Select the digital signage screens to add them.
7. Click Add.
8. Optional: After adding the digital signage screens, you can do one or more of the followings:
Delete Digital Signage Select the digital signage screen(s) in the list and click Delete.
Screen(s)
Move to Other Area Select the digital signage screens and click Move to Other Area.
Then select the target area to move the selected digital signage
screens to and click Move.
Display Digital Signage Check Include Sub-Area to display the digital signage screens of
Screens of Child Areas child areas.

9.2.11 Add Speaker Unit to Area for Current Site

You can add speaker units to areas for the current site for management.
Before You Start
The speaker units need to be added to HikCentral Professional for area management. Refer to
Group Speaker Units for details.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area for adding speaker units to.

321
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is the current site.
4. Select the Speaker Unit tab.
5. Click Add on the element page to enter the Add Speaker Unit page.

Figure 9-5 Add Speaker Unit

6. Select the device type.
7. Select the speaker unit(s) to be added.
8. Click Add.
The added speaker unit(s) will be displayed in the list.
9. Optional: After adding speaker unit(s), you can do one or more of the followings:
Move to Other Area Select the speaker unit(s) and click Move to Other Area. Then select
the target area to move the selected speaker unit(s) to and click
Move.
Adjust Volume Select speaker unit(s) and click Volume to adjust the alarm volume
and/or volume.
Set Geographic Click Set Geographic Location to enter the Map Settings page. You
Location can search for the speaker unit(s) to be added to the map and drag

322
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

the speaker unit to the map. For details, refer to Add Hot Spot on
Map .
Display Speaker Unit Check Include Sub-Area to display the speaker units in child areas.
of Child Areas
Search Speaker Units Enter the name of speaker unit(s) and click to search for the
speaker unit(s).
Delete Speaker Unit Select the speaker unit(s) and click Delete to delete the speaker
unit(s).

9.2.12 Add Fire Detector to Area for Current Site

You can add fire detectors to areas for the current site for management.
Before You Start
The fire protection devices need to be added to HikCentral Professional for area management.
Refer to Manage Fire Protection Device for details.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area for adding fire detectors to.

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is the current site.
4. Select the Fire Detector tab.
5. Click Add on the element page to enter the Add Fire Detector page.
6. Select the fire detectors(s) to be added.
7. Click Add.
The added fire detectors(s) will be displayed in the list.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Remote Configurations Click in the operation column to configure the device remotely.

Note
For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the
device.

Move to Other Area Select the fire detectors(s) and click Move to Other Area. Then
select the target area to move the selected fire detectors(s) to and
click Move.

323
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Set Geographic Click Set Geographic Location to enter the Map Settings page. You
Location can search for the fire detectors(s) to be added to the map and drag
the fire detectors to the map. For details, refer to Add Hot Spot on
Map .
Display Fire Detector Check Include Sub-Area to display the fire detectors in child areas.
of Child Areas
Search Fire Detectors Enter the name of fire detectors(s) and click to search for the fire
detectors(s).
Delete Fire Detector Select the fire detectors(s) and click Delete to delete the fire
detectors(s).

9.3 Edit Element in Area

You can edit the area's added elements, such as recording settings, event settings, and map
settings for cameras, application settings, hardware settings, and attendance settings for doors,
and so on.

9.3.1 Edit Camera for Current Site

You can edit the basic information, recording settings, and picture storage settings of a camera for
the current site.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select an area.
5. Select the Camera tab to show the added cameras.
6. Click a camera's name in the Name column to enter the camera editing page.
7. Edit the camera's basic information, including camera name and protocol type.

Note
If you change the camera's name, you can click in the added cameras list page to apply the
new name to the device.
8. Optional: Click Live View to view the live view of the camera and hover over the window and
click in the lower-right corner to switch to playback.

324
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

9. Edit the recording settings of the camera. See Configure Storage and Recording for details.

Note
● If no recording settings have been configured for the camera, you can click Configure to set

the parameters.
● You can also select multiple cameras and click Get Device's Recording Settings in the added

cameras list page to get recording schedules of the devices in a batch.

10. Optional: Set the Picture Storage switch to ON and select the storage location from the drop-
down list for storing the pictures uploaded from the camera to the specified location.

Note
● Refer to Configure Storage for Uploaded Pictures for details.

● For cameras added by ISUP protocol, this function is not available. You should click Configure

to edit the picture storage configurations.

11. Optional: Click Configuration on Device in the top right corner of the camera editing panel or
click in the Operation column of the added camera list page to set the remote
configurations of the corresponding device if needed.

Note
For details about the remote configuration, refer to the user manual of the device.
12. Optional: In the top right corner of the camera editing panel, click Copy To to select
configuration item(s) and copy the settings of this camera to other cameras.
13. Click Save.

9.3.2 Edit Door for Current Site

You can edit the basic information, related cameras, image storage settings, card reader settings,
and face recognition terminal settings of a door on the current site.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its areas
and select one area.
4. Select the Door tab to show the added doors in this area.
5. Click a door's name in the Name column to enter the door editing page.
6. Edit the door's basic information.
Name
Edit the name for the door.

325
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If you change the name, you can click in the door list page to apply the new name to the
device.
Door Contact
The door contact's connection mode.
Exit Button Type
The exit button connection mode.
Lock Door when Door Closed
After enabled, the door will be locked once the door magnetic is closed; if there is no door
magnetic, the door will be locked after the extended open duration ended.
Open Duration
The time interval between the door is unlocked and locked again.
Extended Open Duration
The time interval between the door is unlocked and locked again for the person whose
extended access function is enabled.
Door Open Timeout Alarm
After enabled, if the door has configured with event or alarm, when the door contact open
duration has reached the limit, the event or alarm will be uploaded to the system.
Duress Code
If you enter this code on the card reader keypad, the Control Client will receive a duress
event. It should be different with the super password and dismiss code.
Super Password
If you enter this password on the card reader keypad, you are exempted from all the
remaining locked (Credential Failed), anti-passback, and first card authorization restrictions. It
should be different with the duress code and dismiss code.
7. Link cameras to the door, and you can view its live view, recorded videos, and captured pictures
via the Control Client.

Note
● Up to 2 cameras can be linked to one door.

● You can click or to adjust the displaying priority of its auto capture.
● You can switch on Auto Capture to realize the function of capturing automatically.

8. Optional: Switch on Picture Storage and select a storage location from the drop-down list.

326
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● For details, refer to Configure Storage for Uploaded Pictures .

● If an error occurred during picture storage configuration, appears on the right of the door
name.
9. Optional: In the Card Reader panel, switch on Card Reader 1 or Card Reader 2 and set the card
reader related parameters.
Min. Card Swipe Interval
After enabled, you cannot swipe the same card again within the minimum card swiping
interval.
Reset Entry on Keypad after
Set the maximum time interval of pressing two keys on the keypad. If timed out, the first
entry will be reset.
Failed Card Attempts Alarm
After enabled, if the door is configured with event or alarm, when the number of excessive
failed card swiping attempts has reached the limit, the event or alarm will be uploaded to the
system.
Tampering Detection
After enabled, if the door is configured with device tampered event or alarm, when the
device body or panel is taken apart, the alarm will be triggered and sent to the system.
OK LED Polarity
Only supported when the device is connected via Wiegand interface. The polarity for OK core
wire connection on the card reader mainboard.
Error LED Polarity
Only supported when the device is connected via Wiegand interface. The polarity for ERR
core wire connection on the card reader mainboard.
Mask Detection
After being switched on, you can choose whether to enable Not Allowed Without Mask to
restrict the passage of those not wearing masks.

Note
The parameters displayed vary according to the model of the access control device. For details
about the parameters, refer to the user manual of the device.
10. Optional: For a turnstile, set the Face Recognition Terminal switch to on and add face
recognition terminals to link with the selected turnstile.
1) Click Add to enter the Add Face Recognition Terminal page.
2) Select IP Address, Online Devices, or Device ID as the adding mode, and set the required
parameters, which may vary according to different terminals.
3) Click Add to link the terminal to turnstile.

327
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

11. Optional: Click Copy To in the upper right corner to apply the current settings of the door to
other door(s).
12. Click Save.

9.3.3 Edit Elevator for Current Site

You can edit basic information, floor information, related cameras, card reader settings of the
elevator on current site.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select the Elevator tab to show the added elevators in this area.
5. Click an elevator's name in the Name column to enter the elevator editing page.
6. Edit the elevator's basic information.
Name
Edit the name for the elevator.

Note
If you changes the name, you can click in the elevator list page to apply the new name to
the device.
Open Duration
The time interval between the elevator door is open and closed again.
Extended Open Duration
The time interval between the elevator door is open and closed again for the person whose
extended access function is enabled.
Elevator Door Open Timeout Alarm
After enabled, if the elevator has configured with event or alarm, when the elevator door
open duration has reached the limit, the event or alarm will be uploaded to the system.
Duress Code
If you enter this code on the card reader keypad, the Control Client will receive a duress
event. It should be different with the super password and dismiss code.
Super Password

328
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

If you enter this password on the card reader keypad, you are exempted from all the
remaining locked (Credential Failed), anti-passback, and first card authorization restrictions. It
should be different with the duress code and dismiss code.
Dismiss Code
If you enter this code on the card reader keypad, the buzzer's beeping will be stopped. It
should be different with the duress code and super password.
7. In the Floor panel, all the imported floors will be displayed in the list. You can edit the floor's
name or reset the imported floor No.
Edit Floor Name
You can edit the floor name if needed.

Note
If you changes the name, you can click Apply Floor Name in the elevator list page to apply
the new name to the device.
Reset Imported Floor No.
You can click Reset Imported Floor No. and enter the range of the floor No. to reset the
settings of the floors, such as schedule settings, name, access level settings, etc.
8. Relate cameras (such as the cameras mounted inside the elevator) to the elevator, and you can
view its live view, recorded video, captured pictures via the Control Client.

Note
Up to two cameras can be related to one elevator.
● You can select the door and click or to adjust the displaying priority of its auto capture.
● You can switch on Auto Capture to realize the function of capturing automatically.
9. In the Card Reader panel, switch on Card Reader 1 or Card Reader 2 and set the card reader
related parameters.
Min. Card Swipe Interval
After enabled, you cannot swipe the same card again within the minimum card swiping
interval.
Reset Entry on Keypad after
Set the maximum time interval of pressing two keys on the keypad. If timed out, the first
entry will be reset.
Failed Card Attempts Alarm
After enabled, if the door has configured with event or alarm, when the number of excessive
failed card swiping attempts has reached the limit, the event or alarm will be uploaded to the
system.
Tampering Detection
After enabled, if the door has configured with device tampered event or alarm, when the
device body or panel is taken apart, the alarm will be triggered and sent to the system.

329
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

OK LED Polarity
Only supported when the device is connected via Wiegand interface. The polarity for OK core
wire connection on the card reader mainboard.
Error LED Polarity
Only supported when the device is connected via Wiegand interface. The polarity for ERR
core wire connection on the card reader mainboard.
Buzzer Polarity
Only supported when the device is connected via Wiegand interface. The polarity for buzzer
connection on the card reader mainboard.
Fingerprint Security Level
Select the fingerprint security level. The higher is the security level, the lower is the face
acceptance rate (FAR). The higher is the security level, the higher is the false rejection rate
(FRR).

Note
The parameters displayed vary according to the model of the access control device. For details
about the parameters, refer to the user manual of the device.
10. Optional: Click Copy to in the upper right corner to apply the current settings of the elevator to
other elevator(s).
11. Click Save.

9.3.4 Edit Vehicle for Current Site

After adding vehicles to areas of the current site, you can edit the basic vehicle information (e.g.,
license plate No., driver / driver group, vehicle type, color, brand, fuel tank model, and vehicle
picture) for the current site as needed.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is the current site.
4. Select an area.
5. Select the Vehicle tab to show the added vehicles.
6. Click a vehicle's license plate number in the License Plate No. column.
7. Edit the vehicle information (e.g., license plate No., driver / driver group, vehicle type, color,
brand, fuel tank model, vehicle picture).

330
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8. Click Save.

9.3.5 Edit Security Radar for Current Site

After adding a security radar to an area of the current site, you can edit the security radar's name,
view the drawn zones or trigger lines, and view the related calibrated cameras.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select an area.
5. Select the Security Radar tab to show the added security radars.
6. Click a security radar's name in the Name column to enter the security radar editing page.
7. Edit the security radar's name.
8. Optional: In the Zone field, view the drawn zones of the security radar.

Note
If there is no zone drawn for the security radar, you should go to the Map Settings module to
draw. Refer to Draw Zone or Trigger Line for Radar for details.
9. Optional: In the Relate Calibrated Camera field, view the calibrated cameras related to the
security radar.

Note
If there is no calibrated camera related to the security radar, you should go to the Map Settings
module to configure. Refer to Relate Calibrated Camera to Radar for details.
10. Click Save to save the settings for the security radar.

9.3.6 Edit Alarm Input for Current Site

You can edit the basic information of alarm input and relate detector to the security control panel's
alarm input for current site.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.

331
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select the Alarm Input tab to show the added alarm inputs.
5. Click an alarm input name in the Name column to enter the Edit Alarm Input page.
6. Edit the alarm input name.
7. Optional: For the alarm input of security control panel, set the Related Detector switch to ON to
configure related detector for the alarm input.
1) Click Add to add a detector.
2) Enter the detector name.
3) Click to save the detector type.

Note
● Only the alarm input of a security control panel supports this function. Make sure you have

added a security control device to the system, and have added its zone to area as an alarm
input. See Add Alarm Input to Area for details.
● On Map Settings page, the detectors related to the alarm input of a security control panel will

be displayed in the resource list of alarm input on the right panel. When selecting the alarm
input and dragging it to the map, the related detectors will also be added to the map, and the
relations among them will be marked with lines. If you only drag the alarm input to the map
without selecting it, the related detectors will not be added to the map.
● You cannot edit the detector type here. If you want to edit it, go to the Remote Configuration

page of security control panel, and click Input Settings → Zone .

8. Click Save.

9.3.7 Edit Alarm Output for Current Site

You can edit the alarm output name for current site.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select the Alarm Output tab to show the added alarm outputs.
5. Click an alarm output name in the Name column.

332
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

6. Edit the alarm output name in the pop-up window.

7. Click Save.

9.3.8 Edit Under Vehicle Surveillance System for Current Site

You can edit name of the Under Vehicle Surveillance System (UVSS) and relate cameras to the UVSS
for current site.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select an area.
5. Select the UVSS tab to show the added UVSSs.
6. Click an UVSS name in the Name column.
7. Edit the name of UVSS.
8. Relate cameras to the UVSS.
1) Set the Relate Camera switch to ON.
2) Select the camera(s).
9. Click Save.

9.3.9 Edit Digital Signage Screen for Current Site

You can edit the name of a digital signage screen for the current site.
Before You Start
Make sure you are in the Digital Signage mode. See details in Switch Application Mode .
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is the current site.
4. Select an area.

333
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Select the Digital Signage Screen tab to show the added digital signage screens.
6. Click a digital signage screen's name in the Name column.
7. Edit the name in the pop-up window.
8. Click Save.

9.3.10 Edit Speaker Unit for Current Site

You can edit basic information, related cameras settings of the speaker unit on current site.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select the Speaker Unit tab to show the added speaker unit(s) in this area.
5. Click speaker unit's name in the Name column to enter the speaker unit editing page.
6. Edit the name for the speaker unit.
7. Relate camera(s) to the broadcast.
● Up to 4 related cameras are allowed.

● Click or to adjust the displaying sequence of the cameras.

8. Click Save.

9.3.11 Edit Third-Party Integrated Resource for Current Site

After integrating the resources on third-party system to the HikCentral Professional via Optimus,
the third-party resources are added to the areas.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → Resource Management → Area → Third-Party
Integrated Resource .
Click the name of third-party resource to enter the details page.
You can view the basic information of the resource, such as name, device type, and manufacturer.
You can also add the resource on the map so that when an event/alarm is triggered on the
resource, you can view the notification and details on the map.

334
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● For details about locating resource on map, refer to Add Hot Spot on Map .
● The Third-Party Integrated Resource tab is available only when the Integrate via Optiums switch
in System Configuration module is set to ON. For details, refer to Set Third-Party Integration .

9.3.12 Edit Fire Detector for Current Site

You can edit the basic information of the fire detector on current site.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added current site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is current site.
4. Select the Fire Detector tab to show the added fire detector(s) in this area.
5. Click fire detector's name in the Name column to enter the fire detector editing page.
6. Edit the name for the fire detector.
7. Click Save.

9.3.13 Edit Element for Remote Site

If the current system is a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can edit the
cameras added from the Remote Site.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added Remote Site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is a Remote Site.
4. Select an area to show its cameras.
5. Click a camera's name in the Name column to enter the camera editing page.
6. Edit the camera's basic information, including camera name and protocol type.

335
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If you change the camera's name, you can click on the added camera list page to apply the
new name to the device.
7. Optional: Click Live View to view the live view of the camera and hover over the window and
click in the lower-right corner to switch to playback.

Note
Double authentications is required for live view and playback on the camera editing page. For
details about configuring double authentications, refer to System Security Settings .
8. Edit the recording settings of the camera.

Note
For recording settings, if no recording settings have been configured for the camera, click
Configuration on Site to set the parameters (for details, refer to ).
9. Optional: Click Configuration on Device in the top-right corner of the camera editing panel or
click in the Operation column of the added camera list page to set the remote configurations
of the corresponding device if needed.

Note
For details about the remote configuration, refer to the user manual of the device.
10. Optional: Click Copy to to copy the current camera's specified configuration parameters to
other cameras of the Remote Site.
11. Click Save.

9.4 Remove Element from Area

You can remove the added cameras, doors, elevators, vehicles, security radars, alarm inputs, alarm
outputs, Under Vehicle Surveillance Systems (UVSSs), digital signage terminals, speaker units, third-
party integrated resources, and fire detectors from the area.

9.4.1 Remove Element from Area for Current Site

You can remove the added cameras, doors, elevators, security radars, alarm inputs, alarm outputs,
UVSSs, digital signage terminals, speaker units, third-party integrated resources, and fire detectors
from the area for current site.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. Select an area in the area list panel to show its added elements.

336
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● For a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site

from the drop-down site list to show its areas.

● The icon indicates that the site is the current site.
4. Select the Camera, Door, Elevator, Radar, Alarm Input, Alarm Output, UVSS, Digital Signage
Screen or Speaker Unit tab to show the added elements.
5. Select the elements.
6. Click to remove the cameras from the area for current site.

9.4.2 Remove Element from Area for Remote Site

If the current system is a Central System with a Remote Site Management module, you can remove
the added cameras from its area.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management .
2. Click Area on the left.
3. In the area list panel, select the added Remote Site from the drop-down site list to show its
areas.

Note
The icon indicates that the site is a Remote Site.
4. Select an area to show its added cameras.
5. Select the cameras.
6. Click to remove the cameras from the area for remote site.
7. Optional: If appears near the camera name, it means the camera has been deleted from the
Remote Site. Hover the cursor over the and click Delete to delete the camera from the area.

337
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 10 Person Management

You can add person information to the platform for further operations such as access control
(linking a person to an access level), face comparison (adding a person to a face comparison
group), time and attendance (assign a shift schedule to a person), etc. After adding the persons,
you can edit and delete the person information if needed.

10.1 Add Person Groups

When there are a large number of persons managed in the platform, you can put the persons into
different person groups. For example, you can group employees of a company to different
departments.
Steps
1. In the top left corner page of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Click at the top of the person group list to enter the Add Person Group page.
3. Set the person group information, including the parent group, group name, and description.

Figure 10-1 Add Person Group

4. Add person group.
- Click Add to add the person group and go back to the person management page.
- Click Add and Add Person to add the person group and enter the Add Person page.
5. Optional: If your HikCentral Professional License contains the permission to access the Access
Control module, set parameters of authentication via PIN code.
1) Click to open the Set Authentication via PIN Code window.
2) Switch on Authenticate via PIN Code.

338
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● When enabled, if the authentication mode of the card readers at the access points is also

set to Authenticate via PIN Code, all the added persons are allowed to use their PIN codes
alone as the credential for access authentication.
● When enabled, no duplicated PIN code is allowed.

● You can set a PIN code for a person when setting basic information for the person. For

details, see Add a Person Manually .

3) Set the PIN code update mode.
Auto
The platform will automatically reset all persons' PIN codes and apply the reset PIN codes
to the access control devices. The system administrator needs to notify all users of the
updated PIN codes.
Manual
The system administrator needs to manually filter out persons who have no PIN code or
have duplicated PIN codes, change their PIN codes and then notify them of the updated
PIN codes.

Note
The system administrator needs to notify relevant persons of the updated PIN codes in
time. Otherwise these persons' access authentication and attendance results will be
affected.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding person groups.
Edit Person Select a person group, and click at the top of the person group list to
Group edit the parent group, group name, or remarks.
Delete a Person Select a person group and click at the top of the person group list to
Group delete the selected one.

Note
The root person group cannot be deleted.

Delete All Click beside at the top of the person group list to delete all added
Person Groups person groups.

10.2 Set Person ID Rule

Before adding persons, you should configure a rule to define the prefix No., total length, and
whether using random digits for the person ID.

339
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
Once a person is added to the platform, the ID rule will be not configurable, so we recommended
that you should ensure the ID rule at the very beginning.
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Click at the top of person list to open the ID rule settings pane.

Figure 10-2 ID Rule Settings Pane

3. Enter a prefix No. and select the total length.
4. Optional: Check Random to generate the ID (excepts the fixed prefix No.) with random digits.
Example
If you enter 10 as the prefix No. and set the total length to 8, all the person IDs will start from
"10", such as "10125454" (when Random is checked) and "10000001" (when Random is
unchecked).
5. Click OK.

10.3 Add Person

Multiple methods are provided for you to add persons to the platform. You can add a person
manually. If you want to add multiple persons at a time, you can import persons by downloading
and filling in a template or import persons from access control devices/video intercom devices/

340
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

enrollment stations. In addition, you can batch add profile pictures for persons, and import domain
persons.

Note
Before adding persons to the platform, you should confirm and set the person ID rule. As once a
person is added, the ID rule cannot be edited any more. For more about the ID rule settings, refer
to Set Person ID Rule .

10.3.1 Add a Person Manually

You can manually add a person to the platform by setting the person's basic information, credential
information, and other information such as the person's access level. The above-mentioned person
information constitutes the data basis for the applications related to identity authentication of the
person, such as the access control application, the elevator control application, the attendance
management application, and the video intercom application.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Select a person group from the person group list on the left.
All persons in the selected person group will be displayed on the right. You can check Include
Sub-Group to display the persons in sub person groups (if any).
3. Click at the top of person list to enter the Add Person page.

Figure 10-3 The Entry for Adding a Person

341
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 10-4 Add Person Page

4. Set the person's basic information, such as first name, last name.
ID (Required)
The default ID is generated by the platform. You can edit it if needed.

Note
The ID cannot be edited after finishing adding a person, so you should ensure its correctness
at the beginning.
Person Group (Required)
Select a person group for the person.

Note
See Add Person Groups for details about how to add a person group.
Profile Picture

342
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Hover the cursor onto , and you can select from three modes to add a picture.
From Device
You can select Access Control Device, Video Intercom Device, or Enrollment Station and
set parameters (if required) to connect the device to the platform, and then collect the
face picture via the device. This mode is suitable for non-face-to-face scenario when the
person and the system administrator are on different locations.

Note
● For access control devices, only specific models of face recognition terminals are
supported.
● For video intercom devices, door stations and outer door stations are supported.
● For enrollment stations, you need to set related parameters, including access mode,
access protocol, device address, port, user name, password, face anti-spoofing, and
security level.

Take a Picture
Click Take a Picture and then select one of the PC's webcams to take a picture.
Upload Picture
Click Upload Picture to select a picture from your PC.

Note
● It is recommended that the face in the picture be in the full-face view directly facing the
camera, without a hat or head covering.
● You can drag the picture to change its position or zoom in/out before cutting it.
● You can switch on Verify Profile Picture Quality and select a device to check the quality
of the profile picture. Click Save to start checking. You will be informed if the picture is
not qualified.

Skin-Surface Temperature/Skin-Surface Temperature Status

Enter the person's skin-surface temperature and select the corresponding temperature
status.

Note
For example, if a person's skin-surface temperature is 37 °C, then you can select her/his
temperature status as normal.
Effective Period (Required)
Set the effective period for the person in applications such as access control application and
time & attendance application, to determine the period when the person can access the
specified access points with credentials.

343
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Click Extend Effective Period to show a drop-down list and select 1 Month / 3 Months / 6
Months / 1 Year to quickly extend the effective period based on the configured end time. For
example, if the period is from 2021/10/23 13:30:00 to 2022/01/20 14:10:00 and the
extended time is selected as 1 Month, the end time of effective period will change to
2022/02/20 14:10:00.
Super User
If the person is set as a super user, the person will be exempted from remaining locked
(credential failed) restrictions, all anti-passback rules, and first person authorization.
Extended Access
When the person accesses the door, grant this person more time to pass through doors which
have been configured with extended open duration. Use this function for the persons with
reduced mobility.

Note
The extended access and super user functions cannot be enabled concurrently.
Device Administrator
Determine if the person has the administrator permission of access control devices.
If the check-box is checked, when you synchronize person information from access control
devices, the administrator permission for the person will be retained.
PIN Code
Set the PIN code for access authentication. In most cases, the PIN code cannot be used as a
credential alone: it must be used after card or fingerprint when accessing; It can be used
alone only when Authenticate via PIN Code is enabled on the platform and the
authentication mode of the card readers is also set to Authenticate via PIN Code.

Note
● The PIN code should contain 4 to 8 characters.
● For details about enabling Authenticate via PIN Code on the platform, see Add Person
Groups .

Configure Platform User

Configure a platform user for the person to link the person with the platform user.

Note
No more than one person can be linked with a platform user.
Create User for Person
Create a new user to link the user with the person by setting the user name, password,
user status, and role.
Select Existing User

344
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Select an existing user from the drop-down list to link the user with the person, or click
Add User to add a user first. For details about adding a user, see Add Normal User .
5. Add credential information for the person. See Manage Credentials for details.
6. Assign access levels to the person to define the access points where the person can access
during the authorized period.
1) Click Assign.
2) Select one or more access levels for the person.
3) Click Assign to add the person to the selected access level(s).

Note
You can click to view information on access points and access schedules.
7. Optional: View shift schedule of the person in the table.

Note
You can click or to switch the time (month).
8. Optional: Set resident information to link the person with the indoor station and room number.

Note
● Make sure you have added indoor stations to the platform.

● Up to 10 persons can be linked with one indoor station. And a person cannot be linked to

multiple indoor stations.

● Make sure the room number is consistent with the actual location information of the indoor

station.
9. In Custom Public Information area, select custom information to be applied.

Note
Make sure you have set the custom public information. See Customize Additional Information
for details.
10. Finish adding the person.
- Click Add.
- Click Add and Continue to finish adding the person and continue to add other persons.
The person will be displayed in the person list and you can view the details.
11. Optional: After adding persons, perform the following operation(s).
Edit Person Click the person name to edit the person details.

Note
When editing the person's effective period, if you have issued
temporary card(s) to the person, make sure the expiry date(s) of the
person's temporary card(s) are within the effective period.

Delete Persons Check the person(s) and click to delete the selected person(s).

345
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Delete All Hover the cursor onto beside , and then click Delete All to
Persons delete all persons.
Clear Profile Hover the cursor onto beside , and then click Delete Profile
Pictures Picture Only to clear all the uploaded profile pictures.
Move Person Follow the steps below to move the persons to another person group.
Once moved, the access levels and shift schedules of the selected
persons will be changed.
a. Select one or more persons, click .
b. Select the target person group to which the persons are about to
be moved.
c. Click Move.
Clear Access Select one or more persons, click to clear the access levels of the
Levels selected persons.

Note
The access levels of these persons cannot be restored once they are
cleared.

Check Person Select one or more persons, click to enter Check Person
Authorization Authorization page. On the page, you can test whether the person's
access levels and credentials are applied to the access control devices,
elevator control devices, and video intercom devices. If failed to be
applied, you can apply them again.
Export Person Click → Export Person Information to export all the added person
Information information as a ZIP file to your PC. For information security, you need
to set a password for decompressing the ZIP file.

Note
You can check Linked Access Levels or Linked Shift Schedules to
export the additional information at the same time.

Export Profile Click → Export Profile Picture to export the profile pictures of the
Pictures added persons as a ZIP file to your PC. For information security, you
need to set a password for decompressing the ZIP file.

Note
To activate this function, you should go to General → System
Configuration → Security → Export Profile Pictures page to check the
Export Profile Pictures.

346
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Link Persons to Select one or more persons, click and then select an indoor station
Indoor Stations for each person to apply the person information to the indoor station.
For details, refer to Link Persons to an Indoor Station .

Note
● Make sure you have added indoor stations to the platform.
● Up to 10 persons can be linked to one indoor station. And one
person can only be linked to one indoor stations.
● Make sure the room number is consistent with the actual location
information of the indoor station.

Filter Displayed Enter a person's full name, ID, or card No. and click Filter to filter
Persons persons as required.

Note
When entering the card No., you can select Read Card Number by
Device to select a device to read the card No. For details, refer to Set
Card Issuing Parameters .

Manage Credentials
When adding a person, you can add the required credential information for the person. The
supported credentials include normal cards, fingerprints, and special cards. These credentials can
be used for the access authentication in applications such as access control and elevator control.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. On the adding or editing person page, click Credential Management under the profile picture to
open the Add Credential pane.
3.
In the Card area, click , and then manually enter the card No. or swipe the card on devices
(enrollment station, card enrollment station, or card reader) to add normal cards.

Note
● For manually entering, digits, letters, and the combination of digits and letters can be entered.
● For swiping cards, you can read card information via the enrollment station, card enrollment
station, or card reader. For details, see Batch Issue Cards to Persons .

A QR code will be generated automatically after adding a card and the icon will appear in the
top right corner of the card area when you enter the Add Credential page from the editing
person page. You can click to view and scan the QR code or click Download to download the
QR code picture to the local storage for further operations.

347
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 10-5 View QR Code of Card

4. In the Fingerprint area, click Configure to set the method for collecting the person's fingerprint,
and then collect the fingerprint.
USB Fingerprint Recorder
Plug the USB interface of the fingerprint recorder to the PC on which the Web Client runs and
then collect the person's fingerprint via the device.
Fingerprint and Card Reader
Select a device type and then select a fingerprint and card reader to collect the person's
fingerprint.
Enrollment Station
If you set network as the access mode, set other parameters of the enrollment station (e.g.,
access protocol, device IP address, and device port No.,) to allow the platform to access the
device via network. And then collect the person's fingerprint via the device.
If you set USB as the access mode, plug the USB interface of the enrollment station to the PC
on which the Web Client runs, and then collect the person's fingerprint via the device.
5. Optional: In the Iris area, collect irises of the person.
1) Click Configure to select a device used for collecting the person's irises.
2)
Click and then start collecting irises.
6. Optional: Switch on Special Credential and then add special cards and corresponding fingerprint
information.
7. Optional: Perform the following operation(s).
Edit Card / Fingerprint Information Hover the cursor onto an added card or fingerprint, and
then click .
View and Download QR Code of
Card

348
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Delete Card / Fingerprint Hover the cursor onto an added card or fingerprint, and
then click .
8. Click Save.

10.3.2 Batch Add Persons by Template

You can batch add persons to the platform with the minimum effort by importing a template (an
excel file) which contains the person information such as the names of the person group and the
access levels.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Click → Import by Template .

349
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 10-6 Batch Add Persons by Template

3. In the pop-up window, click Download Template to save the template to your PC.
4. In the downloaded template, enter the person information following the rules shown in the
template.

Note
If you need to link a person to the indoor station, you should enter Community-Building No.-Unit
No.-Room No. in the Room No. column.
5. Click , and then select the template from your PC.
6. Optional: Check Replace Repeated Person to replace the person information if the imported ID
information is the same with that of the existing persons in the list.

350
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

7. Optional: Check Auto Replace Card No. to replace the card No. automatically if it already exists
in the platform.
8. Click Import to start importing.

Note
● The importing process cannot be stopped once started.
● You can batch issue cards to the persons by importing the template with card No. information.

The importing progress shows and you can check the results.

Note
You can export the person information that failed to be imported, and try again after editing.
9. Optional: After adding persons, perform the following operation(s).
Edit Person Click the person name to edit the person details.

Note
When editing the person's effective period, if you have issued temporary
card(s) to the person, make sure the expiry date(s) of the person's
temporary card(s) are within the effective period.

Delete Persons Check the person(s) and click to delete the selected person(s).
Delete All Hover the cursor onto beside , and then click Delete All to delete all
Persons persons.
Clear Profile Hover the cursor onto beside , and then click Delete Profile Picture
Pictures Only to clear all the uploaded profile pictures.
Move Person Follow the steps below to move the persons to another person group.
Once moved, the access levels and shift schedules of the selected persons
will be changed.
a. Select one or more persons, click .
b. Select the target person group to which the persons are about to be
moved.
c. Click Move.
Clear Access Select one or more persons, click to clear the access levels of the
Levels selected persons.

Note
The access levels of these persons cannot be restored once they are
cleared.

Check Person Select one or more persons, click to enter the Check Person
Authorization Authorization page. On the page, you can test whether the person's

351
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

access levels and credentials are applied to the access control devices,
elevator control devices, and video intercom devices. If failed to be
applied, you can apply them again.
Export Person Click → Export Person Information to export all the added person
Information information as a ZIP file to your PC. For information security, you need to
set a password for decompressing the ZIP file.

Note
You can check Linked Access Levels or Linked Shift Schedules to export
the additional information at the same time.

Export Profile Click → Export Profile Picture to export the profile pictures of the
Pictures added persons as a ZIP file to your PC. For information security, you need
to set a password for decompressing the ZIP file.

Note
To activate this function, you should go to General → System
Configuration → Security → Export Profile Pictures page to check the
Export Profile Pictures.

Link Persons to Select one or more persons, click and then select an indoor station for
Indoor Stations each person to apply the person information to the indoor station. For
details, refer to Link Persons to an Indoor Station .

Note
● Make sure you have added indoor stations to the platform.
● Up to 10 persons can be linked to one indoor station. And a person
cannot be linked to multiple indoor stations.
● Make sure the room number is consistent with the actual location
information of the indoor station.

Filter Displayed Enter a person's full name, ID, or card No. and click Filter to filter persons
Persons as required.

Note
When entering the card No., you can select Read Card Number by Device
to select a device to read the card No. For details, refer to Set Card
Issuing Parameters .

352
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

10.3.3 Import Profile Pictures

You can add multiple persons' profile pictures to the persons in a person group. If you access the
platform via the Web Client running on the SYS, you need to specify a path where the profile
pictures are stored. If you access the platform via the Web Client running on other computers, you
can import a ZIP file containing the profile pictures.
Steps

Note
If the ID in the name of the profile picture is duplicate with the person's ID that already exists in
the platform, the former will replace the latter. If the ID in the name of the profile picture doesn't
exist in the platform, or the name of the profile picture only contains the person name, the
platform will create a new person.
1. Name the profile pictures according to the person name or person ID.

Note
● The naming rule of picture is: Person Name, Person ID, or Person Name ID. The person name

should contain the first name and the last name, separated by a plus sign.
● Dimension recommendation for each picture: 295×412.

Size recommendation for each picture: 60 KB to 100 KB.

● The pictures should be in JPG, JPEG, or PNG format.

2. Optional: If you access the platform via the Web Client running on the SYS, move these pictures
into one folder and then compress the folder in ZIP format.

Note
The ZIP file should be smaller than 4 GB, or the uploading will fail.
3. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Person .
4. Click → Import Profile Pictures .
5. Select the profile pictures.
- If you access the platform via the Web Client running on the SYS, select a path where the
profile pictures are stored.
- If you access the platform via the Web Client running on other computers, select ZIP files
containing the profile pictures.

Note
You can hold CTRL key and select multiple ZIP files. Each ZIP file should be no larger than 4 GB.
6. Select a person group from Person Group.
7. Optional: Switch on Verify Face Quality by Device and then select a device for verifying the face
quality.
8. Click Import to start importing.
The importing progress shows and you can check the results.

353
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

9. Optional: After importing profile pictures, click Export Failure Details to export an Excel file to
the local PC and view the failure details.

10.3.4 Import Domain Persons

You can import the users in the AD (Active Directory) domain to the platform as persons. After
importing the person information (including person name and account name) in the AD domain,
you can set other information for the persons, such as credentials.
Before You Start
Make sure you have configured the active directory settings. See Set Active Directory for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Click → Import Domain Persons to enter the Import Domain Persons page.
3. Select the importing mode.
Person
Import the specified persons. Select the organization unit and select the persons under the
organization unit which are displayed in the Domain Person list on the right. The person
information will be synchronized based on each person.
Group
Import all the persons in the organization unit. The person information will be synchronized
based on each group.
Security Group
Import the selected security groups in the AD domain.

Note
Make sure you have set security groups.
4. Optional: When selecting Person or Security Group as the importing mode, select a person
group to which the selected items (persons or security groups) need to be imported.
5. Set the effective period for the persons as needed.
6. Complete importing the domain persons.
- Click Add.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add persons.
7. Optional: Click the person name shown in the person list to view and edit the person
information.

Note
● If the profile picture/email in the domain is linked to the profile picture/email in the platform,
the persons' profile picture/email will be imported to the platform from the domain as well.
You can view the profile picture/email on the person details page but you cannot edit it. For

354
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

linking the person information in the domain to the person information in the platform, refer
to Set Active Directory .
● If the profile picture/email in the domain is NOT linked to the profile picture/email in the

platform, you can take a picture or upload a picture as the person's profile picture and enter
the email address. For linking the person information in the domain to the person information
in the platform, refer to Set Active Directory .
8. Optional: After adding persons, perform the following operation(s).
Edit Person Click the person name to edit the person details.

Note
When editing the person's effective period, if you have issued temporary
card(s) to the person, make sure the expiry date(s) of the person's
temporary card(s) are within the effective period.

Delete Persons Check the person(s) and click to delete the selected person(s).
Delete All Hover the cursor onto beside , and then click Delete All to delete all
Persons persons.
Clear Profile Hover the cursor onto beside , and then click Delete Profile Picture
Pictures Only to clear all the uploaded profile pictures.
Move Person Follow the steps below to move the persons to another person group.
Once moved, the access levels and shift schedules of the selected
persons will be changed.
a. Select one or more persons, click .
b. Select the target person group to which the persons are about to be
moved.
c. Click Move.
Clear Access Select one or more persons, click to clear the access levels of the
Levels selected persons.

Note
The access levels of these persons cannot be restored once they are
cleared.

Check Person Select one or more persons, click to enter the Check Person
Authorization Authorization page. On the page, you can test whether the person's
access levels and credentials are applied to the access control devices,
elevator control devices, and video intercom devices. If failed to be
applied, you can apply them again.
Export Person Click → Export Person Information to export all the added person
Information information as a ZIP file to your PC. For information security, you need to
set a password for decompressing the ZIP file.

355
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can check Linked Access Levels or Linked Shift Schedules to export
the additional information at the same time.

Export Profile Click → Export Profile Picture to export the profile pictures of the
Pictures added persons as a ZIP file to your PC. For information security, you need
to set a password for decompressing the ZIP file.

Note
To activate this function, you should go to General → System
Configuration → Security → Export Profile Pictures page to check the
Export Profile Pictures.

Synchronize Select person(s) whose information has changed in the AD domain and
Domain Persons click at the top of person list to get the latest person information.
Link Persons to Select one or more persons, click and then select an indoor station for
Indoor Stations each person to apply the person information to the indoor station. For
details, refer to Link Persons to an Indoor Station .

Note
● Make sure you have added indoor stations to the platform.
● Up to 10 persons can be linked to one indoor station. And one person
can only be linked to one indoor stations.
● Make sure the room number is consistent with the actual location
information of the indoor station.

Filter Displayed Enter a person's full name, ID, or card No. and click Filter to filter persons
Persons as required.

Note
When entering the card No., you can select Read Card Number by Device
to select a device to read the card No. For details, refer to Set Card
Issuing Parameters .

10.3.5 Import Persons from Access Control Devices or Video Intercom Devices
If the added access control devices and video intercom devices have been configured with person
information, you can get the person information from these devices and import it to the platform.
The person information that can be imported includes person names, profile pictures, credentials
(PIN codes, cards, and fingerprints), effective periods, person roles, etc.

356
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Click → Import from Device .
3. Select Access Control Device or Video Intercom Device as the device type.
4. Select one or more devices from the device list.

Note
You can enter a key word (fuzzy search supported) in the search box to search the target
device(s) quickly.
5. Select the importing mode.
All
Import all the persons stored in the selected devices.
Specified Employee No.
Specify the employee No. of up to five persons and import the persons to the platform.
6. Select a person group to which the persons will be imported.
7. Optional: Check Replace Profile Picture to replace the existed person profile pictures with the
new ones from the devices.
8. Click Import to start importing.

Note
When importing, the platform will compare person information on the device with person
information in the platform based on the person name. If the person name exists on the device
but does not exist in the platform, the platform will create a new person. If a person name exists
on both sides, the corresponding person information in the platform will be replaced by the one
on the device.
9. If the following window pops up, select a method to import the person information.

Note
If not, skip this step.

357
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 10-7 Select an Import Method

Import by Name
The person information directly linked to the access control devices will be imported.

Note
This method is usually used for the access control devices with facial recognition capability.
Import by Card
The person information linked to the cards of the access control devices will be imported

Note
This method is usually used for the access control devices which link person information via
cards.
10. Optional: Perform the following operation(s).
Edit Person Click the person name to edit the person details.

Note
When editing the person's effective period, if you have issued
temporary card(s) to the person, make sure the expiry date(s) of the
person's temporary card(s) are within the effective period.

Delete Person Select one or more persons and click to delete the selected
person(s).

358
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Or hover the cursor onto beside , and then click Delete All to
delete all persons.
Export Added Click → Export Person Information to export all the added person
Person information as a ZIP file to your PC. For information security, you need
Information to set a password for decompressing the ZIP file.
Export Profile Click → Export Profile Pictures to export the profile pictures of the
Pictures added persons as a ZIP file to your PC. For information security, you
need to set a password for decompressing the ZIP file.

Note
This function is available after you have enabled exporting profile
pictures. Go to System Configuration → Security → Export Profile
Pictures to enable this function.

Filter Person Set conditions such as full name and ID, and then click Filter.
Move Persons Follow the steps below to move the persons to another person group.
Once moved, the access levels and shift schedules of the selected
persons will be changed.
a. Select one or more persons, click .
b. Select the target person group to which the persons are about to
be moved.
c. Click Move.
Link Persons to Select one or more persons, click and then select an indoor station
Indoor Stations for each person to apply the person information to the indoor station.

Note
● Make sure you have added indoor stations to the platform.
● Up to 10 persons can be linked to one indoor station. And a person
cannot be linked to multiple indoor stations.
● Make sure the room number is consistent with the actual location
information of the indoor station.

Clear Access Select one or more persons, click to clear the access levels of the
Levels selected persons.

Note
The cleared access levels of the persons cannot be restored.

Clear Profile Hover the cursor onto beside , and then click Delete Profile
Pictures Picture Only to clear all the uploaded profile pictures.

359
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Check Person Select one or more persons, click to enter Check Person
Authorization Authorization page. On the page, you can test whether the person's
access levels and credentials are applied to the access control devices,
elevator control devices, and video intercom devices. If failed to be
applied, you can apply them again.

10.3.6 Import Persons from Enrollment Station

HikCentral Professional allows you to apply the required person information to an enrollment
station via a template or the person list on the platform, and then enroll the persons' credentials
via the enrollment station. Once you complete the enrollment, you can import the person and
credential information from the enrollment station to the platform by specifying the IP address,
port number, user name and password of the device to allow the platform to access it.
Before You Start
Make sure you have enroll the persons' credentials via the enrollment station. For details, see
Manage Credentials .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Click → Import from Device .
3. Select Enrollment Station as the device type.
4. Set other parameters, such as access mode, device address, device port, and stage.
Device Address
Enter the IP address of the enrollment station from which the person information needs to be
imported.
Device Port
Enter the port No. of the enrollment station from which the person information needs to be
imported.
User Name
Enter the user name of the enrollment station from which the person information needs to
be imported.
Password
Enter the password of the enrollment station from the person information needs to be
imported.
5. Select Enrollment Station from the device list.
6. Set device address, port No., user name and password for accessing the enrollment station.
7. Set importing stage and method.
Apply Person Information
The persons whose credentials need to be enrolled will be applied to the enrollment station.

360
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Import from Template

If the persons are not added to the platform, download the template from the enrollment
station and then edit the template and apply it to the enrollment station for enrolling the
persons' credentials.
Import from Person List
If the persons have been added to the platform, select the person group to apply the
persons to the enrollment station for enrolling the persons' credentials.
Copy Back Person and Credential Information
When the persons' credentials are enrolled, select the person group to which the person and
credential information will be imported to.
8. Click Import to start importing.
9. Optional: Perform the following operation(s).
Edit Person Click the person name to edit the person details.

Note
When editing the person's effective period, if you have issued temporary
card(s) to the person, make sure the expiry date(s) of the person's
temporary card(s) are within the effective period.

Delete Person Select one or more persons and click to delete the selected person(s).
Or hover the cursor onto beside , and then click Delete All to
delete all persons.
Export Added Click → Export Person Information to export all the added person
Person information as a ZIP file to your PC. For information security, you need to
Information set a password for decompressing the ZIP file.
Export Profile Click → Export Profile Pictures to export the profile pictures of the
Pictures added persons as a ZIP file to your PC. For information security, you need
to set a password for decompressing the ZIP file.

Note
This function is available after you have enabled exporting profile
pictures. Go to System Configuration → Security → Export Profile
Pictures to enable this function.

Filter Person Set conditions such as full name and ID, and then click Filter.
Move Persons Follow the steps below to move the persons to another person group.
Once moved, the access levels and shift schedules of the selected
persons will be changed.

361
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

a. Select one or more persons, click .

b. Select the target person group to which the persons are about to be
moved.
c. Click Move.
Link Persons to Select one or more persons, click and then select an indoor station for
Indoor Stations each person to apply the person information to the indoor station.

Note
● Make sure you have added indoor stations to the platform.
● Up to 10 persons can be linked to one indoor station. And a person
cannot be linked to multiple indoor stations.
● Make sure the room number is consistent with the actual location
information of the indoor station.

Clear Access Select one or more persons, click to clear the access levels of the
Levels selected persons.

Note
The cleared access levels of the persons cannot be restored.

Clear Profile Hover the cursor onto beside , and then click Delete Profile Picture
Pictures Only to clear all the uploaded profile pictures.
Check Person Select one or more persons, click to enter Check Person Authorization
Authorization page. On the page, you can test whether the person's access levels and
credentials are applied to the access control devices, elevator control
devices, and video intercom devices. If failed to be applied, you can apply
them again.

10.4 Person Self-Registration

If there are persons to be added to the system, you can generate a QR code for them to scan. After
scanning the generated QR code by smart phone, the persons can enter their personal information
(including profile) on Self-Registration page. If you have enabled Review Self-Registered Persons
function, you need to review and approve their person information, otherwise they cannot be
added to the system.
This function is applicable to circumstances like a company where there are a large amount of new
employees to be added to the system. For example, you print the generated QR code for the new
employees to scan. After scanning the QR code by smart phone, new employees will enter Self-
Registration page to import their personal information.

362
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You should set self-registration parameters beforehand. See Set Self-Registration Parameters for
details.
● The self-registration function is available when you purchase and activate any License.

10.4.1 Set Self-Registration Parameters

Before starting self-registration, you need to set self-registration parameters. A QR code is
necessary for the persons to register their information by themselves. Besides, you can configure
face quality verification and person information review.

363
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Person , and click
beside , and then click Self-Registration Settings to enter the Self-Registration Settings page.
1.

Figure 10-8 Self-Registration Settings

QR Code for Self-Registration

The platform will generate a QR code for you to download. After downloading the QR code, you
can print it or send it to persons who are going to register.

364
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Face Quality Verification

After the person uploads profile by a cellphone, the selected device will automatically start
checking the profile's quality. If the profile picture is not qualified, the person will be notified. Only
when the uploaded profile is qualified can the person register successfully. Otherwise, the person's
information cannot be uploaded to the platform.

Note
To use this function properly, make sure you have added an access control device or video
intercom device to the platform beforehand.

Review Self-Registered Persons

Set a default person group. Once the person information is registered, the person will be added to
this group.
If you enable Review Self-Registered Persons, after registration, you need to review the person
information on the Persons to be Reviewed page. After verification, the person will be added to the
selected person group. See Review Self-Registered Person Information for details about how to
review.

10.4.2 Scan QR Code for Self-Registration

If a person needs to register by self-service, the person should use a smart phone to scan the self-
registration QR code to enter the Self-Registration page and enter person information. After
registration, the person details will be uploaded to the platform for review.
Before You Start
The administrator can print the QR code or send the QR code to persons to scan. See Set Self-
Registration Parameters about how to generate a self-registration QR code.
Steps
1. Use your smart phone to scan the self-registration QR code to enter the Self-Registration page.
2. Tap the profile frame to upload a face picture.

Note
● You can select a picture from your phone album, or take a photo by phone.

● After uploading a profile, profile quality checking will automatically start. If the profile is not

qualified, you will be notified. Only when the uploaded profile is qualified can you register
successfully. Otherwise, your personal information cannot be uploaded to the platform. See
Set Self-Registration Parameters for details about setting Face Quality Verification function.
3. Set your personal information, including name, ID, email, phone number, etc.
4. Enter the verification code.
5. Tap Save.

365
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● If Review Self-Registered Persons function is enabled, wait for the review. If you are
approved, you will be added to the platform. See Review Self-Registered Person Information
about how to review.
● If Review Self-Registered Persons function is disabled, the person information will be
uploaded to the platform.

10.4.3 Review Self-Registered Person Information

If you have enabled Review Self-Registered Persons function when you set self-registration
parameters, after the persons registered, their person information will be displayed on the Persons
to be Reviewed page, and their status will be displayed as To be Reviewed. You should review their
personal information to approve. After approving, they will be added to the target person group.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Person , and click
beside , and then click Persons to be Reviewed to enter the Persons to Be Reviewed page.
2. Optional: Click to filter registered persons by conditions such as name and ID to quickly find
your wanted persons.
3. Review the displayed person information and verify them.
Operations Description
Approve Self- If the self-registered person information is correct, approve the
Registered Person information to add the registered persons into the platform.
Information ● Select a registered person, and click to approve the person.
● Check multiple registered persons, and click Approve to approve

them all.
Reject Self- If there is something wrong or missing with the self-registered person
Registered Person information, reject the person and tell the person to register again with
Information right information.
● Select a registered person, and click to reject the person.
● Check multiple registered persons, and click Reject to reject them in a

batch.
Delete Self- ● Select a registered person, and click to delete the person from the
Registered Person Persons to be Reviewed list.
Information ● Check multiple registered persons, and click Delete to delete them all
from the Persons to be Reviewed list.

Note
Approved persons will be added to the target person group; rejected persons will not be added
to the target person group, but they will stay in the Persons to be Reviewed list.

366
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

10.5 Batch Issue Cards to Persons

The platform provides a convenient way to batch issue cards to multiple persons.
Steps

Note
● Up to 5 cards can be issued to one person.
● You cannot issue cards to persons who have temporary cards.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Select persons to whom the cards will be issued.
3. Hover the cursor onto , and then click Batch Issue Cards to Persons.
4. In the pop-up window, set the related parameters.

Note
For details about setting the card issuing mode and parameters, refer to Set Card Issuing
Parameters .
5. Issue one card to one person according to the issuing mode you select.
- If you set the issuing mode to Card Enrollment Station, place the card on the card enrollment
station. The card number will be read automatically and the card will be issued to the first
person in the list.
- If you set the issuing mode to Card Reader, swipe the card on the card reader. The card
number will be read automatically and the card will be issued to the first person in the list.
- If you set the issuing mode to Enrollment Station, place the card on the enrollment station.
The card number will be read automatically and the card will be issued to the first person in
the list.
- If you set the issuing mode to Enter Manually, enter the card number manually in the Card
Number field. Press Enter key on the keyboard to issue the card to the person.

Note
You can check Auto Increment Card Number and enter a start card number to issue cards
with incremental numbers to the selected persons in the list.
6. Click Start to start issuing cards.
7. Repeat step 5 to issue the cards to the persons in the list in sequence.

Note
You cannot change the card issuing mode once you issue one card to one person.
8. Click Save.

367
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

10.5.1 Set Card Issuing Parameters

HikCentral Professional provides multiple modes for issuing cards, including reading card numbers
via devices (card enrollment stations, enrollment stations, or card readers)(card enrollment
stations or enrollment stations) and manually entering card numbers.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Open the card issuing settings window when managing credentials or batch issuing cards to
persons.
- Open the window when managing credentials.
- Open the window when batch issuing cards to persons.
- Open the window when filtering persons in the person list.

368
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 10-9 Card Issuing Settings Window Opened when Batch Issuing Cards to Persons
3. Select an issuing mode and set the related parameters.
Card Enrollment Station
Connect a card enrollment station to the PC on which the Web Client runs. You can place the
card on the card enrollment station to get the card No.
If you select this mode, you should set the card format and card encryption function.
Card Format
If the card is Wiegand card, select Wiegand. If not, select Normal.
Reading Frequency

369
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

If your card supports dual frequency (both IC and ID), select Dual. If not, select Single.

Note
If you select Dual, you cannot set card encryption for the card.
Card Encryption
If you set Normal as the card format, you can enable the card encryption function and
select section(s) to be encrypted for security purpose. After enabled, you should enable
the card encryption in the access control device's configuration page to make card
encryption effective.
Audio
Turn on or turn off the audio.
Enrollment Station
You can enroll the card number remotely via the enrollment station and copy back to the
platform.
If you select this mode, you should set the required parameters below.
Access Mode
The access mode of the enrollment station. Click Network or USB from the dropdown list.
Access Protocol
The access protocol of the enrollment station. By default, the access protocol is SDK.
Device Address
The IP address of the enrollment station.
Device Port
The port number of the enrollment station.
User Name
The user name used to log in to the enrollment station.
Password
The password used to log in to the enrollment station.
Card Format
If the card is Wiegand card, select Wiegand. If not, select Normal.
RF Card Type
Select the needed card type(s), including EM card, M1 card, etc.

Note
When selecting M1 Card, you can switch on Card Encryption and select section(s) if
needed.
Card Reader

370
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Select one card reader of one access control device added to the platform. You can swipe the
card on the card reader to get the card number.

Note
● One card reader can be selected for issuing cards by only one user at the same time.
● If you set a third-party card reader to read the card number, you should set the custom
Wiegand protocol for the device to configure the communication rule first.

Enter Manually

Note
This parameter is not available on the card issuing settings window opened when managing
credentials and filtering persons in the person list.

If you select this mode, you need to manually enter the card number. You can check Auto
Increment Card Number to enter a start card number to issue cards with incremental
numbers to the selected persons in the list
4. Click Save (for Credential Management) or Start (for Batch Issue Cards to Persons).

10.6 Report Card Loss

If a person cannot find her/his card, he/she should contact the card issuer as quickly as possible
and the card issuer should report card loss via Web Client immediately to freeze the access level of
the lost card. The card issuer can issue a temporary card with effective period and access level to
the person. When the card is found, the card issuer need to take back the temporary card and
cancel the card loss report, and then the found card will be active again.

10.6.1 Report Card Loss

If a person cannot find her/his card, you can report card loss via the platform to freeze the access
levels related to the card.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Optional: On the Filter pane, click and set more conditions to search for persons for whom
you want to report card loss.
3. Click the name of the person in the person list to enter the basic information page, and then
click Credential Management to expand the Add Credential panel.

371
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 10-10 Add Credential Panel

4. In the Card area, move the cursor onto the lost card and then click .
5. Click OK to confirm the operation.
6. Click Save.
After you report card loss, the access levels of the lost card will be inactive.
7. Optional: Move the cursor onto the lost card and then click to cancel the card loss report.

Note
You need to delete all the temporary cards before you can cancel the card loss report.
The card's access level will be active and the original biometric credentials (such as fingerprints
and face information) will be linked to this card again.

10.6.2 Issue a Temporary Card to a Person

If a card is reported as loss, you can issue a temporary card to the person who loses the card. Once
the temporary card is issued, other cards linked to this person will be inactive, and the biometric
credentials(such as fingerprints and profile) linked to these inactive cards will be transferred to this
temporary card.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Optional: On the Filter pane, click and set more conditions to search for the person to whom
you want to issue the temporary card.
3. Click the name of the person in the person list to enter the basic information page.
4. Click Credential Management to open the Add Credential pane.
5.
In the Card area, click .
6. Click OK to confirm the operation.

372
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

7. Enter the card number.

8. Set the expiry date to define the time when the temporary card becomes invalid.

Note
The expiry date of the temporary card should be within the effective period of the person (card
owner). In other words, the expiry date cannot be later than the effective period. For details
about setting or editing the person's effective period, see Add a Person Manually .
9. Click Save.

Note
You can delete the temporary card for the person. Once the temporary card is deleted, the
inactive cards of the person will restore to the active status, and their previously linked person
information such as fingerprints will also restore.
10. Perform the following operation(s) if needed.
Edit the Temporary Card Move the cursor onto the temporary card, and then click
to edit the temporary card.
Delete the Temporary Move the cursor onto the temporary card, and then click .
Card

10.6.3 Batch Cancel Card Loss

If the lost cards are found, you can batch cancel the card loss reports for multiple persons. After
that, the cards' access levels will return to be active and the original biometric credentials (such as
fingerprints and face information) will be linked to these cards again.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Optional: On the Filter pane, click and set more conditions to search for the persons for
whom you want to cancel card loss reports.
3. Select the persons in the person list.
4. Move the cursor onto , and then click Cancel Card Loss.
The persons' temporary cards will be deleted.

10.7 Customize Additional Information

You can add additional information items as the options for configuring a person's basic
information. The platform allows you to customize two types of additional information items:
custom private information items and custom public information items. The former refers to
private information such as the person's salary. The latter refers to public information such as the
person's department and occupation. When an additional information item is added, it will be
displayed as an configuration option on the Basic Information tab of the Add Person page.

373
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The following figure shows the custom private information items (marked in red rectangles) on the
Add Person page. See Add a Person Manually for details about how to add a person.

Figure 10-11 Custom Private Information Item as Configuration Option

Steps

Note
● You can customize up to 20 private information items and 20 public information items.
● The system administrator can define whether a user has the permission to view the custom
private information when setting permissions for a user (see Add Role ). For information
security, the system administrator needs to make sure the custom private information is only
viewable to specific users.

374
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Click Customize Additional Information to enter the customizing addition information page.
3. Click Add.
4. Create a name for the item.

Note
You can enter up to 32 characters.
5. Select the type to restrict the format of the contents of the item.
Example
For example, if you select General Text, entering text information as the content of the item is
required when adding a person. If you select Date, setting date as the content of the item is
required when adding a person (see the figure below).

375
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 10-12 If You Select Date as the Type

6. Click Save.
7. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) if needed.
Edit Name Click to edit the name of the additional information item.
Delete Click to delete the additional information item.

Note
You cannot delete the additional information item linked with person
information in the domain.

376
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

10.8 Print Cards

After adding persons to the platform, you can print their information onto blank physical cards. If
you have set credential information (e.g., virtual card information) for the persons, the credential
information will be linked to the physical cards once the physical cards are printed. For example, in
the scenario of employee management, you can print physical cards as the employee ID badges,
which can be used by your employees as the credentials for access authentication at the access
points of your company.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added the supported printers to the platform. For details, see Set Printer .

● Make sure you have added card templates to the platform. For details, see Set Card Template .

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Person .
2. Optional: Set conditions to search for the target persons.
3. Select the persons for whom you need to print cards.
4. Click to open the Print Card window.
5. Select a card template from Card Template.
6. Select a printer from Printer.
7. Select person(s) from the Selected Person list.
8. Click Front and Back to preview the information to be printed on the front and back of the
physical cards.
9. Click Print.
What to do next
If you have not manually added card information for the persons, batch issue card information to
them. Otherwise the persons cannot use the physical cards for access authentication. See Batch
Issue Cards to Persons for details.
Related Information Add a Person Manually

377
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 11 Event and Alarm

On the Web Client, you can set rules to detect events and alarms, and set linkage actions for
notification. The detailed information of the events and alarms can be received and checked via
the Control Client and the Mobile Client.
Event
Event is the signal that resource (e.g., device, camera, server) sends when something occurs. The
platform can receive and record events for checking, and can also trigger a series of linkage
actions for notification. The event can also trigger an alarm for further notification and linkage
actions (such as alarm recipients and pop-up window). You can check the event related video and
captured pictures if you set the recording and capturing as event linkages.
The rule of an event includes four elements, namely, "event source" (i.e., the device which
detects the event), "triggering event" (the specified event type), "what to do" (linkage actions
after this event is detected), and "when" (during the specified time period, the linkage actions
can be triggered).
Alarm
Alarm is used to notify security personnel of the particular situation which helps handle the
situation promptly. Alarm can trigger a series of linkage actions (e.g., popping up window,
showing the alarm details) for notification and alarm handling. You can check the received real-
time alarm information and search for history alarms.
The rule of an alarm includes six elements, namely, "alarm source" (i.e., the device which detects
the triggering event), "triggering event" (the specified event type occurred on the alarm source
and triggers the alarm), "when" (during the specified time period, the alarm can be triggered),
"recipient" (the user on the platform who can receive this alarm), "priority" (the importance or
urgency of this alarm), and "what to do" (linkage actions after this alarm is triggered).
Linkage Action
An event's linkage actions (such as recording and capturing) are used to record the event details
and trigger basic actions (such as linking access point to lock or unlock, triggering alarm output,
and sending email).
An alarm's linkage actions (such as popping up an alarm window, displaying on the smart wall,
and audible warning) are used to record the alarm details and provide recipients multiple ways to
view the alarm information for alarm acknowledgment and handling.
Example
What is an Event
The event can be defined as intrusion ("triggering event") which happens in the bank vault and be
detected by the camera mounted in the bank vault ("event source") on weekend ("when"), and
triggers the camera to start recording ("what to do") once happened.

378
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Example
What is an Alarm
The alarm can be defined as intrusion ("triggering event") which happens in the bank vault and be
detected by the camera mounted in the bank vault ("alarm source") on weekend ("when"), and
triggers the camera to start recording ("what to do") once happened. This alarm is marked as High
priority ("priority"), and users including the admin and operators ("recipient") can receive this
alarm notification and check the alarm details.

11.1 Manage Event and Alarm

You can configure parameters for event types provided by the platform to detect normal events or
trigger normal alarms, or add combined alarms, generic events, and user-defined events for a
wider range of applications.

11.1.1 Supported Events and Alarms

Currently, the platform supports events and alarms for the following types of resources.
Video
Camera
Video exceptions or events occurred in the monitoring area of the camera, such as the
motion detection, line crossing, and so on.
Alarm Input
Events occurred on alarm inputs of video devices on the platform.
Face
Events detected by facial recognition camera or temperature screening cameras, such as the
face matched events, face mismatched events, rarely appeared person events, and so on.
Access Control
Door
Events occurred on doors of access control devices and video intercom devices, such as
access event and door status event.
Elevator
Events occurred in elevators, such as card swiping event and elevator status event.
Alarm Input
Events occurred on alarm inputs of access control devices on the platform.
Person
Events occurred during the process of authentication by person, such as card No. matched
events and person matched events.
Patrol

379
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Events occurred during the patrol process, such as early patrol, late patrol, and so on.
Vehicle
Vehicle Features
Events occurred during the vehicle recognition process, such as license plate number
matched events, vehicle type matched events, and license plate number mismatched events.
Parking Lot
Events occurred in different parking lots or during the parking process, such as blocklist
events, overstayed events, and so on.
Alarm
Security Radar
Events detected by radar or during the radar configuration process, such as arming events,
line crossing event, and so on.
Alarm Input
Events occurred on alarm inputs of security control devices on the platform, such as alarm
input restored events, bypass events, and so on.
Partition (Area)
Events occurred in partitions (areas) of security control panels on the platform, such as away
arming events, instant arming events, and so on.
Intelligent Analysis Group
Events occurred during the regional people counting process.
Digital Signage
Events detected by digital signage terminals, such as abnormal temperature events.
Maintenance
Operation exceptions occurred on the resources (e.g., cameras, doors, UVSSs, dock stations,
recording servers) added to the platform, such as the camera offline, server exception, and so
on.
User
Events occurred during the user login and logout process.
User-Defined Event
Events defined by users themselves.
Generic Event
Events transferred in the form of TCP/UDP/HTTP/HTTPS data packages from resources (e.g.,
external systems and devices) if something occurred and matched the configured expression.
Visitor
Events occurred during the visiting process.

380
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You should enable the detection frequency of automatic checkout for visitor after the effective
period.
Broadcast
Events occurred on alarm inputs linked with IP speakers.
Security Inspection
Events occurred on walk-through metal detectors.
Mobile Monitoring
Events detected by mobile devices and occurred during the vehicle driving process.

11.1.2 Add Normal Event and Alarm

The platform has provided multiple triggering event types for you to configure rules for detection
or triggering alarms.
In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Event and Alarm →
Event and Alarm Configuration → Normal Event and Alarm and click Add to enter the Add Event
and Alarm page.

Basic Information
Triggering Event
The specific event type detected on the event source will trigger an event or alarm.
Source
This field refers to the specific entity (such as cameras, devices, servers, etc.) which can trigger
this event and alarm.

Note
● When setting a thermal related event and alarm for thermal cameras, you can select areas,
points, or lines as event and alarm sources.
● Triggering event types including Camera, Alarm Input, and Face in Video and Camera,
Encoding Device, Decoding Device, Recording Server, and Streaming Server in Maintenance
support selecting sources in remote sites. For different device types, the labels vary.
● The Triggering Event and Source fields support fuzzy search.

Name
After selecting the source(s), you need to name the event or alarm. You can customize a name,
or click the labels below to name the event or alarm by the selected label(s). If you name the
event or alarm by the selected labels, the platform will display the event/alarm name by the

381
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

combination of source name, area name, triggering event name, or site name, so that you can
quickly know the location where the event/alarm occurs.
Face Comparison Group
If the triggering event you select is Face, you need to select the face comparison group so that
the platform can compare the detected face pictures with face pictures in the group.
Threshold
If the triggering event you select is Regional People Counting, you need to set extra conditions
to define the triggering event.
Currently, you can set People Counting Above/Below Threshold and People Counting Above/
Below Threshold (Pre-Alarm) for people counting group. For these two alarms, you need to set
the threshold which determines whether the selected people counting groups will trigger an
alarm when the detected number of people stayed less than or more than the threshold.
For example, if you set the threshold as "≥ 100 or ≤ 10", when the number of people detected
in the selected people counting group is more than 100 or less than 10, an alarm will be
triggered to notify the security personnel.
Frequency
If the source type you selected is Parking Lot and the triggering event is Frequently Appeared
Vehicle, you can predefine the frequency.
For example, if you set the frequency to daily 3 times, when the devices in the source parking
lot detect the license plate numbers of the vehicles in the selected vehicle list for more than 3
times in one day, an alarm will be triggered.
Vehicle List
If you select triggering events related with vehicle recognition, you need to select vehicle lists,
so that the platform will compare detected vehicles with vehicles in the selected list.
Vehicle Type
If the source type you selected is Vehicle Features and the triggering event is Vehicle Type
Matched Event, you need to specify the vehicle type(s). When the source camera detects a
vehicle the type of which matches with the one(s) you selected here, a vehicle type matched
alarm will be triggered.
For example, if oil tank truck is not allowed on one road, you can set a vehicle type matched
alarm for the camera mounted on this road and set the vehicle type as Oil Tank Truck. When
the camera detects an oil tank truck, an alarm will be triggered.
Color
Select the color to indicate this event or alarm. You can set the color according to the
emergency of this event or alarm. For example, you can set red color for the urgent alarm and
set green color for the prompt event.
Ignore Recurred Event/Alarm

382
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

This function is used to avoid the same event or alarm occurs frequently in a short time. You
need to set the Ignore For (Second) which is the threshold of the recurring events or alarms.
For example, if you set Ignore For (Second) to 30 seconds, the events or alarms of the same
type occurred on the same camera within 30 seconds will be regarded as one event or alarm.
Delay Alarm
If the source type you selected is Camera of Maintenance and the triggering event is Camera
Offline, you can enable this function and set a delay duration. During the delay duration, when
the source detects the triggering event, the triggering event will not be uploaded to the
platform. After this duration, if the source still detects this triggering event, the triggering event
will be uploaded to the platform and trigger an alarm.
With this function, when the platform detects that the camera is offline, if the camera gets
online again within the delay duration, it will not trigger a camera offline alarm. Thus the
maintainers can focus on the cameras which are truly disconnected.

Action
Trigger Recording
Select the related camera to record the alarm video (make sure the related camera(s) have been
configured with recording schedule) when the alarm is triggered.
● To relate the source camera itself for recording, select Source Camera and select the storage

location (i.e., Store in Main Storage, Store in Auxiliary Storage, and Not Store) for storing the
video files.

Note
If the camera is not configured with the main storage, you can still select the storage location
as Store in Main Storage, but the rule exception will be prompted.
● To relate other cameras, select Specified Camera and click Add to add other cameras as

related cameras. Select the storage location for storing the video files.
● View Pre-Event Video: You can view the video recorded from periods preceding the alarm.

Specify the number of seconds which you want to view the recorded video for before the
alarm starts. For example, when someone opens a door, you can view the recorded video to
see what happens right before the door opened.
● Post-record: Record video from periods following detected alarms. Specify the number of

seconds which you want to record video for after the alarm stops.
● Lock Video Files for: Set the days for protecting the video file from being overwritten.

● Display Video by Default: Set the video to be displayed by default on the Control Client when

receiving the triggered alarm information. You can select the recorded video or the live video
to be displayed.
Capture Picture
Select cameras to capture pictures during the alarm, and you can view the captured pictures
when checking the alarm.

383
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● If the alarm source is a camera, you can set to trigger the source camera itself for capturing
pictures by selecting Source Camera.
● To trigger other cameras for capturing pictures, select Specified Camera and select cameras

for capturing pictures.

Capture Picture: Specify the number of seconds to define when the camera will capture
pictures for the alarm. After you set the number of seconds for pre/post-event (here the event
refers to the triggering event), the camera will capture one picture at three time points
respectively: at the configured seconds before the alarm starts, at the configured seconds after
the alarm ends, and when the event is happening (as shown in the picture below).

Figure 11-1 Capture Pictures

Note
The pre-event picture is captured from the camera's recorded video footage. This pre-event
capture function is only supported by the camera which is set to store the video in the recording
server.
Create Tag
Select camera(s) to record video when the event occurs and set the storage location for storing
video files. The platform will add a tag to the event triggered video footage for convenient
search.
● If the event source is a camera, to relate the source camera itself for tagged recording, select

Source Camera and select the storage location (i.e., Store in Main Storage, Store in Auxiliary
Storage, and Not Store) for storing the video files.

Note
If the camera is not configured with the main storage, you can still select the storage location
as Store in Main Storage, but the rule exception will be prompted.
● To trigger other cameras for tagged recording, select Specified Camera and click Add to add

other cameras.
You can enter the tag name as desired. You can also click the button below to add the related
information to the name.
Set the time range to define the tagged length of the video footage. For example, you can set to
record the tagged video started from 5 seconds before the event and lasted until 10 seconds
after the event. The tagged video can be searched and checked via the Control Client.
Add the description to the tagged video as needed.
Link Access Point

384
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

You can enable this function to trigger the access points (including doors and floors).
For doors, the doors can be locked, unlocked, remained locked, or remained unlocked when the
event occurs.
For floors, the elevators can access the floors freely, with credentials, temporarily, or access
forbidden.
For example, you can set to trigger all the doors remaining locked and all the floors access
forbidden when intrusion of suspicious person is detected.
● All Access Points: When the alarm is triggered, the platform will trigger all the doors and

floors to take certain action.

● Specified Access Point: Click Add to select specified access points or emergency operation

groups as the linkage targets. When the event occurs, the platform will trigger these doors,
floors, or doors/floors in the emergency operation groups to take certain action.
Link Alarm Input
Select alarm inputs and these alarm inputs will be armed or disarmed when the event occurs.
For example, when adding an intrusion alarm of camera A, which is mounted at the entrance of
the building, you can link to arm the alarm input B, C, and D, which are PIR detectors mounted
in different rooms in the building and are disarmed usually. When camera A detects intrusion
alarm, these PIR detectors will be armed and trigger other events or alarms (if rules configured),
so that the security personnel will get to known where the suspect goes.
Link Alarm Output
Select alarm output (if available) and the external device connected can be activated when the
event occurs.

Note
Up to 64 alarm outputs can be selected as event linkage.
Close Alarm Output: The added alarm output(s) can be closed manually, or you can set the time
period (unit: s) after which the alarm output(s) will be closed automatically.
Trigger PTZ
Call the preset, patrol or pattern of the selected cameras when the event occurs.

Note
Up to 64 PTZ linkages can be selected as event linkage.
Link Third-Party Integrated Resource
Click Add to select the resources integrated from third-party platform and set the control about
detailed operations that will happen when the event occurs.
Send Email
Select an email template to send the event information according to the defined email settings.
If you have purchased the License of emergency mustering, you can select an emergency

385
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

counting group in the drop-down list of Send Data of Emergency Counting Groups. When the
event occurs, the platform will send the data of the selected emergency counting group to the
email in a PDF file.

Note
For details about setting email template, refer to Set Email Template .
Attach with Entry & Exit Counting
If the source type you selected is Alarm Input, you can select an entry & exit counting group
from the drop-down list to attach a report of entry & exit counting in the sent email.
For example, if the fire alarm input detects fire in the building, the security personnel will
receive a file, which contains the information such as the number of people still in the
building, their names and profile photos, phone numbers, and locations of last access.
Trigger User-Defined Event
Select the user-defined event(s) in the event list as the linkage action when the event occurs.

Note
● Up to 16 user-defined events can be selected as linkage actions.
● For setting the user-defined event, refer to Add User-Defined Event .

Link Printer
If the source type you selected is Alarm Input, you can link to print the entry & exit counting
report of certain entry & exit counting group.
For example, if the fire alarm input detects fire in the building, the platform will automatically
send the entry & exit counting report to all the printers configured on the platform so that they
can get the information such as how many people are still in the building, their names and
profile photos, phone numbers, and locations of last access.
For details about printer settings, refer to Set Printer .
Link Speaker Unit
After linking the speaker unit to an event and selecting an audio file, the linked speaker unit will
play the selected audio file when the event occurs.
Trigger Remaining Open for Entrance and Exit
When the event occurs, the selected entrance(s) and exit(s) will turn to the status of remaining
open so that the vehicles can enter or exit the parking lot without authentication or the
allowance of guards.

Receiving Schedule
The field defines a time period when the event or alarm can be triggered.
Receiving Schedule

386
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The source is armed for detecting or triggering events or alarms during the receiving schedule.
The platform provides two types of receiving schedule:
● Schedule Template: Select a receiving schedule template for the event or alarm to define

when the event or alarm can be detected or triggered. For customizing a template, refer to
Configure Receiving Schedule Template .
● Event Based: Specify a user-defined event or an alarm input as the start or end of the

receiving schedule. You can set the Stop Receiving switch to on and set the specified time to
automatically stop receiving this event or alarm even if the schedule does not end.

Note
For example, assume that you have set event A as the start event, event B as the end event,
and set the value of Automatically Stop Receiving After to 60 s. Under these conditions,
when event A occurs at T1, if event B occurs within 60 s , the receiving schedule ends at the
occurrence of event B (see the following figure Receiving Schedule 1); if not, ends at 60 s after
the occurrence of event A (see the following figure Receiving Schedule 2).

Figure 11-2 Receiving Schedule 1

Figure 11-3 Receiving Schedule 2

When A occurs at time T1, the event or alarm will be armed from T1, if A occurs again at time
T2 but B doesn't occur, the event or alarm will be armed from T2 again.

Figure 11-4 Receiving Schedule 3

387
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Alarm Settings
Switch on Trigger Alarm to trigger the configured event as an alarm.
Alarm Priority
The field defines the importance or urgency of this alarm. Priority can be used for filtering
alarms.
Recipient
The field defines users who can receive the alarm notification and check the alarm details when
the alarm is triggered.
Select the recipient group(s) or user(s) to send the alarm information to and the recipient(s) can
receive the alarm information when he/she logs in to HikCentral Professional via the Control
Client or Mobile Client.

Note
By default, users configured as the default recipients on the Alarm Receiving Configuration page
will be automatically selected and cannot be deselected. For how to configure default recipients
and recipient groups, refer to Add Alarm Recipients .
Trigger Pop-up Window
Display the alarm window on the Control Client to show the alarm details and all the alarm
related cameras' live videos and playback when alarm occurs.
Trigger Emergency
When the alarm is triggered by an emergency (such as fire), the platform automatically switches
to the Trigger Emergency mode or Turn Off Emergency mode.
Link Map
Select a map to show the alarm information and you should add the camera to the map as a hot
spot (refer to ).
Display on Smart Wall
Display the alarm video or the specified public view on the smart wall. You can select the added
smart wall and select which window to display the alarm.
● Wall Related to Graphic Card: Display the alarm video on the wall which adopts graphic card

of the PC that running the Control Client to decode the video.

● Wall Related to Decoding Device: Display the alarm video on the wall which adopts decoding

device (namely the wall that linked to the decoding device) to decode the video.
● Alarm's Related Cameras: Display the video of the alarm related cameras on the smart wall.

You can select to display the video on which smart wall and which window and set the video's
stream type.
● Public View: A view enables you to save the window division and the correspondence

between cameras and windows as the Favorites to quickly access the related cameras later. If
you select Public View, when the alarm is triggered, the platform will display the selected

388
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

public view on the specified smart wall and users can view the video of the cameras
predefined in the view.
● Smart Wall No.: Select the No. of smart wall window to display the alarm video.

● Stop Displaying Alarm: Define when the platform will stop displaying the alarm on the smart

wall. The platform can stop displaying alarm within specified seconds, or replace the original
alarm when another alarm with higher alarm priority is triggered.
Trigger Audible Alarm
Set the voice text for playing on the PC when alarm is triggered.

Note
You should set voice engine as the alarm sound on the System Settings page of the Control
Client.
Restrict Alarm Handling Time
When the alarm is triggered, you need to handle the alarm on the Control Client. Enable this
function to trigger the user-defined event(s) / alarm output(s) or automatically acknowledge the
alarm if the alarm is not handled within the configured alarm handling time.

Note
Up to 16 user-defined events and alarm outputs can be triggered when handling alarm timed
out.

Other Operations
Click Add to add the event to the platform, or click Add and Continue to save the current settings
and add another one. The added event will be listed on the Normal Event and Alarm page, and
then you can perform the following operations if needed.

Table 11-1 Other Operations

Operation Description
Edit Event Click the event name to enter the details page and edit the
settings.
Copy to Other Events 1. Click the event name to enter the details page.
2. Click Copy To in the top right corner of the page.
3. Specify the settings of the source and select the target(s).
4. Click OK to copy the current event's specified parameter(s) to
other added events for batch configuration.
Delete Events Select events and click Delete to delete the selected ones.
Delete All Invalid Events Click Delete All Invalid Items to batch delete all the invalid
events.

389
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Operation Description
Enable Events Select an event and click Enable → Enable to enable the
selected event, or click Enable → Enable All to enable all the
added events.
Disable Events 1. Select an event and click Disable → Disable , or click Disable
→ Disable All .
2. Set the time when the event(s) start being disabled and the
duration how long the event(s) will be disabled for.
3. (Optional) Enter the reason for disabling the event(s).
4. (Optional) Check Disable Device Alarm to change the alarm
status of the device(s) displayed in the event list.
5. Click OK to disable the selected event(s) or all the events.
Test Events Select the event(s) and click Test to manually trigger the event(s)
for testing if the linkage actions work properly.

11.1.3 Add Combined Alarm

For some complicated scenarios, the alarm should be triggered when multiple events or alarms are
detected or triggered. For example, the platform detects intrusion in area B, then the arming of
area A starts. After that, if the platform detects intrusion in area A, then an alarm will be triggered
to notify the security personnel.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Event and Alarm →
Event and Alarm Configuration → Combined Alarm .
2. Click Add Combined Alarm to open the Add Combined Alarm pane.

390
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 11-5 Add Combined Alarm

3. Set parameters on the page.
Alarm Triggered Area
Select the area where the combined alarm will be triggered.
Alarm Priority
The priority including low, medium, high, and custom level, which indicates the urgent degree
of the combined alarm.
Alarm Name
Create a name for the combined alarm.
Description

391
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Describe the combined alarm according to your requirements.

Ignore Recurring Alarms
Once it is enabled, the platform will ignore the combined alarm recurred within the
configured time period.
4. Click Save to enter the configuration page.
5. Configure a receiving schedule for the combined alarm.
1) Click on the configuration page to open the Select Schedule Template pane.
2) Select a schedule template as All-Day Template, Weekday Template, Weekend Template, or a
custom template.

Note
For how to customize a schedule template, refer to Configure Receiving Schedule Template .
3) Click Save.
A Receiving Schedule card will appear on the page.

Figure 11-6 Receiving Schedule Card

6. Configure conditions for triggering the combined alarm.
1) Click at the right of the Receiving Schedule card to open the Select Alarm Triggering Logic
pane.
2) Select a triggering logic and click Save.
The condition card will appear.
3) Click on the condition card to open the Select Event Source and Event Type pane.
4) Select a triggering event and a source, and click Save.

392
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 11-7 Condition Card

5) Optional: Click below the newly added event source and type card to select more event
sources and types.
6) Optional: Click on the event source and type card to enter the remote configuration page
of the event source. For details about remote configuration, refer to the user manual of the
corresponding device.
7. Configure the alarm recipient(s) and linkage action(s) for the combined alarm.
1) Click at the right of the triggering logic card to open the Select Alarm Linkage Action panel.
2) Click Alarm Recipients and select the recipient(s).

Note
If Automatically Receive Alarm is enabled for some users (refer to Add Normal User for
details), the Alarm Recipients card will be automatically generated after the event source and
type is configured, and these users will be selected as recipients. You can click the generated
card to edit the alarm recipients, but the selected users cannot be unselected.
3) Click Save.
4) Click below the Alarm Recipients card to select a linkage action and set the corresponding
parameters. For details, refer to Add Normal Event and Alarm .

393
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 11-8 Action Card

5) Optional: Click below the Alarm Recipients card to add more linkage actions.
8. Optional: Click the icon on the top left of each card to reselect the content.
9. Optional: Move the cursor on each card and click appeared on the top right of the card to
delete the card.

Note
If the card is deleted, the following cards or sub cards (if any) will also be deleted.
10. Click Save in the top right corner of the combined alarm configuration page to add the
combined alarm to the platform.

Note
If the alarm recipients are not configured for this combined alarm, you cannot save the
combined alarm.
11. Optional: Perform the following operations according to your requirements.
Add to Map Click Add to Map to add this alarm to the map. After that, the alarm
will be marked on the map when the alarm is triggered.
Copy Click Copy, and then select the items (such as basic information,
Parameters to actions, receiving schedule, receiving mode), and select the target
Existing Alarm alarm to copy to.
Delete Alarm Click Delete to delete this alarm.
Test Click Test to trigger this alarm manually, and you can check whether
the linkage actions take effect and whether the recipients can receive
the notification.

394
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Enable/Disable Switch on the button beside Status to enable or disable this alarm.
After the alarm is enabled, it can be received by the platform. If you
disable this alarm, you will be required to set the start time and
duration of disabling and the platform cannot receive the alarm in the
duration.

11.1.4 Add Generic Event

A generic event is a signal transferred in the form of TCP/UDP/HTTP/HTTPS data package from the
resource (e.g., external systems and devices) if something occurred and matched the configured
expression. In this way, you can easily integrate the platform with a very wide range of external
sources, such as access control systems and alarm systems.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Event and Alarm →
Basic Settings → Generic Event .
2. Click Add to enter the Add Generic Event page.

395
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 11-9 Add Generic Event Page

3. Set a name for the event.
4. Optional: Copy the settings from other generic events in the Copy from field.
5. Select TCP, UDP, HTTP, or HTTPS as the transport protocol.
6. Select the match type which indicates how particular your system should be when analyzing the
received data packages:
Search
The received package must contain a part of text defined in the expression.
For example, if you have defined the expression as 'Motion' AND 'Line Crossing', the event
can be detected when the received package contains "Motion", "Intrusion", and "Line
Crossing".

396
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Match
The text contained in the received package must be exactly the same as that defined in the
expression.
7. Define the expression for analyzing the received package.
1) Enter the term which should be contained in the expression in the text field.
2) Click Add to add the term to the expression.
3) Click the parenthesis or operator button to add it to the expression.
4) Optional: Click to remove the item at the left of the cursor from the expression.

Note
You can position the cursor inside the expression in order to determine where a new item
should be included or where an item should be removed.
The parenthesis or operator buttons are described in the following:
AND
You specify that the terms on both sides of the AND operator must be included.
For example, if you define the rule as 'Motion' AND 'Line Crossing' AND 'Intrusion', the term
Motion, and Line Crossing as well as the term Intrusion must be all contained in the received
package for the conditions to be met.

Note
In generally, the more terms you combine with AND, the fewer events will be detected.
OR
You specify that any term should be contained.
For example, if you define the rule as 'Motion' OR 'Line Crossing' OR 'Intrusion', any of the
terms (Motion, Line Crossing, or Intrusion) must be contained in the received package for the
conditions to be met.

Note
In generally, the more terms you combine with OR, the more events will be detected.
(
Add the left parenthesis to the rule. Parentheses can be used to ensure that related terms are
processed together as a unit; in other words, they can be used to force a certain processing
order in the analysis.
For example, if you define the rule as ('Motion' OR 'Line Crossing') AND 'Intrusion', the two
terms inside the parentheses will be processed first, then the result will be combined with
the last part of the rule. In other words, the system will first search any packages containing
either of the terms Motion or Line Crossing, then it searches the results to look for the
packages that contain the term Intrusion.
)
Add the right parenthesis to the rule.

397
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8. Click Add to add the event and back to the event list page, or click Add and Continue to add the
event and continue to add a new event.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the event.
Edit Event Settings Click the name in the Event Name column to edit the corresponding
event settings.
Delete Event Select the event(s) and click Delete to delete the selected event settings.
Settings
Delete All Event Check the checkbox in the heading row, and click Delete to delete all the
Settings event settings.
Receive Generic Select the event(s), click Receive Generic Event to open the settings
Event pane, and check the checkbox(es) to enable receiving the generic
event(s) via different protocols.

11.1.5 Add User-Defined Event

When you are viewing videos or checking the alarm information, if there is some information that
needs to be paid attention to, you can manually define a new event type which is not in the
provided event and alarm list or the defined generic events for triggering an alarm or being
configured as a linkage action of alarms. This kind of event is called as the user-defined event.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Event and Alarm →
Basic Settings → User-Defined Event .
2. Click Add.

Figure 11-10 Add User-Defined Event

3. Create a name for the event.

398
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Optional: Enter the information to describe the event.

5. Click Add to add the event and go back to the event list page, or click Add and Continue to add
the event and continue to add a new one.
With the customized user-defined event, the platform provides the following functions:
● Define the alarm receiving time period by the user-defined event: the receiving schedule of an

alarm will start or end when the user-defined event is triggered as an alarm on the Control
Client. For configuring the alarm source, receiving schedule, and linkage action, refer to Event
and Alarm . For triggering the user-defined event as an alarm, refer to User Manual of
HikCentral Professional Control Client.
● Integrate other third-party systems with HikCentral Professional by using the data received

from the third-party system. The user-defined events can be triggered as an alarm outside the
HikCentral Professional. For details, contact our technical support.

11.2 Set Basic Event and Alarm Parameters

After setting basic parameters for events and alarms, you can determine when (i.e., receiving
schedule) and who (i.e., recipients) can receive events and alarms, and how (e.g., regularly sending
report via email) the events and alarms are sent to the recipients. You can also define alarm
priorities, alarm categories, and alarm icons to meet the actual requirements.

11.2.1 Configure Receiving Schedule Template

When adding events and alarms, you can select the predefined receiving schedule template to
define when the event and alarm can be triggered and notifying the recipients. The platform has
predefined three default receiving schedule templates: All-Day Template, Weekday Template, and
Weekend Template. You can also customize a template according to actual needs.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Event and Alarm →
Basic Settings → Receiving Schedule Template .
2. Click to enter the Add Receiving Schedule Template page.

399
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 11-11 Add Receiving Schedule Template

3. Enter a name for the template.
4. Optional: Select another defined template to copy the settings to the current template.
5. Click Scheduled Time and drag on the time bar to set time periods during which the event can
be triggered on the event source and notified the recipients.

Note
Up to 4 time periods can be set for each day.
6. Optional: Click Erase and click on the drawn time period to clear the corresponding time period.
7. Click Add to add the template.
The receiving schedule template will be displayed on the receiving schedule template list.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the receiving schedule template.
View Template Click the template name to view its details.
Details
Edit Template Click the name of a custom template to edit template details.

Note
The predefined templates cannot be edited.

Delete Template Select a template and click to delete the template.

400
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The predefined templates cannot be edited.

11.2.2 Define Alarm Priority, Alarm Category, and Alarm Icon

The platform has predefined several alarm priorities, alarm categories, and alarm icons for basic
needs. You can edit the predefined alarm priority and alarm category, and customize alarm priority
and alarm category according to actual needs.
Steps

Note
Alarm Priority
Define the importance or urgency of alarms for handling or acknowledgement.
Alarm Category
Used when the user acknowledges the alarm and categories what kind of alarm it is, e,g., false
alarm, or alarm to be verified. You can search for alarms by the alarm category.
Alarm Icon When Alarm Occurs
The platform has predefined some icons of resources for several special alarms.
For example, it predefined the icon for the Door Opened Abnormally alarm. When this alarm is
triggered, the door icon will turn to the icon displayed here to notify users.

1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Event and Alarm →
Basic Settings → Alarm Custom Settings to enter the Alarm Custom Settings page.
2. Customize alarm priorities according to actual needs. By default, three kinds of alarm priority
exist.

Figure 11-12 Alarm Priority

1) Click Add to open the adding alarm priority pane.

401
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 11-13 Add Alarm Priority

2) Select a level No. for the priority.
3) Enter a descriptive name for the priority.
4) Select the color for the priority.
5) Click Add.
The priority will be displayed on the alarm priority list.
3. Customize alarm categories according to actual needs. By default, four alarm categories exist.

Figure 11-14 Alarm Category

1) Click Add to open the adding alarm category pane.

402
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 11-15 Add Alarm Category

2) Select a No. for the alarm category.
3) Enter a descriptive name for the alarm category.
4) Click Add.
The alarm category will be displayed on the alarm category list.
4. In the Alarm Icon When Alarm Occurs field, view the alarm icons provided by the platform which
are used to notify the users that the alarm is triggered.

Note
These predefined alarm icons cannot be edited and deleted.
5. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding alarm priority and category.
Edit Click to edit the alarm priority and category.

Note
You cannot edit the No. of predefined alarm priorities and categories.

Delete Click to delete the alarm priority and category.

Note
You cannot delete the predefined alarm priorities and categories.

11.2.3 Add Alarm Recipients

You can manage alarm recipients in groups to quickly set recipients for different categories of
alarms. You can also set default alarm recipients who can receive all the alarms triggered by

403
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

resources they have access permissions, so that you do not have to select recipients for each single
alarm.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Event and Alarm →
Basic Settings → Alarm Receiving Configuration .
2. In the Alarm Recipient Group field, click above the group list to open the adding alarm
recipient group pane.
3. Enter a name for the group and click Add.

Figure 11-16 Alarm Recipient Group Field

4. Select an alarm recipient group and click in the Users field to add user(s) to the group.
5. Optional: Check user(s) in the group and click to remove the selected user(s) from the group
or click → Delete All to remove all the users from the group.
6. Check user(s) in the Recipient field as the default alarm recipient(s).
The default alarm recipients will be automatically selected when setting recipients for alarms,
and they cannot be deselected.
7. Click Save.
The configured alarm recipient group(s) will appear on the Add Event and Alarm page and they
can be selected when setting recipients for alarms.

11.2.4 Send Event and Alarm Report Regularly

You can set a scheduled report rule for specified events or alarms, and the platform can send an
email with a report attached to the target recipients by day or week, showing the details of
specified events or alarms triggered on the day or the week.

404
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Set

Email Template .
● Set the email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and port, etc. For details,

refer to Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
One report can contain up to 10,000 event records in total.
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → General → Event and Alarm →
Basic Settings → Scheduled Report .
2. Click Add if there is no scheduled report rule or click above the rule list to enter the Create
Report page.
3. Create a name for the report.
4. In the Report Target field, click Add to select events or alarms to be contained in the report.

Note
Up to 32 events and alarms can be added in one report.
5. Set the report sending rule and time.
By Day
If the statistics cycle is selected as By Day, the report shows data on a daily basis. The
platform will send a report at the sending time on the selected day(s) of the week, which
contains information of the events triggered on the day (24 hours) before the sending date.
For example, if you select Monday, Tuesday, and Friday in the Send On failed, and set the
sending time as 18:00, the platform will send a report at 18:00 on every Monday, Tuesday,
and Friday, containing details of all the events triggered between 00:00 and 24:00 on every
Sunday, Monday, and Thursday.
By Week
If the statistics cycle is selected as By Week, the report shows data on a weekly basis, which
may be less time-consuming. The platform will send a report at the sending time on the
selected day of the week, which contains information of events and alarms triggered on the
recent 7 days or recent 14 days before the sending date.
For example, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform will send a report
at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing details of all the events triggered
between last Monday and Sunday.
6. Optional: Set an effective period for the report to improve the data security.
7. Optional: Select Excel or PDF as the report format and select a language for report contents.

Note
You can skip this step if you want to keep the default settings.

405
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8. Optional: Switch on Send Report via Email and select an email template from the drop-down list
to define the recipient information and email format.

Note
You can click Add New to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Set
Email Template .
9. Optional: Switch on Upload to FTP or Save to Local Storage to automatically upload and save
reports sent by the platform to the FTP server or local storage.

Note
You can click Configure or click → SFTP Settings / Configure Local Storage to log in to the
SFTP server by entering the IP address, port, user name, and password, and set the saving path
on the SFTP server or local storage for reports.
10. Click Save to add the report rule.

11.3 Event and Alarm Search

The platform provides the statistics and analysis results of historical events and alarms for you to
have an overview and further applications. You can also search for historical events and alarms by
setting different conditions to view the details as required.

11.3.1 Event and Alarm Overview

In the event and alarm overview module, it gives you an overview of the event or alarm
distribution, top 5 event types or alarm categories, and top 5 event or alarm areas.
In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → General → Event and Alarm →
Search → Overview .

406
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 11-17 Event and Alarm Analysis

Click Settings in the upper-right corner to customize event types or alarm categories to be
calculated on the overview page.
In the upper area of the page, the number of events or alarms in the last 7 days or last 30 days are
displayed in vertical bar chart.
In the lower-left area of the page, the data of top 5 event types or alarm categories triggered in
today, last 7 days or last 30 days are displayed in horizontal bar chart. You can click the red number
of an item to jump to the Event and Alarm Search page.
In the lower-right area of the page, the data of top 5 event or alarm areas in today, last 7 days or
last 30 days are displayed in horizontal bar chart.

Note
The information displayed on each area will change according to the report target on the Settings
pane. For example, if you select Alarm on the Settings pane as the report target, the upper area
will only display the number of alarms, the lower-left area will only display the data of top 5 alarm
categories, and the lower-right area will only display the data of top 5 alarm areas.

11.3.2 Search for Event and Alarm Logs

You can search for event and alarm log files of the added resource by setting different conditions.
Before You Start
Make sure you have configured events and alarms first. See Add Normal Event and Alarm for
details.

407
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → General → Event and Alarm
→ Search → Event and Alarm Search .
2. Set the time range for search.
- Select a predefined time period for search.
- Select Custom Time Interval and specify the start time and end time for search.
3. Select the event status (whether the event is triggered as the alarm).
All
Both events and alarms.
Not Trigger Alarm
The events happened but were not triggered as alarms.
Trigger Alarm
The events happened and were triggered as alarms. If you select Trigger Alarm, you can set
conditions for filtering alarms by marking status, acknowledging status, alarm priority, or
alarm category.
4. Switch Area on and then click to select the area of the event or alarm source.
5. Switch Triggered By on and then select the triggering events and source from the current site or
remote sites.

Note
● The remote site is only available for the Central System with Remote Site Management

module (based on the License you purchased).

● If you select triggering events in the Access Control category, enter the entered/exited

person's name.
● If you select triggering events in the Third-Party Resource Integration category and have

entered the additional information about the alarm on the third-party system, enter the
additional information.
6. Switch Event/Alarm Name on to select the event/alarm name in the drop-down list.
7. Click Search.
The matched event or alarm logs will be listed on the right page.
8. Optional: Click Export and select the format as Excel or PDF to save all searched events and
alarms to the local PC.

Note
When exporting all events and alarms in Excel format, you can check Include Picture
Information to export the related pictures.

408
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 12 Role and User Management

The system allows you to add users and assign user's permissions for accessing and managing the
system. Before adding users to the system, you should create roles to define the user's access
rights to system resources and then assign the role to the user for granting the permissions to the
user. A user can have many different roles.

12.1 Add Role

Role is a group of platform permissions. You can add roles and assign permissions to roles, so that
users can be assigned with different roles to get different permissions.
Steps

Note
The platform has predefined two default roles: Administrator and Operator. You can click the role
name to view details. The two default roles cannot be edited or deleted.
Administrator
Role that has all permissions of the platform.
Operator
Role that has all permissions for accessing resources and operating the Applications on the Web
Client.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Account and
Security .
2. Click Roles on the left.
3. Click Add to enter Add Role page.

409
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 12-1 Add Role Page

4. Set the basic information of the role, including role name, effective period, role status,
permission schedule template, description, etc.
Copy From
Copy all settings from an existing role.
Effective Period
Set the time range within which the role takes effect. The role is inactive outside the effective
period.
Permission Schedule Template
Set the authorized time period when the role's permission is valid. Select All-day Template/
Weekday Template/Weekend Template as the permission schedule of the role, or click Add
New to customize a new permission schedule template.

Note
● When role expires or the role's permission is invalid after editing the permission schedule,

users assigned with the role will be forced to log out and not able to log in.
● The permission schedule's time zone is consistent with that of the platform.

● By default, the role will be linked with All-day Template after updating the platform.

● The permission schedule also goes for RSM client and OpenSdk client.

5. Configure permission settings for the role.

Area Display Rule

410
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Show or hide specific area(s) for the role. If an area is hidden, the user assigned with the role
cannot see and access the area and its resources.
Resource Access
Select the functions from the left panel and select resources from right panel to assign the
selected resources' permission to the role.

Note
If you do not check the resources, the resource permission cannot be applied to the role.
User Permission
Assign resource permissions, configuration permissions, and operation permissions to the
role.

Figure 12-2 User Permission

6. Complete adding the role.
- Click Add to add the role and return to the role management page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add another role.
7. Optional: Perform further operations on added roles.
Edit Role Click role name to view and edit role settings.

Note
The two default roles cannot be edited.

Delete Role Check a role and click Delete to delete the role.

411
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The two default roles cannot be deleted.

Inactivate Role Check a role and click Inactivate to set the role status to Inactive.
Activate Role Check an inactive role and click Activate to set the role status to Active.
Refresh Role Click Refresh All to get the latest status of the roles.
Filter Role Click to expand the filter conditions. Set the conditions and click Filter to
filter the roles according to the set conditions.

12.2 Add Normal User

You can add normal users and assign roles to them for accessing the system and assign role to the
normal user. Normal users refer to all users except the admin user.
Steps
1. On the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Account and
Security .
2. Click Users on the left.
3. Click Add.
4. Set basic information for the user.
User Name
Can contain letters (a-z, A-Z), digits (0-9), and "-" only.
Password
Create an initial password for the user. The user will be asked to change the password when
logging in for first time. See First Time Login for Normal User for details.

Note
We highly recommend you to create a strong password of your own choosing (using a
minimum of 8 characters, including at least three kinds of following categories: upper case
letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security
of your product. And we recommend you change your password regularly, especially in the
high security system, changing the password monthly or weekly can better protect your
product.
Expiry Date
The date when the user account becomes invalid.
Email
The system can notify user by sending an email to the email address. The user can also reset
the password via email.

412
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The email address of the admin user can be edited by the user assigned with the role of
administrator.
User Status
If you select Inactive, the user account will be inactivated until you activate it.
Restrict Concurrent Logins
To limit the maximum IP addresses logged in to the system using the user account, switch on
Restrict Concurrent Logins and set the maximum number of concurrent logins.
5. Configure permission settings for the user.
PTZ Control Permission
Set the permission level (1-100) for PTZ control. The larger the value is, the higher permission
level the user has. The user with higher permission level has the priority to control the PTZ of
a camera.
Assign Role
Select the roles that you want to assign to the user.

Note
If you want to add new roles, click Add New Role. See Add Role for details. Click a role on the
list and then View Role Details to view the Basic Information and Permission Settings of the
role.
6. Do one of the following to complete adding the user.
- Click Add to add the user and return to the user management page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add another user.
7. Optional: Perform further operations on the added normal users.
Edit User Click user name to view and edit user settings.
Reset Password Click user name and click Reset to set a new password for the user. Enter a
new password and click Reset.

Note
The admin user can reset the passwords of all the other users (except
domain user). Other users with Security permission (in Configuration and
Control Permission) can reset the passwords of the users without Security
permission. When the normal user's password is reset by admin user,
he/she should change the initial password and set a new password when
logging into HikCentral Professional via the Web Client.

Delete User Select a users and click Delete to delete the selected user.
Force Logout Select an online user and click Force Logout to log out the online user.

413
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Inactivate/ ● The admin user or user with administrator permission can inactivate or
Activate User activate a user.
● Select an active users and click Inactivate/Activate to inactivate/activate
the user.
Refresh User Click Refresh All to get the latest status of all users.
Filter User Click to set conditions and filter the users.

12.3 Import Domain Users

You can batch import the users (including the user name, real name, and email) in the AD domain
to the platform and assign roles to the domain users.
Before You Start
Make sure you have configured active directory settings. See Set Active Directory for details.
Steps
1. On the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Account and
Security .
2. Click Users on the left.
3. Click Import Domain Users.

414
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 12-3 Import Domain Users

4. Select an importing mode.
User
Import individual users. Select an organization unit and select one or more domain users in
this organization unit.
Group
Select an organization unit to import all the domain users in this organization unit.
Security Group
Import all the domain users in the security group(s). Select an organization unit and select
one or more security groups in this organization unit.
5. Select the user status as Active or Inactive.
6. Optional: To limit the maximum IP addresses logged in to the platform using the user account,
switch on Restrict Concurrent Logins and enter the maximum number of concurrent logins.
7. Set the permission level (1-100) for PTZ control in PTZ Control Permission.

415
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The larger the value is, the higher permission level the user has. The user with higher permission
level has the priority to control the PTZ unit.
Example
When two users control the PTZ unit at the same time, the user who has the higher PTZ control
permission level takes control of the PTZ.
8. Select the roles that you want to assign to the domain users.

Note
● If no role has been added, two default roles are selectable: administrator and operator.

Administrator
The role that has all permissions of the HikCentral Professional.
Operator
The role that has all permissions of the HikCentral Professional Control Client.
● If you want to add new roles, you can click Add New Role. See Add Role for details. Click a role

on the list and then View Role Details to view the Basic Information and Permission Settings
of the role.
9. Complete importing the domain users.
- Click Add to import the domain users and return to the user management page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to import other domain users.
10. Optional: After importing the domain user information to the platform, if the user information
in domain is changed, click Synchronize Domain Users to get the latest information of the users
imported to the platform. If the users are imported by group, it will synchronize the latest user
information from the domain group (including added users, deleted users, edited users, etc., in
the group).
Result
After successfully adding the domain users, the users can log in to the HikCentral Professional via
the Web Client, Control Client, and Mobile Client with their domain accounts and passwords.

12.4 Change Password of Current User

You can change the password of your currently logged-in user account via Web Client.
Steps
1. Move the cursor to the user name at the top-right corner of the Web Client.
2. In the drop-down list, click Change Password to open the Change Password panel.

416
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 12-4 Change Password Panel

3. Enter the old password and new password, and confirm the new password.

Caution
The password strength of the device can be checked by the system. We highly recommend you
change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least
three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special
characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your
password regularly, especially in the high security system, resetting the password monthly or
weekly can better protect your product.

417
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.
4. Click OK to save the change.

12.5 Configure Permission Schedule

Permission schedule defines the time when a role's permissions are valid. During unauthorized
time periods, the user assigned with the role will be forced to log out and cannot log in. The
platform provides 3 default permission schedule templates: All-day Template, Weekday Template,
and Weekend Template. You can add new templates according to actual needs.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Account and Security .
2. Click Permission Schedule Template on the left.
3. Click to create a blank template.
4. Set basic information.
Name
Create a name for the template.
Copy From
Select the template from the drop-down list to copy the settings from another existing
template.
5. In the Weekly Schedule area, set the weekly schedule as needed.
1) Click Authorize, and select or draw in the box to define the authorized time periods.
2) Optional: Click Erase, and select or draw on the authorized time periods to clear the selection.

Note
You can set up to 6 separate time periods for each day.
6. Optional: Set a holiday schedule if you want different schedules for specific days.
1) Click Add Holiday.
2) Select existing holiday templates, or click Add New to create a new holiday template (see Set
Holiday for details).
3) Click Add.
4) Set the schedule for holidays.

Note
The holiday schedule has a higher priority than the weekly schedule.
7. Click Add to add the permission schedule template.
8. Optional: Perform further operations for the added templates.
View and Edit Click the template to view and edit its configuration.
Template Details

418
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Default templates cannot be edited.

Delete Template Click a template, and click to delete it.

Note
Default templates cannot be deleted.

What to do next
Set permission schedules for roles to define in which period the permissions for the roles are valid.
For details, refer to Add Role .

419
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 13 System Security Settings

System security is crucial for your system and property. You can lock IP address to prevent
malicious attacks, enable auto lock the Control Client, and set other security settings to increase
the system security.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Account and
Security .
2. Click Security Settings on the left.

Figure 13-1 Security Settings Page

3. Switch on Lock IP Address to limit the number of failed login attempts.
1) Select the allowable login attempts for accessing HikCentral Professional.

Note
Failed login attempts include failed password attempt and failed verification code attempt.

420
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2) Set the locking duration for this IP address. During the locking duration, the login attempt via
this IP address is not allowed.
The number of login attempts is limited.
4. Select the Minimum Password Strength to define the minimum complexity requirements that
the password should meet.
5. Set the maximum password age.
1) Switch on Enable Maximum Password Age to force user to change the password when the
password expires.
2) Set the maximum number of days that the password is valid.

Note
After the maximum number of days, you should change the password. You can select the
predefined time length or customize the time length.
6. Set minutes after which the Web login will expire if there is no actions during the set minutes.
7. Configure the settings to automatically lock the Control Client after a time period of inactivity on
the Control Client.
1) Switch on Auto Lock Control Client.
2) Select time period for user inactivity.

Note
You can select the predefined time period or customize the time period.
8. Configure double authentications by selecting the authenticator and the users who need
authentication.

Note
Double authentications means the users who need authentication should let the authenticator
enter the user name and password so that they can use the functions of manual recording,
video playback, and video exporting. Resources on the site support double authentication. Only
one resource can be configured for a user who needs authentication.
1) Switch on Double Authentications.
2) Click Add to enter the Add Authenticator panel.
3) Select a user from the drop-down list, configure the authenticatable resource(s) and
permission(s), and click Add to add the authenticator.
4) Select the user(s) who need authentication.
9. Click Save to save the above settings.

421
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 14 System Configuration

The System page allows you to set basic parameters for the system, such as defining a customized
name for your site, setting the WAN IP address for allowing to access your system via WAN (Wide
Area Network), and configuring NTP (Network Time Protocol) settings to synchronizing the time
between the system and the NTP server.
● For the system with Remote Site Management module, you can enable it to receive the
registration from Remote Site.
● For the system without Remote Site Management module, you can set to register it to the
Central System as a Remote Site.

14.1 Set User Preference

For different nations, regions, cultures and enterprise backgrounds, the user preference might be
different. You can set the user preference according to the actual scene, including the first day of a
week and the temperature unit.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System Configuration
→ Normal → User Preference to enter the User Preference page.

422
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 14-1 User Preference

Set the following parameters:
Site Name
Set the name of current site.
First Day of Week
Set the first day of a week as Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, etc., according to the custom of the
actual scene.

Note
This parameter is used in the intelligent analysis report generation, live view and playback,
attendance settings, etc.
Temperature Unit
Set the temperature unit according to the custom of the actual scene.

Note
This parameter is used in the temperature analysis report generation, etc.

423
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Display Mask Related Functions

Set whether to display mask related functions. Check the box to display the functions about
masks on Control Client, Web Client and Mobile Client. Otherwise these functions will be
hidden.

Note
This parameter is mainly used in temperature screening module.
Calendar Type
Set the calendar type as Gregorian Calendar, Thai Calendar and Nepali Calendar according to
the custom of the actual scene.

14.2 Set Printer

You can set printer(s) for the system, which can be used to print the stranded person list in some
urgent evacuation scenario, such as fire hazard.

Note
Make sure the printer(s) are installed in the same network with the SYS server.

In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System Configuration
→ Normal → Printer Settings .
Click Add to select the printer(s) detected by the HikCentral Professional.

Note
After setting printer(s) for the system, you can link printer when configuring alarm/event whose
source type is alarm input. For details, refer to Add Normal Event and Alarm .

You can click in the Operation column to delete the printer.

You can also click Delete All to delete all printers.

14.3 Set NTP

You can set the NTP server for synchronizing the time between the resources (devices managed in
the platform, recording servers, sites, SYS, etc.) and the NTP server.
Steps

Note
For devices added via Open Network Video Interface protocol, time synchronization will fail. Please
configure the time on the device locally and make sure the device's NTP settings are the same as
the platform's.

424
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Network → NTP .
2. Switch on Time Synchronization to enable the NTP function.
3. Set the NTP server address and NTP port.

Note
If the local NTP service has been configured, you can click Detect Local NTP to fill in the NTP
server address and NTP port automatically.
4. Enter the interval for the automatic time synchronization.
5. Optional: Click Test to test the communication between the resources and the NTP server.
6. Optional: Switch on Configure WAN Mapping and enter the IP address and port for WAN
mapping.

Note
If the NTP service is locally deployed, you can configure WAN mapping to synchronize the time
for devices on the WAN. Otherwise, enabling mapping is not required.
7. Click Save.

14.4 Set Active Directory

If you have the AD (Active Directory) domain controller which contains the information (e.g., user
data, computer information), you can configure the settings to get the related information. In this
way, you can add the users that belong to an organization unit (OU) (e.g., a department of your
company) to HikCentral Professional conveniently.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Network → Active Directory to enter the Active Directory page.
2. Configure the basic information parameters to connect to the AD domain controller.
Domain Name
The domain name of the AD domain controller.

Note
● HikCentral Professional only supports the NetBIOS format, e.g., TEST\user, instead of the
DNS Domain name format.
● To get the NetBIOS domain name, open the CMD window and enter nbtstat – n.
The NetBIOS domain name is the one in GROUP type.

425
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 14-2 How to Get NetBIOS Domain Name

Host Name
The DNS server's IP address. You can get it in Network Connection Details.

Figure 14-3 How to Get Host Name

Port No.
The port No. of the AD domain controller. By default, it is 389.
Enable SSL (Optional)
Enable SSL if it is required by the AD domain controller.
User Name
The user name of the AD domain controller. The user should be the domain administrator.
Password

426
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The password of the AD domain controller.

Base DN (Distinguished Name)
Enter the filter condition in the text field if you are familiar with the format. Or you can click
Fetch DN to get the filter condition entered automatically.

Note
● Only users found within an OU in the domain can be imported. Click Fetch DN to have the

filter condition entered automatically.

● If you enter the Base DN manually, you need to define the root node as desired. If you click

Fetch DN, then the entire structure stored in the AD domain controller will be obtained.
3. Set the time to automatically synchronize the users in the AD domain to the platform.
4. Optional: Link the person information you are concerned about in the domain to the person
information in the system.
1) Switch on Linked Person Information.
The default and custom additional information items ( see Customize Additional
Information ) are displayed in the Person Information area by default. You can set the
relationship for those or add new person information items as needed.
2) Optional: Click Add New to add a person information item you are concerned about.

Note
● You do not need to add the basic person information items (including ID, First Name, Last

Name, Phone, and Remark) manually, which have the default relationship with the
information in the domain.
● The new person information item is also displayed on the Custom Additional Information

page, where you can edit or delete the items. Refer to Customize Additional Information
for details.
● The person information item is case-sensitive.

3) Optional: Click to show the person information items stored in the domain.
4) Check the checkbox in the domain to link it to the added person information item when
importing the domain's persons.
5) Optional: Hover over the linked person information in the domain and click to remove the
relationship. You can also change the relationship between each other by clicking and
dragging one item to another.
5. Click Save.
After the configuration, the organization unit and domain user information will be displayed
when you click Import Domain User on the User Management page.
If the Linked Person Information function is enabled, the corresponding person information in
the system will match the linked person information in the domain and cannot be edited.

427
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

14.5 Device Access Protocol

Before adding devices supporting ISUP 2.6/4.0 to the system, you need to set the related
configuration to allow these devices to access the system.
In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Network → Device Access Protocol to enter the Device Access Protocol page.
Check Access via Open Network Video Interface Protocol when the device is accessed via Open
Network Video Interface protocol.
Switch on Allow ISUP Registration.
Check Allow ISUP of Earlier Version.

Note
The device may be attacked when accessing the system via ISUP of earlier versions.
Click Save.

14.6 Set Hik-ProConnect Site Access

After setting Hik-ProConnect Site access, you can add devices on the site of to the platform, and
you can also add devices to the site of Hik-ProConnect via the platform.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → Basic Management → System → Network .
2. Select Hik-ProConnect Access on the left.
3. Switch on Access onHik-ProConnect to set required parameters.
4. Select the access mode.
- Select Key Access, and enter the Hik-ProConnect key.
- Select AccessKey/SecretKey Access, and enter the access key and secret key of Hik-
ProConnect.
5. Enter the domain name where the account locates.
6. Optional: Switch on Receive Event From Hik-Partner Pro as needed.
7. Optional: Switch on Synchronize Device with DDNS Configured as needed.
8. Click Save.

14.7 Set WAN Access

In some complicated network environments, you need to set a static IP address or a domain name
and ports for HikCentral Professional to enable it to access the SYS via WAN (Wide Area Network).
For example, if the SYS is in a local area network, and you need to visit the platform via the Web

428
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Client or Control Client running in WAN, you should enable WAN access and set a static IP address
or a domain name and ports for HikCentral Professional.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Network → WAN Access to enter the WAN Access page.
2. Switch on Access WAN to enable the WAN access function.
3. Enter a static IP address or a domain name of the server for WAN access.
4. Set the following ports as needed.
Client Communication Port
● HTTP: Used for the Web Client and Control Client to access the platform via HTTP. By

default, it is 80.
● HTTPS: Used for the Web Client and Control Client to access the platform via HTTPS. By

default, it is 443.
Real Time Streaming Port
Used for getting the stream for live view via the Control Client. By default, it is 554.
Video File Streaming Port
Used for getting the stream for playback via the Control Client. By default, it is 10000.
Web Client Streaming Port
Used for getting the stream via the Web Client (for the web browser of Google Chrome,
Firefox, or Safari). By default, it is 559.
Local Picture Storage Port on Server(TCP)
Used for storing local pictures on the server. By default, it is 6123.
Local File Picture Storage Port on Server(TCP)
Used for storing local files on the server. By default, it is 6203.
Broadcast Signaling Port
Used for signaling interaction when getting the stream via the Web Client. By default, it is
7662.
IP Speaker Registration Port
Used for the IP speakers registering to the platform. By default, it is 8877.
IP Speaker Communication Port
Used for the interaction between IP speakers and the platform. By default, it is 10015.
Guidance Terminal Event Port
Used for receiving the events reported by the guidance terminal. By default, it is 8686.
Schedule Releasing Port(TCP)
Used for releasing schedules. By default, it is 6471.

429
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Optional: If you adopt generic events to integrate HikCentral Professional with external sources,
you need to set the TCP port, UDP port, HTTP port, and HTTPS port for receiving the TCP, UDP,
HTTP, and/or HTTPS data packages.

Note
For setting the generic event, refer to Add Generic Event .
6. Optional: For the platform with a Remote Site Management module, you can set the port to
receive the registration from the Remote Site.

Note
This configuration item is only available for the Central System with a Remote Site Management
module based on the License you purchased.
7. Optional: If you need to manage devices accessed via ISUP, you can set the ports for these ISUP
devices, such as the registration port, alarm receiving port, and so on.
Port for Downloading Files from ISUP Devices
Used for downloading files from ISUP devices. By default, it is 8555.
ISUP Registration Port
Used for the ISUP devices registering to the platform. By default, it is 7660.
ISUP Alarm Receiving Port (TCP)
Used for receiving alarms from ISUP devices via TCP. By default, it is 7332.
ISUP Alarm Receiving Port (UCP)
Used for receiving alarms from ISUP devices via UCP. By default, it is 7334.
ISUP Streaming Port (via VAG)
Used for getting the stream from ISUP devices via the VAG server. By default, it is 7661.
ISUP Streaming Port (via Plugin)
Used for getting the stream from ISUP devices via the Plugin. By default, it is 16000.
ISUP Port for Two-Way Audio
Used for two-way audio between the platform and ISUP devices. By default, it is 16001.

Note
If the ISUP ports are disabled on the SYS, the ISUP related ports will not be displayed on the
WAN Access page.
8. Click Save.

14.8 Set IP Address for Receiving Device Information

You can select the NIC of the current SYS so that the platform can receive the alarm information of
the device connected via ISUP account, and to perform live view and playback for the devices
connected via ISUP account.

430
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

Make sure the server's ports ranging from 8087 to 8097 are available.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Network → Address for Receiving Device Info .
2. Select Get from NIC or Enter Manually.
Get from NIC
Usually, you can select Get from NIC to get IP address from the NIC of SYS.
Select the currently used NIC name of SYS in the drop-down list. The NIC information
including description, MAC address, and IP address will display.
Enter Manually
If you have configured hot spare for the SYS. Manually enter the IP address for receiving
device information.
3. Click Save.

14.9 Set Data Retention Period

The data retention period specifies how long you can keep the events, logs, and some records in
the SYS server, such as recording tags and vehicle entering/exiting records.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Storage → Records Storage .
2. Set the data retention period from the drop-down list for the required data types.

431
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 14-4 Set Data Retention Period

3. Click Save.

14.10 Set Holiday

You can add the holiday to define the special days that can adopt a different shift schedule or
access schedule. You can set a regular holiday and an irregular holiday according to the actual
scene.

432
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Add Regular Holiday

The regular holiday is suitable for the holiday that has a fixed date. For example, Christmas is on
December 25th of each year.
In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Normal → Holiday Settings . Click Add to open the adding holiday dialog. Enter
the holiday name and select Regular Holiday as the holiday type.
Set the parameters according to the following instructions:
Start Date
The start date of the holiday.
Number of Days
The lasting days of the holiday.
Repeat Annually
If checked, the system will generate the date of the holiday according to the date of the VSM
server.

Add Irregular Holiday

The irregular holiday is suitable for the holiday that is calculated by the weekdays, and the
specified date might be different in a different year. For example, Mother's Day is on the second
Sunday of each May.
In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Normal → Holiday Settings . Click Add to open the adding holiday dialog. Enter
the holiday name and select Irregular Holiday as the holiday type.
Set the parameters according to the following instructions:
Start Date
The start date of the holiday.
For example, select May, Second, and Sunday for Mother's Day.
Number of Days
The lasting days of the holiday.
Repeat Annually
If checked, the system will generate the date of the holiday according to the date of the SYS
server.

Note
If you check Repeat Annually, the specified date of this holiday will be generated automatically
according to the current year of the SYS server.
For example, Mother's Day in 2019 and 2020 is on May 12th, 2019, and on May 10th, 2020. The
system will automatically set these two days as holidays for Mother's Day if you have checked
Repeat Annually.

433
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

14.11 Set Card Template

You can set the styles for card templates. After settings, the card will be applied in the format of
the template.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Normal → Card Template .
2. Click Add.
3. Create a name for the template.
4. Optional: Select the shape of the template.
5. Set the front style of the template.
Insert Picture Click Insert Picture to select a picture for the template.
Insert Background Click Insert Background Picture to select a background picture for the
Picture template.
Insert Text Click Insert Text to set the text for the template. You can set the font and
the font size for the text after clicking the text field.
Content Check the attribute(s) for the content of the template. You can also click
Customize to customize the attributes for the template.

Note
● You can drag any edge or corner to adjust the size of the picture and text box.

● You can select one or multiple text boxes on the template and click , , or to adjust the
alignment of the text in the box.
● You can select multiple elements on the template and click , , or to adjust these
elements.
● You can right-click on the element (except the background picture) and click Stick on Top,

Stick at Bottom, Move Up, or Move Down to adjust the layer of the element displayed on the
template.
6. Optional: Set the back style of the template.

Note
You can set the back style according to step 5.
7. Click Add to add the template and go back to the card template list page.
The email template will be displayed on the card template list.
8. Optional: Perform the following operation(s).
View Template Click to view the template.
Edit Template Click in the Operation column to edit template details.
Delete Template Click in the Operation column to delete the template.

434
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Delete All Templates Click Delete All to delete all the added templates.

Note
On the card template list page, there are two default templates. You can view default templates
but cannot edit or delete them.

14.12 Set Email Template

Before sending report or sending event message to the designate email account(s) as email
linkage, you should set the email template properly. The email templates include template for
sending report and template for sending event message as linkage action when the event is
triggered. The email template specifies the recipient, email subject, and content.

14.12.1 Configure Email Account

You should configure the parameters of the sender's email account before the system can send the
message to the designated email account(s) as the email linkage.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Email → Email Settings .

435
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 14-5 Email Settings

2. Configure the parameters according to actual needs.
Server Authentication (Optional)
If your mail server requires authentication, check this checkbox to use authentication to log
in to this server.
Cryptographic Protocol
Select the cryptographic protocol of the email to protect the email content if required by the
SMTP server.
Sender Email Address
Enter the email address of the sender to send the message.
Sender Name
Enter the sender name to send the message.
SMTP Server Address
The SMTP server's IP address or host name (e.g., smtp.263xmail.com).
SMTP Server Port

436
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The default TCP/IP port used for SMTP is 25.

User Name (Optional)
User name for authentication to log in to the server. This parameter is valid and optional
when server authentication is enabled.
Password (Optional)
Password for authentication to log in to the server. This parameter is valid and optional when
server authentication is enabled.
3. Click Email Test to test whether the email settings work or not.
The corresponding attention message box will pop up.
4. Click Save.

14.12.2 Add Email Template for Sending Report Regularly

You can set email templates (including specifying the recipient, email subject, and content) for
sending the report regularly, so that the platform can send the report as an email attachment to
the designated recipient regularly according to the predefined email template.
Before You Start
Before adding the email template, you should set the sender's email account first. See Configure
Email Account for details.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Email → Report Email Template .
2. Click Add to enter the Add Email Template page.
3. Enter the required parameters.
Name
Create a name for the template.
Recipients
● Click Add User and select the person's email as the recipient, which is configured when
adding the person.
● Click Add Email and enter the recipient email address to send the email to.

Note
You can enter multiple recipients and separate them by ";".
Subject
Enter the email subject as desired. You can also click buttons below to add the related
information to the subject.
Email Content

437
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Define the report content to be sent. You can also click buttons above the Email Content
parameter to add the related information to the content.

Note
If you add the time period to the email subject or email content, and the email application
(such as Outlook) and the platform are in different time zones, the displayed time period may
have some deviations.
4. Finish adding the email template.
- Click Add to add the template and go back to the email template list page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the template and continue to add other templates.
The email template will be displayed in the email template list.
5. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the email template:
Edit Template Click in the Operation column to edit template details.
Delete Template Click in the Operation column to delete the template.
Delete All Templates Click Delete All to delete all the added templates.

14.12.3 Add Email Template for Event and Alarm Linkage

You can set email templates (including specifying the recipient, email subject, and content) for
event and alarm linkage. When the event or alarm is triggered, the platform can send email as the
linkage action to the designate recipient regularly according to the predefined email template.
Before You Start
Before adding the email template, you should set the sender's email account first. See Configure
Email Account for details.
Steps
1. In the top of top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Email → Event and Alarm Email Template .
2. Click Add to enter the Add Email Template page.
3. Enter the required parameters.
Name
Create a name for the template.
Recipients
Click Add User and select the person's email as the recipient, which is configured when
adding the person.
Click Add Email and enter the recipient(s) email address to send the email to.

Note
You can enter multiple recipients and separate them by ";".

438
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Subject
Enter the email subject as desired. You can also click the button in the lower part of the
window to add the related information to the subject.
Email Content
Define the event or alarm information to be sent. You can also click buttons below the Email
Content parameter to add the related information to the content.

Note
If you add the event time to the email subject or content, and the email application (such as
Outlook) and the platform are in different time zones, the displayed event time may have
some deviations.
4. Optional: Check Attach Captured Picture to send email with image attachment.
5. Select a content language to define the language of the sent content.
6. Finish adding the email template.
- Click Add to add the template and go back to the email template list page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the template and continue to add other templates.
The email template will be displayed on the email template list.
7. Perform the following operation(s) after adding the email template:
Edit Template Click in the Operation column to edit template details.
Delete Template Click in the Operation column to delete the template.
Delete All Templates Click Delete All to delete all the added templates.

14.13 Set Transfer Protocol

You can set the SYS server's transfer protocol to define the access mode for the SYS (via Web
Client, Control Client, or Mobile Client) as HTTP or HTTPS. The HTTPS protocol provides higher data
security.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Security → Transfer Protocol .
2. In the Clients and SYS Transfer field, select HTTP or HTTPS as the transfer protocol between the
clients (Web Client, Control Client, and Mobile Client) and the SYS servers.

Note
For HTTPS, only the TLS 1.2 and later versions are supported. The browser must support and has
enabled the TLS 1.2 or later version. You are recommended to use the browser supporting TLS
1.3.
3. If you select HTTPS, you are required to set the certificate. You can use the system provided
certificate, or select New Certificate and click to select a new certificate file.

439
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● The new certificate should be in PEM format.

● The public key and private key should be in the same certificate file.

4. Optional: You can add the upper-level certificate as needed.

1) Click Add.
2) Click to select the file.
3) Click Confirm.
4) Optional: Select the added certificate(s) and click Delete to delete.
5) Optional: In the Operation column, click to download the certificate.
5. Click Save.
● The SYS server will reboot automatically after changing the clients and SYS server transmission

settings.
● All the users logged in will be forced to log out during reboot. The reboot takes about one

minute and after that, the users can log in again.

14.14 Export Service Component Certificate

For data security, before adding the Streaming Server or Cloud Storage Server to the system, you
should generate the service component certificate stored in the SYS server and input the certificate
information to the Streaming Server you want to add, or export the service component certificate
stored in the SYS and import the certificate to the Cloud Storage Server, so that the certificates of
the Streaming Server, Cloud Storage Server and SYS server are the same.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Security → Service Component Certificate .
2. Click Generate Again beside Certificate between Services in System to generate the security
certificate for Streaming Server verification.

Note
On the Service Manager of the Streaming Server you want to add, input the certificate
information you generate. For the following operations, see Add Streaming Server for details.
3. Click Export beside Certificate between System and Recording Server to export the service
component certificate in XML format and save it in the local PC.

Note
On the Cloud Storage Server you want to add, import the service component certificate you
export. For more details, see Manage Cloud Storage Server .

440
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

14.15 Set Database Password

You can set the database password of the system on the Web Client running on the SYS server.

Note
Setting database password is only available when you access the Web Client on the SYS server
locally.

In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System Configuration
→ Security → Database Password .
Enter the password and then click Verify to generate the verification code and enter the
verification code.

14.16 Configure System Hot Spare

A hot spare is used as a failover mechanism to provide reliability for your system. If you build the
hot spare system when installing the SYS service, you can enable the hot spare function and
configure the hot spare property of the current SYS server as host server or spare server. When the
host server fails, the spare server switches into operation, thus ensuring the stability of the system.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Advanced → Hot Spare .
2. Set the Hot Spare Configuration switch to ON to enable the hot spare function.
The current SYS server's server name and available IP address will be displayed.
3. Set the server as host server or spare server in Hot Spare Property.
4. Click Save.

14.17 Set Third-Party Integration

HikCentral Professional supports integrating third-party resources (such as camera, door, etc.) via
Optimus. Also, the system provides open platform to integrate the third-party system. By the Open
APIs (application programming interface) provided on the open platform, the third-party system
can obtain some functions (such live view, playback, alarm, etc.) of HikCentral Professional, to
develop more customized features.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System Configuration
→ Third-Party Integration .

441
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● Setting open platform is only available when you access the Web Client on the SYS server locally.
● Only admin/administrator users have the permission to perform this function.

Integrate via Optimus

Select Integrate via Optimus on the left panel, and switch on the Integrate via Optimus.
Configure related parameters in the Optimus software. For details, refer to the User Manual of
Optimus.
The default icons of resources integrated from the third-party will be displayed. Hover the cursor
over the default icon and click Click to change the resource icons according to your need.
Open Platform

Note
Setting open platform is only available when you access the Web Client on the SYS server locally.

Select Open API on the left panel, switch on Open API, and set the IP address of the open
platform, management port of the open platform, and the partner user.

Note
● The open platform should be deployed in the same network with the SYS server.
● The third-party system integrates the HikCentral Professional by the partner user(s) you select,
which defines the permission(s) of resources and operations in the HikCentral Professional.

Click Test to test the service availability of the open platform.

Click Save to save the settings.

14.18 Data Interchange

The access records in HikCentral Professional can be used by third-party systems for pay calculation
or other applications. You can synchronize the access records to a third-party database by entering
the information of the database table in the required space. You can also dump the access records
in CSV or TXT format, and then let the third-party database read the access records to get them.

14.18.1 Synchronize Card Swiping Records to Third-Party Database

You can enable synchronization function to apply the card swiping records of specified resources
from HikCentral Professional to the third-party database automatically.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Third-Party Integration → Data Interchange .

442
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Switch on Data Interchange to enable data interchange function.

3. Click Add and select the resource(s) for card swiping records synchronization.

Note
You can click in the Operation column to delete the resource or click Delete All to delete all
added resources.
4. Select the encoding format of data interchange.
5. Optional: Check Do Not Push Failed Records.
The failed records will not be pushed to the third-party system.
6. Select Database Synchronization.
7. Optional: Switch on Auto Push Failed Record to select the push mode.
Push at Fixed Time
The failed record will be pushed at the time you set.
Push at Fixed Interval
The failed record will be pushed according to the interval you set.
8. Optional: Select Database Type from the drop-down list to set the database type.
9. Set the required parameters of the third-party database, including server IP address or domain
name, server port, database name, user name, and password.
10. Click Test Connection to test whether database can be connected.
11. Set table parameters of database table and table fields according to the actual configurations.
1) Enter the table name of the third-party database.
2) Enter the mode of the third-party database.
3) Set the mapped table fields between the HikCentral Professional and the third-party
database.
4) Optional: Click Customize Items to Display to select the items to be displayed in the table.
12. Click Save.
The data will be written to the third-party database.

14.18.2 Dump Access Records to Third-Party Database

The access records of specified resources can be dumped as a CSV file or TXT file and the third-
party system will read the dumped file (instead of accessing the database and mapping the table
fields) for further applications, such as attendance calculation and pay calculation. You can also
configure dump rules for dumping access records. After that, the access records will be dumped to
the third-party database according to the added rules.
Steps
1. In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Third-Party Integration → Data Interchange .
2. Switch on Data Interchange to enable the data interchange function.
3. Click Add and select the resource(s) for card swiping records synchronization.

443
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can click in the Operation column to delete the resource or click Delete All to delete all
added resources.
4. Select the encoding format of data interchange.
5. Optional: Check Do Not Push Failed Records.
The failed records will not be pushed to the third-party system.
6. Select Access Record Dump.
7. In the Dump Rule area, click Add and set the required parameters.
Overwrite File
If it not checked, you re recommended to regularly view the disk capacity in case the new
files cannot be generated if the disk if full.
File Name
The name of the CSV file or TXT file which the access records are dumped as.
Storage Location
Local Storage
The access records can be dumped as a file saved in the local disk of the SYS server. Then
you need to copy this file from the server to your PC with the third-party system installed
to read the dumped file.

Note
● You need to log in to the Web Client running on the SYS server to configure related
settings of local storage.
● You need to set Saving Path, which is the path where the CSV file or TXT file is saved.

SFTP Storage
You can access the SFTP server as the storage location for saving the dumped file by
setting the SFTP address, port, user name, and password. And you can enter the path to
save the dumped file in the folder on the SFTP server or leave it empty to save the file in
the root directory.

Note
The third-party system should be installed in the SFTP server to read the dumped file.
Content
The display items and data in the dumped file.
Min. Length of Person ID
For some scenarios, the person IDs need to be dumped as a certain fixed length.
You can switch it on and set the value of Length. If the length of the person ID is shorter than
the value, zero(s) will be added before the ID to make it equal to the value. If the length is
longer than the value, the person IDs will be dumped according to the actual length.

444
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Designated Length of Card No.

For some scenarios, the card numbers need to be dumped as a certain fixed length.
You can switch it on and set the value of Length. If the length of the card number is shorter
than the value, zero(s) will be added before the card number to make it equal to the value. If
the length is longer than the value, the card number will be dumped according to the actual
length.
Generate Table Header
When the card swiping records are dumped from the system to the local PC, the column
names will be included in the dumped file and used as the table header.
File Format
Two formats are supported, including CSV and TXT.
Dump Frequency
The frequency for dumping card swiping records.
Dump Time
The time when dumping card swiping records is started.
8. Click Add.
The added rules will be listed in the Dump Rule area.

Note
You can click in the Operation column to delete the rule or click Delete All to delete all added
rules.
9. Click Save.

14.19 Diagnose Remote Fault

When faults occur in HikCentral Professional, you can get the system information using the
authentication code generated by HikCentral Professional to help diagnose the system faults.
In the top-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Advanced → Diagnosis & Maintenance to enter the Diagnosis & Maintenance
page.
Switch on Remote Fault Diagnosis to generate an authentication code for remote diagnosis. It will
be canceled automatically after 60 minutes.

Note
The authentication code will be refreshed every time you switch on Remote Fault Diagnosis.

Launch Postman, create a new request, set the HTTP method to POST, and enter the request URL
(format: http://<host>[:port]/ISAPI/Bumblebee/Platform/V1/TranckTaskInfo?&MT=GET).

445
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Then in the Body area, enter the request message in JSON format (set the trackModuleNmae to
the module name and set the AccessKey to the authentication code generated on HikCentral
Professional), and click Send.
The response message is returned in the Body area of Response and it shows the system running
information. You can perform fault diagnosis remotely according to the information.

Figure 14-6 Get System Running Information Using Postman

14.20 Reset Device Network Information

When system network domain changes (such as server migration), you must reset the network
information of the added device to adapt to the new network environment. Otherwise the device
live view, playback and other functions will be affected.
Perform this task when you need to reset the network information of the added device.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Advanced → Reset Network Information .
2. Click Reset to one-touch reset the device network information.

14.21 Set Company Information

You can configure and show the company information on the Web Client for customization
requirements.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → System Configuration
→ Company Information to enter the Company Information Settings page.

446
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 14-7 Company Information Settings

Switch on Company Information Settings to enable displaying company information on the Web
Client. And then set the information (cover page, company name, etc.) as needed and click Save.
An icon appears at right of the Web Client and keeps displaying. You can click the icon to view
the company information.

Figure 14-8 Company Information Displayed on Web Client

447
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 15 Map Management

Two types of map are available: GIS map and E-map. On the GIS map, you can set and view the
current site, Remote Site, and element's geographic location. On the e-map, which is a static map,
you can set and view the geographic locations of the installed cameras, alarm inputs, and alarm
outputs, etc.
With GIS map, you can see the geographic locations of your security system. This type of map uses
a geographic information system to accurately show all the hot spots' (resources (e.g., camera,
alarm input) placed on the map are called hot spots) geographic locations in the real world. GIS
map lets you view and access cameras at multiple locations around the world in a geographically
correct way. If the resources locate in multiple locations (e.g., different cities, different countries),
GIS map can give you a single view to show them all and help you quickly go to each location to
view video from the cameras. With the hot region, you can link to the e-map to view the detailed
monitoring scenario, for example, the monitoring scenario of a building.
E-map is a static image (it does not have to be geographical maps, although they often are.
Depending on your organization's needs, photos and other kinds of image files can also be used as
e-maps) which gives you a visual overview of the locations and distributions of the hot spots
(resources (e.g., camera, alarm input) placed on the map are called hot spots). You can see the
physical locations of the cameras, alarm inputs, and alarm outputs, etc., and in what direction the
cameras are pointing. With the function of hot region, e-maps can be organized into hierarchies to
navigate from large perspectives to detailed perspectives, e.g., from floor level to room level.
After configuring the e-map via Web Client, you can view the live video and playback of the
elements via both Web Client and Control Client, and get a notification message from the map via
Control Client when an alarm is triggered.

15.1 Set GIS Map and Icons

This page allows you to enable GIS (Geographic Information System ) map function to display the
online or/and offline GIS map on the Web Client and Control Client, so that the geographic location
of the resources (such as current site, Remote Sites, cameras) can be shown on the map.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Settings to enter
the map settings page.
2. On the top right, click GIS Map Settings and set the GIS Map.
1) Switch the GIS Map on to enable the GIS map function.
2) According to the actual requirements, select Online or Offline to set the online GIS map or
offline GIS map.
● For online GIS map, enter the GIS map API URL.

448
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
○ The Google map API is supported currently.

○ Google Maps are provided by Google Inc. (Hereinafter referred to as "Google"). We only

provides you the URLs to use Google Maps. You shall apply by yourself for the use of
Google Maps from Google. You shall comply with Google terms and provide certain
information to Google if required.
○ You shall set the correct GIS map API URL, otherwise the configuration can not be saved.

● For offline GIS map, click Download Offline Map Configuration Guide to refer to the guide

and the interface instruction to add and configure the offline map.
3) Click Save.
3. Click Icon Settings to set the customized icons.
1) Click Hot Region or the following device types to enter the icon settings page.
2) Set the icon size, including width (px) and height (px).
3) Click Add to select a picture file from the local path.

Note
The icon picture format can only be PNG, JPG, or JPEG.
4) Optional: Click to constrain the aspect ratio.
5) Click Save.
Result
You can view the GIS map on Map Monitoring page and perform the following operations in the
map area.

Filter Click and select the object type you want to

show on the map.
Full Screen Click to show the map in full-screen mode.
Zoom In/Out Scroll the mouse wheel or click / to zoom
in or zoom out the map.
Adjust Map Area Click-and-drag the map to adjust the map area
for view.
View Resource Latitude and Longitude Hover over a resource, and you can view its
latitude and longitude on the GIS map.

15.2 Add E-Map for Area

You can add and link e-maps to the area so that the elements assigned to the area can be added to
e-map.

449
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

Make sure you have disabled the GIS Map function. See Set GIS Map and Icons for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Settings to enter
the map settings page.
2. Select an area on the left.
3. Open the Add Map panel.
- If you have configured GIS map, click + on the lower right of the map.
- If you did not configure GIS map, click Add Map at the center of the page.
4. Select an adding mode.
5. Select map.
- If you select Add E-Map as the adding mode, select a map picture saved on the PC.
- If you select Link to Other Map, select an area from the following list.
6. Click Add.
7. Optional: Set a map scale.

Note
The scale of a map is the ratio of a distance on the map to the corresponding distance on the
ground. The client can calculate two locations' distance on the map according to the distance on
the ground. An accurate map scale is essential for defining a radar's detection area. Perform this
step if you plan to add a radar to the map.
1) Click Calibrate on the top right of the map.
2) Click two locations on the map to form a line.
3) Enter the real distance between the two points in the Actual Length field.
4) Click OK to finish setting the map scale.
8. Optional: Hover the mouse over the added e-map area to perform the following operations.
Edit Picture Click and change a picture.
Edit Map Name Click and set a custom name for the map.
Unlink Map Click to remove the map or cancel the linkage between the map and area.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding map in the map area.
Filter Click and select the object type you want to show on the map.
Full Screen Click to show the map in full-screen mode.
Zoom In/Out Scroll the mouse wheel or click / to zoom in or zoom out the map.
Adjust Map Drag the map or the red window in the lower part to adjust the map area
Area for view.

450
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

15.3 Add Hot Spot on Map

You can add elements (e.g., cameras, access points, alarm inputs, etc. ) as the hot spot and place
the hot spot on the e-map or GIS map. Then you can view the elements on the map and perform
further operations via Control Client. For example, you can get the live view, actual access points,
and alarm information of the monitoring scenarios, lock access point, unlock access point, and so
on.
Before You Start
A map should have been added. Refer to Add E-Map for Area or Set GIS Map and Icons for details
about adding e-map or GIS map.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Settings to enter
the map settings page.
2. Select an area on the left.
3. Optional: Select a map.
4. Click Resource on the right.
5. Select a device type and an area from the drop-down lists.
6. Select a device and drag it to the map.
The hot spot is displayed on the map.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the hot spot.
Adjust Hot Drag the added hot spot on the map to the desired locations.
Spot Location
Edit Hot Spot Click the added hot spot icon on the map and click Edit to edit the detailed
information (such as setting GPS location (only available when parent map is
GIS map, and refer to for details), and selecting icon style).
For camera and radar hot spot, you can also edit the detection area,
including radius, direction, and angle, or drag the displayed sector on the
map to directly adjust the detection area.
Delete Hot Click the hot spot icon on the map and click Delete to remove the hot spot
Spot from the map.

15.4 Add Hot Region on Map

The hot region function links a map to another map. When you add a map to another map as a hot
region, an icon of the link to the added map is shown on the main map. The added map is called
child map while the map to which you add the hot region is the parent map.
Before You Start
At least 2 maps should have been added. Refer to Add E-Map for Area or Set GIS Map and Icons
for details about adding maps.

451
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Settings to enter
the map settings page.
2. Select an area on the left.
3. Optional: Select a static map.
4. Click + on the Hot Region icon on the right.
5. Click a position on the map to select it as the location of the hot region.
6. Select an area from the area list.
7. Click Save on dialog to add the hot region.
The added hot region icon will be displayed on the parent map.
8. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the hot region.
Adjust Hot Drag the added hot region on the parent map to the desired locations.
Region Location
Edit Hot Region Click the added hot region icon on the map to view and edit the detailed
information, including GPS location (only available when parent map is GIS
map, and refer to for details), hot region name, icon style, name color, and
remarks on the appearing dialog.
Edit Hot Region Drag the white point on the hot region's line to edit the hot region's size
Area or shape as the following picture.
Delete Hot Click the hot region icon on the map and click Delete on the appearing
Region dialog to delete the hot region.

Figure 15-1 Edit Hot Region Area

452
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

15.5 Add Label on Map

You can add labels with description on the map.
Before You Start
At least one map should have been added. Refer to Add E-Map for Area or Set GIS Map and Icons
for details about adding e-map or GIS map.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Settings to enter
the map settings page.
2. Select an area on the left.
3. Optional: Select a static map.
4. Click + on the Label icon on the right.
5. Click on the map where you want to place the label.
6. Customize a name for the label, and you can input content for the label as desired.
7. Click Save.
The added label icon will be displayed on the map.
8. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the label.
Adjust Label Drag the added label on the map to the desired locations.
Location
Edit Label Click the added label icon on the map to view and edit the detailed
information, including name and content on the appearing dialog.
Delete Label Click the label icon on the map and click Delete on the appearing dialog to
delete the label.

15.6 Add Resource Group on Map

You can also add the resource groups on the map by locating the resources in the group on the
map and setting the border of the region for detection.
Currently, the following resource groups can be added on the map for further operations:
People Counting Group
After adding the people counting group on the map, you can view the real-time number of
people entered, exited the region, or stayed in the region in the Monitoring module on the
Control Client. Meanwhile, when an alarm is triggered in the region (such as people amount
more/less than threshold), the client will notify the user by highlighting the region on the map.
For details about how to add a people counting group on the map, refer to Add People
Counting Group .
Heat Analysis Group

453
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

After adding the heat analysis group on the map, the resources (such as doors, fisheye cameras,
people counting cameras) will be grouped in certain region and displayed on map, and you can
know the dwell time of the people stayed in this region, how many persons stayed in this
region, and average dwell time of each people.
For details about adding a heat analysis group, refer to Add Heat Analysis Group .
Pathway Analysis Group
After adding the pathway analysis group on the map, you can view the real-time number of
people walking by in the Monitoring module on the Control Client.
For details about how to add a pathway analysis group, refer to Add Pathway Analysis Group .
Person Feature Analysis Group
After adding the person feature analysis group, the cameras which support facial recognition
and feature analysis will be grouped in one region and displayed on the map. You can view the
features of the persons appeared in this region, based on the data detected by the cameras in
the group.
For details about adding a person feature analysis group, refer to Add Person Feature Analysis
Group .
Anti-Passback Group
After adding the anti-passback group on the map, when an anti-passback alarm is triggered by
the doors in the group, the client will notify the user by highlighting the region on the map and
you can view the real-time alarms triggered in the region in the Monitoring module on the
Mobile ClientControl Client.
For details about how to add an anti-passback group on the map, refer to Configure Area Anti-
Passback Rules .
Multi-Door Interlocking Group
After adding the multi-door interlocking group on the map, when multi-door interlocking alarm
is triggered by the doors in the group, the client will notify the user by highlighting the region on
the map and you can view the real-time alarms triggered in the region in the Monitoring
module on the Mobile ClientControl Client.
For details about how to add a multi-door interlocking group on the map, refer to Configure
Multi-Door Interlocking
Entry & Exit Counting Group
After adding the entry &exit counting group on the map, you can view the real-time number of
people entered, exited the region, or stayed in the region in the Monitoring module on the
Mobile ClientControl Client. Meanwhile, when an alarm is triggered in the region (such as
people amount more/less than threshold), the client will notify the user by highlighting the
region on the map.
For details about how to add an entry &exit counting group on the map, refer to Add Entry and
Exit Counting Group .
Emergency Operation Group

454
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

After adding the emergency operation group on the map, you can operate access points
(remaining locked/unlocked) in the group in a batch.
This function is mainly applicable for emergent situation. For example, after grouping the doors
of the school's main entrances and exits into one emergency operation group, the school's
security personnel can lock down the doors in this group by quick operation on the Mobile
ClientControl Client, so that the school closes and no one can get into the school except for
maintenance and high level admins. This function would block out teachers, custodians,
students, etc.
For details about adding an emergency operation group, refer to Add Emergency Operation
Group .
Security Control Partition (Area)
After adding the security control partition (area) on the map, the security control device's alarm
inputs will be grouped according to the zones on the device and displayed on map, and you can
set an arming schedule to define when and how to arm the alarm inputs in a batch.
For details about adding a security control partition, refer to Add Security Control Partitions
(Area) from Device .

15.7 Add Parking Lot on Map

You can add parking lots and entrance and exits on the map to locate them for a visualized
monitoring.
Before You Start
A map should have been added. Refer to Add E-Map for Area or Set GIS Map and Icons for details
about adding e-map or GIS map.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Settings to enter
the map settings page.
2. Select an area on the left.
3. Optional: Select a map.
4. Click Parking Lot on the right.
5. Drag a parking lot or an entrance and exit to the map.
The parking lot, entrance or exit will be displayed on the map.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the entrance and exit.
Adjust Parking Lot/ Drag the added parking lot/entrance and exit on the map to the
Entrance and Exit desired locations.
Location
Edit Parking Lot/ Click the added parking lot/entrance and exit icon on the map and
Entrance and Exit click Edit to edit the detailed information (such as setting GPS

455
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

location (only available when parent map is GIS map, and refer to for
details), and selecting icon style).
Delete Parking Lot/ Click the parking lot/entrance and exit icon on the map and click
Entrance and Exit Delete to remove the parking lot/entrance and exit from the map.

15.8 Add Combined Alarm on Map

You can add the combined alarms on map to locate the alarm for a visualized monitoring.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added a map. Refer to Add E-Map for Area or Set GIS Map and Icons for
details about adding e-map or GIS map.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Settings to enter
the map settings page.
2. Select an area on the left.
3. Optional: Select a map.
4. Click Combined Alarm on the right.
5. Drag a combined alarm to the map.
The combined alarm is displayed on the map.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the combined alarm.
Adjust Combined Drag the added combined alarm on the map to the desired locations.
Alarm Location
Edit Combined Click the added combined alarm icon on the map and click Edit to edit
Alarm the detailed information (such as setting GPS location (only available
when parent map is GIS map, and refer to for details), and selecting icon
style).
Delete Combined Click the combined alarm icon on the map and click Delete to remove
Alarm the combined alarm from the map.

15.9 Operate Hot Spot

The resources added on the map are called the hot spots. The hot spots show the locations of the
resources. You can operate the hot spot, such as starting live view of the camera, UVSS, and door,
arming or disarming the resources.

456
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

15.9.1 Preview Hot Spot

You can view locations of hot spots including cameras, alarm inputs, alarm outputs, access points,
elevators, radars, sites, Under Vehicle Surveillance Systems (UVSS), etc. on the map. Also, you can
set the arming control and view history alarms of monitoring scenarios through the hot spots. You
can view latitude and longitude information and available operations of a certain resource by
hovering over a resource on GIS map as well.
Before You Start
Configure the map settings via the Web Client. For details, see Map Management 。
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Monitoring .
2. On the top left of the map, select an area from the Select Map drop-down list.
All maps of the area will be displayed.
3. Select a map to enter the map.
4. Optional: Perform the following operations on the map.
Filter Resource on Map Click and check resource type(s) as desired.
More Tools : Add a label on map.
2D/3D: Switch the displaying dimension of the map.

: Search hot spot or location on the map.

5. Click the hot spot to open the dialog which displays its related functions.

Note
● If there is an alarm triggered on the hot spot, the hot spot icon will turn into red alarm mode

. Click the red icon, and you can view the detailed alarm information.
● Click parking lot data, a panel of parking lot details will pop-up. You can view detailed parking

lot information such as parking space occupancy rate and parking floor details.
6. Operate in the dialog.
- For camera and UVSS hot spot: Check the live view and playback of the camera, view its
status, area, and remark, set the arming control, and view the history alarms.

Note
● To view the live view and playback of the camera, the user should be assigned with

permissions of live view and playback of the camera. For details, refer to the User Manual
of HikCentral Professional Web Client.
● For details about arming control, see Arm or Disarm Hot Spot .

● For details about viewing history alarms, see View History Alarm .

- For alarm input hot spot: View its status, area, and remark, set the arming control, and view
the history alarms.
- For alarm output hot spot: Turn on or off the linked alarm output.

457
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- For access point hot spot: View the access point status, check the live view and playback of
the access point's related camera(s), view the access point's basic information, control the
door status, set the arming control, and view the history alarms and access records.
- For elevator hot spot: View the elevator status, area and remark, check the live view and
playback of the elevator's related camera(s), control the floor status, set the arming control,
and view the history alarms and access records.
- For radar hot spot: View the radar status, area and remark, check the live view and playback
of the radar's related camera(s), set the arming control, view the history alarms.
- For radar PTZ camera hot spot: View camera's field of view and view the object's moving
pattern.
- For site hot spot: View the site's resources and alarms which are not handled.
- For partition hot spot: Set the arming control including alarm clearing, disarming, away
arming, stay arming, instant arming. For details, refer to Arm or Disarm Hot Spot .
- For parking lot hot spot: Click a certain floor and you will go to the parking lot management
module so you can view the details of the parking floor in the parking lot.
Hover your cursor on a parking lot, you can view the details of the parking lot. If nothing
appears, you can click Configure Now to configure the parking lot.

15.9.2 Draw Zone or Trigger Line for Radar

You can draw zones or trigger lines for radar, so if an object is detected to have crossed the trigger
line or entered the area shaped by the dual-trigger line or zone, the event and alarm will be
triggered.
Before You Start
A radar has been added to the area and map. Refer to Add Security Radar to Area for Current Site
and Add Hot Spot on Map for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Settings .
2. Click the radar's icon on the map and then select Draw Zone/Trigger Line from the drop-down
list to start drawing zone or trigger line for radar.
3. Select a zone drawing method in the tool bar in the upper-left corner of the map.

458
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Draw Trigger Line

459
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

A trigger line is a virtual line drawn in the radar's detection area. An event or alarm will be
triggered if an object is detected to have crossed the line. Click to draw a trigger line in the
detection area. Select a direction for the trigger line. The three directions indicate three
directions to which a detected object crosses the line. You can drag the anchor (the red point
on the trigger line) to reshape the trigger line, or drag the trigger line to move it to another
place.

Note
No more than 4 trigger lines can be drawn.

Figure 15-3 Trigger Line in the Detection Area

Draw Dual-Trigger Line
A dual-trigger line consists of 2 virtual lines drawn in the radar's detection area. Generally, it
is used to mark an area in the radar's detection area. An event or alarm will be triggered if an
object is detected to have entered the area shaped by the dual-trigger line. Click to draw a
dual-trigger line in the detection area. Select a direction for the trigger line. The three
directions indicate three directions to which a detected object crosses the line. You can drag
the anchor (the red point on the trigger line) to reshape the dual-trigger line, or drag the
dual-trigger line to move it to another place.

Note
Only 1 dual-trigger line can be drawn in the radar's detection area.

460
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 15-4 Dual-Trigger Line in the Detection Area

Manually Draw
You can draw any shape for the zone using this method.
Zone Segmentation
Split a zone into two smaller zones by a line.

Figure 15-5 Zone Segmentation

Distance Segmentation
Split a zone into two smaller zone by an arc.

461
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 15-6 Distance Segmentation

4. Right click to finish drawing and open a configuration window.
5. Set parameters for the drawn trigger line or zone.
6. Click Save.
7. Right click to exit the zone or trigger line drawing mode.

15.9.3 Relate Calibrated Camera to Radar

This operation requires two persons' teamwork: person A walks into the radar's detection area (the
person's position will be displayed on the map as a red point), while person B who operates the
computer running the Web Client adds calibration points by PTZ control of the camera(s) according
to person A's position.
Before You Start
A radar has been added to the area and map. Refer to Add Security Radar to Area for Current Site
and Add Hot Spot on Map for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Settings .
2. Click the radar's icon on the map and then select Relate Calibrated Camera from the drop-down
list to relate cameras.
3. Click Resource on the Map Settings panel and drag camera(s) to the map.

Note
● This function needs to be supported by the device.

● Up to 4 calibrated cameras can be added.

4. Click the radar's icon first, and then click camera icon(s) to relate the camera(s) with the radar.

462
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can right click to finish relating cameras or it will automatically finish when no camera can
be related.
5. Click the radar's icon on the map and then select Calibrate PTZ Camera from the drop-down list
to enter the camera calibration settings page.
6. Person A goes to the location which can be detected by one of the cameras.
Person A's location will appear on the map as a red point .
7. Person B clicks on the map to open the adding calibration point window.

Figure 15-7 Add Calibration Point

The cameras' thumbnails will be displayed on the left of the window.
8. Optional: Undo-check the Enable Tracking if you have enabled visual tracking for the calibrated
cameras.
9. Click a camera's thumbnail to display its image in the window on the right.
10. Click the image to turn the camera to the position of person A until person A appears in the
image.
11. Click Add Calibration Point to add the current image as a calibration point.

Note
● If the camera locates above or under the radar vertically, only 1 calibration point is enough; if

not, at least 4 calibration points are required.

● Up to 8 calibration points can be added for one cameras.

12. Optional: Check Enable Tracking if you have enabled visual tracking for the calibrated cameras.
13. Close the Add Calibration Point window and click to save the settings.

463
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

15.9.4 Arm or Disarm Hot Spot

You can arm or disarm the hot spots via the arming control function. After arming the device, the
current Control Client can receive the triggered alarm information from the hot spot.
Before You Start
Configure the map settings via the Web Client. For details, see Map Management .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Monitoring .
2. Click Select Map on the top left to display the map(s) of an area.
3. Optional: If an area has multiple maps, click to select a map.
4. Click the hot spot.
A window on which the related functions of the hot spot display is opened.
5. Click Arm/Disarm to arm/disarm the hot spot.

15.9.5 View History Alarm

When an alarm is triggered, it will be recorded in the system. You can check the history log related
to an alarm, including the alarm source details, alarm category, alarm triggered time, etc.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Monitoring .
2. Click the hot spot.
A dialog pops up on which the related functions of the hot spot display.
3. Click to enter the event and alarm search page.
4. Search history alarms of the hot spot. See Search for Event and Alarm Logs for details.

15.10 Preview Hot Region

The hot region function links a map to another map. When you add a map to another map as a hot
region, an icon of the link to the added map is shown on the main map. The added map is called
child map while the map to which you add the hot region is the parent map.
Before You Start
Configure the map settings via the Web Client. For details, see Map Management .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Monitoring .
2. Click Select Map on the top left to display the map(s) of an area.
3. Optional: If an area has multiple maps, click a map to select it.
4. Click a hot region on the map to enter the map of the hot region.

464
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

15.11 Preview Resource Group

During displaying map, you can view locations and regions of the resource groups, including people
counting group, multi-door interlocking group, and anti-passback group. You can also perform
further operations on the resources in the group.

Note
Make sure you have configured the required resource group and map settings via the Web Client.
For details, see Map Management .

In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Map → Map Monitoring .
● People Counting Group: You can view the real-time number of people entered, exited the region,

or stayed in the region. Meanwhile, when an alarm is triggered in the region (such as people
amount more/less than threshold), the region of the group will be highlighted on the map to
notify the user on the Control Client.
● Pathway Analysis Group: You can view the real-time number of people walking by in the

Monitoring module on the Control Client.

● Anti-Passback Group: When an anti-passback alarm is triggered by the doors in the group, the

region of the group will be highlighted on the map and you can view the real-time alarms
triggered in the region in the Monitoring module on the Control Client.
● Multi-Door Interlocking Group: When multi-door interlocking alarm is triggered by the doors in

the group, the region of the group will be highlighted on the map and you can view the real-time
alarms triggered in the region in the Monitoring module on the Control Client.
● Entry & Exit Counting Group: You can view the real-time number of people entered, exited the

region, or stayed in the region in the Monitoring module on the Control Client. Meanwhile,
when an alarm is triggered in the region (such as people amount more/less than threshold), the
client will notify the user by highlighting the region on the map.

15.12 Operate Map

After opening map, you can perform one or more operations of the followings, such as zooming in
or out map, selecting resource(s) on map, adding label, printing map, displaying map in full screen
mode, and so on.After opening map, you can perform one or more operations of the followings,
such as zooming in or out map, adding label, displaying map in full screen mode, and so on.
Zoom in/Zoom out Map
Use the mouse wheel or click or to zoom in or zoom out on the map.
Filter
Click and select the resource type you want to show on the map.
Add Label

465
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Click to add a label with description to the map.

Search Location
By the search bar on the top of the map, you can search for locations on GIS map and hot
spot/hot region on the e-map by entering keyword(s).

466
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 16 Maintenance
The system provides Service Manager to manage the installed services on the SYS server. You can
check the service's running status, edit the service port, start/stop service via the Service Manager.
The system also provides backup of the database, so that your data can be well protected and
recovered when an exception occurs.
You can also export the system's configuration data and save it to the local PC.

16.1 Health Monitoring

Health monitoring provides both near-real-time and history information about the status of the
SYS and added resources. It is critical to multiple aspects of operating the servers or devices and is
especially important for maintenance. When a resource exception occurs, you can enter this
module to check the resource status and find out the abnormal device(s) and view the exception
details.

16.1.1 Real-Time Health Status Overview

In the Health Monitoring module, you can view the real-time health status of the devices, servers,
and resources managed on the platform. If there is no network transmission devices added, the
Real-Time Overview page provides an at-a-glance view of the health status with charts and basic
data of resource status.
In the top left corner of the client, select → All Modules → Maintenance → Health Monitoring
→ Real-Time Overview .
Click Real-Time Overview tab at the top to enter the Real-Time Overview page.

467
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 16-1 Real-Time Health Status Overview

Table 16-1 Real-Time Health Status Page

Section Description
Resource Status View the abnormal data of different resources (e.g., cameras,
doors, elevators, or alarm inputs) added to areas of Central
System in the graphical way. You can click the numbers and
status types on the chart to view the real-​time status details of
resources or Remote Sites.

Note
The Remote Site status is only available for the Central System
with Remote Site Management module (based on the License
you purchased).

System Management Server View the network health status and server running status. Click
Status in the upper right corner of System Management Server panel
to view the running status details of the server, including CPU
usage, RAM usage, etc.

468
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Section Description

Figure 16-2 System Management Server Status Details

Server Status View the status (i.e., exception, warning, normal) of servers
added on Central System. You can click the numbers and status
types on the chart to view the real-​time status details of servers.
Device Status View the abnormal data of different devices (e.g., encoding
devices, decoding devices, or access control devices) added on
Central System. You can click the numbers on the chart to view
the real-​time status details of devices.

If the icon appears at the top of device picture, it indicates

that the device firmware should be upgraded. For upgrading the
firmware, refer to Upgrade Device Firmware .
Select Sites Select one or multiple Sites (including Remote Sites) from the
drop-down list in the upper left corner of Real-Time Overview
page to display the status of resources on the selected Site(s).
Refresh ● Manually Refresh: Click Refresh in the upper right corner of
Real-Time Overview page to manually refresh the resource
status on the page.
● Auto Refresh: Go to Maintenance → Basic Settings → Health
Check Frequency to set the interval for automatically
refreshing the resource status on the page. See details in Set
Health Check Frequency .
Export Overview Page or Click Export in the upper right corner of Real-Time Overview
Exception Data page to export the page in PDF format. Or you can check Export

469
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Section Description
Exception Data to export the exception data in Excel/CSV
format.

Figure 16-3 Export Overview Page or Exception Data

16.1.2 Real-Time Health Status Overview (Topology)

In the Health Monitoring module, you can view the real-time health status of the devices, servers,
and resources managed on the platform. If there are network transmission devices managed on
the platform, the Real-Time Overview page provides a topology of the managed devices. Topology
is a figure that displays the connection relations among network transmission devices, monitoring
devices, etc. It is mainly used for network maintenance.

Note
● Make sure the network transmission devices have been added to the platform.
● If a network transmission device can not be recognized by the platform, it will be displayed as an
unknown device.
● The topology does not support body cameras, but supports ticket dispensers.

In the top left corner of the client, select → All Modules → Maintenance → Health Monitoring
→ Real-Time Overview .
Click Topology tab at the top to enter the Topology page.

470
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 16-4 Topology Overview

Table 16-2 Topology Page

Section Description
Device Status View the abnormal data of different devices (e.g., encoding
devices, decoding device, or access control devices) added on
the Central System. You can click the number to locate the
abnormal device in the topology or view the devices' real-​time
status.
If the icon appears beside the device type name, it indicates
that the device firmware should be upgraded. For upgrading the
firmware, refer to Upgrade Device Firmware .
Resource Status View the abnormal data of different resources (e.g., cameras,
doors, elevators, or alarm inputs) added to the areas of the
Central System. You can click the number to view the real-​time
status details of resources or Remote Sites.

Note
The Remote Site status is only available for the Central System
with the Remote Site Management module (based on the
License you purchased).

471
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Section Description
Topology Details View the relationships among devices, device information, link
status, alarm information, etc. See details in Topology Details .
Network Performance View the current network performance (i.e., poor or good) of
the System Management Server.
System Management Server View the network health status and server running status. Click
Status in the upper right corner of the System Management Server
panel to view the running status details of the server, including
its CPU usage, RAM usage, etc.

Figure 16-5 System Management Server Status Details

Server Status View the status (i.e., exception, warning, normal) of servers
added on the Central System.
Generate Topology Again Click Refresh → Generate Topology Again to draw the network
topology again.
Refresh ● Manual Refresh: Click Refresh in the upper right corner of the
Real-Time Overview page to manually refresh the resource
status on the page.
● Auto Refresh: Go to Maintenance → Basic Settings → Health
Check Frequency to set the interval for automatically
refreshing the resource status on the page. See details in Set
Health Check Frequency .
Export Topology or Exception Click Export in the upper right corner of Topology page and
Data select the export type as Default or Only Topology to export the

472
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Section Description
topology in PDF format or the exception data in Excel/CSV
format.

Note
● If the export type is selected as Default, the whole displayed
information (topology and exception data) on the Health
Monitoring page will be exported.
● If the export type is selected as Only Topology, only the
topology will be exported in PDF format.

Figure 16-6 Export Topology

Topology Details
The topology of devices will display the hierarchical relationships among the devices, device
information, link status, alarm information, etc.

473
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 16-7 Topology Details

Device Node
The device nodes are displayed by icons, including the System Management Server, Recording
Server, network transmission device, encoding device, access control device, video intercom
device, network bridge, fiber converter, etc. Each device node displays the device name and IP
address.

Note
● When the device information (device name, IP address, online/offline status) changes, you
should manually refresh to generate the topology again or set auto-refresh.
● When the device hierarchy or physical connection changes, you should manually refresh to
generate the topology again.
● If the node icon is displayed in red, it indicates that the device is abnormal or alarms are
triggered. You can view the reason for device exception or alarm details.
● For the added online devices, the displayed device alias is the same as the device IP address.

View Device Details

Click the device node in the topology and click Details in the drop-down list. You can view the
device details, including the basic information (i.e., device name, IP address and device model),
device usage (e.g., RAM usage, CPU usage, PoE power), arming status and disk array (for
encoding device), live video (if the device is linked with a camera), linked lane name / entrance
direction / entrance & exit name / barrier control status (if the entrance and exit is linked with a
camera), device panel status (i.e., ports and ports usage), and port information (i.e., port name,
and peer device type, peer device IP address, and peer device name).

474
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 16-8 View Device Details

Note
The device details vary with different device models.
Link
The color of link indicates the utilization rate of network bandwidth (red: congested, yellow: busy,
gray: fluent). And the shape of link indicates the link type (wireless, network link, optical fiber).
View Link Details

475
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Move the cursor to the link between nodes to display the link details. You can view the upstream
rate and downstream rate to determine whether the network status is normal or not. You can
also view the connected device type, IP address, port name, and port status.

Figure 16-9 View Link Details

View Connection Path

If there is a data transmission failure between the devices, you can view the connection path to
judge which link is disconnected, so as to restore the link as quickly as possible. Click the device
node and in the topology and click Show Connection Path in the drop-down list. According to the
information presented in the prompt window, click Common Unknown Node or Select Node to
select the peer node, and then click OK. After that, the connection path between the two nodes
will be displayed.
Remote Configuration

476
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Click the device node in the topology and click Remote Configuration in the drop-down list to
configure the device parameters, including system settings, network and port configuration. You
can configure the network parameters and device port according to the network usage. For
details, refer to the user manual of the device.

Note
This function should be supported by the device.
View Device Logs
When a device failure happens or trouble shooting is required, you can view the device's logs to
know the alarms, notifications, operations and events of the device. Click the device node in the
topology and click View Device Logs in the drop-down list to enter the Device Logs page, and you
can set the conditions to search the device logs.

Note
This function should be supported by the device.
Set as Root Node
When you need to adjust the topology structure, you can click the device node in the topology
and click Set as Root Node in the drop-down list to set the node as the root node.

Note
Only the switch, wireless network bridge, and fiber converter can be set as root node.
Zoom In/Zoom Out
Click or to zoom in or zoom out the device node(s) and the subsidiary device node(s). You
can scroll the mouse wheel to zoom in or zoom out the topology.
Adjust Topology
Click the background of the topology to move the topology in up, down, right, or left direction.
Full Screen
Click on the upper-right corner of the topology to display the topology in full-screen mode.
Adaptive View
Click on the upper-right corner of the topology to adapt the topology to the current window,
to help you know the whole topology hierarchy quickly.
Search
By entering the device name or IP address in the search box, you can quickly locate the device on
the topology.

477
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

16.1.3 Historical Health Data Overview

You can view the historical online rate of resources and devices, or the recording integrity rate.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Maintenance → Health
Monitoring → History Overview .

Figure 16-10 Historical Health Data Overview

Table 16-3 Historical Health Data Page

Section Description
Filter Data Select a time period from the drop-down list in the upper right
corner of each section for filtering data by day, week, or month.
Resource Online Rate ● On the line chart, you can perform the following operations:
○ Move the cursor on the line chart to view the camera online

rate and the number of offline cameras at specific time

points.
○ Click the a dot on the line to go to Resource Log page to

view the detailed network status of cameras at that time

point.
● On the doughnut chart, you can perform the following
operations:

478
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Section Description
○ Move the cursor to red part of the doughnut chart to view
the number of the cameras which once were offline and the
offline rate during the time period you select.
○ Move the cursor to the green part of the doughnut chart to

view the number of the cameras which stay online and the
online rate during the time period you select.
● On the table, you can do one of the followings:
○ Click Total Offline Duration to rank the cameras in terms of

total offline duration within the time period you select.

○ Click Offline Times to rank the cameras in terms of offline

times within the time period you select.

Device Online Rate ● On the line chart, you can do one of the followings.
○ Move the cursor on the line chart to view the device online

rate and the number of offline devices at specific time

points.
○ Click the a dot on the line to go to Device Log page to view

the detailed network status of devices at that time point.

● On the doughnut chart, you can perform the following
operations.
○ Move the cursor to red part of the doughnut chart to view

the number of the devices which once were offline and the
offline rate during the time period you select.
○ Move the cursor to the green part of the doughnut chart to

view the number of the devices which stay online and the
online rate during the time period you select.
● On the table, you can do one of the followings.
○ Click Total Offline Duration to rank the devices in terms of

total offline duration within the time period you select.

○ Click Offline Times to rank the devices in terms of offline

times within the time period you select.

Recording Integrity Rate On the line chart, you can move the cursor to view the recording
integrity rate at specific time points. Click the a dot on the line to
go to Resource Log page to view the detailed resource status of
devices at that time point.
Recording Copy-Back Rate On the line chart, you can move the cursor to view the recording
callback rate at specific time points. Click a dot on the line to go
to Resource Log page to view the detailed resource status of
devices at that time point.

479
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Section Description
Select Site In the upper left corner of History Overview page, select a
Current or Remote Site from the drop-down list to display the
historical data of resources on the Site.
Refresh ● Manually Refresh: Click Refresh in the upper right corner of
History Overview page to manually refresh the data on the
page.
● Auto Refresh: Go to Maintenance → Basic Settings → Health
Check Frequency to set the interval for automatically
refreshing the data on the page. See details in Set Health
Check Frequency .
Export Overview Page or Click Export in the upper right corner of History Overview page
Exception Data to export the page in PDF format. Or you can check Export
Exception Data to export the exception data in Excel/CSV
format.

Figure 16-11 Export Overview Page or Exception Data

16.2 Set Basic Maintenance Parameters

You can set parameters to regularly send device and resource log reports to specified users via
email, set the warning threshold for SYS usage, configure the default response timeout of the
interactions among the Web Client, SYS, and devices, specify the health check frequency, and set
the hierarchy and bandwidth threshold for the topology.

480
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

16.2.1 Send Log Report Regularly

You can configure parameters to send device and resource log reports to specified users regularly
via email. Device log reports contain information on the online/offline status of device, and
resource log reports contain the online/offline status of resources as well as the recording status.

Send Resource Log Report Regularly

You can set report sending rules for camera resources, and the platform can send emails with
resource log reports to specified users daily, weekly, or monthly.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have set an email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For

details, refer to Set Email Template .

● Make sure you have configured email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and

port, etc. For details, refer to Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 10,000 records in total.
● The report is an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Maintenance → Basic Settings .
2. Select Scheduled Report on the left.
3. Click to create a new report rule.

Note
If there is no report rule added before, you should click Add to add a new one.
4. In Report Category, select Resource Logs.
5. Edit the report rule.
Report Target
Specify the resources that you want to add into the report.
Statistical Cycle
Select the generation frequency of the report.
By Day
The report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send a report at the sending time
every day, which contains logs recorded during the day (24 hours) prior to the sending
date.

481
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00 and select all the dates (from Sunday to
Saturday) in Send On, the platform will send a report at 20:00 every day. The report
contains the logs recorded between 00:00 and 24:00 of the previous day.
By Week/Month
The platform will send a report at the sending time every week or every month, which
contains logs recorded during the Report Time you have set.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday in Send At,
the platform will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday. The report
contains logs recorded between last Monday and Sunday if you set the Report Time as
Recent 7 Days.
Report Time
Set the time period during which the logs will be recorded.
Send On
Set the report sending date(s) if you have set Statistical Type as By Day.
Send At
Set a report sending time.
Effective Period
Set the effective period for the report rule.
Send Report via Email
Switch on to send the report via email.
Email Template
Select an email template to define the recipient information and content if you have switched
on Send Report via Email.

Note
You can click Add New to add a new email template. For setting email templates, refer to Set
Email Template .
Upload to SFTP
Switch on to upload the report to SFTP.

Note
You can click Configure to set the SFTP.
Save to Local Storage
Switch on to save the report to the local PC.

Note
You can click Configure to set the saving path.
6. Click Add to save the report rule.

482
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Send Device Log Report Regularly

You can set report sending rules for encoding devices, and the platform can send emails with
device log reports to specified users daily, weekly, or monthly.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have set an email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For

details, refer to Set Email Template .

● Make sure you have configured email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and

port, etc. For details, refer to Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 10,000 records in total.
● The report is an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Maintenance → Basic Settings .
2. Select Scheduled Report on the left.
3. Click to create a new report rule.

Note
If there is no report rule added before, you should click Add to add a new one.
4. In Report Category, select Device Logs.
5. Edit the report rule.
Report Target
Specify the devices that you want to add into the report.
Statistical Cycle
Select the generation frequency of the report.
By Day
The report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send a report at the sending time
every day, which contains logs recorded during the day (24 hours) prior to the sending
date.
For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00 and select all the dates (from Sunday to
Saturday) in Send On, the platform will send a report at 20:00 every day. The report
contains the logs recorded between 00:00 and 24:00 of the previous day.
By Week/Month
The platform will send a report at the sending time every week or every month, which
contains logs recorded during the Report Time you have set.

483
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday in Send At,
the platform will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday. The report
contains logs recorded between last Monday and Sunday if you set the Report Time as
Recent 7 Days.
Report Time
Set the time period during which the logs will be recorded.
Send On
Set the report sending date(s) if you have set Statistical Type as By Day.
Send At
Set a report sending time.
Effective Period
Set the effective period for the report rule.
Send Report via Email
Switch on to send the report via email.
Email Template
Select an email template to define the recipient information and content if you have switched
on Send Report via Email.

Note
You can click Add New to add a new email template. For setting email templates, refer to Set
Email Template .
Upload to SFTP
Switch on to upload the report to SFTP.

Note
You can click Configure to set the SFTP.
Save to Local Storage
Switch on to save the report to the local PC.

Note
You can click Configure to set the saving path.
6. Click Add to save the report rule.

16.2.2 Set Warning Threshold for Streaming Media Usage

An alarm can be triggered if the Streaming Media's CPU usage and RAM usage reaches a
predefined warning threshold and lasts for a predefined duration, or if the channel usage of

484
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Streaming Media reaches a predefined warning threshold. The related threshold value can be
checked via the Control Client.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → General → Maintenance → Basic
Settings → Server Usage Thresholds .

Figure 16-12 Set Server Usage Threshold

CPU/RAM Usage
Drag the to adjust the threshold value of CPU or RAM usage, and then define the duration in the
Notify if Value Exceeds for (s) field.
Example
● If you set the Warning threshold value to 60%, and set 20 in the Notify if Value Exceeds for (s)

field for the CPU usage, you can view the CPU usage reaching to the Waring threshold line in the
status window of SYS on the Health Status Overview page when the CPU usage reaches 60% and
lasts for 20 seconds.
● If you set the Warning threshold value to 60%, set 20 in the Notify if Value Exceeds for (s) field

for the CPU Usage, and set an alarm for CPU Warning (see Add Normal Event and Alarm ), the
alarm will be triggered when the CPU usage reaches 60% and lasts for 20 seconds.

485
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Streaming Channels of Streaming Media

Enter a specific value in the text field or click / to adjust the threshold value for the number
of input or output channels of Streaming Media.
Example
If you set the Warning threshold value to 160 for the number of input channels of Streaming
Media, you can view the number of used input channels reaching to the Waring threshold line in
the status window of SYS on the Health Status Overview page when the number of used input
channels reaches 160.

16.2.3 Set Network Timeout

Network timeout is a certain amount of time which is used to define whether the interaction
among the Web Client, SYS, and devices is successful or not. To be specific, if one party fails to
response after the configured timeout passes, the interaction between them is regarded as a
failure.
In top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Maintenance → Basic Settings →
Network Timeout .
Select the network timeout and click Save.

Table 16-4 Minimum Response Timeout in Different Interactions

Interaction Relation Minimum Response Timeout
Between Web Client and SYS 60 s
Between SYS and Device 5s
Between Web Client and Device 60 s

Note
This parameter affects all Web Clients accessing the current SYS.

16.2.4 Set Health Check Frequency

The SYS will check the health of devices, resources, and servers managed on the platform. The
platform will display the health check results in the Health Status Overview module, such as the
devices' online/offline status, recording status, etc. You can set the frequency which controls how
often the platform gets the latest status of the devices, servers, and resources.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Maintenance → Basic Settings →
Health Check Frequency .

486
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Device Health Status

You can set the health check frequency for different devices, including visitor terminals, encoding
devices, access control devices, elevator control devices, video intercom devices, security control
devices, dock stations, network transmission devices, IP speakers, decoding devices, security
inspection devices, and lane controllers, managed on the platform. It controls how often the
platform pings these devices to determine whether they are online.
After disabled, the platform will not update the status of the managed devices. You need to refresh
manually to get the latest status.

Note
You should adjust the check frequency according to the number of devices. The greater the
number of devices, the lower the frequency of health checks. When the frequency set is too high,
you will be prompted and recommended to set a lower frequency.

Server Health Status

You can set the health check frequency for the managed recording servers and DeepinMind
servers. It controls how often the platform pings these servers to determine whether they are
online.
After disabled, the platform will not update the status of the managed servers. You need to refresh
manually to get the latest status.
Others
● Device Capabilities: Set how often the platform gets the managed devices' capabilities. After
disabled, the platform will not update the capability changes of all the managed devices. You
need to refresh manually to get the latest capabilities.
● Recording Status: Set how often the platform checks the camera's recording status. After
disabled, the platform will not update the cameras' recording status.
● Alarm/Event Enabled or Not: Set how often the platform checks whether the event and alarm
rules are enabled or not. After disabled, the platform will not update the configured event and
alarm rule status.
● Remote Alarm Enabled or Not: Set how often the platform checks whether the event and alarm
rules configured on the Remote Sites are enabled or not. After disabled, the platform will not
update the configured alarm rule status configured on the Remote Sites.

16.2.5 Set Topology Show Parameters

You can set parameters in the topology of Health Monitoring module, including topology hierarchy
and bandwidth threshold.

Note
For details about health monitoring, see Health Monitoring .

487
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Maintenance → Basic Settings →
Topology Show

Figure 16-13 Topology Show Settings

Topology Hierarchy
If the devices connection hierarchy is complicated, you can set the topology hierarchy to display
the primary devices.

Note
After setting the topology hierarchy, the topology will be generated again.
Bandwidth Threshold
When the bandwidth usage exceeds the threshold, the link on the topology will turns to the
corresponding color.

16.3 Resource Status

You can monitor the status of the added resources, such as cameras, encoding devices, Recording
Servers, Streaming Servers, etc., which helps you find out and maintain the abnormal resources in
time, ensuring the smooth running of the platform to the greatest extent.
On the top left corner of the client, select → All Modules → Maintenance → Resource Status ,
and select a resource type on the navigation panel on the left.

Note
You can view the status of cameras, UVSSs, Streaming Servers, Recording Servers, encoding
devices, dock stations, and decoding devices added on the Remote Sites via the Resource Status
module of Central System.

Camera Status
On the camera status page, you can view camera status, such as network status, arming status, and
recording status.
You can also perform the following operations.

488
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● Select a Remote Site from the drop-down list in the camera list panel to display the status of
cameras on the Remote Site.
● Click the camera name to view its status and basic information.
● Click the IP address to view the status of the device to which the camera is related.
● Click in the Operation column to go to the Area page to configure the parameters of the
specified camera. See details in Edit Camera for Current Site or Edit Element for Remote Site .
● Click in the Operation column to view the online/offline records of the specified camera. For
details, see Search for Online/Offline Logs of Resource .

Note
This operation is not available for the cameras added on Remote Sites.
● Click in the Operation column to view the recording status of the camera. For details, see
Search for Recording Status of Resource .

Note
This operation is not available for the cameras added on Remote Sites.
● Click View Camera with Abnormal Image to view the videos of cameras with abnormal images.
And you can also export the image diagnosis results of selected camera(s) or all cameras in PDF
format.
● Select the device type(s) from the first drop-down list on the top to filter the camera status by
device type.

Note
Contact the admin user to edit the abnormal configurations of camera's event or alarm via the
Web Client if an icon appears near the camera name.

Door Status
On the door status page, you can view the information such as the network status of related
devices and door status.

Note
For the door linked to the video intercom device, the door status is not available to be displayed.

You can also perform the following operations.

● Click the door name to view the status details and basic information.

● Click the device name to view the status of the device to which the door is related.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Area page to configure the parameters of the
specified door. See details in Edit Door for Current Site .
● Click in the Operation column and select a control type from the drop-down list to control the
door status.

489
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

○ Unlock: When the door is locked, unlock the door and it will be open. After the open duration
(configured via the Web Client), the door will be closed and locked again automatically.
○ Lock: When the door is unlocked, lock the door and it will be closed. The person who has the
access permission can access the door with credentials.
○ Normally Open: The door will be unlocked (no matter closed or open). All the persons can
access the door with no credentials required (free access).

Note
For the door linked to video intercom device, setting its status to remain unlocked is not
available.
○ Normally Closed: The door will be closed and locked. No person can access the door even if
he/she has the authorized credentials, except the super users.

Elevator Status
On the elevator status page, you can view information, such as the network status of elevator
control devices and the card reader status.
You can also perform the following operations.
● Click the name to view the status details and basic information.

● Click the device name to view the status of the device to which the elevator is related.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Area page to configure the parameters of the
specified elevator. See details in Edit Elevator for Current Site .

Alarm Input Status

You can view the alarm input status including resource usage status (online or offline), arming
status, bypass status, fault status, alarm status, detector connection status, battery status, and so
on.
You can also perform the following operations.
● Click the device name to view the status of the device to which the alarm input is related.

● Select the device type(s) from the first drop-down list on the top to filter the alarm input status

by device type.

UVSS Status
On the UVSS status page, you can view the information such as line scan camera status and capture
camera status.
You can also perform the following operations.
● Click the UVSS name to view the status details and basic information.

● Select a Remote Site from the drop-down list at the top of UVSS status page to display the status

of UVSSs on the Remote Site.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Area page to configure the parameters of the
specified UVSS. See details in Edit Under Vehicle Surveillance System for Current Site .

490
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
This operation is not available for the UVSSs added on Remote Sites.

Speaker Unit Status

On the speaker unit status page, you can view the status and information of speaker units, such as
the network status and health check time.
You can also perform the following operations.
● Click the speaker unit name to view the status details and basic information.

● Click the device name to view the status of the device to which the speaker unit is related.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Area page to configure the parameters of the
specified speaker unit. See details in Edit Speaker Unit for Current Site .
● Check the check box and select the exception type from the drop-down list on the top to filter

the speaker unit status by exception type.

Third-Party Integrated Resource Status

You can view status and information of the third-party integrated resource, such as the resource
type, manufacturer, network status.
You can also perform the following operations.

Note
The actual interface may vary with the kind of third-party resource.
● Click the resource name to view the status details and basic information.
● In the Operation column, click to control the door status.

Remote Site Status

You can view the Remote Site status such as the network status and health check time, and click
the Remote Site name to view the status details and basic information.
Streaming Server Status
You can view the streams via each added Streaming Server (including incoming streams and
outgoing streams), and view the hardware status such as network status, CPU usage, and RAM
usage.
You can also click the Streaming Server name to view the status details and basic information.
● Click in the Operation column to go to the Resource Management Module to configure the
parameters of the server.
●

Recording Server Status

You can view the status and information of Recording Server, such as the recording status, CPU
usage, RAM usage, HDD status, and so on.
You can also perform the following operations.

491
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● Click the Recording Server name to view the status details and basic information.
● Select a Remote Site from the drop-down list at the top to display the status of Recording
Servers on the Remote Site.
● Click the status in Recording Status column to view the recording status of the channels
configured to store the video files in this Recording Server.
● Click the status in Hardware Status or HDD Status column to view the hardware status and HDD
exception details if the status is exceptional.
● Click in the Operation column to go to the Resource Management Module to configure the
parameters of the specified server.

DeepinMind Server Status

You can view the network status, CPU usage, and RAM usage, etc., of the DeepinMind Servers.
You can perform the following operations.
● Click the server name to view the status details and basic information.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Resource Management Module to configure the
parameters of the specified server.
●

Encoding Device Status

You can view the encoding device status including the recording status, HDD usage, arming status,
etc.
You can perform the following operations.
● Select a Remote Site from the drop-down list at the top to display the status of encoding devices

on the Remote Site.

● Click the device name to view the status and basic information of the encoding device and the

related cameras.
● Click the status in Recording Status column to view the recording status of channels configured

to store the video files on this encoding device.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified encoding device.
● Click to wake up the encoding device if it is in sleep mode.
● Click in the Operation column to view the online/offline records of the encoding device. For
details, see Search for Online/Offline Logs of Device .

Access Control Device Status

You can view the status and information such as network status and battery status of the added
access control devices. If the device is turnstile, you can view the status of master lane controller,
slave lane controller, and component.
You can perform the following operations.
● Click the device name to view the status and basic information of the access control device, and

the related doors and cameras.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified access control device.

492
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Elevator Control Device Status

You can view the information such as network status, arming status, and distributed elevator
controller status.
● Click the device name to view the status and basic information of the elevator control device,

and the related floors and cameras.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified elevator control device.

Video Intercom Device Status

You can view the status information of the video intercom device such as network status, arming
status, and the status of calling center from device (whether the device is able to call the
monitoring center of the platform).
You can perform the following operations.
● Click All Devices and then select a device type to display the device status of selected type only.

● Click the device name to view the status and basic information of the video intercom device, and

the related doors and cameras.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified video intercom device.
● Select the device type(s) from the first drop-down list on the top to filter the video intercom

device status by device type.

Visitor Terminal Status

On the visitor terminal status page, you can view the status and information of visitor terminals,
such as the network status and arming status.
You can also perform the following operations.
● Click the visitor terminal name to view the status details and basic information.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified visitor terminal.

Mobile Device Status

On the mobile device status page, you can view the status and information of mobile devices, such
as the license plate No., mobile signal, and disk status.
You can also perform the following operations.
● Click the mobile device name to view the status details and basic information.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Resource Management page to configure the
parameters of the device.
● Click in the Operation column to view the online/offline records of the specified device. For
details, see Search for Online/Offline Logs of Resource .

Entrance/Exit Control Device Status

On the entrance/exit control device status page, you can view the status and information of
entrance/exit control devices, such as the network status, arming status, and checking time.

493
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

You can also perform the following operations.

● Click the entrance/exit control device name to view the status details and basic information.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Resource Management page to configure the
parameters of the device.

Guidance Terminal Status

On the guidance terminal status page, you can view the status and information of guidance
terminals, such as the network status, arming status, and checking time.
You can also perform the following operations.
● Click the guidance terminal name to view the status details and basic information.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Resource Management page to configure the
parameters of the device.

Security Control Device Status

You can view the managed devices' network status, battery status, and so on.
You can perform the following operations.
● Click All Devices and then select a device type to display the device status of selected type only.

● Click the device name to view the status and basic information of the security control device,

and the related alarm inputs and cameras.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified security control device.

Fire Protection Device Status

On the fire protection device status page, you can view the status and information of fire
protection devices, such as network status, arming status, and checking time.
You can also perform the following operations.
● Click the fire protection device name to view the status details and basic information.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Resource Management page to configure the
parameters of the device.

Dock Station Status

You can view the network status, HDD status, file backup status, and so on, of the added dock
station.
You can perform the following operations.
● Select a Remote Site from the drop-down list at the top to display the status of dock stations on

the Remote Site.

● Click the device name to view the status and basic information of the dock station.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified dock station.

Decoding Device Status

You can view the status information such network status, first added time, and checking time.

494
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

You can perform the following operations.

● Select a Remote Site from the drop-down list at the top to display the status of decoding devices

on the Remote Site.

● Click the device name to view the status and basic information of the decoding device.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified decoding device.

IP Speaker
You can view the IP speakers' network status, serial No., address, and so on.
You can perform the following operations.
● Click the device name to view the status and basic information of the IP speaker.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified IP speaker.

Security Inspection Device

You can view the security inspection devices' network status, IP address, serial No., and so on.
You can perform the following operations.
● Click All Devices and then select a device type to display the device status of selected type only.

● Click the device name to view the status and basic information of the security inspection device.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified security inspection device.
● Click in the Operation column to view the online/offline records of the security inspection
device. For details, see Search for Online/Offline Logs of Device .

Network Transmission Device

You can view the network transmission devices' CPU usage, RAM usage, PoE usage, occupied ports,
and so on.
You can perform the following operations.
● Click All Devices and then select a device type to display the device status of selected type only.

● Click the device name to view the basic information, device usage, and port information of the

network transmission device.

● Click in the Operation column to go to the Device and Server page to configure the
parameters of the specified network transmission device.

Common Operations
You can perform the following operations for different resource types.
● Check Include Sub-area to display the resources of child areas.

● Check the checkbox in the top right of status display page to select exception types from the

drop-down list to filter the resource status.

● Click Export to export the status data as CSV or Excel to the local PC.

● Click in the Operation column to refresh the status of the specified resource, or click Refresh
to refresh the status of all resources displayed on the page.

495
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The resource status will be automatically refreshed in a specified interval (see details in Set
Health Check Frequency ).

16.4 Log Search

Three types of log files are provided: server logs, device logs, and resource logs. The server logs
refer to the logs files stored in the SYS server on the Current Site and the Remote Site; The device
logs refer to the log files stored on the connected devices, such as encoding device and security
control device; The resource logs refers the logs about camera recording status, online status, and
call-back status. You can search the log files, view the log details and backup the log files.

16.4.1 Search for Server Logs

You can search for server logs of the current site or Remote Sites, which contain error logs, warning
logs and information logs. Server logs contain historical user and server activities. You can search
for the logs and then check the details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner, select → All Modules → Maintenance → System Log → Server Logs .

496
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 16-14 Search for Server Logs

2. In Site, select the current site or a Remote Site.
3. In Type, select one or multiple log types and sub types.

Note
Error logs record failures or errors. Warning logs record license expiration events. Information
logs refer to other general logs which record successful or unknown operation results.
4. In Source, select user and server to set the source of the logs that you want to search for.
5. Optional: In Resource Name, enter the name of a resource to search the logs of the resource.
6. In Time, select the time range of this search.

497
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can select Custom Time Interval to set a precise start time and end time.
7. Click Search.
All matched logs are listed with details on the right.
8. Optional: Check all or specific logs, click Export, and then select a file format (i.e., Excel or CSV)
to download the searched logs as a single file to your local PC.

16.4.2 Search for Online/Offline Logs of Device

You can search for the online/offline logs of encoding devices, security inspection devices, and
mobile devices. The online/offline logs provide information on the current device status (online or
offline), latest offline time, total offline duration, etc.
Steps
1. In the top left corner, select → All Modules → Maintenance → System Log → Device Logs .

Figure 16-15 Search for Device Online/Offline Logs

2. In Type, select Online/Offline Log as the log type.
3. Select a device type and check the devices you want to search.
4. In Time, specify the time range of this search.

498
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can select Custom Time Interval to set a precise start time and end time.
5. Optional: If there are a large number of devices, switch on Filter Time to set a range of total
offline times during the specified time range to filter the devices, or set a total offline duration to
filter the devices.
6. Click Search.
The offline/online log of each device are listed on the right. You can check the name, IP address,
current status (online/offline), latest offline time, total offline times, and total offline duration of
each device.
7. Optional: Perform further operations after searching for device logs.
View Click on device name to view history online duration (displayed as a line chart)
Offline and status (displayed as a list) of the device.
History You can perform the following operations.
● Filter Data: Select a time period and a status (online, offline or all) from the

drop-down lists respectively to filter the data.

● View Details: Move the cursor to the line chart to view the detailed offline

and online duration at each time point.

View Click in the Operation column to view the logs stored on the device.
Device Logs
Export Logs Click Export, and then select a file format and a report type to download the
searched logs as a single file to your local PC.

16.4.3 Search for Logs Stored on Device

You can search for the logs stored on encoding devices, security control devices, decoding device,
access control devices, elevator control devices, network transmission devices, mobile device, and
fire protection device.
Steps
1. In the top left corner, select → All Modules → Maintenance → System Log → Device Logs .

499
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 16-16 Search for Logs Stored on Device

2. Select Log on Device as the log type.
3. Select a device type and select the device you want to search.
4. Select the main event as Normal or Battery Information and check the sub event(s) to be
searched for.
5. Specify the time range of this search.

Note
You can select Custom Time Interval to set a precise start time and end time.
6. Click Search.
All matched logs are listed with details on the right.
7. Optional: Perform further operations after searching for device logs.
View Click on device name to view history online duration (displayed as a line chart)
Offline and status (displayed as a list) of the device.
History You can perform the following operations.
● Filter Data: Select a time period and a status (online, offline or all) from the

drop-down lists respectively to filter the data.

● View Details: Move the cursor to the line chart to view the detailed offline

and online duration at each time point.

View Click in the Operation column to view the logs stored on the device.
Device Logs

500
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Export Logs Click Export, and then select a file format and a report type to download the
searched logs as a single file to your local PC.

16.4.4 Search for Online/Offline Logs of Resource

You can search for the online/offline logs of cameras on the current site. The online/offline logs
provide information on the current device's status (online or offline), latest offline time, total
offline duration, etc.
Steps
1. In the top left corner, select → All Modules → Maintenance → System Log → Resource
Logs .

Figure 16-17 Search for Resource Online/Offline Logs

2. In Type, select Online/Offline Log.
3. Click to show the area list on the current site and then select the cameras whose logs are to
be searched for.
4. Optional: Modify your selection in the selected camera list.
Remove a Camera Click to remove the camera from the list.
Remove All Cameras Click to remove all cameras in the list.
5. In Time, specify the time range of this search.

501
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can select Custom Time Interval to set a precise start time and end time.
6. Optional: If there are a large number of resources, check Filter Condition to set a range of total
offline times during the specified time range to filter the resources.
7. Click Search.
The offline/online log of each resource are listed on the right. You can view the name, IP
address, current status (online/offline), latest offline time, total offline times, and total offline
duration of each resource.
8. Optional: Perform further operations after searching fro resource logs.
View Offline Click resource name to view history online duration (displayed as a line chart)
History and status (displayed as a list) of the resource.
You can perform the following operations.
● Filter Data: Select a time period and a status (online, offline or all) from the

drop-down lists respectively to filter data.

● View Details: Move the cursor to the line chart to view the detailed offline

and online duration at each time point.

View Device Click the IP address to view the online/offline logs of the device where the
Online/ resource is linked.
Offline Logs
Export Logs Click Export, and then select a file format and a report type to download the
searched logs as a single file to your local PC.

16.4.5 Search for Recording Status of Resource

You can search for the recording status of cameras on the current site. The recording status
includes the recording integrity rate, total time length abnormal recording, times of recording
interruptions, etc.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Maintenance → System Log →
Resource Logs .

502
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 16-18 Search for Resource Recording Status

2. In Type, select Recording Status.
3. Click to show the area list of the current site and then select the cameras whose logs are to
be searched for.
4. Optional: Modify your selection in the selected camera list.
Remove a Camera Click and then click to remove a camera from the list.
Remove All Cameras Click and then click to remove all cameras in the list.
5. Time, specify the time range of this search.
In

Note
You can select Custom Time Interval to set a precise start time and end time.
6. Optional: If there are a large number of resources, check Filter Condition and set the filter
conditions.
Retention Duration (Days)
Set a range of the retention duration of the recorded video footage to filter the cameras.
Recording Integrity Rate

503
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Set a range of the recording integrity rate to filter cameras. The recording integrity rate refers
to the percentage obtained from dividing the actual recording duration by the scheduled
recording time.

Note
For details about recording schedule, refer to Configure Recording Schedule Template .
7. Click Search.
Recording status of each camera are listed on the right, including camera name, camera IP
address, area where the camera belong, video storage type, etc.
Start Time
The time when the camera started recording.
End Time
The latest time when the camera was recording.
Retention Duration (Days)
The retention duration (unit: day) of the recorded video footage refers to the duration
between Start Time and End Time.
Total Length
The total time length of video storage.
Abnormal Total Length
The total time length of the video loss within the scheduled time.
Recording Interruption
The total times of recording interruption within the scheduled time.
8. Optional: Check historical recording status.
1) Optional: Click Rule in the top right corner to view the analytical rules for history videos.

504
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 16-19 Analytical Rules for History Video

2) Click a camera name to open the History Recording Status panel.

505
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 16-20 History Recording Status

Note
The blue parts on the time bars represent the time periods during which video footage were
recorded. The orange parts on the time bars represent the time periods during which video
loss occurred or the time periods during which no recording schedule existed.
3) Select a time period and a status (abnormal or all) from the drop-down lists respectively to
filter data.
4) Optional: Select the number of records displayed on each page of the History Recording
Status panel from the drop-down list at the lower-left corner of the panel.
5) Optional: Move the cursor to the time bar to show the 24 hours on it, and click one hour to
view recording status details within the hour.

506
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

9. Optional: Click Export, and then select a file format and a report type to download the searched
logs as a single file to your local PC.

16.4.6 Search for Call-Back Status of Resource

You can search for the call-back status of cameras on the current site. In search results, you can
view the camera name, storage type, recording copy-back rate, etc.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Maintenance → System Log →
Resource Logs .

Figure 16-21 Search for Resource Call-Back Status

2. In Type, select Call-Back Status.
3. Click to show the area list of the current site and then select the cameras whose logs are to
be searched for.
4. Optional: Modify your selection in the selected camera list.
Remove a Camera Click and then click to remove a camera from the list.
Remove All Cameras Click and then click to remove all cameras in the list.
5. In Time, specify the time range of this search.

Note
You can select Custom Time Interval to set a precise start time and end time.
6. Click Search.

507
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Call-back status of each camera are listed on the right.

7. Optional: Click Export and then select a file format (i.e., Excel or CSV) to download the call-back
status to your local PC.

16.5 Service Manager

After successfully installing the service module(s), you can run the Service Manager and perform
related operations of service, such as starting, stopping, or restarting the service.
Steps
1. Right-click and select Run as Administrator to run the Service Manager.

Figure 16-22 Service Manager Main Page

Note
The displayed items vary with the service modules you selected for installation.
2. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after starting the Service Manager.
Stop All Click Stop All to stop all the services.
Restart All Click Restart All to run all the services again.
Stop Specific Select one service and click to stop the service.
Service
Edit Service Click the service name to edit the port of the service.

Note
If the port number of the service is occupied by other service, the port No.
will be shown in red. You should change the port number to other value
before the service can work properly.

Open Service Select one service and click to go to the installation directory of the
Location service.
3. Optional: Check Auto-Launch to enable launching the Service Manager automatically after the
PC started up.

508
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Click Dual-Server Deployment to deploy the database on another server.

16.6 Set System Data Backup

For purpose of restoring the original system data after a data loss event or recovering data from an
earlier time, you can manually back up system data, or configure a schedule to back up regularly.
System data includes data configured in the system, pictures, received events and alarms, face
comparison data, card swiping data, maintenance data, etc.
Steps

Note
The backups are stored in the SYS server. You can edit the saving path only on the Web Client
running on the SYS server.
1. In the top right of the client, click Maintenance and Management → Back Up and Restore
System Data .
2. Select the Back Up tab.
3. In Type, select the system data that you want to back up.
Configured Data
Data configured via the Web Client, including resources, user permissions, etc. It is selected
by default.
Configured Pictures
Pictures uploaded when configuring maps, persons, vehicles, etc.
Maintenance Data
Maintenance data includes received events/alarms, attendance records, visitor data, etc.

Note
● Person access records are the access records on the card readers of doors with credentials.

● Device recorded data includes the data recorded by the access control devices, elevator

control devices, video intercom devices and alarm inputs of these devices, and other
records except access records on the doors.
4. Set a backup schedule to run backup regularly.
1) In How Often, select the frequency to back up the system data.
2) In Which Day and When, specify which time to back up.
3) In Max. Number of Backups, set the maximum number of backup files. Old backup files will
be automatically deleted.

Note
The value ranges from 1 to 5.
5. Save the settings.
- Click Save to save the backup schedule.

509
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Click Save and Back Up Now if you need to back up the system data immediately.

16.7 Restore System Data

When an exception occurs, you can restore the system data if you have backed up system data
before.
Before You Start
Make sure you have backed up system data. Refer to Set System Data Backup for details.
Steps

Note
System data recovery will restore the system to an earlier state, and thus the data added after
backup date will be lost.
1. In the top right of the client, click Maintenance and Management → Back Up and Restore
System Data .
2. Select the Restore tab.
3. Select a backup file to be restored.

Figure 16-23 Restore System Data

4. Click Restore to confirm the system data recovery.

510
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

What to do next
After restoring the system data, you must reboot the SYS service via Service Manager and log in to
Web Client again.

16.8 Export Configuration File

You can export and save configuration data to local disk, including remote site configurations,
recording settings and resource configurations.
Steps
1. In the top right of the client, click Maintenance and Management → Export Configuration
Data .
2. Select the configuration data types that you want to export.
3. Click Export to download the data to the local PC.

Note
The configuration data file is in CSV format.

511
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 17 Evidence Management Center

In the Evidence Management Center, you can manage evidence and the unlinked files (including
pictures, videos, audios and other files), which contain important information about incidents such
as traffic accidents and violent crimes in case of the need for settling disputes or legal cases.

17.1 Basic Settings

You can set the storage location for evidence and set custom items to define the evidence type, on-
site organization, and result/conclusion, all of which containing the information about evidence.
This configuration will affect the functionality of evidence management on the Client.
In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Evidence Management Center →
Basic Settings .
Storage Location
Set the storage location to Local Storage or SFTP.

Note
● If SFTP is selected as the storage location, the following fields are required: address, port,
user name, and password.
● If Local Storage is selected as the storage location, you can select the local resource pool.

Evidence Type
You can add or delete the type of accident or suspect incident recorded in the evidence, such as
theft, robbery, attack, and missing person.
On-Site Organization
You can add or delete the organization or personnel on the site, which is responsible for
collecting the evidence of the accident or suspect incident, such as police, ambulance, and fire
department.
Result/Conclusion
You can add or delete the result/conclusion of incidents based on the evidence collected from
the on-site organization, such as arrested, warned, and injured.

17.2 Add Evidence

You can add evidence about incidents such as traffic accidents and violent crimes in case of the
need for settling disputes or legal cases. You can set detailed information for the added evidence,
including the evidence name, ID, type, tag, on-site organization, result/conclusion, status, and

512
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

time. Also, you can upload the file (including pictures, audios, videos, Excel files, CSV files, PDF
files, and others) as the evidence content from cameras or local PC.
Before You Start
Make sure you have configured basic settings. For details, refer to Basic Settings .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Evidence Management Center →
Evidence .
2. Select Evidence Management on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Evidence page.

513
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 17-1 Add Evidence

4. Create a name for the evidence.
The evidence ID will be generated automatically on the Client. You can edit the evidence ID
which should be 1 to 64 letters or digits.

514
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Set the type, tag, on-site organization, result/conclusion, status, event time (start time and end
time of the evidence event), or description for the evidence.
6. Optional: Set the mode of adding files as the evidence.
- Select Local and click Upload to upload files (such as pictures, audios, and videos) from the
local PC for the evidence content.
- Select Camera, check cameras in the Linked Camera list, select the uploading mode, and set
the corresponding parameters for the selected uploading mode. If you select Upload at
Specified Time, you should specify the start time and end time of file uploading and
recording. If you select Upload when Wi-Fi Detected, the files will be automatically uploaded
once the Wi-Fi is detected and connected, so you are only required to specify the start time
and end time of file recording.

Note
If the uploading mode is Upload when Wi-Fi Detected, the Client only supports uploading
evidence from cameras linked to the same device.
7. Finish adding the evidence.
- Click Add to add the evidence and back to the Evidence Management page.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other evidence.
8. Optional: Perform further operations after adding evidence(s) if needed.
Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the latest view of evidence list.
Evidence
View Details Click the evidence name to view the evidence's basic information and
and Edit operation records. You can also edit the evidence's basic information, such
Evidence as the evidence content, type, and tag.
Delete Evidence Select the evidence(s) and click Delete to delete the evidence(s).
Filter Evidence Click on the upper right corner of the Evidence Management page, enter
a keyword in the search box or set filter conditions, and click Filter to filter
the target evidence(s).
Enable/Disable Click Disable Evidence to disable the evidence if the related case is settled,
Evidence or click Enable Evidence to enable the selected evidence if the related-case
is pending.
Export Evidence Click Export to export the selected evidence record(s) in Excel, CSV, or PDF
Record format.

Note
You can check Include Evidence File to export the attached evidence file.

515
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

17.3 Manage Unlinked Files

The unlinked files refer to the files about incidents such as traffic accidents and violent crimes in
case of the need for settling disputes or legal cases, but have not been linked with any evidence.
You can manage the unlinked files, such as adding and viewing the files by category (pictures,
videos, audios, and others). You can also link the added files with the specific evidence.

17.3.1 Add and View Unlinked Files

You can add the files which are unlinked with evidence(s). For the added unlinked file(s), you can
perform more operations such as viewing the added files by category, filtering and exporting the
unlinked files.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Evidence Management Center →
Evidence .
2. Select File Management on the left.

Figure 17-2 File Management Page

3. Click Add.
4. Select the pictures, videos, audios, or other files from local PC to add.
5. Optional: Perform further operations if needed.
View the Unlinked At the top of File Management page, you can view the total number of
Files by Category unlinked files or the number of categorized files, including pictures,
videos, audios, and others. You can also click each category to view all
of the corresponding files information, including the file name and
uploading time.
Filter the Unlinked Click in the upper right corner to unfold the filter pane, enter the
Files evidence name in the search box or select the creation time, and then
click Filter to filter the target evidence.

516
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Refresh the You can click Refresh to refresh the file list.
Unlinked Files
Floating Window Hover your cursor on the added picture to view the enlarged picture in
Display a floating window.
Link the Unlinked For details, refer to Link Files with Evidence .
Files to Evidence
Export the Select the unlinked file(s) and click Export to export the file(s).
Unlinked Files
Note
For viewing the file exporting records, refer to Manage Operation
Records .

Delete the Select the unlinked file(s) and click Delete to delete the selected file(s).
Unlinked Files

17.3.2 Link Files with Evidence

You can link the added file with the existing evidence or newly added evidence. The linked files
recorded in the evidence can be used as materials in case of the need for settling disputes or legal
cases.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added the file(s). For details, refer to Add and View Unlinked Files .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Evidence Management Center →
Evidence → File Management .
2. Select the unlinked file(s) in the list.
3. Click Link Evidence to enter the Link Evidence pane.

517
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 17-3 Link Files with Evidence

4. Select the linking mode.
- Select Link Existing Evidence and enter the evidence name/ID/tag/description in the Select
Evidence box to select the existing evidence for linking.
- Select Create New Evidence and create a new evidence for linking.

Note
For details about adding evidence, refer to Add Evidence .
5. Click Save.
The linked files will not be displayed in the list.

518
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

17.4 Manage Operation Records

You can manage the evidence operation records, including viewing or deleting the upload/
download records of evidence or files from the local PC or cameras.
In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Evidence Management Center →
Operation Record .

Upload Record
On the Upload Record page,you can view the records (including evidence or file size and upload
status) of the evidence or files uploaded from local PC or related cameras.
You can also search for records by name, check a record and click / / in the Operation
column to pause/start/retry the upload task. Or you can check record(s) and click Delete to delete
the selected record(s).
Download Record
On the Download Record page, you can view the records ((including evidence or file size and
download status) of exporting evidence or files on the platform.
You can also search for records by name, check a record and click / / in the Operation
column to pause/start/retry the download task. Or you can check record(s) and click Delete to
delete the selected record(s).

519
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 18 Video Management

In the Video module, you can set video basic parameters such as volume, video storage path, and
recording, perform live view, playback, and PTZ control, as well as configure parameters for other
important functions such as intelligent recognition, self-learning library, panorama tracking, and
visual tracking.
The two flow charts below show the process of configurations and operations required for viewing
videos of encoding devices and other related functions on current site and remote site
respectively.

520
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

View Videos of Encoding Devices on the Current Site

521
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Table 18-1 Flow Chart Description

Procedure Description
Add Encoding Device to Add encoding device to the current HikCentral Professional site by
Current Site online detection, IP address, port segment, Hik-Connect DDNS,
device ID, device ID segment, etc.
For details, see Manage Encoding Device .
Add Encoding Device to Group encoding devices to different areas according to the locations
Area of the devices for convenient management.
For details, see Area Management .
Add Camera to Map Add cameras to a map as hot spots to view videos on map. After that,
you can get the video information and camera location information
at the same time.
For details about adding cameras to map, see Add Hot Spot on Map .
Configure Recording and Define the periods during which video recording is activated. And set
Storage the storage location for the recorded video footage and the uploaded
pictures (e.g., alarm related pictures).
For details about configuring recording and storage, see Configure
Storage and Recording .
Configure Event and Alarm Configure linkage actions for the events detected by the encoding
devices.
For details, see Event and Alarm .
Configure Others You can configure other video related functions including visual
tracking, panorama tracking, intelligent recognition, and dock station
group.
● Configure Visual Tracking: Visual tracking is a target tracking

function that allows you to track a target (e.g., a suspect) moving

across fields of view of multiple cameras by switching views of
camera nearly seamlessly. For details about the configuration, see
Configure Visual Tracking .
● Configure Panorama Tracking: Panorama Tracking is a target

tracking function based on the linkage between a box/bullet

camera and a speed dome. When a VCA event is detected or a
target is selected manually, the bullet/box camera, through its
video analysis function, can work together with the speed dome to
locate, zoom in, and track the target.
For details about configuring this function, see Configure
Panorama Tracking .

522
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Procedure Description
● Configure Intelligent Recognition: Intelligent recognition refers to
the recognition of faces, body features, or behaviors, etc., by
intelligent analysis devices added to the platform. For details
configuring this function, see Intelligent Recognition .
● Configure Dock Station Group: A dock station group refers to a
group of persons (e.g., police officers) related to a same dock
station — a data collector which can automatically detect and back
up law-enforcement data and evidence data from body camera(s)
connected to it. After relating persons to a dock station, the videos
and pictures stored on the persons' body cameras can be copied to
the dock station.
For details about configure dock station group, see Add Dock
Station Group .
Start Live View or Playback Start playing live videos or video footage of the encoding devices.
You can also manage view and favorites. For details, see Video
Application .

523
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

View Videos of Encoding Devices on Remote Site

Table 18-2 Flow Chart Description

Procedures Description
Make Sure Encoding Make sure encoding devices has been added to a remote site by the
Devices Have Been Added administrator of the site.
Make Sure Related Make sure recording and storage configurations and other required
Configurations Have Been configurations have been done by the administrator of the site.
Done
Add Remote Site to Add the remote site to the current site under the prerequisite that
Central System the latter has the Remote Site Management (RSM) module. The
HikCentral Professional site with the RSM module is also called the
Central System.

524
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Procedures Description
For details about adding remote site to a Central System, see Add
Remote Site by IP Address or Domain Name , Add Remote Site
Registered to Central System , or Add Remote Sites in a Batch .
View Videos of Encoding Select the remote site and then select an encoding device on it to
Devices on Remote Site view the live video and video footage of the device.
For details, see Video Application .

18.1 Flow Chart of Video Management

The two flow charts below show the process of configurations and operations required for viewing
videos of encoding devices and other related functions on current site and remote site
respectively.

View Videos of Encoding Devices on the Current Site

Table 18-3 Flow Chart Description

Procedure Description
Add Encoding Device to Add encoding device to the current HikCentral Professional site by
Current Site online detection, IP address, port segment, Hik-Connect DDNS,
device ID, device ID segment, etc.

525
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Procedure Description
For details, see Manage Encoding Device .
Add Encoding Device to Group encoding devices to different areas according to the locations
Area of the devices for convenient management.
For details, see Area Management .
Add Camera to Map Add cameras to a map as hot spots to view videos on map. After that,
you can get the video information and camera location information
at the same time.
For details about adding cameras to map, see Add Hot Spot on Map .
Configure Recording and Define the periods during which video recording is activated. And set
Storage the storage location for the recorded video footage and the uploaded
pictures (e.g., alarm related pictures).
For details about configuring recording and storage, see Configure
Storage and Recording .
Configure Event and Alarm Configure linkage actions for the events detected by the encoding
devices.
For details, see Event and Alarm .
Configure Others You can configure other video related functions including visual
tracking, panorama tracking, intelligent recognition, and dock station
group.
● Configure Visual Tracking: Visual tracking is a target tracking

function that allows you to track a target (e.g., a suspect) moving

across fields of view of multiple cameras by switching views of
camera nearly seamlessly. For details about the configuration, see
Configure Visual Tracking .
● Configure Panorama Tracking: Panorama Tracking is a target

tracking function based on the linkage between a box/bullet

camera and a speed dome. When a VCA event is detected or a
target is selected manually, the bullet/box camera, through its
video analysis function, can work together with the speed dome to
locate, zoom in, and track the target.
For details about configuring this function, see Configure
Panorama Tracking .
● Configure Intelligent Recognition: Intelligent recognition refers to

the recognition of faces, body features, or behaviors, etc., by

526
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Procedure Description
intelligent analysis devices added to the platform. For details
configuring this function, see Intelligent Recognition .
● Configure Dock Station Group: A dock station group refers to a
group of persons (e.g., police officers) related to a same dock
station — a data collector which can automatically detect and back
up law-enforcement data and evidence data from body camera(s)
connected to it. After relating persons to a dock station, the videos
and pictures stored on the persons' body cameras can be copied to
the dock station.
For details about configure dock station group, see Add Dock
Station Group .
Start Live View or Playback Start playing live videos or video footage of the encoding devices.
You can also manage view and favorites. For details, see Video
Application .

View Videos of Encoding Devices on Remote Site

527
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Table 18-4 Flow Chart Description

Procedures Description
Make Sure Encoding Make sure encoding devices has been added to a remote site by the
Devices Have Been Added administrator of the site.
Make Sure Related Make sure recording and storage configurations and other required
Configurations Have Been configurations (refer to configuration descriptions in Table 18-3 )
Done have been done by the administrator of the site.
Add Remote Site to Add the remote site to the current site under the prerequisite that
Central System the latter has the Remote Site Management (RSM) module. The
HikCentral Professional site with the RSM module is also called the
Central System.
For details about adding remote site to a Central System, see Add
Remote Site by IP Address or Domain Name , Add Remote Site
Registered to Central System , or Add Remote Sites in a Batch .
View Videos of Encoding Select the remote site and then select an encoding device on it to
Devices on Remote Site view the live video and video footage of the device.
For details, see Video Application .

18.2 Configure Storage and Recording

Before you can play back video files recorded by cameras, you need to set the time periods for
video recording and the location for storing video files and pictures first. Also, before you can
import pictures (e.g., static e-map picture) and view pictures (e.g., alarm-related pictures)
uploaded from devices, you need to set storage locations for these pictures and set related
parameters.
HikCentral Professional provides four storage locations (encoding devices, Hybrid Storage Area
Network, Cloud Storage Server, and pStor) for storing the recorded video files of the cameras.
Encoding Device
Store video files on the encoding devices (i.e., DVR, NVR, and network camera) locally. Take NVR
for an example, the video files recorded by the cameras linked to it will be stored in its storage
medium (e.g., HDDs, Net HDDs, and SD/SDHC cards) if you select Encoding Device as the storage
location.
To store video files in this way, you need to make sure the encoding device is equipped with a
storage medium and the storage medium should have been formatted.
Perform the following operations to format storage medium if required:

528
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Go to the remote configuration page of the encoding device ( → All Modules → General →
Resource Management → Encoding Device → ), and then click Storage → Storage
Management → HDD Management → Format to initialize the selected storage device.
Hybrid Storage Area Network
Store the video files in the added Hybrid Storage Area Network. For details about adding Hybrid
Storage Area Network, refer to Add Hybrid Storage Area Network .
Cloud Storage Server
Store the video files in the added Cloud Storage Server. For details about adding Cloud Storage
Server, refer to Add Cluster Storage Server .
pStor
Store the video files in the added pStor, which is the storage access service used for managing
local HDDs and logical disks. For details about adding pStor, refer to Add pStor .
pStor Cluster Service
pStor Cluster Service is a service that can manage multiple pStors. When there are multiple
pStors storing a large number of video files, use pStor Cluster Service to manage these pStors. For
details about adding pStor Cluster Service, refer to Add pStor Cluster Service .

18.2.1 Configure Recording for Cameras on Current Site

For the cameras on the current site, HikCentral Professional provides five storage methods (storing
on encoding devices, Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, pStor or pStor Cluster
Service) for storing the video files of the cameras according to the configured recording schedule.
You can get device's recording settings when adding camera to an area.
Before You Start
Encoding devices need to be added to the HikCentral Professional for area management. Refer to
Resource Management for detailed configuration about adding devices.
Steps
1. Enter the Recording Setting tab.
1) In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Area .
2) Select an area to show its cameras.

Note
For Central System with Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site
(marked with icon) from the drop-down site list to show its cameras.
3) Select a camera and click its name to enter camera settings page.
4) Select the Recording Settings tab.
2. Turn on Main Storage.
3. Select the storage location for storing the recorded video file.

529
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Select the storage type and configure other required parameters.

- Select Real-Time Storage as the storage type to store the recorded video files in the specified
storage location in real time.

Note
● If you select Encoding Device as the storage location, you needn't select the storage type,
but configure the following parameters as real-time storage settings by default.
● If you select Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, pStor, or pStor Cluster
Service, specify a server and (optional) select a Streaming Server to get video streams from
cameras via it.

Recording Schedule Template

Set the template which defines the time periods to record the camera's video.
All-Day Time-Based Template
Record the video for all-day continuously.
All-Day Event-Based Template
Record the video when alarm occurs.
Add New
Set the customized template. For details about setting customized template, refer to
Configure Recording Schedule Template .
View
View the template details.

Note
The event-based recording schedule can not be configured for the Cloud Storage Server,
and the command-based recording schedule can not be configured for the Cloud Storage
Server and pStor.
Stream Type
Select the stream type as main stream, sub-stream or dual-stream.

Note
For storing on Hybrid Storage Area Network, Cloud Storage Server, pStor or pStor Cluster
Service, dual-stream is not supported.
Pre-Record
Record video from periods preceding detected events. For example, when someone opens
a door, you can see what happens right before the door opened.
This field displays when the storage location is set as Encoding Device, Cloud Storage
Server, pStor, or pStor Cluster Service. And it is available for the camera that is configured
with event-based recording.

530
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Post-Record
Record video from periods following detected events.
This field displays when the storage location is set as Encoding Device or Hybrid Storage
Area Network. It is available for the camera that is configured with event-based recording.
Video Expiration
If you select Encoding Device as the storage location , set Video Expiration switch to on
and enter expiration day(s).
Automatically delete the oldest videos after the specified retention period. This method
allows you to define the longest time period to keep the videos as desired and the actual
retention period for the videos depends on the allocated quota.
Enable ANR
If you select the Encoding Device or Hybrid Storage Area Network as the storage location,
check Enable ANR to turn the automatic network replenishment on to temporarily store
the video in the camera when network fails and transport the video to storage device
when network recovers.
- Select Scheduled Copy-Back as the storage type to copy the recorded video files from the
encoding device or pStor to the specified storage location according to scheduled period.

Note
● Make sure you have configured recording schedule stored in the device local storage or
pStor for auxiliary storage first. Otherwise, the scheduled copy-back is not configurable.
● The recordings can be copied only from the encoding device to Hybrid Storage Area
Network, Cloud Storage Server, pStor or pStor Cluster Service, or from pStor to another
pStor.

Copy in
Specify the time period to copy the recorded video files to the specified storage location.
Recording for Copy-Back
Select the type of recorded video file to backup.
Max. Copy-Back Speed (KBps)
Enter the maximum copy-back speed.
5. Optional: Set the Auxiliary Storage switch to ON and configure another storage location for the
video files.

Note
● If Cloud Storage Server, Hybrid Storage Area Network, pStor, or pStor Cluster Service is set as
the auxiliary storage location, you can select Real-Time Storage to store recorded video files

531
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

or select Scheduled Copy-Back to copy recordings from the encoding device or pStor (main
storage) to specified auxiliary storage location according to the scheduled period.
● Before setting Scheduled Copy-Back, make sure you have configured real-time recording

schedule stored in device local storage or pStor for the main storage.
● The recordings can be copied only from the encoding device to Hybrid Storage Area Network,

Cloud Storage Server, pStor or pStor Cluster Service, or from pStor to another pStor.
6. Click Save.

18.2.2 Configure Storage for Imported Pictures and Files

The imported pictures (such as the static e-map pictures and the face pictures in the person list)
and files (such as the broadcast recordings and video recordings) can be stored on the HDD of SYS
server. You can configure the storage locations and the corresponding quotas for them.
Steps

Note
You can configure the storage only when the current Web Client is running on SYS server.
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → System
Configuration → Storage → Storage on SYS Server .
The disks of the SYS server are displayed with current free space and total capacity.
2. Switch on Enable Local Storage.
3. Configure the related parameters for storing pictures.
1) Select the disk to store the imported pictures.

Note
The disk should have at least 1.25 GB of free space for picture storage.
2) Optional: Switch on Set Quota for Pictures and set the storage quota for the pictures.
4. Click Add to add a resource pool for storing files.
1) Enter the name of the resource pool.
2) Select a disk to store the files.

Note
The disk should have at least 9 GB of free space for file storage.
3) Optional: Switch on Restrict Quota for Pictures and set the storage quota for the files.
4) Check Overwrite When Storage Space is Insufficient, and the newly imported files will
overwrite the existing files when the disk space is insufficient.
5) Click Add.
6) Optional: Click Delete or in the Operation column to delete a resource pool.
7) Optional: Click a resource pool name to edit related settings.
5. Click Save.

532
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

18.2.3 Configure Storage for Uploaded Pictures

The pictures uploaded from the devices, such as alarm triggered pictures, captured face pictures,
and captured plate license pictures, can be stored on the HDD of SYS server, Hybrid Storage Area
Network, Cloud Storage Server, pStor, or NVR (Network Video Recorder).
Steps
1. Enter the picture storage setting page.
1) In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → General → Resource
Management → Area → Camera .
2) Select an area to show its cameras.

Note
For Central System with Remote Site Management module, you can select the current site
(marked with icon) from the drop-down site list to show its cameras.
3) Select a camera and click its name to enter the camera settings page.
2. Select the Picture Storage Settings tab.
3. Switch on Picture Storage.
4. Select the storage location from the drop-down list.

Note
● If you select System Management Server, the pictures will be stored on the SYS server. Click

Configuration to view the disk on SYS server and storage quota, which can be edited via the
Web Client running on the SYS server. Refer to Configure Storage for Imported Pictures and
Files for details.
● You cannot configure the storage location for the captured undercarriage pictures, which are

stored on the UVSS device.

5. Click Save to save the uploaded pictures to the specified location.

18.2.4 Configure Recording Schedule Template

Recording schedule is time arrangement for video recording. You can configure the recording
schedules to record video in a certain period. Two default recording schedules are available: All-day
Time-based Template and All-day Event-based Template. All-day Time-based Template can be used
for recording videos for all day continuously, and All-day Event-based Template is for recording
videos when alarm is triggered. You can also customize the recording schedule.
Perform this task when you need to customize the schedule to record the video files.
Steps
1. In the top left comer of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Video Settings →
Recording Schedule Template .
2. Click to enter the Adding Recording Schedule page.

533
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Up to 32 templates can be added.

Figure 18-1 Adding Recording Schedule Template Page

3. Set the required information.
Name
Set a name for the template.
Copy from
Optionally, you can select to copy the settings from other defined templates.
4. Select a recording type and drag on the time bar to draw a time period.

Note
By default, the Time-based is selected.
Time-based
Continuous recording according to the time you arranged. The schedule time bar is marked
with blue.
Event-based
The recording triggered by the alarm (e.g., alarm input alarm or motion detection alarm). The
schedule time bar is marked with orange.
Command-based

534
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The recording triggered by the ATM command. The schedule time bar is marked with green.

Note
Up to 8 time periods can be set for each day in the recording schedule.
5. Optional: Click Erase and click on the time bar to clear the drawn time period.
6. Click Add to add the template and back to the recording schedule template list page.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations on the recording schedule template list page.
View Template Details Click the template to check the detailed settings.
Delete Template Click to delete a template.

18.3 Configure Visual Tracking

Visual tracking allows you to track an individual (such as a suspect) across different areas without
losing sight of her/him. Before you can use this function, you need to associate a camera (hereafter
named as "camera A") with other cameras nearby. After that, icons representing the nearby
cameras will be overplayed on the view of camera A. You can click these icons to redirect to the
associated cameras' views during live view or playback.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Video Settings →
Visual Tracking .
2. Select an area from the area list.
The page will display the thumbnails of the latest view of the cameras that support visual
tracking settings in the selected area.
3. Optional: Check Include Sub-Area to display the available cameras in the sub-area(s) of the
selected area.
4. More the cursor to one of the thumbnail, and then click the appeared Set Visual Tracking to
open visual tracking settings page.
5. Optional: Click Refresh to get the latest view of the camera.
6. Click Add Related Camera to open the camera list panel, and select a camera from the camera
list or search for a specific camera by keywords, and then click OK.
The icon representing the related camera will be displayed on the view of the current camera.
And the thumbnail of the view of the related camera will be listed on the right side.
7. Drag the icon to a proper position on the view according to its actual mounting position.
8. Optional: Hover the cursor over the thumbnail list on the right side, and then click Set Visual
Tracking to set visual tracking for the related camera.

Note
You can repeat this step to set visual tracking for more cameras. After that, you can view the
visual tracking route of different cameras. You can click one camera to view its corresponding
visual tracking image.

535
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 18-2 Set Visual Tracking

9. Optional: Hover the cursor over the thumbnail list on the right side, and then click Delete to
cancel the association between the current camera and its related camera.
10. Click in the upper-left corner to save the above settings and back to the visual tracking page.
The security personnel will be able to use the video tracking function on the Control Client.
Example
Visual Tracking in Hallway
The following picture shows the monitoring image of camera A in a hallway. There are three
directions: B, C, and D, and each direction is monitored by camera B, C, and D respectively.
In this case, you can drag camera B to the B position so as to overlay the icon of camera B on the
monitoring image, and then do similar operations for camera C and camera D. After that, when an
individual passes by the hallway and turns to direction B, the security personnel can click the icon
of camera B on the view of camera A to redirect to the view of camera B.

536
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 18-3 Monitoring Image of Camera A

18.4 Set Network Parameters

You can set parameters for registering the platform without Remote Site Management module (or
Remote Site) to the Central System, and set access mode for encoding and decoding devices.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Video Settings →
Network .
2. Set network parameters.
Register to Central System
Switch on Register to Central System and enter the IP address and port No. of Central System
to allow the system without Remote Site Management module (as we called Remote Site) to
be registered to the Central System. Central System is the system that has Remote Site
Management module and can group multiple Remote Sites together to form a larger-scale
union. The purpose of grouping Central System and Remote Sites is to allow Central System's
users to view and manage resources belonging to multiple Remote Sites simultaneously as if
they were on the same system.

Note
● Before registering to the Central System, make sure you have enabled the Central System
to receive the site registration. Refer to the parameter Receive Site Registration for details.
● Registering to Central System is only available for the system without Remote Site
Management module.
● Open Service Manager (installed on the PC running central system's SYS service), and click
System Management Service if you need to view or edit the Central System's port.

Receive Site Registration

537
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Check the Receive Site Registration to allow the system with Remote Site Management
module (or Central System) to receive the registration from Remote Sites. Remote Site is the
system that does not have Remote Site Management module and can register to Central
System to form a larger-scale union. The purpose of joining Central System and Remote Sites
is to allow Central System's users to view and manage resources belonging to multiple
Remote Sites simultaneously as if they were on the same system.

Note
● If a remote site needs to register to the Central System, it should open the Remote Site's
Web Client and enter Register to Central System to configure the Central System's
parameters. See Set Network Parameters for details.
● Allowing remote site registration is only available for the system with Remote Site
Management module.

Device Access Mode

Set the device access mode as Automatically Judge or Proxy mode to define how the system
accesses all the added encoding devices and decoding devices.
Automatically Judge
The system will automatically judge the condition of network connection and then set the
device access mode accordingly as accessing directly or accessing via Streaming Gateway
and Management Service.
Proxy
The system will access the device via Streaming Gateway and Management Service. It is less
effective and less efficient than accessing directly.

Note
The two parameters Register to Central System and Receive Site Registration are not available
at the same time.
3. Click Save.

18.5 Configure Panorama Tracking

Panorama tracking is a target tracking function based on the linkage between a bullet/box camera
and a speed dome. After you configure panorama tracking on the Web Client, the security
personnel will be allowed to enable this function during the live view of the bullet/box camera on
the Control Client. If this function is enabled, when a Video Content Analysis (VCA) event is
detected by the bullet/box camera, or the security personnel manually select a target, the
bullet/box camera will work together with the speed dome to locate, zoom in, and track the target.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added the device supporting this function.

538
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Video Settings →
Panorama Tracking Settings .
2. Select one area on the area list.
3. At the thumbnail center, click Configure Panorama Tracking to open the Panorama Tracking
Settings window.
4. Select a speed dome from the list for linking the camera to the speed dome.
5. Select Manual Calibrating or Auto Calibrating as calibration mode and click Next.
6. Calibrate the camera and the linked speed dome, and then click Next.
- Manual Calibrating: In Manual Calibrating mode, click Add Calibration Point, and click the
position on the left image of box/bullet camera to add a calibration point. Select the
calibration point, and then pan, tilt, and zoom in or out the view of speed dome by digital
zoom and PTZ control to make sure the live view of speed dome and the target position of the
camera are mostly same.

Figure 18-4 Manual Calibrating

Note
● You can repeat the operations to add more calibration points. At least 4 calibration points

should be added. It is recommended to add at least 9 calibration points in one scene. For
higher tracking precision, up to 12 calibration points are required.
● Click the added calibration point, and you can move it to other position, or delete it.

● It is recommended to place calibration points at distinct positions in live image (for

example, corners). If no distinct position is available, you can place the points at something
(for example, box, stool, or people) to mark the position.
- Auto Calibrating: In Auto Calibrating mode, click Start Calibration to add calibration points
automatically.

539
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 18-5 Auto Calibrating

Note
You should avoid using auto calibrating for vast similar scenes (for example, lake, lawn, or
public square) or dark scenes (for example, night scenes).
7. Set other parameters.
Auto-Tracking
If Auto-Tracking is checked, when the VCA event is triggered during live view, the speed
dome will track the target automatically.

Note
You need to configure VCA rule for the bullet/box camera on the device. For more details,
refer to the user manual of the device.
Target Tracking Mode
Track One Target Continuous
The speed dome tracks the target continuously until the target disappears in the scene.
Track One Target for Certain Duration
Select this mode and set the duration of tracking. The speed dome switches to next target
after the set duration time.
Set Tracking Initial Position
Select a preset as tracking initial position, or adjust the view by PTZ control and click Save to
save the preset as tracking initial position. When tracking finishes or timed out, speed dome
returns to the tracking initial position. When tracking initial position is not set, the speed
dome stays where tracking finishes or timed out.
8. Click Save and Test to finish configuring panorama tracking.
To test the panorama tracking settings, click or draw a rectangle on the video of box/bullet
camera, and the speed dome will show the close-up view.
9. Optional: After configuring panorama tracking, perform the following operations.

540
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Edit Panorama Tracking Click Edit to reconfigure panorama tracking.

Settings
Cancel Panorama Tracking Click Cancel Panorama Tracking to delete all configurations
about panorama tracking.

18.6 Intelligent Recognition

Intelligent recognition refers to the recognition and analysis of human face, body features,
behaviors, vehicles in video images based on intelligent algorithms. The platform will record each
recognition and the records can be searched via the Control Client and Mobile Client. The
functionality is useful in various scenarios across industries for purposes such as searching for
fugitive and finding out security threat.

18.6.1 Manage Face Comparison Group

HikCentral Professional supports face recognition and comparison functions. After adding devices
which support face recognition, the devices can recognize faces and compare with the persons in
the system.
On the Web Client, after adding the persons to the person group, the administrator should create a
face comparison group, and then add persons (selected from the person list) to the group before
you can perform face comparison. Finally, the administrator should apply the face comparison
group with person information to the face recognition device to take effect.
When a person's face is detected and it matches or mismatches the person information in the face
comparison group, an event/alarm (if configured) will be triggered to notify the security personnel
and you can view the face comparison information during live view on the Control Client.

Add a Face Comparison Group

You need to add a face comparison group and add persons to the group for face comparison for
further configurations such as intelligent recognition task settings.
Steps

Note
For details about intelligent recognition task settings, see Manage Intelligent Recognition Task .
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent
Recognition → Face Comparison Group .
2. Click to open the Add Face Comparison Group pane.
3. Create a name for the face comparison group.
4. Optional: Enter a description about the face comparison group.

541
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Click Add.
The face comparison group will be displayed in the group list.
6. Optional: Perform further operations.
Edit Face Comparison Select a group from the group list and then click to edit its name
Group and description.
Delete Face Select a face comparison group and click to delete it.
Comparison Group
Add Persons to Face Select a face comparison group and click Add to add new or existing
Comparison Group persons on the platform to the group.
See details in Add Persons to a Face Comparison Group .
Import Persons to Face Select a face comparison group and click Import to batch import
Comparison Group persons to the group.
Choose the method of importing persons. See details in Import
Persons or Profile Pictures .
Delete Persons from Select persons in the group and click Delete to delete them from
Face Comparison the group.
Group Or click → Delete All to delete all persons in the group.
Delete Profile Pictures Select persons in the group and click → Delete Profile Picture
Only to delete the profile pictures of selected persons.
Export All Face a. Click Export.
Information in a Group b. Create a password for decompressing the exported file, and then
confirm it.

Import Face Comparison Group from Device

You can import face picture libraries from an encoding device or a facial recognition server to the
platform as face comparison groups. After you importing the face picture libraries, the face
information contained in them will also be imported.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent
Recognition → Face Comparison Group .
2. Click to open the Import Face Comparison Group from Device pane.
3. Select Encoding Device or Facial Recognition Server from the Device Type field.
All available devices will be displayed.

542
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 18-6 Import Face Comparison Group from Device

4. Click to show the face comparison group(s) of a device.
5. Select face comparison group(s), and the click Import.
The Import Face Comparison Group window pops up, displaying the import results.

Note
If a face picture library fails to be imported, you can view the failure details such as library name,
device name, and the failure reason.

Add Persons to a Face Comparison Group

You can add new persons manually to a face comparison group, or add existing persons on the
platform to the group.

543
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent
Recognition → Face Comparison Group .
2. Select a group from the group list.
3. Click Add → Add New Person or Add Existing Person to add persons to the group.
Add New Enter the required person information including ID, first name, and last
Person name, and then click Add or Add and Continue to add the person to the
group.
Add Existing Select persons from the person list, and then click Add.
Person
Note
You can check Include Sub-Group to include the persons in the sub-groups.
4. Click on a person's name to add a face picture if the profile picture field is empty.
- Add from Device: Hover the cursor onto the empty profile picture field, click Add from Device,
and then select a device.
- Add by Taking a Picture: Hover the cursor onto the empty profile picture field, and then click
Take a Photo to take a photo.
- Add by Uploading Picture: Hover the cursor onto the empty profile picture field, and then click
Upload Picture to upload a face picture from the local PC.
5. Optional: Perform further operations.
Delete Persons from Select persons in the group and click Delete to delete them from the
Face Comparison group.
Group Or click → Delete All to delete all persons in the group.
Delete Profile Select persons in the group and click → Delete Profile Picture
Pictures Only to delete the profile pictures of selected persons.

Import Persons or Profile Pictures

You can import person information by template, and import profile pictures by zipped profile
pictures and from an enrollment station.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added the enrollment station to the platform if you want to import pictures
from an enrollment station.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent
Recognition → Face Comparison Group
2. Select a face comparison group.
3. Click Import, and click one among Import by Template, Import Zipped Profile Pictures, and
Import from Enrollment Station.

544
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Table 18-5 Import Profile Pictures

Method Description
Import by Template a. Click Download Template on the pane to
download the template.
b. Fill required information into the template,
and then click to select the filled-in
template from the local PC.
c. Check Replace Repeated Person to allow
the system to overwrite the person
information already exists in the face
comparison group when you import the
information.
d. Click Import.
Import Zipped Profile Pictures Click to select a ZIP file from the local PC,
and click Import.
Import from Enrollment Station Set the required information, such as device IP
address, device port, and password.
Apply Face Information
Import specific face information from the
enrollment station to the face comparison
group.
Copy Back Face Information
Copy back all the face information acquired
by the enrollment station to the selected
face comparison group.
Select File
Click Download Template to download a
template and fill in it according to its
prompts, and then click and select the
filled-in template to import specific face
information from the enrollment station to
the selected face comparison group.

545
HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 18-7 Import from Enrollment Station

546
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Apply Face Comparison Group to Device

After setting the face comparison group and adding person(s) to the group, you need to apply the
group settings to the device which supports face comparison so that the camera can compare the
detected faces with the face pictures in the face comparison group and trigger alarms (if
configured). After applying the face comparison group to the device, if the data in the group are
changed (such as adding a person to the group, removing person from the group, etc.), the
platform will automatically apply the data in the group to the device to take effect.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added devices which supports face picture comparison to the system.

● Make sure your license supports facial recognition functionality. Or turn to Home page, select

Maintenance and Management → License Details → , and then click Configuration next to
Facial Recognition Camera to added cameras as facial recognition cameras. Otherwise, facial
recognition will be unavailable in the system.
Steps

Note
● You can only apply face comparison groups to cameras which support face picture comparison.
● The maximum number of groups that can be applied to the camera depends on the camera
capability.

1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent Recognition →
Applying Center .
2. Select a facial comparison group from the group list on the left side.
3. Click Face to Be Applied to display the to-be-applied face information of the selected group.
4. Apply face information to device(s).
- Apply Specific Face Information: Select face information, and then click Apply.
- Apply All Face Information in the Group: Click Apply All.
5. Select the camera(s) to apply the selected face comparison group(s) to.
6. Click Apply to start applying.

18.6.2 Manage Intelligent Recognition Task

You can add an intelligent recognition task to define the conditions such as the device and time for
intelligent recognition. The task types include face comparison, people feature analysis, frequently
appeared person analysis, rarely appeared person analysis, archive analysis, and behavior analysis.

547
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Add Face Comparison Task

You can add face comparison task to define the time, device, face comparison group, similarity
threshold, and so on, for face comparison. Once a face comparison task is added, the security
personnel can view real-time matched face information during live view and search face
comparison records via the Control Client and Mobile Client.
Before You Start
Make sure you have set face comparison groups. For details, see Manage Face Comparison
Group .
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent Recognition →
Intelligent Recognition Task → Face Comparison .
2. Click Add to enter the Add Face Comparison Task page.
3. Set parameters, such as task name, description, and task schedule template.

Note
The parameter marked with a red asterisk is required.
Task Schedule Template
Select a task schedule template from the drop-down list to define the time when the face
comparison functionality is activated.
You can click View to view the details of the scheduled time.

Note
For details about adding task schedule template, see Add Task Schedule Template .
Device for Analysis
Select a type of face comparison device.
Camera
Select camera(s) from the Available list, and then click to add selected one(s) to the
Selected list.
Face Comparison Group
Select face comparison group(s). The faces detected by the specified camera(s) will be
compared with the face pictures in the selected group(s).
Similarity
Drag the slider to adjust the similarity threshold based on your face comparison
requirements. The higher the threshold, the preciser the comparison will be. The lower the
threshold, the higher comparison rate will be.

548
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Once the similarity between a detected face and a face picture in the selected face
comparison group(s) reaches the threshold, the detected face will be recognized and a face
comparison record will be generated.
4. Complete adding this task.
- Click Add to complete adding this task.
- Click Add and Continue to complete adding this task and continue adding more.
The face information in the selected face comparison group(s) will be applied to the selected
camera(s).
5. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding task(s).
Delete a Task Select a task from the task list, and then click Delete.
Delete All Tasks Click next to Delete, and then click Delete All.
Filter Tasks Click and set filter conditions such as task name, and then click Filter.

Add People Feature Analysis Task

You can add a people feature analysis task to define conditions such as time, device(s), and
detection area, for people feature analysis, which recognizes and records body features of the
people appeared in the fields of view of the cameras linked to the people feature analysis device.
Once a people feature analysis task is added, the security personnel can search and view people
feature analysis records via the Control Client and Mobile Client.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent Recognition →
Intelligent Recognition Task → People Feature Analysis .
2. Click Add to enter the Add People Feature Analysis Task page.
3. Set parameters, such as task name, description, and task schedule template.

Note
The parameter marked with a red asterisk is required.
Task Schedule Template
Select a task schedule template from the drop-down list to define the time when the people
feature analysis functionality is activated.
You can click View to view details of the scheduled time.

Note
For details about adding task schedule template, see Add Task Schedule Template .
Device for Analysis
Select a type of people feature analysis device for the execution of people feature analysis.
Camera

549
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Select cameras for detecting persons.

Detection Area
Click Draw Area and the drag the cursor on the image to draw an area for detecting persons.
4. Complete adding the task.
- Click Add to complete adding this task.
- Click Add and Continue to complete adding this task and continue adding more.
5. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding task(s).
Delete a Task Select a task from the task list, and then click Delete.
Delete All Tasks Click next to Delete, and then click Delete All.
Filter Tasks Click and set filter conditions such as task name, and then click Filter.

Add Frequently Appeared Person Analysis Task

You can add a frequently appeared person analysis task to define the time, device(s), appeared
times threshold, and so on, for frequently appeared person analysis, which searches out the
frequently appeared person in a specific area within a specific period. The function is useful for
finding out persons who should not have appeared frequently in a specific area. For example, it can
be used in a jewelry store for detecting persons who may commit robbery.
Before You Start
Make sure you have set facial comparison groups. For details, see Manage Face Comparison
Group .
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent Recognition →
Intelligent Recognition Task → Frequently Appeared Person Analysis .
2. Click Add to enter the Add Frequently Appeared Person Analysis Task page.
3. Set parameters, such as task name, description, and task schedule template.

Note
The parameter marked with a red asterisk is required.
Task Schedule Template
Select a task schedule template from the drop-down list to define the time when frequently
appeared person analysis is activated.
You can click View to view detailed scheduled time.

Note
For details about adding task schedule template, see Add Task Schedule Template .
Device for Analysis
Select the device type for frequently appeared person analysis.

550
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Camera
Select camera(s) for detecting persons.
Face Comparison Group
Select face comparison group(s). The faces detected by the specified camera(s) will be
compared with the face pictures in the selected group(s).
Time Period
Set a time period for counting the appearance times of a detected person.
Appeared Times
Set threshold times for regarding a detected person as a frequently appeared person.
If the times that a person is detected by the specified camera(s) reaches or exceeds the
threshold within the time period you set, he/she will be regarded as a frequently appeared
person.
Counting Interval
Set a time interval for filtering out invalid counting.
If a person is detected for multiple times within the time interval, the system will regard
he/she only appeared for one time.
Similarity
Drag the slider to adjust the similarity threshold based on your facial recognition
requirements. The higher the threshold, the preciser the recognition will be. The lower the
threshold, the higher recognition rate will be.
Once the similarity between a detected face and a face picture in the selected face
comparison group(s) reaches the threshold, the detected face will be recognized and a face
comparison record will be generated.
4. Complete adding this task.
- Click Add to complete adding this task.
- Click Add and Continue to complete adding this task and continue adding more.
5. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding task(s).
Delete a Task Select a task from the task list, and then click Delete.
Delete All Tasks Click next to Delete, and then click Delete All.
Filter Tasks Click and set filter conditions such as task name, and then click Filter.

Add Rarely Appeared Person Analysis Task

You can add a rarely appeared person analysis task to define the time, device(s), appeared times
threshold, and so on, for searching out the rarely appeared person in a specific area within a
specific period. Rarely appeared person analysis is useful for finding out specific persons who shall
appear regularly in a specific area. For example, in a community where many senile people live

551
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

alone, when a senile person rarely leaves home (i.e., rarely been detected by the cameras in the
community), he/she may need living assistance due to health problems.
Before You Start
Make sure you have set facial comparison groups. For details, see Manage Face Comparison
Group .
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent Recognition →
Intelligent Recognition Task → Rarely Appeared Person Analysis
2. Click Addto enter the Rarely Appeared Person Analysis Task page.
3. Set related information, such as task name, description, and task schedule template.

Note
The information marked with a red asterisk is required.
Task Schedule Template
Select a task schedule template from the drop-down list to define the time when rarely
appeared person analysis is activated.
You can click View to view detailed scheduled time.

Note
For details about adding task schedule template, see Add Task Schedule Template .
Device for Analysis
Select the device type for rarely appeared person analysis.
Camera
Select camera(s) for detecting persons.
Face Comparison Group
Select face comparison group(s). The faces detected by the specified camera(s) will be
compared with the face pictures in the selected group(s).
Time Period
Set a time period for counting the appearance times of a detected person.
Reporting Time
The time when the results of rarely appeared person analysis is reported to system each day.
Appeared Times
Set threshold times for regarding a detected person as a frequently appeared person.
If the times that a person is detected by the specified camera(s) is not larger than the
threshold within the time period you set, he/she will be regarded as a rarely appeared
person.
Counting Interval

552
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Set a time interval for filtering out invalid counting.

If a person is detected for multiple times within the time interval, the system will regard
he/she only appeared for one time.
Similarity
Drag the slider to adjust the similarity threshold based on your facial recognition
requirements. The higher the threshold, the preciser the recognition will be.
Once the similarity between a detected face and a face picture in the selected face
comparison group(s) reaches the threshold, the detected face will be recognized and a face
comparison record will be generated.
4. Complete adding this task.
- Click Add to complete adding this task.
- Click Add and Continue to complete adding this task and continue adding more.
5. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding task(s).
Delete a Task Select a task from the task list, and then click Delete.
Delete All Tasks Click next to Delete, and then click Delete All.
Filter Tasks Click and set filter conditions such as task name, and then click Filter.

18.6.3 Applying Center

In Applying Center, you can apply the face comparison group settings to the face recognition
cameras to make the these settings take effect on the cameras. You can also view the cameras that
fail to receive the settings and the face information that fails to be applied to the cameras, and
then apply the face information again.

View Applying Status

You can view the status of the applying of face comparison groups from different perspectives,
including the cameras failed to receive face comparison group, the cameras to which certain face
comparison groups need to be applied, the person information failed to be applied, and the person
information to be applied.
In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent Recognition →
Applying Center .

Cameras Failing to Receive Faces

Select a device from the device list on the left side, and then click a camera on the camera list to
view the details of applying failure, including face comparison group, analysis device, and
exception details (e.g., the device reaches its maximum face comparison group capacity, the face
comparison group reaches its maximum face picture capacity, face pictures not qualified, etc.) If
face pictures are not qualified, you can click to view failure details.

553
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

You can also view network status of the listed camera(s). To ensure the success of the applying of
face information to these camera(s), make sure they are online.
Cameras to Be Applied To
Select a device from the device list on the left side, and then click a camera on the camera list to
view the details of the applying of face comparison groups: the applying status of each face
comparison group that need to be applied to the camera will be list.
You can also view network status of the listed camera(s). To ensure the success of the applying of
face information to these camera(s), make sure they are online.
Faces Failing to Be Applied
Select a face comparison group from the group list on the left side to view the face information
that fails to be applied to devices, and then click a piece of face information to view its exception
details.
Faces to Be Applied
Select a face comparison group from the group list on the left side, and then the faces to be
applied will be displayed on the right side.

Apply Abnormal Applying Record Again

Applying of face information may fail due to various reasons. To ensure recognition of the target
persons in your scenarios, it is important to check the abnormal applying records and apply the
face information again.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent Recognition →
Applying Center .
2. Apply abnormal face applying records again.
- Click Cameras Failing to Receive Faces, select an area from the area list in the left side, and
then click Apply All to apply face information to all the listed camera(s) again.
- Click Cameras to Be Applied To, select an area from the area list in the left side, and then click
Apply All to apply face information to all the listed camera(s) again
- Click Face Failing to Be Applied, select a face comparison group from the group list on the left,
and then select face information and then click Apply to apply the select face information
again, or click Apply All to apply all face information again.
Click Export All to export all persons' information as a compressed Excel file to the local PC.
You need to set a password for decompressing the compressed file.
- Click Faces to Be Applied, select a face comparison group from the group list on the left, and
then select face information and then click Apply to apply the select face information again,
or click Apply All to apply all face information again.

554
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

18.6.4 Add Task Schedule Template

A task schedule template is used for defining the weekly time arrangement for an intelligent
recognition task. An all-day template is available by default. If you apply the all-day template to an
intelligent recognition task, the task will be activated 24*7 hours. If the all-day template cannot
meet your demands, you can add a custom template as required.
Perform the following operations to add a custom template.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video → Intelligent Recognition →
Task Schedule Template .
2. Click to add a schedule template.
3. Create a name for the template.
4. Optional: Select an existing template from the Copy to drop-down list.
5. Edit weekly schedule.
Draw Task Click Draw Task Time and then click a grid or drag the cursor on the time line
Time to draw a time period during which the task is activated.
Set Precise Click Draw Task Time, move the cursor to a drawn period, and then adjust
Time
the period in the pop-up dialog shown as .
Erase Task Click Erase, and then click a grid or drag the cursor on the time line to erase
Time the drawn time period.
6. Click Add.
7. Optional: Select a task from the task list, and then click to delete it.

18.7 Video Application

The HikCentral Professional provides functionality of live view, playback, and local configuration
through web browser.

Note
● If the SYS's transfer protocol is HTTPS, the Video Application module (including Live View,
Playback, and Local Configuration) is available only when accessing the Web Client via Internet
Explorer.
● If the SYS's transfer protocol is HTTP, the Live View and Playback modules are available for
Internet Explorer, Google Chrome, Firefox, and Safari 11 and above. But Local Configuration
module is available for Internet Explorer only.

555
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

18.7.1 Manage View

A view is a window division with resource channels (e.g., cameras and access points) linked to each
window. View mode enables you to save the window division and the correspondence between
cameras and windows (or correspondence between map and window) as the default so that you
can quickly access these channels and/or map later. For example, you can link camera 1, camera 2,
and camera 3 located in your office to the certain display windows and save them as a view called
office. Then, you can access the view office and these cameras will display in the linked window
quickly.
Perform this task when you need to get quick access to a certain set of channels for live view or
playback.

Note
● For live view, the view mode can save resource type, resource ID, stream type, position, and
scale after digital zoom, preset No., and fisheye dewarping status.
● For playback, the view mode can save resource type, resource ID, position, and scale after digital
zoom, and fisheye dewarping status.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. Click View to enter the View page.
3. Optional: Add a custom view group.
1) Select Public View or Private View to add the view group.

Note
The view groups and views that belong to the private view group are hidden from the other
users.
2) Click .
3) Create a name for the group or use the default name.
4) Click OK to add this view group.
4. Add a view.
1) Select a view group.
2) Click .
3) Create a name for the view or use the default name.
4) Click Add to select cameras.
5) Select a stream type for each camera in the Stream Type column, or you can click Set Stream
Type to select a stream type.
6) Select a preset you want to switch to for each camera.
7) Optional: Click Up or Down to adjust the camera order.
8) Optional: Select camera(s) and click Delete to delete them.
9) Select a layout for the view.

556
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

10) Select a switching interval or click Custom Time Interval to set the switching interval among
the selected cameras.
11) Click Add to add this view.
5. Optional: You can also Drag the channels to the window or double-click the channels to start live
view or playback. Save the view with the displayed view division and channels.
- Click → Save View to save the current window division mode and displayed channels and
(or) map as the selected view.
- Click → Save as View to save the current window division mode and displayed channels
and (or) map as a new view by creating view name (optional) and selecting the view saving
path.

Note
If the added view is not selected before, you can also save the current window division and
displayed channels as a new view.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the view.
Edit View Click to edit the view settings, such as the view name and camera's
stream type.
Add Camera/Map a. Go to Monitoring.
to the Existing b. Select camera(s) or map.
View
Note
You can press Ctrl on the keyboard to select multiple cameras.
c. Click → Save View to save the camera(s) or map to an existing
view.
Delete a. Move the cursor to a camera or a map in a view.
Camera/Map from b. Click to close the current camera or map window.
View c. Click → Save View to save the current view.
Live View/ Select a view, and click → Play to start live view or playback in view
Playback in View mode. See Start Live View in View Mode and Start Playback in View
Mode Mode for details.
Delete View or Click to delete the custom view or view group.
View Group
Reset View Click to restore the view to its initial settings.
Search View Click , and enter keywords in the search box to search for target
view(s).

18.7.2 Live View

In the Live View module of Web Client, you can view the live video of the added cameras and do
some basic operations, including picture capturing, recording, PTZ control, and so on.

557
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Start Live View in Area Mode

You can start the live view of cameras grouped in an area.
Before You Start
Make sure you have grouped cameras into areas. Refer to the Add Camera to Area for Current Site
or Add Camera to Area for Remote Site for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
The areas which the current user has permission to access are listed and the resources which
the user has permission to access are shown in the corresponding areas.

Note
For setting the user permission, refer to Role and User Management .
2. Optional: Click in the upper-right corner to change live view window division.
Average
All the divided windows are distributed in average.
Highlighted
The highlighted window is used to display the live video of the critical camera.
Horizontal
The divided windows are distributed horizontally in the window.
Vertical
The divided windows are distributed vertically in the window.
Others
Other types of window division besides the types above.
3. Start live view.
For One Camera Drag a camera to the display window to start the live view of the camera,
or double-click the camera to start the live view in a free display window.
For All Cameras Drag an area to a display window, and click Play in Batch, or double-click
in The Same the area to start the live view of all camera in the area.
Area
Note
The display windows automatically adapt to the number of cameras in
the area.
4. Optional: When an alarm is triggered on a resource, the title bar of the resource's live view
window will turn red. Click the red title bar to view the alarm information and acknowledge the
alarm.

558
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Start Live View in View Mode

You can quickly start the live view of the cameras managed in a view.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added at least a view. Refer to Manage View for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. Select View on the left.
3. Start the live view of the cameras related to the view.
- Double click a view.
- Move the mouse cursor to a view, and click → Play beside the view name.

Note
You can switch the added views from the drop-down list above the live view window.
4. Optional: Perform further operations after starting live view.
View Alarm When an alarm is triggered on a resource, the title bar of the resource's
Information live view window will turn red. Click the red title bar to view the alarm
information and acknowledge alarm.
Adjust Windows' Drag the windows to adjust the sequences.
Sequence
Note
The changed sequence will be restored after restarting live view in view
mode.

Stop Live View Click that appears in the upper-right corner when the mouse pointer is
over the display window. You can also click above the display window
to stop the live view of all the display windows.

Auto-Switch Cameras in an Area

You can play the live view of all cameras in an area in turn in one window and perform further
operations after auto-switch starts.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
The areas which the current user has permission to access are listed and cameras which the user
has permission to access are shown in each area.

Note
For setting the user permission, refer to Role and User Management .

559
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Start auto-switch in the area.

- Drag an area to the live view window and select Single-Screen Auto-Switch to start the auto-
switch the cameras of the area in the selected display window.
- Click on the right side of the area name and click Area Auto-Switch to switch the cameras
of the area in the live view window.
3. Optional: Move the cursor to the live view window and perform further operations after auto-
switch starts.
Adjust Switching Click or in the lower-left corner of the live view window to adjust
Interval the interval of the auto-switch.
View Previous or Click or in the lower-left corner of the live view window to go to
Next Camera the previous or next camera.
Pause Click in the lower-left corner of the live view window to pause the
auto-switch.

PTZ Control
The Control Client provides PTZ control for cameras with pan/tilt/zoom functionality. You can set
the preset, patrol and pattern for the cameras on the PTZ control panel.

Note
The PTZ control function should be supported by the camera.

560
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 18-8 PTZ Control Panel

The following buttons are available on the PTZ control panel:

Lock the PTZ for a designated time period. When the PTZ is locked, users with
lower PTZ control permission levels cannot change the PTZ controls.

Note
For details about setting the PTZ control permission level, refer to the User
Manual of HikCentral Professional Web Client.

Direction Button, Auto-scan and PTZ speed.

561
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

/ Zoom in or out the video for cameras that do not have their own optical zoom
capabilities. Click again to disable the function.
/ Used for adjusting the luminance of the image. The larger the iris is, the more
the light enters, and the brighter the image will be.
/ Click Focus + move the focal point forward, and click Focus - to move the focal
point backward.
Auxiliary Focus: Click to focus automatically.
3D Positioning: Click on the desired position in the video image and drag a
rectangle area in the lower right direction, then the dome system will move
the position to the center and allow the rectangle area to zoom in. Click to
drag a rectangle area in the upper left direction to move the position to the
center and allow the rectangle area to zoom out.
Light: Click to fill light.
Wiper: Use the wiper to clear the dust on the camera lens.
Lens Initialization: Initialize the lens and focus again for a clear image.
Manual Tracking: For speed dome with auto-tracking function, enable the
auto-tracking (via right-click menu) for it and click the icon to manually track
the target by clicking on the video.
Manual Face Capture: Click this button, and hold the left mouse button to
select a face in the image to capture it. The picture will be uploaded to the
server for viewing.
Park Action: For the speed dome with one-touch park function, click the icon
and the speed dome saves the current view to the preset No.32. The device
starts to park at preset No. 32 automatically after a period of inactivity (park
time). For setting the park time, refer to user manual of the speed dome.
Auto Track: For cameras support and tracking, click the icon and select the
target (person or vehicle) in the live view to arm and track this target.
● In the live video display window, you can click the icon to enable window PTZ control. Move
the cursor to the direction you desired and click on the image to pan or tilt.
● You can click and drag the cursor with a white arrows to the direction you desired for a quick
direction control.
● You can click to get device PTZ configuration.

562
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Configure Preset
A preset is a predefined image position which contains configuration parameters for pan, tilt,
zoom, focus and other parameters. You can also set a virtual preset after enabling digital zoom.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application →
Video Application .
2. Start live view of the PTZ camera.
3. Click to enter the PTZ Control mode.
4. Click to enter the PTZ preset configuration panel.
5. Use the direction buttons and other buttons to control the PTZ movement.
6. Select a PTZ preset number from the preset list and click .
7. Create a name for the preset in the pop-up window.
8. Click OK to save the settings.

Note
● Up to 256 presets can be added.

● The unconfigured preset is gray.

● The configured preset is highlighted.

9. Optional: After adding the preset, you can do one or more of the followings:
Call Preset Double-click the preset, or select the preset and click .
Edit Preset Select the preset from the list and click .
Delete Preset Select the preset from the list and click .
Get Device PTZ Configuration You can click to get device PTZ configuration.

Configure Patrol
A patrol is a scanning track specified by a group of user-defined presets (including virtual presets),
with the scanning speed between two presets and the dwell time of the preset separately
programmable.
Before You Start
Two or more presets for one PTZ camera need to be added. Refer to Configure Preset for details
about adding a preset.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application →
Video Application .
2. Start live view of the PTZ camera.
3. Click to enter the PTZ Control mode.

563
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Optional: You can click to get device PTZ configuration.

5. Click to enter the PTZ patrol configuration panel.
6. Add presets to the patrol.
1) Click on the right side of a patrol.
2) Select Device Preset or Virtual Preset as the preset type.
3) Click to add a configured preset, and set the dwell time and patrol speed.

Note
● The preset dwell time ranges from 15 to 30s.

● The patrol speed ranges from 1 to 40.

● The unconfigured patrol is gray.

● The configured patrol is highlighted.

4) Repeat the above steps to add other presets to the patrol.

Note
By default, the first preset is added to the patrol list. Double-click the preset, speed, and dwell
time to access a drop-down configuration list.

Figure 18-9 Configure Patrol

7. Optional: Perform the following operations after you add the preset.
Edit Added Preset Double-click the corresponding field of the preset to edit the
settings.
Remove Preset from Click to remove the preset from the patrol.
Patrol
Adjust Preset Sequence Click or to adjust the presets sequence.
8. Click OK to save the patrol settings.

Note
Up to 8 patrols can be configured.
9. Optional: After setting the patrol, you can do one or more of the followings:
Call Patrol Click to start the patrol.

564
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
When the patrol is working, it will stop if you start performing PTZ control
including direction button control, zoom in/out, focus +/-, iris +/-, etc. The
patrol will continue working after you have stopped PTZ control for 15
seconds.

Stop Calling Click to stop the patrol.

Patrol

Configure Pattern
Patterns can be set to record the movement of the PTZ.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application →
Video Application .
2. Start live view of the PTZ camera.
3. Click to enter the PTZ Control mode.
4. Click to enter the PTZ pattern configuration panel.
5. Click to start recording the movement path of the pattern.
6. Use the direction buttons and other buttons to control the PTZ movement.
7. Click to stop and save the pattern recording.

Note
Only one pattern can be configured, and the newly-defined pattern will overwrite the previous
one.
8. Optional: After setting the pattern, you can do one or more of the followings:
Call Pattern Click to call the pattern.

Note
When the pattern is working, it will stop if you perform PTZ control including
direction button control, zoom in/out, focus +/-, iris +/-, etc. The pattern will
continue working after you have stopped PTZ control for 15 seconds.

Stop Calling Click to stop calling the pattern.

Pattern
Delete Pattern Click to clear the recorded pattern.

565
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Manual Recording and Capture

You can record video files and capture pictures manually during live view.
Manual Recording
Record the live video during live view if needed and store the video files in the local PC.
Capture
Capture pictures during live view if needed and store the pictures in the local PC.

Manual Recording
During live view, you can record the live video manually and you can export the video as video
evidence.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. Move the cursor to the live view display window to show the toolbar.
3. Click in the toolbar of the display window to start the manual recording. The icon turns to .

Note
During the manual recording, Recording... will display in the upper-right corner of the display
window.
4. Click to stop recording.
A dialog directing to the saving location of the file pops up.

Note
● You can change the saving path of video files in System. For details, see .

● The video cannot be saved if the free space on your disk is less than 2 GB.

5. Optional: Click Open Folder to access the video file folder in the pop-up dialog box after
manually recording.

Capture Pictures
During live view, you can take a quick snapshot of the live video via the Control Client.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. Move the cursor to the live view display window to show the toolbar.
3. Click in the toolbar to capture a picture.
A dialog box directing to the saving location pops up.

566
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can change the saving path of video files in System. For details, see .

● The picture cannot be saved if the free space on your disk is less than 512 MB.

4. Optional: After the dialog box popped up, perform the following operation(s).
Check Click Open Folder in the dialog box to open the folder where the captured pictures
Picture stored to and view pictures.
Edit a. Click Edit in the dialog box to open the Capture window.
Picture

Figure 18-10 Capture Window

b. Press and move the cursor on the picture to draw. For example, you can mark
the suspicious persons in the picture.
c. Click Save As and specify the path to save the edited picture.

Note
The picture cannot be saved if the free space on your disk is less than 512 MB.

View Dewarped Live View of Fisheye Camera

You can set center calibration and view dewarped live view of a fisheye camera in the client.
Dewarping refers to the process of perspective correction of an image, to reverse the effects of
geometric distortion caused by the fisheye camera lens. It allows the user to cover a wide area
with a single device and have a "normal" view of an otherwise distorted or reversed image. Also,
during live view, you can perform more operations such as adjusting view angle and zooming
in/out view.

567
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. Start live view of a fisheye camera.

Note
For details, refer to Start Live View in Area Mode and Start Live View in View Mode .
2. On the toolbar of display window, click to enter the fisheye dewarping mode and view live
view.

Figure 18-11 Fisheye Dewarping

3. Optional: Perform the following operations as desired.
Adjust View Angle Put the cursor on the live video, and drag the video to adjust the view
angle.
Zoom in/out View Put the cursor on the live video, and scroll the mouse wheel to zoom in
or out the view.
Perform PTZ Use the PTZ panel on the left side to perform PTZ control of the camera.
control

568
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Setting pattern is not supported by fisheye cameras.

Customize Icons on Live View Window

You can customize the icons on the toolbar of the live view window, adjust the icon order, and
control whether to always show toolbar on the live view window or not.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. In the top right corner of Live View page, click → Toolbar .
3. In Live View Toolbar section, add or remove the icons to show or hide the icons on the live view
toolbar.
4. Drag the icons in the icon list to adjust the order.

Table 18-6 Icons on Live View Toolbar

Audio Control Turn off/​on the sound and adjust the volume.

Capture Take a snapshot of the current video and save it to the

current PC.

Note
After capturing a picture, a thumbnail will pop up on the
upper-right corner. You can click Search by Picture to
search the captured picture, archive, and identity
verification related with the captured picture.

Record Start manual recording. The video file will be stored in

local PC.
Instant Playback Switch to instant playback mode to view the recorded
video files.
Two-Way Audio Start two-way audio with the camera to get the real-​time
audio from the device to realize voice talk with the person
at the device.
Digital Zoom Zoom in or out the video for cameras that do not have
their own optical zoom capabilities. Click again to disable
the function.
PTZ Control Activate the PTZ icons on the image to pan, tilt, or zoom
the image.

569
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Fisheye Expansion Available for fisheye camera. In the fisheye dewarping

mode, the Control Client will correct the video image and
reverse the effects of geometric distortions caused by the
fisheye camera lens. See View Dewarped Live View of
Fisheye Camera for details.
Switch Stream Type Switch the live view stream to main stream, sub-stream (if
supported), or smooth stream (if supported).

Note
The smooth stream will show if device supports. You can
switch to smooth stream when in low bandwidth
situation to make live view more fluent.

Alarm Output Display the Alarm Output Control page and turn on/​off
the alarm outputs of the connected camera.
Video Enhancement Adjust the video image including brightness, saturation,
etc.
Rotate Image Rotate a image.
Park Action Click the icon and the speed dome will save the current
view to the preset No.32. The device starts to park at
preset No. 32 automatically after a period of inactivity
(park time).

Note
The icons on the toolbar in the live view window vary with the device's capabilities.
5. Optional: Check Always Display Toolbar to always show the toolbar on the live view window.
6. Click Save.

18.7.3 Playback
The video files stored on the local storage devices such as HDDs, Net HDDs and SD/SDHC cards or
the Recording Server can be searched and played back remotely through the web browser.

Normal Playback
You can search video files by area or camera for the Normal Playback and download found video
files to local PC. You can also add a tag to mark important video footage, and so on.

570
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can search video files by the time of the time zone where the device locates in, or by the
time of the time zone where the PC running the Control Client locates in.
● Automatically converting daylight saving time to standard time is supported, or vice versa.
● Synchronous playback or asynchronous playback of devices in different time zones are
supported.

Search Video File

You can search video files by camera, by area, or by time for normal playback. And you can also
filter the searched video files by recording type, tag type, target type and storage location.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. Click Playback to enter the playback page.
3. Drag the camera or area to the display window, or double-click the camera or area to play the
recording of the specified camera(s) in selected window.

Note
The playback window supports up to 16 channels.
Today's recorded video files of the selected camera will be played.
4. Click on the toolbar to set the date and time.

Note
In the calendar, the date with video files will be marked with a triangle.
After selecting the date and time, the matched video files will start playing in the display
window.
5. Optional: Click on the toolbar to select recording type, tag type, target type and storage
location for playback.

Note
To set the storage location for recording, refer to Configure Storage and Recording .

Play Video File

After searching the video files for the normal playback, you can play the video via timeline or
thumbnails.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. Click the Playback tab to enter the playback page.

571
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

3. Select a date with videos to start playing video and show the timeline after searching the video
files.

Note
The video files of different types are displayed in different colors on the timeline.
4. Play video in specified time period by timeline or thumbnails.
- Drag the timeline forward or backward to position the desired video segment.
- Move the cursor over the timeline to take a quick view of video thumbnails (if supported by
the device) and click the appearing thumbnail to play the specific video segment.

Note
● Click / on the right of the timeline bar, or use the mouse wheel to zoom in or zoom out
the timeline.
● Click / to show or hide the thumbnail bar.
● Move the cursor to the top border of the thumbnail bar and drag to adjust the height of the
thumbnails when the cursor changes into . You can also click to lock the thumbnail bar
above the playback timeline, and click to hide the thumbnail bar automatically.

Start Playback in View Mode

You can quickly access the playback of the cameras managed in a view.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added a view. For details, refer to Manage View .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. Click View on the left navigation bar.
3. Click the Playback tab to enter the playback page.
4. Click a view to quickly start the playback of all the cameras related to the view.

Note
You can also quickly switch the added view from the drop-down view list above the display
windows.

Synchronous Playback
You can play the video files of different cameras synchronously. Synchronous playback allows you
to synchronize the display of video from multiple cameras.

572
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
Video files from up to 16 cameras can be played simultaneously.
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. Click the Playback tab to enter the playback page.
3. Start normal playback of at least two cameras.

Note
For detailed configuration about normal playback and playback control, refer to Normal
Playback . Some icons may not be available for synchronous playback.
4. Click Synchronous Playback on the playback toolbar to enable the synchronous playback.
The cameras displayed in Playback will start synchronous playback.
5. Optional: Click Asynchronous Playback on the playback toolbar to disable synchronous
playback.
6. Optional: Click and to perform normal and reverse playback.
7. Optional: Click and to perform single-frame normal and reverse playback.

Note
● No more than 16 cameras are allowed in single-frame normal and reverse playback.

● If you pause one camera, others will be paused in the synchronous playback mode.

8. Optional: Move the cursor to the lower edge of the playback window to access the icons for
further operations.

Note
For details, refer to Customize Icons on Playback Window .

Fisheye Playback
Fisheye playback function allows you to play the fisheye camera's video in fisheye dewarping
mode. Fisheye dewarping mode refers to the process of perspective correction of an image, to
reverse the effects of geometric distortions caused by the fisheye camera lens. Dewarping allows
you to cover a wide area with a single device and have a normal view of an otherwise distorted or
reversed image.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. Click the Playback tab to enter the playback page.
3. Select a fisheye camera from the camera list to start playback.

573
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For detailed configuration about playback and playback control, refer to Normal Playback .
4. Move the cursor to the display window, and click on the appearing toolbar to enter the
fisheye dewarping mode.
5. Drag on the video to adjust the view angle.
6. Scroll the mouse wheel to zoom in or zoom out the view.

Customize Icons on Playback Window

You can customize the icons shown on the toolbar of the playback window, adjust the icon order
and set whether to always display toolbar on the playback window.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. In the top right corner of Playback page, click → Toolbar .
3. In Playback Toolbar section, add or remove the icons to show or hide the icons on the live view
toolbar.
4. Customize playback toolbar.
- Click an icon in the list to add it to the gray frame below to hide the icon. Icons in the gray
frame will be hidden in the toolbar of the playback window.
- Click the icon in the gray frame to add it back to the playback toolbar to show an icon on the
toolbar.
5. Drag the icons in the icon list to adjust icon order.

Table 18-7 Icons on Playback Toolbar

Audio Control Turn off/​on the sound and adjust the volume.
Capture Take a snapshot of the current video and save in the
current PC.

Note
After capturing a picture, a thumbnail will pop up on the
upper-right corner. You can click Search by Picture to
search the captured picture, archive, and identity
verification related with the captured picture.

Clip Clip the video files for current playback and save in the
current PC. You can save the clipped video as evidence,
and set the saving path for the clipped video files. For
details about saving video files as evidence and setting
saving path, see Manual Recording .

574
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Add Tag Add custom tag for the video file to mark the important
video point. You can also edit the tag or go to the tag
position conveniently.
Lock Video Lock the video file and set the locking duration to avoid
deleting the video file and protect the video file from
being overwritten when the HDD is full.

Note
For the camera imported from Remote Site, if the video
files are stored on the encoding device locally, you
cannot lock the video files.

Digital Zoom Zoom in or out the video for cameras that do not have
their own optical zoom capabilities. Click again to disable
the function.

Note
When in software decoding mode, you can also capture
the zoomed in picture after enabling digital zoom
function.

Fisheye Expansion Available for fisheye camera for entering the fisheye
dewarping mode. See Fisheye Playback .
Stream Switch Switch the stream to main stream, sub-stream (if
supported), or smooth stream (if supported).
If the device supports transcoding playback, start
transcoding and you need to set the resolution, frame
rate and bitrate for transcoding.

Note
● The smooth stream will show if device supports. You
can switch to smooth stream when in low bandwidth
situation to make playback more fluent.
● Only video files stored in DVR and I-series NVR support
transcoding playback.

Video Enhancement Adjust the video image including brightness, saturation,

etc.

575
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Two-Way Audio Start two-way audio with the camera to get the real-​time
audio from the device to realize voice talk with the person
at the device.
Rotate Image Rotate a image.

Note
The icons shown on the toolbar in the display window will vary with the device's capabilities.
6. Optional: Check Always Display Toolbar to always display the toolbar on the playback window.
7. Click Save to save the above settings.

18.7.4 Manage Favorites

You can add and manage Favorites on the client. For camera(s) added to the Favorites, you can
quickly view the live view or start the playback.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added camera(s) to area(s). Refer to the Add Camera to Area for Current Site
or Add Camera to Area for Remote Site for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application .
2. Click Favorites on the left navigation bar.

Note
In the Favorites list, two default root Favorites (Favorites and Favorites Shared by Others) are
displayed. You can click to view the sub Favorites and cameras added in these two root
Favorites.
3. Select a parent Favorites.

Note
You can either select the root Favorites or the sub Favorites added under the root one.
4. Add a Favorites under the parent Favorites.
1) Click .
2) Enter the name for Favorites.
3) Optional: Select a parent node from the drop-down list.
4) Optional: Check Online Resource Only to display online resources only on the list.
5) Select the camera(s) to be added to Favorites.
6) Click Save.

Note
Up to 5 levels of Favorites can be added.
5. Optional: Perform the following operations.

576
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Edit Favorites Select a Favorites, and click → Edit on the right side of Favorites' name
to edit its name and add more camera(s) to it if needed.
Share Favorites Select a Favorites, and click → Share on the right side of Favorites'
name to share it with others.

Note
For details about adding user(s), refer to the User Manual of HikCentral
Professional Web Client.

Delete Select a Favorites, and there are two methods to delete it.
Favorites ● Click on the top of the Favorites list, and click OK.
● Click → Delete on the right side of Favorites' name.
View Live ● When in Live View window, select a Favorites, and click → Play All to
View/Playback start viewing the live view of all the camera(s) added in Favorites.
of All Cameras ● When in Playback window, select a Favorites, and click → Play All to
start viewing the playback of all the camera(s) added in Favorites.
Search Camera Enter keywords in the search box above the Favorites list to search for the
in Favorites target camera(s) or Favorites.
Delete Camera Select a camera in Favorites, and click to delete it.
in Favorites

18.7.5 Set Video Parameters

You can set network parameters, picture file format, display parameters, etc.
In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Video → Video Application → .

Table 18-8 Set Video Parameters

Area Parameters Description
Set Network Parameters Network Timeout The default waiting time for the
Client.
Global Stream Select the default stream type
for global usage.
Window Divisions for Main When the number of divided
Stream windows is smaller than the
number you set, the live video
will be displayed by main
stream.

577
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Area Parameters Description

Access Mode Set the device access mode as
Automatically Judge, Proxy,
Directly Access, or Restore
Default mode to define how
the system accesses all the
added encoding devices and
decoding devices. If you select
Proxy, the system will access
the device via Streaming
Gateway and Management
Service, and it is less effective
and less efficient than
accessing directly.
Set File Parameters Picture Format Select the file format for
pictures captured during live
view or playback.
File Saving Path Set the saving path for the files
you will download to your
computer (manually recorded
video files, captured pictures,
etc.).
Set Display Parameters View Scale The image display mode in
each display window in live
view or playback.
Window Scale The scale of the video in live
view or playback. You can set it
set as 4:3 or 16:9.
Display Window No. Display the No. of each window
in Monitoring module.
Display VCA Rule When switched on, the VCA
rule in the live view and
playback will be displayed.
Video Caching Larger frame caching will result
in better video performance. It
is determined based on
network performance,
computer performance, and bit
rate.

578
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Area Parameters Description

Enable Highlight Enable this function to mark
the detected objects with
green rectangles in live view
and playback.
Overlay Transaction When On, displays the
Information transaction information on the
live view and playback image.
Overlay Temperature When On, displays the
Information temperature information on
the live view and playback
image.
GPU Hardware Decoding When On, enables the GPU
decoding for live view and
playback to save CPU
resources.
Low Frame Compensation Set the low frame threshold,
and when the value is reached,
low frame compensation is
enabled.
Time Zone Set the time zone of the client.
Set Audio Parameters Auto Turn On Audio if enabled, when you play
video, the audio will be
automatically turned on.

18.8 Scheduled Capture

Scheduled capture is to set a schedule for cameras so pictures can be automatically captured. You
can also send scheduled reports to a specific email address. Furthermore, you can search for
captured pictures.

18.8.1 Configure Capture Schedule

You can add a capture schedule to determine when and which camera will capture pictures.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Control Client, select → All Modules → Video → Scheduled Capture
→ Capture Schedule .

579
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Click to add a capture schedule.

3. Set a schedule name.
4. Optional: Set a value for capture frequency.
5. Optional: Set a time of starting the task.
6. Select camera(s) and/or presets for capturing.
7. Click Add.
The added schedule will be displayed on the left pane.
8. Optional: Click Test Capture Schedule to see if the selected resource(s) function properly.

18.8.2 Configure Scheduled Report

You can add a scheduled report so that captured pictures will be sent regularly via email.
Before You Start
Make sure you add a capture schedule. For details, see Configure Capture Schedule .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Control Client, select → All Modules → Video → Scheduled Capture
→ Scheduled Report .
2. Click to add a scheduled report.
3. Set the report name, capture schedule, sending time, email template, and report language.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Add
Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .
4. Select the language as Report Language.

Note
By default, the language is the same with the selected language when you log in on the Web
Client.
5. Click Save.
The added report will be displayed on the left pane.

18.8.3 Search for Scheduled Captures

You can search for captures by specify a capture schedule, camera(s), and time.
Before You Start
Make sure you add a capture schedule. For details, see Configure Capture Schedule .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Control Client, select → All Modules → Video → Scheduled Capture
→ Scheduled Capture Search .

580
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Select a capture schedule, resources for capturing, and time.

3. Click Search.
The results will be displayed on the right pane.
4. Optional: You can perform the following operations.
Operation Description
Real-Time Capture Click Real-Time Capture to capture pictures of the selected resources in
real time.
Send Email Select pictures, click Send Email, select an email template, enter remark,
and click OK to send the selected pictures via email.
Export Choose file contents and file format, and click OK.

581
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 19 Intelligent Analysis Report

Reports, created for a specified period, are essential documents, which are used to check whether
a business runs smoothly and effectively. In HikCentral Professional, reports can be generated daily,
weekly, monthly, annually, and by custom time period. The reports can also be added to the
dashboard for browsing at a glance. You can use reports as basis in creating decisions, addressing
problems, checking tendency and comparison, etc.

19.1 Manage Store

HikCentral Professional supports people counting report and heat analysis report of stores. With
the reliable data, store manager can have insight into the customer traffic, dwell rate, tendency of
people amount change around promotion days, and consumers movements of stores. Before
generating reports of stores, you need to add stores to the platform first, and add the resource
group to stores.

19.1.1 Add Store

You should add a store or set an area as store before generating reports according to stores.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Store
Management → Configure Store .
2. Click Add Store or to open the Add Store panel.
3. Set the adding mode to Set Area as Store or Add Store.
4. Set an area as store or add a store.
Set an Area a. Select a site from the drop-down list.
as Store b. Click next to the area to select one or multiple areas of the site from the
drop-down list.
c. Click Add to finish setting the selected area(s) as store(s).
Add a Store a. Enter a store name.
b. Select a site from the drop-down list..
c. Select an area from the drop-down list.
d. Click Add to finish adding a store.

Note
● Up to 1024 stores can be added.

● When an area is set as a store, the area linked map will be linked to the store by default.

● Adding stores in a remote site is supported.

5. Add the resource group (i.e., people counting group and heat analysis group) to the store.

582
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Make sure that the people counting group and heat analysis group are configured. See Add
People Counting Group and Add Heat Analysis Group for details.
1) Select one store from the store list panel.
2) Click People Counting Group or Heat Analysis Group.
3) Click Add Now or Add to open the group adding panel.
4) Select the group to be added to the store.
5) Click Add button to finish adding resource group to the store.

Note
You can click Add in blue font to direct to Add People Counting Group or Add Heat Analysis
Group page.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations for managing added stores.
Edit the Store Select a store and click to edit the store information.
Information
Delete Store(s) ● Delete a single store:
Select a store from the store list panel and click to delete it.
● Batch delete multiple stores:
Check multiple stores of a site and click Delete to delete selected stores.

Note
● You can select Keep Configured Analysis Groups or Clear Configured
Analysis Groups when deleting the store(s).
● When the configured analysis groups belong to different stores, you
need to have the permission of all stores before clearing the analysis
groups.

Edit Opening ● Edit opening hours of a single store:

Hours of Select a store from the store list panel and click on the store details
Store(s) page. Adjust the opening hour and click Save.
● Batch edit opening hours of multiple stores:
Check multiple stores of a site and click Configure Opening Hours.
Adjust the opening hour and click Save.

Note
The opening hours of store(s) should be within one day.

Search Store Enter a keyword in the search field on the upper-right corner of the page
to search for the store.

583
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

19.1.2 Configure Promotion Day

After setting promotion days, you can get the customer traffic on promotion day so as to analyze
how many customers the promotions bring more than the days without a promotion.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Store
Management → Configure Promotion Day .
2. Click Add to open the promotion day configuration page.

Figure 19-1 Promotion Day Configuration

3. Enter the promotion day name.
4. Set the promotion duration.

Note
The promotion time period should be within 30 days.
5. Click Confirm to finish adding a promotion day.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding promotion days.
Edit a Promotion Day Click the promotion day name to open the promotion day
configuration page, and edit the promotion day information.
Delete Promotion Check one or multiple promotion days, and click Delete to delete the
Days selected promotion days.
Search Promotion Enter a keyword in the search field to search for promotion days.
Days

19.2 Customize Report Dashboard

The report dashboard provides an at-a-glance view for the reports supported by the system, such
as people counting report, vehicle analysis report, and queue analysis report. You can customize
the report dashboard as required.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Report → Dashboard .
2. Optional: Click → Add Dashboard on the report dashboard page to add a new dashboard.

584
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

1) Create a dashboard name.

2) You can choose between Template and Custom dashboards.
- If you select Template, you can choose Single-Store Details to display details of a single store.
You also choose Multi-Store Comparison to compare data of multiple stores.
- If you select Custom, you can select a report type, and add a report to the dashboard.

Note
● You can add up to 100 dashboards.

● The new dashboard appears and it is named as "Dashboard + The Time When It was Added"

by default. For example, in "Dashboard20190916102436", "2019" represents year, "09"

month, "16" date, "10" hour, "24" minute, and "26" second.
3. Optional: Edit dashboard(s).
1) Click to expand the added dashboard(s).
2) Click to edit the dashboard name or click to delete the dashboard.
4. Add report(s) to a dashboard and edit the report(s).
1) Click Add Report.
2) Select a report type and generate the report.
3) Click Add on the report page to add the report to dashboard.
The report appears on the selected dashboard.
4) Perform the following operations.
● Add More Reports: Click Add Report to add more reports to the dashboard.

● View Report in Larger Window: Click to view the report in larger window.
● Edit Report Name: Click and then click Edit.
● Delete Report from Dashboard: Click and then click Delete.

Figure 19-2 Report Dashboard

5. Switch time to view report data.

585
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

1) Select a dashboard and then click Switch Time to View to set the report type and time.
Report Type
Select the time basis for the reports. For example, daily report shows data on a daily basis.
Time
Set the specific time for generating the reports. For example, if you select Custom Time
Interval as the report type, you can click to specify a time interval for generating report
data.
2) Click Save to change the default time basis of all the reports in the dashboard to the time you
set in the previous sub step.
6. Optional: You can check YoY &MoM Analytics to display year on year and month on month
data.
7. Optional: Export report(s) on the dashboard to the local PC.
1) Click Export to display the Export panel.
2) Select report(s) from the report list.
3) Select Excel, CSV, or PDF as the format of the exported report(s).
4) Click Export.

19.3 People Counting Report

People counting report shows the number of line crossing people counted by people counting
cameras or obtained from access records of access control devices in a specific region and within a
certain time period. The report lets you know the number of persons who stay in a specific region,
which can be used for certain commercial or emergency scenarios. For example, for emergency
scenario, during a fire escape, the number of stayed persons will be displayed on the map which is
required for rescue. For commercial scenario, the shopping mall manager can get the people
counting report to know whether the store is attractive and get the number of people entering
each stores to determine whether to limit the number of customers staying in the mall for security
reasons during the peak time. You can also generate a people counting report for a single store or
multiple stores.
Before generating a people counting report, you can add people counting group(s) to group the
doors and people counting cameras of a certain region so as to define region border. After that,
you can set a regular report rule for the specified cameras which support people counting or
people counting groups, and the platform will send emails with reports attached to the target
recipients daily, weekly, or monthly. You can also manually generate a people counting report at
any time to view the data if required.
For details about adding a people counting group, refer to Add People Counting Group .

586
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

19.3.1 Add People Counting Group

The people counting group is used to group the doors, people counting cameras, queue
management cameras, and fisheye cameras of certain region. You can set some doors and cameras
as the region border. Only the persons accessing these doors or detected by the cameras are
calculated, and other doors and cameras outside the region are ignored. By grouping these doors
and cameras, the platform provides counting functions based on the detected records on these
doors and cameras.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → People Counting Group .
2. Click Add.
3. Set basic configurations.
1) Create a name for the group.
2) Select a site.
3) Select a store to link the group to the store.
4) (Optional) Switch on the Regularly Clear All and set a time for clearing all data regularly.
5) (Optional) Switch on the Maximum Number of Persons and enter the maximum number of
persons that can enter the area monitored by this group.
6) Click Save and Continue
4. Configure resources for counting people.
1) In the Resource for Counting People part, click Add Resource to select the resources
(including doors and people counting cameras) for calculating the number of people stayed in
this region
2) Click Edit to select statistics type, and In/Out Direction, and click Save.

Note
● You can set Statistics Type as Total Entries, Total People Passed By, and Total People

Entered/Passed By. The reports will display and only display the data concerning the
statistics type that you select.
● For doors, the access records on the entry reader will be calculated as person entered this

region while the access records on the exit one will be calculated as person exited this
region.
● For cameras, the people crossing along the entry direction will be calculated as person

entered this region while the people crossing along the exit one will be calculated as person
exited this region.
3) Click Save and Continue.
5. Add the people counting group to a map.
1) Drag the people counting group from the Resource Group list on the right to the map.
The region as well as the doors and cameras in the group will be added on the map.
2) Drag to draw the region according to the actual needs.
3) Drag the icons of the doors and cameras onto the map to set the their locations on the map.

587
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4) Right click to finish.

Figure 19-3 Draw People Counting Group on Map

5) Click Finish.
The people counting group is displayed on the list.

19.3.2 Generate People Counting Report

You can manually generate an entry & exit counting report to view the entry & exit statistics in a
line chart or histogram. You can also export the report to the local PC.
Before You Start
Make sure you have properly configured the camera with a people counting rule for the required
area. To configure the people counting rule, refer to the user manual of people counting camera.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Report → People Counting .
2. Select the analysis type.
Store Traffic Analysis
Select a single store or multiple stores, and single-store details or multi-store comparison
data will be displayed.
People Counting for One Camera
A people counting report based on the data from the cameras you select will be generated.
You can compare the data of different cameras.
People Counting in One Region
A people counting report based on the data from the people counting groups you select will
be generated. You can compare the data of different groups.

588
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Make sure you have added people counting groups. See Add People Counting Group for
details.
3. Select the dimension as the Entry & Exit or Walk-In Rate.

Note
The Entry & Exit statistics type will count the number of people entered and exited, and
calculate the number of people stayed in a region by the formula of "number of people entered
- number of people exited".
4. Select people counting camera(s) or people counting group(s) based on the analysis type you set
in the previous step.

Note
If you select Store Traffic Analysis as the analysis type, you should select store(s). If you select
People Counting for One Camera as the analysis type, you should select camera(s). If you select
People Counting for One Region, you should select people counting group(s).
5. Optional: Switch on Staff Excluded People Count, and if staff face information is applied to
devices, the staff will be excluded when count people.
6. Click Generate Report.
The statistics of all the selected item(s) are displayed in the right panel.
7. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time, and set how
the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current day.
For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
For example, if you select the report type as Daily, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the number of passing vehicles detected in each hour or each minute for one
camera.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report and monthly report can be less time-consuming,
since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report at the
sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7 days or
last month before the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
8. In the Time field, set the time or time period for statistics.

589
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For custom time interval report, you need to set the start time and end time to specify the time
period.
9. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after generating the people counting report.
Display YoY & Check YoY & MoM Analytics to show the year-on-year and month-on-
MoM Analytics month data.
View Statistics of a Click store/camera/region name at the bottom of the results pane to
Certain Store/ view statistics of a certain store/camera/region.
Camera/Region
Switch Between Select or on the upper-left corner to switch between line chart
Line Chart and (displaying the trend for the number of people on different time points)
Histogram and histogram (for comparison).
Add to Dashboard Click Add to Dashboard to add the current report to a dashboard.
Export Report a. Click Export.
b. (Optional) Select the camera or group and set the report type and
report time if needed.
c. Select shorter time period to view more detailed data of each
camera. For example, if you select Daily Report, you can select By
Day or By Hour, and it will export 1or 24 records respectively for
each camera.
d. Set the format of the exported file as Excel, CSV, or PDF.
e. Click Export.

19.3.3 Send People Counting Report Regularly

You can set a regular report rule for specified people counting cameras or specified people
counting groups, and the platform can send an email with a report attached to the target
recipients daily, weekly, or monthly, showing the number of people entered or exited detected by
people counting cameras, or the number of people stayed calculated by the people counting
cameras and doors in the same region.
Before You Start
● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Add

Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .

● Set the email settings such as the sender address, SMTP server address and port. For details,

refer to Configure Email Account .

590
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 32,000 records in total.
● The report will be an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Scheduled Report .
2. Click Add to open the Create Report page.
3. Select the report category as People Counting.
4. Select the dimension as the Entry & Exit or Walk-In Rate.

Note
The Entry & Exit statistics type will count the number of people entered and exited, and
calculate the number of people stayed in a region by the formula of "number of people entered
- number of people exited".
5. Select the analysis type.
Store Traffic Analysis
Select a single store or multiple stores, and single-store details or multi-store comparison
data will be displayed.
People Counting for One Camera
The report contains the number of people entered and exited detected by the people
counting camera(s). You need to select the camera(s) as the Report Target.
For example, if you select the people counting type as People Counting for One Camera and
select two people counting cameras as the Report Target, the platform will generate two
reports of the cameras respectively, including the number of people entered and exited
detected by the two cameras.
People Counting for One Region
The report contains the number of people stayed in one region, which is calculated by the
detected people from the people counting camera(s) and the statistic people from the doors
in the region. You need to select the people counting group(s) as the Report Target.
6. Create a name for the report.
7. Select the people counting camera(s) or groups contained in the report.

Note
If you select Store Traffic Analysis as the analysis type, you should select store(s). If you select
People Counting for One Camera as the analysis type, you should select camera(s). If you select
People Counting for One Region, you should select people counting group(s).
8. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time, and set how
the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.
Daily Report

591
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current day.
For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
For example, if you select the report type as Daily, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the number of passing vehicles detected in each hour or each minute for one
camera.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report and monthly report can be less time-consuming,
since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report at the
sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7 days or
last month before the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
9. Set how the report will present the results analyzed in the specified time period.
Example
For example, if you select the report type as By Day, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the analysis results in each hour or each minute for one camera.
10. Set the report time and sending time according to the report type.
11. Optional: Set the effective period (start time and end time) in which the reports will be
regularly sent.
12. Select the language as Report Language.

Note
By default, the language is the same with the selected language when you log in on the Web
Client.
13. Optional: Switch on Send Report via Email, and select the email template from the drop-down
list to define the recipient information and email format.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Add
Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .
14. Optional: Switch on Upload to SFTP, and click Configure beside SFTP Address to configure the
SFTP settings, including SFTP address, port, user name, password, and saving path.

Note
You can also hover the cursor on at the top of report list and click SFTP Settings from the
drop-down list to enter the configuration pane.

592
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

15. Optional: Switch on Save to Local Storage, and click Configure beside Saving Path to configure
the saving path of local storage.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click Configure Local Storage from the drop-down
list to enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
16. Click Add.

19.4 Heat Analysis Report

Heat analysis report shows data with a heat map, which is a graphical representation of data
represented by colors. The heat map function of the camera is usually used to track the consumers
movements (where the customers walk, and what items they stop to touch and pick up) and
analyze the visit times and dwell time in a configured area. This report is mainly used for store
managers or retailers to see which part of the store got the most attention from consumers and
which got least. Knowing where customers move is useful for retailers. They can optimize store
layouts, for example, where to place popular and unpopular goods.
Before using heat analysis report, you can add a heat analysis group to define the region for heat
analysis. After that, you can set a regular report rule for the specified cameras or the specified heat
analysis groups, and the system will send emails with heat analysis reports attached to the target
recipients daily, weekly, or monthly. You can also manually generate a heat analysis report at any
time to view the data if required.
For details about adding a heat analysis group, refer to Add Heat Analysis Group .

19.4.1 Add Heat Analysis Group

The heat analysis group is used to group the resources (such as doors, fisheye cameras, people
counting cameras) in certain region. By grouping these resources, you can know the dwell time of
the people stayed in this region, how many persons stayed in this region, and average dwell time of
each people. This function is mainly used to calculate and show the popularity of each stores in
one shopping mall.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Heat Analysis Group .
2. Click Add.
3. Set basic configurations such as name, site, and store.
4. Add resources for calculating dwell time, resources for people counting, and analysis groups.
1) Click Edit in the Draw Count Area column.
2) Click to draw the count area for analyzing dwell rate, or you can click Sync with Device to
sync with the count area on device.
3) Name the drawn area.

593
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4) Click Save.
5. Optional: Add the group to the map by setting the locations of the resources in the group and
setting the border of the region for detection.
1) Drag the heat analysis group from the Resource Group list on the right to the map.
The region as well as the doors and cameras in the group will be added on the map.
2) Drag to draw the region according to the actual needs.
3) Click Set Camera Position, and drag the icons of the doors and cameras to set the their
locations on the map.
4) Click Save.
After adding the heat analysis group on the map, you can know the dwell time of the people
stayed in the region, the number of persons stayed in the region, and average dwell time of each
people.
6. Click Finish.
The heat analysis group is added in the table and you can view the resources in the group.

19.4.2 Generate Heat Analysis Report

You can generate a heat analysis report to track consumer movements and analyze the visit times
and dwell time in a configured area.
Before You Start
● Add a heat map network camera to the platform and properly configure the camera with heat

map rule for the required area. To add a heat map network camera, please refer to the User
Manual of HikCentral Professional Web Client. To configure the heat map rule, please refer to
the user manual of heat map network camera.
● Add the camera to a static map. For details about how to add a camera to the static map, refer

to User Manual of HikCentral Professional Web Client.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Report → Heat Analysis .
2. Select analysis type.
Store Heat Analysis
A heat analysis report based on the data from the store will be generated.
Heat Analysis for One Camera
A heat analysis report based on the data from the selected cameras will be generated. The
data of different cameras will be displayed and you can compare the data of different
cameras.
Heat Analysis in One Region

594
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

A heat analysis report based on the data from the selected heat analysis groups will be
generated. The data of different groups will be displayed and you can compare the data from
different groups.

Note
You should have added heat analysis group(s). For details, see Add Heat Analysis Group .
3. Set the dimension.
Dwell Time Analysis
The minutes that the people stay at the same location during each time period for each
camera.
Dwell Rate Analysis
Set a dwell duration, and the report will show the percentage of people stayed longer than
dwell duration.
4. Select heat analysis camera(s) or heat analysis group(s) for statistics.
1) Click .

Note
● Only the online heat analysis camera(s) or heat analysis group will be displayed here.

● Up to 20 heat analysis cameras can be selected for statistics at the same time.

2) Check the heat analysis camera(s) or heat analysis group(s) for statistics.
5. Click Generate Report.
6. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current day.
For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report and monthly report can be less time-consuming,
since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report at the
sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7 days or
last month before the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
7. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after generating the people counting report.
Display YoY & Check YoY & MoM Analytics to show the year-on-year and month-on-
MoM Analytics month data.
View Statistics Click store/camera/region name at the bottom of the results pane to view
of a Certain statistics of a certain store/camera/region.

595
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Store/Camera/
Region
Switch Between ● Select or on the upper-left corner to switch between heat map
Heat Map and and histogram (for comparison).
Histogram ● Click the map to view the detailed heat data of the cameras on the map.
You can view each camera's field of view, and the fields are color coded.
The red color block (255, 0, 0) indicates the most welcome region (most
persons detected or longest dwell time), and blue color block (0, 0, 255)
indicates the less-popular region (least persons detected or shortest
dwell time).
● You can drag the slider on the upper-right to adjust the range of the
heat value. The heat data out of the range will not be displayed.
Add to Click Add to Dashboard to add the current report to a dashboard.
Dashboard
Export Report a. Click Export.
b. (Optional) Select the camera or group and set the report type and
report time if needed.
c. Select shorter time period to view more detailed data of each camera.
For example, if you select Daily Report, you can select By Day or By
Hour, and it will export 1or 24 records respectively for each camera.
d. Set the format of the exported file as Excel, CSV, or PDF.
e. Click Export.

19.4.3 Send Heat Analysis Report Regularly

You can set a regular report rule for specified heat map cameras, and the platform can send an
email with a report attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly, showing the heat
map data (people dwell time at each location and number of people detected) during the specified
time periods.
Before You Start
● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Add

Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .

● Set the email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and port. For details, refer to

Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 32,000 records in total.
● The report will be an Excel file.

596
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Scheduled Report .
2. Click Add to open the Create Report page.
3. Select Heat Analysis as the report category.
4. Select heat analysis type.
Store Heat Analysis
A heat analysis report based on the data from the store will be generated.
Heat Analysis for One Camera
Analyze people dwell time and number of people detected by the specified camera(s).
Heat Analysis in One Region
Analyze people dwell time and number of people detected by the cameras in the specified
heat analysis group(s).

Note
For details about adding heat analysis group, see Add Heat Analysis Group .
5. Create a name for the report.
6. Select the stores, heat analysis camera(s) or groups contained in the report.

Note
If you select Store Heat Analysis as the analysis type, you should select store(s). If you select
Heat Analysis for One Camera as the analysis type, you should select camera(s). If you select
Heat Analysis in One Region, you should select heat analysis group(s).
7. Set the content in the report.
Dwell Time
The minutes that the people stay at the same location during each time period for each
camera.
Number of People Entered
The number of people detected during each time period for each camera.

Note
This content can be selected only when the analysis type is selected as Heat Analysis for One
Camera.
Average Dwell Time
The average time that each people stay at a same location during each time period for each
camera. The value is calculated by dividing the dwell time by the number of people who
appear at the location.

597
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● The Number of People who Appear at a Location= The Number of People who Stay at the

Location at the End of Previous Time Period + The Number of People who Visit the Location
at the Current Time Period.
● The number of people who appears at a location refers to the number of people who visits

the location from 00:00:00 to 23:59:59.

8. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time, and set how
the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current day.
For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
For example, if you select the report type as Daily, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the number of passing vehicles detected in each hour or each minute for one
camera.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report and monthly report can be less time-consuming,
since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report at the
sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7 days or
last month before the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
9. Set the report time and sending time according to the report type.
10. Optional: Set the effective period (start time and end time) of sending the report regularly.
11. Select the language as Report Language.

Note
By default, the language is the same with the selected language when you log in on the Web
Client.
12. Optional: Switch on Send Report via Email, and select the email template from the drop-down
list to define the recipient information and email format.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Add
Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .
13. Optional: Switch on Upload to SFTP, and click Configure beside SFTP Address to configure the
SFTP settings, including SFTP address, port, user name, password, and saving path.

598
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click SFTP Settings from the drop-down list to
enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
14. Optional: Switch on Local Storage, and click Configure beside Saving Path to configure the
saving path of local storage.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click Configure Local Storage from the drop-down
list to enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
15. Click Add.

19.5 Person Feature Analysis Report

Person feature analysis report shows the proportion of persons with different features detected by
cameras which support facial recognition.
You can add a person feature analysis group before generating a report to define the region for
person feature analysis by grouping the cameras which support facial recognition and feature
analysis. After that, you can set a regular report rule for the specified cameras or specified person
feature analysis groups, and the system will send emails with reports attached to the target
recipients daily, weekly, or monthly. You can also manually generate a person feature analysis
report at any time to view the data if required.
For details about adding a person feature analysis group, refer to Add Person Feature Analysis
Group .

19.5.1 Add Person Feature Analysis Group

Person feature analysis is a group of cameras which support facial recognition and feature analysis.
You can group the cameras in one region into one group. After that, when generating a report, you
can view the features of the persons appeared in this region, based on the data detected by the
cameras in the group. For example, if there are five cameras which support facial recognition
mounted in the store, the store manager can add these five cameras into one group. Then you can
view features of the customers who entering the store in the Intelligent Analysis module.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Person Feature Analysis Group .
2. Click Add.
3. Create a name for the group.
4. Select a site.
5. Select the cameras for analyzing the detected persons' features.
6. Click Add.

599
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The feature group is added in the table and you can view the cameras in the group.
7. Optional: Locate the person feature analysis group on the map by setting the locations of the
cameras in the group and setting the border of the region for detection.
1) Click Set Geographic Location to enter the Map Settings page.
2) Drag the person feature analysis group from the Resource Group list on the right to the map.
The region as well as the cameras in the group will be added on the map.
3) Drag to draw the region according to the actual needs.
4) Drag the icons of the cameras to set the their locations on the map.
5) Right click to finish.
After adding the person feature analysis group on the map, you can view the features of the
persons appeared on the Control Client.

19.5.2 Generate Person Feature Analysis Report

The platform supports saving features of recognized human faces and generating reports in various
time periods. The reports tells the percentage and number of people of different features in
different time period. It can be used in places such as shopping mall to analyze interests of people
in different features.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added a person feature analysis group if you want to perform feature analysis
in one region. See Add Person Feature Analysis Group for details about adding a person feature
analysis group.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Report → Person Feature Analysis .
2. Select analysis type.
Feature Analysis for One Camera
Compare percentage and number of people of different features detected by specified
camera(s).
Feature Analysis in One Region
Compare percentage and number of people of different features detected by the cameras in
specified person feature analysis group(s) of multiple regions.
3. Select camera(s)/person feature analysis group(s).

Note
● Only online cameras will be displayed.
● Up to 20 cameras/groups can be selected for statistics at the same time.
● The platform supports selecting one group of a Remote Site.

600
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Select the report type as daily report, weekly report, monthly report, annual report, or
customize the time interval for a report, and the platform will generate statistics of the selected
camera(s)/group(s) of the current day/week/month/year or the customized period.
5. Set the time or time period in the Time field for statistics.

Note
For custom time interval report, you need to set the start time and end time to specify the time
period.
6. Click Generate Report.

Figure 19-4 Person Feature Analysis

The statistics of all the selected cameras/groups are displayed on the right panel.
7. Optional: Click Add to Dashboard to display the report on the Dashboard.
8. Optional: Export the report to the local PC.
1) Click Export.
The Export panel will display with camera selected and time configured according to the range
you defined previously.
2) (Optional) Select the camera or group and set the report type and report time if needed.
3) Select shorter time period to view more detailed data of each camera.
Example
For example, if you select Daily Report, you can select By Day or By Hour, and it will export
1or 24 records respectively for each camera.
4) Set the format of the exported file as Excel, CSV, or PDF.
5) Click Export.

601
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

19.5.3 Send Person Feature Analysis Report Regularly

You can set a regular report rule for specified cameras of person feature analysis, and the platform
can send an email with a report attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly, showing
the percentage and number of people of different features during the specified time periods.
Before You Start
● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Add

Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .

● Set the email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and port. For details, refer to

Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 32,000 records in total.
● The report will be an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Scheduled Report .
2. Click Add to open the Create Report page.
3. Select Person Feature Analysis as the report category.
4. Select person feature type.
Feature Analysis for One Camera
Compare percentage and number of people of different features detected by specified
camera(s).
Feature Analysis in One Region
Compare percentage and number of people of different features detected by the cameras in
specified person feature analysis group(s) of multiple regions.
5. Create a name for the report.
6. Select the camera(s) or person feature analysis groups contained in the report.

Note
If you select Feature Analysis for One Camera as person feature type, you should select
camera(s). If you select Feature Analysis in One Region, you should select feature analysis
group(s).
7. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time, and set how
the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current day.

602
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
For example, if you select the report type as Daily, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the number of passing vehicles detected in each hour or each minute for one
camera.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report and monthly report can be less time-consuming,
since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report at the
sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7 days or
last month before the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
8. Set the report time and sending time according to the report type.
9. Optional: Set the effective period (start time and end time) of sending the report regularly.
10. Select the language as Report Language.

Note
By default, the language is the same with the selected language when you log in on the Web
Client.
11. Optional: Switch on Send Report via Email, and select the email template from the drop-down
list to define the recipient information and email format.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Add
Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .
12. Optional: Switch on Upload to SFTP, and click Configure beside SFTP Address to configure the
SFTP settings, including SFTP address, port, user name, password, and saving path.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click SFTP Settings from the drop-down list to
enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
13. Optional: Switch on Local Storage, and click Configure beside Saving Path to configure the
saving path of local storage.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click Configure Local Storage from the drop-down
list to enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
14. Click Add.

603
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

19.6 Queue Analysis Report

Queue analysis report shows the number of queue exceptions and number of persons in each
queue, and show the queue status including waiting duration and queue length. It is helpful for
allocating resources for retailers.
You can set a regular report rule for the specified cameras, and the system will send emails with
queue analysis reports attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly. You can also
manually generate a queue analysis report at any time to view the data if required.

19.6.1 Generate Queue Analysis Report

For cameras which support queue management, you can generate a report to show the number of
queue exceptions and number of persons in each queue, and show the queue status including
waiting duration and queue length.
Before You Start
Add a camera which supports queue management to the system and configure queue regions. To
configure the queue region, refer to user manual of the camera.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Report → Queue Analysis .
2. Select camera(s) for statistics.
1) Click in the camera panel.
2) Select a current site or Remote Site from the drop-down site list to show its cameras.

Note
Only the online cameras which support queue management will be displayed here.
3) Check the camera(s) for statistics.
The cameras will be added to the camera list.
3. Select the queue regions configured on the camera and the platform will collect the queue data
in these queue regions.

Note
For configuring the queue, refer to the user manual of the camera.
4. Select the report type as daily report, weekly report, monthly report, or annual report.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The system will calculate the queue data detected in
each hour of one day.
Weekly Report, Monthly Report, Annual Report

604
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

As compared to daily report, weekly report, monthly report, and annual report can be less
time-consuming, since they are not to be submitted every day. The system will calculate the
queue data detected in each day of way week, in each day of one month, and in each month
of one year.
5. Set the time or time period for statistics.
6. Select the analysis type and set the report range for daily report, weekly report, or monthly
report.
Queuing-Up Time Analysis
The report will show the persons' queuing-up durations in different queues.
For example, if you set the report range to 300s and 600s, the report will show that in each
queue, how many persons have waited for less than 300s, how many persons have waited for
300 to 600s, and how many persons have waited for more than 600s.
Queue Status Analysis
The report will show the number of queuing-up persons within different queuing-up
durations.
For example, if you set the report range as 5 persons and 10 persons, the report will show
that in each queue, how many seconds the status lasts when there are less then 5 persons,
how many seconds the status lasts when there are 5 to 10 persons, and how many seconds
the status lasts when there are more than 10 persons.
7. Click Generate Report.

Figure 19-5 Queue Analysis Report

A chart is displayed in the right panel, showing the number of exceptions (waiting timeout or
people amount exceeding) of different queues.

605
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after generating the report.

Show/Hide Certain Click the legend to show or hide the data of certain element, such as
Data queue.
View Queue Click the queue icon on the page below to view the report of a queue,
Analysis Report of a including the number of exceptions, number of people in the queue,
Queue and waiting durations .
Switch Between Click on the page below to view the report of all the selected
Number of queues.
Exceptions, Number If you select the report type as Daily Report, Weekly Report, or
of People, and Monthly Report, and set the analysis type as Queue Status Analysis,
Queue Length click the drop-down list to view the number of waiting timeout
exceptions, or number of people in different and all queues.
If you select the report type as Annual Report, and set the analysis
type as Queue Status Analysis, click the drop-down list to view the
number of waiting timeout exceptions or number of people in all
queues.
If you select the report type as Daily Report, Weekly Report, or
Monthly Report and set the analysis type as Queuing-Up Time
Analysis, click the drop-down list to view the number of people
amount exceeding exceptions or queue length of different queues.
If you select the report type as Annual Report, and set the analysis
type as Queuing-Up Time Analysis, the people amount exceeding
exceptions will show.
9. Optional: Export the report to the local PC.
1) Click Export.
The Export panel will display with camera and queue selected and time configured according
to the range you defined previously.
2) Optional: (Optional) Select the camera and queue, and set the report type and report time if
needed.
3) Select shorter time period to view more detailed data of each queue.
Example
For example, if you select Daily Report, you can select By Day or By Hour and it will export 1
or 24 records respectively for each queue.
4) Select the content to export.
Queue Exception
The number of exceptions (people amount exceeding and waiting timeout) of each queue.
People Amount Exceeding
The number of persons in the queue exceeds the configured threshold.

606
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Waiting Timeout
The waiting duration for the persons in the queue exceeds the configured threshold.
Person Amount in Queue
The number of persons in each queue.
Queue Status
The status of each queue, including persons' waiting duration and number of persons
(queue length) in the queue.
5) For daily report, weekly report or monthly report, select analysis type.
6) Set the format of the exported file as Excel, CSV, or PDF.
7) Click Export.

19.6.2 Send Queue Analysis Report Regularly

You can set a regular report rule for specified cameras which support queue management, and the
platform can send an email with a report attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or
monthly, showing queue exceptions, number of persons in the queue, and queue status including
waiting duration and queue length, detected by these cameras during the specified time periods.
Before You Start
● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Add

Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .

● Set the email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and port. For details, refer to

Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 32,000 records in total.
● The report will be an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Scheduled Report .
2. Click Add to open the Create Report page.
3. Select the report category as Queue Analysis.
4. Create a name for the report.
5. Select the camera(s) which support queue management contained in the report.

Note
Only cameras which support queue management will be displayed here.
The report will show the data of all the queues configured on the cameras.

607
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For configuring the queue, refer to the user manual of the camera.
6. Set the content in the report.
Queue Exception
The number of exceptions (people amount exceeding and waiting timeout duration) of each
queue, including the number of persons in the queue exceeds the configured threshold and
the waiting duration for persons in the queue exceeds the configured threshold.
Person Amount in Queue
The number of persons in each queue.
Queue Status
The status of each queue, including persons' waiting duration and number of persons in the
queue.
7. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time, and set how
the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current day.
For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
For example, if you select the report type as Daily, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the number of passing vehicles detected in each hour or each minute for one
camera.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report and monthly report can be less time-consuming,
since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report at the
sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7 days or
last month before the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
8. Set the report time and sending time according to the report type.
9. Optional: Set the effective period (start time and end time) of sending the report regularly.
10. Select the language as Report Language.

Note
By default, the language is the same with the selected language when you log in on the Web
Client.

608
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

11. Optional: Switch on Send Report via Email, and select the email template from the drop-down
list to define the recipient information and email format.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Add
Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .
12. Optional: Switch on Upload to SFTP, and click Configure beside SFTP Address to configure the
SFTP settings, including SFTP address, port, user name, password, and saving path.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click SFTP Settings from the drop-down list to
enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
13. Optional: Switch on Local Storage, and click Configure beside Saving Path to configure the
saving path of local storage.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click Configure Local Storage from the drop-down
list to enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
14. Click Add.

19.7 Pathway Analysis Report

Pathway analysis is mainly used to analyze the people counting on the pathways in the shopping
malls. With the help of fisheye cameras, the system can collect the consumers data (for
example,where the customers walk mostly) and translate that data onto a dashboard for mall
managers. This helps managers analyze which areas/shops of the mall best catch a shopper's
attention and which are overlooked.
Before using pathway analysis, you should add pathway analysis groups first, which define the
region for pathway analysis. After that, you can set a regular report rule for the specified pathway
analysis group, and the system will send emails with pathway analysis reports attached to the
target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly. You can also manually generate a pathway analysis
report at any time to view the data if required.
For details about adding a pathway analysis group, refer to Add Pathway Analysis Group .

19.7.1 Add Pathway Analysis Group

Pathway analysis is mainly used to analyze the people counting on the pathways in the shopping
malls. With the help of fisheye cameras, the system can collect the consumers data (for
example,where the customers walk mostly) and translate that data onto a dashboard for mall
managers. This helps managers analyze which areas/shops of the mall best catch a shopper's
attention and which are overlooked. After setting the fisheye camera's pathways and their

609
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

directions, the system calculates the people dwell time at each pathway and number of people
walking by, thus helps them make decisions.
Steps

Note
This function is only supported by the second generation of fisheye cameras. You should have
configured intersection analysis rule for the fisheye camera. If not, click Configuration to set that
on the remote configuration page of the device.
1. In the top left corner of the client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Pathway Analysis Group .
2. Click Add.
3. Create a name for the group.
4. Select the fisheye cameras for calculating the number of people on different directions in
specific pathway.
5. Click Add.
The pathway analysis group is added in the table and you can view the cameras in the group.
6. Optional: Locate the pathway analysis group on the map by setting the locations of the fisheye
cameras in the group and setting the directions for camera's exits.

Note
To define the camera's exits, refer to the user manual of the camera.
1) Click Set Geographic Location to enter the Map Settings page.
2) Drag the pathway analysis group from the Resource Group list on the right to the map.
The region as well as the cameras in the group will be added on the map.
3) Drag the icons of the cameras to set the their locations on the map.
4) Click an exit of the fisheye camera as starting point and then draw a line, indicating the
direction of the pathway.
5) Enter the pathway name and select an exit for this pathway.
6) Click Save to save the pathway.
7) Perform the above sub-steps to draw other pathways.

Note
You can also draw a line to link the exits of two fisheye cameras if there are two cameras in
the pathway.

610
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 19-6 Add Pathway Analysis Group

8) Optional: Click the camera icon and select Edit Direction Area to set radius, view angle and
direction.
9) Right click to finish.
After adding the pathway analysis group on the map, you can view the real-time number of
people walking by on the Control Client.

19.7.2 Generate Pathway Analysis Report

Pathway analysis is mainly used to analyze the people counting on the pathways in the shopping
malls. With the help of fisheye cameras, the platform can collect the consumers data (for example,
where the customers walk mostly) and translate that data onto a dashboard for mall managers.
This helps managers analyze which areas/shops of the mall best catch a shopper's attention and
which are overlooked. After setting the fisheye camera's pathways and their directions, the
platform calculates the people dwell time at each pathway and number of people walking by, thus
helps them make decisions.
Before You Start
● Properly add the camera to a static map and set its pathways on the map via the Web Client first.

For details about adding camera to map and set pathways, refer to the User Manual of
HikCentral Professional Web Client.
● You should have added pathway analysis groups. For details, see Add Pathway Analysis Group .

611
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
This function is only supported by the second generation of fisheye cameras.
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Report → Pathway Analysis .
2. Select path analysis group(s) for statistics.
3. Select the report type as daily report, weekly report, monthly report, annual report, or
customize the time interval for a report.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will calculate the number of people or
people dwell time in each hour of one day.
Weekly Report, Monthly Report, Annual Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report, monthly report, and annual report can be less
time-consuming, since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will calculate the
number of people or people dwell time in each day of way week, in each day of one month,
and in each month of one year.
Custom Time Interval
Users can customize the days in the report to analyze the number of people or people dwell
time in each day or month of the custom time interval.
4. Optional: Set the time or time period in the Time field for statistics.

Note
For custom time interval report, you need to set the start time and end time to specify the time
period.
5. Click Generate Report.

612
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 19-7 Pathway Analysis Report

The static map with the cameras and pathways color coded on the map will be displayed. The
red color block (255, 0, 0) indicates the most welcome pathway (most persons detected or
longest dwell time), and blue color block (0, 0, 255) indicates the less-popular pathway (least
persons detected or shortest dwell time).
6. Move the cursor to the camera hot spot to view the line chart or heat map of the people
amount and people dwell time in the pathways during this time period.

613
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 19-8 View Heat Map or Line Chart

7. Optional: Export the report to the local PC.
1) Click Export.
The Export panel will display with camera selected and time configured according to the range
you defined previously.
2) (Optional) Select the pathway analysis group and set the report type and report time if
needed.
3) Select shorter time period to view more detailed data of each camera.
Example
For example, if you select Daily Report, you can select By Day or By Hour, and it will export 1,
24 records respectively for each camera.
4) Set the format of the exported file as Excel, CSV, or PDF.
5) Click Export.

19.7.3 Send Pathway Report Regularly

You can set a regular report rule for specified fisheye cameras which support pathway analysis, and
the platform can send an email with a report attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or
monthly, showing the people counting data (people dwell time at each location and number of

614
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

people) on the configured pathways, detected by these fisheye cameras, during the specified time
periods.
Before You Start
● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Add

Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .

● Set the email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and port. For details, refer to

Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 10,000 records in total.
● The report will be an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Scheduled Report .
2. Click Add to open the Create Report page.
3. Select the report category as Pathway Analysis.
4. Create a name for the report.
5. Select the pathway analysis group(s) contained in the report.
6. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time, and set how
the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current day.
For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
For example, if you select the report type as Daily, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the number of passing vehicles detected in each hour or each minute for one
camera.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report and monthly report can be less time-consuming,
since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report at the
sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7 days or
last month before the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
7. Set how the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.

615
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Example
For example, if you select the report type as By Week, you can select Calculate by Day or
Calculate by Hour. There will be 7 or 7×24 records for each camera respectively in the report,
showing analysis results on each day or each hour for one camera.
8. Set the report time and sending time according to the report type.
9. Optional: Set the effective period (start time and end time) of sending the report regularly.
10. Select the language as Report Language.

Note
By default, the language is the same with the selected language when you log in on the Web
Client.
11. Optional: Switch on Send Report via Email, and select the email template from the drop-down
list to define the recipient information and email format.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Add
Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .
12. Optional: Switch on Upload to SFTP, and click Configure beside SFTP Address to configure the
SFTP settings, including SFTP address, port, user name, password, and saving path.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click SFTP Settings from the drop-down list to
enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
13. Optional: Switch on Local Storage, and click Configure beside Saving Path to configure the
saving path of local storage.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click Configure Local Storage from the drop-down
list to enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
14. Click Add.

19.8 People Density Analysis Report

People density analysis report shows the variation trend of the people density data in line chart.
The people density data refers to the peak amount of people appeared in the images of a specific
camera during a certain time period. The data is useful for the management and control of the
amount of people in specific areas or space during special time periods. For example, assume that
you were a manager of a shopping mall during epidemic outbreak, you could generate a people
density analysis report to find out the time period(s) during which excessive people density usually
occurs in the shopping mall, and then arrange in advance the personnel and related works
accordingly to limit people gathering at those time periods to prevent the spread of the infectious
disease.

616
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

19.8.1 Generate People Density Analysis Report

You can manually generate a people density report to view the people density data in a line chart.
You can also export the report to the local PC if required.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have purchased the License that supports people density analysis, or the function

will be unavailable.
● Make sure you have added the behavior analysis server to the HikCentral Professional and linked

cameras to the server.

● Make sure you have configured people density analysis on the behavior analysis server. For

details, see the user manual of the server.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Report → People Density Analysis .
2. Select camera(s) to search for people density data.
1) Click to open the camera list.
2) Optional: Check Include Sub-Area to allow the display of camera(s) in sub-areas.
3) Select a current site or Remote Site from the drop-down site list.
4) Select areas and then select the camera(s) in these areas.

Note
● Only the online cameras will be displayed.

● You can also enter keywords of the camera name to search for cameras.

5) Check camera(s) appeared in the camera list for statistics.

3. Set the report type to daily report, weekly report, monthly report, annual report, or customize
the time interval for a report.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The system will calculate the peak amount of people
appeared in the images of the camera in each hour of one day.
Weekly Report, Monthly Report, Annual Report
Compared to generating daily report, generating weekly report, monthly report, and annual
report can be less time-consuming. The system will calculate the peak amount of people in
each day of one week, in each day of one month, and in each month of one year respectively.
Custom Time Interval
Users can customize the days in the report to analyze the peak amount of people in each day
or month of the custom time interval.
4. Select a pre-defined time period or customize a time period for search.
5. Click Generate Report.

617
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 19-9 People Density Analysis Report

The statistics of all the selected camera(s) will be displayed on a line chart.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations if required.
Add Report to a. Click Add to Dashboard in the upper-right corner of the page.
Dashboard b. Create a report name.
c. Select a dashboard. Or click New to create a new board and then
select it.
d. Click OK or Add and Go to Dashboard.
Show/Hide Click the legend to show or hide the data of certain element, such as
Certain Data certain camera.
View Statistics of Select a camera at the bottom of the line chart to view its statistics in the
a Camera line chart.
View Detailed Hover the cursor onto the line chart to view the detailed data.
Data in Each For a daily report, you can view the peak amount of people appeared in
Time Segment the images of each camera in each hour; For a weekly report, in each day;
For a monthly report, in each day; For a monthly report, in each month.
View Linked Click the dot on the line chart to view the video of the time period that
Video the dot represents.

Note
Viewing linked videos is not supported by annual report.

618
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

View Detailed
Data in Each Note
Minute Viewing detailed data in each minute is only supported by daily report.
a. Generate a daily report.
b. Select a camera at the bottom of the line chart to display its statistics
only.
c. Hover the cursor onto the line chart and then click Details on the pop-
up floating window.
The line chart that shows statistics in each minute will be displayed.
d. Hover the cursor onto the newly-displayed line chart to view the peak
amount of people appeared in the images of the camera in each
minute.

Figure 19-10 View Detailed Data In Each Minute

7. Optional: Export the report(s) on the dashboard to the local PC.
1) Click Export.

619
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The Export panel will display the camera selected and time configured according to the range
you defined previously.
2) Optional: (Optional) Select the camera and set the report type and report time if needed.
3) Select a shorter time period to view more detailed data of each camera.
Example
For example, if you select the daily report, you can select By Day or By Hour, and it will export
1or 24 records respectively for each camera.

Note
If you select By Minute, the number of records depends on the configuration on the device.
For example, if the device reports the data to the platform every minute, it will export 24*60
records for each camera.
4) Set the format of the exported file as Excel, CSV, or PDF.
5) Click Export.

19.8.2 Send People Density Analysis Report Regularly

You can set a regular people density analysis report rule for specified cameras, and the platform
can send an email with a report attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly, showing
the variation trend of people density data in line chart, which is calculated by behavior server.
Before You Start
● Add behavior analysis server to the platform, and configure people density analysis task for

specified camera(s). For details, refer to Add DeepinMind Server .

● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Add

Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .

● Set the email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and port. For details, refer to

Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 32,000 records in total.
● The report will be an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Scheduled Report .
2. Click Add to open the Create Report page.
3. Select the report category as People Density Analysis.
4. Create a name for the report.
5. Set the camera(s) contained in the report.

620
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Make sure you have configured people density analysis for the camera(s). For details, refer to
Add DeepinMind Server .
6. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time, and set how
the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current day.
For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
For example, if you select the report type as Daily, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the number of passing vehicles detected in each hour or each minute for one
camera.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report and monthly report can be less time-consuming,
since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report at the
sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7 days or
last month before the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
7. Set how the report will present the results analyzed in the specified time period.
Example
For example, if you select the report type as By Day, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the analysis results in each hour or each minute for one camera.
8. Set the report time and sending time according to the report type.
9. Optional: Set the effective period (start time and end time) of sending the report regularly.
10. Select the language as Report Language.

Note
By default, the language is the same with the selected language when you log in on the Web
Client.
11. Optional: Switch on Send Report via Email, and select the email template from the drop-down
list to define the recipient information and email format.

621
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Add
Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .
12. Optional: Switch on Upload to SFTP, and click Configure beside SFTP Address to configure the
SFTP settings, including SFTP address, port, user name, password, and saving path.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click SFTP Settings from the drop-down list to
enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
13. Optional: Switch on Local Storage, and click Configure beside Saving Path to configure the
saving path of local storage.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click Configure Local Storage from the drop-down
list to enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
14. Click Add.

19.9 Skin-Surface Temperature Screening Report

The skin-surface temperature screening report shows the number of people with abnormal skin-
surface temperature or who do not wear face masks during different time periods.
You can set a regular report rule for specified temperature screening cameras or access control
devices with temperature screening function, and then the platform will send emails with reports
attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly. You can also manually generate a skin-
surface temperature screening report at any time to view the data if required.

19.9.1 Generate Skin-Surface Temperature Analysis Report

You can generate the skin-surface temperature analysis report to view the variation trend of the
number of people with abnormal skin-surface temperature.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added devices that support temperature screening to HikCentral

Professional.
● Make sure you have enabled temperature screening on the device. For details, see the user

manual of the device.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Report → Skin-Surface Temperature .
2. Select the analysis type.

622
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Temperature Screening Point

A skin-surface temperature report based on data from temperature screening points (e.g.
cameras and visitor terminals) you select will be generated.
Person Group
A skin-surface temperature report based on the data from the person groups you select will
be generated.
3. Select temperature screening point(s) or person group(s) for analysis.
- Select Temperature Screening Point:
a. Click to open the camera list panel.

Note
Only the online cameras will be displayed.
b. (Optional) Check Include Sub-Area to select the sub-areas of the area that you have
selected.
c. Select an area in the area list to show the related temperature screening points.
d. Check the temperature screening point(s) for screening.
e. Select temperature screening point(s) for the report in the temperature screening point
list.
- Select Person Group:
Check the person group(s) for screening.

Note
You can check Select Sub-Groups to select the sub-groups of the person group that you have
selected.
4. Set the report type to daily report, weekly report, monthly report, or customize the time interval
for a report.
Daily Report
The daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will calculate the peak amount of
people appeared in the images of the camera in each hour of one day.
Weekly Report, Monthly Report
Compared to generating the daily report, generating the weekly report and monthly report
can be less time-consuming. The platform will calculate the peak amount of people on each
day of one week and on each day of one month respectively.
Custom Time Interval
Users can customize the days in the report to analyze the peak amount of people in each day
or month of the custom time interval.
5. In the Time field, select a predefined time period or customize a time period for search.
6. Click Generate Report.

623
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 19-11 Skin-Surface Temperature Analysis Report

The statistics of the selected item(s) will be displayed.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations if required.
Show/Hide Certain Click the legend to show or hide the data of certain element, such
Data as certain camera.
View Abnormal In the top left corner of the chart, select Abnormal Temperature or
Temperature or No No Mask from the drop-down list to display the statistics of people
Mask Statistics with abnormal temperature and without wearing face mask,
respectively.
Switch Between Line Click / to switch between line chart and histogram.
Chart and Histogram
Note
Daily report only supports histogram.

Add a Report to a. Click Add to Dashboard in the upper-right corner of the page.
Dashboard b. Create a report name.
c. Select a dashboard. Or click New to create a new board and then
select it.
d. Click OK or Add and Go to Dashboard.
8. Optional: Export the report to the local PC.
1) Click Export.
2) Optional: Select the temperature screening point(s) or person group(s) and set the report
type and report time if needed.

624
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

3) Select shorter time period to view more detailed data of each camera.
Example
For example, if you select Daily Report, you can select By Day or By Hour, and it will export
1or 24 records respectively for each camera.
4) Set the format of the exported file as Excel, CSV, or PDF.
5) Click Export.

19.9.2 Send Skin-Surface Temperature Screening Report Regularly

You can set a report-sending rule for specified cameras. Once set, the platform will send an email
containing the skin-surface temperature screening report to the target recipients daily, weekly, or
monthly, showing the variation trend of the number people whose skin-surface temperatures are
abnormal.
Before You Start
● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Add

Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .

● Set the email settings such as the sender address, SMTP server address and port. For details,

refer to Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 32,000 records in total.
● The report will be an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Scheduled Report .
2. Click Add to open the Create Report page.
3. Select the report category as Skin-Surface Temperature.
4. Select the analysis type.
Temperature Screening Point
The report contains the skin-surface temperature data from temperature screening points
(e.g. cameras). You need to select the temperature screening point(s) as the Report Target.
Person Group
The report contains the skin-surface temperature data from the person groups. You need to
select the person group(s) as the Report Target.
5. Create a name for the report.
6. Select temperature screening point(s) or person group(s).
7. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time.
By Day

625
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains the analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current
day.
For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing the analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
By Month or By Week
As compared to the daily report, the weekly report and monthly report can be less time-
consuming, since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report
at the sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7
days or last month before the sending date.
For example, for the weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the
platform will send a report at 6:00 on every Monday morning, containing the analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
8. Set how the report will present the analysis results generated in the specified time period.
Example
For example, if you select the Statistical Cycle as By Day, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the results analyzed in each hour or each minute by one camera.
9. Set the report time and sending time according to the report type.
10. Optional: Set the effective period (start time and end time) of sending the report regularly.
11. Select the language as Report Language.

Note
By default, the language is the same with the selected language when you log in on the Web
Client.
12. Optional: Switch on Send Report via Email, and select the email template from the drop-down
list to define the recipient information and email format.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Add
Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .
13. Optional: Switch on Upload to SFTP, and click Configure beside SFTP Address to configure the
SFTP settings, including SFTP address, port, user name, password, and saving path.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click SFTP Settings from the drop-down list to
enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
14. Optional: Switch on Save to Local Storage, and click Configure beside Saving Path to configure
the saving path of local storage.

626
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click Configure Local Storage from the drop-down
list to enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
15. Click Add.

19.10 Temperature Analysis Report

The temperature analysis report shows the number of exceptions (temperature too high or too
low) and maximum/minimum temperature of different thermometry points on different presets.
You can set a regular report rule for the specified thermal cameras and the system will send emails
with reports attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly. You can also manually
generate a temperature analysis report at any time to view the data if required.

19.10.1 Generate Temperature Analysis Report

For thermal cameras, you can generate a report to show the number of exceptions (temperature
too high or too low) and maximum/minimum temperature of different thermometry points on
different presets.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Report → Temperature Analysis .
2. Select thermal camera(s) for statistics.
1) Click in the camera panel.
2) Select a current site or Remote Site from the drop-down site list to show its thermal cameras.

Note
Only the online thermal cameras will be displayed here.
3) Check the thermal camera(s) for statistics.
The cameras will be added to the camera list.
3. Select the preset(s) configured on the camera and the platform will collect the data on the
thermometry point in these presets.

Note
For configuring the thermometry point with temperature measurement rules, refer to the user
manual of the thermal camera.
4. Select the report type as daily report, weekly report, monthly report, annual report, or
customize the time interval for a report.
Daily Report

627
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will calculate the temperature data
detected in each hour of one day.
Weekly Report, Monthly Report, Annual Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report, monthly report, and annual report can be less
time-consuming, since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will calculate the
temperature data detected in each day of way week, in each day of one month, and in each
month of one year.
Custom Time Interval
Users can customize the days in the report to analyze temperature data detected in each day
or month of the custom time interval.
5. Set the time or time period in the Time field for statistics.

Note
For custom time interval report, you need to set the start time and end time to specify the time
period.
6. Click Generate Report.

Figure 19-12 Temperature Analysis Report

The temperature statistics of all the selected presets are displayed in the right panel.
7. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after generating the temperature report.
Show/Hide Certain Click the legend to show or hide the data of certain element, such as
Data certain preset or thermometry point.

628
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

View Temperature Click the preset icon on the page below to view the report in the single
Report of Single preset.
Preset
View Temperature a. Click the preset icon on the page below to view the report in the
Report of Single single preset.
Thermometry Point b. In the Item for Comparison field, select one thermometry point.
c. In the Item for Comparison field, select the indicator you want to
view in the chart.
High/Low Temperature
Shows the number of exceptions that the temperature at this
thermometry point is higher or lower than the pre-defined
temperature.
Max. Temperature
Shows the maximum temperature at this thermometry point
during the set time period.
The temperature is displayed in line chart, indicating the trend.
Min. Temperature
Shows the minimum temperature at this thermometry point
during the set time period.
The temperature is displayed in line chart, indicating the trend.
8. Optional: Export the report to the local PC.
1) Click Export.
The Export panel will display with camera selected and time configured according to the range
you defined previously.
2) (Optional) Select the camera and preset, and set the report type and report time if needed.
3) Select shorter time period to view more detailed data of each camera.
Example
For example, if you select Daily Report, you can select By Day or By Hour, or By Minute and it
will export 1, 24, or 24×60 records respectively for each thermometry point.
4) Select the content to export.
Temperature Exception
Export the number of exceptions on temperature (temperature too high or too low) of
each thermometry point.
Temperature Status
Export the maximum temperature and minimum temperature of each thermometry point.
5) Set the format of the exported file as Excel, CSV, or PDF.
6) Click Export.

629
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

19.10.2 Send Temperature Analysis Report Regularly

You can set a regular report rule for specified thermal cameras, and the platform can send an email
with a report attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly, showing temperature
exceptions or min./max. temperature, detected by these thermal cameras during the specified
time periods.
Before You Start
● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Add

Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .

● Set the email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and port. For details, refer to

Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 32,000 records in total.
● The report will be an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Scheduled Report .
2. Click Add to open the Create Report page.
3. Select the report category as Temperature Analysis.
4. Create a name for the report.
5. Select the thermal camera(s) and presets contained in the report.
The report will show the temperature exceptions (including temperature too high or too low) or
maximum and minimum temperature of different thermometry points on these presets.
6. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time, and set how
the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current day.
For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
For example, if you select the report type as Daily, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the number of passing vehicles detected in each hour or each minute for one
camera.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report and monthly report can be less time-consuming,
since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report at the

630
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7 days or
last month before the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
7. Set how the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.
Example
For example, if you select the Statistical Cycle as By Day, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each thermometry point respectively
in the report, showing the temperature exceptions or min./max. temperature detected in each
hour or each minute.
8. Set the content in the report.
Temperature Exception
The number of exceptions on temperature (temperature too high or too low) of each
thermometry point.
Temperature Status
The maximum temperature and minimum temperature of each thermometry point.
9. Set the report time and sending time according to the report type.
10. Optional: Set the effective period (start time and end time) of sending the report regularly.
11. Select the language as Report Language.

Note
By default, the language is the same with the selected language when you log in on the Web
Client.
12. Optional: Switch on Send Report via Email, and select the email template from the drop-down
list to define the recipient information and email format.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Add
Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .
13. Optional: Switch on Upload to SFTP, and click Configure beside SFTP Address to configure the
SFTP settings, including SFTP address, port, user name, password, and saving path.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click SFTP Settings from the drop-down list to
enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
14. Optional: Switch on Local Storage, and click Configure beside Saving Path to configure the
saving path of local storage.

631
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click Configure Local Storage from the drop-down
list to enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
15. Click Add.

19.11 Vehicle Analysis Report

Vehicle analysis report shows the number of passing vehicles detected by the specified cameras
during specified time period.
You can set a regular report rule for the specified ANPR cameras, and the system will send emails
with reports attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly. You can also manually
generate a vehicle analysis report at any time to view the data if required.

19.11.1 Generate Vehicle Analysis Report

For ANPR cameras and entrances & exits, you can generate a report to show the number of passing
vehicles detected by specified cameras during specified time periods.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Report → Vehicle Analysis .
2. Select ANPR or Entrance & Exit for the statistical type.
3. Select ANPR camera(s) or entrance(s) & exit(s) for analysis.
- Select ANPR Camera:
a. Click in the camera panel.
b. Select a current site or Remote Site from the drop-down list to show its ANPR cameras
which support this function.

Note
Only the online ANPR cameras will be displayed here.
c. Check the camera(s) for analysis.
d. Select the camera(s) for the report in the camera list.

Note
Up to 20 ANPR cameras can be selected for statistics at the same time.
- Select Entrance & Exit:
Check the entrance(s) & exit(s) for analysis.
4. Select the report type as daily report, weekly report, monthly report, annual report, or
customize the time interval for a report.
Daily Report

632
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will calculate the number of
vehicles in each hour of one day.
Weekly Report, Monthly Report, Annual Report
As compared to the daily report, the weekly report, monthly report, and annual report can be
less time-consuming, since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will calculate
the number of vehicles in each day of way week, in each day of one month, and in each
month of one year.
Custom Time Interval
Users can customize the days in the report to analyze the number of vehicles in each day or
month of the custom time interval.
5. Set the time or time period for statistics.

Note
For the custom time interval report, you need to set the start time and end time to specify the
time period.
6. Click Generate Report.

Figure 19-13 Vehicle Analysis Report

The passing vehicles statistics detected by all the selected cameras are displayed in the right
panel.
7. Optional: Export the report to the local PC.
1) Click Export.
The Export panel will display camera selected and time configured according to the range you
defined previously.

633
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2) Optional: Select the camera and set the report type and report time if needed.
3) Select a shorter time period to view more detailed data of each camera.
Example
For example, if you select the daily report, you can select By Day or By Hour, and it will export
1or 24 records respectively for each camera.

Note
If you select By Minute, the number of records depends on the configuration on the device.
For example, if the device reports vehicle analysis data to the platform every minute, it will
export 24*60 records for each camera.
4) Set the format of the exported file as Excel, CSV, or PDF.
5) Click Export.

19.11.2 Send Vehicle Analysis Report Regularly

You can set a regular report rule for specified ANPR cameras, and the platform can send an email
with a report attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly, showing the number of
passing vehicles detected by these ANPR cameras during the specified time periods.
Before You Start
● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Add

Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .

● Set the email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and port. For details, refer to

Configure Email Account .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 32,000 records in total.
● The report will be an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Intelligent Analysis → Analysis
Group → Scheduled Report .
2. Click Add to open the Create Report page.
3. Select the report category as Vehicle Analysis.
4. Create a name for the report.
5. Select the ANPR camera(s) contained in the report.
6. Set the Statistical Cycle as By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the sending time, and set how
the report will present results analyzed in the specified time period.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day, which contains analysis results on the day (24 hours) before the current day.

634
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

For example, if you set the sending time as 20:00, the platform will send a report at 20:00
every day, containing analysis results between 00:00 and 24:00 before the current day.
For example, if you select the report type as Daily, you can select Calculate by Hour or
Calculate by Minute. There will be 24 or 24×60 records for each camera respectively in the
report, showing the number of passing vehicles detected in each hour or each minute for one
camera.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
As compared to daily report, weekly report and monthly report can be less time-consuming,
since they are not to be submitted every day. The platform will send one report at the
sending time every week or every month, which contains analysis results on the last 7 days or
last month before the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time as 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing analysis results
between last Monday and Sunday.
7. Set the report time and sending time according to the report type.
8. Optional: Set the effective period (start time and end time) of sending the report regularly.
9. Select the language as Report Language.

Note
By default, the language is the same with the selected language when you log in on the Web
Client.
10. Optional: Switch on Send Report via Email, and select the email template from the drop-down
list to define the recipient information and email format.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Add
Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .
11. Optional: Switch on Upload to SFTP, and click Configure beside SFTP Address to configure the
SFTP settings, including SFTP address, port, user name, password, and saving path.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click SFTP Settings from the drop-down list to
enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
12. Optional: Switch on Local Storage, and click Configure beside Saving Path to configure the
saving path of local storage.

Note
You can also click on the right of , then click Configure Local Storage from the drop-down
list to enter the panel to configure the corresponding information.
13. Click Add.

635
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 20 Mobile Monitoring

The Mobile Monitoring function is for users to monitor driving vehicles, including locating vehicles
to get their real-time GPS information and driving speed, talking to drivers via two-way audio,
playing videos streamed from vehicle-mounted cameras, playing back the tracks vehicles have
traveled along, and searching for mobile monitoring records. You can configure driving rules to
assist you to monitor vehicles by regulating the areas where vehicles are allowed or not allowed to
drive and the routes that vehicles are required to drive along.

20.1 Flow Chart

The flow chart introduces the process of mobile monitoring configuration.

Figure 20-1 Flow Chart of Mobile Monitoring Configuration

636
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

20.2 Mobile Monitoring Overview

The Overview page displays the major steps of Mobile Monitoring configuration and presents brief
information such as the health of devices and real-time driving events.

Figure 20-2 Mobile Monitoring Overview

Banner
The banner briefly introduces the Mobile Monitoring function and the major steps of
configuration. You can click each button to complete a relevant step, or click Get Started and then
click to follow the wizard to complete configuration including adding mobile devices, adding
vehicles, configuring recording settings, etc.
Health Status
You can view the health of devices including mobile devices, cameras, and alarm inputs. You can
click Go to Maintenance to view more details.
Statistics and Reports
You can view some of the mobile monitoring statistics generated in the last 7 days, including the
driving distance, driving duration, and driving event. See Statistics and Reports for how to view
more details and reports.
Real-Time Event
You can view the events triggered by monitored vehicles. Detailed information of each record is
also provided, including the vehicle's license plate number, the area where an event was triggered,
driver information, etc. You can click More to go to the Driving Event Search page to search for
more driving events. See Search for Driving Events for details.

637
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

20.3 Basic Settings

To ensure the smooth operations of mobile monitoring, you need to configure the basic
parameters, route parameters, fuel level monitoring parameters, and scheduled reports in
advance.

20.3.1 Configure Basic Parameters

You can configure the basic parameters including the distance unit, GIS map, and retention period
of GPS data.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Basic
Settings → Basic Parameters .

Figure 20-3 Basic Parameter Configuration

2. Select a distance unit.
3. Click Edit to edit the GIS map.

Note
If you have not configured a GIS map, you should click Configure GIS Map to configure an online
or offline GIS map first. See Set GIS Map and Icons for details.
4. Select the retention period of GPS data.
5. Set the frequency at which the GPS information is reported to the platform.
6. Optional: Switch on Stream Auto Switch Off and set a duration.

Note
If a user has enabled live view or playback but does not perform any operation during the set
duration, the platform will automatically stop streaming cameras to save network traffic.

20.3.2 Configure Route Parameters

By configuring route parameters, you can change the rules for deciding a late departure or arrival,
and you can customizing the causes of unpunctual departure/arrival to select on the Route
Monitoring page.

638
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

In the top left corner, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Basic Settings → Route
Parameters . Configure the following parameters according to your needs and save them.
Flexible Duration for Departure
If the time difference between the actual departure time and scheduled departure time is less
than this flexible duration you set, the departure will not be determined as an unpunctual
departure.
Flexible Duration for Arrival
If the time difference between the actual arrival time and scheduled arrival time is less than this
flexible duration you set, the arrival will not be determined as an unpunctual arrival.
Cause of Unpunctual Departure/Arrival
You can customize the causes of unpunctual departures or arrivals for vehicles according to your
needs. When an unpunctual departure or arrival happens, you can select a cause on the Route
Monitoring page.

20.3.3 Configure Fuel Level Monitoring Parameters

Fuel level monitoring parameters help monitoring exceptions of fuel level. If the fuel level change
and fuel consumption per 100 km exceed the configured value, events or alarms will be triggered.
Steps
1. In the top left corner, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Basic Settings → Fuel
Level Monitoring Parameters .
2. Enable Fuel Level Monitoring Parameter.

Note
When it is disabled, the functions of searching for fuel level monitoring records and generating
fuel consumption statistics reports are unavailable.
3. Select the Fuel Quantity Unit for fuel consumption calculation.
4. Add a fuel tank model.
1) Click Add.
2) Enter the fuel tank name, capacity, fuel height, and threshold of fuel consumption.

639
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-4 Window of Adding Fuel Tank Model

Example
If you enter 70 in Fuel Tank Capacity and 100 in Fuel Height, it means the maximum fuel tank
capacity of the tank is 70 if the fuel height is 100.
Threshold of Fuel Consumption
When the actual fuel consumption each 100 km exceeds the configured value, the
Abnormal Fuel Consumption per 100 Kilometers event will be triggered.
3) (Optional) Click Get Current Fuel Level In Tank, and then select a vehicle to get the current
fuel level of the vehicle's tank.
4) Click Add.
5. Enter the Fuel Tolerance in Tank. If the difference between the actual fuel quantity
6. Click Save.

20.3.4 Configure Scheduled Reports

You can set parameters for sending scheduled reports including driver analysis report, fuel level
analysis report, and stop traffic analysis report.
Steps
1. In the top left corner, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Basic Settings →
Scheduled Report .

640
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Click to enter the Create Report page, or click a report to enter the report's page.
3. Enter the report name.
4. Select an analysis type.
5. Select the report targets.

Note
The report targets change according to the analysis type.
6. Select a statistical cycle.
By Day
The report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending time
every day. The report contains data recorded on the day prior to the current day.
For example, if you set the sending time to 20:00, the system will send a report at 20:00 every
day, containing data between 00:00 and 24:00 prior to the current day.
By Week / By Month
The platform will send one report at the sending time every week or every month. The report
contains data of the recent one/two weeks or current/last month of the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time to 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 a.m. every Monday, containing data of the last week or recent two
weeks based on your selection.

Note
If you select By Week, you can select the calculating method as Calculate by Day or Calculate by
Hour.
7. Select the report time, which means the statistical range of the report.

Note
The options changes according to the statistical cycle you select.
8. Select a day and/or time of sending the report at the Send At / Send On field.
9. Optional: Select an Effective Period for the settings.
10. Select CSV or Excel as the report format.
11. Optional: Select a report language.
12. Optional: Enable Send Report via Email, and then select an email template.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Set
Email Template .
13. Optional: Enable Upload to SFTP and/or Save to Local Storage.

Note
To set up the SFTP or local storage, click > SFTP Settings or Configure Local Storage on the
top left.

641
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

14. Click Save.

20.4 Driver Management

You can add driver information to the platform in multiple ways and add driver groups for further
management. In addition, you can export information and profile photos of drivers from the
platform.

20.4.1 Add Drivers

Multiple methods are provided for adding drivers to the platform. You can add a single driver by
entering his/her information or add drivers from existing persons. In addition, you can batch add
driver information by importing a template with driver information or importing ZIP files
containing driver's profile photos.

Add a Single Driver

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Driver
Management .
2. Select the Driver tab.
3. Hover the mouse cursor over Add and click Add Driver to enter the Add Driver page.

Figure 20-5 Add Driver

4. Set the driver's basic information, such as the ID, driver group, first name, last name.

Figure 20-6 Add Driver Page

642
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

ID (Required)
The default ID is generated by the platform. You can edit it if needed. Once the driver is
added successfully, the ID cannot be edited any more.
Driver Group
See details about how to add a driver group in Add a Driver Group .
Driver's Last/First Name (Required)
Either the last name or the first name is required.
Profile Photo

Hover over , and then take or upload a profile photo of the driver.
5. Optional: Set the driver's driving license information, including the driving license No. and
picture.
6. Finish adding the driver.
- Click Add.
- Click Add and Continue to finish adding the driver and continue to add other drivers.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit a Driver Click the driver name to edit the driver details.
Delete Drivers Select one or multiple drivers and click Delete to delete the drivers.
Filter Drivers Click to filter drivers by name, ID, phone No., driver group or/and driving
license No.

Add from Existing Persons

If you have added persons to the platform, you can add them as drivers.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added persons to the platform. See Person Management for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Driver
Management .
2. Select the Driver tab.
3. Hover the mouse cursor over Add and click Add Existing Driver.

Figure 20-7 Add Existing Driver

4. Select one or multiple persons from the list and click Add.

643
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can search for target persons by keyword.

Figure 20-8 Add Existing Person Page

5. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit a Driver Click the driver name to edit the driver details.
Delete Drivers Select one or multiple drivers and click Delete to delete the drivers.
Filter Drivers Click to filter drivers by name, ID, phone No., driver group or/and driving
license No.

Import Drivers via the Template

You can batch add drivers to the platform by importing a template which contains driver
information including name, driver group.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Driver
Management .
2. Select the Driver tab.
3. Hover the mouse cursor over Import and click Import Driver via Template.

Figure 20-9 Import Drivers via the Template

4. In the pop-up window, click Download Template to save the template to the local PC.

644
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-10 Import Drivers via the Template Page

5. In the downloaded template, enter the driver information by following the rules shown in the
template.
6. Click and select the template with driver information from the local PC.
7. Optional: Check Auto Replace Duplicate Driver to replace the existing driver information if the
imported ID is the same as that of the existing driver.
8. Click Import to start importing driver information.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit a Driver Click the driver name to edit the driver details.
Delete Drivers Select one or multiple drivers and click Delete to delete the drivers.
Filter Drivers Click to filter drivers by name, ID, phone No., driver group or/and driving
license No.

Import Drivers via Profile Photos

You can batch add driver information to the platform by importing ZIP files containing JPG, JPEG, or
PNG profile photos.
Steps
1. Name the profile photos as required, move these photos into one folder, and then compress the
folder in ZIP format.

Note
● Naming rule of profile photos: First Name+Last Name_ID. Either first name or last name is
required, and the ID is optional. For example, Kate+Smith_123.jpg; Kate_123.jpg;
Smith_123.jpg; Kate+Smith.jpg; Smith.jpg
● If the ID in the profile photo name is the same as that of an existing driver on the platform,
the existing driver's information will be modified.

645
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● If the ID in the profile photo name does not exist on the platform or the existing driver with
the same name does not have an ID, a new driver with the profile photo, name, and ID will be
created.
● If the profile photo name contains ID only, the existing driver with the same ID will be

modified.
2. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Driver
Management .
3. Select the Driver tab.
4. Hover the mouse cursor over Import and click Import Driver via Profile Photo.

Figure 20-11 Import Drivers via Profile Photos

5. Click and select the ZIP files from the local PC.

Figure 20-12 Import Drivers via Profile Photos Page

6. Click Import.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit a Driver Click the driver name to edit the driver details.
Delete Drivers Select one or multiple drivers and click Delete to delete the drivers.
Filter Drivers Click to filter drivers by name, ID, phone No., driver group or/and driving
license No.

20.4.2 Export Drivers

You can batch export driver detailed information and driver's profile photos.

646
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Driver
Management .
2. Select the Driver tab.
3. Hover the mouse cursor over Export and click Export Driver Information or Export Driver Profile
Photo as required.
4. Set a password and confirm the password for decompressing the exported ZIP file.

Note
For exporting driver profile photos, the user name and password are also required.

Figure 20-13 Export Driver Profile Photos

5. Click Export.

Note
You can use the password you set previously to decompress the exported ZIP file.

20.4.3 Add a Driver Group

You can add driver group(s) to categorize different drivers for convenient management.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Driver
Management .
2. Select the Driver Group tab.
3. Click and enter the driver group name.
4. Click OK.
In the driver group list, the added driver group will be displayed with the number of people.
5. Optional: Perform the following operations.

647
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Edit Driver Group Select a driver group, click to edit the driver group name and then
click OK.
Delete Driver Group Select a driver group, click to delete the driver group.
Search for Driver Enter a key word in the search box, and click to search for the
Group target driver group.

20.4.4 Add Drivers to a Driver Group

After adding a driver group, you can add drivers to the driver group.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added drivers and driver group(s) on the Client. For details, refer to Add
Drivers and Add a Driver Group .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Driver
Management .
2. Select the Driver Group tab.
3. Select the added driver group in the left list.
4. Click Add.
The Add Driver pane will pop up.
5. Select driver(s) and click Add.

Note
You can search the target driver by name or ID.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Filter Drivers Select a driver group, click and set filter conditions such as name, and then
click Filter.
Delete Select a driver group in the driver list on the left, then select one or multiple
Drivers drivers on the right and click Delete to delete the drivers.

20.5 Driving Rule

There are two types of driving rule: fence rule and deviation rule. A fence rule specifies the area
where vehicles are allowed or not allowed to drive and a deviation rule specifies the route that
vehicles should drive along. Besides, you can configure rule schedule templates to define when the
rules should take effect. As a result, if a vehicle breaks an effective rule, an alarm will be triggered
and uploaded to the platform.

648
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

20.5.1 Configure a Fence Rule

You can add a fence rule to specify the area where vehicles are allowed or not allowed to drive.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring .
2. Select Driving Rule Configuration → Fence Rule on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Rule page.

Figure 20-14 Add a Fence Rule

4. Set the basic information.
1) Create a name for the fence rule.
2) Optional: Enter the description of the fence rule.
5. Set rule information.
1) Select a rule schedule template.

Note
You can click View to view the scheduled time of the selected template. If you have not
configured any rule schedule template, you can see Configure a Rule Schedule Template for
how to configure one.
2) Select vehicle(s) that the fence rule will be applied to.
3) Set the fence type.
Fence for Entry Detection
An alarm and event will be triggered when a selected vehicle enters the fence area.

649
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Fence for Exit Detection

An alarm and event will be triggered when a selected vehicle exits the fence area.
4) Click to draw a fence area on the map.
6. Click Add to finish or click Add and Continue to add another fence rule.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations after configuring the fence rule(s).
Manage Fence ● Select a fence area and drag its edges to adjust it shape or size.
Area ● Select a fence area and click to delete it.
Manage Map ● Click to display the map in full-screen mode.
● Click to place selected vehicle(s) in the center of the map.
● Click / to zoom in/out on the map.
Edit Fence Rule On the rule list, click the name of a fence rule to edit it.
Filter Fence On the fence rule page, click in the upper-right corner, set filtering
Rule conditions, and click Filter to filter fence rules.
Delete Fence On the rule list, select one or multiple fence rules and click Delete to delete
Rule them.

20.5.2 Configure a Deviation Rule

You can add a deviation rule to specify the route that vehicles should drive along.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring .
2. Select Driving Rule Configuration → Deviation Rule on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Ad Rule page.

650
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-15 Add a Deviation Rule

4. Set basic information.
1) Create a name for the deviation rule.
2) Optional: Enter the description of the deviation rule.
5. Set rule information.
1) Select a rule schedule template.

Note
You can click View to view the scheduled time of the selected template. If you have not
configured any rule schedule template, you can see Configure a Rule Schedule Template for
how to configure one.
2) Select vehicle(s) that the deviation rule will be applied to.
3) Set the deviation threshold.

Note
An event will be triggered if a selected vehicle deviates from the route beyond the threshold.
4) Click to draw a route on the map.
6. Click Add to finish or click Add and Continue to add another deviation rule.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Manage Route ● Select a route and drag a point to move the route.
● Select a route and click to delete it.

651
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Manage Map ● Click to display the map in full-screen mode.

● Click to place selected vehicle(s) in the center of the map.
● Click / to zoom in/out on the map.
Edit Deviation On the rule list, click the name of a deviation rule to edit it.
Rule
Filter Deviation On the deviation rule page, click in the upper-right corner, set filtering
Rule conditions, and click Filter to filter deviation rules.
Delete Deviation On the rule list, select one or multiple deviation rules and click Delete to
Rule delete them.

20.5.3 Configure a Rule Schedule Template

You can add a rule schedule template to define the time when the related driving rules are
effective in a week.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring .
2. Select Driving Rule Configuration → Rule Schedule Template on the left.
3. Click to enter the Add Rule Schedule Template page.

Figure 20-16 Add Rule Schedule Template

4. Create a name for the rule schedule template.

652
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Optional: In the Copy from field, select an existing template to copy its weekly schedule to the
current one.
6. Click Scheduled Time and click or drag on the timetable to define the period.

Note
● A rectangle represents half an hour.

● You can click a selected rectangle to set a more accurate time.

7. Optional: Click Erase and click or drag on the formerly selected rectangle(s) to remove them
from the scheduled time.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit Rule Schedule On the template list, click a rule schedule template to edit it.
Template
Delete Rule Schedule On the template list, select a rule schedule template and click
Template Delete to delete it.

20.6 Route Management

HikCentral Professional supports managing driving stops, routes, and stop event rules. You can add
stop groups to the platform and add stops to the groups in multiple ways for further management.
Then you can select stops for a driving route and configure shift schedules. Also, you can configure
event rules for specified stops.

20.6.1 Manage Stops

You can add driving stop groups to the platform. After that, you can add a single stop to the groups
for further management. Also, you can import multiple stops in a batch to the added groups via a
predefined template.

Add a Stop Group

You can add a stop group to categorize different stops for convenient management.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Route
Management .
2. Select Stop on the left.
3. Click , enter the stop group name and click Add.
The added stop group will be displayed in the stop group list.
What to do next
After adding a stop group, you can add a single stop or import stops via the template to the stop
group. See details in Add a Stop and Import Stops via the Template .

653
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Add a Stop
After adding a stop group, you can add a single stop to the group.
Before You Start
Make sure you have set GIS map. For details, refer to Set GIS Map and Icons ..
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Route
Management .
2. Select Stop on the left.
3. Click a stop group in the stop group list.
4. Click .
5. Move your mouse cursor to the target location on the map and click to start adding a stop.

Note
You can enter the name to search for the target geographic location.
6. Select Circle or Polygon as the stop shape.
7. Adjust the stop shape if needed: if the shape is circle, move any point on the edge of the circle
to change the circle's radius; if the shape is polygon, drag a point to move it or double-click the
point to change the shape.
8. Set the information for the stop: name (required), description (optional). You can also switch on
People Counting for Stops.

Note
For more information about the results of people counting for stops, refer to People Counting
Report .
9. Click Save.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit a Stop Select a stop, click to edit the information of the stop.
Delete a Stop Select a stop, click to delete the stop.

Import Stops via the Template

You can fill the predefined template with the stop information to add multiple stops to the group at
a time.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Route
Management .
2. Select Stop on the left.
3. Click .

654
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Click Download Template and save the predefined template (EXCEL file) in your PC.
5. Open the downloaded template file and edit the required information of the stops to be added
in the corresponding column.
6. Click and select the template file.
7. Click Import.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit a Stop Select a stop, click to edit the information of the stop.
Delete a Stop Select a stop, click to delete the stop.

20.6.2 Configure Driving Routes and Shift Schedules

You can configure the driving route manually or generate it automatically, and manage stops of the
route. After configuring routes, you can configure shift schedules which can repeat by week, and
can also configure schedules which are effective only at a fixed date or during a specific time
period for temporary use.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added stops on the platform. For details, refer to Manage Stops .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Route
Management → Route .
2. Click Add Route (if no route exists) or (if routes exist) to add a route.

Note
If there are routes added before, hover the cursor over a route on the route list page and click
to create a copy and edit it as needed.
3. Do one of the following to select at least two stops on the map.
- Click Switch to List Mode and select stops in the list.
- Click the stop icon on the map to select the stop.

Note
Click the stop icon again on the map to deselect it.

Note
● In the top left corner of the map, you can search for a specific location on the map.
● You can click Reverse to reverse the order of the selected stops.
● You can hover the cursor over the stop name on the left and click to delete the stop.

The selected stops display on the left.

4. In the top right corner of the page, click Next to configure the driving route.
- Adjust the driving route manually.

655
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Hover the cursor over the line between two stops and drag to adjust the driving route
manually.
- Generate the driving route automatically.
Click Auto Generate Route to generate the route automatically.

Note
To generate the driving route automatically, you need to enable the Google map charging
service.
5. Click Next to configure the shift schedules.

Note
You can also click Finish to finish adding the route without configuring the shift schedule.
6. Configure the shift schedule.

Note
If there are shift schedules added before, click on the schedule list to create a copy and edit it
as needed.
1) On the left, click Add Shift Schedule to set required information, including the name, the start
time and the time duration when the schedule takes effect, and click Add.

Note
In the Copy From field, you can select an existing shift schedule and copy all settings from it.
2) Set the arrival time and the departure time for the route.

Note
You can set the flexible duration for departure and arrival. For details, refer to .
3) (Optional) On the schedule list, click Add Vehicle to select vehicles.
7. Click Finish in the top right corner.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Delete Route Select the route and click to delete.
Filter Routes Click to set filtering conditions to search for matched routes.
View Route Click the route name to view details of the route. On the details page, you
Details can click Edit Shift Schedule to edit the shift schedule of the route, and click
Edit Route to edit the route.
Enable/ Click / to enable/disable the route.
Disable
Route

656
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Switch ● At the top of the route list, click Week or Day to display the timetable of
Display Mode routes on a weekly or daily basis. You can click / to adjust the time
period.
● Click the route name displayed on the timetable, you can view the route's
shift schedule details, including the departure time, arrival time and
vehicle. You can also click / to enable/disable the route.

20.6.3 Add a Stop Event Rule

You can configure event rules for specified stops. After configurations, alarm inputs triggered
outside/within the selected stops will be recorded as unintended alarm inputs.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added devices on the platform and alarm inputs to areas. For details, refer

to Resource Management and Add Alarm Input to Area .

● Make sure you have added stops on the platform. For details, refer to Manage Stops .

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring .
2. Select Route Management → Stop Event Configuration on the left.
3. Click Add to add a stop event rule.
4. Set rule basic information.
1) Create a rule name.
2) Optional: Enter the rule description.
5. Select the rule type.
Stops Allowing Triggering Alarm Inputs
Alarm inputs triggered outside the selected stops will be recorded as unintended alarm
inputs.
Stops Forbidding Triggering Alarm Inputs
Alarm inputs triggered within the selected stops will be recorded as unintended alarm inputs.
6. Select the alarm input(s).
7. Select the stop(s) by stop or route.
8. Click Add to finish or click Add and Continue to add another rule.
9. Optional: On the rule list page, perform the following operations.
Delete Rule Select the rule(s) and click Delete.
Edit Rule On the rule list, click the name of a rule to edit the rule.
Filter Rules Click in the upper-right corner, set filtering conditions, and click Filter.

657
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

20.7 Driving Monitoring

On the Driving Monitoring page, you can monitor driving vehicles to get their real-time information
such as locations, speeds, and events. You can also play the live videos streamed from vehicle-
mounted cameras, talk to drivers via two-way audio, track vehicles in real time, play back the
tracks vehicles have traveled along, and add vehicles to the Favorites list for quick and easy
management.
In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Driving
Monitoring to enter the Driving Monitoring page.

Figure 20-17 Driving Monitoring Page

Vehicle List Pane

On the vehicle list pane, you can click Expand Vehicle List and then click / / to view all/
online/located vehicles.
You can click , select a center on the map and drag the mouse to draw a circle, and then release
the mouse to click Positioning or Broadcast to locate or broadcast to all vehicles in the circle.
You can move the cursor onto a vehicle to view its real-time information, including its location,
speed, etc, and can perform the following operations:
The number of unacknowledged alarms will be marked on the vehicle on the GIS map.

658
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Operation Step
Search for Vehicle Enter key words in the search box and click
to search for the specified vehicle.
Locate Vehicle Click to locate the vehicle on the map and
click again to cancel locating it.
Play Back Track Click to play back the track the vehicle has
traveled along.
Other Click to open the operation menu and you
can choose to play video, talk to a driver via
two-way audio, track a vehicle in real time, play
back traveled track, control alarm outputs, and
add/remove a vehicle from the Favorites list.

Note
You can click to display the Favorites list.

Driving Monitoring Pane

You can click the icon of a located vehicle on the map to open the driving monitoring pane. On the
pane, you can view the vehicle's real-time information including its location, speed, etc, and can
perform the following operations:

Figure 20-18 Driving Monitoring Pane

Operation Step
Cancel Locating Vehicle Click to cancel locating the vehicle.
Get Vehicle's Location Click Get Location to get the vehicle's real-​time
location.
Play / Play Back Video Click Play to play live videos or play back video
recordings streamed from vehicle-mounted
cameras.
Talk to Driver Click Two-Way Audio to talk to the driver.

659
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Operation Step
Track Vehicle Click Track to track the vehicle in real time. You
can click Stop in the upper-​left corner of the
vehicle-tracking page to stop tracking.
Play Back Track Click Track Playback and select a period and
camera to play back the track recorded by the
camera in the specified period.
Control Alarm Output Click Alarm Output Control and then click /
to enable/disable the alarm output related
to the vehicle.
Send Text Click Send Text to send text to the vehicle, and
the text will be converted to audio in the
vehicle.

Real-Time Event
The Real-Time Event table presents real-time events triggered by monitored online vehicles. Each
record is attached with detailed information such as the license plate number, driver, event type,
and GPS information. Besides, you can perform the following operations:

Figure 20-19 Real-Time Event Table

Operation Step
Locate Vehicle Click in the Operation column to locate a
vehicle.
Center Vehicle Click in the Operation column to place a
located vehicle in the center of the map.
Search for Track Click in the Operation column to go to search
for the track a vehicle has traveled along.
Save As Evidence Click in the Operation column to save the
event as the evidence.

660
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Operation Step
Select Event Type Click to open the Settings pane and select
the types of event to be reported to the
platform.
Search for Driving Event Click More to go the Driving Event Search page
to search for driving events triggered in the
past.

Location Info
The Location Info table presents the real-time locations of located vehicles. Each record is attached
with detailed information such as the license plate number, GPS info, and driving direction.
Besides, you can perform the following operations:

Figure 20-20 Location Info Table

Operation Step
Get Vehicle's Location Click Get Location in the Address column to get
the real-​time location of a vehicle.
Auto Refresh Location Check Auto Get Location to automatically
refresh locations frequently.
Cancel Locating Vehicle Click to cancel locating a vehicle.
Center Vehicle Click to place a vehicle in the center of the
map.

Map Management
You can perform the following operations on the map:

661
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Operation Step
Display Driving Rule Click and select Fence Rule or/and Deviation
Rule to display the fence area or/and track on
the map.
Broadcast to Vehicle Click and select vehicle(s) to broadcast to
them.
Measure Distance Click and specify the start point and end
point on the map to measure the actual
distance between them.
Full-Screen Display Click to display the map in full-screen mode.
Zoom Map Click / to zoom in/out on the map.

20.8 Route Monitoring

On the route monitoring page, you can monitor the vehicles' driving routes to get stop information,
route status, unpunctual causes, vehicles' driving status, and GIS maps. You can also view the
detailed information of vehicles in the routes, such as locations, speeds, and events.
In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Driving Monitoring → Route
Monitoring to enter the Route Monitoring page.

662
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Route List Monitoring

Figure 20-21 Route List Monitoring

In the top left corner of the page, you can click All Routes/Punctual/Unpunctual to view all/
punctual/unpunctual vehicle routes.
You can view the total number of stops and the stop names for each route. You can also view the
status (punctual/early/unpunctual) and the current location of the vehicle.
You can perform the following operations on the route list:

Operation Description
View Route Details Move the cursor onto a route to view the route details,
including punctual rate, license plate number, driver, scheduled
arrival time, actual arrival time, scheduled departure time, and
actual departure time.
Add Cause of Unpunctual Move the cursor onto a route, click in the Operation column
Departure/Arrival to add a note when the vehicle status in the route is unpunctual
departure/arrival.

Note
● You can enter the cause of the unpunctual departure/arrival
manually or select predefined causes.
● You can add predefined causes to the list.

Search for Routes Search for routes according to vehicles, stops, and route name.

663
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Single Route Monitoring

Figure 20-22 Single Route Monitoring

You can click View Map to open the GIS map of a single route and view the routes and vehicles on
the map in real time.
You can select another route on the left pane, and you can filter the routes by route status (all/
punctual/unpunctual), vehicle, stop, and route name.
The vehicle status table at the bottom presents the arrival/departure time of the vehicles in the
route. Each record is attached with detailed information such as the license plate number, driver,
scheduled arrival time, actual arrival time, scheduled departure time, and actual departure time.

Note
● The time in green indicates the vehicle is punctual, yellow indicates the vehicle is earlier than the
predefined time, and orange indicates the vehicle is late.
● You can move the cursor on to view the cause of unpunctual arrival/departure of a specific
vehicle.

You can perform the following operations on the map:

Operation Description
Change Map Types Click and select Default/Topographic Map/Satellite Map
to display the different types of map.
Center Vehicle Click to locate the vehicle(s) in the center of the map.

664
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Operation Description
Monitor Vehicles in the Route Click the icon of a located vehicle on the map to open the
driving monitoring pane. For details about driving
monitoring, see Driving Monitoring .
Zoom Map Click / to zoom in/out on the map.

20.9 Mobile Monitoring Record

Mobile monitoring records include the tracks vehicles have traveled along, the events triggered by
them in a specified period, the routes related to specific vehicles / vehicle groups, and fuel level
monitoring records. You can search for records, view the details of each record, and export records
to your PC for further use.

20.9.1 Search for Vehicle Tracks

You can search for the tracks that vehicles have traveled along in the specified period, view
detailed information of each record, play back tracks, and export records to the PC.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring .
2. Select Search → Vehicle Track Search on the left.
3. Set search conditions.
1) Specify the period you want to search for vehicle tracks in.
2) Select vehicle(s).
3) Optional: Switch on Speed Range and set a speed range.
4) Optional: Switch on Event Type and click to select event type(s).

Note
All event types have been selected by default.
4. Click Search.

665
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-23 Vehicle Track Search

5. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Play Back Click to play back a track.
Track
Export Click to export a single record to the PC.
Record Click Export in the upper-right corner to export all records to the PC.
Other Click and more records generated in the specified period will be displayed.
You can also click to play back a track and click to export a record to the
PC.

20.9.2 Search for Driving Events

You can search for the event triggered by vehicles, drivers, or driver groups, view detailed
information of each record, and export records to the PC.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring .
2. Select Search → Driving Event Search on the left.
3. Set search conditions.

666
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-24 Search for Driving Events

1) Specify the period you want to search for driving events in.
2) Select Vehicle or Driver / Driver Group as the type.
3) Click to select vehicle(s), driver(s), or driver group(s).

Note
All vehicles / drivers / driver groups have been selected by default.
4) Click to select event type(s).

Note
All event types have been selected by default.
5) Click Specify Area on Map and draw an area on the map.
The platform will search for events triggered in the specified area.
4. Click Search.
5. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Play Back Track Click to play back a track.
Export Record Click to export a single record to the PC.
Check record(s) and click Export in the upper-right corner to export them to
the PC.

20.9.3 Search for Routes

You can search for routes, view detailed information of each route, and export route information to
the local PC.

667
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring .
2. Select Search → Route Search on the left.
3. Set search conditions.

Figure 20-25 Search Conditions

1) Specify the period you want to search for routes.
2) Click to select route(s).

Note
All routes have been selected by default.
3) Click to select stop(s).

668
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
All stops have been selected by default.
4) Select Vehicle or Driver / Driver Group as the type.
5) Click to select vehicle(s), driver(s), or driver group(s).

Note
All vehicles / drivers /driver groups have been selected by default.
4. Click Search.
The needed routes will be displayed in the list.

Figure 20-26 Search for Routes

5. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Play Back Track In the Operation column, click to play back a track.
Export Record Click to export a single record to the PC.
Check records and click Export in the upper-right corner to export them to
the PC.

20.9.4 Search for Fuel Level Monitoring Records

You can search for records of fuel level in the specified period and view details of the license plate
No., area, driver's name, fuel tank model, fuel quantity (gal), fuel level in tank (%), GPS info, and
fuel filling or not.

669
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Driving Monitoring → Search →
Fuel Level Monitoring Record Search .
2. Set search conditions.
1) Specify the period you want to search for fuel level records in.
2) Select Vehicle or Driver / Driver Group, and all vehicles or all drivers / driver groups are
selected by default.

Note
Click to specify certain vehicles or driver / driver groups.
3. Click Search to get the list of fuel level minitoring records.

20.10 Statistics and Reports

HikCentral Professional provides multiple types of reports for you to get insight into the variation
trend of the driving data, driving behaviors, number of passengers, and device online rate related
to the vehicles in your company/organization. These reports, which can be exported to your local
PC, demonstrate data in a visualized way through charts and (or) tables, helping you make better
business decisions, operation strategies, device maintenance plans, etc.

20.10.1 Overview
You can have an overview of mobile monitoring data in the last 7 days on one page, including the
GPS information, driving distance, driving duration, overspeed times, and driving events.
In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics and
Reports → Overview to enter the overview page.

670
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-27 Statistics Overview

You can perform the following operations on the page.

View One Day's Data

Hover the cursor onto a chart to view the data of a specific day.

671
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-28 Example

Jump to the Report Generation Page

If you need to view the data in other periods, click More in the upper-right corner of a chart. For
example, you can click More in the Driving Distance chart area to jump to the page as shown in the
figure below and be ready for generating driving distance reports according to the conditions you
set.

672
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-29 Generate Report

20.10.2 Generate a Driver Analytics Report

You can generate a driver analytics report showing the driver analytics information of specific
drivers in a certain period, including the basic information of driver, driving distance, driving
duration, events per 100 km, number of events, total fuel consumption (gallon), etc.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics
and Reports , and then select Driver Analytics from the navigation pane on the left to enter the
Driver Analytics page.
2. Select drivers from the drop-down list.
3. Click Set Event Types for Calculation to select event(s).
4. Set the time period within which driver's statistics will be shown in the report.
The filtered records will be displayed automatically.
5. Click Export in the top right corner. Select All Drivers or Filtered Drivers and export the
corresponding statistics report to the local PC in XLSX format.

20.10.3 Generate a GPS Information Report

You can generate a GPS information report showing the GPS-related information of specific
vehicles in a certain period, including the number of locations detected by GPS, license plate
number, area, time, GPS, driving direction, and driving speed.

673
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics
and Reports , and then select GPS Information from the navigation pane on the left to enter the
GPS Information page.
2. Set search conditions.
Vehicle
Select vehicles from the areas listed below.

Note
Up to 20 vehicles can be selected.
Report Type
Select a report type.
Daily Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar day.
Weekly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
week.
Monthly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
month.
Custom Time Interval
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in a custom period
of no more than 31 days.
Time
The data of the selected period will be shown in the report.
● For Daily Report, you can set the time to today, yesterday, or custom time interval (any

calendar day).
● For Weekly Report, you can set the time to the current week, last week, or custom time

interval (any calendar week).

● For Monthly Report, you can set the time to the current month, last month, or custom

time interval (any calendar month).

● For setting Custom Time Interval as Report Type, you can only set the time to a period of

no more than 31 days.

3. Click Generate Report.
The data will be shown on the right side of the page.
By default, the data will be shown in a line chart, on which the Y-axis represents the number of
locations and the X-axis the time.

674
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-30 View Data in Line Chart

4. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
View Detailed Hover the cursor onto the line chart to view detailed data of the selected
Data vehicles at the corresponding time point.
Show/Hide Click a legend on the top of the line chart to show/hide it.
Legend
View Data in Click to view the data in a table that shows the license plate number, area,
Table time, GPS information, direction, and speed.
You can select a vehicle from the drop-down list and set a period to further
filter the data.
Export Report Click Export to open the Export pane, and then set parameters including
Vehicle, Time, Export By, and Export In.
For the Export By parameter, you can set the content (brief or detailed) of
the report to be exported.
For Export In, you can set the format of the report.

675
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-31 View Data in Table

20.10.4 Generate a Driving Distance Report

You can generate a driving distance report to view the driving distance of specific vehicles or
drivers in a certain period.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics
and Reports , and then select Driving Distance from the navigation pane on the left to enter the
Driving Distance page.
2. Set search conditions.
Analysis Type
Select vehicle or driver as the analysis type and select vehicles/drivers from the list
accordingly.
Report Type
Select a report type.
Daily Report
The report to be generated will show the driving distance of the selected vehicles in one
calendar day.

676
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Weekly Report
The report to be generated will show the driving distance of the selected vehicles in one
calendar week.
Monthly Report
The report to be generated will show the driving distance of the selected vehicles in one
calendar month.
Custom Time Interval
The report to be generated will show the driving distance of the selected vehicles in a
custom period of no more than 31 days.
Time
The driving distance in the selected period will be shown in the report.
● For Daily Report, you can set the time to today, yesterday, or custom time interval (any

calendar day).
● For Weekly Report, you can set the time to the current week, last week, or custom time

interval (any calendar week).

● For Monthly Report, you can set the time to the current month, last month, or custom

time interval (any calendar month).

● For setting Custom Time Interval as Report Type, you can only set the time to a period of

no more than 31 days.

3. Click Generate Report.
The data will be shown on the right side of the page.
By default, the data will be shown in a line chart, on which the Y-axis represents the driving
distance and the X-axis the time.

Figure 20-32 Generate Report

677
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Optional: Perform the following operations.

View Detailed Hover the cursor onto the line chart to view detailed data of the
Data selected vehicles/drivers at the corresponding time point.
Show/Hide Legend Click a legend on the top of the line chart to show/hide the
corresponding data.
View Data in Table Click to view the data in table.
Export Report Click Export to open the Export pane, and then set parameters including
vehicles/drivers, time, and file format.

20.10.5 Generate a Driving Duration Report

You can generate a driving duration report to view the driving duration of specific vehicles or
drivers at a certain speed in a certain period.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics
and Reports , and then select Driving Duration from the navigation pane on the left to enter the
Driving Duration page.
2. Set search conditions.
Analysis Type
Select vehicle or driver as the analysis type and select vehicles/drivers from the list
accordingly.
Report Type
Select a report type.
Daily Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar day.
Weekly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
week.
Monthly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
month.
Custom Time Interval
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in a custom period
of no more than 31 days.
Time
The data of the selected period will be shown in the report.

678
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● For Daily Report, you can set the time to today, yesterday, or custom time interval (any
calendar day).
● For Weekly Report, you can set the time to the current week, last week, or custom time

interval (any calendar week).

● For Monthly Report, you can set the time to the current month, last month, or custom

time interval (any calendar month).

● For setting Custom Time Interval as Report Type, you can only set the time to a period of

no more than 31 days.

Driving Speed Exceeds
Determine the threshold for calculating the driving duration. For example, if you select 40
mile/h, the duration when the selected vehicles drove faster than 40 mile/h will be
calculated.
3. Click Generate Report.
The data will be shown on the right side of the page.
By default, data will be shown in a line chart, on which the Y-axis shows the driving duration
(unit: second) and the X-axis the time.

Figure 20-33 Monthly Report Example

4. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
View Detailed Hover the cursor onto the line chart to view detailed data of the
Data selected vehicles/drivers at the corresponding time point.

679
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Show/Hide Legend Click a legend on the top of the line chart to show/hide it.
View Data in Table Click to view the data in a table.
Export Report Click Export to open the Export pane, and then set parameters
including vehicles/drivers, time, and file format.

20.10.6 Generate an Overspeed Report

You can generate an overspeed report to view the times that specific vehicles overspeed in a
specific period.
Steps

Note
You can define the overspeed threshold for vehicles in a specific area. For details, see Add Vehicle
to Area for Current Site .
1. In the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics
and Reports , and then select Overspeed from the navigation pane on the left to enter the
Overspeed page.
2. Set search conditions.
Vehicle
Select vehicles from the areas listed below.

Note
Up to 20 vehicles can be selected.
Report Type
Select a report type.
Daily Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar day.
Weekly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
week.
Monthly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
month.
Custom Time Interval
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in a custom period
of no more than 31 days.
Time

680
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The data of the selected period will be shown in the report.

● For Daily Report, you can set the time to today, yesterday, or custom time interval (any

calendar day).
● For Weekly Report, you can set the time to the current week, last week, or custom time

interval (any calendar week).

● For Monthly Report, you can set the time to the current month, last month, or custom

time interval (any calendar month).

● For setting Custom Time Interval as Report Type, you can only set the time to a period of

no more than 31 days.

3. Click Generate Report.
The data will be shown on the right side of the page.
By default, the data will be shown in a line chart, on which the Y-axis represents the overspeed
times and the X-axis the time.

Figure 20-34 View Data in Line Chart

4. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
View Detailed Hover the cursor onto the line chart to view detailed data of the selected
Data vehicles at the corresponding time point.
Show/Hide Click a legend on the top of the line chart to show/hide it.
Legend

681
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

View Data in Click to view the data in a table that shows the license plate number, area,
Table time, data, direction, and speed.
You can select a vehicle from the drop-down list and set a period to further
filter the data.
Export Report Click Export to open the Export pane, and then set parameters including
Vehicle, Time, Export By, and Export In.
For the Export By parameter, you can set the content (brief or detailed) of
the report to be exported.
For Export In, you can set the format of the report.

Figure 20-35 View Data in Table

20.10.7 Generate a Stop Analytics Report

You can generate a stop analytics report showing the overall statistics of the selected stops in a
certain period, including the average punctual departure rate, average punctual arrival rate,
average dwell time (in minutes), total unpunctual arrivals, and total unpunctual departures. When
enough results are generated, the report also shows the top 10 / bottom 10 stop rankings for
punctual departure rate, punctual arrival rate, and dwell time.

682
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics
and Reports , and then select Stop Analytics from the navigation pane on the left to enter the
Stop Analytics page.
2. Select route(s) and stop(s) accordingly from the drop-down lists.
3. Select a time period for the report from Today, Last 7 Days, and Custom.

Note
The custom time period should be within 7 days.
The stop analytics report of the selected time period will be displayed on the page.

20.10.8 Generate a Driving Event Report

You can generate a driving event report to view the times of event detection related to specific
vehicles in a specific period.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics
and Reports , and then select Driving Event from the navigation pane on the left to enter the
Driving Event page.
2. Set search conditions.
Vehicle
Select vehicles from the areas listed below.

Note
Up to 20 vehicles can be selected.
Report Type
Select a report type.
Daily Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar day.
Weekly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
week.
Monthly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
month.
Custom Time Interval
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in a custom period
of no more than 31 days.

683
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Time
The data of the selected period will be shown in the report.
● For Daily Report, you can set the time to today, yesterday, or custom time interval (any

calendar day).
● For Weekly Report, you can set the time to the current week, last week, or custom time

interval (any calendar week).

● For Monthly Report, you can set the time to the current month, last month, or custom

time interval (any calendar month).

● For setting Custom Time Interval as Report Type, you can only set the time to a period of

no more than 31 days.

Event Type
By default, all event types are selected.
You can click to select the events whose detection times will be calculated.

684
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-36 Select Events

3. Click Generate Report.
The data will be shown in a line chart on which the Y-axis represents the number of events and
the X-axis the time.

685
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-37 View Data in Line Chart

4. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
View Detailed Hover the cursor onto the line chart to view detailed data of the selected
Data vehicles at the corresponding time point.
Show/Hide Click a legend on the top of the line chart to show/hide it.
Legend
Export Report Click Export to open the Export pane, and then set parameters including
Vehicle, Time, Event Type, and Export In.
For Export In, you can set the format of the report.

20.10.9 Generate a Fuel Consumption Analytics Report

You can generate a fuel consumption analytics report to view the fuel consumption of specific
vehicles or drivers in a certain period.
Steps

Note
Fuel consumption analytics reports can only be generated with fuel level monitoring enabled and
the related parameters configured. For details, see Configure Fuel Level Monitoring Parameters .

686
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

1. On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics
and Reports , and then select Fuel Consumption Analytics from the navigation pane on the left
to enter the Fuel Consumption Analytics page.
2. Set search conditions.
Analysis Type
Select vehicle or driver as the analysis type and select vehicles/drivers from the list
accordingly.
Report Type
Select a report type.
Daily Report
The report to be generated will show the fuel consumption of the selected vehicles/drivers
in one calendar day.
Weekly Report
The report to be generated will show the fuel consumption of the selected vehicles/drivers
in one calendar week.
Monthly Report
The report to be generated will show the fuel consumption of the selected vehicles/drivers
in one calendar month.
Custom Time Interval
The report to be generated will show the fuel consumption of the selected vehicles/drivers
in a custom period of no more than 31 days.
Time
Fuel consumption in the selected time period will be shown in the report.
● For Daily Report, you can select from Today, Yesterday, and Custom Time Interval (any

calendar day).
● For Weekly Report, you can select from Current Week, Last Week, and Custom Time

Interval (any calendar week).

● For Monthly Report, you can select from Current Month, Previous Month, and Custom

Time Interval (any calendar month).

● For reports of a custom time interval, you can only set the time to a period of no more than

31 days.
3. Click Generate Report.
The report will be shown on the right side of the page.

Note
By default, data will be shown in a line chart, of which the y-axis is the overall fuel consumption
value (unit: gal/100 km) of all selected vehicles/drivers and the x-axis is the time. A table listing
the statistics for each vehicle/driver is shown below the line chart.

687
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-38 Monthly Report Example

4. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
View Fuel Click the name of a specific vehicle/driver at the bottom and select the
Consumption of a Fuel Consumption tab on top.
Specific Vehicle/ Hover the cursor over the line chart to view the fuel consumption
Driver value of specific time points and the average consumption value of the
selected time period. Data such as total fuel consumption, total driving
distance, and fuel consumption per 100 kilometers are shown above
the chart.
View Fuel Level Click the name of a specific vehicle at the bottom and select the Fuel
Change of a Specific Level Change tab on top.
Vehicle Hover the cursor over the line chart to view detailed information of
specific time points, including the specific report time, license plate
number, driver, fuel level, fuel quantity, and GPS information.
Click a point on the chart to pinpoint the vehicle's report location on
the map above.
Show/Hide Legend Click a legend on the top of the line chart to show/hide it.
Export Report Click Export to open the Export pane, and then set parameters
including vehicles/drivers, time, report content, and file format.

688
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

20.10.10 Generate a Passenger Counting Report

You can generate a passenger counting report to view the number of passengers who got on or
(and) off in a specific period.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics and
Reports , and then select Passenger Counting from the navigation pane on the left to enter the
Passenger Counting page.
2. Set search conditions.
Analysis Type
Select vehicle or stop as the analysis type and select vehicles/stops from the list accordingly.
Report Type
Select a report type.
Daily Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar day.
Weekly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
week.
Monthly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
month.
Custom Time Interval
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in a custom period
of no more than 31 days.
Time
The data of the selected period will be shown in the report.
● For Daily Report, you can set the time to today, yesterday, or custom time interval (any

calendar day).
● For Weekly Report, you can set the time to the current week, last week, or custom time

interval (any calendar week).

● For Monthly Report, you can set the time to the current month, last month, or custom

time interval (any calendar month).

● For setting Custom Time Interval as Report Type, you can only set the time to a period of

no more than 31 days.

3. Click Generate Report.
By default, the data will be shown in a line chart on which the Y-axis represents the number of
passengers and the X-axis the time.

689
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-39 Generate a Passenger Counting Report

4. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Switch Chart Mode Click to switch the chart mode to histogram.
View Detailed Data Hover the cursor onto the chart to view detailed data of the selected
vehicles/stops at the corresponding time point.
Show/Hide Legend Click a legend on the top of the chart to show/hide it.
Filter by Passenger Click the drop-down list on the top of the chart to select a passenger
Movement Direction movement direction (Enter, Exit, Enter and Exit) to filter the data.
Export Report Click Export to open the Export pane, and then set parameters
including vehicles/stops, time, and file format.

20.10.11 Generate a Device Online Rate Report

You can generate a report to view the online rate of the mobile devices mounted on the selected
vehicles in a specific period.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Mobile Monitoring → Statistics
and Reports , and then select Device Online Rate from the navigation pane on the left to enter
the Device Online Rate page.
2. Set search conditions.
Vehicle
Select vehicles from the areas listed below.

690
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Up to 20 vehicles can be selected.
Report Type
Select a report type.
Weekly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
week.
Monthly Report
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in one calendar
month.
Custom Time Interval
The report to be generated will show the data of the selected vehicles in a custom period
of no more than 31 days.
Time
The data of the selected period will be shown in the report.
● For Weekly Report, you can set the time to the current week, last week, or custom time

interval (any calendar week).

● For Monthly Report, you can set the time to the current month, last month, or custom

time interval (any calendar month).

● For setting Custom Time Interval as Report Type, you can only set the time to a period of

no more than 31 days.

3. Click Generate Report.
The data will be shown in a line chart on which the Y-axis represents the devices' online rate and
the X-axis the time.

691
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 20-40 View Data in Line Chart

4. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Switch Data Select a data type (device online rate, online duration, or offline times)
Type from the drop-down list on the top of the chart to display the selected type
of data.
View Detailed Hover the cursor onto the chart to view detailed data of the selected
Data vehicles at the corresponding time point.
Show/Hide Click a legend on the top of the chart to show/hide the corresponding data.
Legend
Filter by Click a vehicle at the bottom of the chart to view the data of the vehicle in
Vehicle the selected period.
Export Report Click Export to open the Export pane, and then set parameters including
Vehicle, Time, and Export In.
For Export In, you can set the format of the report.

692
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 21 Vehicle and Parking Management

HikCentral Professional provides vehicle and parking management services covering vehicle
management, entry & exit rule management, parking fee rule management, etc. The platform can
perform relevant operations according to the rules you set.
On the Web Client, you need to create a parking lot and set its entrances and exits as well as lanes
according to actual needs. Meanwhile, you need to import vehicle information to the platform and
categorize vehicles into different types if needed, so that you can predefine parking fee rules and
entry & exit rules for them. For the vehicles not managed in the platform, you can also set an entry
& exit rule to define how to open the barrier when these vehicles are detected at the entrances
and exits.

21.1 Flow Chart of Vehicle and Parking Management

The following flow chart shows the process of configuring and managing vehicle and parking.

Figure 21-1 Flow Chart of Vehicle and Parking Management

● Parking Lot Management: Parking lot is a parking facility that is intended for parking vehicles.
You need to create a parking lot in the platform and set its entrances and exits as well as lanes
according to actual needs.
● Entry & Exit Rule Management: An entry & exit rule defines how to open barrier gate when the
platform detects a vehicle at the lane. The platform can open the barrier automatically when a

693
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

vehicle is detected or you can also open it manually by clicking Allow button on the Control
Client after verifying its identity.
● Parking Fee Rule Management: A parking fee rule defines how vehicles are charged for parking.
On the Web Client, the administrator can set parking fee rules for parking lots, including the
parking fee rule for a specific type of vehicles, the parking pass rule, the discount rule, etc.
● Vehicle and Card Management: On the Web Client, the administrator can add vehicle
information to the platform, and set events and alarms to define whether an event or alarm will
be triggered when the recognized license plate number matches or mismatches with that
managed in the platform, or whether an event or alarm will be triggered when the recognized
vehicle type matches the specified one. For entrance and exit control, the administrator can set
entry & exit rules for the vehicles managed in the platform to define whether to allow the
vehicles to enter or exit the parking lot. In addition, the administrator can issue temporary cards
to temporary vehicles for parking management.
● Parking Guidance Configuration: Parking guidance is performed by two types of devices: the
guidance terminal and the display screen. The guidance terminal can relate multiple parking
cameras for management, and the display screen displays the number of vacant parking spaces
in a parking lot and guides the drivers to the area where there are vacant parking spaces.
● Application: After completing the above-mentioned configurations, you can perform operations
including monitoring parking spaces, searching for vehicles and records, viewing statistics and
reports, and license plate fuzzy search.

21.2 Parking Lot Overview

On the Parking Lot Overview page, you can view different information about the parking lot,
including the occupancy statistics of parking spaces, the number of daily entries and exits, the
health of devices, etc. You can also go to different pages via hyperlinks to view detailed
information.
Occupancy: You can view the total number of parking spaces, the number of vacant parking
spaces, and the occupancy statistics of different types of parking spaces. You can click Parking
Space Overview to go to the Parking Space Overview page and view more detailed statistics of
parking spaces. See Parking Space Monitoring for details.
Today's Entries & Exits: You can view the number of daily entries and exits, the entry/exit trend,
and the number of entries and exits at different entrances and exits.
Vehicle Passing Event: You can view the vehicle-passing information of the parking lot. If you are
managing more than one parking lot, you can click the name of a parking lot to view its detailed
vehicle-passing information.
Device Monitoring: You can view the health of devices related to the parking lot, including
guidance terminals, parking cameras, and display screens. You can also click Maintenance to go to
the Maintenance page and view more detailed statistics of the health of devices. See Maintenance
for details.

694
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Other Parking Lot Entrance & Exit: In the lower-right corner, you can view the list of devices linked
to lane(s) for other parking lot(s). You can click Configure Now to configure settings of the parking
lot.

Figure 21-2 Parking Lot Overview Page

21.3 Basic Settings of Parking Management

Here you can configure some global parameters for the Self-Service Vehicle Finding Clients and
display screens in parking lots, and select users to receive calls from parking lots.

21.3.1 Set Basic Parameters

On the Web Client, you can enable fuzzy search for the Self-Service Vehicle Finding Client in the
parking lot to help vehicle owners find their vehicles more quickly and conveniently. And the date
format displayed on the Self-Service Vehicle Finding Client or display screens of the parking lot can
also be predefined.
In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Basic Configuration → Basic Parameter .

695
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-3 Set Basic Parameters

Self-Service Vehicle Finding (Fuzzy)

Switch on Self-Service Vehicle Finding (Fuzzy) to enable fuzzy search for the Self-Service Vehicle
Finding Client. Once enabled, the Self-Service Vehicle Finding Client will display license plate
numbers without displaying vehicle pictures when finding vehicles, so that the time consumption
in vehicle finding will be reduced.
Date Display Format
Select yyyy/mm/dd or dd/mm/yyyy in the Date Display Format field to determine the date format
displayed on the Self-Service Vehicle Finding Client or display screens of the parking lot.

21.3.2 Set User to Receive Entry & Exit Calls

You can specify users to receive calls from the entry & exit devices on the Control Client, and then
the user can remotely perform further operations for the vehicles, such as correcting license plate
number and manually allowing passing.
In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Basic Configuration → Call Recipient Settings .
Click Add to select user(s) to receive entrance & exit calls on the Control Client.

21.4 Manage Parking Lot

Parking lot is a parking facility that is intended for parking vehicles. You can add one or multiple
parking lots to the platform and set entrances and exits as well as lanes for them according to
actual needs.
There are three elements in the parking management platform:
Parking Lot

696
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

A parking facility that is intended for parking vehicles. The platform supports adding multiple
parking lots and you need to create them at the very beginning.
Entrance & Exit
The vehicles can enter or exit the parking lot via entrance & exit.
Lane
Each entrance or exit should contain at least one lane. The lane can be related with devices,
including the capture unit, access control device, video intercom device, guidance screen, and
entrance/exit station, which can be used for capturing and recognition, identity verification,
video intercom, parking guidance, and barrier control. See Add Lane for details.
The two pictures below shows the typical relation of parking lot, entrances & exits, and lanes.

697
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-4 Parking Lot

21.4.1 Add Parking Lot

In the Parking Lot Management module, you can add one or multiple parking lots for management,
including adding entrances and exits, setting the number of parking spaces, editing the parking lot
formation, setting entry & exit rules and parking fee rules.
Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Add Parking Lot to open the Add Parking Lot window.

698
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-5 Create Parking Lot Window

3. Enter the parking lot information.
Number of Entrances and Exits
The number of entrances and exits in the created parking lot.
Capacity
The total number of parking spaces in the created parking lot.
Vacant
The number of parking spaces without parked vehicles.
Total Parking Spaces for Registered Vehicles

699
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The total number of parking spaces for registered vehicles.

Note
Only registered vehicles are allowed to park in these parking spaces.
Vacant Parking Spaces for Registered Vehicles
The number of vacant parking spaces for registered vehicles.
Expiration Prompt (Day)
Take a vehicle which expires at Jan. 6th, 2020 as an example, if you enter 5, the expiration
prompt will be displayed on the LED screen linked to the parking lot from Jan. 1st, 2020 to
Jan. 5th, 2020.
One Account with Multiple Vehicles
One vehicle owner account with multiple vehicles related.
4. Click Add to create the parking lot.
5. Optional: Edit the parking lot as needed.
Delete a Parking In a parking lot area, click Delete to delete it.
Lot
Edit the Number In a parking lot area, click above Vacant to edit it.
of Vacant Parking
Spaces
Edit the Number In a parking lot area, click above Vacant Parking Spaces for
of Vacant Parking Registered Vehicles to edit it.
Spaces for
Registered
Vehicles
Edit Parking Lot a. In a parking lot area, click Settings → Basic Information to enter the
Information page of this parking lot.
b. In the upper-right corner, click Edit to open the Edit Parking Lot
panel.

Note
You can also click on the top of the parking lot list to edit its
information.
c. Edit the information of the parking lot, such as the name, capacity,
etc.
d. Click Add.
Add Allowed a. In a parking lot area, click Settings → Basic Information to enter the
Parking Duration page of this parking lot.
b. On the right side of Allowed Parking Duration, click Add.

700
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

c. In the pop-up window, select the vehicle type in the vehicle list.
d. Enter the maximum parking duration for the selected vehicle parked
in the created parking lot.

Note
You can configure an event or alarm which will be triggered when a
vehicle's parking is due. For example, you enter 12, an event or alarm
(if any) will be triggered if a vehicle has parked for more than 12
hours.
Add/Edit/Delete a In a parking lot area, click Settings → Basic Information to enter the
Sub Parking Lot page of this parking lot.
● On the top of the parking lot list, click to add a sub parking lot.
● Select a sub parking lot, and click on the top of the parking lot list
or Edit in the upper-right corner to edit it.
● Select a sub parking lot and click on the top of the parking lot list
to delete it.

21.4.2 Add Entrance and Exit

An entrance or exit helps control vehicles to enter/exit the parking lot or prevent vehicles from
entering/exiting the parking lot. For example, the entrance or exit allows a vehicle in the VIP list to
enter/exit the parking lot, and prevent a vehicle in the blocklist from entering the parking lot. You
need to configure lanes linked with devices for an entrance and exit to control the barriers.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added a parking lot. See Add Parking Lot for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings of a parking lot to enter the configuration page of this parking lot.
3. On the top of the left list, select a parking lot and click .

701
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-6 Add Entrance and Exit

4. Enter the name of the entrance and exit.
5. Click Add.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Edit an Entrance & Exit Select an entrance & exit, and click to edit it.
Delete an Entrance & Exit Select an entrance & exit, and click to delete it.
What to do next
Add lane for the entrance and exit. See Add Lane for details.

21.4.3 Add Lane

A lane linked with an entrance/exit control device is used for managing the entrance or exit of a
parking lot. A lane linked with a capture unit or card-swiping device is used for controlling the
barrier. A capture unit linked to a lane can recognize a vehicle at the lane, and compare the vehicle
information with vehicles in a vehicle list. Then, the capture unit opens the barrier automatically to
allow the vehicle to enter/exit according to entry and exit rule of the vehicle list if the vehicle has
been added to a vehicle list. An access control device/video intercom device opens the barrier
when a vehicle owner swipes card on it to open the barrier to allow the vehicle to enter or exit the
parking lot. Meanwhile, the capture unit does not open the barrier for the recognized license plate
number which is added to the blocklist; the access control device/video intercom device cannot
control the barrier without swiping a card specialized for the parking lot. You can also relate a
camera with the lane. The camera will capture a picture (it can be a vehicle, human face, or other)
which will be displayed on the Client. A lane linked with a display screen is used for displaying
information such as the number of vacant parking spaces.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added at least an entrance/exit for the parking lot. See Add Entrance and Exit
for details.

702
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. In a parking lot area, click Settings to enter the page of this parking lot.
3. Select an entrance & exit from the left list.
4.
Click to enter the Add Lane page.

Figure 21-7 Add Lane Page

5. Set the lane.
1) In the Basic Information area, create a name for the lane, and select a lane type from the
drop-down list.
2) In the Available Time Range area, set the period during which the lane is available. Select All-
Day, or select Custom to customize a period.
3) Optional: In the Link Device area, click Relate Device to select device(s) to be related to the
lane, and set one device as the barrier control unit according to actual needs.
Entrance/Exit Control Device
An entrance/exit control device is used for managing the entrance or exit of a parking lot,
especially that of an unattended parking lot. After a vehicle gets a ticket or card from an
entrance/exit control device, the device will control the barrier gate to open and let the
vehicle enter; after the vehicle returns the ticket or card, the device will allow the vehicle
to exit. Besides, if an entrance/exit device assigns cards instead of tickets, its guidance
screen is configurable. See Set Contents Displayed on Display Screen for details.
Capture Unit
A capture unit is used for capturing and recognizing license plate number. For example, the
capture unit will open the barrier to allow the vehicle to enter the parking lot when

703
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

recognizing a license plate number in the vehicle list, and will not open the barrier to
prevent the vehicle from entering the parking lot when recognizing a license plate number
in the blocklist. See Manage Entry & Exit Rules for Parking Lots for details about setting an
entry & exit rule.

Note
You can relate up to two capture units to a lane. If so, you need to set the Matching Time.
Hence, when two capture units capture two pictures within the matching time, the picture
captured by the capture unit with the higher confidence value will be kept.
Access Control Device
If the administrator selects a card (already issued to the owner for card authentication) for
the owner when adding the owner's vehicle, the administrator actually binds the card with
the vehicle's license plate number. So the barrier will open when the owner swipes the
card on an access control device at the lane. In this circumstance, a capture unit is not
needed.

Figure 21-8 Opening Barrier by Card Swiping

704
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Video Intercom Device

a. The vehicle owner calls the security guard by the video intercom device (some access
control devices can also be used for video intercom).
b. The security guard verifies the owner's identity by viewing her/him by the video
intercom device or the license plate number captured by a capture unit.
c. The security guard opens the barrier manually if the vehicle owner is authenticated.

Figure 21-9 Opening Barrier by Video Intercom

Display Screen
A display screen is used for displaying information such as the number of vacant parking
spaces, vehicle expiration date. See for details.
4) In the Related Camera area, select camera(s) to be related to the lane.

Note
● Make sure you have enabled picture storage for the camera. Otherwise, you cannot see the

captured pictures on the Control Client. See Area Management for details about how to
enable picture storage for a camera.
● Up to three different cameras can be related to the lane.

● One camera can be related to multiple lanes.

● You can view the pictures captured by the related camera when viewing the vehicle-passing

information on the Web Client and Control Client.

5) Set the entry & exit rule for temporary vehicles, registered vehicles, and visitor vehicles, and
vehicles in list. You can switch on Same Rule as Parking lot to use the rule for the parking lot,
or switch it off to set a new rule.
6. Click Add.

705
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.4.4 Set Contents Displayed on Display Screen

The display screen linked to the parking lot can be used for displaying information including the
date and time, parking duration, license plate number, expiration prompt, etc.

Note
Make sure you have added display screens to the platform. See Add Display Screen for details
about how to add a display screen.
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the parking lot settings page.
3. Select an entrance or exit from the left list.
4. Select a display screen and click Display Screen Configuration beside the name of the display
screen to open the Screen Configuration pane.

Configure Entrance and Exit Display Screen

Note
The parameters to be configured for the entrance and exit display screen vary according to the
linkage between the screen and the lane. If the screen is linked with a lane, both the Vehicle
Detected screen and the Idle screen should be configured. If the screen has not been linked with a
lane, only the Idle screen is required to be configured.

Figure 21-10 Configure the Entrance and Exit Display Screen Not Linked with a Lane

706
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-11 Configure the Entrance and Exit Display Screen Linked with a Lane
1. Select a vehicle type.

Note
Vehicle type is not configurable for the entrance and exit display screen not linked with a lane.
2. Configure the Vehicle Detected screen.
a. Click a line on the Vehicle Detected screen to set its Display Mode, Font Color, and
Alignment.
b. Select the information to be displayed on the line from Text on Screen.
License Plate No.
Display the license plate number recognized by the capture unit. By default, this text is
selected to be displayed on the screen linked with a lane.
Entering Time
The time when a recognized vehicle enters the parking lot. This text is selectable only
when the display screen is linked with an entrance lane.
Exit Time
The time when a recognized vehicle exits the parking lot. This text is selectable only when
the display screen is linked with an exit lane.
Parking Duration
Display the parking duration when the vehicle exits the parking lot.
Expiration Prompt

707
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Inform the vehicle owners that their vehicles are about to expire. You need to enable the
expiration prompt for a parking lot and set when to inform vehicle owners the expiration
date. See Add Parking Lot for details. This text is selectable only when the display screen
is linked with an exit lane.
Parking Fee
Display the parking fee to be paid when the vehicle exits the parking lot. This text is
selectable only when the parking lot is in the Charge mode.
Account Balance
The balance in the vehicle owner's account.
Vehicle Type
Display the vehicle type recognized by the capture unit.
Vacant Parking Spaces
Display the number of vacant parking spaces on the selected floor with which the display
screen is linked.
c. Configure other lines in the same way.

Note
There is only one line for displaying information on the screen not linked with a lane.
3. Configure the Idle screen in the same way you configure the Vehicle Detected screen.

Note
The Vacant Parking Spaces in Vehicle List refers to the number of vacant parking spaces for
vehicles in a vehicle list. However, in the case that a parking lot is used by more than one
company at the same time, a vehicle list can be regarded as a company.
4. Click Save.

Configure Indoor Guidance Screen

Note
The number of sub screens on the indoor guidance screen varies with the model. Here only take
the model with one sub screen as an example.

708
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-12 Configure Indoor Guidance Screen

1. Click a sub screen and select a icon type and color to be displayed.
2. Select a color for the digits displayed on the screen.

Note
If the current number of vacant parking spaces is 0, you can check the checkbox below the Digit
field to display "X".
3. Select a parking lot or a floor to be linked with the indoor guidance screen.
4. Click Save.

709
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Configure Entrance Guidance Screen

Note
The number of sub screens on the entrance guidance screen varies with the product model. Here
only take the product model with three sub screen as an example.

Figure 21-13 Configure Entrance Guidance Screen

1. Click a sub screen and select a color for the digits displayed on the screen.

Note
If the current number of vacant parking spaces is 0, you can check the checkbox below the Digit
field to display "X".
2. Select a parking lot or a floor to be linked with the entrance guidance screen.
3. Click Save.

21.4.5 Set Parking Fee Mode for Parking Lots

You can set the parking fee mode for parking lots, and select the type of currency to pay. This
configuration will affect the functions related to parking fee.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Basic Configuration → Parking Fee Mode .

710
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-14 Parking Fee Mode Settings Page

2. Select Charge or Free as the parking fee mode.

Note
If you select Free, the settings related to parking fee will not be able to configure.
3. Select a type of currency from the drop-down list.

Note
This step is valid only when you set the parking fee mode to Charge.
4. Click Save.

21.5 Manage Entry & Exit Rules for Parking Lots

The entry & exit rule defines how to open the barrier gate when a vehicle is detected at the lane.
In the Parking Lot Management module, you can set entry & exit rules for different types of
vehicles, including temporary vehicles, registered vehicles, visitor vehicles, and vehicles in list.
Besides, you can also set an entry & exit rule for a special time period, such as a holiday. With this
function, you can manage the entrances and exits in parking lots more easily.

21.5.1 Set Entry & Exit and Deduction Mode

In the Parking Lot Management module, you can set the entry & exit mode and account deduction
mode for a parking lot, which can help you to manage the entry and exit of vehicles as well as the
payment of parking fee more easily.

711
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

Make sure that the parking fee mode has been set to Charge.
Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Entry & Exit Rule.
4. Click Edit beside Entry & Exit Mode and Account Deduction to open the following panel.

Figure 21-15 Entry & Exit Mode and Account Deduction

5. Set the mode.

712
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Entry Mode
The condition in which a vehicle is allowed to enter, including the following modes:
No Repeated Entry
Repeated entry for an vehicle is not allowed.
License Plate and Card Match
The vehicle is allowed to enter only when the license plate and the card match.
Person and License Plate Match
The vehicle is allowed to enter only when the driver and the license plate match.

Note
The License Plate and Card Match mode and Person and License Plate Match mode cannot
be selected at the same time.
Exit Mode
The condition in which a vehicle is allowed to exit.
Auto Account Deduction
Whether to automatically deduct the parking fee from the vehicle owner's account.
When Parking Fee is 0
Whether to allow a vehicle to enter and exit when its parking fee is 0.
6. Click Save.

21.5.2 Set Entry & Exit Rule for Temporary Vehicles

Temporary vehicles are the ones that are not added to the platform and just park in the parking lot
for a certain period. In the Parking Lot Management module, you can set the entry & exit rule for
temporary vehicles, which can help you to manage the entry and exit of them more easily.
Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Entry & Exit Rule.
4. Click Edit beside Entry & Exit Rule for Temporary Vehicles to open the following panel.

713
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-16 Entry & Exit Rule for Temporary Vehicles

5. Set the rule.
Entry Method
How the barrier gate is opened when a vehicle enters.
Exit Method
How the barrier gate is opened when a vehicle exits.
Entry & Exit Time Range
The period in which the vehicles are allowed to enter and exit.

714
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
This parameter is configurable only when one of the Entry Method and Exit Method or both
of them are set to Automatic.
When No Vacancy for Temporary Vehicle
Whether to allow the temporary vehicles to enter when where are no vacant parking spaces.
Configure Entry & Exit Rule for Vehicle Without License Plate
Switch on Configure Entry & Exit Rule for Vehicle Without License Plate to set a rule for the
vehicle's automatic or manual passing at entry or exit without license plate.
6. Click Save.

21.5.3 Set Entry & Exit Rule for Registered Vehicles

Registered vehicles are the ones that have been added to the platform. In the Parking Lot
Management module, you can set the entry & exit rule for registered vehicles, which can help you
to manage the entry and exit of them more easily.
Before You Start
Make sure that at least one vehicle has been added to the platform. See Add a Registered Vehicle
or Batch Import Registered Vehicles for details.
Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Entry & Exit Rule.
4. Click Edit beside Entry & Exit Rule for Registered Vehicles to open the following panel.

715
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-17 Entry & Exit Rule for Registered Vehicles

5. Set the rule.
Entry Method
How the barrier gate is opened when a vehicle enters.
Exit Method
How the barrier gate is opened when a vehicle exits.
Entry & Exit Time Range
The period in which vehicles are allowed to enter and exit.

716
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
This parameter is configurable only when one of the Entry Method and Exit Method or both
of them are set to Automatic.
When No Vacancy for Registered Vehicle
Whether to allow the registered vehicles to enter when there are no vacant parking spaces.
6. Click Save.

21.5.4 Set Entry & Exit Rule for Visitor Vehicles

Visitor vehicles are the ones that are not added to the platform and are driven by visitors who
come for a visit. In the Parking Lot Management module, you can set the entry & exit rule for
visitor vehicles, which can help you to manage the entry and exit of them more easily.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Entry & Exit Rule.
4. Click Edit beside Entry & Exit Rule for Visitor Vehicles to open the following panel.

717
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-18 Entry & Exit Rule for Visitor Vehicles

5. Set the rule.
Entry Method
How the barrier gate is opened when a vehicle enters.
Exit Method
How the barrier gate is opened when a vehicle exits.
Entry & Exit Time Range
The time period when vehicles are allowed to enter and exit.

Note
This parameter is configurable only when one of the Entry Method and Exit Method or both
of them are set to Automatic.
6. Click Save.

718
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.5.5 Add Entry & Exit Rule for Vehicles in List

Vehicles in list are the ones that have been added to the platform and managed in the list you
created. In the Parking Lot Management module, you can add the entry & exit rule for a vehicle
list, so that the entry and exit of all vehicles in this list will be controlled by the rule.
Before You Start
Make sure that at least one vehicle list has been added. See Add Vehicle List for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Entry & Exit Rule.
4. Click Add beside Entry & Exit Rule for Vehicles in List to open the Add Rule panel.

719
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-19 Add Rule

5. Set the rule.
Vehicle List
The list of vehicles that the rule is applied to.
Entry Method

720
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

How the barrier gate is opened when a vehicle enters.

Exit Method
How the barrier gate is opened when a vehicle exits.
Entry & Exit Time Range
The period in which vehicles are allowed to enter and exit.

Note
This parameter is configurable only when one of the Entry Method and Exit Method or both
of them are set to Automatic.
Parking Space Control

Note
If you switch on Parking Space Control, you need to configure the following parameters.
Capacity
The total number of parking spaces for vehicles in list.
Vacant
The number of vacant parking spaces for vehicles in list.
When No Vacant Parking Spaces for Vehicles in List
Whether to allow vehicles in list to enter when there are no vacant parking spaces.
6. Click Add.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Edit a Rule Click to edit a rule.
Delete a Rule Click to delete a rule.

21.5.6 Add Entry & Exit Rule for Holidays

In the Parking Lot Management module, you can configure free entry and exit for vehicles during
holidays or certain days of a week, which can help you to manage the entry and exit of vehicles in
this period more easily.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Entry & Exit Rule.
4. Click Add beside Free Entry & Exit on Holidays to open the Add Holiday panel.

721
HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-20 Holiday Template

722
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-21 Day of Week

5. Select Holiday Template or Day of Week and complete relevant settings.

723
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Holiday a. Select a holiday from the list if any holiday has been added, or click Add
Template New to create a new holiday.
b. (Optional) Enter remarks in the Description field if needed.
c. Click Add.
Day of Week a. Create a name for the holiday.
b. Click to set a time range for the holiday.
c. Select the day(s) of a week that the rule is applied to.
d. (Optional) Enter remarks in the Description field if needed.
e. Click Add.
6. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) if needed.
Edit a Rule Click to edit a rule.
Delete a Rule Click to delete a rule.

21.6 Manage Parking Fee Rules for Parking Lots

In the Parking Lot Management module, you can set parking fee rules for parking lots, including
adding parking fee rule for certain types of vehicles, adding parking pass rule, adding discount rule,
adding parking fee rule for abnormal entry & exit. Once you set a rule, the platform will
automatically calculate the fee for the parking based on this rule and present the information
related to the fee.

Note
Make sure that the parking fee mode has been set to Charge. See Set Parking Fee Mode for
Parking Lots for details.

21.6.1 Add Parking Fee Rule for Temporary Vehicles

In the Parking Lot Management module, you can add parking fee rule for temporary vehicles,
which can help you to calculate parking fee more easily.
Before You Start
Make sure that the parking fee mode has been set to Charge.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Parking Fee Rule.
4. Click Add beside Parking Fee Rule for Temporary Vehicles to enter the Add Parking Fee Rule
pane.

724
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-22 Add Parking Fee Rule for Temporary Vehicles

5. Create a name for the rule.
6. Select a type of vehicle that the rule is applied to.
7. Select a time unit that the parking fee is charged by and complete relevant settings.
Free No charge for any parking.
Unit Parking The duration of one parking is separated into different parts and these parts
Duration are charged different fees. For example, if a vehicle has parked for 2 hours, the
parking fee for the first hour is a specific amount, and the parking fee for the
duration after the first hour is an another amount.
a. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge.
b. Enter the fee for the initial parking duration.

725
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

c. Enter the fee for subsequent parking duration.

d. (Optional) Switch on Daily Max. Fee, and enter the fee.
Session The parking fee is charged by session. For example, if a vehicle has parked
twice in a parking lot, its times of parking are counted as two sessions.
Enter the fee for each parking.
Time Range The parking fee is charged by the duration of a parking.
a. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge.
b. Enter a time range and the fee for a parking within this range.

Note
You can click Add New to add different time ranges and fees.
c. (Optional) Switch on Daily Max. Fee, and enter the fee.
d. Enter the fee for the duration beyond the maximum duration allowed.
Clock Time The parking fee is charged according to the time of a day.
a. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge.
b. Click to select a time range and enter the fee for a parking within this
range.

Note
You can click Add New to add different time ranges and fees.
c. (Optional) Switch on Daily Max. Fee, and enter the fee.
Charge by The parking fee is charged according to the time of a day (daytime and
Duration nighttime).
and Session a. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge.
in Daytime b. Select Free or Charge when a parking exceeds the duration that is free of
and charge.
Nighttime c. Click to set the time when daytime starts.

Note
The parking fee is charged by time range in daytime.
d. Enter the fee for the initial parking duration.
e. Enter the fee for subsequent parking duration.
f. Click to set the time when nighttime starts.

Note
The parking fee is charged by session in nighttime.
g. Enter the fee for each parking.
h. (Optional) Switch on Daily Max. Fee, and enter the fee.
i. (Optional) Switch on Charge by Daytime If Parking Duration Includes
Daytime.

726
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Unit Time The parking fee is charged by the time range of a day.
Range a. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge.
b. Select Free or Charge when a parking exceeds the duration that is free of
charge.
c. Click to select a time range, and enter relevant information in Charged
Parking Duration, Parking Fee, Max. Fee, and Min. Threshold Duration.

Note
You can click Add New to add different time ranges and fees.
d. (Optional) Switch on Daily Max. Fee, and enter the fee.
8. Optional: Click Preview and Verify to preview and verify this rule.
9. Click Add.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Copy a Rule to Other Parking Click and select the parking lot(s) that the rule is
Lot(s) copied to.
Edit a Rule Click to edit a rule.
Delete a Rule Click to delete a rule.

21.6.2 Add Parking Fee Rule for Registered Vehicles

A parking pass charges a certain amount of money. Within the validity period of a parking pass, the
vehicle can enter and exit a specific parking lot as a registered vehicle, so that it can park in that
parking lot without paying any fee. In the Parking Lot Management module, you can add rule for
parking pass.
Before You Start
Make sure that the parking fee mode has been set to Charge.
Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Parking Fee Rule.
4. Click Add beside Parking Fee Rule for Registered Vehicle to enter the Add Parking Pass Rule
pane.

727
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-23 Add Parking Pass Rule Pane

5. Create a name for the rule.
6. Select a type for the parking pass and complete relevant settings.
Annual/ Enter the fee for an annual/monthly parking pass.
Monthly
Custom Enter the valid days of a parking pass and the fee for it.
Day(s)
Monthly (Idle Select a template of monthly parking pass for idle time from the drop-down
Time) list, and enter the fee for the parking pass.

728
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
This parking pass is used during the period in which the parking lot is not
busy (idle time).
If you have not added any template, you need to click Template of Monthly
Parking Pass for Idle Time to create a template first.
7. Click Add.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Copy a Rule to Other Parking Click and select the parking lot(s) that the rule is
Lot(s) copied to.
Edit a Rule Click to edit a rule.
Delete a Rule Click to delete a rule.

21.6.3 Add Parking Fee Rule for Vehicles in List

In the Parking Lot Management module, you can add parking fee rule for vehicles in list, which can
help you to calculate parking fee more easily.
Before You Start
● Make sure that the parking fee mode has been set to Charge.

● Make sure that at least one vehicle list has been added. See Add Vehicle List for details.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Parking Fee Rule.
4. Click Add beside Parking Fee Rule for Vehicles in List to enter the Add Parking Fee Rule panel.
5. Create a name for the rule.
6. Select a type of vehicle that the rule is applied to.
7. Select a time unit that the parking fee is charged by and complete relevant settings.
Free No charge for any parking.
Unit Parking The duration of one parking is separated into different parts and these parts
Duration are charged different fees. For example, if a vehicle has parked for 2 hours, the
parking fee for the first hour is a specific amount, and the parking fee for the
duration after the first hour is an another amount.
a. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge.
b. Enter the fee for the initial parking duration.
c. Enter the fee for subsequent parking duration.
d. (Optional) Switch on Daily Max. Fee, and enter the fee.

729
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Session The parking fee is charged by session. For example, if a vehicle has parked
twice in a parking lot, its times of parking are counted as two sessions.
Enter the fee for each parking.
Time Range The parking fee is charged by the duration of a parking.
a. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge.
b. Enter a time range and the fee for a parking within this range.

Note
You can click Add New to add different time ranges and fees.
c. (Optional) Switch on Daily Max. Fee, and enter the fee.
d. Enter the fee for the duration beyond the maximum duration allowed.
Clock Time The parking fee is charged according to the time of a day.
a. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge.
b. Click to select a time range and enter the fee for a parking within this
range.

Note
You can click Add New to add different time ranges and fees.
c. (Optional) Switch on Daily Max. Fee, and enter the fee.
Charge by The parking fee is charged according to the time of a day (daytime and
Duration nighttime).
and Session a. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge.
in Daytime b. Select Free or Charge when a parking exceeds the duration that is free of
and charge.
Nighttime c. Click to set the time when daytime starts.

Note
The parking fee is charged by time range in daytime.
d. Enter the fee for the initial parking duration.
e. Enter the fee for subsequent parking duration.
f. Click to set the time when nighttime starts.

Note
The parking fee is charged by session in nighttime.
g. Enter the fee for each parking.
h. (Optional) Switch on Daily Max. Fee, and enter the fee.
i. (Optional) Switch on Charge by Daytime If Parking Duration Includes
Daytime.
Unit Time The parking fee is charged by the time range of a day.
Range

730
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

a. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge.

b. Select Free or Charge when a parking exceeds the duration that is free of
charge.
c. Click to select a time range, and enter relevant information in Charged
Parking Duration, Parking Fee, Max. Fee, and Min. Threshold Duration.

Note
You can click Add New to add different time ranges and fees.
d. (Optional) Switch on Daily Max. Fee, and enter the fee.
8. Optional: Click Preview and Verify to preview and verify this rule.
9. Click Add.
10. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Copy a Rule to Other Parking Click and select the parking lot(s) that the rule is
Lot(s) copied to.
Edit a Rule Click to edit a rule.
Delete a Rule Click to delete a rule.

21.6.4 Add Discount Rule

In the Parking Lot Management module, you can add the discount rule to manage parking fee
more flexibly.
Before You Start
Make sure that the parking fee mode has been set to Charge.
Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Parking Fee Rule.
4. Click Add beside Discount Rule to enter the Add Discount Rule panel.
5. Create a name for the rule.
6. Select a discount method and complete relevant settings.
Discount Here you can set a discount rate. For example, if you enter 70, the discount
rate is 70%. If the parking fee due is 100 RMB, the actual amount tendered is
70 RMB.
Fee Discount Here you can set a discount amount. For example, if you enter 70 and the
parking fee due is 100 RMB, the actual amount tendered is 30 RMB.
Free Here you can set a period during which the vehicles are allowed to park
without being charged.

731
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Parking Here you can set a duration which will be deducted from the total parking
Duration duration. For example, if you enter 2 and the parking duration of a vehicle is
Reduction 6 hours, the actual duration counted for parking fee is 4 hours.
7. Click Save.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations as needed.
Issue & Print a Rule Click to issue and print the discount rule in the coupon
format.
Copy Rule to Other Parking Click and select the parking lot(s) that the rule is copied
Lots to.
Edit a Rule Click to edit the rule.
Delete a Rule Click to delete the rule.

21.6.5 Add Parking Fee Rule for Abnormal Pass

In the Parking Lot Management module, you can add parking fee rule for abnormal pass (e.g., a
vehicle with an entry record but without an exit record), which can help you to manage abnormal
entries and exits more easily.
Before You Start
Make sure that the parking fee mode has been set to Charge.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click Parking Fee Rule.
4. Click Add beside Parking Fee Rule for Abnormal Pass to enter the following panel.

732
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Create a name for the rule.

6. Enter the parking fee for abnormal pass.
7. Set a validity period for the rule.
8. Optional: Enter remarks in the Description field as needed.
9. Optional: Check Set as Default to set the rule as the default rule for abnormal entry & exit.
10. Click Save.
11. Optional: Perform the following operations as needed.
Copy a Rule to Other Parking Click and select the parking lot(s) that the rule is
Lot(s) copied to.
Edit a Rule Click to edit a rule.
Delete a Rule Click to delete a rule.

733
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.6.6 Additional Configuration

In the Parking Lot Management module, you can set additional parking fee rules, including free
parking duration after payment, and the parking fee rule for multiple vehicles under one account,
which can help you to manage parking fee more flexibly.
Before You Start
Make sure that the parking fee mode has been set to Charge.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Parking Lot Management .
2. Click Settings to enter the settings page of a parking lot.
3. Click the Parking Fee Rule tab.
4. Click Edit beside Additional Configuration to enter the Additional Configuration panel.

734
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-25 Additional Configuration

5. Enter the parking duration that is free of charge after paying the parking fee.
6. Optional: Switch on Parking Fee Rule for Multiple Vehicles Under One Account, and select
Extra Vehicles Pay or First Exiting Vehicles Pay.
Extra Vehicles Pay
After all valid parking spaces under one account are occupied, extra vehicles under the
account will be regarded as temporary vehicles when entering the parking lot, and charged
according to the parking fee rule for temporary vehicle.
First Exiting Vehicles Pay

735
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

When extra vehicles under one account park in after all valid parking spaces under the
account are occupied, the vehicle exiting first will be charged based on the extra parking
duration.
7. Click Save.

21.7 Manage Vehicle

HikCentral Professional supports adding the information of vehicles to the platform and
categorizing the vehicles into different types. The platform also provides ANPR (Automatic
Number-Plate Recognition) functions. After adding cameras which support ANPR, the cameras can
recognize the license plate number of the detected vehicles. In addition, the platform provides
entrance and exit management and it can control the entry and exit of the detected vehicles.
On the Web Client, the administrator can add vehicle information to the platform, categorize the
vehicles into different types (including registered vehicles, temporary vehicles, visitor vehicles, and
vehicles in list), and set events and alarms to define whether an event or alarm will be triggered
when the recognized plate number matches or mismatches with the license plate numbers of the
vehicles managed in the platform, or whether an event or alarm will be triggered when the
recognized vehicle type matches the specified vehicle type. For entrance and exit control, the
administrator can set entry & exit rules for the vehicles managed in the platform to define whether
to allow the vehicles to enter or exit the parking lot.

21.7.1 Add Registered Vehicles

A registered vehicle can park in a specific parking lot without paying any fee. To make a vehicle
become a registered vehicle, you need to add its information (including the license plate number,
vehicle type, etc) to the platform first, and then you need to relate a parking pass to it, so that the
vehicle can enter and exit the parking lot as a registered vehicle. After adding a registered vehicle,
you can set entry & exit rule and parking fee rule for it.

Add a Registered Vehicle

In the Vehicle and Card Management module, you can add the information of one vehicle to the
platform as a registered vehicle at one time.
Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Vehicle and Card Management
→ Registered Vehicle → Vehicle .
2. Click Add to enter the Add Vehicle page.

736
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-26 Add Vehicle Page

3. Set vehicle information.
1) Enter the license plate number.
2) Optional: Select the list that the vehicle is added to from the drop-down list.

737
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If you have not added any vehicle list to the platform, you can click Add to create one.
3) Optional: Select the type, color, and brand of the vehicle from the drop-down list.
4) Optional: Click Expand and enter the custom vehicle information.
5) Optional: Upload an undercarriage picture for this vehicle.
a. Move the cursor to the image area and click Upload.
b. In the pop-up panel, select the undercarriage picture to upload it.
After uploading an undercarriage picture, you can view both the current vehicle's captured
undercarriage picture and this uploaded picture for comparison on the Control Client.
4. Optional: Enter the owner's first name, last name, and phone number, or select a person from
the person list as the vehicle owner through the following steps.
1) Click Person List to open the following panel.

738
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-27 Add Person in Person List as Vehicle Owner

2) Select a person list from the left list.
The person(s) in the list will be displayed. You can also select the person who has been linked
to another vehicle.
3) Select a person from the right list.

Note
To select a person, you can also search for a person by entering the person's name. You can
click Additional Information to enter the person's personal information so that the search
result will be more accurate.

739
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4) Optional: Select a card number for the owner from the Card Number list. The owner can
swipe the selected card on the access control device or video intercom device when entering
or exiting the parking lot.
5) Click Add.
5. Finish adding the vehicle information.
- Click Add to add the vehicle information.

Note
Only the vehicle with a parking pass can enter and exit the parking lot as a registered vehicle.
Therefore, on the pop-up panel, you need to click Parking Pass Top-Up to add a parking pass
to the vehicle. Or you can click Return to Vehicle List and add a parking pass to the vehicle in
Top-Up Management module later, see Top Up for Vehicles for more details.
- Click Add and Continue to save the settings and continue to add other vehicles.

Note
If the license plate number already exists (in the current vehicle list or other vehicle lists), a
prompt box will be displayed and you can select whether to replace the existing vehicle with a
new one.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the vehicle information.
Edit Vehicle Click the plate number in License Plate Number column to edit the
Information vehicle information
Delete Vehicle Check the vehicle information and click Delete to delete the selected
Information vehicle information.
Delete All Vehicle Click beside the Delete icon, and click Delete All to delete all
Information vehicle information in the current vehicle list.
Delete Expired Click Delete Expired Vehicle to delete all expired vehicle information
Vehicle Information from the current vehicle list.
Export Vehicle Click Export All to save the vehicle information of the list (CSV file) to
Information your PC, which can be imported to other vehicle list.
Click to filter vehicles and then click Export All to export the
information of filtered vehicles to the PC.
Search for Vehicle(s) Click and set search conditions to search for specific vehicle(s).

Batch Import Registered Vehicles

In the Vehicle and Card Management module, you can import the information of multiple vehicles
into the platform as registered vehicles at one time.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Vehicle and Card Management → Registered Vehicle → Vehicle .

740
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Click Import.

Figure 21-28 Import File

3. Click Download Template to download and save the template file to your PC.
4. Open the downloaded template file and enter the required information.
5. Click and select the file.
6. Optional: Check Replace Repeated License Plate Number to replace the existing vehicle
information with the new vehicle information if the file contains the license plate number which
has already been added to the platform. Otherwise, the original vehicle information will be
reserved.
7. Click Import.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations after importing the vehicle information.
Edit Vehicle Click the plate number in License Plate Number column to edit the
Information vehicle information.
Delete Vehicle Check the vehicle information and click Delete to delete the selected
Information vehicle information.
Delete All Vehicle Click beside the Delete icon, and click Delete All to delete all
Information vehicle information from the current vehicle list.
Delete Expired Click Delete Expired Vehicle to delete all expired vehicle information
Vehicle Information from the current vehicle list.
Export Vehicle Click Export All to save the vehicle information of the list (CSV file) to
Information your PC, which can be imported to other vehicle list.
Click to filter vehicles and then click Export All to export the
information of filtered vehicles to the PC.
Search for Vehicle(s) Click and set search conditions to search for specific vehicle(s).
What to do next
Only the vehicle with a parking pass can enter and exit the parking lot as a registered vehicle.
Therefore, after batch importing the information of multiple vehicles into the platform, you need
to relate a parking pass to each of them in the Top-Up Management module later. See Top Up for
Vehicles for more details.

741
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.7.2 Add Vehicle List

A vehicle list can group multiple vehicles so that you can manage them more easily. In the Vehicle
and Card Management module, you can add vehicle lists to the platform.
Before You Start
Make sure you have selected vehicle list(s) allowing for further management by the role linked
with your account. See Add Role for details on permission settings.
Steps

Note
Up to 100 vehicle lists can be added.
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Vehicle and Card Management
→ List Management .
2. On the top left, click to enter the Add Vehicle List panel.

742
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-29 Add Vehicle List Page

3. Create a name for the vehicle list.
4. Optional: Select a color for the vehicle list.

743
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can use different colors to mark different types of vehicle lists.
5. Optional: Switch on Effective Period and set the effective period for the vehicle list.

Note
● Vehicles in the list will not be allowed to enter the parking lot after the vehicle list expires.

● When you are adding a vehicle to this list later, you do not need to set an effective period for

the vehicle, because the vehicle shares the same effective period with that of the vehicle list.
6. Optional: Enter a description of the vehicle list if needed.
7. Click Add to add the vehicle list, or click Add and Continue to add the current vehicle list and
start adding another one.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Edit Vehicle List Select a vehicle list and click to edit it.
Delete Vehicle List Select a vehicle list and click to delete it.
Export Vehicle List Select a vehicle list and click Export to export it to the PC.
Add Vehicle(s) to Select a vehicle list and click Add to add vehicle(s) to it.
Vehicle List
Note
You can search for vehicles by entering the custom vehicle
information. See Customize Vehicle Information for more details.

Remove Vehicle(s) from Select a vehicle list, check vehicle(s), and click Delete to remove
Vehicle List them from the current list.
Move Vehicle(s) to Select a vehicle list, check vehicle(s), and click Move to move them
Another Vehicle List from the current list to another vehicle list.
Export All Vehicles in Click Export All to export all vehicles in the current list to the PC.
Vehicle List

21.7.3 Add Vehicle to Blocklist

The vehicles added to the blocklist cannot enter the parking lot as its license plate number will be
recognized at the lane. When adding a vehicle to the blocklist, the administrator can set a certain
period during which the vehicle is not allowed to enter the parking lot. The vehicles can be added
to the blocklist one by one or in a batch.

Add a Vehicle to Blocklist

In the Vehicle and Card Management module, you can add one vehicle to the blocklist at one time.
Once added, the vehicle cannot enter the parking lot during the period you set.

744
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Vehicle and Card Management → Blocklist .
2. Click Add to enter the following panel.

Figure 21-30 Add Vehicle to Blocklist

3. Enter the vehicle's license plate number.
4. Optional: Enter the first name, last name, and phone number of the vehicle's owner.
5. Set the period in which the vehicle is not allowed to enter.
6. Optional: Enter remarks in the Description field if needed.
7. Click Add to finish, or click Add and Continue to add another vehicle.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Remove Vehicle(s) Check vehicle(s) and click Delete to remove the vehicle(s) from the
from Blocklist blocklist one by one or in a batch.
Export Vehicle Check vehicle(s) and click Export All to save the information of the
Information vehicle(s) to your PC.

745
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Batch Import Vehicles to Blocklist

In the Vehicle and Card Management module, you can batch add multiple vehicles to the blocklist.
Once added, the vehicles cannot enter the parking lot during the period you set.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Vehicle and Card Management → Blocklist .
2. Click Import.

Figure 21-31 Import File

3. Click Download Template to download and save the template file to your PC.
4. Open the downloaded template file and enter the required information.
5. Optional: Check Replace Repeated License Plate Number to replace the existing vehicle
information with the new vehicle information if the file contains the license plate number which
has already been added to the blocklist. Otherwise, the original vehicle information will be
reserved.
6. Click Import.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Remove Vehicle(s) Check vehicle(s) and click Delete to remove the vehicle(s) from the
from Blocklist blocklist one by one or in a batch.
Export Vehicle Check vehicle(s) and click Export All to save the information of the
Information vehicle(s) to your PC.

21.7.4 Issue Temporary Cards

In the Vehicle and Card Management module, you can add temporary cards to parking lots. The
temporary cards are mainly designed for temporary vehicles. Before a temporary vehicle enters a
parking lot, the driver needs to take a temporary card from the machine. Before exiting the parking
lot, the driver needs to return the card and pay the parking fee.

746
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Vehicle and Card Management
→ Temporary Card .

Figure 21-32 Issue Temporary Card Page

2. Select a parking lot from the left list.
3. Click Issue Card to open the Issue Card panel.

Figure 21-33 Issue Card Panel

4. Enter the card number.
5. Optional: Click Card Issuing Settings to set card issuing parameters. See Set Card Issuing
Parameters for more details.
6. Click OK.
The card will be added to the selected parking lot.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Batch Issuing Click Batch Issue Card to issue multiple temporary card at the same
Card(s) time.

747
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Delete Selected Check the temporary card(s) and click Delete to delete the selected
Card(s) card(s).
Delete All Cards Click beside Delete, and click Delete All to delete all temporary
cards in the list.
Import Temporary Click , click , select the template file in your PC, and click Import.
Card Information
Note
● You can click Download Template and save the predefined template
(in XLSX format) to your PC.
● You can check Auto Replicate Card No. to allow the platform to
overwrite the card No. already exists when you import them via the
template.

Export Temporary Click Export All to save the information of the card(s) to your PC.
Card Information

21.7.5 Customize Vehicle Information

You can customize different items of vehicle information (such as vehicle model) which are not
predefined in the basic information. The custom vehicle information can help to recognize vehicles
or search for vehicles more accurately.
Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Basic Settings → Customize
Vehicle Information .
2. Add vehicle type.
1) Click Add in Vehicle Type area to enter the following panel.

748
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-34 Add Vehicle Type Panel

2) Check vehicle type(s) in the list.

749
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If you cannot find the vehicle type you want in the list, you can click Add Custom Type to
customize a vehicle type.
3) Click OK.
3. Add custom information.
1) Click Add in Custom Information area to enter the following panel.

Figure 21-35 Customize Information Panel

2) Create a title for the information.
3) Select an information type from the drop-down list.

Note
The custom information can be used as filtering conditions when you are searching for
specific vehicle(s).
General Text
1 to 32 characters are allowed except certain special characters.
Number
Only 1 to 32 digits are allowed.
Date
Select a data from the calendar.
Single Selection
You need to set options for the information. When adding a vehicle, you can select from
the options.
4) Click Save.
4. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Delete Vehicle Type Click to delete a vehicle type.
Edit Custom Information Click to edit the custom information.
Delete Custom Information Click to delete the custom information.

750
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.8 Top Up for Vehicles

In the Top-Up Management module, you can top up the parking pass for vehicles.
Before You Start
Make sure that you have added parking pass rule(s) to the platform. See Add Parking Fee Rule for
Registered Vehicles for more details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Top-Up Management .
2. Check one or multiple vehicles in the list.
3. In the upper-left corner, click Top-Up.

751
HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

752
Figure 21-36 Vehicle Top-Up Window
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Select a parking lot for the vehicle(s) to park.

5. Select a parking pass rule from the drop-down list.
Custom Day(s)
The parking pass is valid during the day(s) you set.
Monthly
The parking pass is valid for one month.
Yearly
The parking pass is valid for one year.
6. Select the number of parking passes.
Example
If you select Yearly as the parking pass rule and set the number of parking passes to 2, the
parking pass will be valid for 2 years.
7. Set the effective period of the parking pass.

Note
You can only select the start date of the parking pass, and the end date will be automatically
calculated by the platform according to the parking pass rule you set.
8. Select the top-up method.

Note
Currently, the platform only support topping up in cash, so Cash is automatically selected. And
the amount due will be automatically calculated according to the parking pass rule and number
of parking passes you set.
9. Click Top-Up.

21.9 Pay in Toll Center

In the Toll Center module, you can search for a specific vehicle to view its parking information, such
as the parking duration, parking fee. Once all the information is confirmed, the vehicle owner can
pay the parking fee in the toll center.
Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Toll Center .

753
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-37 Toll Center Page

2. Swipe the temporary card or enter the license plate number to search for a specific vehicle.
- If the vehicle's license plate is not captured and recorded, you can click Search Vehicle
Without License Plate No., and select the target vehicle from the displayed picture(s).
- If you choose to swipe the temporary card, you can click Card Swiping to switch on/off the
card encryption and turn on/off the audio.

Figure 21-38 Search Result Page

3. Set the discount rule.
- Select a coupon from the drop-down list.

754
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Click to add a coupon.

4. Check the information and click Confirm.
5. Optional: On the pop-up panel, click Print Receipt to print the receipt.

21.10 Parking Guidance Configuration

Parking guidance is designed for both the administrator and the vehicle owners, and it is
performed by two devices: the guidance terminal and the display screen. The guidance terminal
can relate multiple parking cameras for management, and the display screen can guide the vehicle
owners to the area where there are vacant parking spaces. With parking guidance, the parking lot
can be better operated.

21.10.1 Add a Floor to the Parking Lot

Before configuring parking guidance, you need to add a floor to a parking lot. After that, you can
perform further operations to the floor, including relating devices, configuring a map, marking
display screens, and configuring the types of parking spaces.
Steps
1. Go to → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking Management → Parking Guidance
Configuration .

Figure 21-39 Add Floor Page

2. Select a parking lot from the left list.
3. Click Add Floor.

755
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-40 Add Floor Pane

4. Set the floor.
1) Create a name for the floor.
2) Set the total number of parking spaces (capacity) of the floor.

Note
If you have added parking spaces on the map of the floor, you can check Get Total Parking
Spaces from Floor Map, and the number of parking spaces on the map will be synchronized
here.
3) Set the number of vacant parking spaces of the floor.

756
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If the floor has been related with parking camera(s), you can check Get Vacant Parking Spaces
from Parking Camera, and the number of vacant parking spaces counted by the parking
camera(s) will be synchronized here.
4) Set the period during which the floor is available for parking. Click All-Day, or click Custom to
customize a period.
5. Click Add.
You will enter the page where you can relate devices, configure a map, mark guidance screen,
and configure types for parking spaces.

21.10.2 (Optional) Link Devices to the Floor

In the Parking Guidance Configuration module, after adding a floor to the parking lot, you can link
devices (guidance terminal, indoor guidance screen, ANPR camera, query terminal) to the floor. A
guidance terminal can be related with multiple parking cameras for management, such as playing
the live video and playing back the recorded video from linked cameras. A guidance screen can
display the number of vacant parking spaces in the parking lot and guide vehicles to the area
where there are vacant parking spaces. An ANPR camera can recognize license plates, capture the
pictures of license plates and vehicles, and count the number of vehicles entering and exiting the
parking lot which will be used to count the number of vacant and occupied parking spaces.
Steps
1. After adding a floor, you will enter the following page.

Figure 21-41 Link Device

757
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Click Link Device.

3. Link device(s) to the floor.
1) Click Guidance Terminal → Link , and select guidance terminal(s) to link.
After relating a guidance terminal, you can perform the following operation(s) if needed.
● Select one or multiple guidance terminals and click Synchronize to synchronize the parking

spaces monitored by the parking cameras linked to the terminal(s).

● Click to view the parking camera(s) linked to a guidance terminal, and the parking spaces
monitored by the parking camera(s).
● Click to edit the settings of a guidance terminal.
2) Click Display Screen → Link , and select indoor guidance screen(s) to link.

Note
If both of the ANPR cameras and parking cameras are linked to a parking lot, the indoor
guidance screen displays the number of vacant parking spaces counted by ANPR cameras and
parking cameras respectively.
3) Click ANPR Camera → Link , and select ANPR camera(s) to link. After relating a camera, you
need to set its calculation mode in the Entry and Exit field.
Standard (Entry Detection) / Standard (Exit Detection)
Count the number of vehicles entered detected by the camera as the number of vehicles
entered the floor, and count the vehicles exited as those exited the floor. Select this mode
when the direction for entry detection configured on the camera is the same as the actual
entry direction.
Reverse (Entry Detection) / Reverse (Exit Detection)
Count the number of vehicles entered detected by the camera as the number of vehicles
exited the floor, and count the vehicles exited as those entering the floor. Select this mode
when the direction for entry detection configured on the camera is opposite to the actual
entry direction.

Note
● An ANPR camera can be linked to different floors.
● The number of vacant parking spaces on the top floor is counted by the ANPR camera.

758
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-42 Schematic Diagram of Calculation Mode

4) Click Query Terminal and select query terminal(s) to link.
Query Terminal
A query terminal is mounted inside a parking lot and is installed with the Self-Service
Vehicle Finding Client for vehicle owner to locate and find their vehicles in the parking lot.
See Self-Service Vehicle Finding Client for details.
4. Optional: Select one or multiple devices, and click Remove to remove the device(s) from the
floor.

21.10.3 (Optional) Configure a Map for the Floor

In the Parking Guidance Configuration module, you can add a map to the floor, adding parking
spaces to the map, and configuring the layout of parking spaces.
Steps
1. Enter the following page after linking device(s) to the floor.

759
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-43 Add a Map

2. Click Add Map.
3. Select a map from your PC and add it to the floor.

Note
You can click or to adjust the size of the map.

760
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-44 Configure the Map

4. Add parking space(s).
- Add parking spaces one by one.
a. Click Add Parking Space to add one parking space.
b. On the pop-up panel, enter a No. for the parking space.
c. Click Save.
- Batch add multiple parking spaces at one time.
a. Click Batch Add.
b. Click on the map to draw a line.
c. On the pop-up panel, check the adding mode as Parking Space No. or Number of Parking
Spaces.
Parking Space No.
Setting start No., end No., and No. interval are required.
Number of Parking Spaces
After setting start No., end No., and No. interval, you should also select the order of
parking space No. as Ascend (e.g., 1, 2, 3) or Descend (e.g., 3, 2, 1).
d. Click Save.
5. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) if needed.
Move Parking Space Drag a parking space to move it.
Delete Parking ● Click one parking space (the green point) and click Delete to
Space(s) delete it.
● Click Batch Select, drag you cursor to select multiple parking
spaces, and click Delete to batch delete them.

761
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Adjust the Size of the ● Click one parking space and click Size (+) or Size (-) to make it
View of Parking bigger or smaller.
Space(s) ● Click Batch Select, drag you cursor to select multiple parking
spaces, and click Size (+) or Size (-) to make them bigger or
smaller.
Align Parking Spaces Click Batch Select, drag you cursor to select multiple parking spaces,
Horizontally and click Horizontal Alignment to align them in a horizontal line.
Align Parking Spaces Click Batch Select, drag you cursor to select multiple parking spaces,
Vertically and click Vertical Alignment to align them in a vertical line.
Replace Map Click Replace Map to change the map.
Delete Map Click Delete Map to delete the map.
6. Optional: Click Back to edit former configuration.
What to do next
Click Next to set types for parking spaces on the map. See Set Types for Parking Spaces on the
Map .

21.10.4 Set Types for Parking Spaces on the Map

In the Parking Guidance Configuration module, you can set types for parking spaces and managing
the types according to actual needs.
Steps
1. Enter the following page after configuring the map.

Figure 21-45 Set Types for Parking Spaces

2. Click a parking space to open the Configure Parking Spaces pane.

762
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-46 Configure Parking Spaces Pane

3. Select a type for the parking space from the drop-down list.
4. Switch on Configure Parking Rule to check Parking Allowed or No Parking.
5. Link vehicle(s) or vehicle list(s) to the parking space.
6. Optional: Check Count Vacant Parking Spaces to display the number of vacant parking spaces
on the guidance screen.
7. Optional: Click Manage Parking Space Types and perform the following operations if needed.

763
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-47 Manage Parking Space Types

Add a Parking a. Click Add.

Space Type b. Create a name for the type.
c. Set a color for the type.

Note
The color will be applied to the indicator light of the parking cameras
monitoring this type of parking spaces.
d. ClickSave.
Edit a Parking Click to edit the name and color of a type.
Space Type
Note
The name of the default type (common) cannot be edited.

Delete Parking Select one or multiple types and click Delete to delete them.
Space Type(s)
Note
The default type cannot be deleted.
8. Click Next.
9. Optional: Click Back to edit former configuration.
What to do next
Click Next to mark device(s) on the map. See Mark Devices on the Map .

764
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.10.5 Mark Devices on the Map

In the Parking Guidance Configuration module, you can relate the guidance screen to the parking
spaces at a specific direction in the parking lot. Once related, the guidance screen can display the
number of vacant parking spaces and guide vehicles to them.
Steps
1. Enter the following page after configuring the parking space type.

Figure 21-48 Mark Device

2. Move a device (including indoor guidance screen and query terminal) from the right list to the
map.

Note
Only the indoor guidance screen can be marked. The entrance guidance screens or entrance and
exit display screens will not be displayed in the list.
3. Drag a device from the device list to the map and a menu will pop up.
4. Click Link Parking Space on the pop-up menu to enter the marking window.
5. Select the parking space(s) and click OK to link the selected parking space(s) with the device.

765
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● When you select the parking space(s), you can click a parking space icon to select one, or click

Batch Select to select multiple parking spaces at a time, or check Select All Parking Spaces to
select all parking spaces on the map.
● If the current floor has linked with multiple maps, you can click Switch Map to switch to

another map for marking.

6. Optional: Perform the following operations after marking devices on the map.
Configure Click the device icon on the map and click Guidance Screen Configuration on
Guidance the pop-up menu to enter the Guidance Screen Configuration page. For
Screen details about configuring guidance screens, refer to Set Contents Displayed
on Display Screen .
Remove Click the device icon on the map and click Delete on the pop-up menu to
Device remove the device from the map.
7. Optional: Click Back to configure the parking space types again.
8. Click Done to finish the parking guidance configuration.

21.10.6 Calibrate Parking Spaces Regularly

To reduce the manual operation costs of a parking lot and avoid parking disputes caused by the
incorrect number of vacant parking spaces displayed on the display screen, you can enable the
functions of regularly calibrating vacant parking spaces on each floor or in the parking lot, so the
real-time number of vacant parking spaces in the parking lot will be counted regularly and the
number of vacant parking spaces to be reserved for vehicles that entered the parking lot but not
parked will also be regularly counted and displayed by floor.
Before You Start
Make sure you have deployed ANPR cameras if you want to regularly calibrate parking spaces on
floors.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Parking Guidance Configuration .
2. Select a parking lot and click Calibrate Parking Space Regularly in the top right corner of the
parking lot details page.

766
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-49 Calibrate Parking Spaces Regularly

3. Switch on Calibrate Parking Lot.
4. Set the calibration time for the parking lot.
Example
If you set the calibration time to 12:00, the number of vacant parking spaces in the parking lot
will be calibrated at 12:00 every day.
5. In the Calibrate Floor field, enable the switch beside a floor name.

Note
Only the floors deployed with ANPR cameras will be displayed in the Calibrate Floor field.

767
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Two configuration fields will be displayed and the calibration time will automatically inherit that
from the parking lot.
6. Set a number of parking spaces on the floor to be calibrated.

Note
The entered number must be smaller than the total number of parking spaces on the floor,
otherwise, a window with the error information will appear when you save the settings.
7. Optional: Repeat the above two steps to enable regular calibration for other floors.
8. Click Save.

21.11 Parking Space Monitoring

On the Parking Space Overview page, you can view the statistics of parking spaces, and can search
for specific statistics by parking space No., license plate number, and parking time.
The Parking Space Overview page displays various kinds of statistics of parking spaces, including
the occupancy rate of the parking spaces in a parking lot, the number of vacant parking spaces,
occupied parking spaces, parking spaces with unknown status, and the number of overtime
parking and parking violations.

Note
● If there is no map added for the parking lot, parking space information will be overlaid directly
on the monitoring video.
● An icon will be displayed on a parking space for overtime parking. Click the icon to view the
parking space details and check the type of the vehicle that parked overtime.

768
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-50 Parking Space Overview

You can click a floor name to view the statistics of the parking spaces of this floor. On the following
page, you can move to a specific parking space to view its detailed information, and can click a
parking space to view its real-time status and search for parking records. Moreover, you can click
Occupancy Status Overview or Parking Duration Overview to view these two types of statistics
respectively.

Figure 21-51 Floor Parking Space Overview

769
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.12 Vehicle and Record Search

In the Vehicle module, you can search for various types of records, including the vehicle passing
records, parking records, payment records, etc. Each record is attached with highly detailed
information related to it, which can give the vehicle owner and the administrator a whole picture
of the vehicle's activity in a parking lot. Therefore, these records can help you to manage vehicles
and parking lots much better.

21.12.1 Add Fuzzy Matching Rules for License Plate Search

When searching vehicles by license plate number on the Control Client, the system supports fuzzy
matching. You can first set the fuzzy matching rules according to actual needs. By default, the
system provides 6 ready-made rules including 0<=>Q, 0<=>O, Q<=>O, 1<=>I, G<=>6, and D<=>O.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Basic Configuration → Plate Fuzzy Search .
2. Click Add.

Figure 21-52 Add a Fuzzy Matching Rule

3. Set the rule.
<=>
Enter an uppercase letter or a digit before and after this symbol respectively.
For example, 0<=>Q means: If you enter 0 or Q for search, the recognized license plate
numbers with 0 and the ones with Q will be filtered.
=>
Enter an uppercase letter or a digit before and after this symbol respectively.
For example, G=>6 means: If you enter G for search, the recognized license plate numbers
with G and the ones with 6 will be filtered. But if you enter 6 for search, the ones with G will
not be filtered.

770
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● By default, 6 rules are added when you log in for the first time.

● Up to 16 rules can be added.

4. Click Save.
5. Optional: After adding the rules, you can do one or more of the followings.
Edit Rule Click in the Operation column to edit this rule.
Enable/Disable Rule Click / in the Operation column to enable/disable this rule.
Delete Rule Click in the Operation column to delete this rule.

21.12.2 Search for Visitor Vehicles

In the Vehicle and Card Management module, you can search for visitor vehicles. The information
of the vehicles (such as the license plate number, vehicle owner, etc) will be displayed, and you can
export the information to your PC.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Vehicle and Card Management → Visitor Vehicle .
2. Click to open the panel of search conditions.

Figure 21-53 Search Visitor Vehicle Page

3. Set search conditions, including license plate number, vehicle owner, expire soon(days), and no
entry & exit record(days).
Expire Soon (Days)
The days left before the status of the vehicle becomes Expired.
No Entry & Exit Record (Days)
The number of days during which the vehicle did not entered or exited the parking lot.
4. Click Search.
The matched result(s) will be displayed.
5. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Filter Vehicle Click and set filtering conditions to filter out specified vehicle.
Export Vehicle Click Export All to export the information of all/filtered vehicles to
Information the PC.

771
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.12.3 Search for Vehicle Passing Records

If the added Automatic Number-Plate Recognition (ANPR) camera, Under Vehicle Surveillance
System (UVSS), and entrance and exit are properly configured, and the vehicle license plate
number is recognized by the cameras or capture units linked to the entrance and exit, you can
search for the related vehicle passing information.
Steps

Note
Make sure your license supports ANPR function. Otherwise, ANPR function cannot perform
normally in the system.
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Search → Vehicle Passing Record Search .
2. Set a time range.
- Select to search for vehicle passing records generated today, yesterday, current week, last 7
days, or last 30 days.
- Click Custom Time Interval to set the search time range.
3. Select Camera, UVSS or Entrance & Exit as the source of vehicle passing records.
The camera, UVSS, or entrance & exit will be automatically displayed under Source.

Note
For cameras, you can click , select the current site or a Remote Site from the drop-down list
and select the ANPR camera(s).
4. Set searching conditions according to your needs.
Marking Status
Search marked or unmarked vehicles' passing records.
Country/Region
Select the country/region where the vehicle's license plate number is registered.
License Plate No.
Select No License Plate to search vehicles without license plate number; select With License
Plate and enter a vehicle's license plate number or key word of license plate number.
Vehicle Owner
Enter the vehicle owner's name or keyword of name.
Vehicle Type
Select the type of the vehicle from the drop-down list.
Brand
Select the brand of the vehicle from the drop-down list.
Color

772
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Select the color of the vehicle from the presented colors.

Driving Speed
Set a range of driving speed. Condition displayed only when the source is set to Camera.
Driving Direction
Select the driving direction of the vehicle. Condition displayed only when the source is set to
Camera or UVSS.
● Forward: the vehicle moved toward the camera with its headstock facing the camera.

● Reverse: the vehicle moved away from the camera with its rear facing the camera.

● Other: the vehicle moved toward or away from the camera in other directions.

Enter or Exit
Select whether the vehicle is entering or exiting. Condition displayed only when the source is
set to Entrance & Exit.
Reason
Select from the drop-down list the reason of vehicle entering or exiting. Condition displayed
only when the source is set to Entrance & Exit.
Vehicle List
Search vehicle passing records of vehicles in certain vehicle list(s). Condition displayed only
when the source is set to Camera or Entrance & Exit.
Custom Information
The custom items of vehicle information you added.
5. Click Search.
The vehicle passing records that match the search conditions will be displayed on the right.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
View Vehicle Click a license plate number in the list to view the detailed information of
Information the vehicle.
View Owner's Click a license plate number, and click the name of the vehicle owner to
Picture view pictures of the owner, including an uploaded profile photo and a
picture captured at the entrance & exit.

Note
This operation can only be performed if the entry & exit modes of the
parking lot is set to Person and License Plate Match. For details about
setting the entry/exit modes, see Set Entry & Exit and Deduction Mode .

Sort Records Click Sort by Time or Sort by Vehicle Passing Times in the upper-right
corner to sort vehicle passing records.
Sort by Time
Sort records by the time vehicles passed through the entrance & exit.

773
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Sort by Vehicle Passing Times

Sort records by the number of times vehicles passed through the
entrance & exit.
Export Vehicle a. Click Export in the upper-right corner to open the Export panel.
Passing b. Select Excel, CSV, or PDF as the format of the exported file. Check Export
Records Picture to save vehicles' pictures in your PC with the Excel file.
c. Click Browse to select a saving path.
d. Click Save.

Note
● Up to 500 vehicle passing records with captured pictures can be exported
at one time. If the number of records with captured pictures exceeds 500,
you need to go to the Control Client to export them.
● Up to 100,000 vehicle passing records without captured pictures can be
exported at one time.

21.12.4 Search for Parking Records

On the platform, you can search for the parking records generated in a specific parking lot or the
record of a specific vehicle by setting relevant search conditions according to actual needs, and
perform further operations, such as viewing the detailed information of vehicles and exporting the
records to your PC.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Search → Parking Record Search .
2. Set search conditions according to actual needs.

774
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

1) Set a time range.

Note
You can select today, yesterday, current week, last 7 days, or last 30 days from the drop-down
list to search for the records generated in a relevant period, or click Custom Time Interval to
customize a time range.
2) Optional: Enter the license plate number of the vehicle.
3) Select a parking lot or All from the drop-down list.
4) Select a floor or All from the drop-down list.
5) Optional: Enter the parking space No.
6) Select the status of parking.
3. Click Search.
The matched record(s) will be displayed on the right.

Note
You can click or to switch between list mode and thumbnail mode.
4. Optional: In the upper-right corner, click Export to export the record(s) to your PC.

Note
● Up to 500 parking records with captured pictures can be exported at one time. If the number
of records with captured pictures exceeds 500, you need to go to the Control Client to export
them.
● Up to 100,000 parking records without captured pictures can be exported at one time.

775
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.12.5 Search for Parked Vehicles

If the actual number of vacant parking spaces is different from the number displayed on the
guidance screens, you can search for the vehicles that already exited but still recorded in the
parking lot to edit the vehicle information. For example, for parking lots requiring all on-site
vehicles out at the end of a day, you can search for the vehicles that are still in the parking lot and
export the vehicles' information. In another situation, if a vehicle is manually allowed to exit the
parking lot, the number of vacant parking spaces may not be updated in time. In this situation, you
can search for the vehicle and delete it from the vehicle list of the parking lot to update the
number of vacant parking spaces.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Search → Parked Vehicle Search .

Figure 21-56 Search Vehicles in Parking Lot

2. Select a parking lot from the drop-down list.
3. Set the vehicle information.
Marking Status
Search marked or unmarked vehicles in the parking lot.
Country/Region
Select the country/region where the vehicle's license plate number is registered.
License Plate No.

776
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Select No License Plate to search vehicles without license plate number; select With License
Plate and enter a vehicle's license plate number or key word of license plate number.
Vehicle Owner
Enter the vehicle owner's name or keyword of name.
Vehicle Type
Select the type of the vehicle from the drop-down list.
Brand
Select the brand of the vehicle from the drop-down list.
Color
Select the color of the vehicle from the presented colors.
How to Open Barrier
It refers to how the barrier gate was opened when a vehicle exits the parking lot. Manual
indicates that the a security guard manually controls the barrier gate to open after identifying
the vehicle owner; Automatic indicates that the barrier gate was opened automatically after
the capture unit recognizing the license plate number; Barrier Not Open indicates that the
barrier gate was not opened after the capture unit recognizing the license plate number.
Vehicle List
Search vehicle passing records of vehicles in certain vehicle list(s).
Dwell Time
The parking duration of the searched vehicles in the parking lot.
Custom Information
The custom items of vehicle information you added.
4. Click Search.
The matched vehicles will be displayed in the right area.
5. Optional: Perform the following operations if you need.
View Vehicle Click a license plate number in the list to view the detailed information of
Information the vehicle, including the captured vehicle picture or undercarriage
picture.
Export All a. In the top right corner, click Export to open the Export panel.
Records to PC b. Select Excel or CSV as the format of the exported file. Check Export
Picture to save vehicles' pictures in your PC with the Excel file.
c. Click Browse to select a saving path.
d. Click Save.

777
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● Up to 500 records of parked vehicles with captured pictures can be
exported at one time. If the number of records with captured pictures
exceeds 500, you need to go to the Control Client to export them.
● Up to 100,000 records of parked vehicles without captured pictures can
be exported at one time.

Delete Vehicles Click Delete All to delete all searched vehicles from the parking lot.
from Parking Lot
Note
After deleting a vehicle in the list, there will be one more vacant parking
space in the parking lot.

21.12.6 Search for Payment Records

If a vehicle pays the parking fee and exits the parking lot, its payment information, such as the
payment source and operation time, will be recorded in the platform. On the platform, you can
search for the payment records generated in a specific parking lot or the records of a specific
vehicle by setting search conditions according to actual needs. You can also export the records to
your PC. With the statistics, you can monitor some of the transactions done in the parking lots,
which can help you to manage the parking lots better.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Search → Payment Record Search .

778
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-57 Payment Record Search Page

2. Set search conditions according to actual needs.
1) Set a time range.

Note
You can select today, yesterday, current week, last 7 days, or last 30 days from the drop-down
list to search for the records generated in a relevant period, or click Custom Time Interval to
set a time range by yourself.
2) Optional: Enter the license plate number of the vehicle.
3) Optional: Enter the card number of the vehicle.
4) Select the type of the vehicle or All from the drop-down list.
5) Select a parking lot or All from the drop-down list.
6) Select an entrance & exit or All from the drop-down list.
7) Select an operator (the person responsible for collecting the fee) or All from the drop-down
list.
8) Select the payment method from All, Cash, and Vehicle Owner Account.
9) Select the source of payment from All, Booth, and Toll Center.
3. Click Search.
The matched record(s) will be displayed on the right.
4. Optional: In the upper-right corner, click Export to export the record(s) to your PC.

779
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.12.7 Search for Vehicle Top-Up and Refund Records

In the Search module, you can search for the top-up and refund records of vehicles or parking lots,
and exporting the records to your PC. With the statistics, you can monitor some of the transactions
happened in the parking lots, which can help you to manage the parking lots better.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Search → Top-Up and Refund Record Search .

Figure 21-58 Top-Up and Refund Record Search Page

2. Set search conditions according to actual needs.
1) Set a time range.

Note
You can select today, yesterday, current week, last 7 days, or last 30 days to search for the
records generated in relevant period, or click Custom Time Interval to set a time range by
yourself.
2) Optional: Enter the license plate number of the vehicle.
3) Optional: Enter the card number of the vehicle.
4) Select a parking lot or All from the drop-down list.
5) Select the transaction type from All, Top-Up, and Refund.
6) Select the transaction method from All, Cash, and Vehicle Owner Account.
7) Select an operator (the person responsible for collecting the fee) or All from the drop-down
list.
3. Click Search.

780
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The matched record(s) will be displayed on the right.

4. Optional: In the upper-right corner, click Export to export the record(s) to your PC.

21.12.8 Search for Transaction Records of Vehicle Owner Account

In the Search module, you can search for the transaction records of a specific vehicle owner
account, and exporting the records to your PC. With the statistics, you can see the details about
the transactions between a vehicle owner and the parking lot.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Search → Account Transaction Record Search .

Figure 21-59 Account Transaction Record Search Page

2. Set search conditions according to actual needs.
1) Set a time range.

Note
You can select today, yesterday, current week, last 7 days, or last 30 days to search for the
records generated in relevant period, or click Custom Time Interval to set a time range by
yourself.
2) Enter the account of the vehicle owner.
3) Select the transaction type from All, Top-Up, Refund, and Deduction.
4) Select an operator (the person responsible for collecting the fee) or All from the drop-down
list.
3. Click Search.

781
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The matched record(s) will be displayed in the right area.

4. Optional: In the upper-right corner, click Export to export the record(s) to your PC.

21.12.9 Search for Work Records of Operators

In the Search module, you can search for the work records of operators (i.e., the persons
responsible for payment management). You can view the information such as the on-duty and off-
duty time of an operator as well as the amount of payment the operator managed during working
hours.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Search → Operator Shift Search .

Figure 21-60 Operator Shift Search Page

2. Set a time range for search.

Note
You can select today, yesterday, current week, last 7 days, or last 30 days to search for the
records generated in relevant period, or click Custom Time Interval to set a time range by
yourself.
3. Select an operator (the person responsible for collecting the fee) or All from the drop-down list.
4. Click Search.
The matched record(s) will be displayed in the right area.
5. Optional: In the upper-right corner, click Export to export the record(s) to your PC.

782
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.12.10 Search for Coupon Records

In the Search module, you can search for coupon records and view the detailed information of the
coupons, such as the discount rule, expiration time, coupon status.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Search → Coupon Record Search .

Figure 21-61 Coupon Record Search Page

2. Set search conditions according to actual needs.
1) Select a vehicle or All from the drop-down list.
2) Select a status of the coupon from the drop-down list.
3) Select a discount rule or All from the drop-down list.
4) Click to set the effective period of the coupon(s) to be searched for.
3. Click Search.
The matched record(s) will be displayed in the right area.
4. Optional: In the upper-right corner, click Export to export the record(s) to your PC.

21.13 Statistic and Report

In the Statistics and Report module, you can view and export the operation report and transaction
report of each parking lot for having a general understanding of the usage, revenue, and
expenditure of the parking lot.

783
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.13.1 Export Operation Analysis Reports of Parking Lots

In the Statistics and Reports module, you can view the statistics related to the operations of
parking lots, such as the parking lot occupation rate, parking duration distribution, and traffic flow
statistics. With the statistics, you can have a general understanding of the situation of parking lots.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Statistics and Reports → Parking Lot Operation Analysis .

Figure 21-62 Parking Lot Operation Analysis Page

2. Select a parking lot from the drop-down list.
3. Select a report type from Day, Month, and Year, or click Custom to set a custom period for
generating the operation data.
4. Click Set Statistics Type and select the types of statistics to be displayed below for the selected
parking lot.

Note
● Any user with the permission to view the parking lot operation analysis is able to set which

types of statistics to display on the page.

● All users share a common configuration.

5. Optional: In the Parking Lot Occupation Rate area, click to set a time period.
The statistics generated in the set period will be displayed.
6. Optional: In the Parking Duration Distribution area, click to set the parking duration(s) to be
calculated.
The distribution of the selected parking duration(s) will be displayed.

784
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

7. Optional: In the Traffic Flow area, select one or multiple indicators from the drop-down list.
Traffic Flow (Entry)
The number of vehicles entered the parking lot.
Traffic Flow (Exit)
The number of vehicles exited the parking lot.
8. Optional: In the upper-right corner, click Export to save the analysis report to your PC.

21.13.2 Export Transaction Reports of Parking Lots

In the Statistics and Reports module, you can view the statistics related to the revenue and
expenditure of parking lots, such as the trend and type of revenue and expenditure, the revenue
and expenditure generated in a specific period. The statistics can give you a general picture of the
transactions done in the parking lots.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Statistics and Reports → Transaction Report .

Figure 21-63 Transaction Report Page

2. Select a parking lot from the drop-down list.
3. Select a report type from Day, Month, and Year, or select Custom to display the operation data
generated in the custom period.
4. Click Total Revenue to view the statistics of revenue, and the parking fee analysis of temporary
vehicles.
5. Click Total Expenditure to view the statistics of expenditure.
6. Optional: In the upper-right corner, click Export to save the analysis report to your PC.

785
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

21.13.3 Send Overtime Parking Report Regularly

You can set a regular overtime parking report rule for the parking lot added to the system, and the
system can send an email with a report attached to the target recipients daily, weekly, or monthly,
showing the records of overtime parking vehicles detected by ANPR cameras during the specified
time periods.
Before You Start
● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Set

Email Template .
● Set the email settings such as sender address, SMTP server address and port, etc. For details,

refer to Configure Email Account .

● Make sure the parking lot has been added to the system. For details, refer to Add Parking Lot .

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 10,000 records in total.
● The report will be an Excel file.

1. In the top left corner of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Vehicle and Parking
Management → Basic Configuration → Overtime Parking Report .
2. Click + to enter the Create Report page.

Note
If it is your first time setting a report sending rule, click Add in the middle of the page.
3. Create a name for the report.
4. Select the report target(s).
5. Set the statistical cycle by selecting from By Day, By Week and By Month, select a time period
for the report, and set a specific report sending time.
Daily Report
The system will send a report at the sending time on the selected day(s) of a week, which
contains data detected on the day (24 hours) before the current day.
For example, if you set the report sending time to 20:00 for the weekdays only, the system
will send a report at 20:00 every day from Monday to Friday, containing the records of
overtime parking vehicles detected between 00:00 and 24:00 on the previous day.
Weekly Report and Monthly Report
The system will send one report at the sending time every week or every month, which
contains the records of overtime parking vehicles detected on the last 7 or 14 days or the
current/previous month.
For example, for weekly reports, if you set the time period of the report to the most recent 7
days and the report sending time to 6:00 on Mondays, the system will send a report at 6:00 in

786
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

the morning on every Monday, containing the records of overtime parking vehicles detected
between the last Monday and Sunday.
6. Optional: Complete the rest of the settings on the page as needed.
Effective Period
Set a effective time period for the report.
Report Language
Select a language for the report from the drop-down list.
Send Report via Email
Switch on the button and select an email template from the drop-down list.

Note
You can click Add to add a new template. For setting email templates, refer to Set Email
Template .
Upload to SFTP
Switch on the button, click Configure to display the SFTP Settings pane, and enter the
required information.
Save to Local Storage
Switch on the button, click Configure to display the Configure Local Storage pane, and enter a
path for saving the report.
7. Click Add to create the report sending rule and go back to the report list page.

21.14 Self-Service Vehicle Finding Client

The self-service vehicle finding client is for users to find their vehicles in the parking lot easily and
accurately. You can search for your vehicle by license plate No., parking space No., and the time the
vehicle is parked in. If your vehicle does not have a license plate, you can click No License Plate,
and set specific conditions to search for it. When you are searching for your vehicle, both your and
your vehicle's position will be displayed on the map, which makes it more helpful for you to find
your vehicle.

Note
On the Web Client, you can choose whether to enable fuzzy search for the self-service vehicle
finding client and set the date display format of the client. For details, see Set Basic Parameters .

787
HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 21-64 Self-Service Vehicle Finding Client

788
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 22 Access Control Management

Access control is a security technique that can be used to regulate who can get access to the
specified doors and floors.
On the Web Client, the administrator can add access control devices, elevator control devices, and
video intercom devices to the system, group resources into different areas, and define access
permissions by creating an access level to group the access points (doors and floors) and an access
group to group the persons. After assigning the access level to the access group, the persons in the
access group will be authorized to access the access points in the access level with their credentials
during the authorized time period.

22.1 Flow Chart of Door Access Control

The following flow chart shows the process of the configurations and operations of door access
control.

789
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 22-1 Flow Chart of Door Access Control

● Add Device: You need to add access control devices and video intercom devices to the system.
For details, refer to Manage Access Control Device and Manage Video Intercom Device .
● Add Persons: Add person information and set person's credentials (such as PIN, card, and
fingerprint). For details, refer to Person Management .

790
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● Add Access Level: An access level is a group of doors. After assigning access level, the assigned
objects can get access to these doors during the authorized time period. For details, refer to
Manage Access Level .
● Set Access Schedule: The access schedule defines when the person can access the access point
with credentials. For details, refer to Set Access Schedule Template .
● Assign Access Level: You need to assign access levels to persons, so that the assignees can
access the access points in the access levels. You can assign an access level to multiple persons
or assign multiple access levels to a person or a person group. For details, refer to Assign Access
Level .
● Apply Access Levels to Device: After setting the linkage between the persons and the access
level, you need to apply the person's access level settings to the access control device of the
doors linked to the access level to take effect. After that, the persons can access these doors
during the authorized time period defined by the related access level. For details, refer to Apply
Persons' Access Levels to Device .
● Advanced Configuration: The system provides some advanced configurations including free
access and access forbidden rule, first person in rule, emergency operation group, anti-passback,
multi-door interlocking, multi-factor authentication, authentication mode, and entry & exit
counting. For details about these configurations, refer to Configure Free Access and Access
Forbidden Rules , Configure First Person In Rule , Add Emergency Operation Group , Configure
Area Anti-Passback Rules , Configure Multi-Door Interlocking , Configure Multi-Factor
Authentication Rule , Configure Authentication Mode , and Add Entry and Exit Counting
Group .
● Door Control: After the above configurations on the Web Client, you can control the doors status
during live view, view real-time access events, search for history access records, etc. See Door
and Elevator Control for details.

22.2 Manage Access Level

In access control, access level is a group of access points. Assigning access level to persons, person
groups, or access groups can define the access permission that which persons can get access to
which access points during the authorized time period.

22.2.1 Add Access Level

To define access permission, you need to add an access level to group the access points (doors and
floors).
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access Level .
2. Click Manage Access Level on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Access Level page.
4. Create a name for the access level.
5. Optional: Edit the description for the access level.

791
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

6. Select the access point(s) to add to the access level.

1) In the Available list, select the access point(s) you want to add to the system and click .
You can view your selection in the Selected list.
2) Optional: In the Selected list, select the access point(s) that you no longer want to add to the
system, and click to undo selection.

Figure 22-2 Select Access Points

7. Select an access schedule to define in which time period, persons are authorized to access the
access points you select in the previous step.

Note
All default and custom access schedules are shown in the Access Schedule drop-down list. You
can click New Access Schedule Template to customize a schedule. Or you can predefine access
schedule templates. For details, refer to Set Access Schedule Template .
8. Click Add to add the access level and return to the access level management page.
9. Optional: Perform further operations on the added access level(s).
Edit Access Level Click the name of an access level to view and edit its configurations.
Delete Access Level Select an access level and click Delete to delete it.
Delete All Access Click → Delete All to delete all access levels.
Levels
What to do next
You need to assign the access level to persons, so that the assignees can have the access to the
access points in the access level according to the access schedule. For details, refer to Assign
Access Level .

22.2.2 Assign Access Level

You need to assign access levels to persons, so that the assignees can have the access to the access
points in the access levels. You can assign an access level to multiple persons or assign multiple
access levels to a person, person group, or access group.

792
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Assign by Access Level

You can assign an access level to multiple persons so that the assigned persons can have the access
to the access points in the access level.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added access levels to the system. For details, refer to Add Access Level .

● Make sure you have added persons to the system. For details, refer to Person Management .

Follow the steps to assign an access level to persons.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access Level .
2. Click Assign by Access Level on the left.
3. Click on the access level that you want to assign to persons.

Figure 22-3 Assignee Panel

4. On the assignee panel, click Assign To to show person list.
5. Select the persons whom you want to assign the access level to and click Add.
6. Do one of the following to apply access level settings to devices.
- In the pop-up window, click Apply Now to apply the settings immediately.
- In the pop-up window, click Apply Later. When ready, click to apply the settings. You can
also set a schedule to apply automatically. For details, refer to Regularly Apply Access Level
Settings to Devices .
7. Optional: To unassign a person from the access level, select the person and click Unassign. To
unassign all, click → Unassign All .
What to do next
Test your access control configurations and devices before putting them into use. For details, refer
to Access Control Test .

793
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Assign by Person
You can assign access levels to persons, so that the assignees can have the access to the access
points in the access levels.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added persons to the system. For details, refer to Person Management .

● Make sure you have added access levels to the system. For details, refer to Add Access Level .

Follow the steps to assign one or more access levels to specific persons.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access Level .
2. Click Assign by Person on the left.
3. In the person group list, click a person group.
4. In the person information panel on the right, select the persons to whom you want to assign
access levels.

Figure 22-4 Person Information Panel

Note
You can click on person's name to view the details about the person.
5. Click Assign Access Level.
6. In the Assign Access Level panel, select the access levels that you want to assign to the selected
persons.
7. Click Assign.
8. Do one of the following to apply access level settings to devices.

794
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- In the pop-up window, click Apply Now to apply the settings immediately.
- In the pop-up window, click Apply Later. When ready, click to apply the settings. You can
also set a schedule to apply automatically. For details, refer to Regularly Apply Access Level
Settings to Devices .
9. Optional: To unassign a person's access levels, select the person and choose Unassign All Access
levels or Unassign Specified Access Levels.

Note
For details, refer to Clear Persons' Access Levels .
What to do next
Test your access control configurations and devices before putting them into use. For details, refer
to Access Control Test .

Assign by Person Group

You can assign access levels to person groups, so that the persons in the person group can have the
access to the access points in the access levels.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added person groups and persons to the system. For details, refer to Person

Management .
● Make sure you have added access levels to the system. For details, refer to Add Access Level .

Follow the steps to assign one or more access levels to specific person groups.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access Level .
2. Click Assign by Person Group on the left.
3. Do one of the following to assign access levels to person groups.
- Assign access levels to each person group one by one.
a. In the person group list, click on a person group.
b. In the assigned access level panel on the right, click Assign Access Level.
c. In the Assign Access Level panel, select the access levels you want to assign to the selected
person group.
d. Click Add.
- Assign access levels to multiple person groups at a time.
a. Click .
b. In the person group list, select the person groups where you want to assign access levels.

Note
Sub-groups are excluded from selection by default. To include all sub-groups of each
person group, check Select Sub-Groups.

795
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

c. In access level list, select the access levels you want to assign to the person groups.
d. Click Save.

Note
After assigning access levels to a person group, you can still modify the access levels for each
person in the group, and it will not affect the settings for the person group. For details, refer to
Assign by Person .
4. Do one of the following to apply access level settings to devices.
- In the pop-up window, click Apply Now to apply the settings immediately.
- In the pop-up window, click Apply Later. When ready, click to apply the settings. You can
also set a schedule to apply automatically. For details, refer to Regularly Apply Access Level
Settings to Devices .
5. Optional: To unassign an access level from the person group, select the access level and click
Unassign. To unassign all access levels, click → Unassign All .
What to do next
Test your access control configurations and devices before putting them into use. For details, refer
to Access Control Test .

Assign by Access Group

An access group is the group of persons who have the same access permission (In the specified
time period, they have the permission to access the specified access points). You can add the
persons who have the same access permission to the same access group. For example, the
employees in the same department should access the company gates during the working hours.
The employees can be added to the same access group and be related to the access level which
contains the access permission of the company gates. One or multiple access levels can be
assigned to the access group, and the persons in the access group will get the permission to access
all the access points in the access level(s).
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added persons to the platform. For details, refer to Person Management .

● Make sure you have added access levels to the platform. For details, refer to Add Access Level .

Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control →
Access Level .
2. Click Assign by Access Group on the left.
3. Perform one of the following operations to enter the Add Access Group page.
- Click at the top of the access group list to enter the Manage Access Group page, and then
click Add to enter the Add Access Group page.
- If no access group is added to the access group list, click Add Access Group in the access
group list to enter the Add Access Group page.

796
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 22-5 Add Access Group Page

4. In the Group Name field, enter the name of the access group.
5. In the Group Member area, click Add to open the person list, select the person(s) to be added to
the access group.

797
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

6. Click Add to add the selected person(s) to the access group.

7. After configuration, click Add at the bottom.
8. Select an access group to assign access levels to.
9. Click Assign Access Level on the right.
10. In the Assign Access Level page, select the access level(s) to be assigned to.
11. Click Assign.
12. Perform one of the following operations to apply access level settings to devices.
- In the pop-up window, click Apply Now to apply the settings immediately.
- In the pop-up window, click Apply Later. When ready, click to apply the settings. You can
also set a schedule to apply automatically. For details, refer to Regularly Apply Access Level
Settings to Devices .
13. Optional: Unassign access level(s) from the access group.
- In the assigned access level list, select the access level(s) and click Dissociate to unassign the
access level(s) from the access group.
- In the assigned access level list, click → Unassign All to unassign all access levels from the
access group.
What to do next
Test your access control configurations and devices before putting them into use. For details, refer
to Access Control Test .

22.2.3 Apply Persons' Access Levels to Device

After setting or modifying the linkage between persons and access levels, you need to apply the
access level settings to the access control devices or elevator control devices to take effect. After
that, the persons can access these access points during the authorized time period defined by the
related access level.

Manually Apply Access Level Settings to Device

After setting access levels and assigning access levels to persons, person groups, or access groups,
you need to apply the relations between persons and access points to the devices.
Before You Start
Make sure you have assigned access levels to persons in the system. For details, refer to Assign
Access Level .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access Level .
2. Click Assign by Access Level, Assign by Person, Assign by Person Group, or Assign by Access
Group on the left.
3. Click .
4. In the Apply Access Level Settings panel, select the persons to apply the access level settings.
- To apply the access level settings of all persons, select All Persons.

798
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- To apply the access level settings of specific persons, select Specified Persons, click , select
the persons, and click Add.
5. Select the access points to apply the persons' access level settings.
- To apply the access level settings of all access points, switch off Specified Access Point.
- To apply the access level settings of specific access points, switch on Specified Access Point
and select the access points.
6. Apply access level settings to devices.
- To clear all persons' access level configurations on the devices first and then apply the
configurations in the system to the devices, check Apply (Initial) and click Apply.

Note
● Only available when you select All Persons previously.

● During the initialization process, the devices will be offline, and persons cannot access

these access points.

- To apply changed (newly added, edited, deleted) access level settings to the devices, uncheck
Apply (Initial) and click Apply.
7. Optional: If persons' access level settings (such as linked access levels, person credentials, etc.)
are changed or the applying process failed, will appear next to , indicating some access
level settings are pending to be applied to the devices. You can hover the cursor over to view
the details.

Note
For troubleshooting the applying process, refer to Access Control Test .

Regularly Apply Access Level Settings to Devices

You can set a schedule to apply the access level settings in the system to devices automatically.
Before You Start
Make sure you have assigned access levels to persons in the system. For details, refer to Assign
Access Level .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, click → All Modules → Access Control → Basic Settings
→ General .
2. Click Apply to Device (Scheduled) on the left.
3. Switch on Apply to Device (Scheduled).
4. Select an applying mode.
- Apply at Fixed Time: Apply the changed access level settings and the settings that failed to be
applied last time to devices at a specific time (System Management Server time) on a daily
basis. You can select a time in the Auto-Apply At drop-down list.
- Apply Every Certain Hours: Apply the changed access level settings and the settings that
failed to be applied last time to devices immediately and every certain hours afterward. You
can select an interval in the Auto-Apply drop-down list.

799
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Click Save.

22.2.4 Clear Persons' Access Levels

You can clear the access levels of persons so that they cannot access the access points in the
access levels. For example, if there is no access record of certain persons entering or exiting for a
long time, the administrator can clear their access levels to make sure the persons' credentials will
not be misused.
In the top left corner of Home page, click → All Modules → Access Control → Access Level .
Click Assign by Person on the left.
Select a person group to show all persons in the group. You can filter the target persons by setting
search conditions.
Select the target person and click Unassign to choose Unassign All Access levels or Unassign
Specified Access Levels.

Note
For the latter one, if you selected multiple persons, only the common access levels shared by the
selected persons can be unassigned.
After clearing, the previous access level settings of the persons cannot be restored. You need to re-
assign access levels for them again when needed.

After clearing the access level settings of the selected persons, these persons will be removed from
the related access groups. You need to apply the access level settings of these persons to the
devices to take effect. You can click Apply Now in the pop-up window to apply the settings
immediately. Or click Apply Later. When ready, click . For details, refer to Manually Apply
Access Level Settings to Device for details. You can also set a schedule to apply automatically. For
details, refer to Regularly Apply Access Level Settings to Devices .
After applying to the devices, the access level settings of the persons will be deleted on the
devices.

22.2.5 Set Access Schedule Template

Access schedule defines when persons can open access points in an access level with credentials,
or when access points remain unlocked so that persons can open the access points with free
access. The system provides three default access control schedule templates: All-day Template,
Weekday Template, and Weekend Template. You can also add customized templates according to
your needs.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, click → All Modules → Access Control → Basic Settings
→ General .
2. Click Access Schedule Template on the left.

800
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

3. Click to create a blank template.

4. Configure the template in the template information panel on the right.
Name
Create a name for the template.
Copy from
Optionally, you can select to copy the settings from existing templates.
5. In the Weekly Schedule Template box, set a schedule pattern for each day.
1) Click Authorize and select or draw in the box to define the authorized time periods.
2) Optional: Click Erase and select or draw on the authorized time periods to clear the selection.

Note
You can set up to 8 separate time periods for each day.
6. Optional: Set a holiday schedule if you want different schedules for specific days.

Note
Holiday schedule has a higher priority than weekly schedule.
1) Click Add Holiday.
2) Select existing holiday templates, or click Add New to create a new holiday template (see Set
Holiday for details).
3) Click Add.
4) Set a schedule pattern for holidays.
7. Click Add to save the template.
8. Optional: Perform further operations on added templates.
View and Edit Template Details Click a template item to view and edit its configurations.
Delete Template Click a template item and click to delete it.
What to do next
Set access schedule for access level to define in which time period persons are authorized to
access the access points in the access level. For details, refer to Add Access Level .

22.2.6 Enable Authentication via Password

Authentication via password allows you to authenticate only via your password. After this function
is enabled, all the passwords in the platform should be different from each other. You can update
the password manually or automatically.
Steps
1. Click → All Modules → Access Control → Basic Settings .
2. Click General on the left to enter the General page.
3. Switch on Authenticate via Password.
4. Select Manual or Auto as the PIN code update mode.

801
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Manual Mode
You need to export users whose passwords are duplicated or not configured from the Person
module, and then notify these users to update the passwords by themselves. A password
should consist of 4 to 8 characters.
Auto Mode
The platform will change the duplicate password to a unique one or customize a unique
password for each user whose password is not configured, and then notify these users.
5. Click Save.

22.3 Access Control Test

HikCentral Professional provides Access Control Test. It is a tool through which you can test
whether the configurations about access control (such as persons' credentials and access levels for
access control, elevator control, and video intercom) are set correctly and completely and whether
the devices are running properly.
In the top left corner of Home page, click → All Modules → Access Control → Troubleshooting .

Check Credential Status

Select Credential Status tab to view the status of the added credentials.

Figure 22-6 Credential Status

There are 7 types of exceptions on credential settings in the system. The number next to each
exception type indicates the number of persons whose credential settings are exceptional.
Click each exception type to view the information about the persons with exceptions.

802
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

You can click person's name to edit the credentials if necessary.

Check Device Status
Select Device Status tab to view the status of the devices (including access control devices,
elevator control devices, and video intercom devices). You can check person information and
credential information that are already applied to the devices, configured in the system, failed to
apply, and persons to be applied to the devices.

Note
Only the status of the devices which have been configured with access levels are shown.

Figure 22-7 Device Status

Click each exception type to view the information about the persons with exceptions.
You can select the devices and click the following buttons to solve device issues.

Restore Default Restore the settings on the devices to the default value.
Apply Apply person information and credential settings to these devices again.
Refresh Refresh the list to get the latest device status.

803
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Check Authorization Settings of Persons

You can check the authorization settings (such as access levels and access group settings, credential
settings, and applying status) of specific persons in the system. This function helps you to test
whether the persons can access the target access points according to the current settings.

Click to expand the side panel.

Figure 22-8 Check Authorization Settings

In the Check Person Authorization section, select the item(s) of information you want to check.
Click Check Now to test the authorization settings of all existing persons. Under Applying Failed,
you can:
● Click Apply or Apply All to apply one or all access levels.

● Click Export all to export all access levels and access points failed to be applied.

Or click Select Persons to select the persons you want to test and then click Check Now to test the
authorization settings of the selected persons.
Check Access Point Settings
You can test whether the persons can access the access points according to the settings in the
system.

Click to expand the side panel.

804
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 22-9 Check Access Point Settings

In the Check Access Point section, select the item(s) of information you want to check.
Click Check Now to test the settings of all existing access points in the system. You can:
● Click Apply or Apply All to apply one or all access points.

● Click Export all to export all access levels and access points failed to be applied.

Or click Select Access Points to select the access points you want to test and then click Check Now
to test the settings of the selected access points.

Note
The access points which are not added to any access levels will not be checked.

22.4 Advanced Functions

22.4.1 Configure Free Access and Access Forbidden Rules

You may need to set doors and floors accessible or inaccessible during certain periods. To perform
this function, you need to configure free access and access forbidden rule for certain doors or
floors.
Steps

Note
This function should be supported by the device.

805
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access
Control Application .
2. Click Free Access and Access Forbidden on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Free Access and Access Forbidden Rule page.
4. Enter the rule name.
5. Select an access point from the following area list.
6. Select free access schedule or access forbidden schedule.

Figure 22-10 Add Free Access and Access Forbidden Rule Page
Free Access Schedule
During free access period, all persons can access the selected doors and floors without
credentials required.
Access Forbidden Schedule
During access forbidden period, no persons can access the selected doors or floors even if
he/she has the authorized credentials, except the super users.

Note
● You can click Add New to add a custom access schedule or holiday schedule. See Set Access

Schedule Template for details.

7. Click Add.

806
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The system will automatically apply the schedule(s) to devices.

8. Optional: Perform the following operations.
View Schedule Details Click to show the schedule details.
Copy Schedule to Other Click a rule name to enter the rule page. Click Copy to on the top
Access Point right to copy the schedule to other access points.

22.4.2 Configure First Person In Rule

First Person In refers to a rule that only after the first person is authorized to enter with his or her
card, fingerprint, or face, can other people's permission be activated. There are two modes for First
Person In, the Remaining Open after First Person and the Authorization by First Person.
Steps

Note
This function should be supported by the device.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access
Control Application .
2. Click First Person In Rules on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add First Person In Rules page.
4. Enter the rule name.
5. Select a door from the following area list.
6. Set Free Access Schedule.

807
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 22-11 Add First Person In Rule Page

Remain Unlocked for
When the door is locked, if the first person swipes card, the door will remain unlocked during
the configured period.
Authorization
The door is locked and access is denied with any credentials (except during the free access
schedule) until you swipe the first card. After the first person swipes card, the door is
authorized and the persons with corresponding access level are granted to access. The
authorization will be invalid at 00:00 a.m. every day.
7. Click Add to select first person(s).
8. Click Add to add the rule.

808
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

22.4.3 Add Emergency Operation Group

An emergency operation group is a group for access points which need to be operated (remaining
locked/unlocked) in a batch. This function is mainly applicable for emergent situation. For example,
after grouping the doors of the school's main entrances and exits into one emergency operation
group, the school's security personnel can lock down the doors in this group by quick operation on
the Control Client, so that the school closes and no one can get into the school except for high level
admins. This function would block out teachers, custodians, students, etc.
Before You Start
Add the access points into different areas first. For details, refer to Add Element to Area .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access
Control Application .
2. Click Access Control Rule → Emergency Operation Group on the left.
3. Click Add.

Figure 22-12 Add Emergency Operation Group Page

4. Create a name for the group.
5. Select the access points and click > to add them to the group.

Note
You can add doors of access control devices, doors of video intercom devices, and floors of
elevator control devices to the emergency operation group.
6. Click Add.
The emergency operation group is added in the table and you can view the access points in the
group.

809
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

22.4.4 Configure Anti-Passback Rules

The anti-passback is designed to minimize the misuse or fraudulent use of access credentials such
as passing back the card to an unauthorized person, or tailed access. Only one person can pass the
access point after swiping the card. You can configure area anti-passback rules or route anti-
passback rules for different scenarios. This function is mainly used to enhance the access security
of some important or specific places (e.g., laboratories, offices).

Configure Area Anti-Passback Rules

The area anti-passback function establishes a specific door group for an area. When a person
accesses the area by swiping card, he/she should exit the area via the door in the anti-passback
group if he/she enters the area via the door in the group, and he/she cannot enter the area via the
door in the anti-passback group if he/she exited the area not by swiping card at the door in the
group before.
Before You Start
Add the access points to different areas first. For details, refer to Add Element to Area .
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, click → All Modules → Access Control →
Access Control Application .
2. Click Anti-Passback on the left and click Area Anti-Passback on the right.
3. Click Add to open the Add Area Anti-Passback page.
4. Create a name for the door group.
5. Select doors in the Available list and click to add them to the Selected list.
6. Optional: Switch on Forgive Anti-Passback Regularly and set a fixed time so that the platform
can forgive the anti-passback violations occurred in this group automatically everyday.
Anti-Passback Violation
When a person attempts to use a card without following the rule, the access will be denied.
This is called "Anti-Passback Violation". When an anti-passback violation occurs, no access is
allowed unless the anti-passback violation event is forgiven.
7. Click Add.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the anti-passback group to the area.
Edit Anti- Click the group name to edit the anti-passback group settings.
Passback You can edit the name of the group, add or delete doors in the group,
Group change the settings of forgiving anti-passback violation regularly, and edit
the locations of the group and doors on the map.
Set/Cancel When a person attempts to use a card without following the rule, the access
Forgiving Anti- will be denied. This is called "Anti-Passback Violation". When an anti-
Passback passback violation occurs, no access is allowed unless the anti-passback
Regularly violation event is forgiven.

810
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Select the group(s), click Set Forgiving Anti-Passback Regularly, and specify
a fixed time so that the platform can automatically forgive the anti-passback
violations occurred in the selected anti-passback group(s) at that time
everyday.
You can also select the group(s) and click Cancel Forgiving Anti-Passback
Regularly to cancel the settings of the selected group(s).
Delete Anti- Select the group(s) and click Delete to delete the anti-passback group(s).
Passback
Group

Configure Route Anti-Passback Rules

The route anti-passback depends on the card swiping route. This function establishes a specific
card reader sequence in which cards must be used in order to grant access. You should set the first
card reader and the subsequent ones. It will authenticate the anti-passback according to the
entrance and exit information stored in the card reader.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, click → All Modules → Access Control →
Access Control Applications .
2. Click Anti-Passback on the left and click Route Anti-Passback on the right.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Route Anti-Passback page.
4. Create a name for the route anti-passback rule in the Name field.
5. Set the card reader order in the Card Reader Order area.
1) Click Add, select a card reader in the list, and click Add to add a card reader.
2) Hover the cursor on the added card reader and click to add another card reader.

Note
You can repeat this step to add card readers according to a specific sequence as needed.
3) Optional: Click the card reader and click Change Card Reader to select another card reader to
replace it.
4) Optional: Click the card reader and click Delete to delete the card reader and its subsequent
card reader(s).
6. Optional: Switch on First Card Reader and select a card reader from the drop-down list to set it
as the first card reader.

Note
If you violate the route anti-passback rule, you should swipe the card again from the first card
reader.
7. Optional: Switch on Forgive Anti-Passback Regularly to set a fixed time so that the platform can
forgive the anti-passback violations automatically everyday.
Anti-Passback Violation

811
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

When a person attempts to use a card out of the route anti-passback rule's sequence, the
access will be denied. This is called "Anti-Passback Violation". When an anti-passback violation
occurs, no entry is allowed unless the anti-passback violation event is forgiven.
8. Click Add.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the route anti-passback rule.
View Card Click in the Operation column to view the card reader order of the rule.
Reader Order
Edit Anti- Click the rule name to edit the anti-passback rule settings.
Passback Rule You can edit the name of the rule, add, change, or delete card readers in
the order, change the first card reader, or change the settings of forgiving
anti-passback violation regularly.
Set/Cancel When a person attempts to use a card out of the route anti-passback rule's
Forgiving Anti- sequence, the access will be denied. This is called "Anti-Passback
Passback Violation". When anti-passback violation occurs, no entry is allowed unless
Regularly the anti-passback violation event is forgiven.
Select the rule(s), click Set Forgiving Anti-Passback Regularly, and specify a
fixed time so that the platform can automatically forgive the anti-passback
violations occurred in the selected anti-passback rule(s) at that time
everyday.
You can also select the rule(s) and click Cancel Forgiving Anti-Passback
Regularly to cancel the settings of the selected rule(s).
Delete Anti- Select the rule(s) and click Delete to delete the route anti-passback rule(s).
Passback Rule

22.4.5 Configure Multi-Door Interlocking

Multi-door interlocking is used to control the entry of persons to a secure area such as a clean
room, where dust or small particles may cause a major issue. One multi-door interlocking group is
composed of at least two doors and only one door can be opened simultaneously.
Before You Start
Add the access points into different areas first. For details, refer to Add Element to Area .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access
Control Application .
2. Click Multi-Door Interlocking on the left.
3. Click Add.
4. Create a name for the group.
5. Select doors and click >.
6. Click Add.

812
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

22.4.6 Manage Multi-Factor Authentication

Multi-Factor Authentication is an access authentication scheme which requires all the predefined
persons to be present and get authentication. Multi-Factor Authentication is generally used in
places such as bank vault to ensure the security of important assets and data. To perform this
function, you need to configure multi-factor authentication rule and add multi-factor
authentication group first. Besides, you can add persons to receive remote door open request.

Configure Multi-Factor Authentication Rule

In access control, multi-factor authentication is an authentication method in which the door will
unlock only after multiple persons present authenticating multiple credentials in turn. This method
is mainly used for locations with high security requirements, such as bank vault. With the mutual
supervision of the persons, multi-factor authentication provides higher security for the assets in
these locations.
Steps

Note
This function should be supported by the device.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access
Control Application .
2. Click Multi-Factor Authentication on the left.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Multi-Factor Authentication Rule page.
4. Enter the rule name.
5. Select a door from the following area list.
6. Set the access mode of the door.
Unlock After Access Granted
The door will be unlocked automatically after the persons swiping their cards (or other type
of credentials) on the card readers of the door and the access is granted.
Remotely Unlock After Granted
After the persons swiping their cards (or other type of credentials) on the card readers of the
door and the access is granted, a window will pop up. The operator should confirm to unlock
the door remotely and then the door will be unlocked successfully.
Enter Super Password After Granted
After the persons swiping their cards (or other type of credentials) on the card readers of the
door and the access is granted, they should enter the super password on the card reader.
After that, the door will be unlocked successfully.
7. Set the access schedule to define in which time period, the persons are authorized to access the
door.

813
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The default and customized access schedules are displayed in the drop-down list. You can click
Add to customize a new schedule. For details, refer to Set Access Schedule Template .
8. Set the card swiping interval and make sure the interval between two authentications on the
card reader is within this value.
Example
When you set the interval as 5s, if the interval between two authentications is longer than 5s,
the authentications will be invalid, and you should authenticate again from the beginning.
9. Click Link to Group to set the access group(s) to define who have the permission to access the
door.
Card Swiping Order
Click ↑ or ↓ in the Operation column to set the authentication order of different access
groups.
Number of Persons for Authentications
Define how many persons should authenticate on the card reader.
For example, if you set 3 for access group Security Guard and 1 for access group Bank
Manager, it means three security guards should swipe cards on the card reader (or other
access mode), and one bank manager should swipe card on the card reader (or other access
mode) for this multi-factor authentication.

Note
This value should be no larger than the number of persons in the access group.
10. Click Save.

Add Multi-Factor Authentication Group

To perform multi-factor authentication function, you need to create a multi-factor authentication
group and appoint persons as the member of the group first. Persons in the group have the
permission for multi-factor authentication of specific doors.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access
Control Application .
2. Click Multi-Factor Authentication on the left.
3. Click Multi-Factor Authentication Group Management on the top.
4. Click Add to open the Add Multi-Factor Authentication Group panel.
5. Enter the multi-factor authentication group name.
6. Click Add to select group number from the person list.
7. Click Add.

814
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Add Person to Receive Remote Door Open Request

To handle remote door open request on the Control Client, you need to appoint persons to receive
these request beforehand.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access
Control Application .
2. Click Multi-Factor Authentication on the left.
3. Click Persons to Receive Remote Door Open Request on the top.
4. Click Add to open the Add Persons to Receive Remote Door Open Request panel.
5. Select persons from the person list.
6. Click Add.

22.4.7 Configure Authentication Mode

The authentication mode is used to determine whether a person has the permission to pass the
access point by using single or multiple authentication modes (e.g., employee ID, face, fingerprint,
password, PIN code, or a combination of them). You can set the reader authentication mode for
access points or set the private authentication mode for persons. If a device has been configured
with different authentication modes by two methods, the person's private authentication mode
has higher priority than the reader authentication mode.

Set Reader Authentication Mode

You can set the reader authentication mode to employee ID, password, face, fingerprint, PIN code,
or a combination of them in normal time periods or custom time periods according to your actual
need.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added doors to the area. See Add Element to Area for details.
Steps

Note
This function should be supported by the device.
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control →
Access Control Application .
2. Click Authentication Mode on the left and click Reader Authentication Mode on the right.
3. Select an area from the area list.
4. Click a door name on the right.
5. Select the Reader Authentication Mode Settings.

815
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Batch
Set the same reader authentication mode for all the readers of a door.
Single
If you want to set different reader authentication modes for different readers, select this
mode.

Figure 22-13 Set Reader Authentication Mode Page

6. Select the Reader Authentication Mode.
Reader Authentication Mode
Set the reader's authentication mode in normal time periods. For example, if you select Card,
persons on the platform should open the door by swiping the card for authentication each
time.
Reader Authentication Mode (Custom)
When you want persons on the platform to open the door via another authentication mode
in some special time periods, you need to set the reader's authentication mode and select
the custom time period. For example, if you select Fingerprint and Weekend Template,
persons on the platform should open the door via fingerprint at weekends.

816
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

7. Optional: Click Copy to in the upper-right corner to apply the settings to other doors.
8. Click Save.

Set Person Private Authentication Mode

In some situations, different persons need to use different authentication modes for accessing the
same access point, and a person may need to use different authentication modes for accessing
different access points. Setting the private authentication modes for different persons can provide
an easy way for them to authenticate by less credentials or enhance the security of some
important places by forcing them to use more credentials.
Steps

Note
The person's private authentication mode has higher priority than the existing authentication
mode of the device.
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control →
Access Control Application .
2. Click Authentication Mode on the left and click Private Authentication Mode on the right.
3. Select a person group from the left list.
All persons in the person group will be listed on the right panel.
4. Click in the Operation column to open the Device for Authentication page.
5. Click Add, select the device(s) from the list, and select the authentication mode from the drop-
down list for the selected device(s).
6. Click OK to add the device(s) for authentication for the person.
7. Optional: Perform one of the following operations to editing the authentication mode(s) for the
device(s).
- Select an authentication mode from the Authentication Mode drop-down list to configure the
authentication mode for each device.
- Click Configure All, select an authentication mode from the drop-down list, and click Save to
configure the same authentication mode for all added devices.
8. Optional: In the Private Authentication Mode page, click in the Operation column, select the
person(s), and click OK to copy the person's private authentication mode settings to another
person or other persons.
Result
The number of devices added for each person is displayed in the Device for Authentication column.
You can click beside the number to view names and authentication modes of all devices.

817
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

22.4.8 Add Entry and Exit Counting Group

The entry and exit counting group is used to group the access points in certain region. You can set
some access points as the region border. Only the persons accessing these access points are
counted, and other access points inside the region are ignored. By grouping these access points,
the system provides counting functions based on the entry and exit records on these access points.
With this function, you can know who enters/exits this region and how many persons still stay in
this region. This is applicable for certain emergency scene. For example, during a fire escape, the
number of the remaining/stayed-in persons and name list are required for rescue.
Before You Start
Add the access points into different areas. For details, refer to Add Element to Area .
Steps

Note
After setting entry & exit counting group, you can perform entry & exit counting in Access Control
Retrieval → Entry & Exit Counting on the Control Client to count the number of people who are
still in the region and view who enters/exits this region.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Access
Control Application .
2. Click Entry and Exit Counting Group on the left.
3. Click Add.
4. Create a name for the group.
5. Click Add and select access points from the area list.
6. Set the entering or exiting direction of the card readers of the selected access points.
The access records on the entering card reader will be counted as person entering this region
while the access records on the exiting one will be counted as person exiting this region.
7. Click Add.
The entry & exit counting group is added in the table and you can view the access points in the
group.

22.5 Door and Elevator Control

With emergency operation group, you can control door and elevator status in a batch when an
emergency happens. For example, after grouping the doors of a school's main entrances and exits
into one emergency operation group, school's security personnel can lock down the doors in the
group, so that no one can enter or leave the school except for maintenance and high-level admins.
This function can also block out teachers, custodians, students, etc.
You can control all or part of the doors and floors in the selected site andarea according to your
need. When the emergency is over, you can restore the status to Access with Credential.

818
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Only the users with Administrator or Operator role can control all doors/floors in a batch.

Figure 22-14 Access Control Real-time Monitoring

22.5.1 View Real-Time Access Event

In the Access Control module, you can view events triggered by doors and elevators. You can also
control door and elevator status according to the event details, search more event information,
and so on.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Real-Time
Monitoring .
Select the site and area that you want to view the access events. Real-time access events are
displayed at the bottom of the page.

Search Device Records Click in the Operation column to go to Device

Recorded Data Retrieval page to search records
by customizing searching conditions.
Filter Events You can filter the real-​time events by setting
conditions according to record types and event
source. Click to set conditions.
Custom Column Click to customize the column to only show
the most relevant event information.

819
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Clear Events Click to clear all events in the list.

View Details of Latest Access Record On the lower-right corner of this page, check
Auto-switch to the Latest Record to display the
person/visitor information contained in the
newest access record. If you uncheck the Auto-
switch to the Latest Record, the platform will
display the person/visitor information
contained in the historical access records. The
platform supports hiding the window.

22.5.2 Door Control

You can change the status of all doors in a site or doors in specific emergency operation groups to
locked, unlocked, remaining locked, or remaining unlocked.

Note
Make sure you have grouped doors into an emergency operation group. See details in Add
Emergency Operation Group .

In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Real-Time
Monitoring .
Control all or part of the doors in the current site.
Unlock
When a door is locked, if you unlock the door, it will be unlocked. When open duration is over,
the door will be locked again automatically.
Click Unlock / Temporary Access → All to unlock all doors in the current site.
Click Unlock / Temporary Access → Part and select the emergency operation groups you want
to unlock. Click OK to unlock the doors in the selected emergency operation groups.

Note
For details about setting the door's open duration, see Edit Door for Current Site .
Lock
When the door is unlocked, if you lock the door, it will be closed and locked. Person who has the
access permission can access the door with credentials.
Click Lock / Access with Credential → All to lock all doors in the current site.
Click Lock / Access with Credential → Part and select the emergency operation groups that you
want to lock. Click OK to lock the doors in the selected emergency operation groups.
Remain Unlocked

820
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Doors will be unlocked. All persons can access the door with no credentials required (free
access). This function is used when an emergency happens and all people are required to leave
as quickly as possible, such as in a fire escape.
Click Remain Unlocked / Free Access → All and all doors in the current site will remain
unlocked.
Click Remain Unlocked / Free Access → Part and select the emergency operation groups. Click
OK and the doors in the selected emergency operation groups will remain unlocked.
Remain Locked
Door will be closed and locked. No person, except for the super users, can access the door even
with authorized credentials. This function is applicable for situations such as preventing a theft
in the building from getting away.
Click Remain Locked / Access Forbidden → All to lock down all the doors in the site.
Click Remain Locked / Access Forbidden → Part and select the emergency operation groups.
Click OK and the doors in the selected emergency operation groups will remain locked.

Note
For setting person's super user privilege, refer to Role and User Management .

22.5.3 Elevator Control

You can change the status of all floors in a site or floors in specific emergency operation groups to
temporary access, access with credential, free access, or access forbidden.

Note
Make sure you have grouped floors into an emergency operation group. See details in Add
Emergency Operation Group .

In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Real-Time
Monitoring .
Control all or part of floors in the current site.
Temporary Access
During the temporary access time, the persons can access this floor with no credentials
required. After the access time, the floor will recover to Access with Credential status.
Click Unlock / Temporary Access → All to set all the floors in the current site to Temporary
Access.
Click Unlock / Temporary Access → Part and select one or more emergency operation groups to
set all floors in the group(s) to Temporary Access.
For details about setting the temporary access duration, see Edit Elevator for Current Site .
Access with Credential

821
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Person who has the access permission can access this floor with credentials.
Click Lock / Access with Credential → All to set all the floors in the current site to Access with
Credential.
Click Lock / Access with Credential → Part and select one or more emergency operation groups
to set all the floors in the group(s) to Access with Credential.
Free Access
All persons can access this floor with no credentials required.
Click Remain Unlocked / Free Access → All to set all floors in the current site to Free Access.
Click Remain Unlocked / Free Access → Part and select one or more emergency operation
groups to set all floors in the group(s) to Free Access.
Access Forbidden
No person, except the super users, can access this floor even with authorized credentials. This
function is applicable for situations such as preventing a theft in the building from getting away.
Click Remain Locked / Access Forbidden → All to set all floors in the current site to Access
Forbidden.
Click Remain Locked / Access Forbidden → Part and select one or more emergency operation
groups to set all floors in the group(s) to Access Forbidden.

Note
For setting person's super user privilege, refer to Role and User Management .

22.6 Subscribe for Device and Access Events

You can subscribe for device events and access events, so that when these events occur, you can
see the real-time event records via the Web Client and Mobile Client.
Follow the steps to enable the subscription for device and access events.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Basic
Settings .
2. Click Device Event Subscription on the left.

822
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 22-15 Device and Access Event Subscription

3. Select an event category from Device Event, Normal Access Event, and Abnormal Access Event.
4. Switch on the event types to subscribe for these events.
5. Optional: Switch off the event types whose real-time event records you do not want to receive.

Note
If you switch off a event type, the Web Client and Mobile Client will no longer receive real-time
event records of the event. However, you can still search for the device/access records via the
Web Client. For details, see Search Access Records and Search Data Recorded on Device .
6. Click Save to save the settings.
What to do next
View the real-time event records of the device and access events that you subscribe for. For details,
see View Real-Time Access Event .

22.7 Set User to Receive Access Control Calls

You can specify users to receive calls from the access control devices on the Control Client, and
then the users can remotely perform the access control, such as remotely open door.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control → Basic Settings
→ Call Recipient Settings .
Click Add to select user(s) to receive access control calls on the Control Client.

823
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

22.8 Synchronize Access Records to System Regularly

Access records stored in devices can be synchronized to the system for central management. You
can specify a fixed time in order to automatically synchronize access records from devices to the
system at the specified time every day.
Click → All Modules → Access Control → Basic Settings .
Click General to enter the General page.
In the Synchronize Records (Scheduled) area, switch on Synchronize (Scheduled), set a fixed time,
and click Save to synchronize access records from the devices to the system regularly.

22.9 Search Access Records

You can search for persons' access records triggered on specified access points (including doors
and elevators) via the Client by setting search conditions. For example, if you select specific access
points and set the event type to access denied by card, you can get all access denied events
(accessing by swiping a card) triggered on the access points.
Before You Start
Make sure you have configured the access point event. For details, refer to Add Normal Event and
Alarm .
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control →
Search .
2. Select Identity Access Search on the left.
3. Optional: Import access records to the system.
- Import access records from the device(s).
a. Click Import Event → Import from Device to enter the Import from Device page.
b. Select the device(s) from the device list.
c. Optional: Switch on Specified Time Range and set the start time and end time to import
access records generated in the specified time period.

Note
- If the device has uploaded access record(s) to the system before, switching on Specified
Time Range is not required and access records during the past 7 days of the selected
device(s) will be imported by default if no time range is specified.
- If the device has never uploaded any access record to the system before, you must
switch on Specified Time Range for importing access records from the selected
device(s).
d. Click OK to start importing.
A window will pop up to display the importing progress and the failure details.

824
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Import access records from the file which is exported from the device.
a. Click Import Event → Import from File to enter the Import from File page.
b. Click to select the file to be imported.

Note
Only the encrypted file can be imported.
c. Enter the password in the Password field.
d. Click OK.
4. In the Time drop-down list, select the time during which the access records are generated.

Note
You can select Custom Time Interval to set a precise start time and end time.
5. Optional: In the Access Point area, click and select door(s) and elevator(s) from the resource
list.
6. Optional: In the Record Type area, click to select record type(s).
7. In the Access Result drop-down list, select an access result type to quickly filter access granted
records or access denied records.
8. Set the searching mode.
- a. Select Person as the searching mode.
b. Select Select Persons or Fuzzy Matching as the searching mode.
Select Persons
Select persons in the person list.
Fuzzy Matching
Enter a keyword to search for persons whose name contains the keyword.
c. Click Add to select the person(s), or enter the keywords of the person name for fuzzy
matching.
- a. Select Card No. as the searching mode.
b. Enter the card number.
9. Optional: Switch on Skin-Surface Temperature Status and select Normal or Abnormal.
10. Optional: Switch on Wearing Mask or Not and select Wearing Mask or No Mask.
11. Click Search.
Matched access records are listed on the right.
12. Optional: Perform the following operations after searching for access records.
Custom On the top right, click to select column items to be displayed. You can
Column Items click Reset to select again.
View Record Click the person name in the Full Name column to view the record
Details details, such as person information, and access information.
Filter Search Click next to the column name Person and select persons to filter the
Results by search results.
Person Type

825
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Forgive Anti- When a person attempts to use a card without following the anti-
Passback passback rule, the access will be denied. This is called "Anti-Passback
Violation Violation". When the anti-passback violation occurs, no access is
allowed unless the anti-passback violation event is forgiven.
You can click Forgive Anti-Passback on the top to forgive all the anti-
passback violation events in the search results.
Export Single Click in the Operation column to save a record as an Excel file in your
Record PC, including the event details, the person information, person profile,
recorded video file (if configured), etc.
Export All Click Export in the upper-right corner to save the searched access record
Searched details in your PC. You can select the file format as an Excel or a CSV file,
Records and select items to export. If you select Excel, you can check Profile
Picture to save the captured pictures and person profile photos.

Note
Up to 500 records can be exported each time.

Figure 22-16 Real-Time Events

22.10 Search Data Recorded on Device

Data recorded on devices are records (e.g., triggered events/alarms, card-swiping records, etc.)
stored in access control devices, elevator control devices, and video intercom devices. The records
can be events/alarms triggered by human behaviors detected by devices and those triggered by
devices (such as device faults). You can search for the records in different dimensions according to
your needs.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control →
Search .
2. Click Device Recorded Data Retrieval on the left.
3. In the Time drop-down list, select a time range for searching.

826
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can select Custom Time Interval to set a precise start time and end time.
4. Switch on the resource types where you want to search for records.
Access Point(s)
Access points include doors of access control devices and video intercom devices, and floors
of elevator control devices. The records can be access records, operation records, and alarms
triggered by human behaviors.
Device
Devices include access control devices, elevator control devices, and video intercom devices.
The data recorded in these devices covers all events triggered by devices (such as device
faults).
Alarm Input
The alarm inputs included in devices. The records are arming status changes.
5. Select the record source(s) and record type(s).
6. Click Search.

Figure 22-17 Device Recorded Data Retrieval

7. Optional: Perform further operations on the searched records.
Export Single Click in the Operation column to save the record to the local PC as a
Record CSV file.
Export All Searched Click Export to save all the searched records to the local PC as an Excel
Records or a CSV file.

827
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

22.11 Perform Entry & Exit Counting

By grouping the doors (adding entry & exit counting group), the system provides counting
functions based on the entry and exit records on these doors. With this function, you can check
who enters/exits this region and how many persons still stay in this region. The function is
applicable for certain emergency scene. For example, during a fire escape, all people are required
to exit the region.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added entry & exit counting groups to group the doors. See Add Entry and
Exit Counting Group .
Steps

Note
Currently, the platform only supports searching persons with access records in the last 24 hours.
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Access Control →
Search .
2. Select Entry & Exit Counting on the left.
3. In the Source list, select an entry & exit counting group.
4. In the Entry & Exit Counting Type drop-down list, select the type of persons you want to search.
All
All the entering and exiting access records in the last 24 hours will be listed.
People Stayed
Persons who are still staying in the region will be listed. The system filters the persons whose
entering record is found but exiting record is not found.
People Exited
Persons who entered and exited the region afterward will be listed.
5. Click Search.
All matched access records will be listed, showing information such as person details, location of
last access, etc.
6. Optional: Perform further operations after searching.
View Event Click the person name in the Name column to view the record details,
Details including the recorded video of the access point's related camera (if
configured), person information, and access information.
Export Single Click in the Operation column to download the record, including the
Record person information, person profile, phone number, location of last access,
etc.

828
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Export All Click Export in the upper-right corner to export the searched access control
Searched events details (including the person information, person profile, phone
Records number, location of last access, etc.).

Note
Up to 100,000 records can be exported each time.

829
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 23 Visitor Management

The system provides an entire process for visitor management from reservation to check-out. You
can group visitors to different visitor groups for convenient management, determine the areas
where the visitors can access, and assign visitors with access credentials like visitor passes.
On the Web Client, you can add visitor information to the system and assign access levels to the
visitors to define which doors and which floor the visitors can access with credentials.
The Visitor Information Overview page shows the wizard for the Visitor module, the current day
visit statistics, and current day visit trend.

Figure 23-1 Visitor Information Overview

Current Day Visits Statistics

You can search for a specific visitor by the keywords of their name and view the following four
types of visitor information:
● Today's Visit Records: All the visitors on the current day.

● Checked In: The visitors who have checked in on the current day and the basic information

about each of these visitors, such as their phone numbers and hosts.
● Checked Out: The visitors who have checked out on the current day and the basic information

about each of these visitors, such as their phone numbers and check-out time.
● Not Checked Out: The visitors who have checked in and not checked out until the current day

and the basic information about each of these visitors, such as their phone number and hosts.

Visit Trend Today

You can view the variation trend of the number of visitors on the current day through a line chart.

830
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

On the line chart, you can perform the following operations:

● Hover the cursor onto a specific point on the chart to view the number of visitors at the

corresponding time.
● Click on the right side to export the chart to the local PC as a file in the format of PDF, PNG, or
JPG.

Figure 23-2 Visit Trend Today

23.1 Flow Chart of Visitor Management

The flow chart below shows the process of visitor settings management.

831
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 23-3 Flow Chart of Visitor Management

Table 23-1 Flow Chart Description

Procedure Description
Add Related Devices Add devices used for visitor reservation, check-in, check-out,
authentication, etc. See Manage Visitor Terminals , Manage Access
Control Device , and Manage Elevator Control Device for details.
Configuration Before Before any operations in the visitor system, you need to set the
Visitor Management parameters according to actual situation such as setting basic
parameters to define the scenario for the visiting process, managing
visitor types, adding access levels for visitors, etc. See Configurations
Before Visitor Management for details.
Manage Entry & Exit Rule Register license plate number of the visitors' vehicles to allow the
for Visitors' Vehicles system to control the barrier to open when capture unit of parking
lot detect license plate number. See Manage Entry & Exit Rule for
Visitors' Vehicles .
Reserve the Visitors Before visiting, visitors can make a reservation. The Administrator
can make a reservation for the visitors by entering the visitor and
host information on the platform. Visitors can also reserve by

832
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Procedure Description
themselves. After self-​reservation, the Administrator should review
the visitor information to approve or disapprove the reservation. See
Visitor Reservation for details.
Visitor Check-In The platform supports checking in visitors both with or without a
reservation. See Check In a Visitor Without Reservation and Check In
a Reserved Visitor for details.
Visitor Check-Out You should check out for the visitor before him/her leaves, or let
visitors check out at self-service check-out point. After checking out,
the visitor's access information will expire. See Visitor Check-Out for
details.
View and Delete Visitors View all checked-in visitors (including those who have checked out) in
the visitor list and perform other operations such as deleting visitors.
See View Visitor Information for details.
Check Visitor Records Filter and check visitor records. See Check Visitor Access Records .

23.2 Configurations Before Visitor Management

Before any operations in the visitor system, you need to set the parameters according to actual
situation such as setting basic parameters to define the scenario for the visiting process, managing
visitor types, adding access levels for visitors, etc.

23.2.1 Add a Visitor Group

You can add visitor groups to categorize different visitors for convenient management. For
example, you can add a business group for visitors coming for business communication and add a
tour group for touring visitors. Moreover, you can control other users' access to any visitor group to
ensure the security of visitor data if you have corresponding configuration permissions.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Visitor → Visitor Check-In →
Visitor Information .
2. Click to open the Group Name window.
3. Create a visitor group name, and then click Add to add a visitor group.

Note
System administrators or other roles who have the permission to manage roles can define which
HikCentral Professional users have permission to access the visitor group. For details about
permission settings, see Add Role .

833
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the visitor group.
Edit Visitor Group Click to change the visitor group's information.
Delete Visitor Group Select a visitor group and click to delete it.

23.2.2 Set Self-Service Check-Out Point

After setting self-service check-out points, visitors can check out by credentials at the self-service
check-out points without the help of receptionist. If you have issued a card to a visitor when
checking in, after checking out, the visitor should put the card in the place for card collection. The
access level of visitor cards, fingerprints, face pictures, and QR codes will expire automatically.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added at least one device that supports this function.
Steps

Note
This function needs to be supported by devices.
1. On the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Basic Settings → Self-
Service Check-Out Point .
2. Click Add to show the resource list.

Note
You can enter a keyword of a door name in the searching bar to search for wanted doors.
3. Select one or more door and click Add.

Note
After setting self-service check-out points, the visitors can check out at the points according to
the assigned access level by swiping card or fingerprint/face authentication.

834
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 23-4 Set Self-Service Check-Out Point Page

4. Optional: Select a self-service check-out point and click to cancel setting the door as a self-
service check-out point.

23.2.3 Add Access Level for Visitors

An access level contains access points that are accessible during certain period. If you select an
access level for a visitor for registration and apply the settings to devices, the visitor can access the
access point(s) during authorized period with credentials.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added at least one access level in the Access Control module. See details in
Add Access Level .
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Basic Settings → Access
Level .
2. Click Add.
3. Select existing access levels.
4. Click Add.
The added access levels will be displayed in the access level list. You can view its accessible
access points and periods.
5. Optional: Perform the following operations after adding access level.
View Access Click in the Access Schedule Template column to view when the access
Schedule point is accessible for the visitor. See Set Access Schedule Template for
Template details about setting access schedule template.
Details
View Access Click in the Access Point column to view the name of related access
Point Details points.

835
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Set Default Select an added access level and switch on the button in the Default
Access Level Access Level column.
The default access level will be automatically selected when a visitor
makes reservation for themselves, under the precondition that you have
enabled the Self-Service Reservation feature (see Set Self-Service
Reservation Parameters ).
The default access level will also be automatically selected when reserving
for visitors again and checking in visitors again on the Visitor Information
page (see View Visitor Information ).
Delete Access Select access levels and click Delete to delete the selected access level.
Levels for Or click → Delete All to delete all the access levels.
Visitors
What to do next
Apply visitor's access levels to the visitor terminals connected to the platform. See Manually Apply
Visitors' Access Level Settings to Visitor Terminals for details.

23.2.4 Manually Apply Visitors' Access Level Settings to Visitor Terminals

If you have added visitors to an access group, or deleted/edited visitors of an access group, or
changed access levels of an access group, you have changed the access group's settings. In these
cases, you should apply the changes to the connected visitor terminals to make the changes take
effect on the latter.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added access levels for visitors. See Add Access Level for Visitors for details.

● Make sure you have added the visitor terminal to the platform. See Manage Visitor Terminals

for details.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Visitor → Basic Settings → Access
Level .
2. Select the access levels that need to be applied to visitor terminals.

Note
You can select up to 10 access levels that need to be applied.
3. Click Apply Access Level to Visitor Terminal to apply the selected access levels to the visitor
terminals.
If the applying process failed, will be displayed next to Apply Access Level to Visitor Terminal.
In this case, you can hover the cursor onto it and then click View or Apply Again to view the
failure details or apply the access levels again respectively.

836
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

23.2.5 Set Self-Service Reservation Parameters

Self-service reservations refer to visit reservations made by visitors themselves. You can enable the
Self-Service Reservation feature to get a QR code, which you can send to visitors to allow them to
make visit reservations by scanning the QR code. In addition, you can set related parameters to
ensure that self-service reservations meet the visitor management standards of your organization/
company.
Steps

Note
Self-reserved visitors are only allowed to access the access points contained in the default access
level for visitors. For details about setting the default access level, see Add Access Level for
Visitors .
To configure a different access level for a visitor, you need to make a reservation for her/him. For
details, see Reserve a Visitor .
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Basic Settings → Self-
Service Reservation .
2. Enable Self-Service Reservation.
The platform will generate a QR code. After downloading the QR code, you can print it or send it
to the hosts or visitors who are going to reserve. The host can scan the QR code to reserve for
the visitor, while the visitor can also scan the QR code to reserve if the visitor knows the visitor's
person ID.

Note
QR codes generated by different users are different, and a user can only review the visitors
reserved via the QR code the user generated, which allow different users to manage their own
visitors independently.
3. Optional: Configure the following parameters.
Face Quality Verification
After the visitor uploads a profile picture by a cellphone, the selected device will
automatically start checking the profile picture's quality. If the profile picture is not qualified,
the visitor will be notified. Only when the uploaded profile picture is qualified can the visitor
reserve successfully. Otherwise, the visitor information cannot be uploaded to the platform.

Note
To use this function properly, make sure you have added an access control device or video
intercom device to the platform beforehand.
Visitor Group
Select a visitor group. After reserving successfully, the visitors will be added to the group. If
you do not select, the visitor will be added to the default visitor group by default.

837
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Self-Service Reservation Approval

If you enable this, after the visitor self-service reservation, you need to review the visitor
information on the Visitor to be Approved page. After review, the visitor will be added to the
selected visitor group. See Review Visitor Reservations for details about how to review.

Figure 23-5 Self-Service Reservation

4. Click Save.

838
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

23.2.6 Add Visitor Email Template

You can set email templates (including specifying email type, email subject, and content) for
sending emails automatically so that the platform can send emails to the specified recipient
according to the predefined email template.
Before You Start
Before adding the email template, you should set the sender's email account first. See Configure
Email Account for details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Basic Settings →
Email Template .
2. Click Add.
3. Enter the required parameters.
Email Type
Define when the platform automatically sends an email containing the information you
predefined to the specified recipient.
Send Email When Reservation Approved
The platform automatically sends an email to the specified recipient when a visit
reservation is approved.
Send Email When Checked-In
The platform automatically sends an email to the specified recipient when a visitor checks
in.
Send Email When Reservation Rejected
The platform automatically sends an email to the specified recipient when a visit
reservation is rejected.
Recipient
Set the type of the email recipient (visitor or host).
Assume that you have set Email Type to Send Email when Reservation Approved and
Recipient to Visitor, a visitor will receive an email when their visit reservation is approved, as
long as their email address is provided in the reservation.
Name
Create a name for the template.
Subject
Enter the email subject as desired. You can also click the button in the lower part of the
window to add the related information to the subject.
Email Content

839
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Define the report content to be sent. You can also click the buttons below the Content
parameter to add the related information to the content.

Note
● If you add the arrival time to the email subject or email content, and the email application

(such as Outlook) and the platform are in different time zones, the displayed time period
may have some deviations.
● You can add the reservation code to the email subject or content, so the visitor can get the

reservation code once he/she made the reservation.

4. Finish adding the email template.
- Click Add to add the template and go back to the email template list page.
- Click Add and Continue to add the template and continue to add other templates.
The email template will be displayed in the email template list.
5. Optional: Perform the following operation(s) after adding the email template:
Edit Template Click in the Operation column to edit template details.
Delete All Templates Click Delete All to delete all the added templates.

Note
On the email template list page, there are six default templates. You can view or edit default
templates but not delete them.

23.2.7 Add a Visitor Pass Template

The platform offers a default visitor pass template that defines a default style for the visitor passes.
If the default style does not meet your needs, you can add a visitor pass template to customize the
style.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Basic Settings → Visitor
Pass Template .
2. Click to enter the Create Visitor Pass page.

840
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 23-6 Create Visitor Pass Page

3. Create a name for the visitor pass.
4. Perform one or more of the following operations to add elements to the visitor pass template.
Insert Click Insert Background Picture to select a picture from the local PC and
Background set it as the background of the visitor pass template.
Picture
Set Content Check the check-box(es) to add the content elements. Or click Custom
Information and then select element(s) in the pop-up window to add
them.

Note
Make sure you have set custom visitor attributes, otherwise Custom
Information will be unavailable. For details about setting custom visitor
attributes, see Set Basic Parameters .

Insert Picture Click Insert Picture to select a picture from the local PC and add it to the
visitor pass template.
Insert Text Click Insert Text to add a text box onto the visitor pass template.
You can set the font, font size, and text alignment for the entered text.
Add Cutting Line Click Add Cutting Line to add a cutting line onto the visitor pass template.

841
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Adjust positions of added elements.

Manually Adjust Position Drag an element to adjust its position.
Align Elements Drag to select elements and then click , , or .
Adjust Position via Right- Right click an element and then click Stick to Top, Stick at
Click Menu Bottom, Move Up, Move Down.
6. Optional: Right click an element and then click Delete in the right-click menu.
7. Optional: Click View to preview the visitor pass template.
8. Click Add to add the visitor pass template.
The added template will be displayed in the template list on the left.
9. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Edit a Template Select a template from the template list to edit it.
Delete a Template Select a template from the template list and then click .

23.2.8 Set Basic Parameters

To manage visitors in actual scenarios, you can set basic parameters such as Default Check-Out
Time, Take Photo of Visitor's Belongings, Auto Checkout for Visitor After Effective Period, Visit
Purpose, Email Template, and Digits of Reservation Code.
Steps

Note
If you do not configure basic parameters, the platform will manage visitors via the default value.
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Basic Settings → Basic
Parameters .
2. Configure the following parameters according to your need.
Default Check-Out Time
The default check-out time will be displayed on the Reserve page. After setting the time, you
need not enter the visitor check-out time when reserving for a visitor. By default, the check-
out time is 23:59:59. You can specify a time according to your need.
Auto Checkout for Visitor After Effective Period
With the Auto Checkout for Visitor After Effective Period enabled, if the visitor does not
check out before the end time of the visit, the platform will automatically check out for the
visitor. You can set a frequency for detecting whether the visitors have checked out. For
example, you set 30 min as the detection frequency, the platform will check the visiting status
of all visitors every 30 minutes on the platform. If the platform discovers visitors who have
not checked out before the end time of visit, it will check out the visitors. Note that the Alarm
Detection will be disabled if you enable Auto Checkout for Visitor After Effective Period.

842
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Alarm Detection
With Alarm Detection enabled, if a visitor does not check out before the end time of visit,
an alarm will be triggered for notification. You can set a frequency for detecting whether
the visitors have checked out. For example, you set 3 min as the alarm detection
frequency, the platform will check the visiting status of all visitors on the platform. If the
platform discovers visitors who have not checked out before the end time of visit, an alarm
will be triggered. Note that the Auto Checkout for Visitor After Effective Period will be
disabled if you enable Alarm Detection. By default, the Detection Frequency should range
from 3 to 10 minutes.
Take Photo of Visitor's Belongings
If you enable this function, you can take a picture of the visitor's belongings and upload it to
the platform when checking in/out for the visitor.
Digits of Reservation Code
Define the number of digits (4 digits or 6 digits) contained in each reservation code. The
visitor reservation code acts as a verification code for visitor check-in. After reserving, the
visitor will receive the reservation code by email and text message. When checking in, the
visitor should provide the reservation code.
Print Visitor Pass When Check-In
When enabled, the printer connected to your PC will automatically print a visitor pass once a
visitor is checked in.
Visitor Pass Template
Select a template as the one that will be automatically printed.
You can click View Template to preview the selected template.

Note
Make sure you have set templates as needed. For details about setting visitor pass
templates, see Add a Visitor Pass Template .
Authorization Code for Self-Authentication on Visitor Terminal
Set the authorization code for allowing visitors to perform self-authentication on visitor
terminals. The authorization code will be the initial verification code for all visitor terminals
connected to the platform. The receptionist (or other similar staff) needs to enter the
authorization code to allow visitors to skip authentication.

Note
This parameter is available only when the visitor terminal is added to the platform. See
Manage Visitor Terminals for details.
Check-In Not Required if Reservation Confirmed

843
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Applicable to reception areas where neither receptionist nor visitor terminal is deployed. If
the option is selected, visitors will be automatically checked in when reservations are made
for them.
Clear Visitor Automatically
When enabled, the platform will clear all visitors who did not check in during the time period
which you can specify by setting Not Check In Time.
Take ID Photo as Visitor Profile Picture
If enabled, the ID photo can be read via a connected passport reader and set as the visitor
profile photo when reserving a visitor or checking in a visitor without reservation. See
Reserve a Visitor or Check In a Visitor Without Reservation for details.
Visit Purpose
You define visit purposes as options on the Reserve page. Click Add to add a new visit
purpose. You can also edit the names of visit purpose, delete a visit purpose, or search a visit
purpose.
Email Template
You can select an email template to let the platform automatically send an email based on
selected email template to the specified recipient (the host or visitor) in the following cases.

Note
● If the recipient is the host, make sure that the host's email address is provided when add
the host the platform. For details, see Add a Person Manually .
If the recipient is the visitor, make sure that the visitor's email address is provided when
make a reservation for or check in the visitor.
● You can customize email templates according to your need. See Add Visitor Email
Template for details.

Send Email when Reservation Approved

Send an email based on the selected email template to the recipient (the host or visitor)
specified in the template when a visit reservation is approved.
Send Email when Checked In
Send an email based on the selected email template to the recipient (the host or visitor)
specified in the template when a visitor checks in.
Send Email when Reservation Rejected
Send an email based on the selected email template to the recipient (the host or visitor)
specified in the template when a visit reservation is rejected.
Custom Configuration
Customize visitor attributes and the fields that will be displayed on the visitor reservation
page and visitor check-in page.
Custom Visitor Attribute

844
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Click Add to add custom visitor attributes. The added ones will be displayed as fields on
the visitor reservation page and Unreserved Visitor Check-In page.
You can set a custom visitor attribute as a General Text, Number, Date, or Single Selection
field. For example, if you name a custom visitor attribute as Covid-19 Vaccination Date
and set it as a Date field, it will be displayed on the visitor reservation page as shown in
the figure below.

Figure 23-7 Example

Custom Field for Reservation & Check-In
Select additional fields that can be displayed on the visitor reservation page and visitor
check-in page from the Available area.
For example, you can check All in the Available area and then click to set all the
available fields as the additional fields that will be displayed on the visitor reservation page
and visitor check-in page. Moreover, you can turn on the switches in the Set as Required
column to set corresponding fields as required fields.

845
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 23-8 Set All Available Fields as Additional Fields

3. Click Save.

Note
After you click Save, the platform will apply the authorization code to all the connected visitor
terminals. If the authorization code failed to be applied to specific visitor terminals, will
appear next to Authorization Code for Self-Authentication on Visitor Terminal. In this case, you
can hover the cursor onto the icon and then click View or Apply Again to view the failure details
or apply the authorization code to visitor terminals again.

23.3 Watch List Management

You can use the watch list to monitor special visitors for security or other purposes.

What is the Watch List

The watch list contains entities (individual visitors, companies, or countries/regions) that need to
be monitored in the visitor reservation or check-in process.
Different from the visitor blocklist, which only contains visitors whose visits are denied in any case,
the watch list can contain both the unwanted entities and ones that deserve preferential
treatment.
How the Watch List Works
The platform can detect whether a visitor registered in the reservation or check-in process has
attributes (e.g., name, ID, company, and country/region) that match entities in the watch list.
When entities are matched, the Entities in Watch List Matched window will pop up.
In this case, if the visitor is unwanted, you can reject the reservation or check-in directly on the
pop-up window; if the visitor deserves preferential treatment, you can approve the reservation
and notify related personnel, so that they can prepare corresponding work beforehand for the
visitor.

846
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 23-9 The Entities in Watch List Window

23.3.1 Configure Category and Match Method

You can define the categories of entities to be monitored and the methods to determine that
attributes (e.g., name and ID) of a visitor match the entities in the watch list.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Watch List to enter the
Watch List page.
2. Click Category and Match Method to open the Category and Match Method pane.
3. Add entity categories.
1) Click Add on the Category and Match Method pane to open the category-adding window.
2) Create a category name.
3) Optional: Enter a remark for the category.
4) Click Add.
5) Optional: Perform one or more of the following operations.

847
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● Edit Category: Click a category name to edit the category information.

● Delete Types: Select categories and then click Delete to delete the selected ones. Or hover
the cursor onto and then click Delete All to delete all categories.
4. Set the method(s) for matching entities in the watch list during reservations or checked-in.
Match via Name
If the name of a visitor matches an entity in the watch list, the Entities in Watch List Matched
window will pop up when the visitor is reserved or checked in.
Match via ID
If the ID number of a visitor matches an entity in the watch list, the Entities in Watch List
Matched window will pop up when the visitor is reserved or checked in.
Match via Company
If a visitor's company matches an entity in the watch list, the Entities in Watch List Matched
window will pop up when the visitor is reserved or checked in.
Match via Country/Region
If a visitor's country/region matches an entity in the watch list, the Entities in Watch List
Matched window will pop up when the visitor is reserved or checked in.
5. Configure name matching settings.

Note
To make the name matching settings take effect, you need to check Match via Name first.
Match First Name Only
If the first name of a visitor matches that of an entity in the watch list, the platform will
determine that the visitor name matches the entity. For example, assume that the name of a
visitor is Andrew Lee and an entity in the watch list is Andrew Peterson, the platform will
determine that the former matches the latter.
Match Full Name
Only when the full name of a visitor matches that of an entity in the watch list, will the
platform determine that the visitor name matches the entity.
6. Click OK.

23.3.2 Add an Entity to the Watch List

You can add a to-be-monitored entity to the watch list and determine how long the entity will be
monitored.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Visitor → Watch List .
2. Click Add to open the Add Entity page.
3. Set the entity type (Person, Company, or Country/Region).
4. Set other information for the entity.

848
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- For Person, set other information including first name, last name, category, effective period,
ID type, ID number, and ID picture.
- For Company, set other information including company name, category, and effective period.
- For Country/Region, set other information including country/region, category, and effective
period.
Category
Select a category that the entity belongs to. Or click Create New Category to create a new
one.
You can manage categories in Category and Match Method. For details, see Configure
Category and Match Method .
Effective Period
If enabled, you can determine the period when the platform monitors the entity. If disabled,
the platform monitors the entity indefinitely.
5. Click Add or Add and Continue.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Disable Entities Select entities and then click Disable to disable them. Once disabled, they
will not be monitored.
Enable Entities Select disabled entities and then click Enable to enable them. Once
enabled, they return to be monitored.
Edit an Entity Click the name of an entity to edit it.
Delete Entities Select entities and then click Delete to delete them.
Or hover the cursor over and then click Delete All to delete all entities.

23.3.3 Import Existing Visitors to the Watch List

You can import specific existing visitors to the watch list. Existing visitors refer to the visitors once
reserved or checked in.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Watch List .
2. Click Import Existing Visitor to show the Import Existing Visitor pane.
3. Click to select the existing visitors from a specific visitor group and then click Add.
The selected visitors will be displayed on the pane.

849
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 23-10 The Import Existing Visitor Pane

4. Set other information, including category, effective period, and description.
Category
Select a category to which the entity belongs.
Make sure you have added categories in Category and Match Method. For details, see
Configure Category and Match Method .
Effective Period
Determine the period that the selected visitors will be monitored if their reservations are
made or they check in again.
5. Click Import.
The visitors will be displayed in the watch list.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Disable Monitoring of Select visitors and then click Disable to disable them. Once
Existing Visitors disabled, they will not be monitored.
Enable Monitoring of Select disabled visitors and then click Enable to enable them.
Existing Visitors Once enabled, they return to be monitored.
Edit an Existing Visitors in Click the name of an entity to edit it.
the Watch List

850
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Delete Existing Visitors from Select visitors and then click Delete to delete them.
Watch List Or hover the cursor over and then click Delete All to delete
all visitors.

23.4 Visitor Reservation

Before visiting, visitors can make a reservation. The Administrator can make a reservation for the
visitors by entering the visitor and host information on the platform. Visitors can also reserve by
themselves. After self-reservation, the Administrator should review the visitor information to
approve or disapprove the reservation.

23.4.1 Reserve a Visitor

You can make a reservation for one visitor by entering the visitor and host information on the
platform.
Before You Start
Before any operations in the visitor system, you can set the parameters according to actual
situations such as setting basic parameters to define the scenario for the visiting process, managing
visitor types, adding access levels for visitors, etc. See Configurations Before Visitor Management
for details.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Visitor Reservation .
2. Click Reserve on the top left to enter the Reserve page.
3. Set basic information for the visitor, such as name, host, visit purpose, visit time, visitor types.
You can also upload a profile picture for the visitor.

Note
● You can connect a KR420 passport reader to read and the information on the visitor's

passport/ID card (including the name, ID No., and ID photo) and set the information for the
visitor automatically. You have to enable Take ID Photo as Visitor Profile Picture on the Basic
Parameters page in order to read the ID photo and set it as the visitor profile picture. See Set
Basic Parameters ).
● You can customize parameters such as visit purpose, visitor type, etc. See Set Basic

Parameters .
4. Set ID information for the visitor, including ID type, ID No., and ID picture.
5. Set other information.
1) Set license plate number, email, etc.
License Plate Number
The license plate number will be shared with the parking lot system so that the visitor's
vehicle will be allowed to enter or exit the parking lot.

851
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Email
Enter the visitor the email address for receiving an email containing the reservation code
or notification that the visit reservation is approved/rejected.
2) Optional: Click Expand to show the additional information fields and then enter additional
information of the visitor.

Note
Make sure you have set custom visitor attributes, otherwise the additional information fields
will be unavailable. For details about how to set custom visitor attributes, see Set Basic
Parameters .
6. Set the access information.
Valid Times for Visit
The maximum times a visitor can access certain doors or floors by QR code authentication.
For example, if you set it to 4, the visitor can access the authorized doors and floors up to 4
times by QR code authentication.
Access Level
Assign access levels to the visitor so that the visitor can access the access points within the
access schedule of the access levels.

Note
To add a new access level for the visitor, see instructions in Add Access Level for Visitors .
Extended Access
If you check Extended Access, the access points that are configured with extended open
duration will stay unlocked or open longer for the visitor.

852
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 23-11 Set Access Information

7. Click Reserve to finish the reservation, or click Reserve and Continue to finish the reservation
and continue to reserve for other visitors.

Note
Under the precondition that you have enabled Check-In not Required If Reservation Confirmed,
when a visitor is reserved, the platform will perform the following operations automatically:
● Checks in the visitor.

● Applies the access level to the visitor.

● Sends an email with a QR code to notify the specified recipient that the visitor is checked in (if

the email information is provided).

8. Optional: Perform the following operations on the reservation list page if needed.
Delete Select one or more visitors and then click Delete to delete the
Reservation(s) reservations of the selected visitor(s).
Or hover the cursor onto and then click Delete All to delete all
reservations.

853
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Edit a Reservation Click the name of a visitor to edit the reservation for the visitor.
Filter Set conditions, such as phone and estimated entry time, and then click
Reservations Filter to filter reservations.
For the Status condition, you can click to select one or more
reservation status (reserved, expired, and checked in) to filter
reservations.
You can also click Select Additional Information to filter reservations.

Note
If a reservation has not expired, the reservation will expire after it is deleted.

23.4.2 Batch Import the Visitor Reservation Information

You can add the information of multiple visitors to the platform by importing an excel file with
visitor information. Also, by entering the names of visitor groups of multiple persons in the excel
file, you can add them to different groups in a batch.
Before You Start
Before any operations in the visitor system, you can set the parameters according to actual
situation such as setting basic parameters to define the scenario for the visiting process, managing
visitor types, assigning access levels for visitors, etc. See Configurations Before Visitor
Management for details.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Visitor Reservation .
2. Click Import to open the Import Visitor Reservation Information panel.
3. Click Download Template to save the template file in your PC.
4. In the downloaded template, enter the visitor information following the rules in the template.
5. Click and select the excel file with visitor information from local PC.
6. Optional: Check Replace Repeated Visitor.

Note
If you check Replace Repeated Visitor, the existing visitor information (with repeated certificate
type and number) in the list will be replaced. Otherwise, importing visitors with repeated
certificate number will fail.

854
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 23-12 Import Visitor Reservation Information

7. Click Import.
8. Optional: Check one or more visitor and click Delete to delete the reservations for the selected
visitor(s); or click → Delete All to delete all the reservation information.

Note
If a reservation has not expired, the reservation will expire after deleting.

23.4.3 Review Visitor Reservations

If you have enabled Self-Service Reservation Approval function when you set visitor self-service
reservation parameters, after the visitors reserve, their information will be displayed on the Visitor
to be Approved page. You should review their information to approve or reject the reservations.
After approving, they will be added to the target visitor group.
Before You Start
Make sure you have enabled self-service reservation and configured related parameters. See Set
Self-Service Reservation Parameters for details.

855
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
You need to have the permission ( User Permission → Configuration Permission → Visitor →
Reservation Approval ) shown in the picture below before you can review reservations.

Figure 23-13 The Permission for Reviewing Reservations

1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Visitor Reservation .

Note
● If there are visitors to be approved, the number of the to-be-approved visitors will be
displayed.

Figure 23-14 The Number of The To-Be-Approved Visitors

● You can only review the visitors reserved via the QR code you generated for self-service
reservation, which allow different users to manage their own visitors independently. See Set
Self-Service Reservation Parameters for details.
2. Click To Be Reviewed on the top to enter the following page.
On the page, you can view the information of the to-be-approved visitors, such as their
companies and whether their attributes match entities in the watch list.

856
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 23-15 Visitor To Be Approved

3. Optional: Click to filter reserved visitors by name, ID, status, etc. to quickly find your wanted
visitors.
4. Review the displayed visitor information and verify them.
Approve Self- If the self-service reserved visitor information conforms to the rules
Service Reserved and regulations of your company or organization, approve the
Visitor Information information to add the visitors into the platform. Select one or more
reserved visitors, and click Approve to approve the visitor(s).
Reject Self-Service If the self-service reserved visitor information does not conform to the
Reserved Visitor rules and regulations of your company or organization, reject the
Information visitor and tell the visitor to reserve again with right information.
Select one or more reserved visitors, and click Reject to reject the
visitor(s).
Delete Self-Service Select one or more reserved visitors, and click Delete to delete the
Reserved Visitor visitor(s) from the list. You can also hover the cursor on Delete and
Information click Delete All to delete all visitors from the list.

Note
Approved visitors will be added to the target visitor group; rejected ones will not be added to
the target visitor group, but they will stay in the Visitors to be Reviewed list.

857
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

23.5 Visitor Check-In

The platform supports checking in visitors both with or without a reservation.
See Check In a Visitor Without Reservation for details about checking in visitors without a
reservation.
See Check In a Reserved Visitor for details about checking in visitors with a reservation.

23.5.1 Check In a Visitor Without Reservation

Prior to a visitor's arrival or when the visitor arrives, you need to add the visitor's information to
the platform. Once added and checked in, the visitor can authenticate by biometrics (including
fingerprint and face picture) or QR code, and be able to access the predefined doors and floors.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Visitor Check-In .
2. Click Unreserved Visitor Check-In.
3. Edit basic visitor information, including name, profile picture, host, visit purpose, check-out time,
and visitor type.

Note
● For visitors who have visited before, you can click Select next to First Name to reuse the

information.
● You can click Select next to host to select an existing person as the host.

● You can connect a KR420 passport reader to read the information on the visitor's passport/ID

card (including the name, ID No., and ID photo) and set the information for the visitor
automatically. You have to enable Take ID Photo as Visitor Profile Picture on the Basic
Parameters page in order to read the ID photo and set it as the visitor profile picture. See Set
Basic Parameters ).
● You can set the visitor profile picture in four ways: collecting a face picture from devices,

taking a picture by the camera of your computer, uploading a picture saved in your computer,
or reading from the passport / ID card via passport reader (as mentioned in the previous
item).
● Hover the cursor on the uploaded profile picture and click × to delete it.

4. Optional: Click Credential Management to set the credentials for the visitor, including card and
fingerprint.
Card
Issue a card to the visitor to assign the card number to the visitor. You can enter the card
number manually, or swipe a card on the card enrollment station, enrollment station, or card
reader to get the card number, and then issue it to the visitor.

858
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Only one card can be issued to a visitor.
a. Click in the Card field.
b. Place the card that you want to issue to this visitor on the USB fingerprint recorder,
fingerprint and card reader, or enrollment station, and the card number will be read
automatically. Or you can enter the card number manually.

Note
You can click Card Issuing Settings to set the issuing parameters.

Figure 23-16 Read Card

Fingerprint
The platform provides three ways to collect fingerprints: via a USB fingerprint recorder, via an
enrollment station, or via a fingerprint and card reader.
Click Configure to set the collection mode as follows.
USB Fingerprint Recorder
Collect fingerprint via a USB fingerprint recorder connected to the computer running the
Web Client, which is plug-and-play and does not require any settings. This mode is suitable
for face-to-face scenarios where the person and the system administrator are in the same
location.
After connecting the fingerprint recorder to your computer, click , place and lift your
fingerprint on the recorder following the prompts and it will collect your fingerprint
automatically.
Fingerprint and Card Reader
Collect fingerprints via the fingerprint scanner of an access control device or a video
intercom device which is managed in the system. This mode is suitable for non-face-to-
face scenarios where the person and the system administrator are in different locations.
Select an access control device or a video intercom device from the managed device list.
Click , place and lift your fingerprint on the selected fingerprint and card reader
following the prompts and it will collect your fingerprint automatically.
Enrollment Station

859
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

You need to specify the device IP address, port number, user name, and password to
access the enrollment station. Then click +, place and lift your fingerprint on the device
and it will enroll your fingerprint automatically.

Figure 23-17 Fingerprint Recorded

Note
● No more than one fingerprint can be collected for 1 visitor.

● You can configure either cards or fingerprints.

5. Optional: Edit the ID information, including selecting certificate type, entering certificate No.,
and taking/uploading a certificate photo.
6. Optional: Take belongings photo.

Note
Make sure you have enabled this function. See Set Basic Parameters for details.
7. Set other information.
1) Set other information, such as license plate number and skin-surface temperature.
License Plate Number
The license plate number will be shared with the parking lot system so that the visitor's
vehicle will be allowed to enter or exit from the parking lot.
Email
Enter the visitor's email address for receiving an email containing the QR code or
notification that the visitor has checked in.
2) Click Expand to show the additional information fields and then enter additional information
of the visitor.

860
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Make sure you have set custom visitor attributes, otherwise the additional information fields
will be unavailable. For details about how to set custom visitor attributes, see Set Basic
Parameters .

Figure 23-18 Set Other Information

8. Set the access information.
Valid Times for Visit
The maximum times a visitor can access certain doors or floors by QR code authentication.
For example, if you set it to 4, the visitor can access the authorized doors and floors up to 4
times by QR code authentication.
Access Level
Assign access levels to the visitor so that the visitor can access the access points within the
access schedule of the access levels.

Note
To add a new access level for the visitor, see instructions in Add Access Level for Visitors .
Extended Access
If you check Extended Access, the access points that are configured with extended open
duration will stay unlocked or open longer for the visitor.
9. Complete checking in the visitor.
- Click Check In.

861
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

If the operation succeeds, the Preview window will pop up showing the preview of the visitor
pass for the visitor. You can click Print on the window to print the visitor pass.
- Click Check In and Continue to check in the visitor and continue to check in another.
10. Go back to the Visitor Check-In page to check whether the visitor information fails to be
applied to the visitor terminal(s). If fails, check failure details, troubleshoot, and apply again.

Note
If there is visitor information fails to be applied to visitor terminal(s), a notification will show at
the top of the Visitor Check-In page (see the area marked in red in Figure 23-19 ). In this case,
you can click the notification to open the Figure 23-20 to view the failure details and
troubleshoot according to the failure reason shown on the window, and then apply the visitor
information to visitor terminal(s) again.

Figure 23-19 Notification on Applying Failures

Figure 23-20 Persons Applying Failed Window

11. Optional: Perform the following operations on the Visitor Check-In page if needed.
Filter Visitors Click to filter visitors by conditions including ID No., name, phone,
and company.

862
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

For the Status condition, you can click to select one or more
reservation status (reserved, expired, and checked in) to filter visitors.
You can also click Select Additional Information to filter visitors.
Export Visitors Select visitors and click Export to export checked-in visitors to the
computer as a file.

Note
You will be required to set a password for the exported file for security.
We highly recommend you change the password of your own choosing
(using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three kinds of
following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers,
and special characters) in order to increase the security of your
product.

Edit Visitor Click on a visitor's name to edit the information.

Information
Note
If the visitor is checked out, you cannot edit the information.

Download a Click in the Visitor Pass column to download the QR code for the
Visitor QR Code visitor. You can print it or send it to the visitor for identity
authentication at access points.
Print a Visitor Click to print the visitor pass for the visitor.
Pass
What to do next
You can view the added visitors in the Visitor List. For details, see View Visitor Information .

23.5.2 Check In a Reserved Visitor

If a visitor has a reservation, you can check in the visitor by entering reservation information and
visitor information.
Steps
1. In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Visitor Check-In .
2. Click Reserved Visitor Check-In.
3. Select a reservation credential type.
4. Enter the reservation code, or phone number, or select a certificate type and enter the
certificate No.
The Reserved Visitor Check In page will show.
5. Configure the visitor information. See Check In a Visitor Without Reservation for details.
6. Click Check In.

863
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If the operation succeeds, the Preview window will pop up showing the preview of the visitor
pass for the visitor. You can click Print on the window to print the visitor pass.
7. Go back to the Visitor Check-In page to check whether the visitor information fails to be applied
to the visitor terminal(s). If fails, check failure details, troubleshoot, and apply again.

Note
If there is visitor information fails to be applied to visitor terminal(s), a notification will show on
the top of the Visitor Check-In page (see the area marked in red in Figure 23-19 ). In this case,
you can click the notification to open the Figure 23-20 to view the failure details and
troubleshoot according to the failure reason shown on the window, and then apply the visitor
information to visitor terminal(s) again.

Figure 23-21 Notification on Applying Failures

Figure 23-22 Persons Applying Failed Window

8. Optional: Perform the following operations on the Visitor Check-In page if needed.

864
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Filter Visitors Click to filter visitors by conditions including ID No., name, phone, and
company.
For the Status condition, you can click to select one or more
reservation status (reserved, expired, and checked in) to filter visitors.
You can also click Select Additional Information to filter visitors.
Export Visitors Select visitors and click Export to export checked-in visitors to the
computer as a file.

Note
You will be required to set a password for the exported file for security.
We highly recommend you change the password of your own choosing
(using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three kinds of
following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and
special characters) in order to increase the security of your product.

Edit Visitor Click on a visitor's name to edit the information.

Information
Note
If the visitor is checked out, you cannot edit the information.

Download a Click in the Visitor Pass column to download the QR code for the visitor.
Visitor QR Code You can print it or send it to the visitor for identity authentication at
access points.
Print a Visitor Click to print the visitor pass for the visitor.
Pass

23.5.3 View Visitor Information

You can view all checked-in visitors (including those who have checked out) in the visitor list and
perform related operations such as adding visitors to the blocklist.
In the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Visitor Check-In → Visitor
Information to view the list of all the checked-in visitors.
You can perform the following operations on the Visitor Information page.
● Click on the top right to filter visitors by ID No., name, phone, company, skin-surface
temperature, reservation/check-in time, and whether the visitor is in the blocklist.
If you have set custom visitor attributes, you can click Select Additional Information to select
additional information for the filtering. See Set Basic Parameters for details about how to set
custom visitor attributes.
● Delete Visitor: Check one or more visitors and click Delete to delete the selected visitor(s). Or

click → Delete All to delete all visitors.

865
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
After deleting the visitor's personal information, you can still search the visitor's visiting records
in the Visitor List.
● Move Visitors to Blocklist: Select the visitors and click Move to Blocklist to move the selected
visitors to the blocklist.
● Remove Visitors from Blocklist: Select the visitors and click Remove from Blocklist to remove
the selected visitors from the blocklist.
● Move Visitor to Another Group: Check one or more visitors and click Move to move the
selected visitor(s) into a different visitor group.
● Reserve Again: For normal visitors who have checked out, you can click to make reservation
for them again quickly without the need to set the visitors' existing basic information (e.g. visitor
name, ID, fingerprint) again.
● Check In Again: For normal visitors who have checked out, you can click to check in them
again quickly without the need to set the visitors' existing basic information (e.g., profile picture
and fingerprint).
Valid Times for Visit
The times a visitor can enter/exit the area managed by the related access group after
authentication. For example, if you enter 5 as the valid times and relate an access group for a
door to the visitor, the visitor can enter/exit the door for 5 times. After 5 times of
authentication, the visitor cannot enter/exit the door.

23.6 Manage Entry & Exit Rule for Visitors' Vehicles

If one visitor comes by driving a vehicle, when checking in, you need to enter the license plate
number so that the platform can control the barrier to open when the capture unit of the parking
lot detects this license plate.

Default Vehicle List for Visitors

There is one default vehicle list which is for the vehicles of visitors only in the Vehicle module. After
visitor registration, if you enter the license plate number for the visitor, the license plate number
will be displayed in this default vehicle list automatically.
You can click to edit the color of the vehicle list and enter description information for the list if
needed.

Note
This vehicle list cannot be deleted.

Entry & Exit Rule for Visitors' Vehicles

There is one default entry & exit rule for the vehicles of the checked-in visitors on the Entry & Exit
Rule page.

866
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

By default, the rule is: Whenever the vehicles in the vehicle list for visitors entering the parking lot,
the platform will automatically open the barrier; Whenever the vehicles in the vehicle list for
visitors exiting the parking lot, the platform will automatically open the barrier. You can edit this
rule according to actual needs.

Note
For details about editing entry & exit rule, see Manage Entry & Exit Rules for Parking Lots .

Note
This rule cannot be deleted.

23.7 Visitor Check-Out

You should check out a visitor or let the visitor check out at a self-service check-out point before
the visitor leaves. This is to ensure that the access level assigned to the visitor expires after they
leaves.
On the top left of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Visitor Check-Out to enter
the Visitor Check-Out page.

Figure 23-23 Visitor Check-Out Page

A visitor can be checked out in the following ways:

867
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Check Out at Self-Service Check-Out Point

If you have set a self-service check-out point, the visitor can check out by authenticating at the self-
service check-out points without the help of the receptionist. If you have issued a card to a visitor
when checking in, after checking out, the visitor should put the card in the place for card
collection. The access level of their cards, fingerprints, face pictures, and QR codes will expire
automatically.

Note
See Set Self-Service Check-Out Point for details about how to set a self-service check-out point.

Check Out by Swiping Card

If you want to allow visitors to check out by swiping their cards, you need to click Configure Card
Reader in the upper-right corner of the Visitor Check-Out page to configure the card reader first.

Note
Before configuring the card reader, make sure that you have added the corresponding device
(enrollment station or card enrollment station) to the platform, otherwise will appear next to
Configure Card Reader, indicating that the platform fails to detect the device.

By default, Card Enrollment Station is selected as the card reader. If you select Enrollment Station
and complete related settings, you need to click Get Card No. on the Visitor Check-Out page to
activate the settings.
For details about how to configure the card reader, see Set Card Issuing Parameters .
Search for and Check out a Visitor
You can enter the name, phone number, ID number of a visitor on the Visitor Check-Out page, and
click to search for the visitor, and then click Check Out on the search result page to check out
her/him.
Check out a Visitor by Scanning QR Code
If a barcode reader has been plugged into the PC where the platform runs, you can use the
barcode reader to scan the QR code on the visitor pass of a visitor to check out the visitor.
Automatic Check-Out
If you do not manually check out a visitor, the visitor will be checked out by the platform
automatically when the configured visiting duration ends.

Note
Automatic check-out is available only when Auto Checkout for Visitor After Effective Period is
enabled on the Basic Parameters page. For details, see Set Basic Parameters .

868
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

23.8 Check Visitor Access Records

When a visitor accesses an access point by credentials, a visitor access record is stored on the
platform. After searching for a visitor, you can view all access records of the visitor, no matter the
visitor has checked out or not. This allows you to track all the access points where the visitor has
visited and view the corresponding visit time.
In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Visitor → Visitor Access
Record to display the visitor access records. By default, only the current-day records will be
displayed. If you need to view other time's records, manually filter the records (see Filter Visitors ).
You can perform the following operations.

Filter Visitors
Click on the top right to filter visitors by ID No., name, phone, company, host, visit purpose, visit
time, status, and skin-surface temperature status. You can also click Select Additional Information
to select additional information to filter.
For the Status condition, you can click to select one or more reservation status (checked-in,
checked-out, checked-out (auto), self checked-out, and not check out in effective period) to filter
visitors.
After filtering, you can click the visitor name to view the information of visitor.
View Information on First & Last Authentication
By default, only the first and last access authentication records are displayed. To view more
information, click to open the Visitor Access Authentication Records window to view all access
authentication records of the visitor.

869
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 24 Time & Attendance

In the Attendance module, you can easily manage the time & attendance system of your
organization and track your employees' attendance.

Figure 24-1 Time & Attendance Overview

The overview page shows the most recent attendance statistics:
● Attendance Status Statistics: Displays attendance status data in a doughnut chart.

● Abnormal Attendance Statistics: Displays abnormal attendance records in a bar chart.

Note
● You can select the time range from Yesterday, Last 7 Days, and Last 30 Days.
● You can export the current chart to local PC.

To set up a time & attendance system from the start, click Get Started and follow the instructions
on screen.

Note

You can move cursor to on the right to browse through all steps.

To get detailed instructions on each step, refer to Flow Chart .

870
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

24.1 Flow Chart

Figure 24-2 Flow Chart for Time & Attendance

● Add Device: Add devices (e.g., access control devices) to the platform. For more details, refer to
Resource Management .
● Add Person Group and Person: Add person groups and persons. For more details, refer to Add
Person Groups and Add Person .
● Configure Attendance Parameters: Configure attendance check points, general rule, overtime
rule, leave types, display rule for report, third-party database, etc. For more details, refer to
Configure Attendance Parameters , Set Display Rules for Attendance Report and Synchronize
Card Swiping Records to Third-Party Database .
● Configure Attendance Rule: Add timetable (including break timetable and work timetable), shift,
and shift schedule. For more details, refer to Add Timetable , Add Shift or Manage Shift
Schedule .
● Attendance Record, Attendance Handling: Search and correct attendance records, apply for
leave, get devices' attendance records, manually calculate attendance results, etc. For more
details, refer to Manage Attendance Record .
● Attendance Report: Export attendance report to local PC or send it via email regularly. For more
details, refer to Manage Attendance Reports .

871
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

24.2 Configure Attendance Parameters

You can configure the attendance parameters, including the weekends, absence rule, overtime
parameters, attendance check point, leave type, etc.

24.2.1 Add Attendance Check Point

You can set the access points (or linked card readers), cameras which support facial recognition
(such as DeepinView series camera, and the camera connected with DeepinMind series NVR), or
terminals as attendance check points, so that the check-in/out by credentials (such as swiping card
on the access point's card reader, or face detected by the (linked) camera) will be valid and will be
recorded.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic
Settings .
2. Click Attendance Check Point on the left to enter the attendance check point management
page.
3. Click Add.
4. Select the type of the attendance check point.
Check-In & Out
The attendance records of check-in or check-out on the attendance check point are both
valid.
Check-In Only
The attendance records of swiping card or face recognition on the attendance check point will
be only calculated as check-in. Persons cannot check out on this check point.
Check-Out Only
The attendance records of swiping card or face recognition on the attendance check point will
be only calculated as check-out. Persons cannot check in on this check point.
5. Select the resource type (e.g., door) from the drop-down list.

872
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 24-3 Add Attendance Check Point

All the resources which have not been set as attendance check point will be displayed.
6. Select the resources.

Note
If you select Door as the resource type, you can set the attendance check point type for different
card readers separately. For example, there is a card reader installed at both side of the door.
You can set the card reader of the entry direction as check-in only and the exit one check-out
only.
7. Click Add.
The selected resources will be displayed in the attendance check point list.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Change For the added attendance check points, you can select one or more items and
Check click Set as Check-In Only, Set as Check-Out Only, or Set as Check-In/Out from
Point's drop-down list to change the current type to another.
Type
Delete To delete the added attendance check point, select the added attendance
Check Point check point(s) and click Delete.

Note
If the attendance check point is deleted, the attendance records on this
attendance check point will be deleted as well, and it will affect the persons'
attendance results for the days on which the attendance data haven't been
calculated.

873
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

24.2.2 Define Weekends

Different countries or regions adopt different weekend convention. HikCentral Professional
provides weekends definition function. You can select one or more days of week as the weekends
according to actual situation.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic Settings →
General Rule .
In the Weekend Settings area, select the day(s) of week from Monday to Sunday. The attendance
data of the selected date(s) will be calculated with the weekend rule.

24.2.3 Define Absence

You can define a global rule for absence. When the employee's attendance conforms to the
absence rule, the attendance record will be marked as absent or other status you define.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic Settings →
General Rule .
In the Absence Settings area, you can define the absence rules.

Note
The absence settings are only valid for normal shift.

874
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 24-4 Absence Settings

Set Absence Rule for Check-In

Switch on Absent If Check-In Late and set a tolerant threshold in Late for. When the employee's
check-in time minus scheduled start work time is longer than the Late for value, the employee's
attendance status on that day will be marked as Absent.
In No Check-In, Mark as, specify an attendance status when a person does not check in or fails to
check in within the valid check-in period. If you select Late, you need to set a fixed late duration.
For example, if the scheduled start work time is 9:00, valid check-in period is 6:00-12:00 (defined in
Timetable - Attendance), Late for is set to 60 minutes, and No Check-In, Mark as is set to Absent,
the attendance status of an employee will be:
● Normal, if the employee checks in between 6:00 and 9:00.

Note
You can set overtime rules to count the extra hours before scheduled start work time as
overtime. See details in Configure Overtime Parameters .
● Late, if the employee checks in between 9:01 and 9:59.
● Absent, if the employee checks in after 10:00 or does not check in.

875
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Set Absence Rule for Check-Out

Switch on Absent If Check-Out Early and set a tolerant threshold in Early for. When the scheduled
end work time minus employee's check-out time is longer than the Early for value, the employee's
attendance status on that day will be marked as Absent.
In No Check-Out, Mark as, specify an attendance status when a person does not check out or fails
to check out within the valid check-out period. If you select Early Leave, you need to set a fixed
late duration.
For example, if the scheduled end work time is 18:00 and valid check-out period is 16:00-21:00
(defined in Timetable - Attendance), and Early for is set to 60 minutes, the attendance status of an
employee will be:
● Absent, if the employee checks out before 17:00 or does not check out.

● Early Leave, if the employee checks out between 17:01 and 17:59.

● Normal, if the employee checks out between 18:00 and 21:00.

Note
You can set overtime rules to count the extra hours after scheduled end work time as overtime.
See details in Configure Overtime Parameters .

24.2.4 Configure Authentication Mode

You can configure authentication modes, including card, fingerprint,, face, and iris. After setting
authentication mode, you can get attendance records of the configured authentication mode and
calculate attendance data of the configured authentication mode.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic Settings →
General Rule .
Switch on Customize Authentication Mode, and select card, fingerprint, iris, or/and face as the
authentication mode.

Note
This function requires device capability.

24.2.5 Set Auto-Calculation Time of Attendance Results

Attendance results calculation refers to calculating the attendance status and duration according to
persons' check-in/out records. You can set an auto-calculation time so that the platform will
calculate the attendance results for all persons at a specific time every day.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic
Configuration → General Rule .
2. In the Auto-Calculate Attendance area, select a time in Calculate at.

876
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

3. Optional: Enable Recalculate Historical Data.

The platform will automatically recalculate historical attendance data of the last 7 days at the
configured time.
4. Click Save.

24.2.6 Configure Attendance Result Accuracy

You can control the degree of accuracy of each attendance statistic data, such as late duration,
break duration, overtime duration, and actual work hours.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic Settings →
General Rule .
2. In the Advanced Settings area, set the parameters for each attendance statistics type in
Attendance Result Accuracy.
Min. Unit
Set the minimum unit for the result item.
You can set the minimum unit to 1 Minute, 0.5/1 Hour, or 0.5/1 Day.
Rounding
Rounding means replacing the number with a neighboring value that fits the minimum unit.
You can choose to round up, round down, or round to the nearest value.
Display Format
Choose the display format of the time.
Example
For example, you set Min. Unit to 0.5 Hour, set Rounding to Round Up, and set Display Format
to HH:MM.
● If the actual duration is 1 to 30 minutes, the statistic data displayed will be 0h30min.

● If the actual duration is 31 to 60 minutes, the statistic data displayed will be 1h0min.

3. Click Save.
You can see the attendance results according to your accuracy settings in attendance records or
attendance reports.

24.2.7 Configure Overtime Parameters

Overtime is the amount of time a person works beyond scheduled work hours. You can configure
parameters, including work hour rate, overtime level, and attendance status for overtime, for
workdays, weekends, and holidays.

877
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic
Settings .
2. Select Overtime on the left to enter the overtime settings page.
3. Set Work Hour Rate for each overtime level (work hours = work hour rate × actual overtime).

Note
When a person works outside the scheduled work time on workdays, the person will reach
different overtime level: overtime level 1, overtime level 2 and overtime level 3. You can set
different work hour rates for three overtime levels.
Example
For example, a person's actual overtime is 1 hour (in overtime level 1), and the work hour rate of
overtime level 1 is set to 2.50, so the work hours will be calculated as 2.50 hours.
4. In the Overtime in Workdays area, switch on Calculate Overtime to set the calculation mode of
overtime duration on workdays.
Calculation Mode
Select a calculation mode.
By Total Work Hours
Overtime is calculated according to the extra work hours that exceed the required work
hours.
OT Duration Calculation Mode
Select a method for overtime duration calculation.
Fixed
Overtime duration is fixed regardless of the actual overtime. You need to set a fixed
duration in the Overtime Duration field.
Actual
Count the actual duration of the overtime. You need to set a minimum threshold for
a valid overtime.
For example, if you set the threshold to 60 minutes:
● Overtime duration is 0 if a person works for 59 minutes longer than the required

work hours;
● Overtime duration is 61 if a person works for 61 minutes longer than the required

work hours.
By Time Points
Overtime duration is calculated according to the extra work hours earlier than start-work
time or later than end-work time in one day.
You can enable Count Early Check-In as OT and Count Late Check-Out as OT to set the
overtime duration calculation mode respectively.

878
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

OT Duration Calculation Mode

Select a method for overtime duration calculation.
Fixed
Overtime duration is fixed regardless of the actual overtime. You need to set a fixed
duration in the Overtime Duration field.
Actual
Count the actual duration of the overtime. You need to set a minimum threshold for
a valid overtime.
For example, if you set Earlier than Check-In Time for Mark as Valid Overtime to 30
minutes, and the start-work time is 9:00:
● Overtime duration is 0 if a person checks in at 8:31;

● Overtime duration is 31 if a person checks in at 8:29.

Overtime Level Settings

Select the overtime levels and drag on the time slot to set the range of the selected overtime
levels. The total work hours will be calculated according to the work hour rate of each
overtime level.

Figure 24-5 Overtime Level Settings

Overtime on Weekends
You can switch on Overtime on Weekends and set the valid overtime threshold. Then when a
person's work hours on weekends are less than the threshold, the overtime will be 0.
5. In the Overtime on Holidays area, set the overtime rule for holidays.
If Overtime Longer than Mark as Valid Overtime
Set a minimum threshold for a valid overtime.
Set Max. Overtime

879
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Switch on to set an upper limit for the overtime duration in the If Works Longer than Mark as
Invalid Overtime field. Exceeded time will not be counted as valid overtime.
Overtime Level on Holiday
Set the overtime level for each holiday.
You can select multiple holidays and click Batch Set Overtime Level to batch set the overtime
level, or set the overtime level for each holiday separately.

Note
● To add a new holiday, click Add Holiday.

● To edit holidays, click Holiday Settings.

6. Optional: Switch on Calculate Overtime in the Overtime Not in Valid Attendance Check Period
area to count the extra work time outside the valid check-in/out period as valid overtime.
7. Click Save.

24.2.8 Manage Leave Type

A leave type represents the reason for a leave. You can customize the leave types (major leave
types and minor leave types) in advance and select them as the leave reason when applying for
leave for persons in the platform. You can also edit or delete the leave types.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic Settings →
Leave Type to enter leave type management page.

Figure 24-6 Leave Type Management Page

880
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

In the Major Leave Type area, you can add, edit, or delete the major leave types.
● Add Major Leave Type: Click and create a name to add a new major leave type.
● Edit Major Leave Type Name: Select a major leave type and click to edit its name.
● Delete Major Leave Type: Select a major leave type and click to delete the major leave type
and all minor types in it.
Select a major leave type, the minor leave types of the major leave type are listed in the Minor
Leave Type area. You can add, edit, or delete the minor leave types.
● Add Minor Leave Type: Click Add and create a name to add a new minor leave type under the

major leave type.

● Edit Minor Leave Type Name: Click on the Operation column to edit the name of the minor
leave type.
● Delete Minor Leave Type: Select the minor leave type(s) and click Delete to delete the selected

minor leave type(s).

Note
After setting the leave types, you can select the leave type(s) from a list when applying for leave for
persons. See details in Apply for Leave for a Single Person or Apply for Leave for Multiple
Persons .

24.2.9 Customize Attendance Status on Device

You can customize the rules of attendance status on device. After setting up Attendance Status on
Device and applying the settings to the devices, you can choose to use the attendance status on
the devices to calculate the attendance results.
Before You Start
Make sure the devices support this feature.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic
Settings .
2. Select Custom Attendance Status on Device on the left.
3. Switch on Enable Attendance Status on Device.
4. Set the parameters.
Attendance Mode
Manual: No attendance schedule. Manual selection of attendance status is required when a
person checks in or checks out on a device.
Automatic: Specify an attendance schedule and the attendance status of a person is judged
according to the schedule.
Manual And Auto: Specify an attendance schedule and the attendance status of a person is
judged according to the schedule. The person can also change the attendance status
manually on device.

881
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Attendance Status Required

On: Manual selection of attendance status is required for a valid check-in/out.
Off: Manual selection of attendance status is optional.

Note
Not available when in Manual mode, because manual selection of attendance status is always
required.
Custom Check Name
Customize the status name for check-in and check-out.
Custom Break Name
Customize the status name for the start and end of a break.
Custom Overtime Name
Customize the status name for the start and end of an overtime.
Schedule Template
Select a status and drag on the template to define the attendance status of a period of time.

Figure 24-7 Schedule Template

Note
● Not available when in Manual mode. Because manual selection of attendance status is

always required and no attendance schedule is needed.

● Work time and break time must be continuous.

● Overtime cannot be continuous with work and break time.

● Overtime must be before or after work or break time.

5. Click Save to save the settings and apply the settings to the attendance check points you added.

882
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● You can view the applying result on the Apply Custom Status window.
● See details about adding attendance check points in Add Attendance Check Point .
● You can switch on Enable T&A Status on Device when configuring break timetables,
timetables, or shifts to record the T&A status on devices, which will be used in attendance
results calculation.

24.3 Add Timetable

The timetable defines the detailed time rules for attendance, such as work time, break time, etc.
According to the actual requirements, you can select normal shift or man-hour shift as timetable
type for further configuration and application, and then the employees need to follow the time
rules to check in, check out, etc.

24.3.1 Add Break Timetables

Break timetables define the start/end time of breaks and the calculation method of break duration.
You can create break timetables in advance and use them as templates when configuring break
time in a timetable.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Shift
Settings .
2. Select Break Timetable on the left.
3. Click Add.
4. Set parameters for the break timetable.
Name
Create a descriptive name for the break timetable, such as "Launch Break".
Start Time
Start time of the break.
Earliest Allowable Start Time
Flexible start time of the break. If a person checks out earlier than Earliest Allowable Start
Time, the check-out will not be counted as the break start time and no break will be
recorded.
End Time
End time of the break.
Latest Allowable End Time
Flexible end time of the break. If a person checks in later than Latest Allowable End Time, the
check-in will not be counted as the break end time.

883
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Break Duration Calculation Mode

Method for counting the duration of a break.
Period
Fixed duration. The actual break start/end time of persons will only be recorded but not be
used to calculate the duration of breaks.
Break Duration
Set the duration of the break.
Must Check
Actual duration calculated by the check-out time and check-in time.
In Count Early/Late Return, you need to choose to count early or late return time By
Duration or By Time Point.
By Duration
When the actual break duration (end time minus start time) is shorter than or longer
than the specified duration, it will be counted as early or late return.
By Time Point
When the actual return time is earlier than or later than the specified end time, it will
be counted as early or late return.
You also need to set the threshold and the attendance status for the early/late return
time.
If early/late for
Threshold for counting the early/late return time.
Mark as
Choose to count the remaining time of a early return as overtime or the exceeded time
of a late return as late, early leave, or absent.
If you do not want to count the early/late return time, set it to Normal.
Set Calculation Mode
Switch on to set the calculation method of break duration.
Calculated by
First In & Last Out: Only count and calculate the duration of the first and last check-in/out
records during the start/end time of the break.
Each Check-In/Out: Count each check-in/out record during the start/end time of the break
and calculate the total duration. You need to set a minimum interval in Min. Interval to
filter out repeated check-in/outs.
Enable T&A Status on Device
Check to record the T&A status on the attendance check devices.

884
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Uncheck to discard the T&A status on the devices and only record the person information
and check-in/out time.

Note
To configure the rule of T&A status on device, see Customize Attendance Status on Device
for details.
5. Click Add to finish adding the timetable, or click Add and Continue to finish adding the timetable
and add a new break timetable.
6. Optional: Perform further operations after adding the break timetable.
Edit Break Timetable Click on the name of a break timetable to edit it.
Delete Break Select the break timetables you want to delete and click Delete to
Timetable delete them.
What to do next
Use the break timetable to set the break time in a timetable. See Add Timetable for Normal Shift
or Add Timetable for Man-Hour Shift .

24.3.2 Add Timetable for Normal Shift

Normal shift is usually used for the attendance with fixed schedule. The employees should check in
before the start-work time and check out after the end-work time. Otherwise, their attendance
status will be late, early leave, or absent. You can add the timetable for normal shift to define the
detailed rules (e.g., start-work time, end-work time, late rule, valid check-in/out time, break time,
etc.), in order to monitor employees' working hours and attendance.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Shift Settings .
2. Click Timetable on the left to enter the timetable management page.
3. Click Add.
4. In Basics, set the following parameters.
Name
Create a descriptive name for the timetable.
Color
Click on the Color field and set the color for the timetable. Different colors represent the
corresponding timetables when drawing for Shift Schedule in time bar.
Set Calculation Mode
Switch on to set the calculation method of work duration.
Calculated by
First In & Last Out: Only count and calculate the duration of the first and last check-in/out
records within the valid check-in/out period.

885
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Each Check-In/Out: Count each check-in/out record within the valid check-in/out period
and calculate the total duration. You need to set a minimum interval in Min. Interval to
filter out repeated check-in/out records.
Enable T&A Status on Device
Check to record the T&A status on the attendance check devices.
Uncheck to discard the T&A status on the devices and only record the person information
and check-in/out time.

Note
● If a break timetable in the timetable is not enabled with T&A Status on Device, it will be

enabled if you enable this function for the timetable.

If a break timetable in the timetable is already enabled with T&A Status on Device, this
setting will not change even if you disable the function for the timetable.
● To configure the rule of T&A status on device, see Customize Attendance Status on

Device for details.

5. In Attendance, select Normal Shift as the timetable type.
6. Set the detailed rules for work time and check-in/out.
Scheduled Work Time
Range of the scheduled work time, including start-work time and end-work time.
Valid Check-In Period
If the employee does not check in during the valid check-in period, the check-in will not be
recorded and the attendance status will be absent or late depending on the absence settings.
Valid Check-Out Period
If the employee does not check out during the valid check-out period, the check-out will not
be recorded and the attendance status will be absent or early leave depending on the
absence settings.
Min. Work Hours
Employees' work duration in one day must be longer than minimum work hours. Otherwise,
the attendance status will be absent.
Flexible Mode
Allow Late/Early Leave
The employees are allowed to arrive late or leave early for a specific period of time.
For this mode, you need to set the allowable time for late and early leave. If an employee
checks in/out within the period after the start-work time or before the end-work time, the
attendance status will be Normal.
For example, if the start-work time is set to 09:00:00, and the late allowable duration is 30
minutes, and the employee checks in at 09:15:00, the attendance status will be Normal.
Flexible Period

886
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Flexible period allows employees to extend their start-work time and end-work time.
For this mode, you need to set the flexible duration, which defines the extended duration
for both start-work time and end-work time. If the total late and early leave time is within
the flexible duration, the attendance status will be Normal.
For example, if the scheduled work time is set to 09:00:00 to 18:00:00, and the flexible
duration is 30 minutes, and the employee checks in at 09:15:00, and checks out at
18:15:00, the attendance status will be Normal.
7. In Break Time, click Add to select the break timetables to define the break time in the timetable.

Note
● You can click Add to create a new break timetable. See details in Add Break Timetables .

● Check Count Break Time in Work Hours to include the break time into work hours.

8. Optional: In Timetable Overview, view the timetable in a timeline.

Figure 24-8 Timetable Overview

Note
You can drag the timeline to the left or right.
9. Optional: Switch on Absence Settings to set a different absence rule instead of using the general
absence rule.

Note
See details about setting a general absence rule in Define Absence . You can also refer to this
topic for explanations for the parameters in the absence rule.
10. Click Add to save the timetable, or click Add and Continue to continue adding another
timetable.
What to do next
Use the timetables to define the work schedule on each day in a shift. For more details, refer to
Add Shift .

24.3.3 Add Timetable for Man-Hour Shift

Man-hour shift is usually used for the attendance with flexible schedule. It does not require a strict
check-in time and check-out time and only requires that the employees' work hours are longer
than the minimum work hours.

887
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Shift Settings .
2. Click Timetable on the left to enter the timetable management page.
3. Click Add.
4. In Basics, set the following parameters.
Name
Create a descriptive name for the timetable.
Color
Click on the Color field and set the color for the timetable. Different colors represent the
corresponding timetables when drawing for Shift Schedule in time bar.
Set Calculation Mode
Switch on to set the calculation method of work duration.
Calculated by
First In & Last Out: Only count and calculate the duration of the first and last check-in/out
records within the valid check-in/out period.
Each Check-In/Out: Count each check-in/out record within the valid check-in/out period
and calculate the total duration. You need to set a minimum interval in Min. Interval to
filter out repeated check-in/out records.
Enable T&A Status on Device
Check to record the T&A status on the attendance check devices.
Uncheck to discard the T&A status on the devices and only record the person information
and check-in/out time.

Note
● If a break timetable in the timetable is not enabled with T&A Status on Device, it will be

enabled if you enable this function for the timetable.

If a break timetable in the timetable is already enabled with T&A Status on Device, this
setting will not change even if you disable the function for the timetable.
● To configure the rule of T&A status on device, see Customize Attendance Status on

Device for details.

5. In Attendance, select Man-Hour Shift as the timetable type.
6. Set the rules for work time and check-in/out.
Valid Check-In/Out Period
If the employee does not check in/out within the valid check-in/out period, the check-in/out
will not be recorded and the attendance status will be late or absent.
Min. Work Hours
Employees' work duration in one day must be longer than minimum work hours. Otherwise,
the attendance status will be absent.
Latest Check-In Time

888
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

If the actual check-in time is later than this time, the attendance status will be marked as
Late.
7. In Break Time, click Add to select the break timetables to define the break time in the timetable.

Note
● You can click Add to create a new break timetable. See details in Add Break Timetables .

● Check Count Break Time in Work Hours to include the break time into work hours.

8. Optional: In Timetable Overview, view the timetable in a timeline.

Figure 24-9 Timetable Overview

Note
You can drag the timeline to the left or right.
9. Click Add to save the timetable, or click Add and Continue to continue adding another
timetable.
What to do next
Use the timetables to define the work schedule on each day in a shift. For more details, refer to
Add Shift .

24.4 Add Shift

Shift is the time arrangement for employees. Shifts can be assigned to employees to regulate their
duties. You can adopt one or multiple timetables in one shift.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added timetables. See details in Add Timetable for Normal Shift or Add
Timetable for Man-Hour Shift .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Shift Settings .
2. Click Shift on the left to enter the shift management page.
3. Click Add.
4. Set the shift's basic information, including creating a descriptive name and editing its
description.
5. Optional: Select another shift from the drop-down list of Copy from field to copy the shift
information to the current shift.
6. Set the shift's repeating pattern.

889
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Week
The shift will repeat every 1 to 52 weeks based on your selection. If you select 2 or more
weeks, you need to set the start week.
Day
The shift will repeat every 1 to 31 days based on your selection. You need to set a start date
to define when the shift starts.
Month
The shift will repeat every 1 to 12 months based on your selection. If you select 2 or more
months, you need to set the start date.
7. Select Normal Shift or Man-Hour Shift as the shift type.
The corresponding timetables of normal shift or man-hour shift will be displayed.
8. Select a timetable and click on the table below to apply the timetable on each day.

Note
● For Normal Shift, you can apply more than one timetable in one day which requires the

employees to check in and check out according to each timetable. The start and end work
time and the valid check-in and out time in different timetables can not be overlapped.
● You can use up to 8 different timetables in one shift.

9. Select a general calculation mode for the shift.

Note
You can set a unique calculation mode for each timetable in the timetable settings page. General
calculation mode only applies to the timetables without a calculation mode.
Calculated by
First In & Last Out: Only count and calculate the duration of the first and last check-in/out
records within the valid check-in/out period.
Each Check-In/Out: Count each check-in/out record within the valid check-in/out period and
calculate the total duration. You need to set a minimum interval in Min. Interval to filter out
repeated check-in/outs.
Enable T&A Status on Device
Check to record the T&A status on the attendance check devices.
Uncheck to discard the T&A status on the devices and only record the person information and
check-in/out time.

Note
● If a timetable in the shift is not enabled with T&A Status on Device, it will be enabled if you
enable this function for the shift.

890
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

If a timetable in the shift is already enabled with T&A Status on Device, this setting will not
change even if you disable the function for the shift.
● To configure the rule of T&A status on device, see Customize Attendance Status on Device

for details.
10. Optional: Switch on Enable Overtime set a different overtime rule instead of using the general
overtime rule.

Note
See instructions on setting a general overtime absence rule in Configure Overtime
Parameters . You can also refer to this topic for explanations for the parameters in the
overtime rule.
11. Select the holidays. On holidays, the shift will not be effective.

Note
For setting the holiday, refer to Set Holiday .
12. Click Add to finish adding the shift.
What to do next
Assign shift to persons or person groups. See details in Assign Shift Schedule to Person or Assign
Shift Schedule to Person Group .

24.5 Manage Shift Schedule

Shift schedule is used to specify the persons and effective periods during which the persons
perform their duties following the attendance rule defined in the shift. After setting the shift, you
need to assign it to the person group or persons, or add a temporary schedule, so that it will
calculate the attendance records for persons according to this shift schedule.

24.5.1 Shift Schedule Overview

The shift schedule overview shows the shift schedule information of each person in the person
group. You can also view the detailed schedule of one person for each day in one month.
In the top left corner of Home page, click → All Modules → Attendance → Shift Schedule →
Shift Schedule Overview to enter the shift schedule overview page.
Select a person group on the left, you can view the schedule information about every person in the
person group.
Click the person name to enter the detailed schedule of this person for each day in one month,
such as effective period, shift name, and so on. You can click Edit or Delete to edit the shift
schedule or delete the shift schedule.

891
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
If any shift is not assigned to the person, you can click Set Shift Schedule to assign a shift to him/
her.

24.5.2 Assign Shift Schedule to Person Group

After setting the shift, you need to assign it to the person group so that it will calculate the
attendance records for persons in the person group according to this shift schedule.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added person groups, persons, and shifts. For details, refer to Add Person
Groups , Add Person , and Add Shift .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Shift Schedule .
2. Click Assign to Person Group on the left.
3. Do one of the following to set the shift schedule.
Assign One by On the left, select a person group you want to assign shift to, and switch
One on Set Shift Schedule.
Batch Assign Click to open the Set Shift Schedule panel. Select the person groups.
4. Set schedule parameters.
Effective Period
The shift is effective within the period you set.
Check-In Not Required
Persons in the person group(s) in this schedule do not need to check in when they arrive.
Check-Out Not Required
Persons in the person group(s) in this schedule do not need to check out when they leave.
Effective for Overtime
The overtime of the persons in the person group(s) in this schedule will be recorded.
5. Select a shift for the person group(s) you select.

Note
● You can click View to preview the shift.

● You can click Add to assign another shift to the persons in the person group(s). The persons

can check in/out in any of the timetables which are applied to the shifts and the attendance
will be effective.
6. Optional: Click to select attendance check points linked with the shift schedule.

892
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Only authentications at the linked attendance check points will be counted.
7. Click Save.

24.5.3 Assign Shift Schedule to Person

You can add a person shift schedule and assign a shift to one or more persons, so that it will
calculate the attendance records for the persons according to this shift schedule.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added the person(s) and the shift. For details, refer to Add Person and Add
Shift .
Steps

Note
The person schedule has the higher priority than person group schedule.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Shift Schedule .
2. Click Assign to Person on the left to enter the person shift schedule management page.
3. Optional: Select a person group on the left, enter keywords in text field, or check Include Sub-
Group to filter the persons.
4. Select the persons you want to assign the shift to.
5. Click Set Shift Schedule to enter the Set Shift Schedule page.
6. Set required parameters.
Effective Period
Within the period you set, the shift is effective.
Check-In Not Required
Persons in this schedule do not need to check-in when they come to work.
Check-Out Not Required
Persons in this schedule do not need to check-out when they end work.
Effective for Overtime
The persons' overtime will be recorded for this schedule.
7. Select a shift to be assigned.

Note
You can click Add to assign another shift to the person(s). The person(s) can check in/out in any
of the timetables which are applied in the shifts and the attendance will be effective.
8. Optional: Click to select attendance check points linked with the shift schedule.

893
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Only authentications at the linked attendance check points will be counted.
9. Click Save.

24.5.4 Add Temporary Schedule

You can add a temporary schedule for the person and the person will be assigned with the shift
schedule temporarily. You can also view and edit the temporary schedule details.
Before You Start
You should have added the person(s) and the shift. For details, refer to Add Person and Add Shift .
Steps

Note
The temporary schedule has the higher priority than other schedules.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Shift Schedule .
2. Click Temporary Schedule tab to enter the temporary schedule page.
3. Click Add to enter adding temporary schedule page.
4. Set required parameters.
Name
Customize a name for the schedule.
Effective Period
Within the period you set, the shift is effective.
Check-In Not Required
Persons in this schedule do not need to check-in when they come to work.
Check-Out Not Required
Persons in this schedule do not need to check-out when they end work.
Effective for Overtime
The persons' overtime will be recorded for this schedule.
5. Select a shift to be assigned.

Note
You can click Add to assign another shift to the person(s). The person(s) can check in/out in any
of the timetables which are applied in the shifts and the attendance will be effective.
6. Optional: Click to select attendance check points linked with the shift schedule.

Note
Only authentications at the linked attendance check points will be counted.
7. Click to select the person(s) you want to assign the shift to.

894
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

8. Click Save.

24.6 Manage Attendance Record

The persons' attendance records will be recorded and stored in the system. You can search the
records by setting the search conditions to view the attendance details and view the person's
attendance report. You can also correct check-in/out time for the exceptional records according to
actual needs.

24.6.1 Search Raw Records

You can search the raw attendance records with conditions such as time, person information, and
data source. Raw records refer to the original records on attendance check devices (access records)
and handling records (manually corrected attendance records).
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Records and
Handling .
2. Click Raw Records on the left.

Figure 24-10 Raw Records

3. Optional: In the filter area, set the search conditions.
Time
Set the time range of the raw records you want to search. You can set up to one year's time
range.
Name
Name of the person you want to search.
ID
Person ID of the person you want to search.
Person Group
Select the person group to view the raw records of the persons in the group.
Data Source

895
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Select the type of raw records you want to search.

● Original Records on Device: access and authentication records generated by the

attendance check points.

● Handling Records: manually corrected attendance records.

Select Additional Information

You can search the raw records with more custom conditions. Click Select Additional
Information to select the additional search conditions.

Note
For more details about adding additional condition, refer to Customize Additional
Information .
4. Click Filter to show all matched raw records.
5. Optional: Perform further operations.
Select Display Click and select the items displayed in the search result.
Items
Import Raw Click Import Records to import raw records from an attendance check
Records device or a file exported from an attendance check device.

Note
See details in Import Raw Attendance Records .

Export Raw Click Export to export the filtered attendance records to your PC.
Records
Note
See details in Export Attendance Records .

Handle Raw You can click Handle Records to correct the check-in/out records if
Records necessary.
Edit Handling For handled records, you can select them and click Edit Handling Type on
Type the top to edit the handling type for them.

24.6.2 Import Raw Attendance Records

Attendance data on the attendance check devices could fail to be transmitted to HikCentral
Professional due to many causes, such as device offline and network connection failure. Or some of
your attendance check devices are not added to the platform, but you still need to manage their
attendance data on the platform. You can use this function to get the latest access records from
the devices.
In the upper-left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Records and
Handling → Raw Records .

896
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Click Import Records > Import from Device or Import from File.

Import from Device

Applicable to getting the latest data on the attendance check devices that are added to the
platform.
Select the devices that store the attendance check data, and then select the time range to be
imported. Click OK to import the records within the range on the selected devices.
Import from File
Applicable to attendance check devices added or not added to the platform.

Note
For devices that are not added to the platform, you need to make sure that the devices are
supported by the platform. See HikCentral Professional Compatibility List for reference.

Many attendance check devices have the ability to export a file that contains persons' attendance
check events. You can import the file to the platform so that the attendance check data can be
managed on the platform.

Note
● To export the data file on an attendance check device, please refer to the user manual of the
device.
● Usually, you need to enter the back-stage management page of the device to export the event
file to a connected external storage device via USB port, and then transfer the event file to the
PC where the platform runs.

24.6.3 Search Attendance Result

You can search attendance results to view the person's attendance status by setting the search
conditions such as attendance group, person name, status, and skin-surface temperature status.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Records and
Handling .
2. Click Attendance Result on the left.
3. In the filter area, set the search conditions.
Time Period / Time
Set the time range of the attendance results you want to search. You can set one year's time
range at most and search the persons' attendance results recorded within three years.
Name
Enter the person name to view the attendance results.
ID

897
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Enter the person's ID to view the attendance results.

Person Group
Select the person group to view the attendance results.
Status
You can search the attendance results of certain status. For example, if you want to view the
late arrival records, you can select Late to search.
Skin-Surface Temperature Status
You can search the attendance results by setting skin-surface temperature status, including
All, Normal, Abnormal, and Unknown.
Select Additional Information
You can search the attendance results with more custom conditions. Click Select Additional
Information to select the additional search conditions.

Note
For more details about adding additional conditions, refer to Customize Additional
Information .
4. Click Filter to show all matched attendance results.
5. Optional: Perform further operations.
Sort Results Click and select a sorting rule to sort the matched results in order.
Select Display Click and select the items displayed in the search result.
Items
View Person's Click the person name to view the person's attendance results.
Attendance Results
Note
Hover the cursor on the date to view the detailed work time, including
scheduled work time and actual work time.

Export Attendance Click Export to export the filtered attendance results and save in your
Results PC.

Note
For more details, refer to Export Attendance Records .

Recalculate Click Calculate Again to calculate the results with the latest raw records
Attendance Results and handled records.

Note
See details in Manually Calculate Attendance Results

898
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Handle You can correct the check-in/out records or apply for leave for persons
Attendance / View if necessary. You can also view the history handling records. For details,
Handling Records refer to Correct Check-In/Out for a Single Person / Correct Check-
In/Out for Multiple Persons , Apply for Leave for a Single Person /
Apply for Leave for Multiple Persons , and View Attendance Handling
Records .

24.6.4 Correct Check-In/Out for a Single Person

After searching the person's attendance results, you can correct one person's check-in/out time
according to actual needs.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Records and
Handling .
2. Click Attendance Result on the left.
3. Search the attendance results.

Note
For details, refer to Search Attendance Result .
4. Click the name in the list of attendance results to enter the attendance details page of the
person.
5. Hover the cursor over the date with abnormal attendance result and click Handle Records.
6. Select Correct Check-in/out as the handling type.
7. Set the correction type and time.
8. Optional: Enter the remarks, such as correction reason.
9. Click Save.

Note
The platform will start recalculating the attendance results according to the corrected records.

24.6.5 Correct Check-In/Out for Multiple Persons

You can batch correct multiple persons' check-in/out time according to actual need (e.g., the
employees forgot to check in or check out).
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Records and
Handling .
2. Click Raw Records → Handle Records or Attendance Result → Batch Handle .
3. Select Correct Check-in/out as the handling type.
4. Choose one of the following operations for handing.

899
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Filtered Person(s): Correct the check-in/out time of the persons whose attendance records
are filtered when searching attendance records. You need to set correction type and time.

Note
Not available when you are searching raw records.
- Select Person(s): Select one or more persons in person groups, and set correction type and
time.

Note
Up to 10,000 persons can be selected.
- Batch Import: Click Download Template and edit the related information in the downloaded
template, then click and import the template with the corrected attendance records.

Note
If failed, you can export the error information, and import the edited information again.
5. Click Save.

24.6.6 Apply for Leave for a Single Person

After searching the person's attendance results, you can apply for leave according to actual needs.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Records and
Handling .
2. Click Attendance Result on the left.
3. Search the attendance results.

Note
For details, refer to Search Attendance Result .
4. Click the name in the list of attendance results to enter the attendance details page of the
person.
5. Hover the cursor over the date with abnormal attendance result and click Handle Records.
6. Select Apply for Leave as the handling type.
7. Set the leave type and time.
8. Optional: Enter the remarks, such as leave reason.
9. Click Save.

Note
The platform will start recalculating the attendance results according to the leave records.

900
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

24.6.7 Apply for Leave for Multiple Persons

You can apply for leave for multiple persons when they ask for leave or go on a business trip.
Before You Start
Make sure the required leave type have been defined. For more details, refer to Manage Leave
Type .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Records and
Handling .
2. Click Attendance Result on the left.
3. Click Batch Handle.
4. Select Apply for Leave as the handling type.
5. Choose one of the following operations for handing.
- Filtered Person(s): Apply leave for the persons whose attendance records are filtered when
searching attendance results. You need to set leave type and time.
- Select Person(s): Select one or more persons in person groups, and set leave type and time.

Note
Up to 10,000 persons can be selected.
6. Optional: Enter remarks, such as leave reasons.
7. Click Save.

24.6.8 Manually Calculate Attendance Results

If person group or shift schedule changes or abnormal attendance records are handled, you can
recalculate the attendance results according to the latest data. After re-calculation, the original
results will be replaced by new attendance results.
Steps

Note
HikCentral Professional can calculate the attendance data automatically at a fixed time pount (4
o'clock by default) every day. You can edit the time point in Attendance → Basic Settings →
General Rule → Auto-Calculate Attendance .
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Records and
Handling .
2. Click Attendance Result on the left.
3. Click Calculate Again to show the calculation settings window.
4. Set the start time and end time for attendance data.
5. Select All Persons or Specific Persons for attendance calculation.
6. Click OK.

901
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
It can only calculate the attendance data recorded within three months.

24.6.9 View Attendance Handling Records

Attendance handling records show the added attendance handling information, including check-
in/out correction and leave application. You can view the handling details, undo the handling
operations, or export the records here.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Records and
Handling → Handle Records to view the attendance handling records.
You can perform the following operations.
● Filter Handle Records: Click and set conditions (e.g., Name, ID, Time, etc.) to filter the handle
records.
● Undo Handling Operations: Select the handle record(s) and click Undo to cancel the handling

operations. The correction records will be deleted in the page and the previous attendance
status will also be restored.
● Export Handle Records: Click Export, select file format and items contained in the file to save the

handle records in CSV, PDF, or Excel format to the local PC.

24.6.10 Export Attendance Records

The attendance results and raw records can be exported in Excel, PDF, or CSV format and be saved
to the local PC. You can select the items to be included in the exported file.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Records and
Handling .
2. Click Attendance Result or Raw Records on the left.
3. In the filter panel, set the search conditions to filter attendance records.

Note
For more details, refer to Search Attendance Result or Search Raw Records .
4. Click Export in the upper-left corner.
5. Select the format of the exported file from Excel, PDF and CSV.
6. Select the data items to be exported.
7. Optional: Click or to adjust the order of the data items.
8. Click Export to export the attendance records and save to your PC.

902
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

24.7 Manage Attendance Reports

Attendance report is the statistics of the attendance results of the specific person group(s) or
person(s) in a certain time period. For example, the employer or related persons can view the
employees' attendance via attendance report and make it as the standard of performance
evaluation or pay calculation. You can define the display rules on the report, and manually export
report.

24.7.1 Set Display Rules for Attendance Report

You can configure the contents displayed in the attendance report, such as the company name,
logo, date format, time format, and marks of different attendance status.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic
Configuration → Report Display to set the following display rules.
Company Information
The company information (including company name and logo) will be displayed on the cover
page of the attendance report. You can customize the company name. You can also upload a
picture for the logo.

Note
Hover over your cursor on the uploaded logo picture, and you can click Delete Logo to delete
the picture.
Format of Date and Time
The formats of date and time may vary for the persons in different countries or regions. You can
set the date format and time format according to the actual needs.
Marks of Different Status
In the report, different marks indicate different status respectively, including late, absent, no
schedule, holiday, etc. You can customize these marks according to actual needs.

24.7.2 Send Attendance Report Regularly

You can set a regular report rule for specific person groups, and the platform will send an emails
attached with a report to the recipients daily, weekly, or monthly, showing the attendance records
of the persons in these person groups during specific periods.
Before You Start
● Set the email template with recipient information, subject, and content. For details, refer to Add

Email Template for Sending Report Regularly .

● Set the email parameters such as sender address, SMTP server address and port, etc. For details,

refer to Configure Email Account .

903
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
● One report can contain up to 10,000 records in total.
● The report is an Excel file.

1. In the upper-left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Attendance → Basic
Configuration .
2. Select Scheduled Report on the left to enter the report setting page.
3. Click Add (for first time) or click .
4. Create a descriptive name for the report.
5. In Report Type, select the report content, such as Daily Report, Start/End Work Time, etc.

Note
● You can select Custom Report as the report type and select a customized report from the
Custom Report drop-down list.
● You can click Add to create a new custom report. See instructions in Add a Semi-Custom
Report or Add a Custom Report .
6.
In Person Group, select the person group(s) and click to include the persons in the
person group(s) in this report.
7. In Person, click to include individual persons in this report.
8. Set the statistical cycle to By Day, By Week, or By Month and set the report time range and
sending time.
Daily Report
Daily report shows data on a daily basis. The platform will send one report at the sending
time every day. The report contains data recorded on the day prior to the current day.
For example, if you set the sending time to 20:00, the system will send a report at 20:00 every
day, containing the persons' attendance results between 00:00 and 24:00 prior to the current
day.
Weekly/Monthly Report
The platform will send one report at the sending time every week or every month. The report
contains the persons' attendance results of the recent one/two weeks or current/last month
of the sending date.
For example, for weekly report, if you set the sending time to 6:00 on Monday, the platform
will send a report at 6:00 in the morning on every Monday, containing persons' attendance
results of the last week or recent two weeks based on your selection.

904
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● Daily or weekly report is not available when you set report type to monthly or weekly report.

● To ensure the accuracy of the report, you are recommended to set the sending time at least

one hour later than the auto-calculation time of the attendance results. By default, the
platform will calculate the attendance results of the previous day at 4 A.M. every day. You can
change the auto calculation time in General Rule. See details in Set Auto-Calculation Time of
Attendance Results .
9. Optional: Click to set the effective period for the report.
10. Select CSV, Excel, or PDF as the format.

Note
You can select TXT as the format if the report type is Access Records and Custom Report.
11. Select a report language.
12. Optional: Select and enable the way of sending the report from Send Report via Email, Upload
to SFTP, and Save to Local Storage.

Note
To set up the SFTP or local storage, click > SFTP Settings or Configure Local Storage.
13. Optional: Select the email template from the drop-down list to define the recipient information
and email format.

Note
You can click Add to add a new email template. For setting the email template, refer to Set
Email Template .
14. Click Add to save the report schedule.
The report will be generated and sent to the recipient at the specified sending time.

24.7.3 Export Attendance Report

HikCentral Professional supports multiple report types and you can export a series of attendance
reports manually to view the employees' attendance data.
Steps
1. Select → All Modules → Attendance → Export Report .
2. Select Attendance Report on the left.
3. Select a report type.
4. Select the person groups and individual persons to be included in the report.

Note
For Department Report, you can only select person groups.
5. Set the time range of this report according to the report type.

905
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Monthly ● By Calendar Month: Select a calendar month as the report time range.
Reports ● Custom Time Period: Report time range is 30 days from the start date
you specify.
Weekly ● By Week: Select a calendar week as the report time range.
Reports ● Custom Time Period: Report time range is 7 days from the start date you
specify.
Other Report Select the start date and end date of the report.
Types
6. Select CSV, Excel, or PDF as the format of the report.

Note
You can select TXT as the format if the report type is Access Records.
7. Click Export.
The report will be generated and downloaded to the local PC.

24.7.4 Custom Report

If the predefined attendance report types in the platform cannot meet your needs, you can
customize your own report types.
● Add a Semi-Custom Report : Customize a report based on a predefined report.
● Add a Custom Report : Create a completely new report with more flexibility on data selection
and presentation.

Add a Semi-Custom Report

You can create a semi-custom attendance report based on the predefined report type in the
platform. After creating a semi-custom report, you can export the report manually or set a
schedule to send the report to your email regularly.
Steps
1. Select → All Modules → Attendance → Export Report .
2. Select Custom Report on the left.
3. Select the Semi-Custom Report tab.
4. Click Add.
5. Create a descriptive name for the report in the Report Name field.
6. Select a predefined report type from the Report Source Type drop-down list.
Example
For example, if you want to customize a report based on the Department Report, you can select
Department Report and then customize it in the following steps.
7. Select the data items you want to include in the report from Available Fields.

906
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● Selected data items will show in Selected Fields.

● You can drag the items in Selected Fields to set the order of the items.

8. Select a sorting rule for records from the Table Display Rule drop-down list.
9. Click Add to save the semi-custom report, or click Add and Continue to add another one.
10. Optional: Perform further operations.
Edit Report Click on report name to edit it.
Delete Report Select the report(s) and click Delete to delete the selected report(s).
Export Report Click and specify the target persons, time range, and report format
to export the report to the PC.
Send Report You can set a schedule to send the report regularly. See details in
Regularly Send Attendance Report Regularly .

Add a Custom Report

You can create a fully-customized attendance report. After creating a custom report, you can
export the report manually or set a schedule to send the report to your email regularly.
Steps
1. Select → All Modules → Attendance → Export Report .
2. Select Custom Report on the left.
3. Select the Custom Report tab.
4. Click Add.
5. Create a descriptive name for the report in the Report Name field.
6. Choose whether to merge the data of the same person/department/date.
7. Select a sorting rule for records from the Table Display Rule drop-down list.
8. Select the data items you want to include in the report from Available Fields.

Note
● Selected data items will show in Selected Fields.

● You can drag the items in Selected Fields to set the order of the items.

9. Click Add to save the custom report, or click Add and Continue to add another one.
10. Optional: Perform further operations.
Edit Report Click on report name to edit it.
Delete Report Select the report(s) and click Delete to delete the selected report(s).
Export Report Click and specify the target persons, time range, and report format
to export the report to the PC.

907
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Send Report You can set a schedule to send the report regularly. See details in
Regularly Send Attendance Report Regularly .

908
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 25 Video Intercom Management

Video intercom is an audiovisual communication and security technique used in a building or a
small collection of buildings. With microphones and cameras at both sides, it enables the
intercommunication via video and audio signals and provides a safe and easy monitoring solution
for apartment buildings and private houses.
On the Web Client, you can add video intercom devices to the system, group resources (e.g., doors
and cameras) into different areas, configure call schedules, link resources (cameras, persons, and
doorbells) with indoor station, manage notices, call indoor stations, and view recents. After
settings related parameters, the person can view the live video of the camera, call indoor station,
answer call via Control Client, etc.

25.1 Flow Chart of Video Intercom

For the first time, you can follow the flow chart to perform configurations and operations.

909
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 25-1 Flow Chart of Video Intercom

● Add Device: Add video intercom devices (such as main station, outer door station, indoor
station, and door station) to HikCentral Professional and configure device parameters remotely.
For more details, refer to Manage Video Intercom Device and Configure Device Parameters .
● Group Resources into Areas: After adding the devices to the system, you need to group the
devices' resources (such as doors and cameras) into different areas according to the resources'
locations. For details, refer to Area Management .
● Manage Person: Add person group and person to the system, and set credential information. For
details, refer to Person Management .
● Basic Settings: Add call recipients and call schedule templates, and configure call parameters.
For details, refer to Basic Settings of the Platform .
● Manage Device: Set location information for video intercom devices and apply the settings to
devices. For details, refer to Manage Video Intercom Device .
● Video Intercom Application: Add call schedules and apply them to devices, link resources
(camera, person, and doorbell) to indoor stations. For details, refer to Video Intercom
Application .

910
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● Configure Event / Alarm: Configure event and alarm for video intercom resources. For more
details, refer to Event and Alarm .
● Manage Notice: Add notices and apply them to indoor stations. For details, refer to Manage
Notices .
● Apply Advertisements to Door Stations: Apply pictures or video to door stations as
advertisements. See Apply Advertisements to Door Stations .
● Manage Call: Call indoor stations and view recents. Fore details, refer to Call & Talk .
● Operations on Control Client: After the above configurations on the Web Client, you can control
door status during live view, search event and alarm, call indoor station and answer call. For
more details, refer to User Manual of HikCentral Professional Control Client.

Note
The doors of video intercom device can be used similarly as the doors of access control device.
For more details about related configurations and operations of the doors, refer to Flow Chart of
Door Access Control .

25.2 Video Intercom Overview

On the Video Intercom Overview page, you can view resource health status and alarm input
details. You can also view and export statistics of calls and talks, and of notices in a specific period.
In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom →
Overview .

Figure 25-2 Video Intercom Overview

Perform the following operations as needed.

911
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Operation Description
View Resource Status In Health Status, click on the number under the resource type or
the number besides Abnormal to go to the Maintenance page to
view details of resources status or alarm input.
Go to Maintenance In the upper-​left corner, click Go to Maintenance to enter the
Maintenance module. For more about the Maintenance module,
refer to Maintenance .
Filter Video Intercom Data Click and select a period to view the data of this period.
Export Video Intercom Data Click to select a file format and click Export to export the data
generated in the selected period.

25.3 Basic Settings of the Platform

You can add platform users as recipients of calls from devices. After adding recipients, when
someone calls the platform, the recipient can receive the call. You can also add a call schedule
template which defines when door stations can call indoor stations or call center. Besides, you can
configure general parameters, including the storage location of configuration data and records, call
parameters (such as the ring tone, auto hang up duration, and the maximum speaking duration
with the device), and you can enable the function of receiving calls.

25.3.1 Add Call Recipients

After adding call recipients, when someone calls the system, the added recipient can receive and
answer the call.

Note
Before recipients can receive calls form devices on the platform, you need to enable Receive Calls
on the Call Parameter page. For details about enabling this function, refer to Configure General
Parameters .

In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Basic
Settings → Call Recipient .
Click Add to add recipients.
Select users to receive calls and supported calling devices, and then click Add.
On the Call Recipients page, perform the following operations as needed.
● Check one or more call recipient and click Delete to delete the call recipient(s), or click →
Delete All to delete all call recipients.
● In the upper-right corner, enter the keyword to search for specific users.

912
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

25.3.2 Add Call Schedule Template

Call schedule template defines when door stations can call indoor stations or call center. For
example, if a resident is absent from home during workdays, while he/she is at home during
weekends and holidays, the resident can customize a schedule template which call the
management center during workdays and call the indoor station during weekends and holidays.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Basic
Settings → Call Schedule Template .
2. Click to add a schedule template.
The two default templates, namely All-Day Call Schedule Template for Indoor Station and All-Day
Call Schedule Template for Indoor Station, cannot be edited or deleted.
3. Create a name for the template.
4. Optional: Select an existing template from the Copy from drop-down list.
5. Select Indoor Station or Management Center.

Note
Select Indoor Station if there is someone indoor who can answer the call from door station
while select Management Center if there is no one can answer the call.
6. Edit weekly schedule.
Draw Task Click a grid or drag the cursor on the time line to draw a time period during
Time which the task is activated.
Set Precise Move the cursor to a drawn period, and then adjust the period in the pop-
Time
up dialog shown as .
Erase Task Click Erase, and then click a grid or drag the cursor on the time line to erase
Time the drawn time period.
7. Optional: Click Add Holiday to select an existed holiday template, or click Add to add a new
template. For detailed information, see Set Holiday .
8. Click Add to save the template.
9. Optional: Select a template from the template list, and then click to delete it.
What to do next
Set call schedule for indoor stations and call center to define in which time period door stations
can call indoor stations or call center. For details, refer to Add Call Schedule for Door Stations .

913
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

25.3.3 Configure General Parameters

You can configure general parameters, including the storage location of configuration data and
records, and call parameters (such as the ring tone, auto hang up duration, and the maximum
speaking duration with the device), and you can enable the function of receiving calls.
In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Basic
Settings → General .
Configure the following parameters as needed, then click Save to save settings.
Storage of Configuration Data
You can store the configuration data of video intercom.
Select Local Storage or pStor from the drop-down list to store the records on the local PC or on
the pStor server. After that, you can view and select the corresponding resource pool.
Storage of Records
You can store the records generated in the operation of video intercom, such as the records of
linking the video or audio files to call logs.
Select Local Storage or pStor from the drop-down list to store the records on the local PC or on
the pStor server. After that, you can view and select the corresponding resource pool.

Note
● For Local Storage, make sure you have enabled local storage and added the local resource
pool. For details, refer to Configure Storage for Imported Pictures and Files .
● For pStor, make sure you have added pStor as the recording server. For details, refer to Add
pStor .

Call Parameter
Ringtone
Click to select a ring tone and click Play to play the ring tone.
Auto Hang Up After
The call will be hung up automatically after the duration.
Max. Speaking Duration with Indoor Stations/Door Stations/Access Control Devices
Enter the maximum duration during which you can speak with the device.
Receive Calls
Switch on Receive Calls to receive the calling notification from the device to the platform.

25.4 Configure Device Parameters

After adding the video intercom devices, you can configure parameters for them remotely,
including device time, maintenance settings, etc.

914
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

After adding a video intercom device, click in the Operation column to configure the device.

Note
The parameters may vary with different models of devices.

Time
You can view the time zone where the device locates and set the following parameters.
Device Time
Click Device Time field to customize time for the device.
Sync with Server Time
Synchronize the device time with that of the SYS server of the system.

Call Management Center

For door station, you can set this function switch to on and select a shortcut button. When the
configured button on the device is pressed, it will call management center. The default button is 1.

Note
This should be supported by the device.

Card Swiping
For outer door station and door station which supports Mifare encryption, you can enable Mifare
Encryption and select the sector. Only the card with the same encrypted sector can be granted by
swiping the card on the card reader.
Related Cameras
For indoor station, you can relate the camera(s) with it to view the video of the related camera(s)
on the indoor station. You can also delete the related camera(s). Up to 16 related cameras are
supported.
Maintenance
You can reboot a device remotely, and restore it to its default settings.
Reboot
Reboot the device.
Restore Default
Restore the device to its default settings. The device should be activated after restoring.

More
For more configurations, you can click Configure to go to Remote Configuration page of the device.

915
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

25.5 Manage Video Intercom Device

You can set location information for video intercom devices. After setting location information, you
need to apply settings to all devices or the specified device(s).

25.5.1 Set Locations for Video Intercom Devices

You can add single device or batch add devices that have been added to the platform, and set
location information for the added device(s).
Before You Start
Make sure you have added video intercom devices to the system.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom →
Device Management .
2. Add the device(s).
- Add single device.
a. Click Add to add the device which has been added to the platform.
b. Select a device type and a device.
c. Set the location of the device, and click Add.
- Add devices in a batch.
a. Click → Batch Add to add devices which have been added to the platform.
b. Select the device type.
c. Select the adding mode to add device.

Manually Select i. Select devices manually in the drop-down list.

ii. Set required information.

Note
- If the community is divided into different sections,
enter the corresponding number. If not,enter 1.
- If the building is composed of only one unit, enter 1.

Batch Import i. Click Download Template to download the template file

to your PC.
ii. Open the downloaded template file and enter the
required information.
iii. Click to select the file finished in the previous step.
d. Click Add.
3. Click a device name.
4. In Device Location Information area, set parameters as needed.

916
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● If the community is divided into different sections, enter the corresponding number. If
not,enter 1.
● If the building is composed of only one unit, enter 1.
● The parameters displayed vary with device types.

25.5.2 Apply Location to Video Intercom Devices

After setting location information for video intercom devices, you need to apply settings to devices.
In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Device
Management .
Click Apply Settings.
Select the device(s) to apply.
All Devices
By default, the changed settings will be applied to all devices. If you check Apply (Initial), first
clear all former information applied to the devices, and then apply all settings configured on the
platform this time to the devices.
Specified Device(s)
Click to select devices. The settings will be applied to the selected device(s).
Apply (Initial)
First clear all former linkages applied to the devices, and then apply all linkages configured on
the platform this time to the devices. This mode is mainly used for first-time deployment.
Click Apply to apply settings to the device(s).
The procedure of applying information will be displayed in the pop-up window, and the reasons for
failures will be displayed in the Reason column. Move the cursor over , and click Retry to apply
the settings to devices again. Also, move the cursor over , and click View Details to view the
details. You can also click Retry to re-apply settings to devices.

25.6 Video Intercom Application

You can configure call schedule templates to define when indoor stations and call centers can
receive the call from door stations. After you configure the templates, you can add the templates
for door stations so that they will distribute calls to indoor stations or call centers as configured in
the schedule template. Finally, you can apply call schedule to devices, so devices such as indoor/
door stations and call centers can execute commands from the platform. Besides, after adding
indoor station to the system, you can link camera with the added indoor station to view the video
of the related camera(s) on the indoor station. You can also link single person to indoor stations for
calling residents. In addition, you can relate a doorbell with an indoor station. When the Call

917
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Management Center function of this doorbell is disabled, you can call the related indoor station by
the doorbell.

25.6.1 Add Call Schedule for Door Stations

You can add call schedule for door stations to define when door stations can call indoor stations or
call centers.
Before You Start
Make sure you have configured call schedule templates. For detailed information, see Add Call
Schedule Template .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Video
Intercom Application → Door Station Call Schedule Settings .
2. Click Add to add a door station call schedule.
3. Select a door station in the list.
4. Select a schedule template and room number for each button.

Note
As long as a template contains calling the call center, the Room can not be selected. See Add Call
Schedule Template for details about how to set a call schedule template.
5. Optional: Click to view the schedule details.
6. Click Add to save the schedule.
The added schedule will be displayed in the list.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Filter Door ● Click on the top right to set conditions such as Door Station, Location
Stations Information, or Application Status to filter door stations.
● Click Reset to reset search conditions.
Delete Door Select door stations and click Delete or click → Delete All to delete the
Stations door stations.
What to do next
You can apply call schedules to devices. For detailed information, see Apply Call Schedule to Door
Stations .

25.6.2 Apply Call Schedule to Door Stations

You can apply call schedules to door stations so that the communication between devices and the
platform will be supported.

918
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

Make sure that you have added call schedules for door stations. For detailed information, see Add
Call Schedule for Door Stations .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Video
Intercom Application → Door Station Call Schedule Settings .
2. Click Apply Settings on top of the device list page.
3. Select All Door Stations or Specified Door Station.
4. Optional: If you choose Specified Door Station, select door station(s) or click to batch select
the door station(s) that you want to apply the call schedule to and click Add.

Note
Only the door stations with added call schedules will be displayed.
5. Optional: Check Apply (Initial) to clear all former call schedules applied to the devices, and then
apply all call schedules configured on the platform.
6. Click Apply.
The procedure of applying information will be displayed in the pop-up window, and the reasons
will be displayed in the Reason column. Move the cursor over , and click Retry to apply the
schedules to devices again. Also, you can move the cursor over , and click View Details to
view the details. You can also click Retry to re-apply the schedule to devices.

25.6.3 Link Resources with Indoor Stations

After adding an indoor station to the system, you can relate cameras with the added indoor station
to view video of the related camera(s) by the indoor station. You can also link single person with an
indoor station or multiple persons with the indoor station(s) at a time, so that linked persons can
calling residents. Besides, you can relate a doorbell with an indoor station.

Link Doorbell to an Indoor Station

You can link a doorbell with an indoor station. If Call Management Center function of this doorbell
is disabled, you can call the linked indoor station by the doorbell.
If you have added the doorbell to the system, you can link the doorbell with an indoor station as
the following steps. If not, you can also link the doorbell with an indoor station when adding the
doorbell (see Manage Video Intercom Device for more details).
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Video
Intercom Application → Link Doorbell to Indoor Station .
2. Click Link to enter Link Doorbell with Indoor Station page.
The added doorbells are displayed in the list.

919
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

3. From drop-down list, select the doorbell to be linked to the indoor station.
4. From drop-down list, select the corresponding indoor station that the doorbell is to be linked to
and click Add.

Note
The location information of the indoor station is same as that of the doorbell.
5. Optional: Check one or more doorbells and click Unlink to delete the doorbell(s).
Result
The doorbell will be linked to the selected indoor station(s).

Link Cameras to an Indoor Station

After adding indoor station to the system, you can link cameras to added indoor stations to view
video of the linked camera(s) on the indoor station. Up to 16 cameras can be linked to one indoor
station.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added indoor station(s) to the system. For details, refer to Add a Video

Intercom Device by IP Address .

● Make sure the camera(s) to be linked are correctly installed and are added to the system by

Hikvision Private Protocol/Open Network Video Interface Protocol.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Video
Intercom Application → Link Camera to Indoor Station .
2. Click Link.

920
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 25-3 Add Linked Camera

Note
You can also link camera to indoor station in the configuration page of the indoor station. For
details, refer to Configure Device Parameters .
3. In the Indoor Station list, select an indoor station.

Note
You can enter a keyword to search for the target indoor station(s). And the keyword of
corresponding device(s) will be displayed in red.
4. In the Camera list, check one or more cameras.

Note
No more than 16 cameras can be linked. You can enter a keyword to search for the target
camera(s). And the keyword of corresponding camera(s) will be displayed in red.
5. Click Add.

Note
You can also delete the related camera(s) in the configuration page of the indoor station.
6. Click Apply Settings to apply the settings to devices.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.

921
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Filter Indoor ● Click on the top right to set conditions such as Indoor Station,
Stations Location Information, or Application Status to filter door stations.
● Click Reset to reset search conditions.
Unlink Doorbell Select indoor stations and click Unlink.
from Indoor
Stations
View Linked On the page of the added indoor station list, click to view linked
Cameras cameras.
Change Linked On the page of the added indoor station list, click an indoor station
Cameras name to change linked cameras.

Link Persons to an Indoor Station

The person needs to be linked to an indoor station, which is used for calling residents. You can link
single person to an indoor station or multiple persons to indoor station(s) at a time. Here we
introduce you how to batch link persons to indoor station(s).
Steps

Note
For details about linking single person to an indoor station, refer to Add a Person Manually .
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Video
Intercom Application → Link Person to Indoor Station .
2. Click Link.

922
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 25-4 Add Linked Person

3. Select an indoor station.

Note
Up to 10 persons can be linked to one indoor station and the person cannot be linked to
multiple indoor stations.
4. Click Add to select persons to be linked to the indoor station.
5. Click Add.
The linked person information will be applied to the indoor station(s).
6. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Filter Indoor ● Click on the top right to set conditions such as device name,
Stations location, or person name to filter indoor stations.
● Click Reset to reset search conditions.
Unlink Person from Select indoor stations and click Unlink.
Indoor Stations
View Linked Person On the page of the added indoor station list, click to view linked
persons.
Change Linked On the page of the added indoor station list, click the name of the
Persons indoor station to change linked persons.

923
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

25.7 Apply Data to Indoor Station

The platform supports applying notices and software packages to indoor stations. This is used for
scenes where you want to notify people an emergency in a batch, or install a software on indoor
stations in a batch. After applying a software package to the indoor stations, the software will be
installed automatically.

25.7.1 Manage Notices

There are four types of notice, including advertisement, property information, alarm, and
notification. They are used for sending information to residents. You can add and apply notices to
indoor stations. For example, when an emergency occur, you can add and apply a notice to indoor
stations to inform residents for timely actions. After adding and applying notices, you can delete,
filter, and export them. You can also copy a notice and apply it to indoor stations conveniently.
Before applying the copied notice, you can also edit the notice.

Add and Apply a Notice

You add and apply notices to indoor stations. After adding and applying notices, you can delete,
filter, and export them.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Apply
Data to Indoor Station → Apply Notice .
2. Click Add to add a notice.
3. Create a title of the notice.
4. Select a notice type.
5. Optional: Click to add pictures.

Note
Up to 6 pictures can be added, and each picture should be no larger than 512 KB. The picture
format should be JPG.
6. Enter the content of the notice.
7. Select indoor stations to receive the notice.
8. Click Preview to preview the notice.
9. Click Apply to apply the notice to indoor stations.
10. Perform the following operations.
Delete Notice Check one or more notices and click Delete.
Export Notice Check one or more notices and click Export to export notice information
to the Excel/CVS file.

924
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Filter Notices In the upper-right corner, click to set filter conditions and click Filter.
View Notice Click to view the basic information (title, notice type, etc.) and
Details application status.

Note
In the Application Status page, you can also apply or search notices.

Copy and Apply Notice to Indoor Stations

You can copy a notice and apply it to indoor stations conveniently. Before application, you can also
edit the copied notice.

Note
Make sure you have added and applied a notice to indoor stations.

In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Apply
Data to Indoor Station → Apply Notice .
The following are two methods for copying and applying the notice(s).
1. If notice information needs no change, check one or more notices, and click Copy and Apply.
The checked notice(s) will be copied and applied to indoor stations directly.
2. If notice information needs change, click to copy the current notice and edit the notice as
needed. Click Apply to apply the notice to indoor stations.

25.7.2 Apply Software Package to Indoor Station

You can apply software package to selected indoor stations and install the software automatically.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added indoor station(s) to the system. For details, refer to Add a Video
Intercom Device by IP Address .
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Apply
Data to Indoor Station → Apply Software Package .
2. Click Apply Software Package on the top.
3. Select All Indoor Stations or Specified Indoor Station.

Note
If you select Specified Indoor Station, check indoor stations and click .

925
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 25-5 Apply Software Package

4. Select an application type.
APK
You need to upload an APK file so that the platform can send it to the device.
URI
Enter a URI so that the device will download the package on the URI and install it.
5. Click Apply.
The device will install the software package automatically.

926
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

25.8 Apply Advertisements to Door Stations

You can add picture(s) or a video in the advertisements, then apply the advertisements to door
stations. After applying advertisements, you can filter or delete them.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Apply
Advertisements to Door Stations .
2. Click Apply Advertisements to Door Stations.
3. Select the available door station in the left list and click to add it to the right list.
4. Add picture(s) or a video for an advertisement to be applied to door stations.

Note
For the picture advertisement, you can add more than one picture. For the video advertisement,
you can add only one video.
- a.
Click Picture → to add picture(s) for an advertisement.
b. Set the duration for picture(s) switching interval.
c. Set the time period to play the added picture(s).

Note
Click Add to add the time period if needed.
- a.
Click Video → to add a video for an advertisement.
b. Set the time period to play the added video.

Note
Click Add to add the time period if needed.
5. The playing schedules set for the picture(s) and the video in the advertisement will be displayed
by different color blocks.
6. Click Apply.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Filter Click and set filter conditions such as device name, and then click
Advertisement Filter.
Delete Select one or multiple advertisements in the list and click Delete to
Advertisement delete the advertisements. Also, you can click Delete All to delete all of
the advertisements.

927
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

25.9 Call & Talk

In Call & Talk module, you can view contacts of indoor stations in a specific unit and call an indoor
station conveniently. You can also view and export recents which include details such as the device
name, call status, and device location. Besides, you can download recorded audios to the local PC.

25.9.1 Call an Indoor Stations

You can view names and locations of indoor stations, and person information. You can also call
indoor stations directly on the platform in situations such as when the call the to the door station
is failed and when an emergency occurs.
In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Video
Intercom → Contacts .
On the left, select an unit. The indoor stations in this unit will be listed on the right. In the upper-
right corner, you can also set conditions and enter the keyword to search indoor stations.
Click to call the indoor station.

25.9.2 View Recents

You can view and export call logs which include details such as the device name, call status, and
device location. You can also download recorded audios to the local PC.
In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Video Intercom → Video
Intercom → Recents .
Perform the following operations as needed.

Operation Description
Export Logs Check one or more devices and click Export to export call logs to
in Excel/CSV file format.
Filter Logs Click to set conditions and click Filter to search logs.
Download Recorded Audio Click to download the recorded audio in MP4 format to the
local PC.

928
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 26 Alarm Detection

A security control device detects persons, vehicles, or other emergency events in the detection
region, and reports event/alarm information (such as location) to the security personnel.
On the Web Client, after adding a security control device to the system, you need to group the
device's alarm inputs into areas on the platform. You also need to set one arming schedule for the
alarm inputs in a security control partition (area) which defines when and how to arm the alarm
inputs in this security control partition (area).
For example, area 1 is created to manage all the resources on the first floor. If there is one security
control device mounted on the first floor, you need to add its zones (alarm inputs) into area 1 first,
link the zones with security control partitions (areas) and set arming schedules for these security
control partitions (areas). After that, the zones in different partitions (areas) can be armed
according to the schedules respectively.

26.1 Flow Chart of Alarm Detection

The following flow chart shows the process of the configurations and operations of alarm
detection.

929
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 26-1 Flow Chart of Alarm Detection

● Add Devices: Add security control devices to detect persons, vehicles, or other emergency
events in the detection region. And then add alarm inputs to areas for management. Refer to
Manage Security Control Device and Add Alarm Input to Area for details.
● Add Security Control Partitions (Areas) from Devices: Add alarm inputs and partitions (areas)
from devices for arming or disarming zones, bypassing zones, and clearing alarms. Refer to Add
Security Control Partitions (Area) from Device for details.
● Set the Arming Schedule Template: Set an arming schedule template for a specified partition
(area) to specify the arming schedule of the alarm inputs in this partition (area). Refer to
Configure Arming Schedule Template for details.
● Set Events and Alarms: Set event and alarm parameters and linkage actions to view event and
alarm details on the Client, timely remind the security personnel to handle related issues, or
search history events and alarms when an emergency occurs. Refer to Event and Alarm for
details.

930
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

26.2 Alarm Detection Overview

On the Alarm Detection Overview page, you can view the health status of security control devices
and alarm detection event details.
In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Alarm Detection → Alarm
Detection Overview .

Figure 26-2 Alarm Detection Overview

Perform the following operations as needed.

Operation Description
View Resource Status In Health Status, click on the number under the resource type or
the number besides Exception to view their details.
Go to Maintenance Click Go to Maintenance to enter the Maintenance module. For
more information about the Maintenance module, refer to
Maintenance .
View Alarm Detection Events In Alarm Detection Event area, you can view the event details,
including the event time, event source, time, status, and available
operations.

931
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

26.3 Add Security Control Partitions (Area) from Device

After adding security control devices to the platform, you need to import the partitions (area)
configured on the device to the platform for further operations, including configuring arming
schedules for the partitions (areas), arming/disarming partitions (areas), bypassing zones, clearing
alarms, etc.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Alarm Detection →
Partition (Area) .
2. Select a device from the list on the left and click Add to show the Add Security Control
Partition (Area) pane.
In the Partition (Area) list, all the security control devices with partitions (areas) which are not
added to the platform will be displayed.
3. Select the partitions (areas) that you want to add to the platform.
4. Optional: Switch on Import Alarm Inputs if you want to add the alarm inputs (zones) in the
selected partitions (areas) to the area.

Note
After adding the alarm inputs to the area, you can manage them by different areas.
5. Click Save.
The partitions (areas) will be displayed in the partition (area) list.
6. Optional: Perform one or more of the following operations.
Edit Security Click the name of a partition (area) to display the partition (area) details and
Control then edit its name, partition No., or set the arming schedule for it (see
Partition details in Configure Arming Schedule Template ).
(Area)
Note
For the partition (area) of AX security control panel, you cannot edit the
arming schedule via the platform. Only editing on the device is supported.

Delete Select one or multiple partitions (areas) and click Delete.

Security
Control
Partitions
(Areas)
Bypass Zone When some exception occurs in one zone, and other zones can work
normally, you need to bypass the abnormal zone to turn off the protection of
it. Otherwise, you cannot arm the security control partition (area) which the
zone belongs to. To bypass the zone, click to expand the partition (area)
details, and click in the Operation column of the Alarm Input list to bypass
the alarm input.

932
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

When you want to recover the zone that is bypassed to make it work
normally, click in the Operation column to recover it.
Arm or After arming the partitions (areas), the platform can receive the triggered
Disarm alarms in the partitions (areas).
Security There are three arming modes available.
Control
Partition Note
(Area) The supported arming modes are displayed according to the device's
capability.
● Away Arm: When all people in the detection area leave, turn on the Away
mode to arm all zones in the area after the defined dwell time.
● Stay Arm: It is used when people stay inside the detection area. Turn on

the Stay mode to turn on all the perimeter burglary detectors (such as
perimeter detectors, magnetic contacts, curtain detectors in the balcony).
Meanwhile, the detectors inside the detection area are bypassed (such as
PIR detectors). People can move inside the area and alarms will not be
triggered.
● Instant Arm: It is used after people leave the detection area. The zone will

be armed immediately without delay.

In the partition (area) list, select the partitions (areas) and click these
buttons above to arm the partitions (areas), or click Disarm to disarm them.
Clear Alarms Select one or multiple partitions (areas) and click Clear Alarms to clear the
generated alarms.
Add Partition Select a partition (area) and click Set Geographic Location to add it on the
(Area) on map. See details in Add Hot Spot on Map .
Map

26.4 Configure Arming Schedule Template

The arming schedule defines the arming mode in different periods for the partitions of the added
security control devices. You can set a weekly schedule to specify periods for arming in Instant
mode, arming in Away mode, or arming in Stay mode. The system predefines two default arming
schedule templates: All-Day Template and Weekday Template. You can also add a customized
template as needed.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Alarm Detection →
Arming Schedule Template .
2. Click to enter the Add Arming Schedule Template page.
3. Enter a name for the template.

933
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Optional: In Copy from field, select a defined template from the drop-down list to copy the
settings.
5. Select an arming mode and drag the mouse on the time bar to draw a time period.

Note
Up to 8 time periods can be set for each day.
Instant Arming
It is used after people leave the detection area. The zone will be armed immediately without
delay.
Away Arming
When all people in the detection area leave, turn on the Away mode to arm all zones in the
area after the defined dwell time.
Stay Arming
It is used when people stay inside the detection area. Turn on the Stay mode to turn on all
the perimeter burglary detectors (such as perimeter detectors, magnetic contacts, curtain
detectors in the balcony). Meanwhile, the detectors inside the detection area are bypassed
(such as PIR detectors). People can move inside the area and alarms will not be triggered.
6. Optional: Click Erase and click on the drawn time period to clear it.
7. Click Add.
The arming schedule template will be displayed on the arming schedule template list.

934
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 27 Digital Signage Management

Digital signage management includes managing materials, programs, schedules, release, etc. It is
widely applied to the industries of entertainment, finance, and traffic for information release. You
can upload local and dynamic materials to the platform for creating programs. The programs can
be released and played on the terminals according to the configured schedule. Also, the platform
supports more other functions including cutting in programs and cutting in text messages.

27.1 Flow Chart

For the first time, you can follow the flow chart below.

Figure 27-1 Flow Chart

● Add Terminal & pStor: You should add digital signage terminals and pStor to the platform. For
details, refer to Manage Digital Signage Terminals and Add pStor .
● Add Material: Material is used for creating programs. You can upload local materials from local
PC, or create dynamic materials in the platform. For details, refer to Material Management .
● Create Program: You can create different programs including digital signage program, video wall
program, attendance program, and people counting program in the platform according to the
required application scenarios. For details, refer to Program Management .

935
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● Create Schedule: You should define a playing schedule for the added programs, which will then
be played according to the scheduled time or method on the terminals. For details, refer to
Schedule Management .
● Approve: The added materials, programs and schedules should be approved before they are
used. For details, refer to Approve .
● Release: You can view the release details and release progress of multiple tasks such as schedule
releasing. After being released, the related task can take effect on the terminals. For details,
refer to Release Management .

27.2 Digital Signage Overview

You can have an overview of the functions about digital signage and statistics for materials,
programs, etc.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Digital Signage
Overview .

Figure 27-2 Digital Signage Overview

Table 27-1 Home Page Description

Number Description
1 Displays different applications of the digital signage module, including
attendance application, people counting application, etc. Click Start Now to pop

936
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Number Description
up the Digital Signage Wizard on the right side of the page, and you can use the
digital signage function according to the wizard.
2 An overview of resources added to the platform, including material statistics,
program statistics, schedule statistics, and release statistics.
● Material Statistics: Displays the total number and the types of the added

materials, as well as the corresponding number and proportion of each type

of materials.
● Program Statistics: Displays the total number and the types of the created

programs, as well as the corresponding number and proportion of each type

of programs.
● Schedule Statistics: Displays the total number and the types of the schedules

as well as the corresponding number and proportion of each type of

schedules.
● Release Statistics: Displays different releasing status such as Releasing,

Released and Releasing Failed, and their corresponding number and

proportion.

27.3 Switch Application Mode

You can switch between the Digital Signage mode and the Interactive Flat Panel mode. In the
Digital Signage mode, you can create, release, and control programs on the device. In the
Interactive Flat Panel mode, you can apply text message to the device and manage applications on
the device.
In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Mode Switch or
→ All Modules → Interactive Flat Panel → Mode Switch to enter the Select Application Mode
page.

937
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 27-3 Select Application Mode

Select a mode according to the device type you have purchased, and click Confirm to go to the
page of the selected mode.

Note
For accessing the digital signage module for the first time, a prompt will appear at the top of the
module page to remind you to switch the application mode.

27.4 Basic Settings

In Basic Settings module, you can set the application mode, configure material storage location,
and configure video walls.

27.4.1 Set Material Storage Location

The materials uploaded can be saved to the local storage or pStor server.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Basic
Settings → Material Storage Location .
2. Select a storage location from the drop-down list.

938
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
To select pStor as the storage location, make sure you have added pStor servers to the platform.
For details, refer to Add pStor .
3. Click Save to save the above settings.

27.4.2 Configure Video Wall

A video wall is made up of multiple terminals. After adding more than one terminals to the
platform, you can configure video walls with custom dimensions (row × column).
Before You Start
Make sure you have added at least two terminals to the platform and have enabled the time
synchronization of NTP server. See details in Add Digital Signage Terminal and Set NTP .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Basic
Settings → Video Wall Configuration .
2. Click Add.

Figure 27-4 Add Video Wall

3. Specify the video wall dimension (row × column).
4. Enter the video wall name.
5. Select Landscape Mode or Portrait Mode as the screen type.

939
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

6. In Linked Device area, drag the devices from the device list to the screen on the right.

Note
The digital signage player is not supported.
7. Optional: Click Clear Linkage to clear the linked devices from the screen.
8. Optional: Enter descriptions of the video wall.
9. Click OK.
10. Optional: After adding video walls, you can perform the following operations.
Switch Display Click / to display the added video walls in thumbnail/list
Mode mode.
Edit Video Wall ● In thumbnail mode, click the video wall card to enter the video
Information wall information page and edit the information.
● In list mode, click the name of the video wall to enter the video
wall information page and edit the information.
Delete Video Walls Select one or multiple added video walls and click Delete to delete
the selected video walls.
Set Video Wall Select one or multiple added video walls, click Video Wall Display
Display Parameters Control to set the display parameters.
Refresh Video Wall Click Refresh to refresh the video wall list.
List
Search Video Walls ● Click , set the search conditions (video wall dimension and
screen type), and click Search to search for the target video
walls.
● Enter a keyword in the search box to search for the target video
walls.

27.5 Material Management

Material is used for creating programs. The platform supports various types of materials such as
picture, video, and audio to meet with different program requirements. You can upload materials
from local PC to the platform, or create dynamic materials in the platform. After uploading the
materials, you can mange them including editing, searching, replacing, etc.

27.5.1 Upload Local Material

You can upload local materials which can be used for creating programs. The materials supported
to be uploaded include picture, video, audio, document, APP, etc. For the uploaded materials, you
can perform more operations, including adding to favorites, editing, downloading, deleting, etc.

940
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Materials .
2. Click Upload Local Material and select one or more materials to be uploaded from the local PC.

Table 27-2 Supported Material Types and Formats

Material Types Formats
Picture BMP, JPG, PNG, GIF, JPEG
Video ASF, AVI, MPG, 3GP, MOV, MKV, WMV, FLV,
MP4, RM, RMVB
Audio MP3, WAV, WMA
Document TXT, PDF, EXCEL, WORD, PPT
Webpage HTML, HTM
APP APK, ZIP

Note
● A single material should be smaller than 4 GB. The names of any two materials cannot be the

same.
● Up to 1,000 materials can be uploaded to the platform at a time. Up to 10,000 materials can

be stored in the platform.

3. Click Open.
The selected local materials start to be uploaded. Meanwhile, the uploading progress and the
failure details will be displayed (when uploading fails).

Note
● For those materials that fail to be uploaded, click to upload again or click to replace the
material.
● For those materials with the failure reason "duplicated material", you can replace the material

or click Close to cancel uploading.

4. Optional: After uploading the materials, perform the following operations if needed.
Add to/Cancel Click to add the material to favorites or move it from favorites.
Favorites
Edit Material Check one or multiple materials, and click Edit to edit the selected
materials, such as editing the name and the property.
Delete Material Check one or multiple materials, and click Delete to delete the selected
materials.

941
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You cannot delete materials that have been added to a program or
materials that are in the process of releasing.

Download Click to download single material to the local PC.

Material
View Large Click to view large picture of the material.
Picture
Refresh Material Click Refresh to refresh the material list.
Switch Display Click / to view the added materials in the thumbnail mode or in the
Mode of list mode.
Materials
Search Material You can search the added materials via the three methods below.
● Enter a keyword on the upper right corner of the page, and click to
quickly find the target materials.
● Click , and filter the added materials according to the uploaded time,
status, sharing property, etc.
● Select All, Added to Favorites, or Not Added to Favorites from the

drop-down list on the upper side of the page to filter the materials.

27.5.2 Create Dynamic Material

You can create and upload dynamic materials used for creating programs to the platform. The
material types supported include webpage, network picture, stream media server, and network
camera. For the uploaded materials, you can perform more operations, including adding to
favorites, editing, downloading, deleting, etc.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Materials .
2. Click Create Dynamic Material, select the material type, and configure other parameters.
Material Type
Webpage
When selecting this type, you should enter the URL address of the webpage.
URL Picture
When selecting this type, you should enter the URL address of the picture.
Stream Media Server
Receive streams from the stream media server. You should enter the URL address of the
stream media server.

942
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

IPC
Get video streams from network camera. You should enter the required information of
network camera such as IP address, port No., and channel No.
Name
Define a material name that is easy to identify. Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Sharing Property
Public
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
material belongs to) and the higher-level organizations can see and use the material.
Private
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
material belongs to) can see and use the material.
Description
Enter the detailed description of the material to be uploaded.
Area
Set the area which the material belongs to.
3. Finish uploading the material to the platform.
- Click Upload.
- Click Upload and Continue to upload the current material and continue to upload other
materials.
4. Optional: Perform the following operations if needed.
Add to Click to add the material to favorites or move it from favorites.
Favorites/Cancel
Edit Material Check one or multiple materials, and click Edit to edit the selected
materials, such as editing the name and the property.
Delete Material Check one or multiple materials, and click Delete to delete the selected
materials.

Note
You cannot delete materials that have been added to a program or
materials that are in the process of releasing.

View Large Click to view large picture of the material.

Picture
Refresh Material Click Refresh to refresh the material list.
Switch Display Click / to view the added materials in the thumbnail mode or in the
Mode of list mode.
Materials

943
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Search Material You can search the added materials via the three methods below.
● Enter a keyword on the upper right corner of the page, and click to
quickly find the target materials.
● Click , and filter the added materials according to the uploaded time,
status, sharing property, etc.
● Select All, Added to Favorites, or Not Added to Favorites from the

drop-down list on the upper side of the page to filter the materials.

27.6 Program Management

Program is composed of various materials. When released, the program will be played on the
terminal to function as a prompt, notice, etc. You can add programs (including digital signage
program, video wall program, attendance program, people counting program, and emergency
mustering program) to the platform according to different application scenarios. When creating
programs, you can custom the layout of the program and add materials to the program as needed.
You can also manage the added programs such as previewing, releasing, and cutting in.

27.6.1 Create Digital Signage Program

Digital signage program can be used in multiple application scenarios (e.g., playing a program
related with commodity information at the entrance of a chain supermarket), helping to spread
information in a convenient and efficient way.
Before You Start
You have added materials to the platform and the materials have been approved. For details, refer
to Material Management and Approve .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Programs →
Digital Signage .
2. Click Add.
3. In the pop-up window, configure program parameters.
Name
Define a program name that is easy to identify. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Screen Size
Select the screen size as Landscape Mode, Portrait Mode, or Custom.
Sharing Property
Public
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
program belongs to) and the higher-level organizations can see and use the program.

944
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Private
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
program belongs to) can see and use the program.
Area
Set the area which the program belongs to.
Description
Enter the program description, such as usage, applicable scenarios, and overview of program
content. You can enter up to 64 characters.
4. Click Next.
5. Select a template type and the corresponding template as needed.

Note
● You can click to add the template to My Favorites. Up to 1,000 templates can be added to
My Favorites.
● You can click My Favorites in the lower-left corner to view and select the added template.
6. Click OK to enter the creating program page.

Figure 27-5 Create Program

945
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Table 27-3 Page Description

Number Description
1 There are 10 types of windows. An audio window cannot be
added with a video window or live video window at the same
time.͘ Up to 16 windows can be added for one page.
2 You can select materials from All or My Favorites list. Click to
add other materials from local PC to the platform. Also, you can
search materials, delete materials, and refresh material list.
3 You can click to add a text window in the template; click to
add a button window in the template (only available for
touchscreen terminals); click / / / to make the
window layer move up / move down / stick on top / stick at
bottom.

You can click to display the background panel, and drag an

audio to the panel or to the current program page, then the
selected audio will be added to the background music list. Click
/ to turn on or turn off the background music.
You can click to align the material window with grid lines.
You can click to display rulers in the right side and top side
You can click / to undo or redo the operation.
4 You can enable Auto Snap, and the two windows will be
connected when they are near enough.
5 ● You can click Preview Current Page to preview the content of
the current page.
● During previewing, you can click or to pause or start
playing. You can click or to adjust the playing speed as 1x,
2x, or 4x. Also, you can click to preview the current page in
fullscreen.
7. Edit page properties, including page name, background, and play time type.

946
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 27-6 Page Settings

8. Optional: Add, delete, or adjust program pages at the bottom side.
Add Click / to add new page(s).
Delete Put the cursor on the page, and click on the upper right corner to delete
the current page.
Adjust Click a page and drag it to the desired location to adjust the sequence of
Sequence program pages.
9. Select a material from the left list and drag it to the corresponding window in the template to
add the selected material.

Note
● When adding the same type of materials to one window, you can click Create Window to

create a new window or click Add More Material to add more material to the current window.
● When adding pictures and videos, you can check Actual Size to display these materials in their

original sizes.
● When adding live videos, you can check Close Audio, then the program will be played without

audio. Besides, only one Device Channel 1 can be added to one program page.
● When adding webpages, you can set the display format according to actual needs.

10. Set window properties, including window position, window type, switching method, etc.

947
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can set different parameters for different types of material windows.
Window Position
Set the window position by entering the width, height, and coordinate of the window.
Window Type
Normal
The normal window is displayed by default when the program is played. You can set a
window jump link or page jump link for such a window.
Popup Window
The pop-up window is hidden by default. Only after setting a redirect link for a normal
window and clicking the link, the hidden window will be popped up.
Switching Method
For Android touchscreen terminals, you can open the specified content by linking to a
window or page.
No Skip
There is no linked window or page to the current window which is played on the
terminal.
Jump to Next Window
You should set the jump link. When the Window A is played on the terminal, you can click
the link to jump to its linked window.
Jump to Next Page
You should set the jump link. When the Window A is played on the terminal, you can click
the link to jump to its linked page.
Move Window Layer
Click / / / to make the window layer move up / move down / stick on top / stick
at bottom.
Switching Effect
Select the switching effect from the drop-down list for the current window. There are 11
types of switching effect.
Play Time (sec)
Set the playing duration for the current window.

Note
● The play time of a window can not exceed the playing time of a page, or the exceeding

part of the program will not be played.

● For adding a webpage, you can set its play time as Unlimited.

11. Optional: On the current editing program page, perform the following operations.

948
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Edit Click to edit program parameters in the pop-up window. For details, refer
Program to Step 3.
Preview Click Preview to preview the program.
Program

Figure 27-7 Preview Program

During previewing, you can click or to pause or start playing; click or
to adjust the playing speed as 1x, 2x, or 4x; and click to preview the
program in fullscreen.
For the program with multiple pages, it will be played automatically
according to the page play time you have set. Also, you can manually click

or to preview the previous or the next page of the program.

Cut-In Click Cut-in to cut in the current program.

Note
For details, refer to Cut in Program .

Create Click Next to enter the managing schedules page and create a schedule for
Schedule the program.

Note
For details, refer to Schedule Management .
12. Click Save to save the current program.
13. Optional: On the program list page, perform the following operations if needed.
View Program Click / to view the added programs in the thumbnail mode or in
in List or the list mode.

949
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Thumbnail
Mode
Add Program Click to add the current program to Favorites.
to Favorites
Preview Click to preview the program.
Program During previewing, you can click or to pause or start playing; click
or to adjust the playing speed as 1x, 2x, or 4x; and click to
preview the program in fullscreen.
For the program with multiple pages, it will be played automatically
according to the page play time you have set. Also, you can manually

click or to preview the previous or the next page of the

program.
Copy Program Click to enter editing program page. Click Save on the upper right
corner to copy the current program, and a new program with the same
content is created.

Note
When copying a program (e.g., Program A) for the first time, the name
of the new program (Program A_1) will be generated automatically. If
you need to copy this program (Program A) for a second or more times,
you should manually edit its name, or the program cannot be created
successfully.

Cut-In Click to cut in the current program. For details, refer to Cut in
Program .
Create Click to enter the managing schedules page and create a schedule for
Schedule the program. For details, refer to Schedule Management .
Enlarge Click to enlarge the program page and view it.
Program Page
Filter Program You can filter programs via the following three methods:
● Select All, Added to Favorites, or Not Added to Favorites from the

drop-down list on the upper side of the page to filter to filter

programs according to whether they have been added to Favorites or
not.
● Enter a keyword in the search field on the upper right corner, and click

to quickly search for the target programs.

● Click , and filter programs by conditions such as status and sharing
property.

950
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the program list. The programs will be listed
Program List according to the time they are added.
Delete Check one or more programs, and click Delete to delete the selected
Program programs.

Note
Programs that are releasing or cutting in cannot be deleted.

27.6.2 Create Video Wall Program

You can create video wall programs on the platform. The program can be used to display programs
of multiple terminals joined in the video wall. The platform provides multiple layout choices for
video wall programs. You can select a layout according to the actual scene and edit it as needed.
After creating the program, you can preview the program, cut in program, etc.
Before You Start
You have configured video wall before applying the video wall programs. For details, refer to
Configure Video Wall .
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage →
Programs → Video Wall .
2. Click Add.
3. In the pop-up window, configure program parameters.
Name
Define a program name that is easy to identify. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Video Wall Dimension
Set the video wall dimension.

Note
The maximum dimension is 1 × 10 or 10 × 1.
Digital Signage Screen Type
Select Landscape Mode or Portrait Mode as needed.
Sharing Property
Public
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
program belongs to) and the higher-level organizations can see and use the program.
Private

951
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
program belongs to) can see and use the program.
Area
Set the area which the program belongs to.
Description
Enter the program description, such as usage, applicable scenarios, and overview of program
content. You can enter up to 64 characters.
4. Click Next.
5. Optional: Select video wall layout according to actual need.
- When the dimension is no bigger than 1 × 5 or 5 × 1 (i.e., 1 × 2, 2 × 1, 1 × 3, 1 × 4, 1 × 5), select
a predefined video wall layout from the list.
- When the dimension is bigger than 1 × 5 or 5 × 1 (i.e., 1 × 6, 1 × 7, 1 × 8, 1 × 9, 1 × 10), select
No Layout or Custom Layout.
6. Click OKto enter the creating program page.

Table 27-4 Page Description

Number Description
1 There are 2 types of windows including Picture and Video.
2 You can select materials from All or My Favorites list. Click to
add other materials from local PC to the platform. Also, you can
search materials, delete materials, and refresh material list.
3 You can click to display rulers in the right side and top side.
You can click / / / to make the window layer move
up / move down / stick on top / stick at bottom.
You can click / to undo or redo the operation.
4 You can enable Auto Snap, and the two windows will be
connected when they are near enough.
5 ● You can click Preview Current Page to preview the content of
the current page.
● During previewing, you can click or to pause or start
playing. You can click or to adjust the playing speed as 1x,
2x, or 4x. Also, you can click to preview the current page in
fullscreen.
7. Edit page properties, including page name, background, and play time.

952
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 27-8 Page Settings

8. Optional: Add, adjust, or delete program page(s) at the bottom side.
Add Click / to add new page(s).
Delete Put the cursor on the page, and click on the upper right corner to delete
the current page.
Adjust Click a page and drag it to the desired location to adjust the sequence of
Sequence program pages.
9. Select a material from the left list and drag it to the corresponding section to add the selected
material.

Note
● Only one material window is allowed in one section, and the size of window is the same as

that of the section by default. When adding a new material to the section, the original
material will be covered.
● You can select multiple materials simultaneously and add them to the same section.

10. Set window properties, including window position, window type, switching method, etc.
Current Window
Select the material added to the current window.

953
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Window Position
Set the window position by entering the width, height, and coordinate of the window.
Window Type
Normal
The normal window is displayed by default when the program is played. You can set a
window jump link or page jump link for such a window.
Popup Window
The pop-up window is hidden by default. Only after setting a redirect link for a normal
window and clicking the link, the hidden window will be popped up.
Switching Method
For Android touchscreen terminals, you can open the specified content by linking to a
window or page.
No Skip
When the Window A played on the terminal, there is no other pop-up window or page.
Jump to Next Window
You should set the jump link. When the Window A is played on the terminal, you can click
the link to jump to its linked window.
Jump to Next Page
You should set the jump link. When the Window A is played on the terminal, you can click
the link to jump to its linked page.
Move Window Layer
Click / / / to make the window layer move up / move down / stick on top / stick
at bottom.
Switching Effect
Select the switching effect from the drop-down list for the current window. There are 11
types of switching effect.
Play Time (sec)
Set the playing duration for the current window.

Note
The play time of a window can not exceed the playing time of a page, or the exceeding part
of the program will not be played.
11. Optional: On the current editing program page, perform the following operations if needed.
Edit Click to edit program parameters in the pop-up window. For details, refer
Program to Step 3.
Preview Click Preview to preview the current program.
Program

954
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 27-9 Preview Program

During previewing, you can click or to pause or start playing; click or
to adjust the playing speed as 1x, 2x, or 4x; and click to preview the
current page in fullscreen.
For the program with multiple pages, it will be played automatically
according to the page play time you have set. Also, you can manually click

or to preview the previous or the next page of the program.

Cut-In Click Cut In to cut in the current program.

Note
For details, refer to Cut in Program .

Create Click Next to enter the managing schedules page and create a schedule for
Schedule the program.

Note
For details, refer to Schedule Management .
12. Click Save to save the current program.
13. Optional: On the program list page, perform the following operations if needed.
View Program Click / to view the added programs in the thumbnail mode or in
in List or the list mode.
Thumbnail
Mode

955
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Add Program Click to add the current program to Favorites.

to Favorites
Preview Click to preview the program.
Program During previewing, you can click or to pause or start playing; click
or to adjust the playing speed as 1x, 2x, or 4x; and click to
preview the program in fullscreen.
For the program with multiple pages, it will be played automatically
according to the page play time you have set. Also, you can manually

click or to preview the previous or the next page of the

program.
Copy Program Click to enter editing program page. Click Save on the upper right
corner to copy the current program, and a new program with the same
content is created.

Note
When copying a program (e.g., Program A) for the first time, the name
of the new program (Program A_1) will be generated automatically. If
you need to copy this program (Program A) for a second or more times,
you should manually edit its name, or the program cannot be created
successfully.

Cut-In Click to cut in the current program. For details, refer to Cut in
Program .
Create Click to enter the managing schedules page and create a schedule for
Schedule the program. For details, refer to Schedule Management .
Enlarge Click to enlarge the program page and view it.
Program Page
Filter Program You can filter programs via the following three methods:
● Select All, Added to Favorites, or Not Added to Favorites from the

drop-down list on the upper side of the page to filter to filter

programs according to whether they have been added to Favorites or
not.
● Enter a keyword in the search field on the upper right corner, and click

to quickly search for the target programs.

● Click , and filter programs by conditions such as status and sharing
property.
Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the program list. The programs will be listed
Program List according to the time they are added.

956
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Delete Check one or more programs, and click Delete to delete the selected
Program programs.

Note
Programs that are releasing or cutting in cannot be deleted.

27.6.3 Create Attendance Program

You can create attendance programs on the platform. The program can be used to display the
persons' basic information, check-in time and temperature information. You can also configure
welcoming words for persons when they check in. The platform provides two types of program
templates including Attendance and Temperature Screening Template and Attendance Template.
You can select one template according to the actual scene and edit the predefined template as
needed. After creating the program, you can preview the program, cut in program, etc.
Before You Start
You have added terminal(s) to the platform and have linked a device that supports face attendance
with the terminal. For details, refer to Add Digital Signage Terminal and Link External Device to
Terminal .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Programs →
Attendance .
2. Click Add.
3. In the pop-up window, configure program parameters.
Name
Define a program name that is easy to identify. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Screen Size
Select the screen size as landscape mode or portrait mode.
Sharing Property
Public
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
program belongs to) and the higher-level organizations can see and use the program.
Private
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
program belongs to) can see and use the program.
Area
Set the area which the program belongs to.
Description

957
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Enter the program description, such as usage, applicable scenarios, and overview of program
content. You can enter up to 64 characters.
4. Click Next.
5. Select a template type and the corresponding template as needed.

Note
● You can click to add the template to My Favorites. Up to 1,000 templates can be added to
Favorites.
● You can click My Favorites in the lower-left corner to view and select the template that
have been added to Favorites.
6. Click OK to enter the creating program page.

Figure 27-10 Create Program

Basic Settings
Configure the content and font size for main title and sub title; enable Welcome Words and
configure the content of welcome words; enable Audio Announcement and configure the
related settings such as announcement speed, the content of person's voice and voice
prompt; and set the Alarm Temperature Threshold.
Check-in Information Display Settings
Select the time to show the check-in records or not to show records.

Note
There is some default information being displayed on the check-in records. If you need to
display more check-in information, refer to Configure Device Privacy Settings .
More
Click to set the background picture for the current program.

958
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Make sure you have added picture materials to the platform and the materials have been
approved. For details, refer to Material Management and Approve .
Advertisement Settings
You can add advertisements (pictures, videos, etc.) to the program, and configure switching
effect and playing time for the advertisements.

Note
Only when selecting Attendance Template, you can configure advertisements.
7. Optional: On the current editing program page, perform the following operations if needed.
Edit Program Click to edit program parameters in the pop-up window. For details, refer
to Step 3.
Preview Click Preview to preview the current program.
Program During previewing, you can click or to pause or start playing; click or
to adjust the playing speed as 1x, 2x, or 4x; and click to preview the
program in fullscreen.
Cut-In Click Cut-in to cut in the current program.

Note
For details, refer to Cut in Program .

Create Click Next to enter the managing schedules page and create a schedule for
Schedule the program.

Note
For details, refer to Schedule Management .
8. Click Save to save the current program.
9. Optional: On the program list page, perform the following operations if needed.
View Program Click / to view the added programs in the thumbnail mode or in the
in List or list mode.
Thumbnail
Mode
Add Program to Click to add the current program to Favorites.
Favorites
Preview Click to preview the program.
Program During previewing, you can click or to pause or start playing; click
or to adjust the playing speed as 1x, 2x, or 4x; and click to preview
the current page in fullscreen.

959
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Copy Program Click to enter editing program page. Click Save on the upper right corner
to copy the current program, and a new program with the same content is
created.

Note
When copying a program (e.g., Program A) for the first time, the name of
the new program (Program A_1) will be generated automatically. If you
need to copy this program (Program A) for a second or more times, you
should manually edit its name, or the program cannot be created
successfully.

Cut-In Click to cut in the current program. For details, refer to Cut in Program .
Create Click to enter the managing schedules page and create a schedule for
Schedule the program. For details, refer to Schedule Management .
Enlarge Click to enlarge the program page and view it.
Program Page
Filter Program You can filter programs via the following three methods:
● Select All, Added to Favorites, or Not Added to Favorites from the drop-

down list on the upper side of the page to filter to filter programs
according to whether they have been added to Favorites or not.
● Enter a keyword in the search field on the upper right corner, and click

to quickly search for the target programs.

● Click , and filter programs by conditions such as status and sharing
property.
Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the program list. The programs will be listed
Program List according to the time they were added.
Delete Program Check one or more programs, and click Delete to delete the selected
programs.

Note
Programs that are releasing or cutting in cannot be deleted.

27.6.4 Create People Counting Program

You can create people counting program on the platform. The program is used to display the
people counting information (the remaining people and people stayed) in a certain location, mask
information, and skin-surface temperature information. For people with no masks or whose
temperature is abnormal, you can enable voice alarm for them. The platform provides two types of
templates for different application scenarios: People Counting & Temperature Screening template,

960
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

and Temperature Screening template. You can select a template according to the actual scene and
edit the predefined template. After creating the program, you can preview the program, cut in
program, etc.
Before You Start
You have added terminal(s) to the platform and have linked a device that supports people counting
or temperature screening function with the terminal. For details, refer to Add Digital Signage
Terminal and Link External Device to Terminal .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Programs →
People Counting .
2. Click Add.
3. In the pop-up window, configure program parameters.
Name
Define a program name that is easy to identify. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Screen Size
Select the screen size as landscape mode or portrait mode.
Sharing Property
Public
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
program belongs to) and the higher-level organizations can see and use the program.
Private
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
program belongs to) can see and use the program.
Area
Set the area which the program belongs to.
Description
Enter the program description, such as usage, applicable scenarios, and overview of program
content. You can enter up to 64 characters.
4. Click Next.
5. Select a template type and the corresponding template as needed.

Note
● You can click to add the template to My Favorites. Up to 1,000 templates can be added to
Favorites.
● You can click My Favorites in the lower-left corner to view and select the template that
have been added to Favorites.
6. Click OK to enter the creating program page.

961
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 27-11 Create Program

Normal
The program only contains the people counting related information, such as remaining entry
and people stayed.
Alarm Status
The program contains mask information, abnormal temperature information, and people
counting related information.
General Settings
You can check whether to display people counting related information, such as prompt for
people counting, people counting icon, and the number of people stayed. You can enable
audio prompt for normal temperature and select the corresponding audio file. The
configurations in this area will be applied to Normal and Alarm Status simultaneously.
Alarm Status Settings
You can check whether to display alarm status related information, such as prompt for
abnormal temperature; set maximum people stayed; enable voice alarm for no mask,
abnormal temperature and people full, and configure the corresponding audio file for them.
Advertisement Settings
You can add advertisements (pictures, videos, etc.) to the program, and configure switching
effect and playing time for the advertisements.

Note
Only when selecting People Counting & Temperature Screening Template, you can configure
advertisements.
More

962
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Click to set the background picture and the alarm picture for the current program.

Note
Make sure you have added picture materials to the platform and the materials have been
approved. For details, refer to Material Management and Approve .
7. Optional: On the current editing program page, perform the following operations if needed.
Edit Click to edit program parameters in the pop-up window. For details, refer to
Program Step 3.
Preview Click Preview to preview the program.
Program

Figure 27-12 Preview Program

During previewing, you can click or to pause or start playing; click or
to adjust the playing speed as 1x, 2x, or 4x; and click to preview the program
in fullscreen.
Cut-In Click Cut In to cut in the current program.

Note
For details, refer to Cut in Program .

Create Click Next to enter the managing schedules page and create a schedule for the
Schedule program.

Note
For details, refer to Schedule Management .
8. Click Save to save the current program.
9. Optional: On the program list page, perform the following operations if needed.

963
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

View Program Click / to view the added programs in the thumbnail mode or in the
in List or list mode.
Thumbnail
Mode
Add Program to Click to add the current program to Favorites.
Favorites
Preview Click to preview the program.
Program During previewing, you can click or to pause or start playing; click
or to adjust the playing speed as 1x, 2x, or 4x; and click to preview
the current page in fullscreen.
Copy Program Click to enter editing program page. Click Save on the upper right corner
to copy the current program, and a new program with the same content is
created.

Note
When copying a program (e.g., Program A) for the first time, the name of
the new program (Program A_1) will be generated automatically. If you
need to copy this program (Program A) for a second or more times, you
should manually edit its name, or the program cannot be created
successfully.

Cut-In Click to cut in the current program. For details, refer to Cut in Program .
Create Click to enter the managing schedules page and create a schedule for
Schedule the program. For details, refer to Schedule Management .
Enlarge Click to enlarge the program page and view it.
Program Page
Filter Program You can filter programs via the following three methods:
● Select All, Added to Favorites, or Not Added to Favorites from the drop-

down list on the upper side of the page to filter to filter programs
according to whether they have been added to Favorites or not.
● Enter a keyword in the search field on the upper right corner, and click

to quickly search for the target programs.

● Click , and filter programs by conditions such as status and sharing
property.
Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the program list. The programs will be listed
Program List according to the time they were added.
Delete Program Check one or more programs, and click Delete to delete the selected
programs.

964
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Programs that are releasing or cutting in cannot be deleted.

27.6.5 Create Emergency Mustering Program

Emergency mustering programs can be played when an emergency happens, helping people to
receive timely emergency alerts and be out of danger as soon as possible.
Before You Start
You have added materials to the platform and the materials have been approved. For details, refer
to Material Management and Approve .
The created emergency mustering programs will be played on the device when the emergency is
triggered.
Steps
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage →
Programs → Emergency Mustering .
2. Click Normal → Configure Now / Add .

Note
Click Configure Now if you have not added a program before.
3. In the pop-up window, configure program parameters.
Name
Define a program name that is easy to identify. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Screen Size
Select the screen size as Landscape Mode, Portrait Mode, or Custom.
Sharing Property
Public
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
program belongs to) and the higher-level organizations can see and use the program.
Private
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
program belongs to) can see and use the program.
Area
Set the area which the program belongs to.
Description
Enter the program description, such as usage, applicable scenarios, and overview of program
content. You can enter up to 64 characters.
4. Click Next.

965
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Select a template.

Note
● You can click to add the template to My Favorites. Up to 1,000 templates can be added to
My Favorites.
● You can click My Favorites in the lower-left corner to view and select the added template.
6. Click OK to enter the creating program page.

Figure 27-13 Create Program

Table 27-5 Page Description

Number Description
1 There are 10 types of windows. An audio window cannot be
added with a video window or live video window at the same
time.͘ Up to 16 windows can be added for one page.
2 You can select materials from All or My Favorites list. Click to
add other materials from local PC to the platform. Also, you can
search materials, delete materials, and refresh material list.
3 You can click to add a text window in the template; click to
add a button window in the template (only available for
touchscreen terminals); click / / / to make the
window layer move up / move down / stick on top / stick at
bottom.

966
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Number Description

You can click to display the background panel, and drag an

audio to the panel or to the current program page, then the
selected audio will be added to the background music list. Click
/ to turn on or turn off the background music.
You can click to align the material window with grid lines.
You can click to display rulers in the right side and top side
You can click / to undo or redo the operation.
4 You can enable Auto Snap, and the two windows will be
connected when they are near enough.
5 ● You can click Preview Current Page to preview the content of
the current page.
● During previewing, you can click or to pause or start
playing. You can click or to adjust the playing speed as 1x,
2x, or 4x. Also, you can click to preview the current page in
full screen.
7. Edit page properties, including page name, background, and play time type.

967
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 27-14 Page Settings

8. Optional: Add, delete, or adjust program pages at the bottom side.
Add Click / to add new page(s).
Delete Put the cursor on the page, and click on the upper right corner to delete
the current page.
Adjust Click a page and drag it to the desired location to adjust the sequence of
Sequence program pages.
9. Select a material from the left list and drag it to the corresponding window in the template to
add the selected material.

Note
● When adding the same type of materials to one window, you can click Create Window to

create a new window or click Add More Material to add more material to the current window.
● When adding pictures and videos, you can check Actual Size to display these materials in their

original sizes.
● When adding live videos, you can check Close Audio, then the program will be played without

audio. Besides, only one Device Channel 1 can be added to one program page.
● When adding webpages, you can set the display format according to actual needs.

10. Set window properties, including window position, window type, switching method, etc.

968
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can set different parameters for different types of material windows.
Window Position
Set the window position by entering the width, height, and coordinate of the window.
Window Type
Normal
The normal window is displayed by default when the program is played. You can set a
window jump link or page jump link for such a window.
Popup Window
The pop-up window is hidden by default. Only after setting a redirect link for a normal
window and clicking the link, the hidden window will be popped up.
Switching Method
For Android touchscreen terminals, you can open the specified content by linking to a
window or page.
No Skip
There is no linked window or page to the current window which is played on the
terminal.
Jump to Next Window
You should set the jump link. When the Window A is played on the terminal, you can click
the link to jump to its linked window.
Jump to Next Page
You should set the jump link. When the Window A is played on the terminal, you can click
the link to jump to its linked page.
Move Window Layer
Click / / / to make the window layer move up / move down / stick on top / stick
at bottom.
Switching Effect
Select the switching effect from the drop-down list for the current window. There are 11
types of switching effect.
Play Time (sec)
Set the playing duration for the current window.

Note
● The play time of a window can not exceed the playing time of a page, or the exceeding

part of the program will not be played.

● For adding a webpage, you can set its play time as Unlimited.

11. Optional: On the current editing program page, perform the following operations.

969
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Edit Click to edit program parameters in the pop-up window. For details, refer
Program to Step 3.
Preview Click Preview to preview the program.
Program During previewing, you can click or to pause or start playing; click
or to adjust the playing speed as 1x, 2x, or 4x; and click to preview the
program in full screen.
For the program with multiple pages, it will be played automatically
according to the page play time you have set. Also, you can manually click

or to preview the previous or the next page of the program.

Release Click Release to enter the Release page, select devices, and click OK.
Program
Note
The program released will only be played when the emergency is triggered.
12. Click Save to save the current program.
13. Optional: On the program list page, perform the following operations if needed.
View Program Click / to view the added programs in the thumbnail mode or in
in List or the list mode.
Thumbnail
Mode
Add Program Click to add the current program to Favorites.
to Favorites
Preview Click to preview the program.
Program During previewing, you can click or to pause or start playing; click
or to adjust the playing speed as 1x, 2x, or 4x; and click to
preview the program in fullscreen.
For the program with multiple pages, it will be played automatically
according to the page play time you have set. Also, you can manually

click or to preview the previous or the next page of the

program.
Copy Program Click to enter editing program page. Click Save on the upper right
corner to copy the current program, and a new program with the same
content is created.

Note
When copying a program (e.g., Program A) for the first time, the name
of the new program (Program A_1) will be generated automatically. If

970
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

you need to copy this program (Program A) for a second or more times,
you should manually edit its name, or the program cannot be created
successfully.

Release Click Release to enter the Release page, select devices, and click OK.
Program
Note
The program released will only be played when the emergency is
triggered.

Enlarge Click to enlarge the program page and view it.

Program Page
View Device Click to view release details of the program on the device.
Release Details
Filter Program You can filter programs via the following three methods:
● Select All, Added to Favorites, or Not Added to Favorites from the

drop-down list on the upper side of the page to filter to filter

programs according to whether they have been added to Favorites or
not.
● Enter a keyword in the search field on the upper right corner, and

click to quickly search for the target programs.

● Click , and filter programs by conditions such as status and sharing
property.
Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the program list. The programs will be listed
Program List according to the time they are added.
Delete Check one or more programs, and click Delete to delete the selected
Program programs.

Note
Programs that are releasing cannot be deleted.

27.6.6 Add Emergency Mustering Text Notification

You can add emergency mustering text notifications in the platform by configuring related
parameters, and the added text notifications will be displayed on the digital signal terminals when
the emergency is triggered.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added devices to the platform. For details, refer to Manage Digital Signage
Terminals .

971
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
For one device, only the latest added text notification can be displayed.
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage →
Programs → Emergency Mustering .
2. Click Text Notification → Configure Now / Add to enter Add Text Notification page.

Note
Click Configure Now if you have not added a text notification before.

Figure 27-15 Add Text Notification

3. Set the needed parameters, such as text notification name and content.
Text Notification Name
The name of the text notification.

972
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Notification Content
The content of the text notification.
Select Device
Select device(s) in the left list and add them to the right list. The text notification will be
displayed on the selected devices.

Note
Only the latest text notification can be displayed on one device. Therefore, if you select a
device which has already been configured with a text notification, the previous text
notification will be invalid and will not display any more.
4. Click Release.

Note
The text notification is released and will be displayed when the emergency is triggered.
5. Optional: Click View Emergency Mustering Configuration in the upper-right corner to enter
Emergency Mustering module and view emergency mustering configurations.

Note
For details, refer to Emergency Solution Settings .
6. Optional: Perform the following operations.
View Text Click / to view the added text notifications in the thumbnail mode
Notification in or in the list mode.
List/Thumbnail
Mode
Copy Text Click to enter the adding text notification page. A new text
Notification notification which is of the same content as the original one will be
displayed. You can edit the content before releasing the new text
notification, or click Release to release the current text notification
directly.

Note
If you do not reselect device(s) for the new text notification, the
previous text notification(s) configured on the device(s) will be invalid
and will not display any more.

View Device Click to view release details of the text notification on the device.
Release Details
Filter Text Filter text notifications via the following two methods:
Notification

973
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● Enter a keyword in the search field in the upper right corner, and click
to quickly search for the target text notifications.
● Click , and filter text notifications by conditions including modifying
time and sharing property.
Refresh List Click Refresh to refresh the text notification list.
Delete Text Check one or more text notifications, and click Delete to delete the
Notification selected text notifications.

27.7 Schedule Management

You can create a schedule and define a playing schedule to play the added programs on the
terminals according to the scheduled time or method. The platform supports default schedule,
loop schedule, or you can customize your schedule including playing by date or by week. For the
added schedules, you can perform more operations such as editing, releasing, searching,
exporting, and adding to favorites.

27.7.1 Create a Schedule

You can create schedules for the added programs so that the programs will be played on the
terminals according to the scheduled time or method. For the added schedule(s), you can perform
more operations such as editing, adding to favorites, exporting, and releasing the schedule.
Before You Start
Make sure you have created programs in the platform. For details, refer to Program Management .
Steps
1. Enter the Create Schedules page.
- After creating a program, click Next.
- In the top right corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage →
Schedules → Add .
2. In the pop-up Create Schedules window, set the related information, and click OK.
Name
Define a schedule name that is easy to identify.
Program Type
Select Other Program or Video Wall Program.
Sharing Property
Public
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
schedule belongs to) and the higher-level organizations can see and use the schedule .
Private

974
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
schedule belongs to) can see and use the schedule.
Area
Set the area which the schedule belongs to.
Description
Enter the schedule description.
3. Select the play mode as Play by Day, Play by Week or Custom.
Play by Day/Week
Play the program according to a daily/weekly schedule.
Custom
Customize the schedule within up to 90 days.
4. Select program(s) from the program list and drag to the timeline on the right side.

Note
● You can click All or My Favorites to display all programs or programs that have been added to

favorites.
● You can select Landscape Mode, Portrait Mode, or Custom from the drop-down list to filter

programs.
● If you have selected the program type as video wall program in Step 2, you can filter programs

by setting the video wall dimension.

● If you have selected the program type as other program in Step 2, you can select programs

from the lists of digital signage programs, attendance programs, or people counting programs.
● You can enter keywords in the search box to filter programs.

5. Move the cursor to the timeline, and drag the cursor on the timeline to specify the playing time
of the program.

Note
When hovering the cursor on the program's playing time, you can view the thumbnail of the
program.
6. Optional: Adjust the program schedule.
- Move the cursor to the program bar on the timeline and drag the right and left edges to
adjust the beginning time and end time of the program.
- Click the program bar on the timeline, and adjust the beginning time and end time of the
program in the input box.
- Click to copy the program to other time periods.
- Click to delete the program in this time period.
7. Click Save to save the current schedule.
8. Optional: Click Release to enter the release page.

975
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For details, refer to Release a Program Schedule .
9. Optional: After creating schedules, perform the following operations as needed.
Edit Schedule Click the name of the schedule and then click to enter Arrange Schedule
page and you can edit the schedule information.
Delete Select one or more schedules, click Delete to delete the selected schedules.
Schedule
Release Click to release the selected schedule. For details, refer to Release a
Schedule Program Schedule .
Export Click to export the schedule.
Schedule
Add to/Cancel Click or to add the schedule to favorites or move it from favorites.
Favorites
Note
You can add up to 1,000 schedules to favorites.

Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the schedule list.

Schedule
Search You can search the added schedules via the three methods.
Schedule ● Enter a keyword on the upper right corner of the page, and click to
quickly find the target schedules.
● Click on the upper right corner of the page, and set the search
conditions such as status and sharing property to quickly filter the target
schedules.
● Select All, Added to Favorites, or Not Added to Favorites from the drop-

down list on the upper side of the page to filter the schedules.

27.7.2 Create a Loop Schedule

You can create a loop schedule for the added programs. With loop schedule configured, the added
programs will be played repeatedly according to the play mode, including normal mode and period
mode. You can add multiple playlists to meet different requirements.
Before You Start
Make sure you have created programs on the platform. For details, refer to Program
Management .
Steps
1. Enter the Create Schedules page.
- After creating a program, click Next.

976
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- In the top right corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage →
Schedules → Add .
2. In the pop-up Create Schedules window, set the related information, and click OK.
Name
Define a schedule name that is easy to identify.
Program Type
Select Other Program or Video Wall Program.
Sharing Property
Public
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
schedule belongs to) and the higher-level organizations can see and use the schedule.
Private
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
schedule belongs to) can see and use the schedule.
Area
Set the area which the schedule belongs to.
Description
Enter the schedule description.
3. Select the play mode as Play in Loop.
4. Select a program in the program list and drag the program to the playlist.

Note
● You can click All or My Favorites to display all programs or programs that have been added to

favorites.
● You can select Landscape Mode, Portrait Mode, or Custom from the drop-down list to display

corresponding programs.
● If you have selected the program type as video wall program in Step 2, you can filter programs

by setting the video wall dimension.

● If you have selected the program type as other program in Step 2, you can select programs

from the lists of digital signage programs, attendance programs, or people counting programs.
● You can enter keywords in the search box to filter programs.

● You can add up to 8 programs to a single playlist.

5. Set the play mode.

Normal Mode
Play the program orderly and repeatedly.
Period Mode
Play the programs orderly and repeatedly in specific time period. The time periods for
different playlists cannot be overlapped.

977
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The priority of Period Mode is higher than that of Normal Mode. Only one playlist can be set to
normal mode.
6. Optional: Click Add Playlist to add more playlists.

Note
You can add up to 8 playlists.
7. Click Save to save the current schedule.
8. Optional: Click Release to enter the release page.

Note
For details, refer to Release a Program Schedule .
9. Optional: After creating schedules, perform the following operations as needed.
Edit Schedule Click the name of the schedule and then click to enter Arrange Schedule
page and you can edit the schedule information.
Delete Select one or more schedules, click Delete to delete the selected schedules.
Schedule
Release Click to release the selected schedule. For details, refer to Release a
Schedule Program Schedule .
Export Click to export the schedule.
Schedule
Add to Click or to add the schedule to favorites or move it from favorites.
Favorites/
Cancel Note
You can add up to 1,000 schedules to favorites.

Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the schedule list.

Schedule
Search You can search the added schedules via the three methods.
Schedule ● Enter a keyword on the upper right corner of the page, and click to
quickly find the target schedules.
● Click on the upper right corner of the page, and set the search
conditions such as such as status and sharing property to quickly filter
the target schedules.
● Select All, Added to Favorites, or Not Added to Favorites from the drop-

down list on the upper side of the page to filter the schedules.

978
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

27.7.3 Create a Default Schedule

With the default schedule enabled, the terminal will play the default video automatically if there is
no program or cut-in. After creating a default schedule, you can perform more operations such as
editing, adding to favorites, exporting, and releasing the schedule.
Before You Start
Make sure you have created programs in the platform. For details, refer to Program Management .
Steps
1. Enter the Create Schedules page.
- After creating a program, click Next.
- In the top right corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage →
Schedules → Add .
2. In the pop-up Create Schedules window, set the related information, and click OK.
Name
Define a schedule name that is easy to identify.
Program Type
Select Other Program or Video Wall Program.
Sharing Property
Public
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
schedule belongs to) and the higher-level organizations can see and use the schedule .
Private
All users in the current organization (i.e., the organization where the user who creates the
schedule belongs to) can see and use the schedule.
Area
Set the area which the schedule belongs to.
Description
Enter the schedule description.
3. Select the play mode as Default Schedule.
4. Select a program in the program list, and drag the program to the right.

Note
● You can click All or My Favorites to display all programs or programs that have been added to
favorites.
● You can select Landscape Mode, Portrait Mode, or Custom from the drop-down list.
● If you have selected the program type as video wall program in Step 2, you can filter programs
by setting the video wall dimension.

979
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

● If you have selected the program type as other program in Step 2, you can select programs
from the lists of digital signage programs, attendance programs, or people counting programs.
● You can enter keywords in the search box to filter programs.

5. Click Save to save the current schedule.

6. Optional: Click Release to enter the release page.

Note
For details, refer to Release a Program Schedule .
7. Optional: After creating schedules, perform the following operations as needed.
Edit Schedule Click the name of the schedule and then click to enter Arrange Schedule
page and you can edit the schedule information.
Delete Select one or more schedules, click Delete to delete the selected schedules.
Schedule
Release Click to release the selected schedule. For details, refer to Release a
Schedule Program Schedule .
Export Click to export the schedule for offline view.
Schedule
Add to/Cancel Click or to add the schedule to favorites or move it from favorites.
Favorites
Note
You can add up to 1,000 schedules to favorites.

Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the schedule list.

Schedule
Search You can search the added schedules via the three methods.
Schedule ● Enter a keyword on the upper right corner of the page, and click to
quickly find the target schedules.
● Click on the upper right corner of the page, and set the search
conditions such as status and sharing property to quickly filter the target
schedules.
● Select All, Added to Favorites, or Not Added to Favorites from the drop-

down list on the upper side of the page to filter the schedules.

27.8 Approve
The added materials, programs and schedules should be approved before they are used.

980
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Only users with the permission to approve materials, programs and schedules can approve the
related contents.

In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Approval .
Select the content to be approved, including Material, Program, and Schedule, select the approval
result, and give suggestions.
●
Approve One by One: In the Operation column, click to pass the approval; click to deny
the approval.
● Batch Approval: Check multiple materials, programs or schedules, click Pass to pass the
approval; click Deny to deny the approval.

Note
● You can enter up to 128 characters for the approval suggestions.
● There are three types of check status: Passed, Denied, and To be Checked. When the check
status of a material is changed from Passed to Denied, the status of its related programs and
schedules is changed into To be Checked.

27.9 Release Management

You can view the release details and release progress of multiple tasks (such as schedule releasing
and cutting in program). After being released, the above tasks can take effect on the terminals.

27.9.1 View Release Records

You can view release records of all the tasks (such as releasing schedules and cut-in text messages)
and the details of their release status.
Click → All Modules → Digital Signage → Release . You can view release details of all the tasks
on the platform, including task name and type, release time and status (Released or Failed), etc.
Also, you can perform more of the following operations.

981
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 27-16 View Release Records

● View Release Details: Click the task name to view release details such as device name and
release progress.

Note
For a task that is releasing, you can click Cancel Release to cancel releasing the task. For a task
that failed to be released or was canceled releasing, you can click Release again to release the
task again.
● Delete Task: Check one or multiple tasks, and click Delete to delete the selected tasks.
● Release Again: For a task that failed to be released, you can click to release the task again.
● For tasks failed to be released due to network or electricity disconnection, they can continue to
be released within the effective period (48 hours) if connected to the network or electricity
again.

27.9.2 Release a Program Schedule

For the approved program schedule, you should release the schedule to the terminals. When
releasing a schedule, you can set the release mode, effective mode, and the terminal(s). The
program will then be played according to the configured method on the terminals.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added terminals to the platform. For details, please refer to Add Digital

Signage Terminal .
● The program schedules to be released should have been approved. For details, refer to

Approve .
Steps

Note
You cannot release a schedule for an emergency mustering program.
1. Enter the releasing schedule page.

982
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- After creating the programs, click Next. For details about creating programs, refer to Program
Management .
- Select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Programs , select a program type, move the
cursor to a program, click to enter the adding schedules page, and click Release on the
upper right corner.
- Select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Schedules to enter managing schedules page,
and click .
2. Enter the task name.
3. Select the release mode as Release Later or Release Immediately.

Note
When selecting Release Later, you should set the release time, and the program schedule will be
released at the configured time period.
4. Select the effective mode as Take Effect Immediately or Take Effect Later.

Note
When selecting Take Effect Later, you should set the effective time. Only after the program takes
effect, it can be played on the terminal.
5. Select an area, and check one or more devices in the selected area.

Note
You can enter a keyword in the search box to quickly find the target area or device.
6. Click OK.

27.9.3 Cut in Text Message

You can cut in text message(s) for one or more terminals. When configuring cut-in text message(s),
you can set the play time, location, etc., of the text message and preview the displaying effects of
them in the platform. The terminals will play the cut-in text message according to the configured
time and method.
Before You Start
You have added terminal(s) to the platform. For details, refer to Add Digital Signage Terminal .
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Device
Control → Digital Signage Control .
2. Check one or more online devices in the list.

Note
You can enter a keyword in the search box on the upper right corner to quickly find the target
device(s).
3. Click Cut In Text Message to enter the Cut In Text Message page.

983
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Enter the customized task name.

5. In Edit Text Message area, enter the text content and the corresponding play time.

Note
● The playing time for different cut-in text messages can be overlapped.

● You can click in the Operation column to view the playing effect of the current text
message on the right side of the page.
6. In Text Window Property area, set the configuration mode, front size and color, background,
etc., for the text message.
7. Click Cut-in.

Note
Cut-in text messages do not need to be approved.

27.9.4 Cut in Program

You can cut in a program when creating or managing programs in the platform. The cut-in program
will precede other programs and play on the terminal in the configured method.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have added terminal(s) to the platform. For details, please refer to Add Digital

Signage Terminal .
● The program schedules to be released should have been approved. For details, refer to

Approve .
Steps
1. Enter Cut-in Program page.
- Select → All Modules → Digital Signage Management → Programs , select a program
type, move the cursor to a program, and click .
- After creating a program, click Cut-in on the upper right corner of the page.
2. Enter the task name.
3. Select the cut-in mode as Play Duration (h/m/s) or End Time.
4. Select one or more terminals for the cut-in programs.

Note
You can enter a keyword in the search box to quickly find the target device(s).
5. Click OK.

984
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

27.10 Device Control

After adding devices to the platform, you can control them via the platform, such as remotely
shutting down and rebooting. You can also control the video walls or manage applications on the
platform according to the mode you have selected.

27.10.1 Control Digital Signage Terminal

After adding digital signage terminals to the platform, you can control the terminals on the
platform, such as starting up, shutting down, playing programs, setting the volume, etc.

Note
● Make sure you are in the Digital Signage mode. See details in Switch Application Mode .
● Make sure you have added digital signage terminals to the platform. See details in Add Digital
Signage Terminal .

In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Device Control →
Digital Signage Control .

Figure 27-17 Digital Signage Control

Perform the following operations as needed.

Functions Operations
Switch Display Mode Click / to display the added terminals in thumbnail/list
mode.
Refresh Terminal List Click Refresh to refresh the terminal list.
View Terminal Details Click in the Operation column to view the details of the
terminal, such as software version, system version, IP address,
MAC address, CPU usage, HDD usage, etc.
View Playing Schedule Click to view the program playing schedule in 24 hours of the
current terminal. When there are multiple programs in the list,
you can click or to view the previous or the next program.

985
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Functions Operations
You can also click View Program Details to view the details of
the current program on the program editing page.
Search Terminals ● Click , set the search conditions (such as network status,
cut-in status, release status, playback status) and click Search
to search for the target terminals.
● Enter a keyword in the search box to search for the target
terminals.

Select one or multiple devices and perform the following operations as needed.
Start UP / Shut Down / Reboot
Remotely start up/shut down/reboot the terminal(s).
Play/Stop
Play/stop the programs on the screen of the terminal(s).
Set Volume
Set the output volume of the terminal.
Cut In Text Message
Go to the Cut In Text Message page to customize the cut-in text messages displayed on the
screen of the terminal(s).
Stop Cut-In/Stop Message
Stop cutting in programs. / Stop cutting in messages.
Clear Content on Terminal
Clear all the contents to be played on the terminal(s), including programs, cut-in programs/
message, etc.

Note
The emergency mustering program cannot be cleared.
Timed Startup/Shutdown Enabled
Timed Startup/Shutdown Disabled
Enable/Disable start up/shut down terminal(s) according to the schedule.

Note
For details about timed start up/shut down, refer to Configure Device Display Settings .
Timed Volume On
Timed Volume Off
Turn on/off the volume of the terminal(s) based on the schedule you set.

986
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For details about timed volume on/off, refer to Configure Device Display Settings .
Start Sync. Playing on Terminal
Stop Sync. Playing on Terminal
Start or stop synchronous playing on terminals.
Show/Hide
Show or hide the release progress.
Valid Default Schedule/Invalid Default Schedule
If you create default video schedule for the terminal(s), you can manually control the schedule
valid or invalid.

Note
For details about creating default video schedule, refer to Create a Default Schedule .
Screenshot
Generate the screenshot(s) of the terminal(s), which is/are in JPG format.
NTP Time Sync.
The time synchronization of NTP server should be enabled when starting synchronous playing
on the terminals. See details in Set NTP .
Restore Default
Restore the parameters of the terminal(s) to the default settings.
Remote Debugging
Enable the Android debug bridge for the terminal(s), and enter the debugging contents.
Log Export
Export the logs of the terminal(s) in ZIP format.

27.10.2 Control Video Wall

You can control the video walls after adding them to the platform.
Before You Start
● Make sure you are in the Digital Signage mode. See details in Switch Application Mode .

● Make sure you have added video walls. See details in Configure Video Wall .

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Digital Signage → Device Control
→ Video Wall Control .

987
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
The multiple terminals that constitute the video wall should be controlled as a whole, or the
playing status of different terminals will not be the same.

Figure 27-18 Video Wall Control

2. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Switch Display Click / to display the added video walls in thumbnail/list mode.
Mode
Refresh Video Click Refresh to refresh the video wall list.
Wall List
Search Video ● Click , set the search conditions (dimension, screen type, network
Walls status, play status, cut-in status, release status) and click Search to
search for the target video walls.
● Enter a keyword in the search box to search for the target video walls.

3. Optional: Select one or multiple video walls and perform the following operations.
Start UP / Shut Remotely start up, shut down, or reboot the video walls.
Down / Reboot
Play/Stop Play or stop the programs or cut-in messages on the video walls.
Volume Set the volume of the video walls.
Stop Cut-In Stop cutting in programs.
Clear Playing Content Clear all contents to be played on the video walls.
Timed Startup/ Enable or disable startup/shutdown according to the schedule.
Shutdown Enabled
Timed Startup/ Note
Shutdown Disabled For details about timed startup/shutdown, see details in Configure
Device Display Settings .

Timed Volume On Turn on/off the volume of the video walls based on the configured
Timed Volume Off schedule.

988
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
For details about timed volume on/off, see details in Configure
Device Display Settings .

NTP Time Sync. The time synchronization of NTP server should be enabled when
starting synchronous playing on the terminals. See details in Set
NTP .
Restore Default Restore the parameters of the terminals to the default settings.

989
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 28 Interactive Flat Panel Management

The interactive flat panel management module includes controlling interactive flat panels,
managing applications, adding and releasing emergency mustering text notifications, and viewing
release records.

Note
Make sure you have selected the Interactive Flat Panel application mode. For details about
switching mode, refer to Switch Application Mode .

28.1 Control Interactive Flat Panel

After adding interactive flat panels to the platform, you can control them on the platform, such as
shutting down, rebooting, and setting the screen saver password.

Note
● Make sure you have switched to the Interactive Flat Panel mode. See details in Switch
Application Mode .
● Make sure you have added interactive flat panels to the platform. See details in Manage
Interactive Flat Panel .

In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Interactive Flat Panel → Device
Control → Interactive Flat Panel Control .
You can view the online status of interactive flat panels, and perform the following operations as
needed.

Functions Operations
Search Interactive Flat Panel Enter keywords in the search box in the upper
right corner to search the target interactive flat
panels.
View Interactive Flat Panel's Information Click an interactive flat panel to pop up a panel
on the right side, and perform more operations:
● You can view the device information such as

startup/shutdown settings and running

status.
● Also, you can view the applications added on

the current interactive flat panel and manage

applications as needed.

990
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Select one or multiple interactive flat panels and perform the following operations as needed.

Figure 28-1 Interactive Flat Panel Control

Shut Down / Reboot
Remotely shut down or reboot interactive flat panels.
Restore Default
Restore the parameters of interactive flat panels to the default settings.
Set Screen Saver Password
Set the screen saver password for interactive flat panels.
Apply Text Message
Apply the text message to interactive flat panels according to the configured playing method
and times.
Display Popup Message
The text message will display in a popup window on the right side of interactive flat panels.
This method is applicable when there is a large amount of text.
Display Scrolling Message
The text message will scroll on the top of interactive flat panels. This method is applicable
when there is only a small amount of text.
Startup/Shutdown Settings
Set the parameters related to startup or shutdown for interactive flat panels, such as standby
strategy and wakeup strategy. If you enable Timed Startup/Shutdown, you should add startup/
shutdown schedule by configuring startup and/or shutdown time, and repeat mode.

991
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 28-2 Startup/Shutdown Settings

28.2 Manage Applications

You add and manage applications on the platform and apply them to the interactive flat panels.
Before You Start
Make sure you have switched to the Interactive Flat Panel mode. See details in Switch Application
Mode .

992
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Client, select → All Modules → Interactive Flat Panel → Device
Control → Application Management to enter managing applications page.

Figure 28-3 Applications List

2. Add applications.
1) Click Add.
2) Select application(s) to be added from local PC.
3) Click Open to add the selected applications to the platform.
3. Optional: After adding applications, you can perform the following operations.
Edit Application Click on the operation column to edit the version and/or function
introduction of the application.
Apply to Device Select one or more applications, click Apply to open the Apply panel.
You can select all devices or some device(s) to apply the applications to.
Search Enter keywords in the upper right corner to search the target
Application applications.
Sort Applications Sort applications in the list according to the application name, size, and
so on.
Delete Application Select one or more applications, click Delete to delete the selected
application.
Move the mouse cursor to beside Delete, and click Delete All to
delete all the applications in the list.

28.3 Add Emergency Mustering Text Notification

You can add emergency mustering text notifications in the platform by configuring related
parameters, and the added text notifications will be displayed on the interactive plat panels when
the emergency is triggered.
Before You Start
Make sure you have added devices to the platform. For details, refer to Manage Interactive Flat
Panel .

993
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps

Note
For one device, only the latest added text notification can be displayed.
1. In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Interactive Flat Panel →
Emergency Mustering .
2. Click Add to enter the Add Text Notification page.

Figure 28-4 Add Text Notification

3. Set the required parameters, such as text notification name and content.
Text Notification Name
The name of the text notification.
Notification Content
The content of the text notification.
Select Device

994
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Select device(s) in the left list and add them to the right list. The text notification will be
displayed on the selected devices.

Note
Only the latest text notification can be displayed on one device. Therefore, if you select a
device which has already been configured with a text notification, the previous text
notification will be invalid and not display any more.
4. Click Release.

Note
The text notifications is released and will be displayed when the emergency is triggered.
5. Optional: Click View Emergency Mustering Configuration in the upper-right corner to enter the
Emergency Mustering module and view emergency mustering configurations.

Note
For details, refer to Emergency Solution Settings .
6. Optional: Perform the following operations.
View Text Click / to view the added text notifications in the thumbnail mode
Notification in or in the list mode.
List/Thumbnail
Mode
Copy Text Click to enter the adding text notification page. A new text
Notification notification which is of the same content as the original one will be
displayed. You can edit the content before releasing the new text
notification, or click Release to release the current text notification
directly.

Note
If you do not reselect device(s) for the new text notification, the
previous text notification(s) configured on the device(s) will be invalid
and not display any more.

View Device Click to view release details of the text notification on the device.
Release Details
Filter Text Filter text notifications via the following two methods:
Notification ● Enter a keyword in the search field in the upper right corner, and click

to quickly search for the target text notifications.

● Click , and filter text notifications by conditions including modifying
time and sharing property.
Refresh List Click Refresh to refresh the text notification list.

995
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Delete Text Check one or more text notifications, and click Delete to delete the
Notification selected text notifications.

28.4 View Release Records

You can view release records of the tasks (including text message cut-in and emergency mustering
text notification) and the details of their release status.
In the upper-left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Interactive Flat Panel →
Release . You can view release details of all the tasks in the platform, including task name and type,
release time and status (Released or Failed), etc. Also, you can perform more of the following
operations.

Figure 28-5 Release Records

● View Release Details: Click the task name to view release details such as device name and
release progress.
● Delete Task: Check one or multiple tasks, and click Delete to delete the selected tasks.
● Refresh Task List: Click Refresh to refresh the task list.
● Filter Tasks: Click , and set conditions including release time, task type, and release status to
filter tasks.

996
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 29 Skin-Surface Temperature Screening

After adding the temperature screening cameras and access control devices with temperature
screening function to the system, you can view the temperature of the detected persons in the
Skin-Surface Temperature module. The system also shows whether the detected person is wearing
a mask or not. With skin-surface temperature screening and mask detection functions, the system
provides an alert if an individual is running a fever or not wearing a mask.
In the Skin-Surface Temperature module, you can view the real-time and history temperature
screening records and face mask detection records. You can also generate a report about these
records to view the overall information.

Note
The mask detection function will show when the mask related function is turned on in the System
→ Normal → User Preference page. For details, refer to Set User Preference .

29.1 Temperature Screening Configuration

Before temperature screening, you should set temperature screening point groups and add related
temperature screening points to the added groups. Also, for the temperature screening points, you
can configure their parameters including temperature screening threshold and alarm threshold.

29.1.1 Group Temperature Screening Points

You can group multiple temperature screening points for convenient management. For example,
you can group all the temperature screening points on the same floor into a group.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Temperature Screening →
Configuration .
2. Create temperature screening point group(s).
1) Click on the upper left corner of the page.
2) Enter the name for the temperature screening point group as desired.
3) Click Save.
3. Add temperature screening point(s) for the added temperature screening point group.

Note
Temperature screening points can be cameras and access control points that support
temperature screening.
1) Click Add.
2) In the pop-up device list, check temperature screening point(s) as desired.

997
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
You can enter a key word (supports fuzzy search) in the search box to quickly search for the
target device(s).
3) Click Add.
4. Optional: After adding temperature screening point(s), perform following operations.
Delete ● Click to delete single temperature screening point.
● Check multiple temperature screening points, and click Delete to batch
delete the selected devices.
Configure Check one or multiple temperature screening points, and click Configuration
Parameters to configure related parameters for the selected device(s).

Note
For details, refer to Configure Temperature Screening Parameters .

Export Click Export to export detailed information of temperature screening

point(s) such as device type, serial No., and temperature screening threshold
to the local PC.

29.1.2 Configure Temperature Screening Parameters

For the added temperature screening point(s), you can configure the related parameters including
temperature screening threshold and alarm threshold.
Check one or more added temperature screening point(s), and click Configuration to configure
temperature screening parameters.
Temperature Screening Threshold
Set the threshold for temperature screening. When the detected skin-surface temperature is
higher than the threshold, a temperature screening event will be triggered.
Alarm Threshold
Set the threshold for alarm. When the detected skin-surface temperature is higher than the
threshold, an alarm will be triggered.

Note
● The temperature screening threshold should be smaller than alarm threshold.
● For temperature screening points which are access control points, you should configure their
temperature screening parameters on the device parameters configuration page. For details,
refer to Configure Other Parameters .

998
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

29.2 Real-Time Skin-Surface Temperature Monitoring

You can view the latest skin-surface temperature information detected by screening points. If there
are persons whose skin-surface temperatures are abnormal, you will know at the first time.
Besides, you will be able to quickly locate the persons according to the displayed screening point
name and screening group. For unregistered persons, you can quickly register for them.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Temperature Screening → Skin-
Surface Temperature . Select a temperature screening point group on the left. Red number
indicates the number of skin-surface temperature screening points. Black number indicates the
total number of devices in a temperature screening point group.
In the Picture area, the latest captured picture is displayed on the left. When new pictures are
captured and displayed here, old captured pictures will be displayed on the right as thumbnails
with faces, screening point name, person name, similarity, temperature, wearing mask or not, and
detecting time.
Persons with different features will be marked by different colors. Orange means the captured
person is not wearing a mask, but skin-surface temperature is normal; red means the captured
person's skin-surface temperature is abnormal; green means the captured person's skin-surface
temperature is normal and the person is wearing a mask. Click More to jump to the History page to
view more captured pictures.

Figure 29-1 Real-Time Skin-Surface Temperature

When a person's skin-surface temperature exceeds the threshold you set, or the person is not
wearing a mask, an alarm will be triggered. In the Alarm area, the pictures and information of
persons who have triggered alarms are displayed. Following the title Alarm, the alarm amount is

999
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

displayed. See The User Manual of HikCentral Professional Web Client for details about how to set
a temperature threshold.
The person information includes skin-surface temperature, wearing mask or not, registered or
unregistered, temperature screening point name, temperature screening point group name, and
detecting time. You can click Register to register for the person, or click More to go to the History
page to view more alarm information.

29.3 Search History Temperature Screening Data

You can set search conditions such as start time, end time, and skin-surface temperature to search
for history temperature screening data.
Before You Start
Temperature screening data has been generated in real-time skin-surface temperature monitoring.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Temperature Screening →
History .
2. Select a temperature screening point group or a temperature screening point from the list.
3. Click to unfold the Filter panel.
4. Set the search condition(s) including start time, end time, skin-surface temperature, etc.
5. Click Filter.
History temperature screening data that meets the search condition(s) will be displayed below.
6. Optional: For the searched results, perform the following operations as desired.
View Result You can view the detailed information of the searched results, including
Details temperature screening group, temperature screening point, captured time,
person's skin-surface temperature, whether wearing masks, etc.

Note
represents that the person wears a mask, and represents that the
person doesn't wear a mask.

Edit/Register You can edit or register person information based on the different icons.
Person ● : The person is registered. For the registered person, click Edit to edit
Information the person information.
● : The person is unregistered. For the unregistered person, click
Register to enter person's registration information. For details, refer to
Register Person Information .
Export Click Export to export temperature screening data including temperature
screening point, temperature screening point group, temperature status,
etc., in excel file.

1000
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

29.4 Registration
To manage the people who have been screened skin-surface temperature conveniently, you can
register for them by entering their personal information. After registration, you can view and filter
the registered persons' information.

29.4.1 Register Person Information

For unregistered persons displayed on real-time skin-surface temperature page or history page of
skin-surface temperature, you can register for them.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Temperature Screening → Skin-
Surface Temperature (or History).
The skin-surface temperature screening information will be displayed.
2. If a screened person is not registered, you can click Register to enter the Register page to
register for the person.

1001
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 29-2 Register Page

3. Set personal information, including ID, name, phone number, whether from high-risk areas etc.

Note
You can custom the information displayed on this page according to your needs. See Customize
Registration Template for details.
4. Click OK to finish the registration.
Registered persons' information will be displayed on Registration page for a centralized
management. See View Registered Person Information for details.

1002
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

29.4.2 Customize Registration Template

You can set customized person information for registration which are not predefined in the system
according to your actual needs.
Steps

Note
Up to 5 additional items can be added.
1. In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Temperature Screening →
Registration .
2. Click Registration Template to enter the Registration Template page.
3. Click Add.
4. In the Title field, create a name for the additional item.

Note
Up to 32 characters are allowed for the name.
5. Select the format type as general text, number, date or single selection for the additional item.
Example
For example, if you select general text, you need to enter words for this item when registering
person information.
6. Click Save.
7. Optional: Perform one or more of the following operations.
Edit Name Click to edit the name.
Delete Click to delete the additional item.

29.4.3 View Registered Person Information

For the registered persons, you can view their detailed information including person name, ID,
phone, skin-surface temperature, wearing mask or not, etc.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Temperature Screening →
Registration .
You can view person name, ID, phone, skin-surface temperature, wearing mask or not, registering
time and other information in the list.
Click in the Operation column to edit person information as desired.
Click Export on the upper left corner of the page to export and view detailed registered person
information in excel file.

1003
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

29.5 Generate Report

Skin-surface temperature report gives you an overview of skin-surface temperature, mask-wearing
detecting results, and registered person information. Based on the temperature status and mask-
wearing detecting results, you will quickly learn how many person's skin-surface temperatures are
abnormal, and how many persons are not wearing masks. With registered person information, you
can quickly filter persons with abnormal skin-surface temperature or with no mask to learn their
detailed information including name, location, face picture, from high-risk area or not, etc.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Temperature Screening →
Report .
Select a temperature screening point group or temperature screening point, set time range at the
bottom and click Generate Report.

Figure 29-3 Skin-Surface Temperature Report

Temperature Status
Temperature Status gives you the total number of persons whose skin-surface temperatures are
screened and the number of persons with abnormal temperature.
Wearing Mask or Not
It gives you the total number of persons who had been detected whether they are wearing a mask,
and the number of persons wearing no mask.

1004
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Registered Person Information

You can filter persons with abnormal skin-surface temperature or wearing no mask quickly to view
their detailed information. For example, If a person with abnormal skin-surface temperature does
not wear a mask, you need to pay attention to him or her. Based on the temperature screening
point name or temperature screening point group name, you can quickly locate a person.
Click to view a person's detailed information including an enlarged face picture, event details,
and registered information.
Click Export to save the registered person information in your PC as an Excel file.

1005
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 30 Broadcast Management

You can manage the added speaker units in the platform and configure the related functions for
them. For example, you can group multiple speaker units, configure live broadcast, configure
scheduled broadcast, etc.

30.1 Set Basic Settings for Broadcast

You can set locations to save the audio file and live broadcast recording file. Also, you can set
parameters related with live broadcast, including broadcast mode and encoding format.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Speaker Unit → Basic
Settings .
2. In Audio File area, select Local Storage or pStor as the location to save the audio file, and select
the corresponding storage pool.

Note
When selecting pStor as the storage location, make sure you have added pStor to the platform.
For details, refer to Add pStor .
3. In Live Broadcast Recording area, check Live Broadcast Recording.
4. Select Local Storage or pStor as the location to save the recording file, and select the
corresponding storage pool.

Note
When selecting pStor as the storage location, make sure you have added pStor to the platform.
For details, refer to Add pStor .
5. In Live Broadcast Parameters area, select the broadcast mode and the encoding format from the
drop-down list.
Default
The SYS server automatically judges via which method to send the broadcast data to the
speaker unit according to the network domain of the Client (Web Client, Control Client, or
Mobile Client).
Via Streaming Server Proxy
The Client sends the broadcast data to the speaker unit via the streaming server.
Direct Connection
The Client directly sends the broadcast data to the speaker unit.
Via Center Proxy
The Client sends the broadcast data to the speaker unit via the SYS server.

1006
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

6. Click Save to save the above settings.

30.2 Group Speaker Units

You can group multiple speaker units for convenient management. Take the scenario of an
industrial park for example, if there are 10 speaker units on the first floor, you can group all these
speaker units into a group.
Steps
1. On the top navigation bar, select → Integrated Service → Audio Broadcast to enter the audio
broadcast page.
2. On the left navigation pane, click Speaker Unit Group.
3. Create a speaker unit group.
1) Click .
2) Enter the name for the group.
3) Click Add.
4. Add speaker unit(s) to the speaker unit group.
1) Click Add.
2) In the pop-up device list, select speaker unit(s) to be added.
3) Click Add.
5. Optional: Perform the following operations.
View Audio Click to view the audio file(s) of the corresponding speaker unit.
File
Delete Check one or more speaker units to be deleted, and click to delete the
Speaker Unit selected devices.
Adjust Volume Check one or more speaker units, and click Volume to adjust the volume of
live broadcast or alarm-triggered broadcast for the selected devices.

Note
For Hikvision devices, you can only adjust the volume of live broadcast.

30.3 Manage Media Files

You can upload and manage media files to the platform. The uploaded media files can be used for
live broadcast, scheduled broadcast, etc.
Before You Start
Make sure you have saved the media files to be uploaded to your local PC.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Speaker Unit → Media
Library .

1007
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Select a media library (except the root library on the top) from the list, or click to add a new
media library under the root library.
You can view all the media file(s) in the selected media library.
3. Click Add.
4. Select one or more media files from local PC.

Note
The file should be in MP3 or WAV format, and no larger than 10 MB.
5. Click Upload.

Note
You can view the uploading progress and results.
The uploaded media file(s) are displayed in the list.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Add Click Add to add more media files.
Delete Select one or more media files, click Delete to delete the selected files.
Download Click on the Operation column to download the media file to local PC.

30.4 Configure Live Broadcast

You can select the speaker unit(s) and the broadcast mode to configure live broadcast. The
corresponding audio file or the user's voice will broadcast on the speaker unit(s) in real time.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have grouped speaker units. Refer to Group Speaker Units for details.

● Make sure you have added speaker unit(s) to area(s). Refer to Add Speaker Unit to Area for

Current Site for details.

● Make sure you have added media file(s) to the media library. Refer to Manage Media Files for

details.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Speaker Unit → Live
Broadcast and Recording .
2. Select Live Broadcast.
3. Select the online speaker unit(s) for live broadcast.
- Select Group, and select one or more speaker units from speaker unit group(s).

Note
You can click Display Terminals Not Grouped to display the speaker unit(s) that are not
grouped.

1008
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

- Select Area, and select one or more speaker units from the area(s) where the speaker units
are added.
4. Select the Broadcast Mode.
- Check Speak.
- Check Audio File, and select an audio file from the media library.

Note
You can click Download to download and play the selected audio file beforehand to ensure
the audio will be broadcast fluently and correctly.
5. Click Start.
What to do next
Speak to the PC microphone or play the audio file.

30.5 Search for Live Broadcast Records

You can set search conditions including the start time, end time, and the broadcaster to search for
live broadcast records.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have finished live broadcast. Refer to Configure Live Broadcast for details.

● Make sure you have enabled the function of Live Broadcast Recording. For details, refer to Set

Basic Settings for Broadcast .

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Speaker Unit → Live
Broadcast Recording .
2. Set the start time.
3. Set the end time.
4. Select a broadcaster from the drop-down list.
5. Click Search.
You can view the search results on the right side and view the details of each record, including
the broadcaster, the number of the speaker units, the start time, and the file size.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations.
Download Click in the Operation column to download the broadcasted audio.
View Speaker Unit Click to view the speaker unit.

30.6 Add a Scheduled Broadcast Task

You can configure the parameters such as the period type and play mode to add a scheduled
broadcast task in the platform and then apply the task to the speaker unit(s). After that, the audio
file(s) you have selected will be played on the corresponding speaker unit(s) according to the

1009
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

schedule. For the added scheduled broadcast task(s), you can view the task details, search for
target task(s), etc.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have grouped speaker units. Refer to Group Speaker Units for details.

● Make sure you have added speaker unit(s) to area(s). Refer to Add Speaker Unit to Area for

Current Site for details.

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Speaker Unit → Scheduled
Broadcast .
2. Click Add to enter Add Scheduled Broadcast page.
3. Enter the name for the scheduled broadcast task.
4. Select the speaker unit(s) to execute the task.
- Check Group, and select one or more speaker units from speaker unit group(s).
- Check Area, and select one or more speaker units from the area(s) where the speaker units
are added.
5. Configure the Period Type.
- When selecting Every Day, you should set the start date and end date.
- When selecting One Time, you should set the start time.
- When selecting Every Week, you should set the start date, end date, and the repetition day of
the week.
6. Configure the Broadcast Time.
7. Select the Broadcast Priority from the drop-down list.

Note
Broadcast priority ranges from 0 to 15. The larger the number, the higher the priority.
8. Click Add to add the audio file(s) from the media library.

Note
● For the added audio files, you can click or to adjust their playing sequences; click to
delete an audio file.
● For details about adding media files, refer to Manage Media Files .

9. Set Once or Specified Duration as the Play Mode.

Note
When selecting Specified Duration, you should configure the time duration for playing media
file(s).
10. Click Add to save the above settings.
A prompt of selecting the applying method pops up.
11. Apply the task.
- Click Apply Now to apply the task immediately.
- Click Apply Later to apply the task later.

1010
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

12. Optional: Perform the following operations.

View View the details of the added scheduled broadcast task, including the
Details broadcast time, start date and end date, play mode, the number of speaker
units, etc.

Note
You can click to view the names of speaker unit(s) and the media file(s).

Play / ● Click Listen to play the audio of a corresponding scheduled broadcast task.
Stop ● Click Stop to stop playing the audio.
Audio
Apply ● Click Apply All to apply all the tasks to the speaker units.
● Select the tasks to be applied, click Apply All to apply the selected tasks to
the speaker units.

Note
You can view the application process and the results. For the applying failed
tasks, you can view the failure reasons.

Search Enter keywords in the search box in the upper-right corner, and click to
search for the target task(s).
Delete Check one or more tasks, click Delete to delete the selected tasks.

1011
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 31 Security Inspection Management

You can manage the added security inspection devices in the platform and perform the related
operations, such as adding security inspection channels to the area, viewing videos of security
inspection, searching for historical data, etc.

31.1 Configure Security Inspection

You can configure the basic parameters for security inspection.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Smart Security Inspection
→ Basic Settings → Parameter Configuration .
2. Configure the following parameters and click Save.
Match Detected Package with Face(s) Captured Within (sec)
This parameter is for analyzers. When the package is detected, the owner is more likely to be
captured within the configured time range.
Absence Alarm Interval (sec)
Set the interval to upload the absence alarm information.
Abnormal Skin-Surface Temperature Threshold (℃)
Set the abnormal skin-surface temperature threshold. An alarm will be triggered if a person's
skin-surface temperature above the threshold is detected.
Event Retention Duration
Select the duration that the event information can be saved for.
Real-Time Alarm Configuration
Select the prohibited article(s) for package detection, the behavior type(s) for behavior
analysis, and the alarm type(s) for metal detection.

31.2 Add Security Inspection Channels to Area

You can add security inspection channels and link security inspection devices to them for live view
and playback.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Smart Security Inspection
→ Basic Settings → Security Inspection Channel Management .
2. Select an area from the area list.
3. Click Add to enter the Add Security Inspection Channel page.
4. Enter the channel name and description.

1012
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Optional: In the Linkage Device field, select one security inspection device in the available list
and click .

Note
If you do not link a device to the channel, live view and playback are not available via this
channel.
The device will be displayed in the added list.
6. Click Add.

31.3 View Videos of Security Inspection

During live view and playback of the videos streamed from analyzers, you can view the marked out
articles of the checked package, package information, and package owner. For those of walk-
through metal detectors, you can view the information of the checked people.

Note
Make sure you have added security inspection channels and linked devices with them. See details
in Add Security Inspection Channels to Area .

In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Smart Security Inspection →
Security Inspection Visualization .
Select a security inspection device and click Live View or Playback.

Note
In the top right corner of the Live View or Playback page, you can click to set video parameters.

1013
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Live View

Figure 31-1 Live View

Move the mouse cursor to the lower edge of the live view window and perform more operations.

Icon Function Description

Capture Take a snapshot of the current
video.
Start Recording Start recording the video.
Enable Audio Turn off/​on the sound and
adjust the volume.
Enable Video Enhancement Adjust the video image
including brightness,
saturation, contrast, and hue.
Stream Switch Switch the video stream to
main stream, sub-stream (if
supported), or smooth stream
(if supported).
Instant Playback Switch to instant playback
mode to view the recorded
videos.

1014
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Icon Function Description

Turn on Alarm Output Turn on/​off the alarm outputs
linked with the camera.
Start Two-Way Audio Start two-way audio to realize
voice talk with the person at
the device.

Playback

Figure 31-2 Playback

Move the cursor to the lower edge of the playback window and perform more operations.

Icon Function Description

Capture Take a snapshot of the current
video.
Clip Clip the video files for current
playback.
Enable Audio Turn off/​on the sound and
adjust the volume.
Open Digital Zoom Zoom in/out the video.
Show Stream Information Display the stream information
in the video image.

1015
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Icon Function Description

Enable Video Enhancement Adjust the video image
including brightness,
saturation, contrast, and hue.
Stream Switch Switch the video stream to
main stream, sub-stream (if
supported), or smooth stream
(if supported).
Fisheye Expansion Correct the video image and
reverse the effects of
geometric distortions caused
by fisheye camera lens.

Note
This function is available only
for fisheye cameras.

Add a Tag Add a tag to the video file to

mark a time point.
Add a Lock Lock a video segment to
protect it from being deleted or
being overwritten when the
HDD is full.
Counterclockwise Rotate Counterclockwise rotate the
video image.
Start Two-Way Audio Start two-way audio to realize
voice talk with the person at
the device.

31.4 Historical Data Search

You can search for the historical data of security inspection, including package detection records,
metal detection records, and inspector absence records.

31.4.1 Search for Package Detection Records

You can set search conditions, including time, article type, and location, to search for the package
detection records.

1016
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Smart Security Inspection
→ Historical Data Search → Package Detection Record Search .
2. Select a period of time from the drop-down list.
3. In the Article Type field, select one or multiple prohibited or normal articles.
4. In the Location field, select one or multiple channels from the list.
5. Click Search.
The matched records will be displayed.

Note
You can view the event details by clicking the event time.

Figure 31-3 Search for Package Detection Records

31.4.2 Search for Metal Detection Records

You can set the search conditions, including time and location, to search for the metal detection
records.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Smart Security Inspection
→ Historical Data Search → Metal Detection Record Search .

1017
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Select a period of time from the drop-down list.

3. In the Location field, select one or multiple channels from the list.
4. Click Search.
The matched records will be displayed.

Figure 31-4 Search for Metal Detection Records

31.4.3 Search for Absence Records

You can set the search conditions, including time and location, to search for the absence records.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Smart Security Inspection
→ Historical Data Search → Absence Record Search .
2. Select a period of time from the drop-down list.
3. In the Location field, select one or multiple channels from the list.
4. Click Search.
The matched records will be displayed.

1018
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 31-5 Search for Absence Records

31.5 Generate Package Detection Report

You can generate a package detection report based on the package detection records, percentage
of packages with prohibited articles, or prohibited article types. You can also export the report to
the local PC.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Smart Security Inspection
→ Statistics and Reports → Package Detection Report .
2. In the Type field, select Package Detection Records, Percentage of Packages with Prohibited
Articles, or Prohibited Article Types.
3. In the Location field, select one or multiple channels from the list.
4. Select a report type and a specific time period.
5. Click Generate Report.
6. Optional: Click Export to export the report to the local PC.

31.6 Generate People Inspection Report

You can generate a people inspection report based on the number of checked persons or
percentage of metal detection alarms. You can also export the report to the local PC.
Steps
1. In the top left corner of the Home page, select → All Modules → Smart Security Inspection
→ Statistics and Reports → People Inspection Report .
2. In the Type field, select Number of Checked Persons or Percentage of Metal Detection Alarms.
3. In the Location field, select one or multiple channels from the list.

1019
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

4. Select a report type and a specific time period.

5. Click Generate Report.
6. Optional: Click Export to export the report to the local PC.

1020
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 32 Emergency Mustering

The emergency mustering helps users get prepared to account for all staff in a quick and efficient
manner in an emergency situation, such as a fire.
You can configure an emergency solution beforehand and start a roll call by one click. In an
emergency, the users can:
● Conduct a roll call with real-time data.

● Get immediate access to personal contact information.

● Filter persons based on status (In, Out & Not Check In, Checked In, and Unknown)

Based on the information provided by the platform, users can rescue persons who are still in the
place.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Emergency Mustering →
Emergency Solution Settings .
Click Guidance to and configure the emergency solution following the guidance.

Figure 32-1 Entrance Point List

1021
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 32-2 Guidance for Setting Emergency Solution

32.1 Emergency Solution Settings

An emergency solution refers to the preparation settings before a roll call. The emergency solution
includes the settings of entrance points, exit points, mustering points, doors remaining unlocked in
an emergency, emergency counting groups, and emergency mustering programs and text
notifications. After setting the emergency solution, users can start a roll call by one click once an
emergency happens.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Emergency Mustering →
Emergency Solution Settings . Configure the following items according to your needs.

1022
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

1. Add Entrance Points

Figure 32-3 Entrance Point List

An entrance point is the card reader by which persons authenticate to check in before entering a
place. If a person authenticates by an entrance point, the person's status is In.
Click besides All Areas and select an area. Click Add and select card readers to set them as
entrance points of the area.
You can check card readers and click Delete to cancel setting them as entrance points, or click →
Delete All to cancel setting all card readers as entrance points. You can also enter a card reader
name on the top right to search for it.

Note
● Make sure you have added the card reader to the platform before selecting the entrance points.
● To delete the entrance points, you should end the emergency first.

1023
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

2. Add Exit Points

Figure 32-4 Exit Point List

An exit point is the card reader by which persons authenticate for exiting from a place. If a person
authenticates by an exit point, the person's status is Out.
Click besides All Areas and select an area. Click Add and select card readers to set them as exit
points in the area.
You can check card readers and click Delete to cancel setting them as exit points, or click →
Delete All to cancel setting all card readers as exit points. You can also enter a card reader name on
the top right to search for it.

Note
● Make sure you have added the card reader to the platform before selecting the exit points.
● To delete the exit points, you should end the emergency first.

3. Add Mustering Points

Figure 32-5 Mustering Point List

A mustering point is the card reader located in a refuge. When an emergency happens, persons
exit from the place where they are, go to the refuge, and check in by the mustering point. The
status of persons who have checked in at the mustering point is Out & Checked In.
Click besides All Areas and select an area. Click Add and select card readers to set them as
mustering points in the area.

1024
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

You can check card readers and click Delete to cancel setting them as mustering points, or click
→ Delete All to cancel setting all card readers as mustering points. You can also enter a card reader
name on the top right to search for it.

Note
● Make sure you have added the card reader to the platform before selecting the mustering
points.
● To delete the mustering points, you should end the emergency first.

4. Add Doors Remaining Unlocked in Emergency

Figure 32-6 Doors Remaining Unlocked in Emergency

A door remaining unlocked in an emergency refers to the door that will be turned to the status of
Remain Unlocked once an emergency happens. Thus the persons inside the place can exit from the
place without authentication at the card reader.
Click besides All Areas and select an area. Click Add and select doors to set them as doors
remaining unlocked in an emergency in the area.
You can check doors and click Delete to delete them, or click → Delete All to delete all doors.
You can also enter a door name on the top right to search for it.

Note
● Make sure you have added the door to the platform before selecting the doors.
● To delete the doors, you should end the emergency first.

1025
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

5. Add Emergency Counting Groups

Figure 32-7 The Emergency Counting Group

An emergency counting group refers to a person group based on which you can know how many
persons are in, out, or out & checked in when the platform is in an emergency.
Click to open the Add Emergency Counting Group pane. Enter a name for the group and click
to add persons to the group. Click Add to add more persons to the group after adding the group.

Note
Make sure you have added the persons to the platform beforehand.

You can perform the following operations.

● Click besides the 1 Day(s) Before to update the persons in the group.
● Click a person name to view person details.

● Select a group and click to delete it, or click → Delete All to all groups.
● Check persons and click Delete to remove the selected persons from the group, or click →
Delete All to remove all the persons from the group.

6. Release Emergency Mustering Notification

You can configure emergency mustering programs and emergency text notifications for
catastrophic event (e.g., fire and robbery). Emergency mustering programs or emergency
mustering text notifications will be displayed on the digital signal terminals when an emergency is
triggered, to help people receive timely emergency alerts and be out of danger as soon as possible
when an emergency happens;

1026
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 32-8 Emergency Mustering Notification

1. Click Configure on the right to configure emergency mustering programs or text notifications.

Note
You can switch application modes between Digital Signage and Interactive Flat Panel. See
details in Switch Application Mode .
2. Emergency Mustering Program: Click Normal → to enter the Create Programs page. Enter the
program name, screen size and sharing property and select an area as needed. Click Next to
select a program template. Then you can configure more parameters of this program and click
Release to release the program.
Emergency Text Notification: Click Text Notification → to enter the Create Text Notification
page. Enter the text notification name, sharing property, and notification content and select an
area and devices as needed. Click Release to release the text notification.
3. When the emergency alarm is triggered, the normal transmissions will be interrupted and the
screen will switch to the released emergency mustering programs or text notifications
throughout the emergency; when it is no longer in emergency status, the normal transmission
will be back.

Note
If you manually turn off emergency or delete the device from the platform, the emergency
mustering programs or text notifications will not be played.

1027
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

32.2 Start a Roll Call

After configuring the emergency solution, you can start a roll call by one click once an emergency
happens.
In the top left corner of Home page, select → All Modules → Emergency Mustering → Roll
Call . Click Trigger Emergency to display the data of emergency counting groups.

Figure 32-9 Data of Emergency Mustering

On the top left, the total number of persons in emergency counting groups is displayed. On the
right of the total number of persons, the number of persons in danger and safe are both displayed.
The persons in danger refer to persons who are still inside (checked in at the entrance point but did
not check out at the exit point) the place where the emergency happens and the persons who did
not check in at the entrance point. The persons who are safe refer to persons who have checked
out at the exit point but not checked in at the mustering point and persons who have checked in at
the mustering point.
The data of each emergency counting group is also displayed. You can click a group name to enter
the page of the group for details. Click to check in a person who shows at the mustering point
but the person status is not Checked In.

1028
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 32-10 Data of an Emergency Counting Group

The virtual counting group refers to a group consisting of persons who are not added to any
emergency counting group.
Perform the following operations if you need.
● Click Turn Off Emergency to end the emergency status of the platform.

● Click Send All Reports and select an email template to send the data of all the emergency

counting groups to the recipients.

Note
● It is extremely important to remember that the data displayed and the reports contained in the
email can only ever be accurate if all users follow the conventions of the system.
● During the emergency, editing the emergency solution is not allowed. You should end the
emergency before editing it.

1029
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Chapter 33 Patrol Management

The system provides the service for patrol management, with which you can create patrol routes
and arrange patrol persons to perform the patrols (by checking in at the patrol points offline)
according to the shift schedules. You can monitor the patrol online in real time to conveniently
know whether exceptions occur during patrols, and view and export patrol-related events records /
statistics.
On the Web Client, you can set patrol points, patrol person groups, patrol schedule templates,
patrol routes, etc., perform real-time monitoring, and search for patrol-related events records /
statistics.
The Patrol Overview page shows the wizard for the Patrol Management module, and Today's Patrol
Route Statistics (including Patrol Shift Status Statistics and Patrol Route Status Statistics).

Figure 33-1 Patrol Overview

Patrol Shift Status Statistics (Today's Patrol Route Statistics)

You can view the total number of patrol routes which have shift(s) for the current day, and the
numbers of patrol routes with different patrol shift status. You can also click the total number to
switch to the Real-Time Monitoring page, or click to export the chart in PDF, PNG, or JPG format.
On Patrol
Shows the number of patrol routes of which the earliest shift has started/ended and the last
shift is not ended.
Ended
Shows the number of patrol routes of which all the shifts for the current day have ended.
Not Started
Shows the number of patrol routes of which the earliest shift has not started.

1030
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Patrol Route Status Statistics (Today's Patrol Route Statistics)

You can view the percentages of patrol routes with different status (omitted patrol, supplemented
patrol, etc.). You can also click to export the chart in PDF, PNG, or JPG format.
Omitted Patrol
Indicates that the patrol is not performed within the scheduled time period.
Supplemented Patrol
Indicates that the patrol is performed after the scheduled time period.
Late Patrol
Indicates that within one patrol shift, the patrol is first performed before the scheduled time
period, and then performed again after the scheduled time period.
Early Patrol
Indicates that the patrol is performed before the scheduled time period.
Substitute Patrol
Indicates that the actual patrol person who performed the patrol is not the planned patrol
person.
Normal Patrol
Indicates that the patrol is performed within the scheduled time period by the planned patrol
persons.

33.1 Flow Chart of Patrol Management

The flow chart below shows the process of configuring and managing patrols.

1031
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 33-2 Flow Chart of Patrol Management

Table 33-1 Flow Chart Description

Step Description
Add Related Device(s) Add devices used for adding patrol points, real-
time monitoring, etc. See Manage Access
Control Device and Manage Encoding Device
for details.
Add Patrol Points Before you create a patrol route and start a
patrol, you need to add patrol points. You can
set access points as patrol points, or generate
QR codes to be patrol points. The patrol
persons have to check in at the patrol points to
perform the patrol. See Add Patrol Points for
details.
Add Patrol Person Group(s) Before adding a patrol route, you can select
persons to form a patrol person group and set
their patrol mode. See Add Patrol Person Group
for details.

1032
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Step Description
Add Patrol Schedule Template(s) You need to set the schedule template first in
order to schedule a patrol. See Add Patrol
Schedule Template for details.
Complete Basic Configurations To manage patrols, you need to set the
parameters according to your needs. You can
set the exception types for patrol persons to
report, storage location of attachments, time
for advance notification, and detection interval
at which the server detects patrol route status.
See Basic Configurations for Patrol
Management for details.
Add Patrol Route(s) Set the route name, patrol person / patrol
person group, patrol schedule, patrol duration,
patrol point, patrol pattern, shift schedule, etc.,
to form a complete patrol route. See Add Patrol
Route for details.
Real-Time Monitoring Monitor the patrol status in real time via map
or list, to conveniently know whether an
exception occurs during the patrol, which helps
handling the exception in time. See Real-Time
Patrol Monitoring for details.
Search for Event Records Search for and export patrol-related event
records including patrol events and exception
reporting. See Search for Patrol-Related Event
Records for details.
Check Patrol Statistics Filter, check, and export patrol statistics by
patrol route, patrol point, and patrol person.
See Check Patrol Statistics for details.

33.2 Basic Configurations for Patrol Management

To manage patrols, you need to set the parameters according to your needs. You can set the
exception types for patrol persons to report, storage location of attachments, time for advance
notification, and detection interval at which the server detects patrol route status.

1033
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

33.2.1 Add Exception Types for Patrol Management

You can add exception types for patrol persons to select from when they need to report exceptions
via Mobile Client during patrols.
Before You Start
Make sure you have configuration permissions for patrol management.
Steps
1. On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Patrol → Basic Configuration →
Exception Type .
2. On the top left of the page, click Add.

Figure 33-3 Add Exception Type

3. Enter a name for the exception type.
4. Optional: Enter the remark for the exception type.
5. Click Add.
The added exception type will be displayed on the exception type list.
6. Optional: Perform the following operations according to your needs.
Edit an Exception In the Operation column, click to edit the name and remark of the
Type exception type.
Delete Exception Select the exception types to be deleted and click Delete on the top
Type(s) left of the page.

33.2.2 Set Parameters for Patrol Management

You can set parameters including Local Storage Configuration, Notification Time, and Detection
Frequency to manage patrols and patrol-related attachment storage.

Note
Make sure you have configuration permissions for patrol management.

1034
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

1. On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Patrol → Basic Configuration →
Parameter Configuration .

Figure 33-4 Parameter Configuration

2. Configure the following parameters according to your needs.
Local Storage Configuration
Configure the Storage Location for the attachments in exception reporting.
Notification Time
When the notification is enabled, patrol persons will receive notifications of the relevant
patrol information via Mobile Client before patrols start. After it is enabled, you can edit the
time by which the notification is advanced.
Detection Frequency
Set the Detection Interval at which the server detects the patrol route status.

33.3 Add Patrol Points

Before you create a patrol route and start a patrol, you need to add patrol points. You can set
access points as patrol points, or generate QR codes to be patrol points. The patrol persons have to
check in at the patrol points to perform the patrol.

1035
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Before You Start

Make sure you have configuration permissions for patrol management and permissions for related
resources.
Steps
1. 1. On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Patrol → Patrol Management
→ Patrol Point .
2. On the top left of the page, click Add.

Figure 33-5 Add Patrol Point

3. Select the patrol point type and add patrol points of either type according to your needs.
- Add Patrol Points of Access Point Type:
Select Access Point as the Patrol Point Type, click Add, select card readers, and click Add to
add the patrol points to the list. Click Add again to add more patrol points to the list.

Note
● Only one patrol point will be added for each card reader.

● The patrol point name is generated automatically based on the resource name. You can edit

the name if required.

- Add Patrol Points of QR Code Type:
Select QR Code as the Patrol Point Type, click Add, and enter the name for the patrol point to
add the patrol point to the list. Click Add again to add more patrol points to the list.
4. Click Link and select camera(s) to link to the patrol point.

Note
No more than 4 cameras can be linked to each patrol point.
5. Optional: Click Delete All to delete all patrol points, or click to delete one patrol point.
6. Click Save.
The added patrol points will be displayed on the patrol point list.
7. Perform the following operations according to your needs.
Filter Patrol Points On the top right of the page, click , set the conditions (patrol
point name, patrol point type, linked cameras, resource, and area)
according to your needs, and click Filter.
Delete Patrol Points Select the patrol points to be deleted and click Delete.

1036
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Edit a Patrol Point Click the name of a patrol point to enter the patrol point
information page. You can edit the patrol point name and linked
cameras.
View Thumbnails of In the Linked Camera(s) column, click to view the thumbnails of
Camera Views the latest views of the linked cameras.
View/Download the QR For a patrol point of QR code type, click in the Patrol Point Type
Code of a Patrol Point column to view and download the QR code.

33.4 Add Patrol Person Group

You can select persons to form a patrol person group and set a patrol mode for the group.
Before You Start
Make sure you have configuration permissions for patrol management and permissions to access
the related person groups.
Steps
1. On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Patrol → Patrol Management →
Patrol Person Group .
2. Click Add.

Note
If you have already added a patrol person group before, click on the top left of the page to
add another one.

Figure 33-6 Add Patrol Person Group

3. Enter a name for the patrol person group.
4. Select a patrol mode.
Any Person in the Group
The patrol at a patrol point is performed when any person in the group checks in at the patrol
point.
All Persons in the Group

1037
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

The patrol at a patrol point is performed when all persons in the group check in at the patrol
point.
5. Click to select persons to form the patrol person group.

Note
● No more than 100 persons can be selected for one patrol person group.

● You can also skip this step for now and add persons to the patrol person group later.

6. Optional: Enter remarks for the patrol person group.

7. Click Save.

Note
No more than 300 patrol person groups can be created for a system.
The added patrol person groups will be displayed on the left pane.
8. Optional: Perform the following operations according to your needs.
Edit a Patrol Person On the left pane, select a patrol person group and click on the top
Group to open the Edit Patrol Person Group pane. You can edit the name,
patrol mode, person(s), and remarks of the group accordingly.
Delete Patrol Person On the left pane, select a patrol person group and click on the top
Groups to delete the selected group. Click → Delete All to delete all patrol
person groups.
Search for Patrol On the left pane, enter keyword(s) in the search box to search for
Person Groups patrol person groups.
Add Persons to a Select a patrol person group and click Add to add patrol persons to the
Patrol Person Group patrol person group.
Search for Persons Select a patrol person group and enter keyword(s) in the upper-right
in a Patrol Person search box to search for patrol persons in the patrol person group.
Group
Delete Persons from Select a patrol person group, select the patrol persons to be deleted,
a Patrol Person and click Delete. You can also click → Delete All to delete all patrol
Group persons from the group.

33.5 Add Patrol Schedule Template

You need to set the schedule template first in order to schedule a patrol.
Before You Start
Make sure you have configuration permissions for patrol management.

1038
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Steps
1. On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Patrol → Patrol Management →
Schedule Template .
2. Click Add Schedule Template.

Note
If you have already added a schedule template before, click on the top left of the page to add
another one.

Figure 33-7 Add Schedule Template

3. Enter a name for the schedule template.
4. Set a validity period for the schedule template.
5. Choose a repeat cycle for patrol scheduling.
Every Day
Patrols will be scheduled for each day of the set time period.
Every Week
Patrols will be scheduled on the selected days of every week within the set time period.
Every Month
Patrols will be scheduled on the selected dates of every month within the set time period.
6. Click Add.
The added schedule templates will be displayed on the left pane.
7. Optional: Perform the following operations according to your needs.
Edit a Schedule Select a schedule template and edit its configuration accordingly,
Template including the name, time range, and repeat cycle.
Delete a Schedule Select a schedule template and click Delete.
Template

1039
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
Schedule templates cannot be deleted if being linked with shift
schedules of a patrol route.

Search for Schedule On the left pane, enter keyword(s) in the search box to search for
Templates schedule templates.

33.6 Add Patrol Route

To start a patrol, you need to create a patrol route. Set the patrol point(s), patrol pattern, patrol
duration, and shift schedule(s) to form a complete patrol route.
Before You Start
● Make sure you have configuration permissions for patrol management and permissions to access

the related patrol points and person groups.

● Make sure you have already added patrol points and patrol schedule templates to the system.

For details about adding patrol points, see Add Patrol Points . For details about adding patrol
schedule templates, see Add Patrol Schedule Template .
Steps
1. On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Patrol → Patrol Management →
Patrol Route .
2. Click Add Route.
3. Enter a name for the patrol route.
4. Optional: Enter remarks for the route.
5. Click Add to open the patrol route configuration page.

Note
If you have already added a patrol route before, click Save to proceed.

1040
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 33-8 Patrol Route Configuration Page

6. Select the patrol point(s) that the patrol persons need to patrol on a route, and click Next.

Note
● If a patrol point has not been added to a map, you can click Add Patrol Point to Map and drag

it onto a map.
● You can click and to rearrange the patrol list order as needed.
7. Set the patrol pattern for the route.

Note
The patrol pattern is In Order by default. Click Switch Patrol Pattern to switch to another pattern
from the list.
In Order
Patrol according to the order in the patrol list.
No Order
Patrol the patrol points on the route in no particular order.
First Point First and Last Point Last
Patrol the first patrol point on the patrol list at first and the last point on the list at last.
First Point First
Patrol the first patrol point on the patrol list at first.
Last Point Last
Patrol the last patrol point on the patrol list at last.
8. Set the total patrol duration (in minutes) for the patrol route.

1041
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

9. Set the time error and interval for patrolling the patrol points, and click Next.

Note
Time error and interval settings are for patrols of the "In Order" patrol pattern only.
Time Error
The time error allowed to pass a patrol point during actual patrol.
You can set a common time error for all patrol points, or set the time error for each patrol
point individually by entering values in the table cells or the textboxes that appear when
hovering over the Rule Preview pane.
Interval
The time interval of patrolling the current patrol point and the previous one.
You can set a common interval for all adjacent patrol points, or set each interval individually
by entering values in the table cells or the textboxes that appear when hovering over the Rule
Preview pane.

Note
The sum of all patrol intervals should be less than the set total duration of the patrol route.
10. Click Add Shift Schedule.
11. Configure the parameters for adding a shift schedule.
Name
Enter a name for the shift schedule.
Copied From
If you have already added at least one shift schedule to the patrol route, you can select a
shift schedule from the drop-down list to replicate its settings for schedule template and
patrol person / patrol person group selection.
Schedule Template
Select a schedule template from the drop-down list.
Patrol Start Time
Set a start time for the patrol.

Note
The patrol time periods of shift schedules cannot overlap with one another.
Patrol Person or Patrol Person Group
Select persons or select an added patrol person group for the shift schedule. For details
about adding patrol person groups, see Add Patrol Person Group .
12. Click Add.

1042
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Note
● If needed, click Add Shift Schedule again and repeat the step above to continue adding shift

schedules. No more than 8 shift schedules can be added for a patrol route.
● You can edit an added shift schedule and delete one or delete all shift schedules according to

your needs. The editing of a shift schedule will be applied to the route according to the time
range and repeat cycle in the selected schedule template.
13. Click Finish to complete the patrol route configuration.
14. Optional: Perform the following operations according to your needs.
Switch Display On the top right of the page, click to view the added patrol routes in
Mode for calendar mode, or click to view them in list mode. For the calendar
Patrol Routes mode, you can switch among day, week, and month views.
Filter Patrol On the top right of the page, click , set the conditions (route name,
Routes patrol points, persons, patrol person groups, schedule templates, patrol
route status, and time range) according to your needs, and click Filter.
View Route Click the name of a route to enter its route details page. You can view
Details information such as patrol points, patrol pattern, patrol duration, and
shift schedules configured for the route. You can also view maps to
which the patrol points of the route are being added.
Edit a Patrol Click the name of a patrol route, and click Edit Route on the top right of
Route the page to enter the route configuration page. You can edit the route
settings such as patrol points, patrol pattern, patrol duration, and shift
schedules.
Disable Patrol Select the routes to be disabled and click Disable Route.
Routes
Enable Patrol Select the routes to be enabled and click Enable Route.
Routes
Delete Patrol Select the routes to be deleted and click Delete.
Routes

33.7 Real-Time Patrol Monitoring

You can monitor the patrol status in real time via map or list, to conveniently know whether an
exception occurs during the patrol, which helps handling the exception in time.

Note
Make sure you have the operation permission for patrol monitoring.

1043
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Patrol → Real-Time Monitoring . On
the patrol monitoring page, you can view the real-time status of patrol routes and information
about real-time events related to the patrols.

Figure 33-9 Real-Time Monitoring Page

Patrol Route Status

The real-time status of all enabled patrol routes with shifts scheduled for the current day are
displayed by default. You can filter the routes by clicking on the top right of the page and setting
the filter criteria (e.g., patrol route, patrol point, patrol person / patrol person group, route status,
event type, and time range).
Information such as the route name, patrol person / patrol person group, scheduled time period
for each shift, and a list of patrol points are displayed for each patrol route. The shift schedule
status (e.g., ended, on patrol, and not started) and patrol point status (e.g., omitted patrol /
exception reported, early patrol, late patrol, substitute patrol, supplemented patrol, normal patrol,
and not patrolled) are indicated with different colors with respect to the legends on the top of the
page.
You can click a patrol point already being patrolled to view its status and the related patrol event
information. You can also hover over a shift to view its status and detailed information. If needed,
you can manually start or postpone a shift not started yet by selecting the shift schedule and
clicking Start Now or Postpone respectively.
For patrol routes with patrol points that have been added to maps, you can also click Show Map to
switch to monitoring the patrol status in real time via maps.

1044
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Real-Time Event
The patrol monitoring page also supports showing information about real-time patrol-related
events (e.g., patrol events and exception reporting), including the patrol person information (e.g.,
profile picture, name, ID), event information (e.g., event type, event status), patrol information
(e.g., patrol point, patrol route, shift schedule, scheduled/actual patrol time, and planned/actual
patrol person), and related video/picture files and attachments.

Note
The actual information displayed may vary depending on the event type and patrol status.

You can filter the real-time events by event type and view details about each event by clicking in
the Operation column.

33.8 Search for Patrol-Related Event Records

You can search for and export patrol-related event records, including patrol events and exception
reporting.
Before You Start
Make sure you have the operation permission for patrol search.
Steps
1. On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Patrol → Search → Event Record
Search .

Figure 33-10 Event Record Search

2. Set the search conditions.
Time
Select from Today, Yesterday, Current Week, Last 7 Days, and Last 30 Days, or set a custom
time interval of no more than 31 days.
Patrol Point
By default, all patrol points are selected. Click to select certain patrol point(s) to filter the
search results.

1045
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Patrol Route
By default, all patrol routes are selected. Click to select certain patrol route(s) to filter the
search results.
Event Type
By default, all patrol-related event records will be searched. Select Patrol Event or Exception
Reporting from the drop-down list to search for the specified type of event records only.
Search By
Choose whether to search for the event records by Person or ID.
● Search by person: In the Search In field, choose whether to search by person selections or

fuzzy matching of persons' names.

● Search by ID: Enter the card No. in the search box.

3. Click Search.
The matched records will be shown on the right side of the page.
4. Optional: Perform the following operations according to your needs.
View Details of In the Operation column of an event record, click to view detailed
an Event information about the record.
Record ● For a patrol event, you can view the event information (e.g., patrol

status), patrol information (e.g., patrol point, patrol route, shift schedule,
scheduled/actual patrol time, and planned/actual patrol person)
depending on the patrol status, and videos/pictures related to the patrol.
● For an exception reporting, you can view the event information (e.g.,

exception type and description), patrol information (e.g., patrol point,

patrol route, and patrol person), and the file(s) attached to this exception
reporting.
Export an In the Operation column of an event record, click to export the record.
Event Record
Export All On the top right of the result page, click Export to export all matched
Matched Event results. You can choose whether to export in XLSX format or CSV format,
Records and whether to export the event records with picture.

33.9 Check Patrol Statistics

You can filter, check, and export patrol statistics by patrol route, patrol point, and patrol person.

Note
Make sure you have the operation permission for patrol search.

On the top left of the Web Client, select → All Modules → Patrol → Search → Patrol Statistics
to enter the patrol statistics page.

1046
 HikCentral Professional Web Client User Manual

Figure 33-11 Patrol Statistics Page

You can select the type of patrol statistics to be displayed from Patrol Route, Patrol Point, and
Patrol Person, and filter the results by specifying a time range. Information such as the number of
shift schedules, number of patrols of a certain status (e.g. normal patrol, early patrol, late patrol,
omitted patrol, supplemented patrol, and substitute patrol), and the percentage of each status will
be displayed in a table. If needed, you can export the patrol statistics in either XLSX format or CSV
format.
You can click the name of a patrol route, patrol point, or patrol person to view detailed information
about each patrol in a list, including the patrol status, scheduled start time, actual start time,
scheduled and actual patrol duration, shift schedule, and the person who performed the patrol.
You can filter the patrol records by status and export the statistics in either XLSX format or CSV
format.

1047
UD30953B